INTERnt, FZ !1 H I LOCI n LEED Reference Guide for Green Interior Design and Construction Fort! 2009 Edition EFTA00281516 LEED® 2009 for Commercial Interiors Total Possible Points** 110* Sustainable Sites 21 Water Efficiency 11 Energy & Atmosphere 37 0 Materials & Resources 14 Indoor Environmental Quality 17 'Out of a possible 100 points + 10 bonus points "Certified 40+ points, Silver 50+ points, Gold 6O+ pants, Platinum 804- points • Innovation in Oesign 6 O Regional Priority 4 800.795.1747 USGBC.org SBN 978 -932444- 8-6 90000 9 781932 4 4 4 1 8 6 EFTA00281517 flUME FEORA ME C The built environment has a profound impact on our natural environment, economy, health, and productivity. Breakthroughs in building science, technology, and operations are now available to designers, builders, operators, and owners who want to build green and maximize both economic and environmental performance. Through the LEEDtgreen building certification program, the U.S. Green Building Council (USGBC) is transforming the built environment The green building movement offers an unprecedented opportunity to respond to the most important challenges of our time, including global climate change, dependence on non sustainable and expensive sources of energy, and threats to human health. The work of innovative building professionals is a fundamental driving force in the green building moment. Such leadership is a critical component to achieving USGBC's mission of a sustainable built environment for all within a generation. USGBC MEMBERSHIP USGBC's greatest strength is the diversity of our membership. USGBC is a balanced, consensusbased nonprofit with more than 18,000 member companies and organizations representing the entire building industry. Since its inception in 1993, USGBC has played a vital role in providing a leadership forum and a unique, integrating force for the building industry. USGBC's programs have three distinguishing characteristics: Committee-based The heart of this effective coalition is our committee structure, in which volunteer members design strategies that are implemented by staff and expert consultants. Our committees provide a forum for members to resolve differences, build alliances, and forge cooperative solutions for influencing change in all sectors of the building industry. Member-driven Membership is open andbalancedand provides a comprehensive platform forcarryingout important programs and activities. We target the issues identified by our members as the highest priority. We conduct an annual review of achievements that allows us to set policy, revise strategies, and devise work plans based on members' needs. Consensus-focused We work together to promote green buildings, and in doing so, we help foster greater economic vitality and environmental health at lower costs. We work to bridge ideological gaps between industry segments and develop balanced policies that benefit the entire industry. Contact the U.S. Green Building Council moll-Street, NW Suite Soo Washington, DC 20036 www.usgbc.org 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION EFTA00281518 COPYRIGHT Copyright sci 2009 by the U.S. Green Building Council. MI rights reserved. The U.S. Green Building Council, Inc. (USGBC) devoted significant time and resources to create this LEED ®Reference Guide for Green Interior Design and Construction, 2009 Edition. USGBC authorizes individual use of the Reference Guide. In exchange for this authorization, the user agrees: (t) to retain all copyright and other proprietary notices contained in the Reference Guide, (2) not to sell or modify the Reference Guide, and C3) not to reproduce, display, or distribute the Reference Guide in any way for any public or commercial purpose, including display on a website or in a networked environment. Unauthorized use of the Reference Guide violates copyright, trademark, and other laws and is prohibited. The text of the federal and state codes, regulations, voluntary standards, etc., reproduced in the Reference Guide is used under license to USGBC or, in some instances, in the public domain. MI other text, graphics, layout, and other elements of content in the Reference Guide are owned by USGBC and are protected by copyright under both United States and foreign laws. NOTE: for downloads of the Reference Guide: Redistributing the Reference Guide on the intemet or otherwise is STRICTLY prohibited even if offered free of charge. DOWNLOADS OF THE REFERENCE GUIDE MAY NOT BE COPIED OR DISTRIBUTED. THE USER OF THE REFERENCE GUIDE MAY NOT ALTER, REDISTRIBUTE, UPLOAD OR PUBLISH THIS REFERENCE GUIDE IN WHOLE OR IN PART, AND HAS NO RIGHT TO LEND OR SELL THE DOWNLOAD OR COPIES OF THE DOWNLOAD TO OTHER PERSONS. DISCLAIMER None of the parties involved in the funding or creation of the Reference Guide, including the USGBC, its members, its contractors, or the United States government, assume any liability or responsibility to the user or any third parties for the accuracy, completeness, or use of or reliance on any information contained In the Reference Guide, or for any injuries, losses, or damages (including, without limitation, equitable relief) arising from such use or reliance. Although the information contained in the Reference Guide is believed to be reliable and accurate, all materials set forth within are provided without warranties ofany kind,eitherexpress orimplied,includingbut not limited to warranties of the accuracy or completeness of information contained in the training or the suitability of the information for any particular purpose. As a condition of use, the user covenants not to sue and agrees to waive and release the U.S. Green Building Council, its members, its contractors, and the United States government from any and all claims, demands, and causes of action for any injuries, losses, or damages (including, without limitation, equitable relief) that the user may now or hereafter have a right to assert against such parties as a result of the use of, or reliance on, the Reference Guide. U.S. Green Building Council 2101 L Street, NW Suite 500 Washington, DC 20036 II LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281519 TRADEMARK LEED° is a registered trademark of the U.S. Green Building Council. LEED Reference Guide for Green Interior Design and Construction For the Design, Construction and Renovation of Commercial and Institutional Interiors Projects 2009 Edition ISBN # 978-t-932444-15-5 ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The LEED Reference Guide for Green Interior Design and Construction, 2009 Edition, has been made possible only through the efforts of many dedicated volunteers, staff members, and others in the USGBC community. The Reference Guide drafting was managed and implemented by USGBC staff and consultants and included review and suggestions by many Technical Advisory Group (TAG) members.We especiallyextend our deepestgratitude to all ofour LEED committee members who participated in the development of this guide, for their tireless volunteer efforts and constant support of USGBC's mission: LEED Steering Committee Scot Horst, Chair, LSC Joel Ann Todd, Vice-Chair, LSC Muscoe Martin Stuart Carron Holley Henderson Christine Magar Kristin Shewfelt Jessica Millman Bryna Dunn Neal Billetdeaux Greg Kats Mark Webster Bob Thompson Malcolm Lewis John Boecker Sara O'Mara Alex Zimmerman Ian Theaker Sustainable Sites TAG Bryna Dunn, Chair Stewart Comstock, Vice-Chair Michele Adams Gina Baker Ted Bardacke Stephen Benz Mark Brumbaugh Laura Case Zach Christeson Jay Enck Ron Hand Horst, Inc Joel Ann Todd M2 Architecture JohnsonDiversey, Inc. H2 Ecodesign, LLC Greenform Architectural Energy Corporation Agora DC Moseley Architects JJR Managing Good Energies Simpson Gumpertz & Heger EPA Indoor Environment Management Branch Constructive Technologies Group, Inc. 7Group Choate Construction Company Rep Canada Green Building Council Rep Canada Green Building Council Moseley Architects Maryland Department of the Environment Cahill Associates Burt Hill Global Green USA Sasaki Brumbaugh SE Associates Emory University Campus Services the HOK Planning Group Commissioning Sc Green Building Services EfFECT. Sustainable Design Solutions 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION iii EFTA00281520 Richard Heinisch Michael Lane Marita Roos ZoIna Russell Alfred Vick Water Efficiency TAG Neal Billetdeaux, Chair John Koeller,Vice-Chair , David Carlson Bill Hoffman Geoff Nara Stephanie Tanner Daniel Yeh David Bracciano Robert Rubin Winston Huff Robert Benazzi Gunnar Baldwin Heather Kinkade Shabbir Rawalpindiwala Bill Wall Energy and Atmosphere TAG Greg Kats, Chair Marcus Sheffer, Vice-Chair Drury Crawley Jay Enck Ellen Franconi Mark Frankel Nathan Gauthier Rusty Hodapp John Hogan Bion Howard Dan Katzenberger Bob Maddox Brenda Morawa Erik Ring Michael Rosenberg Mick Schwedler Cord Shymko Gail Stranske Michael Zimmer Materials and Resources TAG Mark Webster, Chair Steven Baer, Vice-chair Paul Bertram Chris Dixon Ann Edminster Acuity Lighting Group Lighting Design Lab HNTB Hord Coplan Macht, Inc. Ecos Environmental Design, Inc. DR Alliance for Water Efficiency Columbia University H.W. Hoffman and Associates, LLC Civil & Environmental Consultants U.S. Environmental Protection Agency University of South Florida Tampa Bay Water NCSU-BAE and McKim & Creed SSR Engineers Jaros Baum & Bolles TOTO USA, INC Forgotten Rain, LLC Kohler Company Clivus New England, Inc. GoodEnergies 7group US Department of Energy Commissioning & Green Building Solutions, Inc. IPMVP and AEC New Buildings Institute Harvard Green Campus Initiative Dallas/Fort Worth, Energy & Transportation Management City of Seattle Department of Planning & Development Building Environmental Science and Technology Engineering, Energy, and the Environment Sterling Planet BVM Engineering, Inc. LPA, Inc. Oregon Department of Energy Trane I PMVP and G.P. Shymko & Associates CTG Energetics Thompson Hine LLP Simpson Gumpertz & Heger Inc. Five Winds International NAIMA NBBJ Design AVEnues Iv LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281521 Lee Gros Theresa Hogerheide-Reusch Nadav Malin Nancy Malone Kirsten Ritchie Wayne Trusty Denise Van Valkenburg Gabe Wing Indoor Environmental Quality TAG Bob Thompson, Chair Steve Taylor, Vice-Chair Nancy Clanton Alexis Kurtz George Loisos Prasad Vaidya Daniel Bruck David Lubman Charles Salter Ozgem Omelctekin Jude Anders Brian Cloward Larry Dylchuis Francis (Bud) Offerman Christopher Schaffner Dennis Stanke Lee Gros Architect and Artisan, Inc Reusch Design Services BuildingGreen, LLC. Siegel & Strain Architects Gensler Athena Sustainable Materials Institute MASCO Retail Cabinet Group Herman Miller, Inc. EPA Indoor Environment Management Branch Taylor Engineering Clanton and Associates OveArup 8cPartners Loisos+ Ubelohde The Weidt Group BRC Acoustics 8c Tech. David Lubman 8cAssociates Salter Associates DMJM Harris Shoreline Concepts, LLC MithunArchitects+Designers+Planners Herman Miller, Inc Indoor Environmental Engineering The Green Engineer Trane Company This edition of the reference guide builds on the work of those who helped create previous versions: LEED for Commercial Interiors Version 2.0 Core Committee Penny Bonda Keith Winn Gina Baker Kirsten Childs Holley Henderson, Chair Don Horn Scot Horst Liana Kallivoka Jill Kowalski Fran Mazarella Roger McFarland Denise Van Valkenburg, Vice Chair Ken Wilson Elaine Aye Carlie Bullock-Jones Rico Cedro Hellen Kessler Mehran Khazra Environmental Communications Catalyst Partners Burt Hill Kosar Rittelmann Associates Craton Collaborative Architects,.. H2 Ecodesign, LLC U.S. General Services Administration Horst, Inc Austin Energy Green Building Program EwingCole U.S. General Services Administration HOK Steelcase Inc. Envision Design Green Building Services Thompson, Ventulett, Stainback 8c Associates ICrueck & Sexton HJICessler Associates, Inc Guttmann & Blaevoet Consulting Engineer 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION EFTA00281522 Laurie McMahon Cassidy & Pinkard Colliers Ralph Muehliesen Illinois Institute of Technology Georgina Sikorsld INVISTA A special thanks to USGBC staff for their invaluable efforts in developing this LEED Reference Guide especially Sonia Punjabi for her technical expertise and extraordinary commitment, Lauren Riggs for her dedication and hard work, and Brendan Owens and Peter Templeton for their vision and guidance. vl LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2O09 EDITION EFTA00281523 Preface Introduction xi I. Why Make Your Building Green? xi II. LEED° Green Building Rating System' xi III. Overview and Process xiii IV. LEED Online Documentation Requirements xvi V. Certification Application xvi i VI. Certification Strategy xviii VII. Exemplary Performance Strategies xix VIII. Regional Priority xix IX. Tools for Registered Projects xx X. How to Use This Reference Guide xx Sustainable Sites (SS) 1 Credit 1 Site Selection 5 Credit 1 Option 1: Select A LEED-Certified Building 8 Credit 1 Option 2, Path 1: Brownfield Redevelopment 10 Credit 1 Option 2, Path 2: Stormwater Design—Quantity Control 13 Credit 1 Option 2, Path 3: Stormwater Design—Quality Control 18 Credit 1 Option 2, Path 4: Heat Island Effect—Nonroof 21 Credit 1 Option 2, Path 5: Heat Island Effect—Roof 27 Credit 1 Option 2, Path 6: Light Pollution Reduction 32 Credit 1 Option 2, Path 7: Water Efficient Landscaping—Reduce by 50% 35 Credit 1 Option 2, Path 8: Water Efficient Landscaping—No Potable Water Use or No Irrigation 35 Credit 1 Option 2, Path 9: Innovative Wastewater Technologies 44 Credit 1 Option 2, Path 10: Water Use Reduction-30% Reduction 54 Credit 1 Option 2, Path 11: On-site Renewable Energy 59 Credit 1 Option 2, Path 12: Other Quantifiable Environmental Performance 66 Credit 2 Development Density and Community Connectivity 69 Credit 3.1 Alternative Transportation—Public Transportation Access 79 Credit 3.2 Alternative Transportation—Bicycle Storage and Changing Rooms 85 Credit 3.3 Alternative Transportation—Parking Availability 91 Water Efficiency (WE) 97 Prerequisite 1 Water Use Reduction 99 Credit 1 Water Use Reduction 111 Energy and Atmosphere (EA) 115 Prerequisite 1 Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems 119 Prerequisite 2 Minimum Energy Performance 137 Prerequisite 3 Fundamental Refrigerant Management 147 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION vii EFTA00281524 Credit 1.1 Optimize Energy Performance—Lighting Power 153 Credit 1.2 Optimize Energy Performance—Lighting Controls 161 Credit 1.3 Optimize Energy Performance—HVAC 165 Credit 1.4 Optimize Energy Performance—Equipment and Appliances 177 Credit 2 Enhanced Commissioning 183 Credit 3 Measurement and Verification 187 Credit 4 Green Power 197 Materials and Resources (MR) 207 Prerequisite 1 Storage and Collection of Recyclables 211 Credit 1.1 Tenant Space—Long-Term Commitment 217 Credit 1.2 Building Reuse—Maintain Interior Nonstructural Components 221 Credit 2 Construction Waste Management 227 Credit 3.1 Materials Reuse 233 Credit 3.2 Materials Reuse—Furniture and Furnishings 239 Credit 4 Recycled Content 243 Credit 5 Regional Materials 253 Credit 6 Rapidly Renewable Materials 259 Credit 7 Certified Wood 267 Indoor Environmental Quality (IEQ) 277 Prerequisite 1 Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance 281 Prerequisite 2 Environmental Tobacco Smoke (ETS) Control 291 Credit 1 Outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring 297 Credit 2 Increased Ventilation 305 Credit 3.1 Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan—During Construction 315 Credit 3.2 Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan—Before Occupancy 323 Credit 4.1 Low-Emitting Materials—Adhesives and Sealants 331 Credit 4.2 Low-Emitting Materials—Paints and Coatings 337 Credit 4.3 Low-Emitting Materials—Flooring Systems 343 Credit 4.4 Low-Emitting Materials—Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products 349 Credit 4.5 Low-Emitting Materials—Systems Furniture and Seating 353 Credit 5 Indoor Chemical and Pollutant Source Control 359 Credit 6.1 Controllability of Systems—Lighting 367 Credit 6.2 Controllability of Systems—Thermal Comfort 373 Credit 7.1 Thermal Comfort—Design 379 Credit 7.2 Thermal Comfort—Verification 387 Credit 8.1 Daylight and Views— Daylight 393 Credit 8.2 Daylight and Views—Views for Seated Spaces 407 Innovation in Design (ID) 415 Credit 1 Innovation in Design 417 Credit 2 LEED,' Accredited Professional 421 vill LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 20u9 EFTA00281525 Regional Priority (RP) 425 Credit 1 Regional Priority 427 Glossary 429 LEED 2009 for Commercial Interiors 100 base points; 6 possible Innovation in Design and 4 Regional Priority points Certified 40-49 points Silver 50-59 points Gold 60-79 points Platinum 80 points and above 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION Ix EFTA00281526 x LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2O09 EDITION EFTA00281527 Hri I. WHY MAKE YOUR BUILDING GREEN? r't .,.._„., The environmental impact of the building design, construction, and operations industry is enormous. Buildings annually consume more than30% of the total energy and more than 60%of the electricity used in the United States. In z006, the commercial building sector produced more than 1 billion metric tons of carbon dioxide, an increase of more than 30% over 1990 levels.' Each day s billion gallons of potable water are used solely to flush toilets. Atypical North American commercial building generates about 1.6 pounds of solid waste per employee per day; in a building with 1,500 employees, that can amount to 300 tons of waste per year. Development alters land from natural, biologically diverse habitats to hardscape that is impervious and devoid of biodiversity. The farreaching influence of the built environment necessitates action to reduce its impact. Green building practices can substantially reduce or eliminate negative environmental impacts through high-performance, market-leading design, construction, and operations practices. As an added benefit, green operations and management reduce operating costs, enhance building marketability, increase workers' productivity, and reduce potential liability resulting from indoor air quality problems. Examples abound. Energy efficiency measures have reduced operating expenses of the Denver Dry Goods building by approximately $75,000 per year. Students in day-lit schools in North Carolina consistently score higher on tests than students in schools using conventional lighting fixtures. Studies of workers in green buildings reported productivity gains of up to t6%, including less absenteeism and higher work quality, based on "people-friendly" green design. Karges Faulconbridge, Inc., renovated a former grocery store for its new headquarters and diverted 88% of the construction waste from landfills through reuse and recycling. The largest high-rise real estate project in Sacramento, the Joe Sema Jr. Environmental Protection Agency Headquarters Building (Cal/EPA), was able to save $610,000 a year by implementing energy efficiency measures, making it 34% more energy efficient than required by California's 1998 energy code. In short, green design, construction, and operations have environmental, economic, and social elements that benefit all building stakeholders, including owners, occupants, and the general public. II. LEED°GREEN BUILDING RATING SYSTEM Background on LEED"' Following the formation of the U.S. Green Building Council (USGBC) in 1993, the organization's members quickly realized that the sustainable building industry needed a system to define and measure "green buildings." USGBC began to research existing green building metrics and rating systems. Less than a year after formation, the members acted on the initial findings by establishing a committee to focus solely on this topic. The composition of the committee was diverse; it included architects, real estate agents, a building owner, a lawyer, an environmentalist, and industry representatives. This cross section of people and professions added a richness and depth both to the process and to the ultimate product. The first LEED Pilot Project Program, also referred to as LEED Version 1.0, was launched at the USGBC Membership Summit in August 1998. After extensive modifications, LEED Green Building 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION xi EFTA00281528 Rating System Version z.o was released in March z000, with LEED Version 2.1 following in zooz and LEED Version 2.2 following in zoos. As LEED has evolved and matured, the program has undertaken new initiatives. In addition to a rating system specifically devoted to building operational and maintenance issues (LEED for Existing Buildings: Operations & Maintenance), LEED addresses the different project development and delivery processes that exist in the U.S. building design and construction market, through rating systems for specific building typologies, sectors, and project scopes: LEED for Core & Shell, LEED for New Construction, LEED for Schools, LEED for Neighborhood Development, LEED for Retail, LEED for Healthcare, LEED for Homes, and LEED for Commercial Interiors. Projectteams interact withthe Green BuildingCertification Institute (GBCI) forprojectregistration and certification. GBCI was established in 2008 as a separately incorporated entitywith the support of the U.S. Green Building Council. GBCI administers credentialing and certification programs related to green building practice. These programs support the application of proven strategies for increasing and measuring the performance of buildings and communities as defined by industry systems such as LEED. The green building field is growing and changing daily. New technologies and products are being introducedintothe marketplace, and innovative designs andpractices areprovingtheireffectiveness. The LEED rating systems and reference guides will evolve as well. Project teams must comply with the version of the rating system that is current at the time of their registration. USGBC will highlight new developments on its website on a continual basis at www.usgbc.org. Features of LEED The LEED Green Building Rating Systems are voluntary, consensus-based, and market-driven. Based on existing and proven technology, they evaluate environmental performance from a wholebuilding perspective over a building's life cycle, providing a definitive standard for what constitutes a green building in design, construction, and operation. The LEED rating systems are designed for rating new and existing commercial, institutional, and residential buildings. They are based on accepted energy and environmental principles and strike a balance between known, established practices and emerging concepts. Each rating system is organized into 5 environmental categories: Sustainable Sites, Water Efficiency, Energy and Atmosphere, Materials and Resources, and Indoor Environmental Quality. An additional category, Innovation in Design, addresses sustainable building expertise as well as design measures not covered under the 5 environmental categories. Regional bonus points are another feature of LEED and acknowledge the importance of local conditions in determining best environmental design and construction practices. The LEED Credit Weightings In LEED 2009, the allocation of points between credits is based on the potential environmental impacts and human benefits of each credit with respect to a set of impact categories. The impacts are defined as the environmental or human effect of the design, construction, operation, and maintenance ofthebuilding,such asgreenhousegas emissions,fossilfuel use,toxins and carcinogens, air and water pollutants, indoor environmental conditions. A combination of approaches, including energy modeling, life-cycle assessment, and transportation analysis, is used to quantify each type of impact. The resulting allocation of points among credits is called credit weighting. LEED 2009 uses the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency's TRACI' environmental impact categories as the basis for weighting each credit TRACI was developed to assist with impact evaluation for life-cycle assessment, industrial ecology, process design, and pollution prevention. xi' LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281529 LEED 2009 also takes into consideration the weightings developed by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST); these compare impact categories with one another and assign a relative weight to each. Together, the 2 approaches provide a solid foundation for determining the point value of each credit in LEED 2009. The LEED 2009 credit weightings process is based on the following parameters, which maintain consistency and usability across rating systems: ■ MI LEED credits are worth a minimum of r point. ■ MI LEED credits are positive, whole numbers; there are no fractions or negative values. ■ All LEED credits receive asingle,static weight in each rating system; there are no individualized scorecards based on project location. ■ MI LEED rating systems have 100 base points; Innovation in Design (or Operations) and Regional Priority credits provide opportunities for up tole) bonus points. Given the above criteria, the LEED 2009 credit weightings process involves 3 steps: 1. A reference building is used to estimate the environmental impacts in 13 categories associated with a typical building pursuing LEED certification. 2. The relative importance ofbuilding impacts in each category are set to reflect values based on the NISTweightings.4 3. Data that quantify building impacts on environmental and human health are used to assign points to individual credits. Each credit is allocated points based on the relative importance of the building-related impacts that it addresses. The result is a weighted average that combines building impacts and the relative value of the impact categories. Credits that most directly address the most important impacts are given the greatest weight, subject to the system design parameters described above. Credit weights also reflect a decision by LEED to recognize the market implications of point allocation. The result is a significant change in allocation of points compared with previous LEED rating systems. Overall, the changes increase the relative emphasis on the reduction of energy consumption and greenhouse gas emissions associated with building systems, transportation, the embodied energy of water, the embodied energy of materials, and where applicable, solid waste. The details of the weightings process vary slightly among individual rating systems. For example, LEED for Existing Buildings: includes credits related to solid waste management but LEED for New Construction does not. This results in a difference in the portion of the environmental footprint addressed by each rating system and the relative allocation of points. The weightings process for each rating system is fully documented in a weightings workbook. The credit weightings process will be reevaluated over time to incorporate changes in values ascribed to different building impacts and building types,based on both market reality and evolving scientific knowledge related to buildings. A complete explanation of the LEED credit weightings system is available on the USGBC website, at www.usgbc.org. III. OVERVIEW AND PROCESS The LEED Green Building Rating System for Commercial Interiors is a set of performance standards for certifying the design and construction of commercial or institutional buildings and high-rise residential buildings of all sizes, both public and private. The intent is to promote healthful, durable, affordable, and environmentally sound practices in tenant space design and construction. 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION xill EFTA00281530 Prerequisites and credits in the LEED Green Building Rating Systems address 7 topics: ■ Sustainable Sites (SS) ■ Water Efficiency (WE) ■ Energy and Atmosphere (EA) ■ Materials and Resources (MR) ■ Indoor Environmental Quality (IEQ) ■ Innovation in Design (ID) ■ Regional Priority (RP) LEED prerequisites and credits have identical structures; see Section X of this Introduction. When to Use LEED for Commercial Interiors LEED for Commercial Interiors addresses the specifics of tenant spaces primarily in office, retail, and institutional buildings. Tenants who lease their space or do not occupy the entire building are eligible. LEED for Commercial Interiors was designed to work hand-in-hand with the LEED for Core &Shell certification system. LEED for Core & Shell is used by developers to certify the core and shell of a project; it prepares the building for environmentally conscious tenants. Many projects clearly fit the defined scope of only' LEED rating system; others may be eligible fora or more. The project is a viable candidate for LEED certification if it can meet all prerequisites and achieve the minimum points required in a given rating system. If more than t rating system applies, the project team can decide which to pursue. For assistance in choosing the most appropriate LEED rating system, please e-mail leedinfo@usgbc.org. Minimum Program Requirements A project must adhere to LEED's Minimum Program Requirements (MPRs), or possess minimum characteristics in order to be eligible for certification under LEED 2009. These requirements define the categories of buildings that the LEED rating systems were designed to evaluate, and taken together serve three goals: (1) give clearguidance to customers, (a) protect the integrity ofthe LEED program, and (3) reduce challenges that occur during the LEED certification process. The MPRs will evolve over time in tandem with the LEED rating systems. In order to be eligible for certification under any LEED 2009 Rating System, projects must comply with each associated M PR. The MPRs can be found in the LEED 2009 Rating Systems. In addition,definitions and more extensive guidance on certain issues are provided in a separate document, titled Supplemental Guidance, available on the USGBC website. The Green Building Certification Institute (GBCI) reserves the right to revoke LEED certification from any LEED 2009 project upon gaining knowledge of non-compliance with any applicable MPRs. If such a circumstance occurs, no registration or certification fees paid to GBCI will be refunded. NOTE: ExceptionstoalltheMPRswillbeconsideredon acase-by-casebasisforspecialcircumstances. Direction on the nature of allowable exceptions is given in the Supplemental Guidance document. Registration Project teams interested in earning LEED for Commercial Interiors certification for their buildings must first register the project with GBCI. Projects can be registered on the GBCI website (www.gbci. orgy. The website also has information on registration costs for USGBC national members as well zlv LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281531 as nonmembers. Registration is an important step that establishes contact with GBCI and provides access to software tools, errata, critical communications, and other essential information. LEED-Online LEED-Online is the primary resource for managing the LEED documentation process. From LEEDOnline, project teams can manage project details, complete documentation requirements for LEED credits and prerequisites, upload supporting files, submit applications for review, receive reviewer feedback, and ultimately earn LEE!) certification. LEED-Online provides a common space where members of a project team can work togetherto document compliance with the LEED rating system. MI project teams pursuing LEED certification are required to use LEED-Online and its submittal documentation paths. LEED submittals are instrumental in demonstrating credit compliance becausetheycontain all the documentation requirements foreach LEED credit. Additionally, LEEDOnline contains embedded calculators and tables to ensure that the submittal package delivered to GBCI is complete and accurate. LEED-Online also features several support capabilities. It enables team members to view and submit credit interpretation requests, contact customer service, generate project-specific reports, and consult supplementary LEED resources, such as FAQs, tutorials, offline calculators, and sample documentation. Applicants with multiple projects will have access to reporting tools that use data from projects across their entire LEED portfolio. LEED certificates for successful projects are also issued through using LEED-Online. Credit Interpretation Requests and Rulings In some cases, a LEED project team may encounter challenges when interpreting the requirements of a prerequisite or credit for their project, perhaps because the reference guide does not sufficiently address aspecific issue ora conflict requires resolution. Toaddress such issues,acredit interpretation ruling process has been established for each LEED rating system. See the GECI website for more information, at www.gbci.org. Credit interpretation requests must be submittedonline. Provide a brief but clear description of the challenge encountered, refer to the prerequisite or credit information found in the rating system and reference guide, and emphasize the intent of the prerequisite or credit If possible, the project team should offer potential solutions to the problem or a proposed interpretation. Follow the detailed instructions in LEED-Online. Communications related to credit interpretation requests will be in electronic format. Review and Certification To earn LEED for Commercial Interiors certification, the applicant project must satisfy all the prerequisites and credits worth the minimum number of points to warrant the desired project rating. Projects must comply with the version of the rating system that is current in LEED-Online at the time of project registration. Appeals Appeals may be filed after the design phase review, the construction phase review, or the full application review. Please see the GBCI website for more information on appeals. Fees Information on certification fees can be found on the GBCI website. GBCI will acknowledge receipt of the application and proceed with application review when all project documentation 2O09 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION xv EFTA00281532 and payments have been received and processed. Registration fees, appeal review fees, and any additional fees required to expedite LEED certification are not refundable. Updates and Addenda This is the first edition of the LEED Reference Guide for Green Building Interior Design and Construction, 2009. As LEED for Commercial Interiors continues to improve and evolve, updates and addenda will be made available. USGBC cannot be held liable for any criteria set forth herein that may not be applicable to later versions of LEED rating systems, and GBCI reserves the right to modify its policies from time to time.. Updates and addenda will be accumulated between revisions and will be formally incorporated in major revisions. In the interim, between major revisions, USGBC may issue updates or addenda to clarify criteria. The prerequisites, credits, amendments and addenda current at the time of project registration will continue to guide the project throughout its certification process Information Privacy and Policy Guidelines For more information on the privacy policy of the U.S. Green Building Counil, Inc. (USGBC), refer to the Policies and Guidelines section of the USGBC website, at www.usgbc.org. With the support of its members, volunteers, and other stakeholders, USGBC is the developer of the LEED rating systems. Green Building Certification Institute, Inc. (GBCI) implements the LEED rating systems and carries out credentialing programs relating to LEED. For more information on the privacy policy of GBCI including the privacy policy on documentation submitted through LEED-Online, refer to the Policies and Guidelines section of the GBCI website, at www.gbci.org. Projects whose information should be treated as confidential may select this option during registration; project confidentiality status may be changed at any time through LEED-Online. Please review the GBCI privacy policy for further details. IV. LEED-ONLINE DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS All LEED for Commercial Interiors certification applications must include the required LEEDOnline documentation: general documentation requirements, documentation requirements for all prerequisites, and documentation requirements for all pursued credits. General Requirements LEED certification application requires the submission of an overall project narrative with the completed LEED-Online documentation requirements. The project narrative describes the applicant's organization, building, site, and team. This narrative helps the LEED review team understand the major elements of the project and building performance, and it also aids in highlighting projects in future communications efforts. General documentation also requires the basic details pertaining to project site conditions, construction scope and timeline, occupant and usage data, and project team identification. Project teams must address all the elements in the general documentation requirements, providing details and clarifications where appropriate, and they may include any optional elements that are helpful in describing the project. Credit Substitution The LEED 2009 rating systems do not allow credit substitution using another version. Currently registered LEED projects that want to use LEED 2009 credits need to switch to the new version in entirety. USGBC expects that most projects will find this switch feasible and advantageous. zvl LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281533 V. CERTIFICATION APPLICATION earn LEED certification, the applicant project must satisfy all the prerequisites and qualify for a minimum number of points to attain the established project ratings as listed below. Having satisfied the basic prerequisites ofthe program, applicant projects are then rated according to their degree of compliance within the rating system. After registration, the project design team should begin to collect information and perform calculations to satisfy the prerequisite and credit documentation requirements. Because documentation should be gathered throughout design and construction, it is helpful to designate a LEED team leader who will be responsible for managing its compilation. LEED for Commercial Interiors provides the option of splitting a certification application into two phases, design and construction, in lieu of a combined design and construction review. Documentation for design phase credits, identified in LEED-Online, can be submitted for review at the end of the design phase; the submittals for these credits can be fully evaluated based on documentation available during this phase of the project. For example, if a project site meets the requirements of LEED for Commercial Interiors SS Credit 3.1, Alternative Transportation—Public Transportation Access, the likelihood of credit achievement can be assessed prior to the completion of construction. The LEED credit itself, however, is not awarded at the design review stage. Design Phase Review Each project is allotted a design phase review that consists of a preliminary design phase review and a final design phase review. GBCI formally rules on the design phase application by designating each attempted credit as either anticipated or denied. Participating in a design phase review does not guarantee award of any credit and will not result in LEED certification. This process enables project teams to assess the likelihood of credit achievement and requires follow-through to ensure the design is executed in the construction phase according to design specifications. Construction Phase Review At the completion of construction, the project team submits all attempted credits for review, including any newly attempted design credits. If the project team has had a design phase review and any of the design phase anticipated credits have since changed, additional documentation must be submitted to substantiate continued compliance with credit requirements. Upon receipt of the full certification application and fee, a final review will be conducted. All applicant-verified design phase credits that were designated as anticipated and have not changed since the design phase review will be declared as awarded. All other credits will be designated as either awarded or denied. Project teams should refer to LEED-Online and the rating system scorecards to get information on credits that can be submitted for design phase review and credits that must be submitted for construction phase review. LEED for Commercial Interiors certifications are awarded according to the following scale: Certified 40-49 points Silver 50-59 points Gold 60-79 points Platinum 80 points and above GBCI recognizes buildings that achieve t of the rating levels with a formal letter of certification. 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION xvii EFTA00281534 VI. CERTIFICATION STRATEGY Timeline and Project Design Phases Project teams should study the principles and objectives of LEED as early in the site selection and design process as possible. The project design phases mentioned throughout this reference guide correspond to the architectural design and planning steps commonly used in the construction industry: r. Predesign entails gathering information, recognizing stakeholders' needs, and establishing project goals. 2. Schematic design explores several design options and alternatives, with the intent of establishing an agreed-upon project layout and scope ofwork. 3. Design development begins the process of spatial refinement and usually involves the first design of a project's energy systems. 4. Construction documents carry the design into the level of details for all spaces and systems and materials so that construction can take place. 5. Construction. 6. Substantial completion is a contractual benchmark that usually corresponds to the point at which a client could occupy a nearly completed space. 7. Final completion. 8. Certificate of occupancy is the official recognition by a local building department that a building conforms to applicable building and safety codes. Related Credits When pursuing LEED certification, it is important to consider how credits are interconnected and how their synergies and trade-offs will ultimately affect both the project and the other credits the team may consider pursuing. Consult the Related Credits section of each prerequisite and credit to help inform design and construction decisions leading to certification. Consistent Documentation across Credits Several kinds of project information are required for consistent LEED documentation across various credits. If the number of full-time employees (PTEs) is used in one credit, it should be used consistently throughout all credits. LEED-Online contains many features specifically designed to assist project teams with this process. Pay special attention to overlapping project data; doing so will help the application and review process go smoothly. Operations and Maintenance in LEED for Commercial Interiors The LEED Reference Guide for Green Building Interior Design and Construction contains information on operations and maintenance to help project teams streamline green= practices once the LEED design and construction project has been completed. Although not required as part of the LEED certification process, upfront planning for green operations and maintenance can help building owners, operators, and maintenance staff ensure that the commercial interiors space continues to operate in a sustainable manner. xvIll LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281535 VII. EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE STRATEGIES Exemplary performance strategies result in performance that greatly exceeds the performance level or expands the scope required by an existing LEED for Commercial Interiors credit. To earn exemplary performance credits, teams must meet the performance level defined by the next step in the threshold progression. For credits with more than 1 compliance path, an Innovation in Design point can be earned by satisfying more than 1 compliance path if their benefits are additive. See the Innovation in Design credit section for further details. The credits for which exemplary performance points are available through expanded performance are noted throughout this reference guide and in LEED-Online by the logo shown below. The list for exemplary performance points available is as follows: Sustainable Sites SS Credit 1 SS Credit 3 Site Selection Alternative Transportation Water Efficiency WE Credit 1 Water Use Reduction Energy and Atmosphere EA Credit 1 Optimize Energy Performance EA Credit 4 Green Power Materials and Resources MR Credit 1.2 MR Credit 2 MR Credit 3 MR Credit 4 MR Credit 5 MR Credit 6 MR Credit 7 Building Reuse—Maintain Interior Nonstructural Components Construction Waste Management Materials Reuse Recycled Content Regional Materials Rapidly Renewable Materials Certified Wood Indoor Environmental Quality IEQ Credit 8.2 Daylight and Views—Views for Seated Spaces VIII. REGIONAL PRIORITY To provide incentive to address geographically specific environmental issues, USGBC regional councils and chapters have identified 6 credits per rating system that are of particular importance to specific areas. Each Regional Priority credit is worth an additional t point, and a total of 4 additional points may be earned by achieving Regional Priority credits, with t point earned per credit. Upon project registration, LEED-Online automatically determines a project's Regional Priority credits based on its zip code. If the project achieves more than 4 Regional Priority credits, the team can choose the credits for which these points will apply. The USGBC website also contains a searchable database of Regional Priority credits. 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION xix EFTA00281536 IX. TOOLS FOR REGISTERED PROJECTS LEED offers additional resources for LEED project teams on the USGBC website, at www.usgks. orgfprojecttools. The Registered Projects Tools website provides resources for starting the project, including rating system errata, documentation requirements, and referenced industry standards. Also consult the website for the following: Declarant definitions and other definitions. This resource describes the team members who are required to sign off on certain documentation requirements and indicates the prerequisites and credits for which each team member is responsible. The required declarant is noted in the corresponding credit documentation section of LEED-Online. Licensed Professional Exemption Form. The Licensed Professional Exemption Form can be used by a project team's registered professional engineer, registered architect, or registered landscape architect as a streamlined path to certain credits, bypassing otherwise-required submittals. This form is used in conjunction with the declarations in LEED-Online to document any exemptions. The form is required for any eligible submittal requirements the project team wishes to waive; the exemption is invalid without a properly executed Licensed Professional Exemption Form. Licensed Professional Exemptions are noted in the corresponding credit documentation section of LEEDOnline. X. HOW TO USE THIS REFERENCE GUIDE The LEED Reference Guide for Green Building Interior Design and Construction is a supporting document to the LEED for Commercial Interiors Rating System. The guide helps project teams understand the criteria,the reasons behind them,strategiesfor implementation,and documentation requirements. It includes examples of strategies that can be used in each category, case studies of buildings that have implemented these strategies successfully, and additional resources. It does not provide an exhaustive list of strategies for meeting the criteria or all the information that a project team needs to determine the applicability of a credit to the project. Rating System Pages The rating system, published in its entirety on the USGBC website, is imbedded in this reference guide. Each prerequisite and credit discussion begins with a gray page that mirrors the rating systems' Intent and Requirements. This Reference guide addresses the Intents and Requirements for the LEED zoo9 Commercial Interiors Rating System. The Potential Technologies and Strategies included in the rating systems are not explicitly called out in the reference guide, refer to the published rating systems as desired. Prerequisite and Credit Format Each prerequisite or credit is organized in a standardized format for simplicity and quick reference. The first section summarizes the main points regarding the green measure and includes the intent, requirements, required submittals for certification, and a summary of any referenced industry standard. Subsequent sections provide supporting information to help interpret the measure and offer links to resources and examples. The sections for each credit are described in the following Paragraphs. Intent identifies the main sustainability goal or benefit of the prerequisite or credit. Requirements specifies the criteria that satisfy the prerequisite or credit and the number of points available. The prerequisites must be achieved; the credits are optional, but each contributes to the overall project score. Some credits have 2 or more paths with cumulative points. Other credits have xx LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2O09 EDITION EFTA00281537 several options from which the project team must choose. For example, Energy & Atmosphere Credit 1, Optimize Energy Efficiency Performance, has 3 options, but a project can apply for only t, depending on the type of building. Benefits and Issues to Consider addresses the environmental benefits of the activity encouraged by the prerequisite or credit, and economic considerations related to first costs, life-cycle costs, and estimated savings. Related Credits acknowledges the trade-offs and synergies within the LEED rating system credit categories. Achieving a particular credit may make it worthwhile and comparatively easy to pursue related credits; the converse is also possible. The Summary of Referenced Standards, where applicable, introduces the required standards used to measure achievement of the credit intent. Teams are strongly encouraged to review the full standard and not rely on the summary. Implementation discusses specific methods or assemblies that facilitate achievement of the requirements. Timeline and Team guides the project team by identifying who should lead an effort and when the tasks should begin. Calculations offers sample formulas or computations that determine achievement of a particular prerequisite or credit. Most calculations are facilitated in LEED-Online. The Documentation Guidance section provides the first steps in preparing to complete the LEEDOnline documentation requirements. Examples illustrates strategies for credit achievement. Exemplary Performance, if applicable, details the level of performance needed for the award of points in addition to those for credit achievement. Regional Variations outlines concerns specific to the geographic location of the building. Resources offers suggestions for further research and provide examples or illustrations, detailed technical information, or other information relevant to the prerequisite or credit. The resources include websites, online materials, and printed books and articles that can be obtained directly from the organizations listed. Definitions clarifies the meaning of certain terms relevant to the prerequisite or credit. These may be general terms or terms specific to LEED for Commercial Interiors. A complete glossary is found at the end of this reference guide. Endnotes Energy Information Administration. "Emissions of Greenhouse Gas Report." Report #DOE/ EIA-0573(2006). Released 28 November 2007. http:fivivm.eia.doe.goWoiafft6osiggrvicarbon. html#commercial Office of the Federal Environmental Executive. http://ofee.gov/wpr/wastestream.asp Last modified 24 April 20°8. Tools for the Reduction and Assessment of Chemical and Other Environmental Impacts (TRACI). U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Research and Development. http:// www.epa.govinrmrlistdisabitracif. Relative impact category weights based on an exercise undertaken by NIST (National Institute of Standards and Technology) for the BEES program. http://www.bfrl.nistgovioae/sofrwarefbeest 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION xxi EFTA00281538 xxli LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2O09 EDITION EFTA00281539 SESUDHIBLE SaTES Overview The selection of a building site and its development in accordance with sustainable building practices are of fundamental importance. Environmental damage to a site, either during or as a result of construction, can take years to remedy. This credit section addresses environmental concerns relating to building landscape, hardscape, and exterior building issues and promotes the following measures: Selecting a Building That Has Developed Its Site Wisely Buildings affect ecosystems in a variety of ways. Development of greenfields, or previously undeveloped sites, consumes land. Development projects can also encroach on agricultural lands and wetlands or water bodies and compromise wildlife habitats. Choosing a building on a previously developed site or even a damaged site that can be remediated reduces pressure on undeveloped land. Selecting a Building with Sustainable Landscapes Conventional planting and landscape maintenance often require irrigation and chemicals. Sustainable practices minimize the use of irrigation, fertilizers, and pesticides and can prevent soil erosion and sedimentation. Erosion from precipitation and wind causes degradation of property as well as sedimentation of local water bodies, and building sites can be major sources of sediment. Loss of nutrients, soil compaction, and decreased biodiversity of soil organisms can severely limit the vitality of landscaping. Sedimentation increases turbidity levels, which degrades aquatic habitats, and the buildup of sediments in stream channels can lessen flow capacity, increasing the possibility of flooding. Sustainable landscaping involves using or restoring native and adapted plants, which require less irrigation and maintenance and fewer or no applications of chemical fertilizers and pesticides compared with most introduced species. Selecting a Building That Protects Surrounding Habitats Commercial buildingsites can encroach onagricultural lands andforadversely affectwildlifehabitat. As animals are displaced by development, they become crowded into increasingly smaller spaces, and eventually the population exceeds the carrying capacity of the area Overall biodiversity, as well as individual plant and animal species, may be threatened. Restoring native and adapted vegetation and other ecological features to the site provides wildlife habitat. Selecting a Building That Manages Stormwater Runoff As areas developed and urbanized, surface permeability is reduced, which in turn increases the runoff transported via pipes and sewers to streams, rivers, lakes, bays, and oceans. Stormwater runoff harms water quality, aquatic life, and recreation opportunities in receiving waters. For instance, parking areas contribute to stormwater runoff that is contaminated with oil, fuel, lubricants, combustion by-products, material from tire wear, and deicing salts. Runoff also accelerates the flow rate of waterways, causing erosion downstream and altering aquatic habitat. Effective strategies exist to control, reduce, and treat stormwater runoff before it leaves the project site. Selecting a Building That Reduces Heat Island Effects The use of dark, nonreflective surfaces for parking areas, roofs, walkways, and other surfaces SS OVERVIEW 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 1 EFTA00281540 SS OVERVIEW contributes to the heat island effect. These surfaces absorb incoming solar radiation and radiate that heat back to the surrounding areas, increasing the ambient temperature. In addition to being detrimental to site habitat, this increase raises a building's external and internal temperatures, requiring more energy for cooling. The Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory estimates that 1/6 of the electricity consumed in the United States is used to cool buildings. By installing reflective surfaces and vegetation, the nation's homes and businesses could save $4 billion a year in reduced cooling energy demand by 2015! Selecting a Building That Reduces Light Pollution Poorly designed exterior lighting may exacerbate nighttime light pollution,which can interfere with nocturnal ecology, reduce observation of night skies, cause roadway glare, and hurt relationships with neighbors by causing light trespass. Reducing light pollution encourages nocturnal wildlife to inhabit the building site and causes less disruption to birds' migratory patterns. Thoughtful exterior lighting may also reduce infrastructure costs and energy use over the life of the building. Selecting a Building with Water-Efficient Landscaping Landscape irrigation in the United States consumes large quantities of potable water. Outdoor uses, primarily landscaping, account for 30% of the 26 billion gallons of water consumed daily.2 Improved landscaping practices can dramatically reduce and even eliminate irrigation needs. Maintaining or reestablishing native plants on building sites fosters a self-sustaining landscape that requires minimal supplemental water and has other environmental benefits. Landscaping with native plants can reduce the amount of water needed for irrigation and attract native wildlife, creating a building site integrated with its natural surroundings. In addition, native plants tend to require less fertilizer and pesticides, which minimizes the degradation ofwater quality and other negative environmental impacts. Selecting a Building That Uses On-site Renewable Energy Energy generation from renewable sources, such as solar, wind, and biomass, avoids air and water pollution and other environmental impacts associated with producing and using coal, nuclear energy, oil, and natural gas. Although hydropower is considered renewable, it can have harmful environmental effects, such as degrading water quality, altering fish and bird habitat, and endangering species. Low-impact hydropower, if available, is recommended. Renewable energy minimizes add rain, smog, climate change, and human health problems from air contaminants. In addition, using renewable resources avoids the consumption of fossil fuels, the production of nuclear waste, and the operation of environmentally damaging hydropower dams. Selecting a Building That Reduces Potable Water Consumption Reducing indoor potable water consumption may require using alternative water sources for nonpotable applications and installing water-efficient fuctures, flow restrictors, electronic controls, composting toilet systems, and waterless urinals. Lowering potable water use in fixtures can reduce the total amount of water drawn from natural bodies of water. A commercial building in Boston replaced 12.6 3.5-gallons-per-flush (gpf) toilets with low-flow t.6-gpf toilets and reduced total water consumption by 15%. With an initial cost of $32,000 and estimated annual savings of $22,800, the payback period was 14 years. Another Boston building installed 30 faucet aerators and reduced annual indoor water consumption by 190,000gallons. The cost of the equipment and labor totaled $300 and is estimated to save $4250 per year, with a payback period oft months) 2 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281541 Selecting a Building That Helps Reduce Emissions Associated with Transportation Environmental concerns related to buildings include vehicle emissions and the need for vehicle infrastructure as building occupants travel to and from the site. Emissions contribute to climate change, smog, acid rain, and other air quality problems. Parking lots, roadways, and building surfaces increase stonnwater runoff and contribute to the urban heat island effect. In 2006, 76% of commuters in America ages 16 and older drove to work alone. Of the remaining 24% who used alternative means of transportation (including working from home), only 5% used public transportation and n%carpooled.4Locating the project near residential areas and providing bicycle racks, changing facilities, preferred parking, access to mass transit, and alternative-fuel refueling stations can all encourage the adoption of alternative forms of transportation. Use of mass transit reduces the energy demand for transportation as well as the space needed for parking lots, which encroach on green space and contribute to the heat island effect. Summary The LEED for Commercial Interiors SS credits promote responsible, innovative, and practical site designs that are sensitive to plants, wildlife, water, and air quality and that mitigate some of the negative effects buildings have on the local and regional environment. Project teams selecting sites and undertaking building projects should be cognizant of the impact of development on land consumption, ecosystems, natural resources, and energy use. Preference should be given to buildings with high-performance attributes in locations that enhance existing neighborhoods and make use of existing transportation networks and urban infrastructures. LEED encourages the selection of sites and land-use plans that preserve natural ecosystems and enhance the health of the surrounding community. CREDIT TITLE SS Credit 1 SS Credit 2 SS Credit 3.1 SS Credit 3.2 SS Credit 3.3 Site Selection Development Density and Community Connectivity Alternative Transportation—Public Transportation Access Alternative Transportation—Bicycle Storage and Changing Rooms Alternative Transportation—Parking Availability SS OVERVIEW 2OO9 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 3 EFTA00281542 4 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281543 SITE SELECTION Credit SS Credit 1 Points 1-5 points Intent To encourage tenants to select buildings that employ best practices systems and green strategies. Requirements OPTION 1 Select a LEED certified building (5 points). OR OPTION 2 Locatethe tenant space inabuildingthat has inplace tor more ofthefollowingcharacteristics at time of submittal (t -spoints). Each of the followingoptions may also be met by satisfying the requirements of the corresponding LEED 2009 for New Construction credit. PATH 1. Brownfield Redevelopment (1 point) A building developed on a site documented as contaminated (by an ASTM £1903-97 Phase II Environmental Site Assessment or a local voluntary cleanup program) OR A building on a site classified as a brownfield by a local, state or federal government agency. Effective remediation of site contamination must have been completed. PATH 2. Stormwater Design-Quantity Control (1 point) A building that prior to its development had less than or equal to so% imperviousness and has implemented a stormwater management plan that is equal to or is less than the predevelopment 1 D year 24-hour rate and quantity discharge. OR A building that prior to its development had more than so% imperviousness and has implemented a stormwater management plan that reduced predevelopment 1/2. year 24-hour rate and quantity discharge by zs%of the annual on-site stormwater load. This mitigation can be achieved through a variety of measures such as perviousness of site, stormwater retention ponds, and harvesting of rainwater for reuse. Stormwater values are based on actual local rainfall unless the actual exceeds the to-year annual average local rainfall, in which case the to-year annual average should be used. PATH 3. Stormwater Design—Quality Control (1 point) A building that has in place site stormwater treatment systems designed to remove at least 80% of the average annual site area's total suspended solids (rss) and 40% of the average annual site area's total phosphorus (TP). SS CREDIT 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 5 EFTA00281544 SS CREDIT 1 Thesevalues are based on the average annualloadings from all stormsless thanorequal to the 2-year 24-hour storm. The building must implement and maintain best management practices (BMPs) outlined in Chapter 4, Part z Urban Runoff, of the EPA Guidance Specifying Management Measures for Sources of Nonpoint Pollution in Coastal Waters, January 1993 (EPA 840B92002) or the local government's BMP document, whichever is more stringent. PATH 4. Heat Island Effect—NonRoof (1 point) A building that provides shade (or will provide shade within 5 years of landscape installation); and/or uses light-colored or high-albedo materials with a solar reflectance index (SRI)' of at least 29; and/ or has open-grid pavement areas that individually or in total equals at least 30% of the site's nonroof impervious surfaces, such as parking areas, walkways, plazas, and fire lanes. OR Abuildingthat has placed a minimum of 50% of parking spaces underground or covered by structured parking. OR A building that has an open-grid pavement system (less than so% impervious) for so% of the parking lot area. PATH 5. Heat Island Effect—Roof (1 point) A building whose roofing has a solar reflectance index (SRI) of the following minimum values for at least 75% of the roof surface; Roof lype Slope SRI Lim-sloped roof s 2:12 78 Steep-sloped roof > 2:12 29 OR A building that has installed a vegetated roof for at least so% of the roof area. OR Abuildingthat has both high SRI roofs and vegetated roofs that satisfy the following area requirement: Total Roof [ ( s Area of SRI Roof X 1.33 ) + ( Area of Vegetated Roof X 2 ) Area t The solar reflectance index ;SRI) is a measure of the constructed surface's ability to reflect solar heat, as shown by a small temperature rise. It is defined so that a standard black surface (reflectance 0.05.emittance 0.90) is Ganda standard white surface (reflectance O.8O,emittanceo.no) is too. To calculate the SRI for a given material, obtain the reflectance value and emittance value for the material.SRI u calculated according to ASIA' E 19SO. Reflectance is measured according to ASTAt E 903. ASTAI E 1918 or ASTNIC tag. Emittance is measured according to ASTAt E 40S or &SIM C apt. 6 LLLU RLf L/2LNCL COWL fOR URLLN IN IL/2Ithi ULSIGN AND GONSIRUL I ILIN ZUU9 LUI I ION EFTA00281545 PATH 6. Light Pollution Reduction (1 point) A building whose nonemergency interior luminaires with a direct line of sight to any openings in the envelope (translucent or transparent) must have their input power reduced (by automatic device) by at least so% between it M. and 5 M. After-hours override maybe provided by a manual or occupant-sensing device provided the override lasts no more than r minutes. OR A building whose openings in the envelope (translucent or transparent) with a direct line of sight to any nonemergency luminaires must have shielding (with transmittance of less than 1O%) that is controlled or closed by automatic device between tt M. and s • PATH 7. Water Efficient Landscaping—Reduce by 50% (2 points) A building that employs high-efficiency irrigation technology OR uses harvested rainwater or recycled site water to reduce potable water consumption for irrigation by at least 5o% over conventional means. PATH 8. Water Efficient Landscaping—No Potable Water Use or No Irrigation (2 points in addition to Path 7) A building that uses only harvested rainwater or recycled site water to eliminate all potable water use for site irrigation (except for initial watering to establish plants), OR does not have permanent landscaping irrigation systems. PATH 9. Innovative Wastewater Technologies (2 points) Abuildingthat reduces the use of municipallyprovided potablewater forbuilding sewage conveyance by at least50%, OR treats t00% of wastewater on-site to tertiary standards. PATH 10. Water Use Reduction-30% Reduction (1 point) Abuildingthat meets the r% reduction in water use requirement for the entire building and has an ongoing plan to require future occupants to comply. PATH 11. On-site Renewable Energy (1-2 points) A building that supplies at least 2.59is (1 point) or 5% (a points) of the building's total energy use (expressed as a fraction of annual energycost) from on-site renewable energy systems. PATH 12. Other Quantifiable Environmental Performance (1 point) A building that has in place at the time of selection other quantifiable environmental benefits. SS CREDIT 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 7 EFTA00281546 CI Credit 1 OPTION 1 OPTION 1: SELECT LEED-CERTIFIED BUILDING 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues The built environment has a tremendous impact on our natural resources and the health of our communities. In 2006, the U.S. Department of Energy reported that U.S. buildings accounted for 724% of electricity consumption} According to the Energy Information Administration, in 2008, buildings in the United States were responsible for 38% of all CO2 emissions.' In 2000, the U.S. Geological Survey reported that the nation's buildings used 13.6% of all potable water, or is trillion gallons per year? Certification of a building under LEED for New Construction, LEED for Schools, LEED for Core & Shell,or LEED for Existing Buildings Operations& Maintenance signifies that building ovmers have already taken significant steps to protect ecosystems and biodiversity, conserve valuable resources, and provide healthful indoor environments for building occupants. Economic Issues The commercial real estate industry has begun to document the increased market appeal of space in LEED-certified buildings, based on recognition that LEED-certified base buildings deliver many economic benefits to tenants, such as reduced operating costs and improved productivity of building occupants. Cost analyses can project and weigh the impact of these reductions on the possibly higher lease values of such buildings. 2. Related Credits Selecting a LEED-certified base building will link the LEED for Commercial Interiors project to the credits the base building earned under its original certification. Such projects are likely to be well situated to earn credits under the LEED for Commercial Interiors Rating System. 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this credit. 4. Implementation Select tenant space in an existing LEED-certified building. If possible, obtain the base building LEED certification review documents early in the project development phase. The certification documents from the base building can serve as a resource for identifying credits and base building systems and will make it much easier to earn certain LEED for Commercial Interiors credits. Establishing project goals that maximize use of base building systems early on is crucial. Clearly communicate to real estate and leasing agents that space in a LEED-certified building is a priority. Consult the USGBC website for a list of completed LEED-certified projects. Local USGBC chapters can also serve as valuable resources for identifying leasable space in LEED-certified buildings and for finding buildings currently seeking LEED certification. 5. Timeline and Team During the building selection process, work with real estate brokers and leasing agents to identify LEED-certified buildings with tenant space. The building owner or manager should supply a copy of the final LEED scorecard. 6. Calculations There are no calculations required for this credit. 8 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281547 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measure. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Assemble information about the base building's LEED certification from the building owner or manager. 8. Examples There are no examples for this credit. 9. Exemplary Performance This option is not eligible for exemplary performance under the Innovation in Design section. 10. Regional Variations There are no regional variations associated with this credit. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations There are no operations and maintenance considerations for this credit. 12. Resources Please see the USGBC website, at http://www.usgbc.org, for a database of LEED-registered and certified buildings and a list of regional USGBC chapters. 13. Definitions There are no definitions for this credit. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION EFTA00281548 CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 1 OPTION 2, PATH 1: BROWNFIELD REDEVELOPMENT 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues The EPA estimates that there are more than 450,000 brownfields in the United States!' Buildings located on brownfield sites have undergone remediation efforts to remove or stabilize hazardous materials from the sites' soil and groundwater, reducing the exposure of humans and wildlife to health risks associated with environmental pollution. Brownfield redevelopment can contribute to social and economic revitalization of depressed or disadvantaged neighborhoods, and can renew and augment a sense of community pride in local residents. Economic Issues Investors who develop brownfield sites often take advantage of government grants, tax incentives, existing infrastructure, and ready availability of labor. These cost savings maybe reflected in lower lease rates for these properties. Additionally, because many brownfield sites are in or near urban areas, they are well served by existing transportation networks and other infrastructure. 2. Related Credits There are no related credits. 3. Summary of Referenced Standards U.S. EPA Definition of Brownfields The EPA Sustainable Redevelopment of Brownfields Program http://www.e gov/brovmfields With certain legal exclusions and additions, brownfield site means real property, the expansion, redevelopment, or reuse of which may be complicated by the presence or potential presence of a hazardous substance, pollutant, or contaminant (Public Law 107-118, H.R. 2869, Small Business Liability Relief and Brownfields Revitalization Act). See the EPA website for additional information and resources. ASTM E19o3-97, Phase II Environmental Site Assessment, effective zoos ASTM International http://wwt.v.astm.org A Phase II environmental site assessment is an investigation that collects original samples of soil, groundwater, or building materials to analyze for quantitative values of various contaminants. This investigation is normally undertaken when a Phase I assessment has determined a potential for site contamination. The substances most frequently tested are petroleum hydrocarbons, heavy metals, pesticides, solvents, asbestos, and mold. 4. Implementation Select a base building that was constructed on a site formerly classified as a brownfield. Former brownfield sites and remediation activities may be catalogued by the federal, state, or local authorities. 5. Timeline and Team The project team should make the selection of a base building constructed on a remediated brownfield a requirement of its selection process. Work with real estate brokers and leasing agents to identify buildings that meet the requirements. 10 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281549 6. Calculations There are no calculations required for this credit. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measure. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Assemble information about the previous site contamination and remediation efforts undertaken. 8. Examples There are no examples for this credit. 9. Exemplary Performance This path is not eligible for exemplary performance under SS Credit r Path 12 Other Quantifiable Environmental Performance. 10. Regional Variations Preliminary screening levels or remediation criteria may differ by state or region. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Some remediation efforts may require ongoing activities. The project team and owner should keep careful records of remediation activities and develop a plan for ongoingcompliance with monitoring and reporting requirements as defined by the relevant federal, state or local regulatory agency. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (www.usgbc.org/projecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites U.S. EPA, Preliminary Remediation Goals for EPA Region 9 epa Preliminary remediation goals are tools for evaluating and cleaning up contaminated sites. They are intended to help risk assessors and others perform initial screening-level evaluations of environmental measurement results. The remediation goals for Region 9 are generic; they are calculated without site-specific information. However, they may be recalculated using sitespecific data. U.S. EPA, Sustainable Redevelopment of Brownfields http://www.e govibrovmfields This is a comprehensive website on brownfields that includes projects, initiatives, tools, tax incentives and other resources to address brownfield remediation and redevelopment. For information by phone, contact the regional EPA office. 13. Definitions A brownfield is real propertywhose use maybe complicated bythe presence or possible presence of a hazardous substance, pollutant, or contaminant. Remediation is the process of cleaning up a contaminated site by physical, chemical, or biological means. Remediation processes are typically applied to contaminated soil and groundwater. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 11 EFTA00281550 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 1 A site assessment is an evaluation of a site's aboveground and subsurface characteristics, including its structures, geology, and hydrology. Site assessments are typically used to determine whether contamination has occurred, as well as the extent and concentration of any release of pollutants. Information generated during a site assessment is used to make remedial action decisions. 12 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281551 OPTION 2, PATH 2: STORMWATER DESIGN-QUANTITY CONTROL 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Stormwater is a major source of pollution for all types of water bodies in the United States.' Soil compaction caused by site development and the expanse of impervious surfaces, such as roads and parking lots, produce stormwater runoffthat contains sediment and other contaminants, including atmospheric deposition, pesticides, fertilizers, vehicle fluid leaks, and mechanical equipment waste. Increased stormwater runoff can overload pipes and sewers and damage water quality, affecting navigation and recreation. Furthermore, municipal systems that convey and treat runoff require significant infrastructure improvements and maintenance. The health of streams is closely linked to stormwater runoffvelocities and volumes. Increases in the frequencyand magnitude ofstormwater runoffdue to development can increasebankfull events and erosion, widen channels, and cause downcutting in streams. Effective on-site management practices let stormwater infiltrate the ground, thereby reducing the volume and intensity of stormwater flows.1° Additionally, reducing stormwater runoff helps maintain the natural aquifer recharge cycle and restore depleted stream base flows. By selecting a building that has met the requirements of SS Credit 1, Option 2, Path 2, the project team is recognizing the importance of reducing stormwater runoff and the accnriated environmental benefits. 2. Related Credits A building's efforts to reduce the rate and quantity of stormwater runoff may involve the use of pervious pavements, native or adapted vegetation, and increased on-site infiltration strategies, assisting projects with earning the following credits: ■ SS Credit 4 Option a, Path 3: Stormwater Management—Quality Control ■ SS Credit 4 Option a, Path 4: Heat Island Reduction—Nonroof Efforts to capture and reuse rainwater forirrigation or in nonpotable applications inside the building, such as toilets and urinals, can help projects earn the following credits: ■ SS Credit 4 Option a, Path 7: Water-Efficient Landscaping—Reduce by 50% ■ SS Credit r, Option 2, Path 8: Water-Efficient Landscaping—No Potable Water Use or No Irrigation ■ SS Credit 1, Option z Path 10: Water Use Reduction-30% Reduction 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this credit 4. Implementation Identify a space in a building that has implemented r of the 2 compliance paths or that can meet equivalent performance requirements. Include this requirement in the criteria for selecting a base building. Local permitting agencies may have detailed information on the stormwater control techniques implemented or in use at the base building. Check the application for the building's stormwater management permit for this information. 5. Timeline and Team Because tenants may not be able to influence the base building and site infrastructure design, LEED for Commercial Interiors projects may require a different approach than LEE!) for New Construction or Core & Shell projects. Work with building owners or facility managers to first CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 13 EFTA00281552 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 2 assess the base building for compliance with the LEED requirements. Since many local jurisdictions have comparable requirements, part of this process may include consulting with local permitting officials to determine whether the local stormwater requirements at the time of the base building construction were adequately stringent to meet this credit. If the existing system does not meet the credit requirements, investigate opportunities to modify the site design. This may include modification of existing stormwater management systems and replacing site hardscapes with vegetated areas that decrease site runoff. 6. Calculations The following calculation illustrates one method that can be used to support the credit submittals. Stormwater runoff volumes are affected by surface characteristics on the site as well as rainfall intensity over a specified time period. Stormwater volumes generated are directly related to the net imperviousness of the project site. By reducing the amount of impervious surface on the site, stormwater volumes are reduced. Estimate the imperviousness of the project site as follows: 1. Identify the different surface types on the site: roof, pavement (e.g., roads and sidewalks), landscaping, and other areas. a. Determine the total area for each of these surface types using site drawings. Use Tablet to assign a runoff coefficient to each surface type. If a surface type is not included in the table, use a 'best estimate" or manufacturer information. For instance, if pervious paving is used, consult the manufacturer to determine the imperviousness (the percentage of the surface that does not allow infiltration). 3. Summarize the area and runoff coefficient for each surfacetype on a spreadsheet. Multiply the nmoff coefficient by the area to obtain an impervious area for each surface type. This figure represents the square footage of each surface area that is t00% impervious (Equation t). 4. Add the impervious areas for each surface type to obtain a total impervious area for the site. 5. Divide the total impervious area by the total site area to obtain the imperviousness of the site (Equation 2). For sites with so% imperviousness or less, imperviousness discharge must not increase from predevelopment to postdevelopment conditions. For previously developed sites with imperviousness greater than so%, imperviousness discharge must be reduced by 259‘ from predevelopment to postdevelopment conditions. Table 1. Typical Runoff Coeffiicient Surface Type Runoff Coefficient I Surface Type Runoff Coefficient Pavement. Asphalt 0.95 Turf, Flat (0- 1% slope) 0.25 Pavement, Concrete 0.95 Turf, Average (1 - 3% slope) 0.35 Pavement, Brick 0.85 Turf, Hilly (3 - 10% slope) 0.40 Pavement, Gravel 0.75 Turf, Steep (> 10% slope) 0.45 Roofs, Conventional 0.95 Vegetation, Flat (0 - 1% slope) 0.10 Roof, Garden Roof (<4 in) 0.50 Vegetation, Average (1 - 3% slope) 0.20 Roof, Garden Roof (4 - 8 in) 0.30 Vegetation, Hilly (3 - 10% slope) 0.25 Roof, Garden Roof (9 - 20 in) 0.20 Vegetation. Steep f> 10% slope) 0.30 Vegetation. Steep f> 10% slope) 0.10 Equation 1 Impervious Area (sf) = Surface Area fsf) X Runoff Coefficient 14 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281553 Equation 2 SS Imperviousness (%) — Total Pervious Area (s0 CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: Total Site Area (s0 PATH 2 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. • Determine the rates and quantities for pre- and postdevelopment conditions for the required storm events. • Prepare a stormwater plan assessment from design documentation, or have one completed by a civil engineer or other professional. • List stormwater management strategies and record the percentage of rainfall that each is designed to handle. 8. Example Site Imperviousness The project is an office renovation with site improvements to an existing concrete parking lot of average slope. Surface types include sidewalks, parking areas, landscaping, and the roof. The roof area is assumed to be equal to the building footprint, as determined from site drawings. Table 2 shows calculations for the design case. To reduce imperviousness, some concrete sidewalks and asphalt parking areas can be replaced with pervious paving and vegetation. The building footprint is reduced and vegetated roofs are installed to reduce runoff. Next, calculations are done for the baseline case (the existing site conditions; Table 3). The calculations demonstrate that the design case has an imperviousness of 47% and the baseline case has an imperviousness of 95%, or a 50% reduction. The project has exceeded the 25% minimum, thus earning1 point. Table 2. Design Case Imperviousness Surface Type Runoff Coefficient Area (sf) Impervious Area _m_ (d) Pavement. Asphalt 0.95 5.075 4,821 Pavement, Pervious 0.60 1,345 807 Roof, Garden Roof (4 - 8 in) 0.30 8,240 2,472 Vegetation, Average (1 - 3% slope) 0.20 4.506 901 Total Area 14,660 Total Impervious Area 8,100 Imperviousness 55% Table 3. Baseline Case Imperviousness Surface Type Runoff Coefficient Area (so Impervious Area (sf) Pavement. concrete 0.95 19.166 18.208 Total area 14.660 Total impervious area 18.208 Imperviousness 95% 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 15 EFTA00281554 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 2 9. Exemplary Performance This path is not eligible for exemplary performance under SS Credit 1, Path 12, Other Quantifiable Environmental Performance. 10. Regional Variations The approach to this credit varies dramatically across different regions and climate zones because the t-year and z-year 24-hour design storms are particular to a given location. Local stormwater management requirements also differ. The strategies employed in an urban environment where water is discharged to a municipal master system will be much different from the approach for a rural project that discharges to streams or lakes with high water quality standards. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Though unlikely to be within the control of the tenant, operations best practices include developing an ongoing inspection and maintenance plan to ensure the proper upkeep of all aspects of the stormwater management system, including desired levels of vegetation and mulching, repair of washouts, and proper functioning of any system controls. Silting in infiltration trenches or dry retention wells, for example, may impair performance. At a minimum, the maintenance plan should include periodic visual site inspections to identify unsatisfactory conditions and recommendations for typical corrective actions. If stormwater harvesting systems are used, period checks for leaks and blockages should be scheduled, and occasional cleaning may be necessary to keep the system operating effectively. Prevention of on-site erosion will extend the life of the installed measures. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http://www.usgbc.org(projecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites Center for Watershed Protection http://vnvw.cwp.org A nonprofit dedicated to disseminating watershed protection information to community leaders and watershed managers, the center offers online resources, training seminars, and watershed protection techniques. Stormwater Manager's Resource Center http:fiwww.stormwatercenter.net This site forpractitioners and localgovemment officials provides technical assistance on stormwater management issues. U.S. EPA Office of Wetlands, Oceans, and Watersheds http://www.e govLiow ov This website has information about watersheds and information about water resource protection, water conservation, landscaping practices, and water pollution reduction. U.S. EPA, Post-Construction Stormwater Management in New Development and Redevelopment http://cfpub.epagovinpdesistormwaterimenuofbmpsfindex.cfm This EPA website provides information about catch basins as a tool for sediment control. U.S. National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration, National Climate Data Center http:fiww.ncdc.noaa.govioaincdc.html This website provides historical rainfall data and isohyetal maps for various storm events. 16 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281555 13. Definitions An aquifer is an underground water•bearing rock formation that supplies groundwater, wells, and springs. Retention ponds capture stormwater runoff and clear it of pollutants before its release. Some retention pond designs use gravity only; others use mechanical equipment, such as pipes and pumps, to facilitate transport. Some ponds are dry except during storm events; others permanently store water. Erosion is a combination of processes or events by which materials of the earth's surface are loosened, dissolved, or worn away and transported by natural agents (e.g., water, wind, or gravity). Impervious surfaces have a perviousness of less than so% and promote runoff of water instead of infiltration into the subsurface. Examples include parking lots, roads, sidewalks, and plazas. Infiltration basins and trenches are devices used to encourage subsurface infiltration of runoff volumes through temporary surface storage. Basins are ponds that can store large volumes of stormwater. They need to drain within 72 hours to maintain aerobic conditions and be available for future storm events. Trenches are similar to infiltration basins but are shallower and function as a subsurface reservoir for stormwater volumes. Pretreatment to remove sediment and oil may be necessary to avoid clogging infiltration devices. Infiltration trenches are more common in areas where infiltration basins are not possible. Porous pavement and permeable surfaces allow runoff to infiltrate into the ground. Stormwater runoff consists of water from precipitation that flows over surfaces into sewer systems or receiving water bodies. MI precipitation that leaves project site boundaries on the surface is considered stormwater runoff. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 17 EFTA00281556 CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 3 OPTION 2, PATH 3: STORMWATER DESIGN-QUALITY CONTROL 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues As areas are developed and urbanized, surface permeability is reduced, resulting in increased stormwater runoff that is transported via gutters, pipes, and sewers to receiving waters. This stormwater contains sediment and other contaminants that have negative effects on water quality, navigation, and recreation. Furthermore, conveyance and treatment of stormwater require significant municipal infrastructure and maintenance. Sources of stormwater pollution include atmospheric deposition, vehicle fluid leaks, and mechanical equipment wastes. During storm events, these pollutants are washed away and discharged to downstream waters, damaging aquatic habitats and decreasing biological diversity of aquatic species. 2. Related Credits A building's efforts to capture and treat stormwater runoff may involve the use of pervious pavements, native or adapted vegetation, and increased on-site infiltration strategies, assisting projects with earning these credits: • SS Credit 4 Option 2, Path 2: Stormwater Management—Quantity Control • SS Credit t, Option 2, Path 4: Heat Island Reduction—Nonroof Efforts to capture and reuse rainwaterforirrigation or in nonpotable applications inside the building, such as toilet and urinals, can help projects earn the following credits: • SS Credit 4 Option 2, Path 7: Water-Efficient Landscaping—Reduce by so% • SS Credit 4 Option 2, Path 8: Water-Efficient Landscaping—No Potable Water Use or No Irrigation • SS Credit 1, Option a. Path io: Water Use Reduction-30% Reduction 3. Summary of Referenced Standard U.S. EPA 840892oo2, Guidance Specifying Management Measures for Sources of Non-Point Pollution in Coastal Waters, effective January 1993 http://www.emgoviowowInps/MMGI Hardcopy or microfiche (836 pages): National Technical Information Service (PB93-234672), http:/Sv, The EPA Office of Water http:fiwww.epa.gov/OWOW This document discusses a variety of management practices that can remove pollutants from stormwater volumes. Chapter 4, Part II, addresses urban runoff and suggests strategies for treating and filtering stormwater volumes after construction is completed. 4. Implementation Choose a base buildingthat has in place a stormwater treatment system that meets the requirements of SS Credit 1, Option 2, Path 3. Since underground systems usually aren't visible, some research into the building's history may be required to determine whether the stormwater system complies with the credit requirements. Consult facility personnel, design documents, manufacturer information, and code officials about the base building's stormwater treatment systems. Building management and permitting authority may have the information needed to demonstrate that the credit requirements are met. For physical 18 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281557 components, such as extractors, manufacturers' cut sheets can confirm that the installed system can remove suspended solids and phosphorus as required by the referenced standard. Facilities can be constructed to remove contaminants from the portion of stormwater that cannot be contained or reused on-site. Possible strategies include constructed wetlands, stormwater filtering systems, bioswales, retention basins, and vegetated filter strips. While evaluating potential buildings for commercial interior projects, see whether the base building site design incorporates compliant systems. 5. Timeline and Team Because tenants may not be able to influence the base building and site infrastructure design, LEED for Commercial Interiors projects may require a different approach than LEED for New Construction or Core & Shell projects. Work with building owners or facility managers to assess the base building for compliance with the LEED requirements. Since many local jurisdictions have comparable requirements, consult with local permitting officials to determine whether the local stormwater requirements at the time of the base building construction were adequate to meet this credit. If the edsting system does not meet the credit requirements, investigate opportunities to modify the site design. This may include modification of edsting stormwater management systems and replacing site hardscapes with vegetated areas that decrease site runoff. 6. Calculations I n most cases,buildings thathaveimplemented standard EPAorlocalbestmanagementpracticeswill not need to complete any calculations to demonstrate compliance with the requirements. [(designs far different from accepted best management practices have been developed and implemented, detailed engineering calculations may be required to demonstrate the reductions in total suspended solids (TSS) and total phosphorus (TP). 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ List the best management practices used to treat stormwater and record the percentage of annual rainfall that each is designed to handle. ■ For structural controls, list and describe the measures, and determine the percentage of annual rainfall that each is designed to handle. 8. Examples There are no examples for this credit 9. Exemplary Performance This credit is not eligible for exemplary performance under SS Credit t, Path 12, Other Quantifiable Environmental Performance. 10. Regional Variations The approach to this credit varies dramatically across different regions and climate zones because the t-year and 2-year 24-hour design storms are particular to a given location. Local stormwater management requirements also differ. The strategies employed in an urban, coastal environment where water is discharged to concrete channels and then the ocean will be much different from the approach for a rural, inland project that discharges to streams or lakes. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 3 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 19 EFTA00281558 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 3 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Ideally, the landlord has implemented a maintenance plan that includes periodic visual site inspections to identify any erosion and recommendations for typical corrective actions. Preventing erosion will extend the life of installed stormwater measures, since silting of infiltration trenches or dry retention wells may impair long-terrn performance. Further, this plan should address maintenance of any pervious pavement systems. This might include quarterly vacuuming or washing. The tenant should consider requiring periodic inspection and maintenance of these systems during lease negotiations 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (limxiftvww.usgbc.orgjprojecttools) for additional resources and technical information. 13. Definitions A constructed wetland is an engineered system designed to simulate natural wetland functions for water purification. In LEED, constructed wetlands are essentially treatment systems that remove contaminants from wastewater. Retention ponds capture stormwater nmoff and clear it of pollutants before its release. Some retention pond designs use gravity only; others use mechanical equipment, such as pipes and pumps, to facilitate transport. Some ponds are dry except during storm events; others permanently store water. Impervious surfaces have a perviousness of less than so% and promote runoff of water instead of infiltration into the subsurface. Examples include parking lots, roads, sidewalks, and plazas. Infiltration basins and trenches are devices used to encourage subsurface infiltration of runoff volumes through temporary surface storage. Basins are ponds that can store large volumes of stormwater. They need to drain within 72 hours to maintain aerobic conditions and be available for future storm events. Trenches are similar to infiltration basins but are shallower and function as a subsurface reservoir for stormwater volumes. Pretreatment to remove sediment and oil may be necessary to avoid clogging infiltration devices. Infiltration trenches are more common in areas where infiltration basins are not possible. Porous pavement and permeable surfaces allow runoff to infiltrate into the ground. Stormwater runoff consists ofwater from precipitation that flows over surfaces into sewer systems or receiving water bodies. MI precipitation that leaves project site boundaries on the surface is considered stormwater runoff. Total phosphorus (TP) consists of organically bound phosphates, polyphosphates, and orthophosphates in stormwater, the majority of which originates from fertilizer application. Chemical precipitation is the typical removal mechanism for phosphorus. Total suspended solids (TSS) are particles that are too small or light to be removed from stormwater via gravity settling. Suspended solid concentrations are typically removed via filtration. 20 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281559 OPTION 2, PATH 4: HEAT ISLAND EFFECT-NONROOF 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Theuseofdark,nonreflectivesurfaces for parking,roofsmallcways,andotherhardscapescontributes to the heat island effect by absorbing the sun's warmth, which then radiates into the surroundings. Because of heat island effect, ambient temperatures in urban areas are artificially elevated by 2° to ic 3F compared with surrounding suburban and undeveloped areas." The result is increased cooling loads in the summer, requiring larger heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning (HVAC) equipment and greater electricity consumption, both of which generate greenhouse gases and pollution. Heat islands are detrimental to site habitat, wildlife, and animal migration corridors. Plants and animals are also sensitive to large fluctuations in daytime and nighttime temperatures and may not thrive in areas affected by heat islands. Economic Issues The energy used to cool a building represents a substantial portion of the operating budget over its lifetime. Reducing heat islands can significantly lower cooling costs and HVAC equipment needs. According to the Department of Energy's Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory, the annual energy savings potential of heat island reduction measures, studied in the metropolitan areas of Sacramento, Baton Rouge, and Salt Lake City, range from $4 million to $15 million." By selecting base buildings that have taken steps to reduce heat island effect from nonroof surfaces, tenants can benefit from lower operating costs associated with space cooling. 2. Related Credits Properly designed and installed open-grid pavements increase stormwater infiltration on the site and reduce stormwater runoff, assisting projects with earning the following credits: ■ SS Credit t, Option 2, Path z Stormwater Design—Quantity Control ■ SS Credit t, Option 2, Path 3: Stormwater Design—Quality Control If the base building uses vegetation to shade hardscapes, refer to the landscape irrigation requirements in these 2 credits: ■ SS Credit t, Option 2, Path 7: Water Efficient Landscaping—Reduce by so% ■ SS Credit 1, Option 2, Path 8: Water-Efficient Landscaping—No Potable Water Use or No Irrigation 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this credit. 4. Implementation Choose a base building with physical characteristics that reduce its contribution to heat island effect. LEED for Commercial Interiors SS Credit t, Option 4, has 3 compliance paths, all of which aim to reduce the potential for nonroofbuilding surfaces to absorb and retain heat. 5. Timeline and Team The project team should make shaded, reflective, or open-grid site hardscapes a criterion for site selection. Real estate brokers and leasing agents can help identify buildings that comply. Ss CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 4 2C09 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 21 EFTA00281560 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 4 6. Calculations Shading of Nonroof Impervious Surfaces t. Identify all nonroof hardscape surfaces on the project site and sum the total area (T). Hardscapes must include all roads, sidewalks, courtyards, and parking lots within the LEED project boundary. a. Identify all hardscape surfaces that are shaded by trees or other landscape features (or will be shaded within 5 years from the date of installation). Shade coverage must be calculated at so to noon, and 3.. on the summer solstice. The arithmetic mean of these 3 values will be used as the effective shaded area. Calculated the effective shaded area (S). 3. Identify all hardscape surfaces shaded by solar energy panels and sum the total area (E). The shaded area can be considered equivalent to the area covered by the panels on the site plan (from a direct overhead aerial perspective). 4. Identify all hardscape surfaces shaded by architectural devices or structures that have an SRI of at least 29 and sum the total area (A). The shaded area can be considered equivalent to the area covered bythe architectural devices or structures on the site plan (from adirect overhead aerial perspective). 5. Identify all the hardscape surfaces that have an SRI of at least 29 and sum the total area (R). SRI can be calculated from emissivity and solar reflectance values. Emissivity is calculated by the manufactureraccording toASTM E408 or ASTM C 1374 and solar reflectance is calculated according to ASTM E 903, ASTM E 1918 or ASTM C 1549. Alternatively, use the SRI values for typical paving materials listed in Tables in lieu ofobtaining specific emissivity and solar reflectance measurements for the listed materials. Table 1. Solar Reflectance Index (SRI) for Standard Paving Materials Material Emissivity Reflectance SRI Typical new gray concrete 0.9 0.35 35 Typical weathered• gray concrete 0.9 0.20 19 Typical new white concrete 0.9 0.7 86 Typical weathered• white concrete 0.9 0.4 45 New asphalt 0.9 .05 0 Weathered asphalt 0.9 .10 6 ' Reflectance of surfaces can be maintained with cleaning. Typical pressure washing of cernentitious m tents can restore reflectance close to original value. Weathered values are based on no cleaning. 6. Identify all hardscape surfaces that have an open grid paving system that is at least so% pervious and sum the total area (O). 7. Sum the area of all qualifying surfaces to determine the total qualifying area (Q), using Equations. Equation 1 Q=( S -I- E -I- A -FR +0 ) 8. The total qualifying area must be at least 30% of the total hardscape area (T), as in Equation 2.. 22 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281561 Equation 2 Q > T X 0.3 Underground or Covered Parking 1. Determine the total number of parking spaces within the project boundary. a. Determine the number of parking spaces that are under cover (include underground, under deck, under roof, or under building). This number must be at least so% of the total number of parking spaces. 3. A base building with no parking is not eligible for this credit path. Open-Grid Parking Areas 1. Identify the total parking lot area on the project site (T). a. Identify all hardscape surfaces that are open-grid paving that is at least so% pervious and sum the total area (O). 3. The total qualifying area (O) must be at least so% of the total parking lot area, as in Equation 3. Equation 3 T O > — 2 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ If surfaces are shaded, prepare a site plan that highlights all nonroof hardscape areas. Clearly label each portion of hardscape that counts toward credit achievement. List material information about the compliant surfaces (e.g., SRI values of reflective paving materials). ■ If parking spaces are placed under cover, determine the total number of parking spaces and the portion covered. If applicable, assemble SRI values for the roofs that cover parking areas. si If hardscapes are open-grid paving, prepare a site plan that highlights the areas covered by the open-grid pavement system. Assemble information about the open-grid system used. 8. Examples The tenant space is in a building situated on a 25,00o-square-foot site, ofwhich ts,000 square feet is occupied by the building footprint and vegetated areas. Deciduous trees shade parking and driveway areas, and light-colored concrete with an SRI of 35 is in place for the driving aisles and walkways (Figure 1). Areas that contain both light-colored hardscapes and are shaded by trees are counted only once. Table 2 lists the areas of qualifying surfaces. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 4 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 23 EFTA00281562 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 4 Table 2. Sample Areas of Qualifying Surfaces Description Area CA Total nonroof hardscapes 10.000 Shaded areas 3.000 Areas of hardscapes with minimum SRI-29 4.000 Total qualifying surfaces 7.000 n this example, the total area of qualifying surfaces is greater than so% of the total area of nonroof hardscapes, and the project earns t point. Figure 1. Shading and SRI for Credit Compliance Parking Area with an SRI of 19 (does not contribute towards credit Diagram courtesy of Ow99 Shaded Area (contributes towards credit achievement) Driving Aisle with SRI of 35 (contributes towards credit Walkways with SRI of 35 (contributes towards credit 9. Exemplary Performance Projects may earn credit for exemplary performance under SS Credit I, Path ta, Other Quantifiable Environmental Performance, by demonstrating that 2 or more of the compliance paths described above have been met. 10. Regional Variations Heat island intensities depend on an area's weather and climate, proximity to water bodies, and topography:I Buildings in very cold climates or at high latitudes may not experience the same rise 24 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION EFTA00281563 of surface and ambient temperatures. Buildings in urban areas and those in climate zones 1, 2, and 3 (as defined by ASNIIASHRAEIIESNA Standard 90.1-2007) are most affected by heat islands and are likely to benefit from measures to decrease cooling loads by avoiding additional heat absorption. In sunny climates, building tenants may need to mitigate glare from reflective pavements into the building by providing shading devices. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Tenants who have located in a building that uses the strategies described in this credit should be aware of the need to maintain materials and systems. Surface materials with high reflectivity should be cleaned at least every 2 years to maintain good reflectance. Some open-grid pavement systems require special maintenance to remain pervious. If this is the responsibility of the tenant, project teams should request maintenance information from product manufacturers and installers and make sure this information is given to the operations team. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http://www.usgbc.org(projecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites American Concrete Pavement Association This national association represents concrete pavement contractors, cement companies, equipment and material manufacturers, andsuppliers. See Albedo: A Measure of Pavement Surface Reflectance, R&T Update (3.05) (June zooz): Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory, Heat Island Group http://eetd.lbl.gov/HeatIslandi Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory conducts heat island research to find, analyze, and implement solutions to minimize heat island effect. Current research efforts focus on the study and development of more reflective surfaces for roadways and buildings. U.S. EPA, Heat Island Effect http:fiwww.epa.goviheatislandfindex.htm This website offers basic information about heat island effect, its social and environmental costs, and reduction strategies. 13. Definitions Albedo is synonymous with solar reflectance. Emissivity is the ratio of the radiation emitted by a surface to the radiation emitted by a black body at the same temperature. Greenhouse gases are relatively transparent to the higher-energy sunlight but trap lower-energy infrared radiation (e.g., carbon dioxide, methane, and CFCs). Hardscape consists of the inanimate elements of the building landscaping. Examples include pavement, roadways, stonewalls, concrete paths and sidewalks, and concrete, brick, and tile patios. Heat island effect refers to the absorption of heat by hardscapes, such as dark, nonreflective pavement and buildings, and its radiation to surrounding areas. Particularly in urban areas, other sources may include vehicle exhaust, air-conditioners, and street equipment; reduced airflow from tall buildings and narrow streets exacerbates the effect. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 4 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 25 EFTA00281564 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 4 Impervious surfaces have a perviousness of less than 50% and promote runoff of water instead of infiltration into the subsurface. Examples include parking lots, roads, sidewalks, and plazas. Infrared (or thermal) emittance is a parameter between o and 1 (or o% and t00%) that indicates the ability of a material to shed infrared radiation (heat). The wavelength range for this radiant energy is roughly 5 to 40 micrometers. Most building materials (including glass) are opaque in this part of the spectrum and have an emittance of roughly 0.9. Materials such as clean, bare metals are the most important exceptions to the 0.9 rule. Thus clean, untarnished galvanized steel has low emittance, and aluminum roof coatings have intermediate emittance levels. On-site wastewater treatment systems transport, store, treat, and dispose of wastewater volumes generated on the project site. Perviousness is the percentage of the surface area of a paving system that is open and allows moisture to soak into the ground below. Solar reflectance, or albedo, is a measure of the ability of a surface material to reflect sunlight— visible, infrared, and ultraviolet wavelengths—on a scale ofo tot. Black paint has a solar reflectance of 0; white paint (titanium dioxide) has a solar reflectance oft. The solar reflectance index (SRI) is a measure of a material's ability to reject solar heat, as shown by a small temperature rise. Standard black (reflectance 0.05, emittance 0.90) is o and standard white (reflectance 0.80, emittance 0.9o) is too. For example, a standard black surface has a temperature rise of go-F (50-C) in full sun, and a standard white surface has a temperature rise of 14.6'F (8.1t). Once the maximum temperature rise of a given material has been computed, the SRI can be calculated by interpolating between the values for white and black. Materials with the highest SRI values are the coolest choices for paving. Because of the way SRI is defined, particularly hot materials can even take slightly negative values, and particularly cool materials can even exceed 100. (Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory Cool Roofing Materials Database) Undercover parking is underground or under a deck, roof, or building; its hardscape surfaces are shaded. 26 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281565 OPTION 2, PATH 5: HEAT ISLAND EFFECT-ROOF 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues The use of dark, nonreflective roofing surfaces contributes to the heat island effect by absorbing the sun's warmth, which then radiates into the surroundings. Because of the heat island effect, ambient temperatures in urban areas are artificially elevated, resulting in increased cooling loads, greater electricity consumption, and higher emissions of greenhouse gases and pollution. Heat islands are also detrimental to site habitat, wildlife, and the migration corridors of various species. Plants and animals are sensitive to large fluctuations in daytime and nighttime temperatures and may not thrive in areas affected by heat islands. In addition, base buildings that have vegetated roofs provide habitat for birds, insects, and other wildlife. Economic Issues Tenants can benefit from reduced costs associated with cooling and HVAC equipment by selecting base buildings that have vegetated roofing and/or highly reflective roofing materials. 2. Related Credits Properly designed and installed vegetated roofs increase stormwater infiltration on the site and help reduce stormwater runoff, assisting projects with earning these 2 credits: ■ SS Credit t, Option a, Path a: Stormwater Design—Quantity Control ■ SS Credit t, Option a, Path 3: Stormwater Design—Quality Control Vegetated roofs also reduce the availabilityofrainwaterthatcan be harvested for nonpotable purposes, making the following water-efficiencycredits more challenging to achieve: ■ SS Credit t, Option a, Path 7: Water-Efficient Landscaping—Reduce by so% ■ SS Credit 1, Option 2, Path 8: Water-Efficient Landscaping—No Potable Water Use or No Irrigation ■ SS Credit t, Option a, Path 10: Water Use Reduction-3o% Reduction 3. Summary of Referenced Standards AS IA International Standards http://www.astm.org ASTM E1980-01, Standard Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal and Low-Sloped Opaque Surfaces This standard describes how surface reflectivity and emissivity are combined to calculate a solar reflectance index (SRI) for a roofing material or other surface. The standard also describes a laboratory and field testing protocol that can be used to determine SRI. ASTM E408-71.(1996)m, Standard Test Methods for Total Normal Emittance of Surfaces Using Inspection-Meter Techniques This standard describes how to measure total normal emittance of surfaces using a portable inspection-meterinstrument. Thetest methods are intended forlarge surfaceswhere nondestructive testing is required. See the standard for testing steps and a discussion of thermal emittance theory. ASTM E903-96, Standard Test Method for Solar Absorptance, Reflectance, and Transmitaance of Materials Using Integrating Spheres Referenced in the ENERGY STAR roofing standard, this test method uses spectrophotometers and need be applied only for initial reflectance measurement. It specifies methods of computing solarweighted properties using the measured spectral values. This test method is applicable to materials S S CI Credit I OPTION 2: PATH 5 2C09 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 27 EFTA00281566 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 5 having both specular and diffuse optical properties. Except for transmitting sheet materials that are heterogeneous, patterned, or corrugated, this test method is preferred over Test Method E1084. The ENERGY STAR roofing standard also allows the use of reflectometers to measure roofing materials' solar reflectance. See the roofing standard for more details. 4. Implementation Choose a base building that has incorporated highly reflective roof surfaces or vegetated roofs. Use the LEED-certified buildings database to find local projects that have achieved LEED credit for roof heat island reduction and include this requirement in the criteria for selecting a base building. Local roofing product representatives may be able to identify buildings where their compliant products have been installed. 5. Timeline and Team The project team should make an installed vegetated roof or reflective roofing a criterion for site selection. Real estate brokers and leasing agents can help identify buildings that comply. 6. Calculations i. Determine the total roof surface area of the project building (square feet). a. Determine the area of the roof covered by mechanical equipment, solar energy panels, and appurtenances, and deduct these areas from the total roof surface area. 3. Determine whether the areas of qualifying reflective and vegetated roofing are adequate to meet the credit requirements, using Equation'. Tablet provides SRI values for typical roofing materials. Project teams may use these values to determine compliance if manufacturers' data are not available for existing installed materials. Equation 1 Area of Low Slope SRI Material 78 X 0.75 SRI Value Area of Steep — Slope SRI Material 0.75 29 X SRI Value Vegetated Roof Area 0.5 Total Roof Deducoci Area Area Table 1. Solar Reflectance Index (SRI) for Typical Roofing Materials Example SRI Values for Solar Infrared Temperature Solar Solar Reflectance Infrared Eminence Temperature Rise SRI Gray EPDM 0.23 0.87 68°F 21 Gray asphalt shingle 0.22 0.91 67°F 22 Unpainted cement tile 0.25 0.9 65°F 25 White granular surface bitumen 0.26 0.92 63°F 28 Red clay tile 0.33 0.9 58°F 36 Light gravel on buitt-up roof 0.34 0.9 57°F 37 Aluminum coating 0.61 0.25 48°F 50 White-coated gravel on built-up roof 0.65 0.9 28°F 79 White coating on metal roof 0.67 0.85 28°F 82 White EPDM 0.69 0.87 25F 84 White cement tile 0.73 0.9 21F 90 White coating, 1 coat. 8 mils 0.8 0.91 14F 100 PVC white 0.83 0.92 I IF 104 White coating, 2 coats, 20 mils 0.85 0.91 9F 107 Source: LBNL Cool Roofing Materials Database 28 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281567 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. • Prepare roof drawings that show the total roof area and the areas of reflective materials or vegetated roof systems. • List the roofing products and their emittance percentages, reflectance percentages, SRI values, and slopes. Retain product specifications that verify product characteristics. 8. Examples The project has selected tenant space in an office building that has a to,000-square-foot low-slope roof with both high-reflectance roofing materials and a vegetated roof system. The vegetated roof makes up 35% of the roof area. White EPDM roofing with a SRI of 85 covers 60% of the roof area, and the remaining5% is covered by rooftop mechanical equipment. Table 2 summarizes the roofing types. Table 2. Roofing Area Summary, by Type Roofing Type Area GO Vegetated roof area 3.500 White EPDM roof area (SRI-851, low slope 6.000 Mechanical equipment 500 Total roof area 10.000 Using Equation 1, ( 6" ▪ 3500 = 0.75 0.5 85 78 X 15,718 a ( 10,000 - 500 ) n this example, the white EPDM roofing plus the vegetated roofing meets the requirements of this credit, and the project earns 1 point. 9. Exemplary Performance Projects may earn credit for exemplary performance under SS Credit 1, Path 12, Other Quantifiable Environmental Performance, by demonstrating that t00% of the building's roof area (excluding mechanical equipment, photovoltaic panels, and skylights) consists of a vegetated roof system. 10. Regional Variations Heat island intensities depend on an area's weather and climate, proximity to water bodies, and topography." Buildings in very cold climates or at high latitudes may not experience the same rise of surface and ambient temperatures. Projects in urban areas and those in climate zones t, 2, and 3 (as defined by ASNIIASHRAEIIESNA Standard 90.1-2007) are most affected by heat islands and are likely to benefit from measures to decrease cooling loads by avoiding additional heat absorption. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Tenants who have located in a building that uses the strategies described in this credit may not be responsible for their upkeep but should nevertheless be aware of the need to maintain materials and systems. Surface materials with high reflectivity should be cleaned at least every zyears to maintain good reflectance. S S CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 5 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 29 EFTA00281568 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 5 Building operators must have the necessary information to maintain any vegetated roofing system. An operations plan should specify the schedule for inspecting the roof membrane and plantings and maintaining drainage paths. Until plants are fully established, watering and fertilization may be necessary. Properly designed green roofs do not require mowing or cutting, though occasional weeding may be required. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (httpifiwww.usgbc.org(pLojecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites Cool Roof Rating Council http://wv.coolroofs.org This nonprofit organization is dedicated to implementing and communicating fair, accurate, and credible radiative energy performance rating systems for roof surfaces; supporting research into roofing surfaces' energy-related radiative properties, including durability; and providing education and objective support to parties interested in understanding and comparing various roofing options. ENERGY STAR. Reflective Roofing Products http://www.energystar.govfindex.cfrn? roof prods.pr_roof_products This website provides solar reflectance levels required to meet ENERGY STAR® requirements for qualified roof products. Green Roofs for Healthy Cities This nonprofit industry association consists of individuals and public and private organizations committed to developing a market for green roof infrastructure products and services across North America. Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory, Heat Island Group, Cool Roofs http://eetd.lbl.gov/HeatIsland/CoolRoofsj This site offers a wealth of information about cool roof research and technology, including links to the cool roofing materials database. Pennsylvania State University, Center for Green Roof Research http://hortWeb.cas.psu.eduiresearchigreenroofcenteri The center aims to demonstrate and promote green roof research, education, and technology transfer in the Northeastern United States. Whole Building Design Guide, Extensive Green Roofs http://ww.wbdg.orgtresourcestreenroofs.plip This article by Charlie Miller, PE, details the features and benefits of constructing green roofs. 13. Definitions Albedo is synonymous with solar reflectance. Emissivity is the ratio ofthe radiation emitted by a surface to the radiation emitted by a black body at the same temperature. Greenhouse gases are relatively transparent to the higher-energy sunlight but trap lower-energy infrared radiation (e.g., carbon dioxide, methane, and CFCs). Heat island effect refers to the absorption of heat by hardscapes, such as dark, nonreflective pavement and buildings, and its radiation to surrounding areas. Particularly in urban areas, other 30 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281569 sources may include vehicle exhaust, air-conditioners, and street equipment; reduced airflow from tall buildings and narrow streets exacerbates the effect. Infrared (or thermal) emittance is a parameter between o and 1 (or o% and t00%) that indicates the ability of a material to shed infrared radiation (heat). The wavelength range for this radiant energy is roughly 5 to 40 micrometers. Most building materials (including glass) are opaque in this part of the spectrum and have an emittance of roughly 0.9. Materials such as clean, bare metals are the most important exceptions to the 0.9 rule. Thus clean, untarnished galvanized steel has low emittance, and aluminum roof coatings have intermediate emittance levels. Solar reflectance, or albedo, is a measure of the ability of a surface material to reflect sunlight— visible, infrared,and ultraviolet wavelengths—on a scale of0 to 1. Black paint has a solar reflectance of 0; white paint (titanium dioxide) has a solar reflectance oft. The solar reflectance index (SRI) is a measure of a material's ability to reject solar heat, as shown by a small temperature rise. Standard black (reflectance 0.05, emittance 0.90) is o and standard white (reflectance 0.80, emittance 0.9o) is too. For example, a standard black surface has a temperature rise of 90-F (50-C) in full sun, and a standard white surface has a temperature rise of 1¢6'F (8.1-C). Once the maximum temperature rise of a given material has been computed, the SRI can be calculated by interpolating between the values for white and black. Materials with the highest SRI values are the coolest choices for paving. Because of the way SRI is defined, particularly hot materials can even take slightly negative values, and particularly cool materials can even exceed too. (Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory Cool Roofing Materials Database) SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 5 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 31 EFTA00281570 CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 6 OPTION 2, PATH 6: LIGHT POLLUTION REDUCTION 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues This credit option seeks to recognize projects that minimize their contribution to light pollution from interior lighting. Light pollution consists of both light trespass (affecting adjacent sites) and sky glow (affecting the sky). Poorly designed interior perimeter lighting can affect the nocturnal ecosystem on the site if interior light passes through translucent or transparent openings in the building envelope and unnecessarily illuminates the exterior environment. This light pollution can hinder enjoyment of the night sky for both the building occupants and neighbors. Minimizing light pollution encourages nocturnal wildlife to thrive at the building site and permits observations of the night sky. Another benefit is better visual comfort and improved visibility. Sensitively designed lighting systems that minimize glare and provide more uniform light at lower levels create aesthetically pleasing, more secure environments. Acarefullydesigned and maintained lighting system can help a project be a nonintrusive member of the community. Economic Issues Well-controlled lighting provides the right amount of lighting in the right place at the right times, thereby saving energy. By selecting high-efficiency luminaries and light sources, the project team can maximize energy and maintenance savings over the lifetime of the building. 2. Related Credits By lighting areas only as necessary, designers avoid wasting light by spilling it through openings in the envelope (translucent or transparent). These efforts, along with the integration of lighting controls, support the achievement of the following credits: ■ EA Credit 1.1: Optimize Energy Performance—Lighting Power ■ EA Credit 1.2: Optimize Energy Performance—Lighting Controls Development of a comprehensive lighting design that has individual and group controls should also include automatic occupancy controls to shut off interior perimeter lighting when spaces are not occupied. These considerations relate to the following credit: • IEQ Credit 6.1: Controllability of Systems—Lighting 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this credit. 4. Implementation Locate the project in a building with interior and exterior lighting equipment designed to eliminate light trespass from the building and the site, and include this requirement in the base building selection criteria. Local USGBC chapters or the Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA) may have detailed information on projects that have achieved light pollution reduction requirements. Project teams can meet the requirements of this credit through t of a options: OPTION 1 All nonemergency interior lighting fixtures must be automatically controlled and programmed to turn off or have their input power reduced by at least so% following regular business hours. Controls may be automatic sweep timers, occupancy sensors, or programmed master lighting 32 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281571 control panels. Manual or occupancy-based override capabilities that enable lights to be turned on for after-hours use should be included in the design. Projects operating 24 hours a day are exempt from the after-hours override automatic shutoff and thus must use Option 2. OPTION 2 All exterioropenings, such as windows, must have shielding that can be automatically controlled and programmed to close from 11:00 to 5:00 M. Shielding options include automatic shades that have less than 14A transmittance. An example is a rolling shade that controls light transmittance and is operated automatically, with a timer. 5. Timeline and Team Duringthedesign phase, the project team should considerstrategiesthatwill reduceoreliminatelight from exiting the building through openings in the building envelope (translucent or transparent). During construction administration, the architect or design team should verify that the shop drawings are compliant with the intended design. Field verification and adjustment of fixtures and fixture heads should take place during installation. After construction is complete, commissioning will ensure that automatic lighting controls or shading devices are operating according to the design intent. 6. Calculations There are no calculations required for this credit 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ If automatic controls are used for interior lighting, prepare drawings showing their location and incorporate the sequence of operation for lighting into drawings and specifications or the building operation plan. ■ [(automatic shading devices are used to control interior lighting, prepare drawings of shading devices, assemble specifications or product data showing that the shading devices result in transmittance of less than 1095, and incorporate the sequence of operation for automatic shading devices into drawings and specifications or the building operation plan. 8. Examples There are no examples for this credit. 9. Exemplary Performance This path is not eligible for exemplary performance under SS Credit 1, Path 12, Other Quantifiable Environmental Performance. 10. Regional Variations There are no regional variations associated with this credit. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations The project team should ensure that automatic control schedules for lighting or shading devices are documented in the building's operation plan. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 6 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 33 EFTA00281572 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 6 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (httpWwww.usgbc.orgiptojecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites Illuminating Engineering Society of North America httpg/www.iesna.org The mission of IESNA is to benefit society by promoting knowledge and disseminating information for the improvement of the lighted environment. International Dark-Sky Association http://www.darksIcy.ozgiida/ida_z/indoc_html This nonprofit agency is dedicated to educating about and providing solutions to light pollution. Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute, Lighting Research Center http://www.Ircspi.edu This leading university-based research center is devoted to providing objective information about lighting technologies, applications, and products. Skyand Telescope This site Includes facts on light pollution and its effect on astronomy and information about purchasing light pollution-minimizing light fixtures. Print Media TheIESNALightingHandbook, ninth edition,edited by Mark S. Rea (Illuminating Engineering Society of North America, woo). Lighting for Exterior Environments RP-33-99, by The IESNA Outdoor Environment Lighting Committee (Illuminating Engineering Society of North America,t999). Concepts in Practice Lighting: Lighting Design in Architecture, by Torquil Barker (B.T. Batsford Ltd., 1997). The Design ofLighting, by Peter Tregenza and David Loe (E Sc AN Spona998). 13. Definitions Light pollution is waste light from building sites that produces glare, is directed upward to the sky, or is directed off the site. Waste light does not increase nighttime safety, utility, or security and needlessly consumes energy. Light trespass is obtrusive light that is unwanted because of quantitative, directional, or spectral attributes. Light trespass can cause annoyance, discomfort, distraction, or loss of visibility. Sky glow is caused by stray light from unshielded light sources and light reflecting off surfaces that then enter the atmosphere and illuminate and reflect off dust, debris, and water vapor. Sky glow can substantially limit observation of the night sky, compromise astronomical research, and adversely affect nocturnal environments. 34 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281573 OPTION 2, PATH 7: WATER EFFICIENT LANDSCAPING-REDUCE BY 50%, AND PATH 8: WATER EFFICIENT LANDSCAPING-NO POTABLE WATER USE OR NO IRRIGATION 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Landscape irrigation practices in the United States consume large quantities of potable water. Outdoor uses, primarily landscaping, account for 30% of the z6 billion gallons of water consumed daily in the United States.'s Improved landscaping practices can dramatically reduce and even eliminate irrigation needs. Maintaining or reestablishing native or adapted plants on building sites fosters a self-sustaining landscape that requires minimal supplemental water and provides other environmental benefits as well, such as attracting native wildlife and creating a building site integrated with its natural surroundings. In addition, native or adapted plants tend to require less fertilizer and pesticides, and therefore reduce water quality degradation and other environmental impacts. Water-efficient landscaping helps conserve local and regional potable water resources. Maintaining natural aquifer conditions is important to providing reliable water sources for future generations. Consideration of water issues during planning can encourage development where resources can support it and prevent development if it would exceed the resource capacity. Economic Issues A water-efficient landscape design can lower municipal water use and maintenance requirements for the base building. The resulting cost savings may be reflected in lower lease rates. 2. Related Credits In addition to reducing potable water consumption, rainwater capture systems can be used to manage stormwater runoff and can help projects earn points under these credits: ■ SS Credit 4 Option 2, Path z: Stormwater Design—Quantity Control ■ SS Credit 4 Option 2, Path 3: Stormwater Design—Quality Control Landscape plantings that shade hardscapes can help achieve the following credit: ■ SS Credit 4 Option 2, Path 4: Heat Island Effect—Nonroof Additionally, landscape plantings can mitigate climate conditions and reduce building energy consumption (for example, by shading south-facing windows), contributing to this credit: ■ EA Credit I: Optimize Energy Performance The use of a vegetated roof may contribute to the achievement of another SS credit: ■ SS Credit t, Option 2, Path 5: Heat Island Effect—Roof 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this credit. 4. Implementation Choose a base building with water-efficient landscape irrigation that is designed to reduce or eliminate the use of potable water by incorporating features such as these: ■ Landscaping with indigenous plants. CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 7: PATH 8 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 35 EFTA00281574 CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 7. PATH 8 ■ Rainwater collection systems. • High-efficiency irrigation strategies, such as microirrigation systems, moisture sensors, timers, and weather database controllers. • Graywater systems used for site irrigation. Landscape irrigation using "nuisance" groundwater (i.e., groundwater that must be pumped away from the building's basement or foundation) is an example of a strategy to achieve this option. However, a well installed specifically to collect groundwater for irrigation does not meet the intent of this credit. Additionally, a project site that has no landscaping is not eligible. Buildings without vegetation or other ecologically appropriate features on the grounds can nevertheless earn points by reducing the use of potable water for watering any roof or courtyard garden space or outdoor planters, provided the planters or garden space cover at least 5% of the building site area (including building footprint, hardscape area, parking footprint, etc.). If the planters or garden space cover less than 5% of the building site area, the project is ineligible for this credit. 5. Timeline and Team The project team should make installed native landscaping, rainwater collection systems, highefficiency irrigation strategies, or graywater systems a criterion for site selection. Real estate brokers and leasing agents can help identify buildings that comply. 6. Calculations The following calculation methodology is used to support the credit submittals for Options 7 and 8. To quantify water-efficient landscaping measures, determine the irrigation volumes for the designed landscape irrigation system for July and compare these with irrigation volumes required for a baseline landscape irrigation system. The resulting water savings is the difference between the 2 systems. The factors that must be calculated to determine irrigation volumes are explained in detail in the following paragraphs and summarized in Tablet. To calculate the percentage reduction in potable or natural water use for this credit, establish a baseline water use rate for the project and then calculate the as-designed water use rate according to the steps listed below. Standard Assumptions and Variables • All calculations are based on irrigation during July. ■ The landscape coefficient (KO indicatesthevolumeofwaterlost throughevapotranspiration. It varies with the plant species, microclimate, and planting density. The formula for determining the landscape coefficient is given in Equation 3. ■ The species factor (Ics) accounts for variation in water needs by different plant species, divided into 3 categories (high, average, and low water need). To determine the appropriate category for a plant species, use plant manuals and professional experience. This factor is somewhat subjective, but landscape professionals know the general water needs of plant species. Landscapes can be maintained in acceptable condition at about 50%of the reference evapotranspiration (ETO) value, and thus the average value of ks is 0.5. If a species does not require irrigation once it is established, then the effective ks = a and the resulting Kr. = 0. • The density factor (Ica) accounts for the number of plants and the total leaf area of a landscape. Sparsely planted areas will have lessevapotranspiration than densely planted areas. An average kd is applied to areas where shading from trees is 60% tome:1%. This is equivalent to shrubs and groundcover that shade 90% to 100% of the landscape area. Low kd values are found where shading from trees is less than 60%, or where shrub and groundcover shading is less than 90% 36 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281575 For instance, a 25% ground shading from trees results in a Ica value of 0.5. In mixed plantings, where the tree canopy shades understory shrubs and groundcover, evapotranspiration increases. This represents the highest level of landscape density, and the kd value is to to 1.3. ■ The microclimatefactor (km) accountsforenvironmentalconditionsspecifictothelandscape, including temperature, wind, and humidity. For instance, parking lots increase wind and temperature effects on adjacent landscapes. The average Iczne is t.o; this refers to conditions where evapotranspiration is unaffected by buildings, pavements, reflective surfaces, or slopes. High-kmconditions occur where evaporative potential is increased byheat-absorbing and reflective surfaces or exposure to high winds; examples include parking lots, west sides of buildings, and the west and south-facing slopes, medians, and areas experiencing wind tunnel effects. Low-km landscapes include shaded areas and areas protected from wind, such as north sides of buildings, courtyards, areas under wide building overhangs, and north-facing slopes. STEP 1. Create a Design Case Determine the landscape area for the project. This number must represent the as-designed landscape area and must use the same project boundary as is used in all other LEED credits. Sort the total landscape area into the major vegetation types (trees, shrubs, groundcover, mixed, and turf grass), listing the area for each. Determine the following characteristics for each landscape area: species factor (lcs), density factor (ka), and microclimate factor (km). Recommended values for each are provided in Table t. Select the low, average, or high value for each parameter as appropriate for the site. Explain any variance from these recommended values in the credit narrative. Table 1. Landscape Factors Vegetation type Species Factor 041 Density Factor (ro) Microclimate Factor (knc) Low Average High Low Average Hie. Low Average High Trees 0.2 0.5 0.9 0.5 1.0 1.3 0.5 1.0 1.4 Shrubs 0.2 0.5 0.7 0.5 1.0 1.1 0.5 1.0 1.3 Groundcover 0.2 0.5 0.7 0.5 1.0 1.1 0.5 1.0 1.2 Mixed trees. shrubs. groundcover 0.2 0.5 0.9 0.6 1.1 1.3 0.5 1.0 1.4 Turf grass 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.6 1.0 1.0 0.8 1.0 1.2 Calculate the landscape coefficient (KL) by multiplying the 3 area characteristics, as shown in Equation 1. Equation 1 K1 = k, x ks x km, Determine the reference evapotranspiration rate (ETo) for the region. This rate is a measurement of the total amount ofwater needed to growa reference plant (such as grass or alfalfa), expressed in millimeters or inches. The values for ET° in various regions throughout the United States can be found in regional agricultural data (see Resources). The ETO for July is used in the LEED calculation because this is typically the month with the greatest evapotranspiration effects and, therefore, the greatest irrigation demands. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 7. PATH 8 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 37 EFTA00281576 CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 7. PATH 8 Calculate the project-specific evapotranspiration rate (ETL) for each landscape area by multiplying the (ETO) by the ICE., as shown in Equation a. Equation 2 Eh fin) = ETo X 1(i. Determine the irrigation efficiency (IE) by listing the type of irrigation used for each landscape area and the corresponding efficiency. Table a lists irrigation efficiencies for different irrigation systems. Calculations will be accepted that include water use reduction and efficiencies from rotating heads, pressure-regulating heads, and "smart" irrigation controls. These numbers must be supported by either manufacturers' documentation or detailed calculations by the landscape designer. Table 2. Irrigation Types and Efficiencies TYPe E ffici ency Sprinkler 0.625 Drip 0.90 Determine, if applicable, the controller efficiency (CE), the percentage reduction in water use from any weather-based controllers or moisture sensor-based systems. This number must be supported by either manufacturers' documentation or detailed calculations by the landscape designer. Determine, if applicable, the volume of reuse water (harvested rainwater, recycled graywater, or treated wastewater) available in July. Reuse water volumes may depend on rainfall volume and frequency, building-generated graywater and wastewater, and on-site storage capacity. Onsite reuse systems must be modeled to predict volumes generated on a monthly basis as well as optimal storage capacity. For harvested rainwater calculations, project teams may either use the collected rainwater total for July based on historical average precipitation, or use historical data for each month to model collection and reuse throughout the year. The latter method allows the project team to determine the volume of water that can be expected in the storage cistern at the beginning ofluly and add it to the expected rainwater volume collected during the month; it also allows the team to determine the optimal size of the rainwater cistern. To calculate the total water applied (TWA) and total potable water applied (TPWA) for each landscape area and the installed case, use Equations 3 and 4. Equation 3 Design Case TWA (gal) = ( Area (s0 X Eh (in) IE ) X CE X 0.6233 (gaUsfAn) Equation 4 Design Case TPWA (gal) = TWA (ga0 — Reuse Water (gal) STEP 2. Create the Baseline Case In the baseline case, the species factor (k3), density factor (Ica), and irrigation efficiency (IE) are set to average values representative of conventional equipment and design practices. The same microclimate factors (kmc) and the reference evapotranspiration rate (ET0) are used in both cases. If the project substitutes low-water-using plants (such as shrubs) for high-waterusing types (such as turf grass), the landscape areas can be reallocated in the baseline case, but 38 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281577 the total landscape area must remain the same. The baseline cannot be t00% turf grass if typical landscaping practices in the region include trees, shrubs, and planting beds. Calculate the TWA for the baseline case using Equation 5. Equation 5 Ell. (in) Baseline Case TWA (gal) = Area (sr) X X 0.6233 (galisf/in) IE STEP 3 Calculate the percentage reduction in total irrigation water use (potable and reuse) AND the percentage reduction of potable water use for irrigation. Calculate the percentage reduction of potable water use according to Equation 6. Equation 6 Percentage Reduction of Potable Water 1%) Design TPWA 1 ) X 100 Baseline TWA If the percentage reduction of potable water use for irrigation achieved is so% or more, it meets the requirements for Option 7. If the percentage reduction of potable water use for irrigation achieved is t00% and the percentage reduction of total water use for irrigation is so% or more, it meets the requirements for Option 8 as well as Option 7. If the percentage reduction of potable water use for irrigation is 1OO%, also calculate the percentage reduction of total water (potable plus reuse), according to Equation 7. Equation 7 Percentage Reduction of = Total Water (%) Design TWA Baseline TWA X too 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Estimate the amounts of potable and nonpotable water used for landscape irrigation. ■ Estimate the percentage reduction in water demand, and report on the portion of irrigation that will come from each nonpotable source (if any). • Prepare a landscape plan showing a planting schedule and irrigation system. 8. Examples EXAMPLE 1. OPTION 2, PATH 7 An office building in Austin, Texas, has a total site area of 6,000 square feet. The site comprises 3 landscape types: shrubs, mixed vegetation, and turf grass. MI are irrigated with a combination of potable water and graywater harvested from the building. The reference evapotranspiration rate (ETO) for Austin in July, obtained from the local agricultural data service, is 8.12. The highefficiency irrigation system utilizes drip irrigation with an efficiency of go% and reuses an estimated 4,zoo gallons of graywater during July. Table 3 shows the calculations to determine total potable water use for the designed case. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 7. PATH 8 2C09 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 39 EFTA00281578 CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 7. PATH 8 The baseline case uses the same reference evapotranspiration rate and total site area. However, it uses sprinklers for irrigation (IE = 0.625), does not take advantage of graywater harvesting, and irrigates only shrubs and turf grass. Calculations to determine total water use for the baseline case are presented in Table 4. The design case has an irrigation water demand of 14,63zgallons.Graywater reuse provides 4,zoo gallons toward the demand, and this volume is treated as a credit in the water calculation. Thus, the total potable water use in July is 1443z gallons. The baseline case has an irrigation demand of 38,967 gallons and uses no graywater. The project thus achieves a potable water savings of 73% and earns SS Credit 1, Path 7. Table 3. Design Case (July) Landscape Type Area (sf) Species Factor (kr) Density Factor Ord) Microclimate Factor waked KL ETL IE TWA (gal) Shrubs 1.200 Low 0.2 Avg 1.0 High 1.3 0.26 2.11 Drip 1.754.5 Mixed 3.900 Low 0.2 Avg 1.1 High 1.4 0.31 2.50 Drip 6,755 Turf grass 900 Avg 0.7 Avg 1.0 High 1.2 0.84 6.82 Sprinkler 6,122 Subtotal TWA (gal) 14,632 July rainwater a d graywata harvest (gall (4.200) TPWA (gall 10,432 Table 4. Baseline Case (July) Landscape Type Area (so Species Facta (") Density Facta (lad Microclimate Factor (km) KL ETL IE 1WA (gal) Shrubs 1.200 Avg 0.5 Avg 1.0 High 1.3 0.65 5.28 Sprinkler 6.316.4 Turf grass 4,800 Avg 0.7 Avg 1.0 High 1.2 0.84 6.82 Sprinkler 32.650.8 Subtotal TWA (gal) 38,967 EXAMPLE 2. OPTION 2, PATH 8 The project team could achieve Path 8 bycompletelyeliminating the need for potable water. One strategy is to rely on native plants and harvest rainwater for irrigation use, as shown in Figure 1. Figure 1. A sketch of potential areas for rainwater collection and native plantings on-site to eliminate the need for potable water for irrigation. water low Iron roof le garden • alt. In Iron roof to cistern for water collection droughttts era planting; 40 LIED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GRIEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281579 Figure 2. A site section showing the cistern for rainwater harvesting which feeds a drip irrigation system to eliminate any potable water needed for irrigation. Et. OIN nine. chnsit hirdt phnii ten nisralls loltrazt *el tool+o. the gii0en UnM 4O 0,/ $3,11:et tM pv.PNOI 9. Exemplary Performance This path is not eligible for exemplary performance under SS Credit 1, Path 12, Other Quantifiable Environmental Performance. 10. Regional Variations Much of the United States is faced with increasing demands on existing water supplies, and it is therefore important to landscape sites appropriately for the climate. Appropriately designed landscaping should take into account climate and microclimate, sun exposure, soil type, site drainage, topography, and irrigation options. In hot, dry climates, use drought-tolerant plants and xeriscape designs. Reducing or eliminating turf grass will lessen the demand on potable water. Rocks and stones can be incorporated into the landscape instead. If turf grass is desired, select a species that can endure drought. In hot, humid, and temperate climates, use native plants combined with rain or moisture sensors to avoid unnecessary watering in the wet seasons. The use of captured rainwater can help eliminate the use of potable water for irrigation needs. In cold climates, install hardy native plants and trees. Rain or moisture sensors will prevent excessive watering. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations The building's facility manager will typically be responsible for the operations and maintenance of the water-efficient landscaping systems. A simple way to increase the efficiency of a conventional system is to schedule watering early or late in the daywhen evaporation is minimal.This allows more water to soak into the ground and reach the roots of the plants. Irrigation systems and controllers must be commissioned to work optimally. This includes inspecting, maintaining, and adjusting the systems on a regular basis. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (httpdhvww.usgbc.org(projecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites American Water Works Association, WaterWiser: The Water Efficiency Clearinghouse httruwww.awwa.orydwaterwiser This clearinghouse includes articles, reference materials, and papers on all forms of water efficiency. California State University at Fresno, Center for Irrigation Technology httplicati.csufresno.edulcit CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 7. PATH 8 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 41 EFTA00281580 CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 7. PATH 8 CIT is an independent research and testing facility providing information to designers, manufacturers, and users of irrigation equipment. Irrigation Association htuxfiwww.irrigation.org This nonprofit organization promotes products that efficiently use water in irrigation applications. Rain Birds ET Manager"' Scheduler This free software provides sufficient local evapo-transpiration data for the United States and Canada. Use data from the closest or most climate-appropriate location. University of Missouri Extension, Water-Efficient Gardening and Landscaping http://muextension.missouri.edukcplorlagguides/hortigoOtz.htm This website has general descriptions and strategies for water efficiency in gardens and landscapings. Print Media Evapotranspiration and Inigation Water Requirements, ASCE Manuals and Reports on Engineering Practice No.70 (ASCE, 1990). Efficient Irrigation: A Reference Manual for Turf and Landscape, by Geoff Connellan (University of Melbourne, 2002). Estimating Irrigation Water Needs of Landscape Plantings in California (University of California Cooperative Extension and California Department of Water Resources,1999). This guide explains the landscaping coefficient method established by the University of California. http://wv.owue.vrater.ca.govidocstwucolsoo.pdf. Landscape Inigation: Design and Management, by Stephen W. Smith (John VViley &Sons, 1996). Ttuffrn.gation Manual, fifth edition, by Richard B. Choate (Telsco Industries, 1994). Water-Efficient Landscaping: Preventing Pollution and Using Resources Wisely (the EPA, 2002). This EPA manual describes ways to reduce water consumption through creative landscaping techniques. 13. Definitions An aquifer is an underground water-bearing rock formation that supplies groundwater, wells, and springs. Conventional irrigation refers to the most common irrigation system used in the region where the project is located. A common conventional irrigation system uses pressure to deliver water and distributes it through sprinkler heads above the ground. Drip irrigation delivers water at low pressure through buried mains and submains. From the submains, water is distributed to the soil through a network of perforated tubes or emitters. Drip irrigation is a high-efficiency type of microirrigation. Evapotranspiration is the loss of water by evaporation from the soil and by transpiration from plants. It is expressed in millimeters per unit of time. Graywater is defined by the Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) in its Appendix G, Gray Water Systems for Single-Family Dwellings, as "untreated household wastewater which has not come into contact with toilet waste. Greywater includes used water from bathtubs, showers, bathroom wash basins, and water from clothes-washer and laundrytubs. It must not include waste water from kitchen sinks or dishwashers." The International Plumbing Code (I PC) defines graywater in its Appendix C, Gray 42 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281581 Water Recycling Systems, as "waste water discharged from lavatories, bathtubs, showers, clothes washers and laundry sinks." Some states and local authorities allow kitchen sink wastewater to be included in graywater. Other differences with the UPC and IPC definitions can likely be found in state and local codes. Project teams should comply with graywater definitions as established by the authority havingjurisdiction in the project area. The landscape area is the total site area less the building footprint, paved surfaces, water bodies, and patios. Potable water meets or exceeds the EPA's drinking water quality standards and is approved for human consumption by the state or local authorities having jurisdiction; it may be supplied from wells or municipal water systems. Xeriscaping is a landscaping method that makes routine irrigation unnecessary. It uses droughtadaptable and low-water plants as well as soil amendments such as compost and mulches to reduce evaporation. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 7. PATH 8 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 43 EFTA00281582 CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 9 OPTION 2, PATH 9: INNOVATIVE WASTEWATER TECHNOLOGIES 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Water closets and urinals do not require the same high level of water quality that is necessary for fixtures such as faucets and showerheads. Reducing the amount of water needed for the potable water supply reduces the total amount withdrawn from natural water bodies. Similarly, reducing or eliminating the volume of sewage that leaves the site reduces public infrastructure, chemical inputs, energy use, and emissions at municipal water treatment works. Water efficiency and reuse can greatly reduce these environmental impacts, and project teams should consider comparing the environmental impacts of off-site treatment and supply versus on-site treatment. On-sitewastewater treatment systems transform perceived "wastes" into resources that can be used on the building site and provide opportunities to enhance occupants' understanding of nutrient cycles. These resources include treated water volumes for potable and nonpotable use, as well as nutrients that can be applied to the site to improve soil conditions. Economic Issues Facilities and spaces that generate large amounts of wastewater can realize considerable savings by reducing the amount of potable water needed for sewage conveyance. High-efficiency toilets and urinals may have a minimal cost premium depending on the building type, but other strategies, such as recycling graywater or rainwater harvesting, require added initial investment by the building developer and may be reflected in the lease rates for these properties. Choosing space in a building with high-efficiency plumbing systems, or incorporating them into tenant spaces where applicable, can reduce water utility costs for the tenant. 2. Related Credits Efforts to reduce potable water for sewage conveyance can contribute to achieving the following credits: ■ SS Credit t Option B, Path to: Water Use Reduction-30% ■ WE Prerequisite t: Water Use Reduction ■ WE Credit 1: Water Use Reduction Water treatment systems, if included in the tenant scope of work, require commissioning and are related to the following credits: ■ EA Prerequisite 1: Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems ■ EA Credit z: Enhanced Commissioning 3. Summary of Referenced Standards U.S. Energy Policy Act (EPAct) of199z (and as amended) This act addresses energy and water use in commercial, institutional, and residential facilities. U.S. Energy Policy Act (EPAct) of 2005 This statute became U.S. law in August zoos. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials Uniform Plumbing Code, Section 402.0: Water-Conserving Fixtures and Fittings, effective zoo6 Publication IAPMO/ANSI UPC 1-2006 http:thvww.iapmaorg The Uniform Plumbing Code defines water-conserving fixtures and fittings for water closets, 44 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281583 urinals, and metered faucets. This code, accredited by the American National Standards Institute, safeguards life, health, property, and public welfare by regulating and controlling the design, construction, installation, quality, location, operation, maintenance, and use of plumbing systems. International Code System, International Plumbing Code, Section 604, Design of Building Water Distribution System, effective we:16 International Code Council http://wmv.iccsafe.org The International Plumbing Code defines maximum flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures and fittings for use in public and private lavatories, showerheads, sink faucets, urinals, and water closets. 4. Implementation Choose abasebuilding with wastewatertechnologiesthat are designedto reduce the use ofmunicipal potable water. Either the municipal potable water used for sewage conveyance should be reduced by 50%, or 100% of the on-site wastewater should treated to tertiary standards. Include one of these requirements in the criteria for selecting a base building. Potable water is used for many functions that do not require high-quality water, such as toilet and urinal flushing and landscape irrigation. Effective methods for reducing potable water use for sewage conveyance include installation of low-consumption flush fixtures, such as high-efficiency water closets and urinals, nonwater urinals and toilet fixtures, and the harvesting of rainwater or reuse of graywater. Graywater systems collect the wastewater from sinks, showers, and other sources to reuse for flushing of toilets and urinals, to irrigate landscape, and to serve other functions that do not require potable water. Graywater treatment may be required prior to reuse depending on the intended end use and the local codes. If it is likely that a graywater system will be used in the future, install dual plumbing lines during the initial project construction to avoid the substantial costs and difficulty of adding them later. When reusing graywater volumes from the building, model the system on an annual basis to determine graywater volumes, generated storage capacity of the system, and any necessary treatment processes before reusing the water volumes. Graywater may not be consistently available throughout the year, depending on building occupants' activities. For instance, graywater volumes in typical office buildings will change only slightly with vacation schedules and holidays, but the volume in a school building will fall during the summer recess, and sufficient water may not be available for irrigation. When considering an on-site rainwater, graywater, or blacicwater collection system, first check with local government agencies for regulations and required permits. Each state has its own standards and requirements for the installation and operation of rainwater, graywater, and water treatment systems. Texas and California, for example, have standards that encourage the use of graywater systems, whereas other states have regulations that may limit or prohibit using graywater. In many areas, irrigation with graywater must be subsurface, although some regions allow aboveground irrigation. Projects that plan to treat wastewater on-site should consider constructed wetlands, mechanical recirculating sand filters, and anaerobic biological treatment reactors. The quality of rainwater is typically higher than that of collected graywater, so rainwater systems have significantly fewer code requirements and are often less expensive than graywater systems. Stormwater retention systems can be designedwith cisterns to hold rainwater runoff for nonpotable use. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 9 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 45 EFTA00281584 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 9 Local climate and weather pattems should be factored into determining the feasibilityof harvesting rainwater to reduce potable water for plumbing fixture flushing and landscape irrigation. When precipitation is evenly spread out throughout the year, rainwater harvesting systems may not require large storage capacities. 5. Timeline and Team The project team should make innovative wastewater systems a criterion for site selection. Real estate brokers and leasing agents can help identify buildings that comply. 6. Calculations The following calculations are based on the annual generation ofblacicwater volumes from plumbing fixtures such as water closets and urinals. The calculations compare the design case with a baseline case and are based on occupancy conditions and fixtures and fittings for the entire building in which the tenant space is located. User Groups It may be advantageous when performing the water use calculations to divide the facility into separate user groups, calculate water use for each, and sum the values to determine whole building performance. Usergroups are populationswithin the building that use a specific subset ofwashroom facilities. Indicate which fixtures are available to each. If all occupants within the building have access to all fixtures, or if all fixtures are standard throughout the building, enter only a single user group. That is the simpler approach, but it may be more appropriate to define two or more groups to account for different fixtures in one area of the building or special usage patterns by a population within the building. For example, if fixture usage patterns are different on the first floor, enter a separate fixture group for the first floor. The following scenario illustrates the application of different fixture usage groups. The Riggs Hotel is in an urban center. The ground floor includes a restaurant open to the public, the hotel lobby, and administrative offices. The upper floors contain guest rooms. Restaurant, backof-house, and guestroom restroom facilities have different fixture and fitting models. The project team has identified 3 distinct populations in the building and the specific restroom facilities they use: (t) restaurant (including customers and restaurant staff), (2) administrative back-of-house (including hotel administrators and operations staff), and (3) guest rooms (including hotel guests). Calculating Occupancy Calculate the FTE for regular building occupants, based on a standard 40-hour weekly occupancy period. An 8-hour occupant has an FTE value of 1.0, and part-time and overtime occupants have an FTE value based on their hours per day divided by 8 (FTE calculations for each shift of the project must be used consistently for all LEED credits). In buildings with multiple shifts, use the number of FTEs from all shifts. For residential projects, use the number of residents. Estimate the transient building occupants, such as students, visitors, and customers. Transient occupants can be reported as either a daily total or a full-time equivalent. When using daily totals for transients, match the fixture uses for each occupancy type with the values shown in Table 3 (e.g., for the daily total of students, assume 0.5 lavatory faucet uses per daily student visitor). If transients are reported as a daily full-time equivalent value, fixture uses for FTEs must be assumed regardless of the transient population's identity (e.g., for students reported as FTEs, assume 3 lavatory faucet uses per student FTE). Use a transient occupancy number that is a representative daily average over the course of a year. 46 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281585 If occupancy is not known, see Appendix 1, Default Occupancy Counts, for requirements and guidance. If the number of transient visitors per day for retail facilities is unknown, estimate the FTE value of this population based on the default values presented in Table 2. Table t provides default fixture usevalues for different occupancytypes. These values should be used inthecalculations forthis credit unless specialcircumstanceswarrant modifications. Mostbuildings with students, visitors, and retail customers will also have FTE occupants. Half of all students and visitors occupants are assumed to use a flush fixture and a lavatory faucet in the building and are not expected to use a shower or kitchen sink. A fifth of retail customers are assumed to use a flush and a flow fixture in the building and no shower or kitchen sink. The default for residential occupants is s uses per day ofwater closet and lavatory faucet, 1 shower, and 4 kitchen sink uses. For consistency across LEED projects, the calculations require the use of a balanced, 1-to-1 gender ratio unless specific project conditions warrant an alternative. For these special situations, provide a narrative description to explain the unique circumstances. Table 1. Standard Fixture Uses, by Occupancy Type Fixture Type FTE StudentNisitor Retail Customer Resident Uses/Day Water Closet — Female 3 0.5 0.2 5 —Male 1 0.1 0.1 5 Urinal — Female o 0 0 Ma — Male 2 0.4 0.1 Ma Lavatory Faucet — duration 15 sec: 12 sec with autccontrol — residential, duration 60 sec 3 0.5 0.2 5 Shower — duration 300 sec — residential, duration 480 sec 0.1 0 0 Kitchen Sink, — duration 15 sec — residential, duration 60 sec 1 Na 0 n/a 0 Na ma 4 Table 2. Default Values for Transient Retail Occupants Retail space FTE per 100 Id) Large-format retailer (greater than 50,000 square feet) 0.91 Grocery store 0.87 Restaurant 1.05 Small retailer 0.67 Service 0.77 Sources: 2001 Unifami Building Code. 2004-2005 Database for Enerp Efficiency Resources (DEER) Update Study: field investiptionamk performed by LEED Retail Cae Committee Members: ASNUPSIIRAEBESPUt 90.1-2007: LEED Reference Guide for Green Interior Design and Construction. 2009 Eotion. Design Case The design case annual water use is determined by totaling the annual volume of each fixture type and subtracting any nonpotable water supply. The design case must use the rated flow rates and flush volumes for installed plumbing fixtures and fittings. Obtain water consumption data from manufacturers' published product literature. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 9 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 47 EFTA00281586 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 9 Perform calculations for each type of blackwater-generating fixture (Table 3). Table 3. Sample B lac kwater-Generati ng Fixtures and Fittings and Water Consumption Rush Ihture Flow Se (gpf) Conventional water closet 1.6 High-efficiency toilet (HET). single-flush gravity 1.28 HET, single-flush pressure assist 1.0 HET, dual flush (full-flush) 1.6 HET, dual flush (low-flush) 1.1 HET, foam flush 0.05 Non-water toilet 0.0 Conventional urinal 1.0 High-efficiency urinal (HEU) 0.5 Nonwater urinal 0.0 If rainwater or graywater harvested on-site is used for sewage conveyance, enter the estimated quantity in the calculation. Subtract the total annual quantity of nonpotable water from the total annual design case water usage. Calculations are required to demonstrate that the reuse volumes of rainwater or graywater are sufficient to meet water closet demands. Baseline Case The baseline case annual water use is determined by setting the fixture flush rates and flow rates to default values (as opposed to actual installed values in the design case). Eligible Fixtures This credit is limited to savings generated by water using flush fixtures (i.e., urinals and water closets). 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Determine the number of occupants of each type (e.g., FTEs, retail customers, visitors). ■ Retain plumbing fixture schedules and manufacturer data showing the water consumption rates, manufacturer, and model of each fixture and fitting. ■ List plumbing fixtures by usage groups, if appliable. ■ Define each usage group used. ■ If applicable, retain information about system schematics and capacity of rainwater or graywater systems. 8. Examples EXAMPLE 1. Wastewater Treatment System On-site biological treatment transforms waste into resources that can be used on the building site. Figure 1 shows the steps for on-site treatment. As solids settle in the aerobic septic tank, microbes begin to feed and break down the waste. The closed aerobic reactor is aerated by pumps to help remove aromatic compounds. The open aerobic reactors contain plants, algae, snails, and fish that further break down the organic waste. In the constructed wetland, aerobic 48 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2O09 EDITION EFTA00281587 and anaerobic reactions remove the remaining impurities and nitrates. This creates clean, nonpotable water that can be used in irrigation systems, water closets, or cooling towers. Figure I. On-site Biological Treatment of Wastewater Closed Aerobic Reactor Waste in from the building Anaerobic Septic Tank Clean effluent out Constructed Wetland EXAMPLE 2. Calculating Design and Baseline Cases Table 4 shows sample potable water calculations for sewage conveyance for a 2-story office building with 300 occupants. The calculations are based on a typical 8-hour workday. It is assumed that building occupants are so% male and 5096female. Male occupants are assumed to use water closets once and urinals twice in a typical workday. Female occupants are assumed to use water closets 3 times. Table 4. Design Case Fixture Type Daily Uses Flowrate (gpf) Occupants Sewage Generation (gal) Low-Flow Water Closet (Male) 0 1.1 150 0 Low-Flow Water Closet (Female) 3 1.1 150 495 Composting Toilet (Male) 1 0.0 150 0 Composting Toilet (Female) 0 0.0 150 0 Waterless Urinal (Male) 2 0.0 150 0 Waterless Urinal (Female) 0 0.0 150 0 Total Daily Volume (gal) 495 Annual Work Days 260 Annual Volume (gal) 128,700 Rainwater or Graywater Reuse Volume (gal> (36,000) Total Annual Volume (gal> 92,70D First, the design case is considered to determine annual potable water usage for sewage conveyance. The building uses either nonpotable rainwater for sewage conveyance or no water SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 9 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 49 EFTA00281588 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 9 for sewage conveyance (i.e., fixtures are waterless urinals and composting toilets). Table 4 summarizes the sewage generation rates; 92,700 gallons of potable water are used annually for sewage conveyance. In the example, 36,000 gallons of rainwater are harvested and directed to water closets for flushing. Table 5. Baseline Case Flatus Type Daily Uses Flowrate (60) 0ccuParlts Sewage Generation teen Water Closet (Male) 1 1.6 150 240 Water Closet (Female) 3 1.6 150 720 Urinal (Male) 2 1.0 150 300 Urinal (Female) 0 1.0 150 0 Total Daily Volume (gal) 1.260 Annual Work Days 260 Total Annual Volume (gal) 327.600 Table 5 summarizes baseline calculations. The baseline case estimates that sewage conveyance requires 327,600 gallons of potable water per year. Comparison of the baseline with the design case indicates that the building realizes a 72% reduction in potable water volumes used for sewage conveyance (1 - 92,700/327,600). Thus, this strategy earns 2 points under this credit. When developing the baseline, only the fixtures, sewage generation rates, and the water reuse credit are different from the design case; usage rates, occupancy, and number of workdays remain the same. 9. Exemplary Performance This path is not eligible for exemplary performance under SS Credit 1, Path 12, Other Quantifiable Environmental Performance. 10. Regional Variations The necessity and availability of wastewater reuse and treatment strategies vary by region. Where aquifers cannot meet the needs of the population, rainwater and other recovered water is the least expensive alternative source. In drought-prone regions, on-site graywater and blackwater treatment may provide an alternative to using potable water for faucets and showers. Local and regional building and health codes and ordinances govern on-site water treatment and the use ofharvested rainwater and graywater;these strategies are prohibited in some states.Additionally, codes differ in their handling of alternative plumbing fixtures, such as dual-flush or low-flow water closets, composting toilets, and waterless urinals. Confirm the legality of nontraditional approaches with code officials prior to making a commitment to specific water-saving strategies. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations To ensure continued water savings as well as owner and occupant satisfaction, maintenance staff must be trained in the operations and maintenance of any specialized equipment. For example, waterless urinals generally need to be cleaned according to manufacturers' specifications and their chemical traps appropriately maintained, and 0.5-gallon and O.2-gallon flushing urinals must also be maintained according to manufacturers' specifications. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http://www.usgbc.org(projecttools) for additional resources and technical information. 50 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281589 Websites American Rainwater Catchment Systems Association http://wv.arcsa-usa.org This website includes an riety of publications such as the Texas Guide to Rainwater Harvesting. Choosing a Toilet This article in Fine Homebuilding describes several types ofwater-efficient toilets. Environmental Building News, Water: Doing More with Less This article describes building water efficiency. National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration, National Climatic Data Center http://wcvw.ncdc.noaa.govfoaincdc.html This site is useful for researching local climate data such as rainfall amounts. It also includes links to state climate offices. Rocky Mountain Institute (RMI), Water http://www.rmi.orgisitepagesjpidu.8.Op This portion of RMI's website is devoted to water conservation and efficiency. The site contains information on commercial, industrial, and institutional water use, watershed management, and articles on policy and implementation. Terry Love's Consumer Toilet Reports This website offers a plumber's perspective on many of the major toilets used in commercial and residential applications. U.S. EPA, Constructed Wetlands for Wastewater Treatment and Wildlife Habitat 17 Case Studies,1993 http://wmv.emgov/owowiwetlands/construc The case studies in this document, Publication 832/8.93-005, describe 17 wetland treatment systems that improve water quality and wildlife habitat. The projects described include systems with constructed and natural wetlands; created and restored habitats; and municipal effluent, urban stormwater, and river water quality improvements. U.S. EPA, How to Conserve Water and Use It Effectively http://+nnvtv.epa.gov/owow/NPS/chaP3.html This website provides guidance for commercial, industrial, and residential water-users on saving water and reducing sewage volumes. U.S. EPA, On-Site Wastewater Treatment Systems Manual http://wwwepa.gov/OW-OWM.htmlisepticipubsiseptic_management_handbook.pdf This manual provides a focused, performance-based approach to on-site wastewater treatment and system management, including information on a variety of on-site sewage treatment options. U.S. EPA, WaterSense http://www.epafs_oviwatersense The WaterSense Program is intended to make it easyforU.S. consumers to savewater and protectthe environment Look for the WaterSense label to help choose high-quality,water-efficient products. A variety of products is available, and they do not require a change in lifestyle. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 9 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 51 EFTA00281590 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 9 Water Closet Performance Testing This site provides 2 reports of independent test results on flush performance and reliability for a variety of toilets. Print Media Constntcted Wetlandsfor WastewaterTnahnent and Wildlre Habitat: 17 Case Studies (EPA 832/8-93-005) (U.S. EPA, 1993). Mechanical & Electrical Equipment far Buildings, eighth edition, by Benjamin Stein and John Reynolds (John Wiley and Sons,1992). Sustainable Building Technical Manual (Public Technology, Inc., t996). On-Site WastewaterTreatment Systems Manual (U.S. EPA,2002). http://ww.epa.goviowmisepticfpubsiseptic_2002_osdm_all.Of This manual provides a focused and performance-based approach to on-site wastewater treatment and system management. The document provides valuable information on various on-site sewage treatment options. 13. Definitions Aquatic systems are ecologically designed treatment systems in which a diverse community of biological organisms (e.g., bacteria, plants, fish) treat wastewater. An aquifer is an underground water-bearing rock formation that supplies groundwater, wells, and springs. Blackwater definitions vary, but wastewater from toilets and urinals is always considered blackwater. Wastewater from kitchen sinks (perhaps differentiated by the use of a garbage disposal), showers, or bathtubs is considered blackwater under some state or local codes. Composting toilet systems utilize foam flush or nonwater toilet fixtures to treat human waste via biological processes, producing biologically stable end products. Graywater is defined by the Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) in its Appendix G, Gray Water Systems for Single-Family Dwellings, as "untreated household wastewater which has not come into contact with toilet waste. Greywater includes used water from bathtubs, showers, bathroom wash basins, and water from clothes-washer and laundrytubs. It must not include waste water from kitchen sinks or dishwashers." The International Plumbing Code (I PC) defines graywater in its Appendix C, Gray Water Recycling Systems, as "waste water discharged from lavatories, bathtubs, showers, clothes washers and laundry sinks." Some states and local authorities allow kitchen sink wastewater to be included in graywater. Other differences with the UPC and IPC definitions can likely be found in state and local codes. Project teams should comply with graywater definitions as established by the authority having jurisdiction in the project area. Nonpotable water. See potable water. On-site wastewater treatment systems transport, store, treat, and dispose of wastewater volumes generated on the project site. Potable Water is water that is suitable for drinking and is supplied from wells or municipal water systems. Potable Water is water that meets drinking water quality standards and is approved for human consumption by the state or local authorities havingjurisdiction. Process water is used for industrial processes and building systems such as cooling towers, boilers, and chillers. It can also refer to water used in operational processes, such as dishwashing, clothes washing, and ice making. 52 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281591 Tertiary treatment is the highest form of wastewater treatment and includes removal of organics, solids, and nutrients as well as biological or chemical polishing, generally to effluent limits of io mg/L biological oxygen demand (BOD) 5, and m mg/L total suspended solids (TSS). Wastewater is the spent or used water from a home, community, farm, or industry that contains dissolved or suspended matter. (Federal Remediation Technologies Roundtable) Waterless urinals are dry plumbing fixtures that use advanced hydraulic design and a buoyant fluid to maintain sanitary conditions. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 9 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 53 EFTA00281592 CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 10 OPTION 2, PATH 10: WATER USE REDUCTION-30% REDUCTION 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Refer to the Benefits and Issues section of WE Credit Water Use Reduction. Option z, Path to of SS Credit t differs from WE Credit tin that it applies to whole buildings, rather than to occupant spaces within buildings. 2. Related Credits For information on related credits, refer to the Related Credits section in WE Credit t. 3. Summary of Referenced Standards The Energy PolicyAct (EPAct) of1992 (and as amended) This act addresses energy and water use in commercial, institutional, and residential facilities. The Energy PolicyAct (EPAct) of 2005 This statute became U.S. law in August zoos. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials, Uniform Plumbing Code, Section 402.0, Water-Conserving Fixtures and Fittings, effective 2006 Publication IAPMOJANSI UPC 1-2006 http:fiwww.iapmo.org The Uniform Plumbing Code defines water-conserving fixtures and fittings for water closets, urinals, and metered faucets. This ANSI-accredited code safeguards life, health, property, and public welfare by regulating and controlling the design, construction, installation, quality, location, operation, maintenance, and use of plumbing systems. International Code Council, International Plumbing Code, Section 604, Design of Building Water Distribution System, effective 2006 http://wwwiccsafe.org The International Plumbing Code defines maximum flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures and fittings for use in public and private lavatories, sink faucets, urinals, and water closets. 4. Implementation Choose a base building that is equipped with water-conserving plumbing fixtures for the entire building. The building owner is required to demonstrate that these fixtures use 30% less water compared with the baseline fixture performance, and must also have an ongoing plan to require future occupants to comply. This path applies to LEED projects that use so% or less of the building's total square footage; this requirement prevents large projects that occupy the majority of the building from getting double credit here and under WE Credit I. See WE Prerequisite 1 for more information. 5. Timeline and Team The project team should make water-conserving fixtures and fittings a criterion for site selection. Real estate brokers and leasing agents can help identify buildings that comply. See WE Prerequiste t for more information. 6. Calculations The following section describes the calculation methodology for determining water use savings under this credit. The water use reduction for the project is the difference between the calculated design case and a baseline case. The percentage is determined by dividing the design case usage 54 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281593 by the baseline usage. The methodology differs from traditional plumbing design, in which the calculations are based on fixture counts; under this credit, the water use calculation is based on fixture and fitting water consumption rates and estimated usage by the occupants. Estimated occupant usage is determined by calculating full-time equivalent (FTE) and transient occupants and applying appropriate fixture use rates to each occupant type. For this credit, occupancy is based on the entire facility, not just the tenant space occupied by the LEED project. User Groups It may be advantageous when performing the water use calculations to divide the facility into separate user groups, calculate water use for each, and sum the values to determine whole building performance. Usergroups are populationswithin the building that use a specific subset ofwashroom facilities. Indicate which fixtures are available to each. If all occupants within the building have access to all fixtures, or if all fixtures are standard throughout the building, enter only a single user group. That is the simpler approach, but it may be more appropriate to define two or more groups to account for different fixtures in one area of the building or special usage patterns by a population within the building. For example, if fixture usage patterns are different on the first floor, enter a separate fixture group for the first floor. Calculating Occupancy Calculate the FTE for regular building occupants, based on a standard 40-hour weekly occupancy period. An 8-hour occupant has an FTE value of 1.0, and part-time and overtime occupants have an FTE value based on their hours per day divided by 8 (FTE calculations for each shift of the project must be used consistently for all LEED credits). In buildings with multiple shifts, use the number of FTEs from all shifts. For residential projects, the number of residents is the occupancy number. Estimate the transient building occupants, such as students, visitors, and customers. Transient occupants can be reported as either a daily total or a full-time equivalent. When using daily totals for transients, match the fixture uses for each occupancy type with the values shown in Table 3 (e.g., for the daily total of students,assume 0.5 lavatory faucet uses per daily student visitor). If transients are reported as a daily full-time equivalent value, fixture uses for FTEs must be assumed regardless of the transient population's identity (e.g., for students reported as FTEs, assume 3 lavatory faucet uses per student FTE). Use a transient occupancy number that is a representative daily average over the course of a year. If occupancy is not known, see Appendix 1, Default Occupancy Counts, for requirements and guidance. If the number of transient visitors per day for retail facilities is unknown, estimate the FTE value of this population based on the default values presented in Tablet. Tablet provides default fixture usevalues fordifferent occupancytypes. These values should be used in the calculations for this credit unless special circumstanceswarrant modification. Most buildings with students, visitors, and retail customers will also have FTE occupants. Half of all students and visitors are assumed to use a water closet or urinal and a lavatory faucet in the building and are not expected to use a shower or kitchen sink. A fifth of retail customer occupants are assumed to use a water closet or urinal and lavatory faucet in the building and no shower or kitchen sink. The default for residential occupants is 5 uses per day of water closet and lavatory faucet, t shower,and 4 kitchen sink uses. For consistency across LEED projects, the calculations require the use of a balanced, 1-to-1 gender ratio unless specific project conditions warrant an alternative. For these special situations, provide a narrative description to explain the unique circumstances. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 10 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 55 EFTA00281594 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 10 Table 1. Default Values for Transient Retail Occupants Retail space FTE per 100 (sf) Large-format retailer (greater than 50.000 square feet) 0.91 Grocery store 0.87 Restaurant 1.05 Small retailer 0.67 Service 0.77 Sources: 2001 Uniform Building Code. 2004-2005 Database for Enemy Efficiency Resources (DEER) Update Study: feat investigation *AA performed b LEED Retail Core Committee Members: ASNUPSIIRADIESNA 90.1-2007; LEED Reference Guide for Green Interior Design and Construction. 2009 Edition. Table 2. Standard Fixture Uses, by Occupancy Type Ftchre type FTE StudentNisitor Retail Customer Resident Us shay Water Closet — Female 3 0.5 0.2 5 —Male 1 0.1 0.1 5 Urinal — Female 0 0 0 We — Male 2 0.4 0.1 n/a Lavatory Faucet — duration 15 sec; 12 sec with autccontrol — residential, duration 60 sec 0.5 0.2 5 Shower - duration 300 sec — residential, duration 480 sec 0.1 0 0 1 Kitchen Sink, — duration 15 sec — residential, duration 60 sec 1 Na 0 n/a 0 Na n/a 4 Design Case Water Consumption Calculations The design case annual water use is determined by totaling the annual volume of each fixture type and subtracting any nonpotable water supply. The design case must use the rated flow rates and flush volumes for installed plumbing fixtures and fittings. Obtain water consumption data should be obtained from manufacturers' published product literature. Table 3 shows examples of typical water consumption rates for different fixture and fitting technologies. If rainwater or graywater harvested on-site is used for sewage conveyance, enter the estimated quantity in the calculation. Subtract the total annual quantity of nonpotable water from the total annual design case water usage. Calculations are required to demonstrate that the reuse volumes of rainwater or graywater are sufficient to meet water closet demands. 56 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281595 Table 3. Sample Plumbing Fixtures and Fittings and Water Consumption Flush Mire Flow rate (get) Flow flatus Flow rate Conventional water closet 1.6 Conventional private lavatory 2.2 gpm High-efficiency toilet (HET). single-flush gravity 1.28 Conventional public lavatory 0.5 gpm or s 0.25 gpc HET, single-flush pressure assist 1.0 Conventional kitchen sink 2.2 gpm HET, dual flush (full-flush) 1.6 Low-flow kitchen sink 1.8 gpm HET, dual flush (low-flush) 1.1 Conventional shower 2.5 gpm HET, foam flush 0.05 Low-flow shower 1.8 gpm Nonwater toilet 0.0 Conventional urinal 1.0 High-efficiency urinal (HEU) 0.5 Nonwater urinal 0.0 Facilities in residences and apartments, private bathrooms in hotels and hospitals, and restrooms in commercial establishments where the fixtures are intended for the use of a family or an individual are considered private orprivate-use facilities.All other facilities are considered public or public use. If the classification for public or private use is unclear, default to public-use flow rates in performing the calculations associated with this credit. Baseline Case Water Consumption Calculations Thebaseline case annualwateruse is determinedbysettingthefucture and fittingwaterconsumption rates to the baseline values (as opposed to actual installed values in the design case). Eligible Fixtures This prerequisite is limited to savings generated bywater-using fixtures as shown in Table 1. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Determine the number of occupants of each type (e.g., FTEs, retail customers, visitors). ■ Retain plumbing fixture schedules and manufacturers' data showing the water consumption rates, manufacturer, and model of each fixture and fitting. ■ List plumbing fixtures by usage group, if appliable. ■ Define each usage group used. ■ Retain information about system schematics and capacity of any rainwater or graywater systems. 8. Examples There are no examples for this credit. 9. Exemplary Performance Projects may earn an exemplary performance credit under SS Credit t, Path 12, Other Quantifiable Environmental Performance, by demonstrating a 40%water use reduction for the whole building. 10. Regional Variations Refer to the Regional Variations section in WE Prerequisite 1. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 10 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 57 EFTA00281596 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 10 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations To ensure continued water savings and satisfaction for owners and occupants, maintenance staff should be trained in the operations and maintenance of any specialized equipment. For example, waterless urinals generally need to be cleaned according to manufacturers' specifications and their chemical traps appropriately maintained, and 0.5-gallon and O.2-gallon flushing urinals, must also be maintained according to manufacturers' specifications. Water saving opportunities through operations and maintenance should include metering and data recording efforts. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools mxiiwww.iictr.orgfrpjaS) for additional resources and technical information. Also refer to the Resources section of WE Prerequisite 1. 13. Definitions Refer to the Definitions section of WE Prerequisite 1. 58 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281597 OPTION 2, PATH 11: ON-SITE RENEWABLE ENERGY 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Energy production contributes significantly to air pollution in the United States, releasing such pollutants as sulfur dioxide, nitrogen oxide, and carbon dioxide—primary contributors to acid rain, smog, and climate change—that have widespread and adverse effects on humans, especially respiratory health. The overall environmental benefits of renewable energy depend on the energy source and the process by which energy is generated. For example, utilization of biomass can reduce the estimated 136 million tons of woody waste from construction, demolition, and land-clearing that is sent to landfills annually,i6 but if these wastes are not processed properly, their combustion could result in harmful air quality. Although renewably generated electricity is not entirely benign, it greatly decreases the negative environmental impacts of power generation. Renewable energy generated on-site is an excellent way for owners to reduce the environmental impacts associated with a building's energy requirements. Economic Issues Selecting space in a building that uses on-site renewable energy technologies can result in energy cost savings. Utility rebates are often available to reduce initial costs of renewable energyequipment The initial costs ofinstalling or providing renewable energyon-site can be offset bysavings on energy costs accrued over a period of time. A life-cycle cost analysis of the potential savings that could accrue over the life-cycle of the renewable energy source can help project teams in their decisionmaking process. In some states, first costs can also be offset by net metering, in which excess energy is sold back to the utility, and through programs that provide incentives for using renewable energy. Project teams must ascertain whether these options are available locally, particularly for the type of renewable energy they plan to use. Research on the available technologies is essential; consider climatic, geographical, and other regional factors that influence the appropriateness of an on-site renewable source for the building's energy use. 2. Related Credits Renewable energy equipment installed as a part of the tenant scope will require commissioning and measurement and verification efforts, as described in the following credits: ■ EA Prerequisite is Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems ■ EA Credit 3: Measurement and Verification 3. Summary of Referenced Standard ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA oo.ilizoo7, Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers American National Standards Institute http:fiwww.ashrae.org Illuminating Engineers Society of North America On-site renewable or site-recovered energy that might be used to achieve EA Credit 2, Enhanced Commissioning, is handled as a special case in the modelingprocess. Ifeither renewable or recovered energy is produced at the site, the energy cost budget method considers it free energy and it is not included in the design energy cost. See the Calculation section for details. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 11 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 59 EFTA00281598 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 11 4. Implementation Choose a base building that is equipped with an on-site renewable energy system. Demonstrate the technology's contribution to the total energy requirements of the building (expressed as a fraction of annual energy cost). Technologies Eligible technologies within the base building include photovoltaic, solar thermal, geothermal, wind, biomass, and biogas energy. Eligible systems produce either electric power or thermal energy for use on-site and should, where possible, deliver power to the grid when their output exceeds the site demand. Contact local utilities or electric service providers to determine whether net metering is available. Energy savings from the use of on-site renewables should be based on either the metered renewable energy produced and used on-site, or the metered renewable energy produced and used on-site or sent to the grid. Energy produced on-site that is not captured and used, whether on-site or via the grid, cannot be included in the credit calculations. For example, if a project building uses photovoltaic panels to generate electricity on-site but does note store energy when output exceeds demand or use net metering, only the portion of renewable electricity actually consumed on-site counts. Renewable energy produced on-site and then sold to the grid is not eligible. Eligible On-site Systems On-site renewable energy technologies eligible for Option t t include these: ■ Photovoltaic systems. ■ Wind energy systems. ■ Solar thermal systems. ■ Biofuel-based energy systems (see list of eligible biofuels, below). ■ Geothermal energy systems. ■ Low-impact hydroelectric power systems. ■ Wave and tidal power systems. There are some restrictions for geothermal energy systems, solar thermal energy systems, and biofuel-based electrical systems. Geothermal energy systems using deep•earth water or steam sources (but not vapor compression systems for heat transfer) may be eligible for this credit. These systems may either produce electric power or provide thermal energy for primary use at the building. Active solar thermal energy systems that employ collection panels, heat transfer mechanical components such as pumps or fans, and defined heat storage systems such as hot water tanks are eligible for this credit. Thermosiphon solar and storage tank "batch heaters" are also eligible. The following biofuels are considered renewable energy under this credit: ■ Untreated wood waste, including mill residues. ■ Agricultural crops or waste. ■ Animal waste and other organic waste. ■ Landfill gas. 60 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281599 Ineligible On-site Systems These types of on-site systems are not eligible for this credit: ■ Architectural features. ■ Passive solar strategies. ■ Daylighting strategies. ■ Geo-exchange systems (e.g.,geothermal or ground-source heat pumps). Architectural passive solar and daylighting strategies provide significant energy savings. Their contributions are reflected in project-wide energy efficiency levels and facilitate the achievement of EA Prerequisite 2 and EA Credit t. Geo-exchange systems are earth-coupled heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning (HVAC) applications that use vapor-compression systems for heat transfer and do not obtain significant quantities of deep-earth heat. They are not eligible as renewable energy systems. The contributions of these systems are reflected in project-wide energy efficiency levels and facilitate the achievement of EA Prerequisite 2 and EA Credit t. Energy production based on the following biofuels is not eligible for this credit: ■ Combustion of municipal solid waste. ■ Forestry biomass waste other than mill residue. ■ Wood coated with paints, plastics, or formica ■ Wood treated for preservation with materials containing halogens, chlorine compounds, halide compounds, chromated copper arsenate, or arsenic. If more than 196 of the wood fuel has been treated with these compounds, the energy system is ineligible. Retention of Renewable Energy Environmental Attributes For renewable energy coming from on-site sources, the associated environmental attributes must be retained or retired; they cannot be sold. Project teams should understand and value the positive effect of on-site renewables on the surrounding ecosystems. For on-site renewables, energy that exceeds the project building's demand may be sold at fees equivalent to the market rate of nonrenewable energy, but no premium maybe charged for the renewable nature of the energy. Such a premium indicates that these attributes have not been retained, and therefore the project team cannot take credit for that energy as renewable. To encourage the greater development of on-site renewable energy systems, the sale of renewable energy certificates (RECs) is allowed from an on-site renewable energy system that claims credit if the building owner or energy system owner, either separately or acting together, meets the following conditions: ■ RECs equal to 200% of the system's annual rated energy output each year are purchased from another source, which must be Green-e eligible. The system's rated output must reflect all system performance characteristics as well as actual local site conditions (e.g., climate, mounting location, and angles). The rationale for the 1-for-2 ratio is that many states have set renewable portfolio standards and in-state renewable energy targets that can be traded in the form of credits. These in-state RECs are typically more expensive to achieve and usually cost more (e.g., $0.05/kWh for New England wind power vs. $0.0t/lcVVh for RECs from West Texas or Dakotas wind). From an environmental and financial perspective, these are not the same for 2. reasons: SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 11 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 61 EFTA00281600 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 11 • In-state and out-of-state RECs reduce carbon dioxide emissions by the same amount, but out-of-state RECs result in fewer reductions of other emissions than in-state RECs, where the population is concentrated and where RECs are largely purchased. • Distant renewable energy generation may be stranded by limited technical and design capacities. Given that in-state RECs create more benefits than out-of-state RECs for non-COz impact but are equal in their COz impacts, in-state credits maybe replaced by out-of-state credits on a 1-for-2. basis. This allows green building projects to capture the value of RECs created by on-site renewables while reducing net COL ■ The seller of the on-site RECs must follow all established guidelines for the sale of RECs and not claim any of the environmental attributes for the on-site system. 5. Timeline and Team The project team, with the owner, architect, and engineer, should first estimate the potential energy use of the building so that renewable technologies with adequate capacitycan be identified. Systems producing on-site renewable electrical power should be designed to facilitate net metering back to the grid for periods when the renewable energy system output exceeds the site demand. Ask local utilities and electric service providers about incentive and rebate programs. The project team should make on-site renewable energy generation a criterion for site selection. Real estate brokers and leasing agents can help identify buildings that comply. The LEEDcertified buildings database can help identify local buildings that have achieved LEED credit for on-site renewable energy, and local USGBC chapters may also have detailed information on such projects. 6. Calculations Determining On-site Renewable Quantity The quantity of energy generated on-site by renewable systems may be predicted using a bin type calculation or determined through submetering. Projects that use a bin calculation are required to account for the contribution of variables associated with the renewable source. For example, a building-integrated photovoltaic (BIPV) design would include the effects of sunny, partly cloudy, and overcast conditions, the orientation and altitude of the array, and system losses. Tablet shows the factors that affect calculation of the energy generated by a BIPV array. Once the amount of energy generated by the renewable system is calculated, an energy cost must be computed to establish the LEED level of achievement. The renewable energy cost is calculated by multiplying the renewable energy contribution by either the local utility rate or the Energy Information Administration (EM) zoos average energy cost for the renewable fuel type. Multiply the quantity of on-site energy produced by the applicable energy rate for this fuel type. Determining Whole Building Energy Consumption The fraction of energy cost supplied by the renewable energy features is calculated against existing utility data (for buildings in operation at least 1z months), energy costs calculated by the U.S. Department of Energy (EM zoos Commercial Sector Average Energy Costs by State) in conjunction with the Commercial Buildings Energy Consumption Survey (CBECS) database of annual electricity and natural gas usage per square foot, or total energy costs as calculated by a whole building simulation. Calculations based on existing utility data Existing buildings with a utility history may use recent annual utility bills as a basis for the 62 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 LDiTP EFTA00281601 calculating renewable energy contribution. Divide renewable energy cost (renewable energy generated multiplied by utility rate) for a to-month period by the to-month total utility costs for the building. Calculations based on CBECS data Use the Department of Energy's Commercial Buildings Energy Consumption Survey database to determine the estimated electricity use. This database provides electricity intensity factors (kWh/of/yr) for various building types in the United States. To determine the building's annual energy cost, multiply total energy consumption by the average cost for electricity and natural gas (from EM commercial sector rates for the state). Dividing the renewable energy cost by the building annual energy cost yields the percentage renewable energy. Calculations based on energy simulation Projects that complete a whole building simulation in accordance with Option B of EA Credit 1.3, Optimize Energy Performance—HVAC, may use the simulated total building energy consumption as a basis for calculating the renewable energy contribution. Table 1. BIPV Renewable Energy Calculation BIPV System Design Number of stories 5 Length of south facade 525 (If) Depth of awning .2 00 Gross area of awning 5,250 Cs° Shading effects 85% Net area of awning 4.463 (sf) PV capacity 5.5 (wiz!) Awning peak capacity 25 (kW) Average daily output 4.03 (kWh)/100 (s0 Average annual output 65,641 (IA)80 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Determine energy use for the project, demonstrate the portion of that supplied by on-site renewable energy systems, and identify a back-up energy source. ■ Prepare documentation from the project owner verifying the performance of on-site renewable systems, confirming system capacity, and confirming that renewable energy is not double-counted. 8. Examples There are no examples for this credit. 9. Exemplary Performance Projects may earn an exemplary performance credit under SS Credit 1, Path 12, Other Quantifiable Environmental Performance, by demonstrating that on-site renewable energy accounts for to% or more of the annual building energy cost. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 11 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 63 EFTA00281602 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 11 10. Regional Variations The availability and appropriateness ofa renewable energytechnologyfor abuildingvaries by region. Factors like climate, geography, and location can greatly affect a building's choice of the renewable source. For maximum energy savings, project teams should look for buildings that drawfrom on-site renewable energy sources most efficient for their region, such as solar energy in the southwestern United States, biomass in regions with agricultural land, or wind power in coastal regions. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations There are no operations and maintenance considerations for this credit. 12. Resources Please see the USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (httpliwww.usgbc.oreprojecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites American Wind Energy Association httpWwww.awea.org AWEA is a national trade association representing wind power plant developers, wind turbine manufacturers,utilitycompanies,consultants, insurers,financiers,researchers,andothersinvolved in the wind industry. ENERGY Guide This website includes information on different power types, including green power, and general information on energy efficiency and tools for selecting power providers based on economic, environmental, and other criteria. National Renewable Energy Laboratory, National Center for Photovoltaics httpWwww.nrel.govhicpv This website provides clearinghouse information on all aspects of photovoltaic systems. North Carolina Solar Center, Database of State Incentives for Renewable Energy (DSIRE) http://www.dsireusa.org This database contains all available information on state financial and regulatory incentives (e.g., tax credits, grants, and special utility rates) that are designed to promote the application of renewable energy technologies. DSIRE also offers additional services such as the preparation and printing of reports that detail the incentives state-by-state. U.S. Department of Energy, EERE, Renewable Energy Maps and Data httpWwwwt.eere.energy.govimaps_data The maps and data section of DOE's EEREwebsite provides information on regional distribution of renewable energy sources and technologies in the United States. U.S. Department of Energy, National Renewable Energy Laboratory httpljwww.nrel.gov NREL is a leader in the U.S. Department of Energy's effort to ensure that the nation's energy future is environmentally and economically sustainable. U.S. Department of Energy, Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy http://wwweere.energy.gov The EERE website includes information on all types of renewable energy technologies and energy efficiency. 64 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281603 U.S. EPA, Green Power Partnership http:(/www.epa EPA's Green Power Partnership provides assistance and recognition to organizations that demonstrate environmental leadership by choosing green power. It includes a buyers guide with listings of green power providers by state. Print Media Wind and Solar Power Systems, by Mukund Patel (CRC Press 1999). Wind Energy Comes of Age, by Paul Gipe (John Wiley &Sons 1995). 13. Definitions Biofuel-based energy systems are electrical power systems that nut on renewable fuels derived from organic materials, such as wood by-products and agricultural waste. In LEED, biofuels include untreated wood waste (e.g., mill residues), agricultural crops or waste, animal waste and other organic waste, and landfill gas. Biomass is plant material from trees, grasses, and crops that can be converted to heat energy to produce electricity. The environmental attributes ofgreen power include the emissions reductionbenefits that result from the substitution of renewable energy sources for conventional power sources. Geothermal energy is electricitygenerated by hamessinghot water or steam from within the earth. Geothermal heating systems use pipes to transfer underground heat for heating, cooling, and hot water. These systems retrieve heat from the earth during cool months and return heat in summer months. Photovoltaic (or solar) energy is produced by photovoltaic cells that convert sunlight energy into electricity. Hydro energy is electricity produced from the downhill flow of water from rivers or lakes. Net metering is a metering and billing arrangement that allows on-site generators to send excess electricity flows to the regional power grid. These electricity flows offset a portion of those drawn from the grid. For more information on net metering in individual states, visit the DOE's Green Power Network website at http://www.eere.energy.govigreenpowerInetmetering. On-site renewable energy is derived from renewable sources, including solar, wind, geothermal, low-impact hydro, biomass, and biogas, and is integrated into the building energy use and present within the project site perimeter. Renewable energy comes from sources that are not depleted when used. This includes energy from the sun, wind, and small (low-impact) hydropower. Renewable energy certificates (RECs) are tradable environmental commodities representing proof that a unit of electricity was generated from a renewable energy resource. RECs are sold separately from the electricity itself and thus allow the purchase of green power by a user of conventionally generated electricity. Solar thermal systems collect or absorb sunlight via solar collectors and heat water that is then circulated to the building's hot water tank. The hot water can be used to warm swimming pools or provide domestic hot water for residential and commercial use. Wave and tidal power systems capture energy from waves and the diurnal flux of tidal power, respectively. The captured energy is commonlyused for desalination,water pumping,and electricity generation. Wind energy is electricity generated by wind turbines. SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 11 209 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 65 EFTA00281604 SS CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 12 OPTION 2, PATH 12: OTHER QUANTIFIABLE ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE An "other quantifiable environmental performance" characteristic is any green feature that was implemented according to (t) the requirements of another LEED rating system credit or (2) the exemplary performance criteria of any of the above paths in this credit. A green feature selected from another LEED rating system must be different from those addressed under the LEED for Commercial Interiors Rating System. 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Path inewards propertiesthatemploythe highest andbestgreenbuildingstrategies—innovations that go beyond those covered in this credit. Path 12 thus accommodates credits from other LEED rating systems not specifically itemized in Paths 1 through it. For example, the exemplary performance criteria under SS Credit 5.1, Site Development—Protect or Restore Habitat, in LEED for New Construction awards t innovation point for restoring or protecting a minimum of 75% of the site area (excluding the building footprint) with native or adapted vegetation on previously developed or graded sites. Projects that implement such a program at a LEED-certified building site may apply for this option. Path 12 may also be used when the selected building meets the exemplary performance criteria specified for a requirement of SS Credit 1, Paths 1 through 11; project teams should refer to the information under Exemplary Performance in Paths 1 through t t to determine the performance level needed to achieve an additional point. 2. Related Credits Refer to the Related Credits section in the credit from the other rating system or under Paths t through 11. 3. Summary of Referenced Standards Refer to the standards referenced for the credit from the other rating system or under Paths 1 through 11. 4. Implementation Choose a base building that has achieved an environmental performance characteristic for at least t credit found in another LEED rating system. Innovation in Design credits that are not addressed by existing credits in other LEED rating systems will also be considered. A team can earn 1 point for each credit that offers an additional point, as appropriate, for exemplary performance. Submit a credit information request to confirm the credit selection unless a precedent has been set byanother project certified under LEED for Commercial Interiors. A second way to earn this credit is to achieve exemplary performance for eligible credits in SS Credit 1, Option 2, Paths 1 through is. A maximum oft additional point can be awarded if the specified threshold is achieved. 5. Timeline and Team Refer to the Timeline and Team information under the selected credit. 6. Calculations Refer to the Calculations section under the selected credit. 66 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281605 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measure. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Prepare a brief narrative, calculations, or other information that demonstrates the nature of the other environmental benefits delivered. Refer to the Documentation Guidance section under the selected credit. 8. Examples Refer to the Examples section under the selected credit. 9. Exemplary Performance Projects earning SS Credit 1, Path ii, Other Quantifiable Environmental Performance, through exemplary performance of any of the SS Credit 1 compliance paths are not eligible for additional exemplaryperformance under the Innovation in Design section. 10. Regional Variations Refer to the Regional Variations section under the selected credit. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Refer to the Operations and Maintenance section under the selected credit. 12. Resources Please see the USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http://www.usgbc.org(projecttools) for additional resources and technical information. 13. Definitions There are no definitions associated with this credit. S S CI Credit 1 OPTION 2: PATH 12 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 67 EFTA00281606 68 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281607 DEVELOPMENT DENSITY AND COMMUNITY CONNECTIVITY Credit SS Credit 2 Points 6 points Intent To channel development to urban areas with existing infrastructure, protect greenfields and preserve habitat and natural resources. Requirements OPTION 1. Development Density Select space in a building that is located in an established, walkable community with a minimum density of 6o,000 square feet per acre net. The density calculation is based on a typical two-story downtown development and must include the area of the project being built. OR OPTION 2. Community Connectivity Select space in a building on a site that meets the following criteria: • Is located within itz-mile of a residential area or neighborhood with an average density of to units per acre net • Is within t/z-mile of at least 10 basic services • Has pedestrian access between the building and the services. For mixed-use projects„ no more than t service within the project boundary maybe counted as t of the to basic services, provided it is open to the public. No more than z of the to services required may be anticipated (i.e. at least A must be existing and operational). In addition, the anticipated services must be documented appropriately to demonstrate that they will be operational in the locations indicated within t year of occupation of the applicant project. Examples of basic services include the following: • Bank • Place of Worship • Convenience Grocery • DayCare Center • Cleaners • Fire Station • Beauty Salon • Hardware • Laundry • Library • Medical or Dental Office • Senior Care Facility • Park • Pharmacy • Post Office • Restaurant • School • Supermarket • Theater • Community Center • Fitness Center • Museum Proximity is determined by drawing a itz-mile radius around a main building entrance on a site map and counting the services within that radius. Greenfield developments and projects that do not use existing infrastructure are not eligible. SS CREDIT 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 69 EFTA00281608 CI Credit 2 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Consider proximity to transportation and community services. Selecting base buildings located within walking distance of existing or planned basic services reduce transportation impacts, such as air pollution and greenhouse gas emissions. Manycities have edsting buildings that could be rehabilitated, an approach that reducesthe demand for new materials. The potential trade-offs for sites in dense areas include limited open space and factors that may compromise indoor environmental quality, such as contaminated soils,undesirable air quality, or limited daylighting opportunities. Economic Issues Locating a Commercial Interiors project on an infill site helps control urban sprawl and uses existing infrastructure, including roads, utility services, and other amenities that benefit the local economy. If a site is close to mass transit, significant cost reductions maybe achieved by downsizing parking space for building occupants. In addition, making access to basic services walkable may improve the productivity and health of building occupants by reducing the time spent driving and increasing their levels of physical activityDboth of which translate into reduced costs for tenants. The redevelopment of urban areas helps restore, invigorate, and sustain established urban living patterns, creating a more stable and interactive community. 2. Related Credits By selecting buildings located in urban areas, tenants can increase the likelihood of providing building occupants with access to public transportation, thus assisting project teams with earning the following credit: • SS Credit 3.t: Alternative Transportation—Public Transportation Access 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this credit. 4. Implementation The most common approach for achieving this credit is to give preference to sites within an existing urban fabric. Work with local jurisdictions to follow the urban development plan and meet or exceed density goals. When choosing sites based on infrastructure, transportation, and quality of life, explore opportunities for alliances and innovations with neighboring spaces. Look at locations with redevelopment plans that will achieve the required development density by the completion of the project. Choose a building in an area where community revitalization is already underway and the required development density will be met by the time the project is completed. OPTION 1. Development Density To determine the development density, assess the density of the LEED project site, as well as the densities of surrounding developments. Determine the total area of the project site and the total square footage of the building. For projects that are part of a larger property (such as a campus), define the project area (outlined in the LEED project's scope). The project area must be defined consistently throughout LEED documentation. Calculate the densityofthe project site and the density radius usingthe equations below. Overlay the density radius on a site map that includes the project site and surrounding areas, originating from the center of the LEED project site. This is the density boundary. For each property within the density boundary (including the LEED project site and any properties that intersect the 70 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281609 density boundary), create a table with the building square footage and site area of each property. Include all properties except for undeveloped public areas, such as parks and water bodies. Do not include public roads and right-of-way areas. Information on neighboring properties can be obtained from your city or county zoning department. OPTION 2. Community Connectivity Consider both residential and commercial neighbors when determining the community connectivity of a project. Prepare a site map (Figure 0 and draw a tfz-mile radius around the main building entrance. Radii maybe drawn around multiple entrances for projects with multiple buildings or more than 1 main entrance. The combination of the area in these radii would then be considered the project radius. Figure 1.Sample Map for Community Connectivity mv 8 me,cane 14airci eat laWc Clia.f., °nate:Ian Sd Cravat Mace el Wail* P. Gal Paschool. Choy Coe Fordo 1.1630x INK*? ma Hacivao.naavas $C a , Da mecica Cfric.Meead O O O 8 lo.rcles OokiWadol)(6.1)•aol Saio, Pat Pak O AtioteiL PhamogY Pwo Cane. Iteavaant ID Sanclo,a flancolay. SSW ID Lonna° Crocay kpanaael :: Ref.:bold Mas pe, Afloat ma* Mark all residential developments within the radius. For the project to earn this credit, a residential area with a minimum density of to units per acre must be present within the radius. Mark all commercial buildings within the radius. At least to basic services must be present within the radius for the project to earn this credit. Services other than those listed in the credit requirements will be considered on a project-by-project basis. Listeach ofthe identified services,the business name. and the servicetypeto confirmcompliance. Tablet illustrates an example. SS CI Credit 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 71 EFTA00281610 SS CI Credit 2 Table 1. Sample Community Connectivity Tabulation Service Identification (Corresponds to uploaded Vicinity Ran) Business Name Seneca lype 1 Restaurant 1 Restaurant 2 Grocery 1 Convenience Grocery 3 Urgent Care 1 Medical 4 Pharmacy 1 Pharmacy 5 Gym 1 Fitness 6 Hair Care 1 Beauty 7 Bank 1 Bank 8 Restaurant 2 Restaurant 9 Cleaners 1 Cleaners 10 Post Office 1 Pest Office With the exception of restaurants, no service may be counted more than once in the calculation. Up to a restaurants maybe counted toward achievement of this credit. Count only those services for that can be accessed by pedestrians from the project; that is, pedestrians must be able to walk to the services without being blocked bywalls, highways, or other barriers. The project building itself cannot be considered t of the to basic services; however, in a mixeduse building, a maximum oft service within the building may be counted as s of the to. A service in a mixed-use project must be open to the public. Up to 2 services that are anticipated to be built in the near future can count toward this credit; at least 8 services must be existing and operational. Any anticipated services must be documented by lease agreements or other appropriate documentation (e.g., a letter from the owner or other appropriate party) to demonstrate that theywill be operational in the locations indicated within a year of occupation of the project building. 5. Timeline and Team The project team should make development density or community connectivity a criterion for site selection. Real estate brokers and leasing agents can help identify buildings that comply. 6. Calculations OPTION 1. Development Density To determine the development density ofa project, both the project densityand the densities of surrounding developments must be considered. The calculations detailed below refer to the base building in which the LEED for Commercial Interiors project is located, the base building site area, and the buildings surrounding the base building. The density calculation process is described in the following steps: STEP 1 Determine the total area of the project site and the total square footage of the building. For projects that are part of a larger property (such as a campus), define the project area as the area that is defined in the project's scope. The project area must be defined consistently throughout LEED documentation. 72 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281611 STEP 2 Calculate the development density for the project by dividing the total square footage of the building by the total site area in acres. This development density must be 60,00o square feet or more per acre (Equation 1). Equation 1 (s0 Building Square Footage (s1) Development Density (acre) Site Area (acres) STEP 3 Convert the total site area from acres to square feet and calculate the square root of this number. Then multiply the square root by 3 to determine the appropriate density radius (Equation a). The square root function is used to normalize the calculation by removing effects of site shape. Equation 2 Density Radius III) = 3 X I {Site Area (acres) X 43,560 (sf/acre) STEP 4 Calculate the average property density within the density boundary by adding up the square footage values and site areas of each property and dividing the total square footage by the total site area. The average property density of the properties within the density boundary must be 60,000 square feet or more per acre. If this requirement is met, LEED for New Construction and LEED for Core & Shell projects earn 5 points under this credit LEED for Schools projects earn 4 points. Equation 3 Average Property Density within Density Boundary E Square Footage E Site Area OPTION 2. Community Connectivity There are no calculations required for this option. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. • For development density, develop a project site vicinity plan that includes the development density radius. • For community connectivity, develop a project site vicinity plan that indicates the half-mile radius and the locations of qualifying services and residential areas; list the services and identify tliem by type. SS CI Credit 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 73 EFTA00281612 SS CI Credit 2 8. Examples Development Density A 30,000-square-foot office building is located on a 0.44-acre urban site. The building density, calculated by dividing the square footage of the building space by the site area in acres, is 68,t82 square feet per acre (Table 2). the density thus exceeds the 60,000 square feetminimum required by the credit. Table 2. Building Density Calculations Project Buildings Building Space fat Site Area (acres) Project 30000 0.44 Density (sf/acre) a 68.182 Next, the density radius is calculated to be 415 feet using the following equation. Equation 2 Density Radius (In= 3 X i [0.44 (acres) X 43.560 (silence) = 415 PO The density radius of 415 feet is applied to an area plan of the project site and surrounding area. The plan identifies all properties that are within or are intersected by the density radius. The plan includes a scale and a north indicator (Figure 2). Figure 1. An illustration of a Sample Area Plan M __IT " II `frig scale: north rn L! ew ed Pal dino Consulting LI.C. 74 LLLU /i LI LHLNLL UUIUL I UH (.11(LLN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281613 For each property located within the density radius, list the building space and site area (Table 3). These values are summed and the average density is calculated by dividing the total building square footage by the total site area. Table 3. Sample Area Properties Properties within Density Radius Building Space (se Site Area (acres) Properties within Density Radius Building Space (sf) Site Area (acres) Project Site 30.000 0.44 M 24.080 0.64 A 33,425 0.39 N 28,740 0.3 B 87,500 1.58 0 6,690 0.15 C 6,350 0.26 P 39,000 0.39 D 27,560 0.32 0 348,820 2.54 E 66,440 1.17 R 91,250 1.85 F 14,420 1.36 S 22,425 0.27 G 12,560 0.2 T 33,650 0.51 H 6,240 0.14 U 42,400 0.52 I 14,330 0.22 V - 0.76 i 29,570 0.41 W 19,200 0.64 K 17,890 0.31 X 6,125 0.26 L 9,700 0.31 Total Building Space (sf) 1,018,36 Total Site Area (acres) 5 15.94 Average Density (sfiacre) 63,887 For this example, the average building density of the surrounding area is greater than 60,000 square feet per acre, so the example qualifies for 6 points under this credit. 9. Exemplary Performance This credit is not eligible for exemplary performance under the Innovation in Design section. 10. Regional Variations There are no regional variations associated with this credit. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Densely developed communities may have air quality, making it difficult forbuilding occupants and operators to address health and comfort issues. Consider optimizing the mechanical systems for air quality protection by using superior filtration media and selecting materials that do not contribute to indoor air quality issues. Encourage building operators to actively manage for high indoor air quality through the use of the EPA's Indoor Air Quality Building Education and Assessment Model (I-BEAM) or other strategies. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http:/Avww.usgbc.org(projecttools) for additional resources and technical information. SS CI Credit 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 75 EFTA00281614 SS CI Credit 2 Websites Congress for New Urbanism http:(/www.cnu.org The Congress for the New Urbanism promotes pedestrian-friendly, neighborhood-based development as an alternative to sprawl. Urban Land Institute ULI Washington http://washington.uli.org The Urban Land Institute is a nonprofit organization based in Washington,.., that promotes the responsible use of land to enhance the total environment. The International Union for the Scientific Study of Population http://www.iussp.org IUSSP promotes scientific studies of demography and population-related issues. Print Media ChangingPlaces: RebuildingCommunity in the Age ofSprawl,by Richard Moe and Carter Wilkie (Henry Holt & Company,1999). Density by Design: New Directions in Residential Development, by Steven Fader (Urban Land Institute, 2000). Green Development Integrating Ecology, and Real Estate, by Alex Wilson, et al. (John Wiley & Sons, 1998). Once There Were Greenfields: How Urban Sprawl Is Undennining Americais Envinnnzent, Economy, and Social Fabric, by F. Kaid Benfield, et al. (Natural Resources Defense Council,1999). Suburban Nation: The Rise of Sprawl and the Decline of the American Dream, by Andres Duany, et al. North Point Press, 2000). 13. Definitions Building density is the floor area of the building divided by the total area of the site (square feet per acre). Building footprint is the area on a project site used by the building structure, defined by the perimeter of the building plan. Parking lots, landscapes, and other nonbuilding facilities are not included in the building footprint. Greenfields are sites not previously developed or graded that could support open space, habitat, or agriculture. A mixed-use project involves a combination of residential and commercial or retail components. Neighborhood is synonymous with residential area. Pedestrian access allows people to walk to services without being blocked by walls, freeways, or other barriers. Previously developed sites once had buildings, roadways, parking lots, or were graded orotherwise altered by direct human activities. Propertyarea is the total areawithin the legal property boundaries of a site; it encompasses all areas of the site, including constructed and nonconstructed areas. Public transportation consists of bus, rail, or other transit services for the general public that operate on a regular, continual basis. 76 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281615 A residential area is land zoned primarily for housing at a density of io units per acre or greater. These areas may have single-family and multifamily housing and include building types such as townhomes, apartments, duplexes, condominiums, or mobile homes. Site area is synonymous with property area. SS CI Credit 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 77 EFTA00281616 78 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281617 ALTERNATIVE TRANSPORTATION-PUBLIC TRANSPORTATION ACCESS I- t Credit SS Credit 3.1 Points 6 points Intent To reduce pollution and land development impacts from automobile use. Requirements OPTION 1. Rail Station Proximity Locate the project in a building within 1/2.-mile walking distance (measured from a main building entrance) of an existing (or planned and funded) commuter rail, light nil or subway station. OR OPTION 2. Bus Stop Proximity Locate the project within 1/4-mile walking distance (measured from a main building entrance) of r or more stops for a or more public campus or private bus lines usable by tenant occupants. SS CREDIT 3.1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 79 EFTA00281618 SS CI Credit 3.1 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues The extensive use of single-occupancy vehicles and their heavy reliance on petroleum contribute to environmental problems. Fortunately, alternatives to conventional transportation methods exist. Many people are willing to use other options if they are convenient. The use of mass transit helps reduce energy demand for transportation and associated greenhouse gas emissions, as well as the space needed for parking lots that encroach on the green space of a building site. Minimizing parking lots reduces the building footprint and sets aside more space for natural areas or greater development densities. Reductions in single-occupancy vehicle use directly affect fuel consumption and reduce air and water pollution fromvehicle exhaust. On the basis ofpassenger miles traveled, public transportation is twice as fuel efficient as private vehicles and annually saves 45 million barrels of Another benefit of public transportation is the associated reduction in the need for infrastructure used by vehicles. Parking facilities and roadways for automobiles have negative impacts on the environment because impervious surfaces, such as asphalt, increase stormwater runoff while contributing to urban heat island effects. Economic Issues Many occupants view proximity to mass transit as a benefit, and this can influence the value and marketability of the building. For building occupants, costs associated with traveling to and from the workplace can be significantly reduced through access to public transportation. Not only is this an economic benefit for building occupants, it helps business owners attract and retain employees. Reducing the size of parking areas based on anticipated use of public transportation by building occupants may alter operating costs associated with parking lot maintenance. If local utilities charge for stormwater based on impervious surface area, minimizing these areas can result in lower stormwater fees. 2. Related Credits Sites close to existing public transportation infrastructure tend to be in more densely developed areas. The following credit maybe more likely achievable for projects in such locations: ■ SS Credit 2: Development Density and Community Connectivity 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this credit. 4. Implementation Choose a base building that has convenient access to existing transportation networks to minimize the need for new transportation lines. Local transit authorities can provide maps and directories that will help identify the available transportation options. Consider developing a transportation management plan that evaluates anticipated transportation use patterns and offers alternatives aimed at reducing commuting in single-occupancy vehicles. This management plan could be considered a comprehensive approach to addressing the 4 credits within SS Credit 4, Alternative Transportation. This is particularly useful for large buildings, buildings that are part of a master plan implementation, and developments with multiple buildings. If possible, survey future potential building occupants about whether the available public transportation options meet their needs. Look for functional sidewalks, paths, and walkways that lead directly to existing mass transit stops. 80 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281619 If a light rail or subway station is sited, planned, and funded at the time the project is completed, it satisfies the intent of this credit. If private shuttle buses will be used to meet the requirements, they must connect to public transportation and operate during the most frequent commuting hours. 5. Timeline and Team The project team should make proximity to public transportation a criterion for site selection. Real estate brokers and leasing agents can help identify buildings that comply. 6. Calculations OPTION 1 and OPTION 2 Use an area drawing, aerial photograph, or map to calculate the walking distance to the transit stops. If the building has multiple main or public entrances, project teams can measure walking distances from multiple building entrances. Software tools like Google" Maps Pedometer (www. ) maybe useful for determining walking distance. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Identify local rail stations or bus routes serving the project building. ■ Develop a site vicinity plan, to scale, and label walking paths between the project building's main entrance and rail stations or bus stops. ■ If the team anticipates rail development, obtain verification of funding for the rail project. 8. Examples LEO Enterprise, Inc., has selected tenant space in a downtovm office building. The building iswithin walking distance of public transportation. Figurer shows a rail station within 1/2.-mile walking distance from the building's main entrance, the entrance used by the tenant. The map includes a scale bar and a north indicator. SS CI Credit 3.1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 81 EFTA00281620 SS CI Credit 3.1 Figure 1: Sample Area Drawing: Distance to Rail I I I Ire 1/4 1/2 mM 9. Exemplary Performance Projects may earn an exemplary performance credit under the Innovation in Design section for SS Credit 3.1, Alternative Transportation—Public Transportation Access by complying with the requirements oft of the 2. options described below. OPTION 1. Comprehensive Transportation Management Plan Institute a comprehensive transportation management plan that demonstrates a quantifiable reduction in personal automobile usethroughbyproviding multiple transportation alternatives. Only 1 exemplary performance credit is available for implementing a comprehensive transportation management plan for any of the SS Credit 3, Alternative Transportation, credits. OPTION 2. Double Transit Ridership Because projects in locations with good mass transit can achieve substantially and quantifiably higher environmental benefits, meeting the following threshold qualifies a project forexemplary performance. The Center for Clean Air Policy' has found that average transit ridership increases by 0.5% for every 1.0% increase in growth of transit service levels, which leads to the conclusion that quadrupling transit service generally doubles transit ridership. To achieve exemplary performance, meet the following minimum requirements: ■ Locate the tenant space in a building that is within 112 mile of at least 2 existing commuter rail, light rail, or subway lines. 82 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281621 OR • Locate the tenant space in a building that is within 14 mile of at least 2 or more stops for 4 ci or more public or campus (private) bus lines usable by tenants. SS AND ■ Frequency of service must be at least 200 transit rides per day, total, at these stops. A combination of rail and bus lines is allowable. This strategy is based on the assumption that the threshold of the base credit would provide, in most cases, at least so transit rides per day (half-hourly service 24 hours per day or more frequent service for less than 24 hours per day). If, on average, transit ridership increases by 0.5% for every 1.0% increase in transit service, then quadrupling the number of rides available would, on average, double the transit ridership: 4 x so rides = zoo rides. Include a transit schedule and map with the LEED certification submittal. 10. Regional Variations There are no regional variations associated with this credit. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Transit infrastructure can be underutilized if building occupants are not informed about public transportation opportunities or encouraged to use these systems. Consider working with building owners,tenantsandoperatorstodevelop ongoing programsto support transit use andinfrastructure. Appropriate strategies will vary by building ownership, tenant organization and occupancy type. For example, a multitenant facility with third-party management is less likely to provide subsidized transit passes than an owner-occupied facility, but it could establish a program to inform occupants about transit opportunities. Programming options to consider include the following examples: ■ Providing financial incentives or subsidized passes for public transit. ■ Instituting a "free ride home" program for public transit commuters who need to work unexpected hours. ■ Promotingthe use of mass transit byproviding information on transportation options,routes, services, and incentives. ■ Participating in local or regional transportation planning to ensure that building occupants' needs are considered. ■ Establishing a method for tracking public transit ridership. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http://www.usgbc.org/pLojecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites U.S. EPA and Department of Transportation, Best Workplaces for Commuters http://wv.bestworIcplaces.orgfindex.htm This program publicly recognizes employers who have exemplary commuter benefits programs. It provides tools, guidance, and promotions to help employers give commuter benefits, reap the financial gains, and achieve national recognition. U.S. EPA, Office of Transportation and Air Quality http://www.emgovfotaq Credit 3.1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 83 EFTA00281622 SS CI Credit 3.1 This EPA website provides information about the types and effects of air pollution associated with automobile use and links to resources for organizations interested in promoting commuter-choice programs. 13. Definitions A campus or private bus is a bus or shuttle service that is privately operated and not available to the general public. In LEED, a campus or private bus line that falls within 1/4 mile of the project site and provides transportation service to the public can contribute to earning credits. Mass transit is designed to transport large groups of persons in a single vehicle, such as a bus or train. Public transportation consists of bus, rail, or other transit services for the general public that operate on a regular, continual basis. Walking distance is the length of the walkable pathway between the building and public transportation. 84 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281623 ALTERNATIVE TRANSPORTATION-BICYCLE STORAGE AND CHANGING ROOMS Credit Points SS Credit 3.2 2 points Intent To reduce pollution and land development impacts from automobile use. Requirements Provide secure bicycle racks and/or storage (within zoo yards of a main building entrance) for s%or more of tenant occupants (measured at peak periods). Provideshowerandchangingfacilities in thebuilding,orwithin zooyards ofabuildingentrance, for o.s% of full-time equivalent (Pit) occupants. SS CREDIT 3.2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 85 EFTA00281624 SS CI Credit 3.2 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues The environmental effects of automobile use include vehicle emissions that contribute to smog and air pollution, as well as environmental impacts from oil extraction and petroleum refining. Bicycling as an alternative to personal vehicle use offers a number of environmental benefits. Bicycle commuting produces no emissions, has zero demand for petroleum-based fuels, relieves traffic congestion, reduces noise pollution, and requires far less infrastructure for roadways and parking lots. Roadways and parking lots, on the other hand, produce stormwater runoff, contribute to the urban heat island effect, and encroach on green space. Bicycles are more likely to be used for relatively short commuting trips. Displacing vehicle miles with bicycling, even for short trips, carries a large environmental benefit because a large portion of vehicle emissions occur in the first few minutes of driving. Following a cold start, emissions control equipment is less effective because of cool operating temperatures. Economic Issues The initial cost of building bike storage areas and changing facilities or showers is typically low relative to the overall project cost. When buildings accommodate bicycling infrastructure, occupants can realize health benefits through bicycle and walking commuting strategies. Bicycling and walking also expose people to the community, encouraging interaction among neighbors and allowing for enjoyment of the area in ways unavailable to automobile passengers. 2. Related Credits There are no related credits. 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this credit. 4. Implementation Choose a basebuildingthat has convenient access to safe bicycle pathways and secure bicycle storage areas for cyclists. Work with building owners to provide shower and changing areas for cyclists that are easily accessible from bicycle storage areas. Survey potential building occupants and determine whether the available bike routes and their compatibility with mass transit options meet their needs. Look for functional and direct paths that can be used by bicycle commuters. Shower facilities maybe either within the tenant's space or in a common facility within 200 yards of the main building entrance. If changing rooms and showers are not within the tenant space, demonstrate that the required capacity will not be compromised by other users. Show that the arrangements are permanent and are not subject to lease revisions or other circumstances beyond the control of the tenant. If the required bicycle-rack capacity cannot be reserved for the specific tenant space, the quantity must be based on the entire building population. Shower and changing rooms can be provided by health club memberships if those facilities are provided free of charge and if sufficient shower and changing facilities are available to satisfy the credit requirements of 0.5% of the tenant FTE. A minimum of a 2-year contract is required between the tenant and the health club. 86 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281625 5. Timeline and Team Bicycle storage and shower facilities should be incorporated into design concepts during schematic design and design development. By considering cycling early on, the project team can implement a successful alternative transportation program. For example, when selecting a base building, the project team can include proximity to existing bicycle commuting infrastructure as a criterion. Coordination among the architect, plumbing engineer, civil engineer and/or landscape architect may be required for locating and designing bicycle storage and shower facilities. The project team should also consider future expansion opportunities. 6. Calculations To determine the number of secure bicycle spaces and changing and shower facilities required, follow the steps below. STEP 1 Identify the total number of occupants for each of the following occupancy types: a. Full-time staff b. Part-time staff c. Peak transients (students, volunteers, visitors, customers, etc.) Include only occupants from the tenant space pursuing LEED certification; do not include occupants from the entire building. In tenant spaces with multiple shifts,use onlythehighestvolume shift in the calculation but consider shift overlap when determining peak users. STEP 2 For full-time and part-time staff, calculate the FTE tenant occupants based on a standard 8-hour occupancy period. An 8-hour occupant has an FTE value of 1.0, while a part-time occupant has a FTE value based on her/his hours per day divided by 8 (see Equation 1). FTE calculations for the project must be used consistently for all LEED credits. Equation 1. FTE Staff Occupants Total FTE Staff Occupants — Total Staff Occupant Hours Et STEP 3 Calculate the number of secure bicycle spaces required foreachgroup ofoccupants according to Equation 2. Equation 2a. Secure Bike Spaces Staff Occupant FIE Staff Spaces — Occupants X 0.05 Equation 2b. Secure Bike Spaces Transient Peak Spaces Transients X 0.05 Certain types of transient populations can be excluded from these calculations if they cannot reasonably be expected to arrive by bicycle and thus use on-site storage facilities. For example, air travelers arriving at an airport will not need bicycle storage. Project teams should be prepared to justify the exclusion of any transients from the calculations. SS CI Credit 3.2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 87 EFTA00281626 SS CI Credit 3.2 STEP 4 Calculate the number of showers required for staff using Equations. Equation 3. Staff Showering Facilities Showering Facilities = FTE Staff X 0.005 Transient occupants are not counted in the showering facility calculation. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Determine the number of occupants of each type and calculate the number of bicycle storage and showering facilities required. ■ Develop a plan showing the location and quantity of bicycle storage and shower facilities and determine the distance between facilities and the building entry. 8. Examples A building houses a companywith z shifts. The first shift includes 240 full-time workers and 90 parttime workers. The second shift includes 110 full-time workers and 6c3 part-time workers. There are novisitors or transient occupants who use the tenant space. Calculations to determine the total FTE staff occupants for each shift are shown in Tablet. Table 1. Sample FTE Calculation RIM Full-time Staff Part-time Staff Full-time Equivalent Staff Staff (hr) Staff (hr) Staff First Shift 240 8 90 4 285 Second Shift 110 8 60 4 140 The first shift is used for determining the peak number of bicycrng occupants because it has the greatest FTE tenant occupant total. Based on a total of 2.85 FTE-tenant occupants, the estimated number of cycling occupants is 1425 (2.13S x 0.05 = 1425); IS secure bicycle spaces are required. The result for changing and showering facilities is t.4 (285 x .005 = 1.4); 2 changing and showering facilities are required. 9. Exemplary Performance Projects may earn an innovation credit for exemplary performance by instituting a comprehensive transportation management planthat demonstrates a quantifiable reduction in personalautomobile use by providing multiple transportation alternatives. Only t exemplary performance credit is available for implementing a comprehensive transportation management plan for any of the SS Credit 3, Alternative Transportation, credits. Projects that are awarded exemplary performance for SS Credit 3.1, Alternative Transportation—Public Transportation Access, using the double transit ridership option are not eligible for exemplary performance under this credit. 10. Regional Variations There are no regional variations associated with this credit. 88 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281627 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Project teams should consider working with tenants, building owners, and operators to develop ongoing programs that support bicycle use. Appropriate strategies will vary by tenant organization, building ownership, and occupancy type but could include these: • Providing financial incentives for commuting via bicycle. • Instituting a "free ride home" program for bicycle riders who need to work unexpected hours. • Promoting the use of a bicycle to the communityby providing information on safe bike routes, locations of secure bicycle parking, lockers, showers, etc. • Providing discounts on bicycle accessories and maintenance at local bike shops. • Participating in local or regional transportation planning to ensure that building occupants' needs are considered. Provision of bike lanes and paths along corridors leading to the project can significantly influence ridership levels. • Establishing a method for tracking bicycle ridership. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http:ffivww.usgbc.orgeprojecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites Bicycle Coalition of Maine, An Employer's Guide to Encouraging Bicycle Commuting limxtivnvw.bikemaine.org iernloyer.htm p Thiswebsite from the Bicycle Coalition of Maine, this site suggests ways to encourage and facilitate bicycle commuting to employees. Commuting Guide for Employers Thiswebsite outlines strategies employers can use as they try to encourage employees to commute by bicycle. Federal Highway Administration, Office of Human and Natural Environment, Bicycle & Pedestrian Program http://www.fhwa.dot.gp_vienvironmentibikeped This program of the Federal Highway Administration's Office of Human and Natural Environment promotes access to and use and safety of bicycle and pedestrian transportation. Pedestrian and Bicycle Information Center http://vnvw.bicyclinginfo.org The Pedestrian and Bicycle Information Center provides information and resources for issues related to bicycle commuting, including health and safety, engineering, advocacy, education, and facilities. Information and links for bicycle parking issues can be found at http://www.bicyclinginfo. orgfengineering/parking.cfm. U.S. EPA and Department of Transportation, Best Workplaces for Commuters http://ww.bestworkplaces.orgfindex.htm Now managed by the Center for Urban Transportation Research at the University of South Florida, this program publicly recognizes employers who have exemplary commuter benefits programs. It provides tools, guidance, and promotions to help employers give commuter benefits, reap the financial gains, and achieve national recognition. SS CI Credit 3.2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 89 EFTA00281628 SS CI Credit 3.2 U.S. EPA, Office of Transportation and Air Quality http:(/www.epa EPA's website provides information about the types and effects of air pollution associated with automobile use and links to resources for organizations interested in promoting commuter-choice programs. 13. Definitions Bicycle racks, in LEED, include outdoor bicycle racks, bicycle lockers, and indoor bicycle storage rooms. Full-time equivalent (FTE) represents a regular building occupant who spends 40 hours per week in the project building. Part-time or overtime occupants have FTE values based on their hours per week divided by 40. Multiple shifts are included or excluded depending on the intent and requirements of the credit. Secure bicycle storage is an internal or external space that keeps bicycles safe from theft. It may include lockers and storage rooms. Transient users are occupants who do not use a facility on a consistent, regular, daily basis. Examples include students in higher education settings, customers in retail settings, and visitors in institutional settings. 90 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281629 ALTERNATIVE TRANSPORTATION-PARKING AVAILABILITY Credit SS Credit 3.3 Points 2 point Intent To reduce pollution and land development impacts from automobile use. Requirements CASE 1. Projects with an Area Less Than 75% of the Total Building Area OPTION 1 Parking spaces provided to tenant must meet but not exceed minimum numberrequired by local zoning regulations. Preferred parking' must be provided for carpools or vanpools capable of serving 596 or more of tenant occupants. OR OPTION 2 No parking is provided or subsidized for tenant occupants. CASE 2. Projects with an Area 75% or More of the Total Building Area OPTION 1 Parking capacity must meet but not exceed minimum local zoning requirements. Preferred parking must be provided for carpools or vanpools, capable of serving 596 of the building occupants. OR OPTION 2 No new parking is added for rehabilitation projects. Preferred parking must be provided for carpools or vanpools, capable of serving 596 of the building occupants. SS CREDIT 3.3 It I 2009 EDITION LEER REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 91 EFTA00281630 SS CI Credit 33 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Reducing private automobile use saves energy and avoids associated environmental problems, such as vehicle emissions that contribute to smog, air pollution, and greenhouse gas emissions, as well as the environmental impacts associated with oil extraction and petroleum refining. The environmental benefits of carpooling are significant. For example, me people who carpooled (2 people per car) to miles to work and to miles home instead of driving separately would prevent emissions of about 970 pounds of carbon dioxide per day and would save about so gallons of gas per day!' Parking facilities also have negative impacts on the environment because asphalt surfaces increase stormwater runoff and contribute to urban heat island effects. By restricting the size of parking lots and promoting carpooling, project teams can reduce these effects and provide such benefits as more green space. Economic Issues Carpooling reduces the size of parking areas needed to support building occupants, allowing the building to accommodate more occupants without enlarging the parking area. Carpooling also helps reduce building costs, since less land is needed for parking and less infrastructure is needed to support vehicles. Smaller parking areas can decrease the amount of impervious surfaces on a site. This may result in reduced stormwater costs if the local utility bases its fees on impervious surface area. Moreover, because fewer cars on the road means less pollution, traffic congestion, and wear and tear to roadways, many municipalities and state governments offer tax incentives for carpooling programs. 2. Related Credits There are no related credits. 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this credit. 4. Implementation Limit the availability of parking to encourage the use of alternative forms of transportation to and from the site. Real estate brokers can help identifybuildingswith easy access to public transportation and construct lease agreements so that the number of parking spaces guaranteed to tenants does not exceed minimums established by local zoning regulations. Research the parking requirements for the local zoning ordinances before completing lease negotiations. Determine the minimum numberofspaces required bythe code for the project's actual area and use building types and multipliers. For example, 20,000 square feet of offices requires too spaces, andso,000 square feet of warehouses requires so spaces, etc. Confirm that the lease does not guarantee more spaces than the calculation requirement. The criteria for "guaranteed" includes the following items: ■ Assigned spaces reserved only for the tenant's use, including tenant's guests. ■ The portion ofa restricted parking area reserved for the tenant's use (i.e.,the number of access cards issued to tenant). "Guaranteed" does not require that the payment for parking be included in the lease. When the tenant organization makes separate payments (e.g., for parking that is a concession of the building or at another facility), the applicant must demonstrate that the spaces reserved for the occupants are fewer than the calculated requirement. 92 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281631 This credit also requires the provision of preferred parking spaces for carpools to serve 596 of the occupants. Projects have met the credit requirements if they locate in a LEED-certified building that has also achieved this credit. 5. Timeline and Team Discussions regarding the reduction of parking capacity are often most productive at the project concept phase. This may entail discussions with zoning and civic officials and could include community and neighborhood organizations. A traffic study can be a valuable tool for evaluating traffic patterns and expected commuting in single-occupancy vehicles. Projects may require an additional team member, possibly a specialist or consultant, to develop this traffic study. Because of their size or location or because of regulatory requirements, many projects may entail zoning negotiations over the parking requirements. Planned developments mayhave unique parking requirements; project teams must consider these as part of overall alternative transportation strategies. Design solutions to reduce parking capacity for the project site should be incorporated during the schematic design and design development phases. The architect, design team, and project owner should coordinate decision making to choose the most appropriate approach for future occupants. 6. Calculations For projects providing designated preferred parking for carpools or van pools, calculate the number of required preferred parking spaces using the steps below. STEP 1 Calculate the FTE tenant occupants based on a standard 8-hour occupancy period. An 8-hour occupant has an FTE value of in, while a part-time occupant has a FTE value based on her/ his hours per day divided by 8 (see Equation 1). FTE calculations for the project must be used consistently for all LEED credits. In buildings with multiple shifts, use only the highest volume shift in the calculation, but consider shift overlap when determining peak building users. Equation 1. FTE Staff Occupants Total FTE Staff Occupants = Total Staff Occupant Hours a STEP 2 Use Equation 2 to determine the required number of preferred parking spaces. Equation z assumes that all such spaces are for carpools (serving 2 occupants per vehicle). If carpools are known to serve more riders per car or ifvan pools achieve the same end, the outcome may be adjusted to reflect the increased volume of tenants served per space. In all cases, fractions of a space must be rounded up. Equation 2 Required Spaces = FTE Occupants X .05 2 SS CI Credit 3.3 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 93 EFTA00281632 SS CI Credit 33 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ For projects providing designated preferred parking for carpool or vanpool users, develop a site plan showing parking spaces for tenants and the location and quantity of preferred spaces. ■ Provide adequate communication to occupants about the location and purpose of preferred parking spaces. ■ Assemble informationabout parkingprovided to the tenant space as well aszoning regulations and lease agreements, if applicable. 8. Examples Haller Industries occupies so% of a building and has too full-time and 50 part-time employees. The total FTE occupants value isms (Table t). Table 1. Sample FTE Calculation Full-Time Staff Pad-Time Staff Full-Time Equivalent (FTE) Staff Old (hr) 100 8 50 0 125 The required number of preferred parking spaces for carpools or vanpools, based on Equation nand rounding up, is 4. 9. Exemplary Performance Projects may earn an innovation credit for exemplary performance by instituting a comprehensive transportation management planthat demonstrates a quantifiable reduction in personalautomobile use by providing multiple transportation alternatives. Only t exemplary performance credit is available for implementing a comprehensive transportation management plan for any of the SS Credit 3,Altemative Transportation, credits. Projects that are awarded exemplary performance for SS Credit 3.1, Alternative Transportation—Public Transportation Access, using the double transit ridership option are not eligible for exemplary performance under this credit. 10. Regional Variations There are no regional variations associated with this credit. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations For project buildings that include preferred parking, establish procedures for the use of this amenity, communicate them to building occupants, and assign operations staff for their administration. The procedures might include establishing a system for enforcing use of designated spaces (e.g, a permitting system), discounting paid parking, and tracking use of preferred parking. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (httpWwww.usgbc.orgipL-ojecttools) for additional resources and technical information. 94 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281633 Websites Association for Commuter Transportation (ACT) http:fiww.actweb.org/mcipage.do ACT is an association of professionals who specialize in creating a more workable transportation and commuting system. ACT provides information and advocacy on transportation issues involving commute alternatives and offers its members networking and professional development opportunities. Research Triangle Park, Smart Commute http://www.smartcommute.org Smart Commute has valuable information about telecommuting and carpool programs useful for any organization. State of Arizona Telecommuting Program This website provides background information on the significance of telecommuting and examples of the development, implementation, and results of telecommuting programs. Teletrips Teletrips helps create, implement, and manage public-private partnership programs to reduce commuter congestion, improve air quality, and reduce energy consumption. Victoria Transport Policy Institute, Online Transportation Demand Management Encyclopedia http://www.vtpi.org/tdm Transportation demand management is a general term for strategies that result in more efficient use of transportation resources. This online encyclopedia is a comprehensive source of information about innovative management solutions to transportation problems. 13. Definitions A carpool is an arrangement by which 2. or more people share a vehicle for transportation. Parking subsidies are the costs of providing occupant parking that are not recovered in parking fees. Preferred parking, available to particular users, includes designated spaces close to the building (aside from designated handicapped spots), designated covered spaces, discounted parking passes, and guaranteed passes in a lottery system. Endnotes U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. "Heat Island Effect." http://www.epa.govjheatislandf index.htm (accessed November 2°08). U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Water. Water-Efficient Landscaping. 2002. http:// www.epa.gov/owm/water-efficiency/final_final.pdf (accessed January zoos). Massachusetts Water Resources Authority. "Water Efficiency and Management for Commercial Buildings." http://www.mwra.state.ma.us/o4water/html/bullet4htm (accessed May2008). U.S. Census Bureau. "2006 American Community Survey: Selected Economic Characteristics." http://factfinder.census.goviservlet/ADPTable?_bm=y8c-qr_name=ACS_20o6_EST_Goo_DP38:- geo id=ot0o0US&-context=adp&-ds name=&-tree id=3os8c- lang=en&-redoLog=false&- format (accessed May2008). SS CI Credit 3.3 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 95 EFTA00281634 SS 5 U.S. Department of Energy, Office of Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy "Figure 6.1.1 Building Share of U.S. Electricity Consumption/Sales (Percent)." 2008 Buildings Energy Data Book. 2008. http://www.btscoredatabook.net/TableView.aspx?table=6.1.1 (accessed November 2008). • Energy Information Administration. Assumptions to the Annual Energy Outlook 2008. 2008. http:// www.eia.doe.govfoiaf/aeofassumption/ (accessed November2008). Hutson, Susan S., Nancy L. Barber, Joan F. Kenny, Kristin S. Linsey, Deborah S. Lumia, and Molly A. Nlaupin. Estimated Use of Water in the United States in 2000. U.S. Geological Survey, 2004. http:// pubs.usgs.gov/circ/2.004/circ1268/ (accessed November 2.008). • http://www.epa.gov/brownfields/about.htm. 9 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Reducing Stormwa ter Costs through Low Impact Development (LID) Strategies and Practices. 2007. v‘ww.epa.goviowow/nps/lid/costs.97/factsheet. html (accessed May 2008). 1" Ibid. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency "Heat Island Effect." http://www.epa.gov/heatisland/ index.htm (accessed May 2008). U.S. Environmental Protection Agency "Heat Island Effect: Urban Heat Island Pilot Project (UHIPP)." www.epa.gov/hiri/pilot/index.html (accessed May 2008). '3 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency "Heat Island Effect: Basic Information." http://www.epa. gov/hiri/about/index.html (accessed November 2008). U.S. Environmental Protection Agency "Heat Island Effect: Basic Information." http://www.epa. gov/hiri/about/index.html (accessed November 2008). is Georgia Department of Natural Resources, Pollution Prevention Assistance Division. "The Sustainable Office Toolkit." http://mvw.p2adeorg/toolkitimodules_A_Lhtml (accessed May 2008). 'S U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Solid Waste. 'Wastes—Resource Conservation— Reduce, Reuse, Recycle—Construction & Demolition Materials." http://www.epa.gov/osw/ conserverr/imr/cdm/ (accessed November2008). American Public Transportation Association. " Use of Public Transportation by One in Ten Americans Would Lead to Cleaner Air and Reduce U.S. Oil Dependency by 40 Percent."APTA News Release (July 17, 2002), (accessed November2008). U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Emission Facts: Greenhouse Gas Emissions from a Typical Passenger Vehicle. 2005. http://www.epa.goviotaq/climate/420foso04.htm (accessed November 2008). 96 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281635 EFFEDEMF Overview Americans'consumptionofthepublicwater supplycontinues to increase. The U.S.Geological Survey estimates that between 1990 and 2000, this consumption increased 12%, to 43.3 billion gallons per day.' The public water supply is delivered to users for domestic, commercial, industrial, and other purposes and is the primary source of water for most buildings. In 2000, these uses represented about 11% of total withdrawals and slightly less than 40% of groundwater withdrawals, constituting the third-largest category of water use in the United States, behind thermoelectric power (48% of total withdrawals) and irrigation (34% oftotal withdrawals). This high demand for water is straining supplies, and in some parts of the United States, water levels in underground aquifers have dropped more than 150 feet since the 1940s! Only about 14% of withdrawn water is lost to evaporation or transpiration or incorporated into products or crops; the rest is used, treated, and discharged to the nation's water bodies.3Discharged water contaminates rivers, lakes, and potable water with bacteria, nitrogen, toxic metals, and other contaminants. The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) estimates that 1/3 of the nation's lakes, streams, and rivers are now unsafe for swimming and fishing" Even so, water bodies in the United States are so% cleaner& today than in the mid-1970s. And although consumption is rising, total U.S. withdrawals from the public water supply declined by nearly 9% between 1980 and 1985 and have varied by less than 3% for each 5-year interval since then? Those achievements can be largely attributed to the Clean Water Act and reductions in industrial, irrigation, and thermoelectric power withdrawals since 1980. Although the statistics show improvement, we are still far from sustainably using water. If total commercial building water consumption for all uses in the United States fell by just 10%, we could save more than 2 trillion gallons of water each year, Using large volumes of water increases maintenance and life-cycle costs for building operations and also increases consumers' costs for additional municipal supply and treatment facilities. Conversely, buildings that use water efficiently can reduce costs through lower fees, less sewage volume, reductions in energy and chemical use, and lower capacity charges and limits. Efficiency measures can easily reduce water use in average commercial buildings by 30% or more.° In a typical 100,000-square-foot office building, low-flow plumbing fixtures coupled with sensors and automatic controls will save a minimum of 1 million gallons of water per year.1O In addition, nonpotable water can be used for landscape irrigation, toilet and urinal flushing, custodial purposes, and building systems. Depending on local water costs, utility savings can be tens of thousands of dollars per year. Real estate firm Cushman and Wakefield, for example, implemented a comprehensive water management strategy at its Adobe headquarters in San Jose, California, in 2002 and achieved a 22% reduction in water use." The LEED for Commercial Interiors Water Efficiency (WE) prerequisite and credit encourage the use of strategies and technologies that reduce the amount of potable water consumed in buildings. Many water conservation strategies are no-cost or provide a rapid payback. Some, such as biological wastewater treatment systems and graywater plumbing systems, require more substantial investment and are cost-effective only under certain building and site conditions. The WE prerequisite and credit address environmental concerns related to building water use and disposal and promote the following measures: WE OVERVIEW 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 97 EFTA00281636 WE OVERVIEW Monitoring Water Consumption Performance The first step to improving water efficiency is to understand current performance. Tracking water use alongside energy use can help organizations better understand how these resources relate to each other, make integrated management decisions that increase overall efficiency, and verify savings from improvement projects in both energy and water systems. Organizations that manage water and energy performance together can take advantage of this relationship to create greener, more sustainable buildings. Reducing Indoor Potable Water Consumption Reducing indoor potable water consumption may require using alternative water sources for nonpotable applications and installing building upgrades, such as water-efficient fixtures, flow restrictors on existing fixtures, electronic controls, dry composting toilet systems, and waterless urinals. Lowering potable water use for toilets, showerheads, faucets, and other fixtures can reduce the total amount withdrawn from natural water bodies. A commercial building in Boston replaced 12,6 3.5-gallons-per-flush (gpf) toilets with low-flow, 1.6-gpf toilets and reduced total water use by 15%. With an initial cost of $32,000 and estimated annual savings of $22,800, payback for the renovation was 1.4 years. Another Boston building installed 30 faucet aerators and reduced annual indoor water consumption by t90,000 gallons. The cost of the materials and labor totaled $300, and the change is estimated to save $1,250 per year, with a simple payback of 2 months." Reducing Water Consumption to Save Energy and Improve Environmental Well-Being In manybuildings, the most significant savings associated with water efficiency result from reduced energy costs. Water efficiency cuts costs by reducing the amount of water that must be treated, heated, cooled, and distributed—all of which require energy. Because water heating in commercial buildings accounts for nearly 15% of total building energy use," the efficient use of hot water results in significant energy savings. For this reason, water conservation that reduces the use of hot water also conserves energy and reduces energy-related pollution. For example, U.S. government office buildings use an estimated 244 billion to 256 billion gallons of water each year. Approximately 138.3 billion Btus of energy is required to process this water annually, 98% of which is used to heat water. By implementing water-efficiency efforts, federal buildings could conserve approximately 40% of their total water consumption and reduce related energy use by approximately 81.3z billion Btus per year!. Practicing water conservation measures can also help improve both environmental and human wellbeing. A recent government survey showed that at least 36 states are anticipating local, regional, or statewide water shortages by zos3.'s Human health and environmental welfare are affected when reservoirs and groundwater aquifers are depleted, since lower water levels can concentrate both natural contaminants, such as radon and arsenic, and human pollutants, such as agricultural and chemical wastes. Increasing water efficiency helps keep contaminants at safe levels. Waterefficiencyalso reducesenergyconsumption inthewatersupplyandwastewater infrastructure. American public water supply and treatment facilities consume about 56 billion kilowatt-hours (kWh) each year"—enough electricity to power more than 5 million homes for an entire year." Better water efficiency in commercial buildings will reduce the amount of energy consumed by water treatment facilities. CREDIT TITLE WE Prerequisite 1 WE Credit 1 Water Use Reduction Water Use Reduction 98 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281637 WATER USE REDUCTION Prerequisite WE Prerequisite 1 Points Required Intent To increase water efficiency within buildings to reduce the burden on municipal water supply and wastewater systems. Requirements Employ strategies that in aggregate use zo% less water than the water use baseline calculated for the building (not including irrigation). Calculate the baseline according to the commercial and/or residential baselines outlined below.' Calculations are based on estimated occupant usage and must include only the following fixtures and fixture fittings (as applicable to the project scope): water closets, urinals, lavatory faucets, showers, kitchen sink faucets and prerinse spray valves. Commercial Fixtures, Fittings, and Appliances Current Baseline Commercial toilets 1.6 gallons per flush (gpfr Except blow-out fixtures: 3.5 (gpf) Commercial urinals 1.0 (gpf) Commercial lavatory (restroom) faucets 2.2 gallons per minute (gpm) at 60 pounds per square inch (psi), private applications only (hotel or motel guest rooms, hospital patient rooms) 0.5 (gpm) at 60 (psi)** all others except private applications 0.25 gallons per cycle for metering faucets Commercial prerinse spray valves (for food service applications) Flow rates 1.6 (gpm) (no pressure specified: no performance requirement) Residential Fixtures, Fittings, and Appliances Current Baseline Residential toilets 1.6 (gpf)•• • Residential lavatory (bathroom) faucets 2.2 (gpm) at 60 psi Residential kitchen faucet Residential showerheads 2.5 (gpm) at 80 (psi) per shower stall'••• • EPAct 1992 standard foe toilets applies to both commercial " In addition to EPAct requirements. the American Society psi µSME A112.18.1-2005). This maximum has been Pkoribing Code. 4" EPAct 1992 standard foe toilets applies to both commercial "" Residential slims cornstment (stall) in dwelling units: including rain systems, waterfalls, bodysprays, kodyspas above (2.5 gpm) per shower compartment, where the floor each increment of 2,500 square inches o4 floor area thereafter from all flowingdevices equal too less than the allowable recirculated imputable water originating from within the long as the total potable water flow does rot exceed the and residential models. of Mechanical Engineers standard foe public lavatory laurels is 0.5 gpm at 60 incorporated into the national Uniform Plumbing Code and the International and residential models. The total allowable flow rate from all flowing 'boneheads at any given lime. and jets. must be limited to the allowable 'bonehead flow rate as specified ma of the shower compartment is less than 2.500 square nches. Foe or part thereof. an additional 'honchoed with total al losable non rate flow rate as specified above must be allowed. Exception: Shunts that emit shaver compartment while operating are allowed to exceed the rwaumum as flow rate as 'peeled ebony. t Tables adapted from information developed and summarised by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Office of Water based cc requirements of the Emu*. Policy Act (EPAct) c415.92 and subsequent rulings by the Department a Energy, requirements of the EPAct of 2.00 and the plumbing Loat requirements as stated in the 2006 editions of the Uniform Plumbing Code or International Plumbing axle pertaining to fbaure performance. WE PREREQUISITE 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 99 EFTA00281638 WE PREREQUISITE 1 The following fixtures, fittings and appliances are outside the scope of the water use reduction calculation: ■ Commercial Steam Cookers ■ Commercial Dishwashers ■ Automatic Commercial Ice Makers s Commercial (family-sized) Clothes Washers ■ Residential Clothes Washers ■ Standard and Compact Residential Dishwashers 100 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2O09 EDITION EFTA00281639 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Reducing potable water use in buildings for urinals, toilets, showerheads, and faucets decreases the total amount withdrawn from rivers, streams, underground aquifers, and other water bodies. These strategies protect the natural water cycle and save water resources for future generations. In addition, water use reductions, in aggregate, allow municipalities to reduce or defer the capital investment needed for water supply and wastewater treatment infrastructure. Conserving municipally supplied potable water also reduces chemical inputs at the water treatment works, as well as reduces energy use and the associated greenhouse gas emissions from treatment and distribution. The energy use and emissions generated to supply municipal water vary greatly across the United States and depend on the utility's water sources, the distance water is transported, and the type of water treatment applied. End-use water efficiency can greatly reduce negative environmental impacts. Comparing the environmental impacts of off-site treatment and supply with those of on-site treatment is a worthwhile exercise. Because water heating in commercial buildings accounts for nearly is% of building energy use," conservation measures will also reduce end-use energy and energy-related pollution. Economic Issues Reductions in water consumption decrease building operating costs and bring about wider economic benefits. Reduced water consumption allows municipalities to lessen or defer the capital investment needed for water supply and wastewater treatment infrastructure, thereby leading to more stable municipal taxes and water rates. Many cost-effective systems and fixtures currently on the market support compliance with the requirement,but the cost ofwater efficiency measuresvaries widely. For example, installing tamperproof faucet aerators on existing fixtures is a small expense compared with a rainwater-harvesting or graywater-recycling system. High-efficiency toilets and dry fixtures, such as composting toilet systems, often have higher initial costs than standard models. Newer technologies may also have higher costs and limited availability because of production constraints, and they may entail different maintenance and repair expenses,such as special cartridge components and cleaning and sealing fluids. Teams should perform a full cost-benefit and life-cycle study before installing such products. 2. Related Credits Efforts to increase rainwater harvesting, increase graywater use, and decrease the demand on local water aquifers may support the following credits: ■ SS Credit 1, Option a, Path a: Site Selection, Stormwater Design—Quantity Control ■ SS Credit t, Option a, Path 3: Site Selection, Stormwater Design—Quality Control ■ SS Credit t, Option a, Paths 7 and 8: Site Selection, Water-Efficient Landscaping ■ SS Credit t, Option a, Path 9: Site Selection—Innovative Wastewater Technologies ■ SS Credit t, Option a, Path 10: Site Selection—Water Use Reduction ■ WE Credit 1: Water Use Reduction Additional energy use may be needed for certain reuse strategies. Active systems also require commissioning, if within the tenant scope of work, and should be considered in relation to the following credits: ■ EA Prerequisite 1: Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems WE CI Prerequisite 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 101 EFTA00281640 WE CI • EA Credit 3: Enhanced Commissioning Prerequisite 1 • EA Credit s: Measurement and Verification 3. Summary of Referenced Standards The Energy PolicyAct (EPAct) of 1992 (and as amended) This act addresses energy and water use in commercial, institutional, and residential facilities. The Energy PolicyAct (EPAct) of 2005 This statute became U.S. law in August zoos. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials, Publication IAPMO/American National Standards Institute UPC 1-2006 Uniform Plumbing Code z006, Section 402.0, Water-Conserving Fixtures and Fittings http:pwww.iapmo.mg UPC defines water-conserving fixtures and fittings for water closets, urinals, and metered faucets. This ANSI-accredited code safeguards life, health, property, and public welfare by regulating and controlling the design, construction, installation, materials, location, operation, and maintenance or use of plumbing systems. International Code Council, International Plumbing Code 2006, Section 604, Design of Building Water Distribution System http:(Jwww.iccsafe.org IPC defines maximum flow rates and consumption for plumbing fixtures and fittings, including public and private lavatories, showerheads, sink faucets, urinals, and water closets. 4. Implementation The water use reduction credit calculation is based on occupancy. When restrooms are not a part of the project scope, it is important to evaluate the plumbing in common areas of the building. If the base building does not have high-performance fixtures, the project team should consider requiring upgrades to existing fixtures as part of the lease negotiations. Effective ways to reduce potable water use include installing flow restrictors and reduced flow aerators on lavatory, sink, and shower fixtures; installing and maintaining automatic faucet sensors and metering controls; installing low-consumption flush fixtures, such as high-efficiency water closets and urinals; installing nonwater fixtures. In certain cases, faucets with low-flow rates are not appropriate. For example, in kitchen sinks and janitors' closets, faucets are used to fill pots and buckets. Using a low-flow rate for tasks where the volume of water is predetermined does not save water and will likely cause frustration. Consider alternative strategies to reduce water use, such as installing special-use potfillersandhigh-efficiency faucets or foot pedal-operated faucets. WaterSense, a partnership program sponsored by EPA, helps consumers identify water-efficient products and programs. WaterSense-labeled products exceed the Uniform Plumbing Code and the International Plumbing Code standards for some high-efficiency fixtures or fittings. A variety of WaterSense labeled products and other high-efficiency plumbing fixtures, fittings, and appliances can be installed in the same way as conventional EPAct plumbing fiXtUreS, fittings, and appliances. Although water-efficient dishwashers, laundry machines, and other water-consuming fixtures are not counted in the calculations for this credit, they may be included in exemplary performance calculations for WE Credit 3, Water Use Reduction. To determine the most effective strategies fora particular condition, analyze the water conservation options available to the project based on location, code compliance (plumbing and safety), and 102 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281641 overall project function. Determine where in the building the most water is used, evaluate potential alternative water-saving technologies, and examine the impacts of alternative fixtures and technologies. Compare the design case water use with the calculated EPAct baseline to determine the optimal water savings for plumbing fixtures and fittings.Perform a detailed climate analysis to determine the availability of on-site resources and choose strategies that are appropriate and costeffective. Table 1. UPC and IPC Standards for Plumbing Fixture Water Use Ildwe UPC and IPC Standards EPA WaterSense Standards Water closets (gallons per flush. gp0 1.60 1.28 Urinals (gpf) 1.00 0.5, Showerheads (gallons per minute. gpm*) 2.50 1.5-2.01 Public lavatory faucets and aerators (gpm') 0.5 Private lavatory faucets and aerators (gpm'') 2.2 1.5 Public metering lavatory faucets (gallons per metering cycle) 0.25 Kitchen and janitor sink faucets 2.20 Metering faucets (gallons per cycle) 0.25 *When measured al a honing water premise of 80 pounds per square irch (pso). "When measured al a Datong water premise of 60 pounds per square irch (pso). • On May 22. 2008. EPA issued a notification of intent to develop a specification for high efficiency urinals. WaterSense anticipates establishing a maximum allowable gush volume of 0.5 gpf. ' On August 30. 2007. EPA issued a notification of intent to develop a specification for shomerheads. WaterSense anticipates establishing a single maximum gm rate between 1.5 gum and 2.0 pip. Some water-saving technologies affect on-site energy performance and require commissioning• this task should be addressed by a project's measurement and verification plan. Calibration is necessary for projects using automatic sensors or flow valves. See EA Prerequisite 1, Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems, and EA Credit s, Measurement and Verification, for more information. Space constraints or characteristics of the plumbing fixtures and fittings in existing buildings may hinder water efficiency efforts. 5. Timeline and Team During predesign, setting water-use goals and strategy involves the owner, architect, and engineers. Identify local water utilities and governing authorities, research codes and applicable water laws, learn the process for obtaining permits and approval, and set water use goals and strategy. In construction documents, the architect, working with the owner, should specify efficient fixtures and appliances and complete LEED calculations and documentation. During construction, the design team and owner should confirm proper selection, installation, and operation of water fixtures, fittings, and systems. 6. Calculations The following section describes the calculation methodology for determining water savings. The calculated water use reduction for the project is the difference between the calculated design case and a baseline case. The percentage is determined by dividing the design case use by the baseline use. The methodology differs from traditional plumbing design, in which calculations are based on fixture counts; under this prerequisite, the water use calculation is based on fixture and fitting water consumption rates and estimated use by the occupants. Occupants' estimated use is determined by calculating full-time equivalent (FTE) and transient occupants within the tenant space and applying appropriate fixture use rates to each. WE CI Prerequisite 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 103 EFTA00281642 WE CI Prerequisite 1 Fixture Usage Groups Fixture usage groups are subsets of washroom facilities used by different types of occupants. For each group, complete the template calculator. Indicate which fixtures are involved and which occupants they serve. If all occupants within the building have access to all fixtures, or if all fixtures are standard throughout the building, enter only a single fixture usage group. That is the simpler approach, but the project team may specify multiple groups to reflect different fixtures and usage patterns. Forexample,ifwashrooms onthefirst floor are used primarilybytransient retail customers and washrooms on the second floor are used by office workers, calculate each separately. The following scenario illustrates the application of different fixture usage groups. In a retail store, employees use back-of-house restrooms exclusively; these restrooms have different fixture and fitting types and water consumption rates from those in the customer restrooms. The project team establishes a usage groups to account for the distinct populations in the space and the specific restroom facilities they use: (t) back-of-house (employees), and (a) customer restrooms (customers). Calculating Occupancy Identify the number of building occupants by occupancy type. In buildings with multiple shifts, use the number of FTEs from all shifts. Include the following: ■ Full-time staff ■ Part-time staff ■ Transients (students, visitors, retail customers) Calculate the FTE number of occupants based on a standard 8-hour daily occupancy period (40 hours per week). An 8-hour occupant has an FTE value of 1.0, and part-time occupants have an FTE value based on theirhours per daydivided by 8. FTE calculations for each shift ofthe project must be used consistently for all LEED credits. Estimate the transient building occupants, such as students, visitors, and customers. Transient occupants can be reported as either daily totals or full-time equivalents. When using daily totals for transients, match the fixture uses for each occupancy type with the values shown in Table a (e.g., for the dailytotal of students, assume 0.5 lavatory faucet uses per daily student visitor). If transients are reported as a daily hill-time equivalent value, fixture uses for FTEs must be assumed regardless of the transient population's identity (e.g.,for students reported as FTEs, assume 3 lavatory faucet uses per student FTE). Use a transient occupancy number that is a representative daily average over the course of a year. If the number of transient visitors per day for retail facilities is unknown, estimate the FTE value of this population based on the default values presented in Table 3. Table 2 provides default fixture use values for different occupancy types. These values should be used in the calculations for this credit unless special circumstances warrant modifications. Most buildings with students, visitors, and retail customers will also have FTE occupants. Half of all students and visitors are assumed to use a flush fixture and a lavatory faucet in the building and are not expected to use a shower or kitchen sink. A fifth of retail customers are assumed to use a flush and a flow fixture in the buildingand no shower orldtchen sink. The default for residential occupants is s uses per day of water closet and lavatory faucet, t shower, and 4 kitchen sink uses. For consistency across LEED projects, the calculations require the use of a balanced, t-to-t sex ratio unless specific project conditions warrant an alternative. Provide a narrative description to explain any special circumstances. 104 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281643 Table 2. Default Fixture Uses, by Occupancy Type Mims Tips FTE StudentNisitor Retail Customer Resident UsesMay Water Closet — Female 3 0.5 0.2 5 —Male 1 0.1 0.1 5 Urinal — Female 0 0 0 Ma — Male 2 0.4 0.1 n/a Lavatory Faucet — duration 15 sec; 12 sec with autocontrol — residential, duration 60 sec 3 0.5 0.2 5 Shower — duration 300 sec — residential, duration 480 sec 0.1 0 0 1 Kitchen Sink, — duration 15 sec — residential, duration 60 sec 1 Na 0 n/a 0 Na n/a 4 Table 3. Default Values for Transient Retail Occupants Retell Space FTE per 100 (sf) Large-format retailer (greater than 50,000 square feet) 0.91 Grocery store 0.87 Restaurant 1.05 Small retailer 0.67 Service 0.77 Sources: 2001 Uniform Building Code. 2004-2005 Database for nagy Efficiency Resources (DEER) Update Studs field investigation vxrk performed by LEED Retail Core Committee Members: ASNUPSIIRADIESNA 90.1-2007: LEED Reference Guide for Green Interior Design and Construction. 2009 Edition. Design Case Water Consumption The design case annual water use is determined by totaling the annual volume of each fixture type and subtracting any nonpotable water supply. The design case must use the rated flow rates and flush volumes for installed plumbing fixtures and fittings. Obtain water consumption data from the manufacturers' product literature. In addition to the typical fixtures shown in Table 4, the project team may add others regulated by the referenced standards, as applicable. WE CI Prerequisite 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 105 EFTA00281644 WE CI Prerequisite 1 Table 4. Sample Plumbing Fixtures and Fittings and Water Consumption Ruth Fixture Flow Rate (gpf) Flow Finite Flow Rate Conventional water closet 1.6 Conventional private lavatory 2.2 gpm High-efficiency toilet (HET). single-flush gravity 1.28 Conventional public lavatory 0.5 gpm or s 0.25 gpc HET, single-flush pressure assist 1.0 Conventional kitchen sink 2.2 gpm HET, dual flush (full-flush) 1.6 Low-flow kitchen sink 1.8 gpm HET, dual flush (lax-flush) 1.1 Conventional shower 2.5 gpm HET, foam flush 0.05 Low-flow shower 1.8 gpm Nonwater toilet 0.0 Conventional urinal 1.0 High-efficiency urinal (HEW 0.5 Nonwater urinal 0.0 Facilities in residences and apartments, private bathrooms in hotels and hospitals, and restrooms in commercial establishments where the fixtures are intended for the use of a family or an individual are considered private orprivate-use facilities.All other facilities are considered public or publicuse. If the classification for public or private use is unclear, default to public-use flow rates in performing the calculations associated with this credit. Baseline Case Water Consumption Thebaseline case annualwateruse is determinedbysetting thefixture and fittingwaterconsumption to baseline rates listed in the requirements (as opposed to actual installed values in the design case). Eligible Fixtures This prerequisite is limited to savings generated by the water-using fixtures listed in Table 1. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. • Determine the type and number of occupants. • Retain manufacturers' data showing the water consumption rates, manufacturer, and model of each fixture and fitting. • List plumbing fixtures by usage group, if applicable. • Define each usage group used. 8. Examples There are no examples for this credit. 9. Exemplary Performance This prerequisite is not eligible for exemplary performance under the Innovation in Design section. 10. Regional Variations Local building and health codes differ in their treatment of alternative plumbing fixtures, such as nonwater urinals, dual-flush or low-flow water closets, and nonwater toilet systems. Confirm the legality of nontraditional approaches with code officials before committing to specific water-saving strategies. 106 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281645 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Consider installing submetering for water delivered to fixture and fittings to help operators manage water consumption and identify problems within the system. Integrating electronic data logging will facilitate consumption trend analysis. Some water conservation technologies may require special cleaning or maintenance procedures. For example, nonwater urinals generally need to be cleaned according to the manufacturer's specifications and their chemical traps appropriately maintained. Project teams should provide facility managers with appropriate maintenance information, manufacturers' contact information, and product specifications to facilitate proper operation. A preventive maintenance program that includes plumbing fixture and fitting inspection and testing ensures that flow valves do not leak and that any sensors are calibrated correctly so that the fixtures flush and/or flow the appropriate amounts at the proper time. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http://www.usgbc.org/projecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites American Rainwater Catchment Systems Association http://www.arcsa.org ARCSA was founded to promote rainwater catchment systems in the U.S. The ARCSA website includes a compilation of publications such as the Texas Guide to Rainwater Harvesting. American Water Works Association, Water Wiser: The Water Efficiency Clearinghouse http://www.awwa.org/waterwiser%ao This web clearinghouse provides articles, reference materials, and papers on all forms of water efficiency. Environmental Building News,Water: Doing More with Less The site presents an article on building water efficiency. Fine Homelmilding, Choosing a Toilet This article includes several varieties of water-efficient toilets. National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration, National Climatic Data Center http://ww.ncdc.noaa.govioa/ncdc.html This site is useful for researching local climate data such as rainfall amounts. It also includes links to state climate offices. North Carolina Division of Pollution Prevention and Environmental Assistance, Water Efficiency Manual for Commercial, Industrial, and Institutional Facilities http://wwwpipays.orgrreficd/00692.pdf This straightforward manual on water efficiency draws from a number of different North Carolina governmental departments. Rocky Mountain Institute, Water http://www.rmi.org/sitepagesipidi 2.8.php This portion of RMI's website is devoted to water conservation and efficiency. The site contains information on watershed management and commercial, industrial, and institutional water use and articles on policy and implementation. WE CI Prerequisite 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 107 EFTA00281646 WE CI Prerequisite 1 Terry Love's Consumer Toilet Reports This Website offers a plumber's perspective on many of the major toilets used in commercial and residential applications. U.S. Department of Energy, Smart Communities Network http://ww.smartcommunities.ncat.org This project website provides information about water efficiency, national and regional water efficiency assistance programs, and links to additional resources. U.S. Department of the Interior, Water Measurement Manual: A Water Resources Technical Publication httpWwww.usbr.sovipmts/hydraulics_lab/pubs/wmm This publication is a guide to effective water measurement practices for better water management. U.S. EPA, How to Conserve Water and Use It Effectively http://wv.epa.gov/OWOWInps]chap3.html This document guides commercial, industrial, and residential water users in saving water and reducing sewage volumes. U.S. EPA, WaterSense http://wmvepa.goviwatersense The WaterSense Program helps U.S. consumers save water and protect the environment. Look for the WaterSense label to help choose high-quality, water-efficient products. Avariety of products are available, and they do not require a change in lifestyle. U.S. EPA, Water Use Efficiency Program http://wmvemgoviowmfwater-efficiency This website provides an overview of the program and information about using water more efficiently. Water Closet Performance Testing This site provides a reports on independent test results for a variety of toilets' flush performance and reliability. Print Media Constructed Wetlands for Wastewater Treatment and Wildlife Habitat: 17 Case Studies, PIMA fre --93-005 (U.S. SPA,1993). On-site Wastewater Treahnent Systems Manual (U.S. EPA, =02): bktp:fiwww.epnovinrmr1/ pubs/6acrocoofghtml/62AR00008.htm. This document provides a focused, performance-based approach to on-site wastewater treatment and system management aswell as valuable information on a varietyof on-site sewage treatment options. Water, Sanitary and Waste Services for Buildings, fifth edition, by A. Wise and J. Swaffield (Longman Scientific & Technical, t995). 13. Definitions An aquifer is an underground water-bearing rock formation or group of formations that supply groundwater, wells, or springs. Automatic fixture sensors are motion detectors that automatically turn on and turn off lavatories, sinks, water closets, and urinals. Sensors can be hard wired or battery operated. 108 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281647 Blackwater definitions vary, but wastewater from toilets and urinals is always considered blackwater. Wastewater from kitchen sinks (perhaps differentiated by the use of a garbage disposal), showers, or bathtubs is considered blacicwater under some state or local codes. Composting toilet system. See nonwater toilet system. Metering controls limit the flow time of water. They are generally manual-on and automatic-off devices, most commonly installed on lavatory faucets and showers. Nonpotable water. See potable water. Nonwater (or composting) toilet systems are dry plumbing fixtures and fittings that contain and treat human waste via microbiological processes. A nonwater (or dry) urinal, replaces a water flush with a trap containing a layer of buoyant liquid that floats above the urine, blocking sewer gas and odors. On-site wastewater treatment is the transport,storage,treatment,and disposal ofwastewater generated on the project site. Potable water meets or exceeds EPA's drinking water quality standards and is approved for human consumption by the state or local authorities having jurisdiction; it may be supplied from wells or municipal water systems. WE CI Prerequisite 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 109 EFTA00281648 110 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2O09 EDITION EFTA00281649 WATER USE REDUCTION Credit WE Credit 1 Points 6-11 points Intent To further increase water efficiency within buildings to reduce the burden on municipal water supply and wastewater systems. Requirements Employ strategies that in aggregate use less water than the water use baseline calculated for the building (not including irrigation). The minimum water savings percentage for each point threshold is as follows: Percentage Reduction Points 30% 6 35% 8 40% 11 Calculate the baseline according to the commercial and/or residential baselines outlined below.' Calculations are based on estimated occupant usage and must include only the following fixtures and fixture fittings (as applicable to the project scope): water closets, urinals, lavatory faucets, showers, kitchen sink faucets and pre-rinse spray valves. Commercial Fixtures. Fittings, and Appliances Current Baseline Commercial toilets 1.6 gallons per flush (CPO. Except blow-cut fixtures: 3.5 (gpf) Commercial urinals 1.0 (gpf) Commercial lavatory (restroom) faucets 2.2 gallons per minute (gpm) at 60 pounds per square inch (psi). private applications only (hotel cc motel guest rooms, hospital patient rooms) 0.5 (gpm) at 60 (psi)" all others except private applications 0.25 gallons per cycle for metering faucets Commercial prerinse spray valves (for food service applications) Flow rates 1.6 (gpm) (no pressure specified; no performance requirement) Residential Fixtures, Fittings, and Appliances Current Baseline Residential toilets 1.6 fgpfr • • Residential lavatory (bathroom) faucets 2.2 (gpm) at 60 psi Residential kitchen faucet Residential showerheads 2.5 (gpm) at 80 (psi) per shower stall••••• ' EPAct 1992 standard for toilets applies to both commercial and residential models. " In addition to EPAct requirements, the American Society of Mechanical Engineers standard for public lavatory faucets is 0.5 gpm at 60 psi (ASME A112.18.1.2005). This maximum by been incorporated into the national Uniform Plumbing Cede and the International Plumbing Code. "' EPAct 1992 standard for toilets applies to both commercial and residential models. "" Residential shower compartment (stall) in dwelling units The total allowable flow rate from all having showerheads at any given lime. including rain systems. waterfalls, be4ysprays, bodyspas and jets. must be limited to the allowable showerhead flow rate as specified above 12.5 gm) per shower compartment, where the floor area of the shown compartment is less than 2.503 square inches. Fe, each increment of 2.500 square inches of floor area thereafter or part thereof. an additional slxwierhead with total allowable flow rate from all Cowing devices equal to than the allowable flew rate as specified abort must be allowed. Exception: Showers that emit recirculated nonpotabk water originating from within the skeet compartment while operating are allowed to exceed the maernum as long as the total potable water flow don rot <Acted the flow rate as specified above. I Tabby, Ebb reed from irdorm3t tE I:: E. tired by the ITES rnyi tenment41 Pre,. AtEetwt• 'EPEI of Watt, WE CREDIT 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 111 EFTA00281650 WE CREDIT 1 The following fixtures, fittings and appliances are outside the scope of the water use reduction calculation: ■ Commercial Steam Cookers ■ Commercial Dishwashers ■ Automatic Commercial Ice Makers ■ Commercial (family-sized) Clothes Washers ■ Residential Clothes Washers ■ Standard and Compact Residential Dishwashers 112 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281651 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider See the Benefits and Issues section in WE Prerequisite 1. 2. Related Credits See the Related Credits section in WE Prerequisite t. 3. Summary of Referenced Standards Seethe Referenced Standards section in WE Prerequisite t 4. Implementation See the Implementation section in WE Prerequisite t. 5. Timeline and Team See the Timeline and Team section in WE Prerequisite t. 6. Calculations See the Calculations section in WE Prerequisite 1. 7. Documentation Guidance See the Documentation Guidance section in WE Prerequisite t. 8. Examples See the Examples section in WE Prerequisite t. 9. Exemplary Performance Projects may earn an innovation point for exemplary performance by demonstrating 45% reduction in projected potable water use. 10. Regional Variations See the Regional Variations section in WE Prerequisite 1. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations See the Operations and Maintenance section in WE Prerequisite t. 12. Resources See the Operations and Maintenance section in WE Prerequisite 1. 13. Definitions See the Definitions section in WE Prerequisite 1. Endnotes ' Hutson, Susan S., Nancy L. Barber, Joan F. Kenny, Kristin S. Linsey, Deborah S. Lumia, and Molly A. Maupin. Estimated Use of Water in the United States in 2000. U.S. Geological Survey, 2004 http:// waterusgs.govfpubsicirc/2004/circt268/htdocsftext-trends.html(accessed May 2008). U.S. Geological Survey. "USGS Study Documents Water Level Changes in High Plains Aquifer." U.S. Geological Survey News Release, (February9, 2004). http://www.usgs.govinewsroomiarticle. asp?ID=121(accessed May 20°8). 3 Solley, Wayne B., Robert R. Pierce, and Howard A. Perlman. Estimated Use of Water in the United States in 1995. U.S. Geological Survey, 1998. http:llwaterusgs.gov/watusefpdf1995fhtml (accessed May 20°8). WE CI Credit 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 113 EFTA00281652 WE 4 5 6 i3 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Ground Water and Drinking Water. "List of Drinking Water Contaminants & MCLS.” http:fiwww.epa.govisafewater/mcl.html (accessed May 2008). U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Wastewater Management. Water Permitting 101. 2002. http:fiwww.epa.gov/npdes/pubshoipape.pdf (accessed May 2008). Ibid. Hutson, Susan S., Nancy L. Barber, Joan F. Kenny, Kristin S. Linsey, Deborah S. Lumia, and Molly A. Maupin. Estimated Use of Water in the United States in 2000. U.S. Geological Survey, 2004 hap:// water.usgs.gov/pubsicirc/2004/circ 1268/htdocsitext-trendshtml (accessed May 2008). U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Wastewater Management. Water Permitting 101. 2002. http:fiwww.epa.goWnpdes/pubshoipape.pdf (accessed May 2008). U.S. Green Building Council. "LEED Certified Project List." http:fiwww.usgbc.orgq..EED/Proj act/ CertffiedProjectList.aspx (accessed May 2008). Based on 650 building occupants, each using an average of 20 gallons per day. Knox III, Randy H. Case Study: Adobe's "Greenest Office in America" Sets the Bar for Corporate Environmentalism. U.S. Green Building Council. Sustainability/Articlesfanicle.cgi?USGBC:200707-16.html, (accessed November 2.008). Massachusetts Water Resources Authority "Water Efficiency and Management for Commercial Buildings." http://www.mwra.state.ma.us/04waterihtmlibultem.htm (accessed May 2008). Energy Information Administration. "1999 Commercial Buildings Energy Consumption Survey?" Commercial Buildings Energy Consumption Survey httpliwww.eia.doe.govlemeuicbecs/ background.html (accessed May2008). U.S. Department of Energy. "Water Efficiency: Water Efficiency Basics." http://wwwLeere.energy. govifempfwaterfwater_basics.html (accessed May2008). U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, WaterSense. "Why Water Efficiency?" http://www.epa.govi owmfwater-efficiency/water/why.htm (accessed May 2.008). U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, WaterSense. "WaterSense." http://www.epa.govi watersense (accessed May 2008). Ibid. Energy Information Administration, "1999 Commercial Buildings Energy Consumption Survey," Commercial Buildings Energy Consumption Survey http:fiwww.eia.doe.govIemeufcbecs, (accessed May 2°08). 114 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281653 UMW MO Law Overview Buildings consume approximately 39% of the energy and 74% of the electricity produced annually in the United States, according to the U.S. Department of Energy.' Generating electricity from fossil fuels, such as oil, natural gas, and coal, negatively affects the environment at each step of production and use, beginning with extraction and transportation, followed by refining and distribution, and ending with consumption. For example, coal mining disrupts natural habitats and can devastate landscapes.Acidic mine drainage degrades regional ecosystems. Coal is rinsed with water,producing billions of gallons of sludge that must be stored in ponds. Mining itself is a dangerous occupation in which accidents and the long-term effects of breathing coal dust can shorten the life spans of coal miners. Electricity is most often generated by burning fossil fuels, whose combustion releases carbon dioxide and other greenhouse gases that contribute to climate change. Coal-fired plants accounted for more than half of U.S. electricity generation in 2006.3 Burning coal releases harmful pollutants, such as carbon dioxide, sulfur dicodde, nitrogen oxides, small particulate; and mercury. Each megawatt of coal-generated electricity releases into the atmosphere an average of 2,249 pounds of carbon dicodde, 13 pounds of sulfur dioxide, and 6 pounds of nitrogen oxides) More than 65% of the sulfur dioxide released into the air, or more than 13 million tons per year, comes from electricity generation, primarily coal-burning generators! Mining, processing, and transporting coal to power plants create additional emissions, including methane vented from the coal during transport. Natural gas, nuclear fission, and hydroelectric generators all have adverse environmental consequences as well. Natural gas is a major source of nitrogen oxide and greenhouse gas emissions. Nuclear power increases the potential for catastrophic accidents and raises significant waste transportation and disposal issues. Hydroelectric generating plants disrupt natural water flows and disturb aquatic habitats. Green buildings address those issues in two ways. First, they reduce the amount of energy required for building operations, and second, they use more benign forms of energy. The better the energy performance of a building, the fewer greenhouse gases are emitted from energy production. Electricity generation using sources other than fossil fuels also reduces the environmental impacts from a building's energy use. Additionally, improved energy performance results in lower operating costs. As global competition for fuels accelerates, the rate of return on energy efficiency measures improves. Energy Performance The energy performance of a commercial interior depends on both its design and that of the base building. Materials, construction methods, building envelope, and water efficiency as well as the heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning (HVAC) and lighting systems all play a role in determining how efficiently the building uses energy. The most effective way to optimize energy performance is to use an integrated, whole-building approach. Collaboration among all team members and base building operators, beginning at project inception, is necessary when designing for efficiency. The Energy and Atmosphere (EA) section of the LEED Reference Guide for Green Building Interior Design and Construction promotes three kinds of activities: EA OVERVIEW 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 115 EFTA00281654 EA OVERVIEW Tracking Building Energy Performance—Design, Commissioning, Monitoring Projects that achieve any level of certification must at a minimum perform better than the average building. Specific levels of achievement beyond the minimum are awarded a proportional number of points. First, the commercial interior must be designed to operate at a high performance level. Next, it must be commissioned to ensure that the chosen systems are performing to meet the design intent. Third, a process for ongoing measurement and verification should be established to ensure continual,high-performance of tenant-operated energy systems. The design of new facility space must be based on the designated mandatory and prescriptive requirements of ASHRAE 9O.1-2OO7 or USGBC-approved local code, whichever is more stringent. In addition, optimization of building energy performance beyond ASHRAE 90.1-2007 is required in EA Prerequisite 2, Minimum Energy Performance. Documenting the energy performance of the commercial interior can be accomplished through building energy simulation modeling or prescriptive options. Commissioning begins with the development of the owner's project requirements, followed at a minimum by creation of a formal commissioning plan, verification of equipment installation, and submission of a final report. Enhanced commissioning includes additional tasks, such as design and contractor submittal reviews,creation of a formal systems manual,verification of stafftraining,and a follow-up review before the warranty period ends. Commissioning identifies inefficiencies in building systems and provides a starting point for optimizing energy and water efficiency. Adjusting these systems for maximum efficiency, in turn, minimizes the environmental impacts associated with energy and water use. Properly executed commissioning can substantially reduce costs for maintenance, repairs, and resource consumption and improve indoor environmental quality, enhancing occupants' productivity. For example, studies conducted at the Lawrence Berkeley National Lab suggest that commissioning and improved operations could save 20% of the energy used by existing buildingts Monitoring the performance of building systems begins with establishing a measurement and verification plan based on the best practices developed by the International Performance Measurement and Verification Protocol (IPMVP). The plan must cover at least one year of postconstruction occupancy. Monitoring involves using appropriate measuring instruments and can include energy modeling. Managing Refrigerants to Eliminate CFCs The release ofchlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) from refrigeration equipment destroys ozone molecules in the stratosphere and reduces the ozone layer's ability to block harmful ultraviolet light from penetrating Earth's atmosphere. CFCs in the stratosphere also absorb infrared radiation and create chlorine, a potent greenhouse gas, further harming the atmosphere. Banning the use of CFCs in refrigerants slows the depletion of the ozone layer and mitigates climate change. Standard practice for commercial interiors is to install equipment that does not use CPC-based refrigerants. Using Renewable Energy Energy generation from renewable sources—such as solar, wind, and biomass—avoids air and water pollution and other environmental consequences associated with producing and consuming traditional fossil and nuclear fuels. Although hydropower is considered renewable, it can have harmful environmental effects, such as degrading water quality, altering fish and bird habitats, and endangering species. Low-impact hydropower, if available, is recommended. Renewable energy minimizes acid rain,smog, climate change,and human health problems resulting from air contaminants. In addition, using renewable resources avoids the consumption of fossil 116 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281655 fuels, the production of nuclear waste, and the environmentally damaging operation of hydropower dams. LEED for Commercial Interiors Approach to Energy and Atmosphere Because most commercial interiors projects occupy only a portion of a larger building, for which many energy-related decisions may have already been made, LEED for Commercial Interiors focuses on the individual tenant's options for energy efficiency, lighting, HVAC, appliances, and equipment. To support tenants' decisions to use renewable energy, LEED for Commercial Interiors offers incentive to purchase green power. Table t relates the timing of credit decisions and actions to the overall project schedule. CREDIT TITLE EA Prerequisite 1 EA Prerequisite 2 EA Prerequisite 3 EA Credit 1.1 EA Credit 1.2 EA Credit 1.3 EA Credit 1.4 EA Credit 2 EA Credit 3 EA Credit 4 Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems Minimum Energy Performance Fundamental Refrigerant Management Optimize Energy Performance—Lighting Power Optimize Energy Performance—Lighting Controls Optimize Energy Performance—HVAC Optimize Energy Performance—Equipment and Appliances Enhanced Commissioning Measurement and Verification Green Power EA OVERVIEW "21;LIY EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 117 EFTA00281656 118 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281657 FUNDAMENTAL COMMISSIONING OF BUILDING ENERGY SYSTEMS CI Prerequisite Points EA Prerequisite 1 Required Intent To verify that the project's energy-related systems are installed and calibrated to performing according to the owner's project requirements, basis of design and construction documents. Benefits of commissioning include reduced energy use, lower operating costs, fewer contractor callbacks, better building documentation, improved occupant productivity, and verification that the systems perform in accordance with the owner's project requirements. Requirements The following commissioning process activities must be completed by the project team: • Designate an individual as thecommissioning authority (CM) to lead, reviev,rand oversee the completion of the commissioning process activities. • The CM must have documented commissioning authority experience in at least 2. building projects. • The individual serving as the CM must be independent of the project's design and construction management, though the CxA may be an employee of any firms providing those services. The CxA may be a qualified employee or consultant of the owner. • The CM must report results, findings and recommendations directly to the owner. • For projects smaller than 5o,coo gross square feet, the CxA may be a qualified person on the design or construction teams who has the required experience. • The owner must document the owner's project requirements. The design team must develop the basis of design. The CM must review these documents for clarity and completeness. The owner and design team must be responsible for updates to their respective documents. • Develop and incorporate commissioning requirements into the construction documents. • Develop and implement a commissioning plan. • Verify the installation and performance of the systems to be commissioned. • Complete a summary• commissioning report. Commissioned Systems Commissioning process activities must be completed for the following energy-related systems at a minimum: • Heating, ventilating, air conditioning and refrigeration (H VAC&R) systems (mechanical and passive) and associated controls. • Lighting and daylighting controls. • Domestic hot water systems. • Renewable energy systems (e.g. PV, wind, solar). EA PREREQUISITE 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 119 EFTA00281658 EA CI Prerequisite 1 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Benefits of commissioning include reduced energy use, lower operating costs, fewer contractor callbacks, better building documentation, improved occupant productivity, and verification that the systems perform in accordance with the owner's project requirements. Environmental Issues Facilities that do not perform as intended may consume significantly more resources over their lifetimes. Commissioning can minimize the negative impacts buildings have on the environment by helping verify that buildings are designed and constructed to operate as intended and in accordance with the owner's project requirements. Economic Issues If commissioning has not been previously included as part of the project delivery process, the costs associated with commissioning maybe met with initial resistance. When the long-term benefits are taken into consideration, however, commissioning can be seen as a cost-effective way to ensure that the building is functioning as designed and that the planned energy savings are realized. Improved occupant well-being and productivity are other potential benefits when building systems function as intended. Proper commissioning of building systems can reduce employee illness, tenant turnover and vacancy, and liability related to indoor air quality, and it can avoid premature equipment replacement. 2. Related Credits The commissioning effort can affect many performance-based features encouraged in the LEED for Commercial Interiors Rating System. Consider including the following features and systems in the commissioning effort: water efficiency and metering of plumbing fixtures, outdoor air delivery and monitoring, lighting, and thermal comfort systems. See Table 1 fora list of related credits. 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this prerequisite. 4. Implementation Relationship between Fundamental and Enhanced Commissioning LEED for Commercial Interiors addresses building commissioning in z places: EA Prerequisite 1, Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems, and EA Credit a, Enhanced Commissioning. For LEED design and construction projects, the scope of services for the commissioning authority (CxA) and project team should be based on the owner's project requirements. The commissioning process activities must address the commissioned systems noted in the EA Prerequisite t requirements. Forcommercial interiorprojects,the scope canvarytremendously. Some may include only lighting systems, whereas others may include all HVAC, service water, and lighting systems. EA Credit a requires that the commissioning authority be involved early in the process to help facilitate a commissioning design review and a commissioning documentation review. As the project nears completion, enhanced commissioning requires oversight of staff training, a walk-through 8 to to months after completion, and the completion of a systems manual. 120 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281659 Table 1. Potential Systems to Be Commissioned. as Applicable Systems Prerequisites and Credits Potential Commissioning Activities Heating, ventilating. air-conditioning, and refrigeration systems, both mechanical and passive, and associated controls EA Prerequisite 2. Mandatory provisions and prescriptive requirements of ASHRAE 90.1-2007 have been met. EA Prerequisite 3, No CFC in newly purchased equipment. EA Credit 1.3, Option 1. HVAC equipment sized on actual loads: mechanical equipment meets enhanced efficiency standards: use of variable speed controls; appropriate zoning and controls. EA Credit 1.3, Option 2. Same as EA Prerequisite 2. IEQ Prerequisite 1. Ventilation is compliant with ANSWASHRAE 62.1-2007. 'Da Prerequisite 2. Option 2. Designated smoking rooms verification requirements. lEll Prerequisite 2. Option 3. Residential facilities: test results of air leakage and air sampling. lEll Credit 1, Functioning outdoor air monitoring system. 'Da Credit 2, Mechanical systems: air testing and balance confirm increased ventilation rates. Passive systems: minimum flow rates are set and met. 'Da Credit 3.1, Filtration media replacement. IEQ Credit 5, Exhaust system in areas where hazardous gases or chemicals are present, MERV 13 air filtration media. IEQ Credit 6.2, Functioning controllability for temperature and ventilation. IEQ Credit 7.1, HVAC system and control systems meet ANSUASHRAE 55-2004 requirements. IEQ Credit 7.2, Monitoring system function. ID Credit 1. If applicable. UgMIng controls, Including daylightIng SS Credit 1. Option 6. Existing building, site. and project lighting designs comply with requirements. EA Prerequisite 2, Mandatory provisions and prescriptive requirements of ASHRAE 90.1-2007 have been met. EA Credit LI, ASHRAE 90.1-2007 compliance documentation. EA Credit L2. Functioning daylight responsive controls. IEQ Credit 8.1. Daylighting requirements are met. ID Credit 1. If applicable. Domestic hot water systems IECI Prerequisite 2. Mandatory provisions and prescriptive requirements of ASHRAE 90.1-2007 have been met. ID Credit 1. If applicable. Renewable energy systems (wind, solar, etc.) SS Credit 1. Option 11. On-site renewable energy performance. 5. Timeline and Team The commissioning process is a planned, systematic quality-control process that involves the owner, users, occupants, operations and maintenance staff, design professionals, and contractors. It is most effective when begun at project inception. All members ofthe project team are encouraged to participate in the commissioning activities as part of a larger commissioning team. The team approach to commissioning can speed the process and add a system of checks and balances. The overall commissioning effort identified in both EA Prerequisite 1, Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems, and EA Credit 2, Enhanced Commissioning, is shown below in Table 2 as divided into 12 basic steps. The steps are presented in sequential order; however, some tasks can begin at various points in the project or be completed at various points in the project. For example, the development of the commissioning plan may begin in the design phase, have multiple updates during the project, and be considered completed at some point during the construction phase. CI Prerequisite 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 121 EFTA00281660 EA CI Prerequisite 1 Some of the steps shown below are required for EA Prerequisite 1, Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems, and some are required for EA Credit 2, Enhanced Commissioning. Table a outlines the commissioning tasks, the team members primarily responsible for performing each project requirement, and the requirements common to EA Prerequisite 1 and EA Credit a. Table 2. Tasks and Responsibilities for EA Prerequisite 1 and EA Credit 2 Project Phases Commissioning Tasks (Steps 1-12) I Rating System Tasks Fundamental Enhanced Redesign, Design Phase Request for proposal Architect and engineer selection 1. Designate commissioning authority (CxA) EA Prerequisite 1. Task 1 EA Credit 2, Task 1 Owner or project team Owner or project team Owners project requirements, basis of design 2. Document owner's project requirements: Develop basis of design EA Prerequisite 1. Task 2 Owner or Cxr Design team Owner or UR' Design team Schematic design 3. Review owner's project requirements and basis of design EA Prerequisite 1. Task 2 EA Credit 2, Task 2 CAA'• CxA Design development 4. Develop and implement Cx plan EA Prerequisite 1. Task 4 Project team or Cyr Project team or CxA Construction documents 5. Incorporate commissioning requirements into the construction documents EA Prerequisite 1, Task 3 Project team or Cyr Project team or CxA 6. Conduct commissioning design review prior to midconstruction documents EA Credit 2, Task 2 N/A CzA Construction phase Equipment procurement Equipment installation 7. Review contractor submittals applicable to systems being commissioned EA Credit 2, Task 3 NfA CxA Functional testing Test and balance Performance testing acceptance 8. Verify installation and performan ce of commissioned systems EA Prerequisite 1, Task 5 CxA INA Operations and .. maintenance (m) manuals 9. Develop systems manual for commissioned systems EA Credit 2, Task 4 N/A Project team or CxA training 10. Verify that requirements for training are completed EA Credit 2, Task 2 N/A Project team or CxA Substantial completion 11.Complete a summary commissioning report EA Prerequisite 1, Task 6 CxA CxA W7 Systems monitoring 12. Review building operation within 8 to 10 months after substantial completion EA Credit 2, Task 6 N/A CxA 'Although EA Prerequisite does not require the Cut to be on the ctoiecl team until just beta the equipment installation phase. if brought in earlier, he a she can also help the owner develop the project requeements and assist with other important commissioning tasks. "Some commissioning tasks can be performed by the crane a other project team members. flowerer. the review of the owner's project requirements and basis of design must be performed by the C&A. Fir EA Prerequisite I. Fundamental Commissioning. this may be performed at any time before verification of equipment installation and acceptance. STEP 1 Designate an individual as the commissioning authority (CxA) to lead, review and oversee the completion of the commissioning process activities. Ideally, the project team should designate an individual as the CxA as early as possible in the 122 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281661 project timeline, preferably during predesign. The qualified individual designated as the CxA serves as an objective advocate for the owner and is responsible for the following: • Directing the commissioning team and process in the completion of the commissioning requirements. • Coordinating, overseeing, and/or performing the commissioning testing. • Reviewing the results of the systems performance verification. For LEED projects, a qualified CxA should have experience with 2 other projects of similar managerial and technical complexity. The owner maywant to specify additional qualifications for the CxA,dependingon the scope and nature of the commissioning. CxA certification programs are administered by various industry groups. For projects larger than 50,000 square feet, the individual serving as the CxA on a LEED project must be independent of the project's design and construction teams. The CxA may be a qualified staff member of the owner, an owner's consultant to the project, or an employee of a firm providing design and/or construction management services. The CxA may not, however, have responsibility for design (e.g., be the engineer of record) or for construction. The CxA must report results, findings, and recommendations directly to the owner. For projects smaller than 50,000 square feet, the CxA may be a qualified staff member of the owner, an owner's consultant to the project, or an individual on the design or construction team (such as the engineer of record) and may have additional project responsibilities beyond leading the commissioning services. For projects pursuing EA Credit 3, Enhanced Commissioning, the CxA may not be an employee of the design firm but maybe contracted through this firm. Table 3. Commissioning Authority Qualifications Party Acting as Commissioning Authority (CrA) Fundamental Commissioning Prerecousite,,t , Enhanced Commissioning Credit“, < 50.000 (sf) s 50.000 (sf) Employee or subcontractor of general contractor with construction responsibilities Yes Employee or subcontractor, with construction responsibilities. of construction manager who holds constructor contracts Yes Employee or subcontractor, with project design responsibilities, of the architect or engineer of record Yes Disinterested employee or subcontractor ofceneral contractor or construction manager' Yes Yes Disinterested employee of architect or engineer' Yes Yes Disinterested subcontractor to architect or engineer' Yes Yes Yes Construction manager not holding constructor contracts Yes Yes Yes Independent consultant contracted to Owner Yes Yes Yes Owner employee or staff Yes Yes Yes "Disinterested' means an employee or subcontractor who has no projec responsibilities other than commissioning. ' EA Prerequisite I requirements (see Table I above). ' DICredit 3 requirements (the CAA must review the owner's project requirements. basis of design, and design documents prior to mickonstruction documents phase and perform a back check). 4 The wile Cusi worming the enhanced commissioning tasks must also OM S« the fundamental commissioning tat. ' Regardless of ea employs the CaA, he or she 'shall hart documented commissioning authority evenence in at least two building projects' and idealty meet the minimum qualif *whew of hawing "a high level of experience in energy systems design. nista/When and operation. commissioning planning and process management. hands-on held experience with energy systems performance. interaction. startup. balancing testirg. troubleshooting, operation, and maintenance procedures and energy systems automation control knowledge." (From "Who Can Be the Commissioning Authority?" 01103106 LEED 2.2 Commissioning Subcommittee. posted under LEED Reference Documents. blipitaanzianarat I EA CI Prerequisite 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 123 EFTA00281662 EA CI Prerequisite 1 STEP 2 The owner must document the owner's project requirements for the fit-out project. The design team must develop the basis of design. The owner and design team are responsible for updates to their respective documents. Clear and concise documentation of the owner's project requirements and the basis of design is a valuable part of any successful project delivery and commissioning process. These documents are used throughout the commissioning process to provide a baseline and focus for validating systems' energy and environmental performance. Owner's Project Requirements The owner's project requirements must be completed by the owner, CxA, and project team prior to the approval of contractor submittals of any commissioned equipment or systems. Updates during the design and construction process are the primary responsibility of the owner. The owner's project requirements should detail the functional requirements of a project and the expectations of the building's use and operation as they relate to the systems to be commissioned. The owner's project requirements should address the following issues, as applicable to the project Owner and user requirements Describe the primary purpose, program, and use of the proposed project (e.g., office building with data center, academic building addition and new gymnasium) and any pertinent project history. Provide anyoverarchinggoals relative to program needs,future expansion,fledbility, quality of materials, and construction and operational costs. Environmental and sustainability goals Describe any specific environmental or sustainability goals (e.g., LEED certification). Energy efficiency goals Describe overall project energy efficiency goals relative to the local energy code, ASHRAE standard,or LEED. Describe any goals or requirements forbuildingorientation, landscaping, façade, fenestration, envelope and roof features that will affect energy use. Indoor environmental quality requirements For each program or area, describe the intended use, anticipated occupancy schedules, space environmental requirements (including lighting, temperature, humidity, acoustics, air quality, and ventilation), desired adjustability of system controls, and accommodations for after-hours use. Equipment and system expectations Describe the desired level ofquality, reliability,type,automation,fledbility,and maintenance requirements for each of the systems to be commissioned. When known, provide specific efficiency targets, desired technologies, or preferred manufacturers for building systems. Building occupant and MI personnel requirements Describe how the facilitywill be operated and bywhom. Describe the desired level of training and orientation required for the building occupants to understand and use the building systems. Basis of Design The design team must document the basis of design for the systems to be commissioned prior to approval of contractor submittals of any commissioned equipment or systems. Updates to this 124 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281663 document during the design and construction process are the responsibility of the design team. The basis of design describes the systems to be commissioned and outlines any design CI assumptions that are not otherwise included in the design documents. It should be updated with each subsequent design submission, with increasing specificity as applicable. The basis of design should include the following, as applicable: Primary design assumptions Include space use, redundancy, diversity, climatic design conditions, space zoning, occupancy, operations, and space environmental requirements. EA Standards Include applicable codes, guidelines, regulations, and other references that will be put into practice. Narrative descriptions Include performance criteria for the HVAC&R systems, lighting systems, hot water systems, on-site power systems, and other systems to be commissioned. STEP 3 The CxA must review the owner's project requirements and the basis of design for clarity and completeness. The owner and design team are responsible for updates to their respective documents. The CxA must ensure that the basis of design reflects the owner's project requirements. Both documents must be reviewed by the CxA for completeness prior to the approval of contractor submittals of any commissioned equipment or systems. STEP 4 Develop and implement a commissioning plan. Unique to a particular project, the commissioning plan is the reference document that identifies the strategies, aspects, and responsibilities within the commissioning process for each phase of a project, for all of the project team members. This document outlines the overall process, schedule,organization, responsibilities, and documentation requirements ofthe commissioning process. The commissioning plan is developed at the start of the commissioning process, preferably during design development, and is updated during the course of a project to reflect any changes in planning, schedule, or other aspects. The following list outlines required components of the commissioning plan. • Commissioning Program Overview • Goals and objectives. • General project information. • Systems to be commissioned. ■ Commissioning Team • Team members, roles, and responsibilities. • Communication protocol, coordination, meetings, and management. ■ Commissioning Process Activities Prerequisite 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 125 EFTA00281664 EA CI Prerequisite 1 • Documenting the owner's project requirements. • Preparing the basis of design. • Developing systems functional test procedures. • Verifying systems performance. • Reporting deficiencies and the resolution process. • Accepting the building systems. Project teams pursuing the enhanced commissioning credit (EA Credit a) may need to expand the commissioning plan to include the following commissioning process activities: ■ Documenting the commissioning review process ■ Reviewing contractor submittals. ■ Developing the systems manual. ■ Verifying the training of operations personnel. ■ Reviewing building operation after final acceptance. Table 4. Required Commissioning Plan Components Required Commissioning Plan Components Brief overview of commissioning process. List of all systems and assemblies included in commissioning authority's scope of work. Identification of commissioning team and its responsibilities. Description of management. communication, and reporting of commissioning process. Overview of commissioning process activities for predesign, design, construction, and occupancy and operations phases. including development of owner's project requirements, review of basis of design, schematic design, construction documents and submittals, construction phase verification, functional performance test development and implementation. and 10-month warranty review. List of expected work products. List of commissioning process milestones. STEP 5 Develop and incorporate commissioning requirements into the construction documents. Typically, the project specifications are used to inform contractors of their responsibilities in the commissioning process. These specifications may describe the components listed in Table S. Often, all commissioning requirements are outlined in a section of the general conditions of the construction specifications. Placing all commissioning requirements in a single location gives responsibility for commissioning work to the general contractor, who can then assign responsibility to subcontractors. It is also valuable to refer to commissioning requirements on the drawings, in any bid forms, and in specification sections related to the systems to be commissioned. 126 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281665 Table 5. Commissioning Requirements for Construction Documents Commissioning team involvement. Contractors' responsibilities. Submittal review procedures for commissioned systems. Operations and maintenance documentation, system manuals. Meetings. Constniction verification procedures. Startup plan development and implementation. Functional performance testing. Acceptance and closeout. Training. Warranty review site visit. STEP 6 The CxA should conduct at least t commissioning deign review of the owner's project requirements, basis of design, and design documents prior to midconstniction documents phase and back-check the review comments in the subsequent design submission. This step is required by EA Credit 2, Enhanced Commissioning, but is not mandatory for achievement of EA Prerequisite 1, Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems. The CxA should reviewthe owner's project requirements, basis of design, and design documents to give the owner and design team an independent assessment of the state of the design for the commissioned systems. Typically,a design reviewperformedbythe CxA focuses on the following issues: ■ Ensuring clarity, completeness, and adequacy of the owner's project requirements. ■ Verifying that all issues discussed in the owner's project requirements are addressed adequately in basis of design. ■ Reviewing design documents for achieving the owner's project requirements and basis of design and coordination of commissioned systems. Additional reviews by the eth throughout the design and construction process maybe advisable and appropriate depending on the project duration, phasing, and complexity. STEP 7 The CxA should review contractor submittals applicable to the systems being commissioned for compliance with the owner's project requirements and basis of design. This review must be concurrent with the architect's or engineer's reviews and submitted to the design team and the owner. This step is required by EA Credit 2, Enhanced Commissioning, but is not mandatory for achievement of EA Prerequisite 1, Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems. The CxA should review the contractor submittals and identify any issues that might otherwise result in rework or change orders. The CxA should specifically evaluate the submittals for the following: ■ Conformance with the owner's project requirements and basis of design. is Fulfilling operations and maintenance requirements. is Facilitating performance testing. EA CI Prerequisite 1 209 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 127 EFTA00281666 EA CI Prerequisite 1 The CxA review of contractor submittals does not typically replace or alter the scope or responsibility of the design team's role in approving submittals. STEP 8 Verify the Installation andPerformance of the Systems to be Commissioned. Commissioning is conducted to verifythe performance ofcommissioned systems as installed to meet the owner's project requirements, basis of design, and contract documents. Verification of the installation and performance of commissioned systems typically includes 3 steps for each commissioned system: installation inspection, performance testing, and the evaluation of results compared with owner's project requirements and the basis of design. ■ Installation inspections (sometimes called prefunctional inspections) are a systematic set of procedures intended to identify whether individual system components have been installed properly. Often this process occurs at startup of individual units ofequipment and may use "prefunctional checklists" or "startup and checkout forms" to ensure consistency in the inspections and document the process. Installation inspections may be performed by the CxA, the installing contractor, or others, depending on the procedures outlined in the commissioning plan. Installation inspections provide quality control to ensure that relatively minor issues (e.g., an improperly wired sensor, a control valve installed backward) are discovered and corrected prior to systems performance testing. ■ Systems performance testing (sometimes called functional performance testing) occurs once all system components are installed, energized, programmed, balanced, and otherwise ready for operation underpart-and full-load conditions. Testing should include each process in the sequence of operations under central and packaged equipment control, including startup, shutdown, capacity modulation, emergency and failure modes, alarms, and interlocks to other equipment Systems performance testing typically relies on testing procedures developed by the CxA specifically for the system to be tested. A wide variety of methods may be used to simulate and evaluate that the system being tested performs as expected (per the owner's project requirements, basis of design, and contract documents) in all modes of operation. Systems performance testing may be performed by some combination of the CxA, the installing contractor, and others, depending on the procedures outlined in the commissioning specifications and the commissioning plan. It may reveal problems with the performance of the commissioned systems and may require significant follow-up and coordination among members of the project team. ■ Evaluation of results is the final step. At each point in the process of installation inspections and systems performance testing the CxA should evaluate whether the installed systems meet the criteria for the project as set forth in the owner's project requirements and the basis of design documents. Any discrepancies or deficiencies should be reported to the owner, and the team should work collaboratively to find an appropriate resolution. STEP 9 Develop a systems manual that gives future operating staffthe information needed to understand and optimally operate the commissioned systems. This step is required by EA Credit a, Enhanced Commissioning, but is not mandatory for achievement of EA Prerequisite 1, Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems. Provide a systems manual in addition to the manuals submitted by the contractor. The 128 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281667 systems manual generally focuses on operating rather than maintaining the equipment, particularly the interactions. The systems manual should include the following for each commissioned system: ■ Final version of the basis of design. ■ System single-line diagrams. ■ As-built sequences of operations, control drawings, and original setpoints. ■ Operating instructions for integrated building systems. ■ Recommended schedule of maintenance requirements and frequency, if not already included in the project manuals. • Recommended schedule for retesting of commissioned systems with blank test forms from the original commissioning plan. • Recommended schedule for calibrating sensors and actuators. STEP 10 Verify that the requirements for training operating personnel and building occupants have been completed. This step is required by EA Credit 2, Enhanced Commissioning, but is not mandatory for achievement of EA Prerequisite 1, Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems. Establish anddocument trainingupc-Ltations and needswith thetenant.Manycommontraining topics are listed in Table 6. Ensure that operations staff and occupants receive this training and orientation. Pay particular attention to new or uncommon sustainable design features that could be overridden or removed because of a lack of understanding. Document that the training was completed according to the contract documents. Have a contract in place to review tenant space operation with staff and occupants, including a plan for resolution of outstanding commissioning-related issues 8 to so months after substantial completion. Table 6. Common Training Topics Common Training Topics m E m . I" a General purpose of system (design intent). Use of manuals. Review of control drawings and schematics. Startup, normal operation, shutdown, unoccupied operation, seasonal changeover, manual operation, control setup and programming troubleshooting. and alarms. Interactions with other systems. Adjustments and optimizing methods for energy conservation. Health and safety issues. Special maintenance and replacement sources. Occupant interaction issues. System response to different operating conditions. STEP 11 Complete a summary commissioning report. After installation inspections and performance verification items have been completed, the results are tabulated and assembled into a commissioning report. Supporting information can be compiled as a Cx record but is not required in the summary. EA CI Prerequisite 1 2CO9 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 129 EFTA00281668 EA CI Prerequisite 1 The summary commissioning report should include the following: ■ Executive summaryofthe process and the results ofthe commissioning program,including observations, conclusions, and any outstanding items. ■ History of any system deficiencies identified and how they were resolved, including any outstanding issues or seasonal testing scheduled fora later date. ■ Systems performance test results and evaluation. ■ Confirmation from the CxA indicating whether individual systems meet the owner's project requirements, basis of design, and contract documents. In addition, for projects pursuing EA Credit 2, Enhanced Commissioning, the summary commissioning report should include the following: ■ Summary of the design review process. ■ Summary of the submittal review process. ■ Summary of the= documentation and training process. Table 7. Commissioning Report Components Commissioning Report Components Owner's project requirements. Project commissioning specifications. Verification of installation (construction checklist). Functional performance testing results and forms. documentation evaluation (EA Credit 2). Training program evaluation (EA Credit 2). Description of commissioning process benefits. Outstanding issues. Contract and plan for resolution within 8 to 10 months of substantial completion (EA Credit 2). STEP 12 Ensure the involvement by the CxA in reviewing building operation within to months after substantial completion with staff and occupants. Include a plan for resolving outstanding issues. This step is required by EA Credit 2., Enhanced Commissioning, but is not mandatory for achievement of EA Prerequisite 1, Fundamental Commissioning of the Building Energy Systems. The CxA should coordinate with the owner and the = staff to review the tenant space and its performance 8 to to months after substantial completion. MI unresolved construction deficiencies as well as any deficiencies identified in this postoccupancy review should be documented and corrected under manufacturer or contractor warranties. The CxA review of the building operation with operations staff and occupants should identify any problems in operating the building as originally intended. Any significant issues identified by the CxA that will not be corrected should be recorded in the systems manual. 6. Calculations There are no calculations required for this prerequisite. 130 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281669 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. • Update the commissioning plan at milestones throughout the project. This should happen, at a minimum, during the design development phase, the construction documents phase, and just prior to the kick-off meeting with the general contractor. • Prepare a systems list that indicates which systems have been included within the scope of enhanced commissioning. • Obtain confirmation that the commissioning authority has documented experience on at least 2 building projects. • Retain copies of the owner's project requirements, basis of design, commissioning specifications, commissioning report, and systems manual. 8. Examples EXAMPLE 1 The example below demonstrates the interconnectedness of the owner's project requirements, basis of design, construction documents, commissioning plan, commissioning report, and systems manual. Building Commissioning Documents Evinces agent (a the project Owner's Project Require/kilts WPM • Intr.:Out nen • Key Requirement, (inCludne LEW credit requirements) • Project ScopetObasclues (includingsystems to to commissioned) • FunCtiOnal SOLOS • Occupancy • Budget Console:ration • Performance Criteria lineaSureable and veoltitle) • OPR RINISIC0 History Ammo °doom 0,207) mom ; Updates and Revisions Systems Manual • Final BOO • S'istem Single line siren • Asibuill Sealant. Or 0Otratien. set polls. etc. • System operating instructions • Maintenance schedule • Relating Saitidulti (Can also Include OPR. WOO keeping procedures. optimizatKei guidance. trainang MattkIBIS. and COMMiSPOnirg WOKS WWI) What is needed to implement the OPR Basis of Design (BOD) • Systems and Asstrriblim • Peck/manta CritenWASSumptiOnS • OOStrilitena Cu, erreelope. HVAC. elects tcz water. other) • Governing Codes and St.. • Nam Directites • Dew Dere/00ment Gin oil (conc.:pm. calcukcions, decisions. end product Stitt lions) • 800 ReviSiOn History ApiPAE GwIttiie 0,2005 NO., r • upostesera Reasons Commissioning Plan • Cheraw., • Commnsortng Team • Desciiption ol Commissromno PrOckS1 ACtrolte6 (by project ol‘SW6 - prdwien, design. comtruction. occupancy) • Schedules (Update tIvoughsai prorectl sanest {Harr. 0.2005 ARM1R g litolatol Ind RenSiOnS WHOA( OPanifing Pion *wow% Operating Retwortmen10 EA PaeitOudite 1 fOr LEED br Existing Buildings: Operatices Maintenance How the OPR will be Oyite/y aChtWE Construction Documents (CD's) • General Cctonir.ssonaig RequirerneMs (The commissioning requirements specified in Dinsion I) • Specific ROkUkkinkentS Specific commissioning requirements specified in each of the Other appacable &WOOS Ol the project specific:lions S., Imo coimmsemns coireinerns m Corson:Ins :.,ntrkas) Issues Leg Commissioning Report • Erecolioe Summary • Deficiency ReSOlutiOnS • Systems Federman° Te,7 Results and Evaluation IYay sin emge Sarong oil “.^.^..mN ma;ea.. scimls • htillittOs tnrAntent01 lastk. Mil 4rd toTante. ful(001$ kilt MI iv amid,. ard Pinup, EA CI Prerequisite 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 131 EFTA00281670 EA CI Prerequisite I EXAMPLE 2. Report Outline The outline below is a guide for what can be included in the summary commissioning report. There is no required order of presentation, only that these primary report components (applicable to the commissioning scope) are included in the report. The final report that goes to the owner should include copies of issue and testing logs, meeting minutes, and interim process reports. Summary Commissioning Report Executive Summary Provide a briefdescription ofproject (size,spacetypes,occupancy, etc.), highlighting commissioning goals. Provide a brief narrative on the scope of commissioning, highlighting the systems to be commissioned, process activities, and examples of significant issues: 1. Predesign activities (if any) z. Design activities (if any) 3. Construction activities 4. Postoccupancy activities (if any) Highlight any significant systemic issues that were uncovered during the commissioning process. Provide recommendations for future project commissioning activities. Deficiency Resolution Provide a more detailed summary of the types of issues uncovered and how they were resolved. These issues are best presented in order of project phases (e.g., during design, during construction). A copy of the issues log is typically included as an appendix. Systems Performance Test Results and Evaluation Summarize observations on test results and evaluations for prefunctional tests, test and balance, functional tests, and postoccupancy testing (if applicable). 9. Exemplary Performance This prerequisite is not eligible for exemplary performance under the Innovation in Design section. 10. Regional Variations The significance ofcommissioningtaslcs mayvarywiththe climate. For example,in northern regions, the functioning of heating systems, such as boilers, is a critical issue. Suboptimal performance for heating systems in northern climates can result in high utility bills, wasted energy, and added emissions. In the Southeast, humidity is an important consideration. Here, the introduction of hot, humid outside air must be controlled, and suboptimal performance for cooling systems could raise utilitybills. In other regions of the country, equipment such as economizers and evaporative cooling will be used for extended periods and must function correctly. Regional climates tend to drive the selection of systems and the associated commissioning and maintenance decisions. For example, including the commissioning of the building envelope maybe 132 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281671 more important in certain regions than in others. Adding the commissioning of water systems may be important in arid regions. Regardless of the types of equipment selected, each project can greatly benefit from a systematic approach to ensuring that the right equipment and systems are specified, ordered, installed, and tested to ensure proper operation and performance. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations So that building systems operate effectively for the life of the building, use the commissioning process and outcomes to develop documents that will help facility managers run the building in a manner consistent with the design intent and equipment specifications. These documents should include the following: ■ Building operating plan (owner's operating requirements). This plan defines the delivered conditions required by building management and occupants for the successful operation of a building. It identifies the spaces, uses, occupancy types, and required conditions. It includes the time-of-day schedules of every system, the mode of operation for each system when it is running, and the desired indoor conditions or setpoints for each schedule or mode. This information is initially developed in the basis of design. ■ Systems narrative. The systems narrative is a summary description of each of the following types of base building systems installed in the project building: space heating, space cooling, ventilation, domestic water heating, humidification and/or dehumidification, and lighting. The description should include summaries of the central plant, distribution, and terminal units, as applicable, as well as the controls associated with these systems. ■ Sequence of operations. The sequence of operations represents system-level documentation that defines what operational states are desired under whatconditions. This can includewhich systems are running or idle; whether operations are full-load or part-load; staging or cycling of compressors, fans, or pumps; proper valve positions; desired system water temperatures and duct static air pressures, depending on other variables (e.g., outside air temperatures, room air temperatures, and/or relative humidity); and any reset schedules or occupancy schedules. The sequence of operations should include specific information on operating phases (warm-up, occupied, unoccupied), setpoints and controls, and feedback systems to monitor performance. ■ Commissioning report. Ensure that the commissioning report adequately identifies problems that are likely to reemerge or merit particular attention on an ongoing basis. Ensure that the commissioning report adequately identifies problems that are likely to reemerge or merit particular attention on an ongoing basis. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http://www.usgbc.org(projecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers http://wwt.v.ashrae.org ASHRAE advances the science of heating, ventilation, air conditioning, and refrigeration for the public's benefit through research, standards writing, continuing education, and publications. According to the ASHRAE website, "membership is open to any person associated with the field including indoor air quality, building design and operation, and environmental control for food processing and industry." EA CI Prerequisite 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 133 EFTA00281672 EA CI Prerequisite 1 Building Commissioning Association http://vnvw.boca.orgiresourcesfindahtrn BCxA promotes building commissioning practices that maintain high professional standards and fulfill buildingowners' expectations. The association offers a5-day intensive course focused on how to implement the commissioning process and that is intended for commissioning authorities with at least 2 years of experience. California Commissioning Collaborative http:(/www.cacx.org The California Commissioning Collaborative is agroup ofgovemment, utility,and building senrices professionals committed to developing and promoting viable building commissioning practices in California. Its online library, available at hs-tp://resources.cacx.orgilibraryb has more than 300 resources, including articles, papers, guides, and sample commissioning documents. California Department of General Services, Division of the State Architect, Adopting the Commissioning Process for the Successful Procurement of Schools http://www.chps.netilinks/pdfs/CominissioningProcessGuide.pdf According to its publisher, this guide is"intended to be used by school districts, programmers, design professionals, contractors, operations and maintenance personnel, and commissioning authorities to understand the commissioning process and their role in it." Energy Design Resources, Cx Assistant Commissioning Tool This web-based tool provides project-specific building commissioning information to design teams and enables users to evaluate probable commissioning cost, identify appropriate commissioning scope, and access project-related sample commissioning specifications. Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory, The Cost-Effectiveness of Commercial Buildings Commissioning: A Meta-Analysis of Existing Buildings and New Construction in the United States http:Thetd.lbl.goviemills/PUBS/Cx-Costs-Benefits.html Oregon Office of Energy, Commissioning for Better Buildings in Oregon http://egov.oregon.go_WENERGY/CONS/BUS/commfbldgoc.shtml This website and document of the same name contain a comprehensive introduction to the commissioning process, including research, financial benefits, and case studies. Portland Energy Conservation Inc. http://www.peci.org PECI develops the field for commissioning services by helping building owners understand the value of commissioning and by producing process and technical information for commissioning providers. Their focus includes owners of private and public buildings and a range of building types. PECI manages the annual National Conference on Building Commissioning. University of Wisconsin, Madison, Department of Engineering Professional Development http://www.engr.wisc.edu This program offers commissioning process training courses for building owners, architects, engineers, operations and maintenance staff, and other interested parties. The program also offers accreditation of commissioning process providers and managers. Print Media ASHRAE Guideline 0-2005: The Commissioning Process (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, 2005). httpWwww.ashrae.org. 134 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281673 ASHRAE Guideline 1-1996: The HVAC Commissioning Process, (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers,1996). http://www.ashrae.org. ASHRAE Guideline 4-1993: Preparation of Operations & Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers,1993). http:// www.ashrae.org. The Building Commissioning Handbook, second edition, by John A. Heinz and Rick Casault (Building Commissioning Association, 2004). Commissioning Fact Sheets (Collaborative of High Performance Schools). http:ffivww.chps.net/ manual These fact sheets explore how can help school districts ensure their schools are built to high performance standards. Model Commissioning Plan and Guide Specifications (Portland Energy Conservation Inc,1998). Building Commissioning Guide, Office of Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy Federal Energy Management Program (U.S. Department of Energy). http://www.eere.energy.goy. Commissioning for Better Buildings in Oregon (Oregon Office of Energy, 2007). http://ggov.oregoi gov/ENERGY/CONS/BUS/commibldgc l. PECI Model Building Commissioning Plan and Guide Specifications (Portland Energy Conservation Inc.). http://www.peci.org. 13. Definitions Basis of design includes design information necessary to accomplish the owner's project requirements, including system descriptions, indoor environmental quality criteria, design assumptions, and references to applicable codes, standards, regulations, and guidelines. Commissioning (Cx) is the process of verifying and documenting that a building and all of its systems and assemblies are planned, designed, installed, tested, operated, and maintained to meet the owner's project requirements. The commissioning authority (CxA) is the individual designated to organize, lead, and review the completion of commissioning process activities. The CxA facilitates communication among the owner, designer, and contractor to ensure that complex systems are installed and function in accordance with the owner's project requirements. The commissioning plan is a document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of resources, and documentation requirements of the commissioning process. The commissioning process is a systematic quality-focused effort to ensure that building systems are designed, specified, procured, installed, and functioning in accordance with the owner's intent. The process uses planning, documentation, and verification of testing to review and oversee the activities of both designer and constructor. The commissioning report documents the commissioning process, including a commissioning program overview, identification of the commissioning team, and description ofthe commissioning process activities. Commissioning specification is the contract language used in the construction documents to detail the objective, scope, and implementation of the construction and acceptance phases of the commissioning process as developed in the design phase of the commissioning plan. This allows the construction contractor to ensure that these activities are considered in proposals for the construction work. EA CI Prerequisite 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 135 EFTA00281674 EA CI Prerequisite 1 The commissioning team includes those people responsible for working together to carry out the commissioning process. An installation inspection examines components of the building systems to determine whether they are installed properly and ready for systems performance testing. Owner's project requirements is a written document that details the ideas, concepts, and criteria that are determined by the owner to be important to the success of the project. Systems performance testing is the process ofdeterrnining the ability of commissioned systems to perform in accordance with the owner's project requirements, the basis of design, and construction documents. Verification is the range of checks and tests carried out to determine whether components, subsystems, systems, and interfaces between systems operate in accordance with the contract documents. 136 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281675 MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE a Prerequisite EA Prerequisite 2 Points Required Intent To establish the minimum level of energy efficiency for the tenant space systems to reduce environmental and economic impacts associated with excessive energy use. Requirements Design portions of the building as covered by the tenant's scope of work to comply with ANSI/ ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2007 (with errata but without addenda'), and complete the following: ■ Comply with the mandatory provisions (Sections 54 6.4, 74 84 94 and 10.4) of ANSI/ ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2007 (with errata but without addenda'). ■ Achieve the prescriptive requirements (Sections 5.5, 6.5, 7.5 and 9.5) or performance requirements (Section It) of ANSI/ASHRAWIESNA Standard 90.1-2007 (with errata but without addenda'). ■ Reduce connected lighting power density so% below that allowed by ANSI/ASHRAE/ IESNA Standard 90.1-2007 (with errata but without addenda') using either the Space-bySpace Method or by applying the whole building lighting power allowance to the entire tenant space. • Install ENERGY STARtqualified equipment for 50% (by rated-power) of ENERGY STAR eligible equipment.' installed as part of the tenant's scope of work. This requirement includes appliances, office equipment, electronics, and commercial food service equipment. Excluded are heating, ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC), lighting, and building envelope products. Projects in California may use Title 24-2005, Part 6 in place ofANSI/ASHRAPIESNA Standard 90.1-2007. Project teams wishing to use ASIIRAE approved addenda for the purFoses ofthis crcdit maydo so at theirdiscretioc. Addenda must be applied amsLstently aalIIS all LEED mats EA PREREQUISITE 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 137 EFTA00281676 EA CI Prerequisite 2 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues The process of extracting and consuming energy from fossil fuels causes many negative environmental impacts, including air and water pollution, land degradation, solid waste generation, and rising greenhouse gas emissions. Fossil fuel-based energy use causes climate change as well as serious risks to environmental and human health and safety. Given both the negative environmental impacts inherent in most traditional energy-production processes and our limited energy supplies, efficiency measures are an important strategy for managing the impacts of energy consumption. The commercial real estate industry's energy use accounts for approximately 18% of U.S. carbon dioxide emissions.' Additionally, data from the U.S. Energy Information Administration show that buildings are responsible for almost half (48%) of all energy consumed and greenhouse gases emitted annually.' Economic Issues Optimizing energy performance can reduce overall operating costs. Changing operational strategies to avoid energy use—for example, turning off lights and HVAC systems when the building is unoccupied—can often be done at zero or very low initial cost and rapid payback. Even seemingly small conservation measures can be significant; for instance, replacing a single incandescent lamp with a fluorescent lamp, which uses up to 75% less energy, can save more than $30 in energy costs over the lifetime of the lamp.' 2. Related Credits LEED for Commercial Interiors addresses energy efficiency in 2 places: EA Prerequisite 2., Minimum Energy Performance, and EA Credit 1, Optimize Energy Performance. In addition to reducing energy use through efficiency, project teams can mitigate energy use impacts by using renewable energy generated off-site. Refer to these credits: • EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance • EA Credit 4: Green Power 3. Summary of Referenced Standard ANSWASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2007, Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings American National Standards Institute American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers Illuminating Engineering Society of North America ANSIJASHRAWIESNA 90.1-2007 was formulated by ASHRAE under an ANSI consensus process. I ESNA is a joint sponsor of the standard. ANSIJASHRAE/IESNA90.1-2007 establishes minimum requirements for the energy-efficient design of buildings, with these exceptions: single-family houses; multifamily structures of3 habitable stories or fewer above grade; manufactured houses (mobile and modular homes); buildings that do not use either electricity or fossil fuel; and equipment and portions of buildings systems that use energy primarily for industrial, manufacturing, or commercial processes. Building envelope requirements are provided for semiheated spaces, such as warehouses. The standard provides criteria in the general categories shown in Table 1. Within each section are mandatory provisions and additional prescriptive requirements. Some sections also contain a performance alternative. The energy cost budget method (Section 11) allows the project team to exceed some of the 138 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281677 prescriptive requirements, provided energy cost savings are made in other areas. However, in all cases, the mandatory provisions must still be met. Table 1. Energy Standard Requirements Addressed by ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2007 ANSI/ASHRAVIESNA 90.1-2007 Components Section 5. Building envelope (including serniheated spaces, such as warehouses) Section 6. Heating, ventilation, and air-conditioning (including parking garage ventilation, freeze protection, exhaust air recovery, and condenser heat recovery for service water heating) Section 7. Service water heating (including swimming pools) Section 8. Power (including all building power distribution systems) Section 9. Lighting (including exit signs, building exterior, grounds, and parking garages) Section 10. Other equipment (including all permanently wired electrical motors) 4. Implementation Design the tenant space so that it complies with ASHRAE 90.1-2007 or the local code, whichever is more stringent. Research the status ofindividual state energycodes comparedwith energystandards on the U.S. Department of Energy's Building Energy Codes website (see Resources). If provisions of the base building are managed entirely by the landlord (and therefore cannot be changed by the building tenant) and do not meet the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1-2007, then only areas that are not part of the tenant scope of work and exclusively controlled by the landlord are exempt from the requirements of the standard. More Stringent Local Code ASHRAE 90.1-2007 is the baseline that registered projects must meet to satisfy the prerequisite requirement. Any local code (or provision in it) that is more stringent becomes part of the prerequisite requirement. In these cases, explain and document verification that the local code (or provision) is more stringent. California Title 24 is accepted as being more stringent with no further evaluation needed. Less Stringent Local Code In LEED for Commercial Interiors, the credit standards only to apply to the tenant's scope of work; this allows teams with projects in an existing core and shell building to certify their project without havingto compel the building owner to make changes to existingsystems. However,the intent ofthis prerequisite is to establish the minimum level of energy efficiency for the space systems; projects should still meet these standards. If the local code is less stringent, follow ASHRAE 90.1-2007. Do not outline a tenant scope of work to avoid applying the standard. Whenever possible, work being done for the benefit of the tenant should meet the more stringent provisions of ASHRAE 90.1-2007. Applying ASHRAE 90.1-2007 Section 2.1(a) of the standard specifies minimum energy efficiency requirements for the following 3 construction types: ■ New buildings and their systems. ■ New portions of buildings and their systems. ■ New systems and equipment in existing buildings. The third approach applies to most commercial interior projects and is addressed below.As stated in Section 4.2.1.3, existing building alterations must comply with the provisions of Sections, 6, 7, 8,9, and t0, as longascompliancedoes not increasethebuilding'senergyconsumption.Sections5through EA CI Prerequisite 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 139 EFTA00281678 EA CI Prerequisite 2 to gable 1) explain when these provisions apply (e.g., definitions and the building elements), list the mandatory provisions, and give the applicable prescriptive criteria. EA Prerequisite 2,Minimum Energy Performance, recognizes exceptions for certain applications as outlined in the standard, such as those for historic buildings and 24-hour facilities. EA Prerequisite 2, Minimum Energy Performance, does not preclude using the exceptions provided for historic buildings or annual energy consumption comparison as long as compensating changes are made in more than 1 applicable requirement section. Section 5. Building Envelope Requirements (ASHRAE 90.1-2007) The mandatory provisions of Section 5.4 must be met if they may apply to a commercial interior project. Teams must use 1 of 3 compliance paths: Section 5.5, Prescriptive Path;Section 5.6, Building Envelope Trade-Off Option; or Section11, Energy Cost Budget Method. Section 6. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Requirements (ASHRAE 90.1- 2007) If the project involves altering or replacing HVAC systems in existing buildings, follow the requirements of Section 6.1.1.3. New HVAC equipment must meet the minimum efficiency requirements set by the standard. Note that project teams considering EA Credit 1.3, Optimize Energy Performance—HVAC, Option 1, should consult the New Buildings Institute publication Advanced Buildings: Energy Benchmark for High Performance Buildings (2-Benchmark) Prescriptive Criteria E 2.5 for more stringent minimum efficiency requirements. Air-conditioning added for spaces previously not air-conditioned must meet the requirements of Section 6.z. Alterations to existing systems must not reduce economizer capability unless they meet the criteria set out in Section 6.5.1. EA Prerequisite 2, Minimum Energy Performance, does not preclude using any of the exceptions in Section 6.1.1.3 that address equipment modifications and repairs, alterations involving extensive revisionsto other systems, refrigerantchange, relocation ofexistingequipment, or access limitations for ducts and pipes. Section 6 provides 3 compliance paths, any of which meet the requirement of the prerequisite if justified and properly followed: ■ Use the simplified approach option for HVAC Systems in Section 6.3, which addresses small buildings whose HVAC design meets certain criteria. ■ Meet the mandatory and prescriptive provisions in Sections 64 and 6.5. ■ Meet the mandatory provisions of Section 64 and the energy cost budget method in Sectional. The mandatory provisions of Section 64 include minimum equipment efficiency requirements, controls, and HVAC system construction and insulation; they address ducts, plenums, and piping. A project team not using the energy cost budget method must follow the prescriptive path in Section 6.5, which establishes the requirements for economizers, simultaneous heating and cooling limitations (significant to energy use reductions), humidification, air system design and control, hydronic system design and control, energy recovery, exhaust hoods, and radiant heating systems. Project teams must meet he minimum efficiency requirements for system components listed in ASH RAE 90.1-2007,Tables 6.8.1A-G, even if using the energy cost budget method. Section 7. Service Water Heating Requirements (ASHRAE 90.1-2007) Section 7 addresses heating water for domestic or commercial purposes (restrooms,kitchens, etc.). When altering systems within existing buildings, follow the same requirements set out for new 140 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281679 construction, unless there is insufficient space or a system is inaccessible. Project teams must meet the mandatory provisions of Section 7.4, and either the prescriptive path in Section 7.5 or the energy cost budget method in Section a. The mandatory provisions of Section 7.5 delineate requirements for efficiency, controls, pools, and heat traps for storage tanks. Section 8. Power Requirements (ASHRAE 90.1-2007, Section 8.4.1) Section 84 describes mandatory provisions coveringvoltage drops in the power distribution system. There are no prescriptive provisions for this section. Section 9. Lighting Requirements (ASHRAE 90.1-2007) Section 9 outlines guidelines for replacement lighting systems and new systems. If the scope of the lightingwork will replace less than halfofthe odsting tortures with new ones andwill use no additional power, all other provisions of the section apply. Section 9 specifies the same mandatory provisions and prescriptive requirements for either the building area method or space-by-space method. Section 94 describes the mandatory provisions for controls (941), including automatic lighting shutoff, space controls, exterior lighting controls, task lighting, tandem wiring (9.42); exit signs (9.4.3); and exterior building and grounds lighting (9.44 and 945). Pay special attention to Section 941, Lighting Control. Buildings larger than 5,000 square feet must have an automatic control device to shut off all lighting in the building. The shut-off device maybe a programmable control to schedule time-of-day control for areas no greater than 25,000 square feet but no less than every floor. The approach may use occupant sensors to turn lights off after 30 minutes of no activity or a signal from another control or alarm system that indicates the area is unoccupied. EA Prerequisite 2 does not preclude using any of the exceptions provided in Section 941.1 for 24-hour operations, patient care areas, and where automatic shutoff would endanger the safety or security of occupants. A space control device must be provided in each area enclosed by ceiling-height partitions. Any device that must be turned on manually must be readily accessible and visible to users. Shared spaces (such as classrooms, conference and meeting rooms, and employee lunch and break rooms) must be equipped with a control that turns lights off within 30 minutes after occupants leave. In all other spaces, a device may be turned on manually or controlled by an occupancy sensor. Rooms smaller than 10,000 square feet must have at least 1 control for every2,50o square feet, and rooms larger than 10,000 square feet must have least 1 every 10,000 square feet. If the control can override the time-ofday scheduled shutoff control, the override should be limited to 4 hours. LEED for Commercial Interiors recognizes additional lighting controls in EA Credit 1.2, Optimize Energy Performance—Lighting, for daylight-responsive controls, and EQ Credit 6.1, Controllability of Systems—Lighting, for individual controls for task lighting and shared controls in multioccupant spaces. The function of these additional controls must comply with ASHRAE go.1-2007. The building area method of demonstrating compliance uses the building area types listed in Table 9.5.1 of ASH RAE 90.1-2007. The interior lighting power allowance is determined by multiplying the gross lighted floor area of the building type by the lighting power density value in the associated table. More than sbuilding area type may be used; trade-offs amongbuilding area types are permitted provided the total installed interior lighting power does not exceed the interior lighting power allowance. The space-by-space method is more flexible than the building area method and allows project teams to address each space individually. For each area, the lighting power density value in Table 9.6.t is multiplied by the square footage. The interior lighting power allowance is the sum of those results. Trade-offs among spaces are allowed provided the total proposed lighting power density is less than EA CI Prerequisite 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 141 EFTA00281680 EA CI Prerequisite 2 the sum of the lighting power budget allowances for all individual occupancies. Additional interior lighting power maybe added to the allowance for certain applications as described in Section 9.6.2. The exterior lighting power allowance is calculated by multiplying the allowed lighting power for each exterior surface (found in ASHRAE 90.1-2007 Table 945) by the total area or length associated with that surface, summing the results, and then multiplying this number by 1.05. For exterior lighting surfaces, the allowed lighting power can be used only for the specific application; it cannot be traded among surfaces or with other exterior lighting. Section 10. Other Equipment Requirements (ASHRAE 90.1-2007) Thissectionestablishes mandatoryefficiencystandardsforelectricmotors. There are no prescriptive provisions for this section. Section 11. Energy Cost Budget Method (ASHRAE 90.1-2007) The standard provides an alternative to the prescriptive approach, in which each section must be satisfied individually. The energy cost budget method requires the simulation of the proposed design and abaseline case that follows the prescriptive requirements of each section. The calculation usually requires computer modeling. The modeling must cover at least the segment of the building serviced by the same HVAC system supplying the project space. If the energy cost budget is used to demonstrate compliance with EA Prerequisite 2, note that the only permitted trade-offs are between regulated systems within the project space. Additional information about this method, as well as the performance rating method (Appendix G), is included in EA Credit 1.3, Optimize Energy Performance—HVAC. 5. Timeline and Team The project team should start the energy simulation modeling early in the project design to gain insights for design decisions and an indication of how to achieve different levels of energy cost reductions. The mechanical or electrical engineer must coordinate with the facility manager to ensure maximum energy efficiency in the tenant space. Facilitate energy-efficient operations by working with the facility manager when projecting energy loads, as well as implementing tools for tacking and analysis. 6. Calculations For lighting power density, seethe Calculations section in EA Credit 1.1. For ENERGY STAR-qualified equipment, see the Calculations section in EA Credit 14 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ For ASHRAE compliance, list any addenda used, and retain copies of ASHRAE compliance forms. ■ If the project is using the prescriptive compliance path, assemble documentation demonstrating that the project meets all applicable requirements. ■ For lighting power density reduction, refer to the Documentation Guidance section in EA Credit 1.1. ■ For ENERGY STAR equipment, refer to the Documentation Guidance section in EA Credit 1.4. 142 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDiTU EFTA00281681 8. Examples Energy simulation software packages, such as DOE-2 or EnergyPlus, enable the creation of a representative model. Energy simulation software can be used to demonstrate compliance with the performance requirements ofASHRAE 90.1-2007, as an alternative to the prescriptive requirements. Figure t shows an example of a 3-D building model. Figure 1. Screenshot from Building Simulation Software Ow DSO tar • •11 >SS w 410 eta co tam •sx 1.6.2 riefionoK nel•alt 01401•••••• 4..m.imant ••••• 0.1•••••MO ains.a. %nag 0....•••••1/ w_ winnow. ........1 w..., I "' spoil 9. Exemplary Performance This prerequisite is not eligible for exemplary performance under the Innovation in Design section. 10. Regional Variations Savings achieved through energy efficiency improvements may qualify for state and local utility incentive programs. For instance, Washington State's Puget Sound Energy offers grants to customers that install efficiency upgrades to existing equipment or facilities. Grants range from several hundred dollars to more than $100,000 and typically pay for about so% of a project's cost, Ask local utility providers about the availability of incentives and rebate programs. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Provide the building operator with a breakdown of anticipated energy end uses based on any modeling results. The breakdown will provide a baseline to help operators evaluate ongoing energy consumption patterns for the project space and building. The facility manager should have an ongoing commissioning plan in place to catch any system inefficiencies. Enable linkages with EPA's ENERGY STAR software tools. Register the building with the ENERGY STAR Portfolio Manager tool and input basic building data (e.g., location, square footage). Analyze anticipated building energy performance using the ENERGY STAR Target Finder tool and make sure the facility owner or manager has access to this analysis. EA CI Prerequisite 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 143 EFTA00281682 EA CI Prerequisite 2 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project (bm3Wwww.usgbc.orgiprojecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites Advanced Buildings Technologies and Practices httN/www.advancedbuildings.org This online resource, supported by Natural Resources Canada, presents energy-efficient technologies, strategies for commercial buildings, and pertinent case studies. American Council for an Energy-Efficient Economy http://www.aceee.org ACEEE is a nonprofit organization dedicated to advancing energy efficiency through technical and policy assessments; advising policymakers and program managers; collaborating with businesses, public interest groups, and other organizations; and providing education and outreach through conferences, workshops, and publications. ENERGY STAR.; Buildings Upgrade Manual http://www.energystangovfindex.cfrn? business.bus upgrade manual This manual is a strategic guide for planning and implementing energy-saving building upgrades. It provides general methods for reviewing and adjusting system control settings, plus procedures for testing and correcting calibration and operation of system components such as sensors, actuators, and control devices. New Buildings Institute, Inc. http:(Jwww.newbuildings.org The New Buildings Institute is a nonprofit, public-benefits corporation dedicated to making buildings better for people and the environment. Its mission is to promote energy efficiency in buildings through technology research, guidelines, and codes. U.S. Department of Energy, Building Energy Codes Program httpWwww.energycodes.gov The Building Energy Codes program provides comprehensive resources for states and code users, including news, compliance software, code comparisons, and the Status of State Energy Codes database. The database includes state energy contacts, code status, code history, DOE grants awarded, and construction data. The program is also updating the COMcheck-EZ compliance tool to include ANSIJASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2007. This compliance tool includes the prescriptive path and trade-off compliance methods. The software generates appropriate compliance forms as well. U.S. Department of Energy, Office of Energy Efficiency arid Renewable Energy http://wwweere.energy.gov This website is a comprehensive resource for U.S. Department of Energy information on energy efficiency and renewable energy and provides access to energy links and downloadable documents. Print Media ANSIJASHRAEIIESNA Standard 90.1-2007 User's Manual (ASHRAE, 2008). The ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2007 User's Manual was developed as a companion document to the ANSIJASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2007, Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings. The manual explains the new standard and includes sample calculations, useful reference material, and information on the intent and application of the standard. It is abundantly illustrated and contains numerous examples and tables of reference data. It also includes a complete set of compliance forms and worksheets that can be used to document compliance with the standard. The manual is helpful to architects and engineers applying the standard to the design of buildings, plan 144 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281683 examiners and field inspectors who must enforce the standard in areas where it is adopted as code, and contractors who must construct buildings in compliance with the standard. A compact disk is included that contains electronic versions of the compliance forms found in the manual. 13. Definitions Baseline building performance is the annual energy cost for a building design intended for use as a baseline for rating above standard design, as defined in ANSIJASHRAPIESNA 90.1-2007, Appendix G. An economizer is a device used to make building systems more energy efficient. Examples include HVAC enthalpy controls, which are based on humidity and temperature. An energy simulation model, or energy model, is a computer-generated representation of the anticipated energy consumption of a building. It permits a comparison of energy performance, given proposed energy efficiency measures, with the baseline. Interior lighting power allowance is the maximum lighting power (in watts) allowed for the interior of a building. Lighting power density is the installed lighting power, per unit area. Proposed building performance is the annual energy cost calculated for a proposed design, as defined in ANSI/ASH RAE/I ESNA 90.1-2007, Appendix G. EA CI Prerequisite 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 145 EFTA00281684 146 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281685 FUNDAMENTAL REFRIGERANT MANAGEMENT a Prerequisite EA Prerequisite 3 Points Required Intent To reduce stratospheric ozone depletion. Requirements Zero use of chlorofluorocarbon (CFC)-based refrigerants in tenant heating, ventilating, air conditioning and refrigeration (HVAC&R) systems used within the LEED project scope of work. EA PREREQUISITE 3 2009 EDITION LEER REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 147 EFTA00281686 EA CI Prerequisite 3 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs), used in refrigeration equipment, cause significant damage to Earth's protective ozone layer when they are released into the atmosphere. The reaction between CFC and ozone molecules in the stratosphere destroys the ozone and reduces the stratosphere's ability to absorb a portion of the sun's ultraviolet radiation. As part of the U.S. commitment to implement the Montreal Protocol, EPA has established regulations for responsible management of ozone-depleting substances. In compliance with the Montreal Protocol, CFC production in the United States ended in 1995. Not using CFC refrigerants in new equipment and implementing a phase-out of CFC-based refrigerants in existing equipment have helped slow depletion of the ozone layer. Economic Issues The standard practice in new buildings is to install equipment that does not use CFCs. However, existingbuildings may have CFC-based refrigeration equipment. Energy, demand, and maintenance savings realized from upgrading equipment may offset the cost of converting or replacing existing systems. If savings offset costs, a CFC phase-out plan must be implemented to earn this prerequisite. If savings do not offset costs, detailed calculations and the results of a qualified third-party audit must confirm that CFC conversion or replacement is economically infeasible. 2. Related Credits There are no related credits for this prerequisite. 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this prerequisite. 4. Implementation Use only non-CFC-based refrigerants in all base building HVAC&R equipment built for the project; only HVAC systems built for the project are within the scope ofwork. Consider the characteristics of various CFC substitutes. Refrigerants have varying applications, lifetimes, ozone-depleting potentials (ODPs), and globalwarming potentials (GWPs). Table 1 provides examples of environmental lifetimes, ODP values, and GWP values for a variety of refrigerants. Choose refrigerants that have short environmental lifetimes, small ODP values, and small GWP values. No ideal altemative for CFCs has been developed, and some alternatives are not suitable for retrofits. See EPA's list of substitutes for ozone-depleting substances (http://www.epagoviozoneisnap). 148 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281687 Table 1. Ozone Depletion and Global Warming Potentials of Refrigerants (100-Year Values) ChIceofluorocarbons GDP GWP Common Building Applications CFC-11 1.0 4.680 Centrifugal chillers CFC-12 1.0 10,720 Refrigerators, chillers CFC-114 0.94 9,800 Centrifugal chillers CFC-500 0.605 7,900 Centrifugal chillers, humidifiers CFC-502 0.221 4,600 Low-temperature refrigeration Hydrochlomfluorocarbons HCFC-22 0.04 1,780 Air-conditioning, chillers HCFC-123 0.02 76 CFC-11 replacement Hydrofluccocarbons M HFC.23 -0 12,240 Ultra-low-temperature refrigeration HFC-134a - 0 1,320 CFC-12 or HCFC-22 replacement HFC-245fa - 0 1,020 Insulation agent, centrifugal chillers HFC-404A -0 3,900 Low-temperature refrigeration HFC-407C - 0 1,700 HCFC-22 replacement HFC-410A -0 1,890 Air conditioning HFC-507A -0 3,900 Low-temperature refrigeration Natural Refrigerants I Carbon dioxide (CO2) 0 1.0 Ammonia (NH3) 0 0 Propane 0 3 District Energy Systems For projects with district energy systems, specific technical guidance can be found on USGBC's Registered Project Tools (http://v/ww.usgbc.org/projecttools). Follow the guidance in effect at the time of registration. 5. Timeline and Team Consult with a mechanical engineer or HVAC&R specialist to confirm the presence of CFC-based refrigerants in the base building HVAC&R systems. If CFC-based refrigerants are located, the building owner should develop a phase-out plan and convert to less environmentally harmful refrigerants. Do not install any systems with CFC-based refrigerants. 6. Calculations There are no calculations associated with this prerequisite unless a third-party economic audit is conducted to determine feasibility of retrofitting existing equipment. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measure. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Assemble manufacturers' documentation demonstrating the type of refrigerant used by the HVAC&R systems installed within the scope of the LEED project. 8. Examples There are no examples for this prerequisite. CI Prerequisite 3 2C39 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 149 EFTA00281688 EA CI Prerequisite 3 9. Exemplary Performance There is no exemplary performance available for this prerequisite. 10. Regional Variations There are no regional variations associated with this prerequisite. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Provide facility operators with complete records (such as LEED application materials) for all refrigerant-containing systems, including fire suppression. Ensure that equipment labels are in place and accessible to building operators, and provide them with a copy of any CFC phase-out plan. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (httplAvww.usgbc.org/prtojecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites ASHRAE Service Life and Maintenance Cost Database http://wvashrae.orgidatabase This database provides current information on the service life and maintenance costs of typical HVAC equipment. Facility Management, Coping with the CFC Phase-Out This magazine's website provides various articles on the issues of CFC phase-out. U.S. EPA, Benefits of CFC Phase-Out http:/ .._.2gp_agoi vozongeninfiMbenefits.html ef This document details the benefits of phasing out CFCs and includes brief case studies. U.S. EPA, Building Owners Save Money, Save the Earth: Replace Your CFC Mr Conditioning Chiller http://www.emgovfozoneititle6/60$/chillen 07.pdf This brochure documents the environmental and financial reasons to replace CFC chillers with new, energy-efficient equipment U.S. EPA, Ozone Layer Depletion http://wwwepa.gov/ozoneistrathome.html This website includes information about the science of ozone depletion, EPA's regulatory approach to protecting the ozone layer, and alternatives to ozone-depleting substances. U.S. EPA, Significant NewAlternatives Policy http:fiwww.emgoviozoneisnaptindex.html SNAP is an EPA program to identify alternatives to ozone-depleting substances. The program maintains up-to-date lists of environmentally-friendly substitutes for refrigeration and airconditioning equipment, solvents, fire-suppression systems, adhesives, coatings, and other substances. Print Media BuildingSystenzs Analysis & Retrofit Manual (SMACNA0.995). CFCs, HCPC and Haloes: Professional and Practical Guidance an Substances that Deplete the Ozone Layer (CIBSE, 2000). The Refrigerant Manual: Managing the PhaseOut of CFCs (BOMA International, r993). 150 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281689 13. Definitions Chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) are hydrocarbons that are used as refrigerants and cause depletion of the stratospheric ozone layer. Hydrochlorofluorocarbons (HCPCs) are refrigerants that cause significantly less depletion of the stratospheric ozone layer than chlorofluorocarbons. Refrigerants are the working fluids of refrigeration cycles that absorb heat from a reservoir at low temperatures and reject heat at higher temperatures EA CI Prerequisite 3 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 151 EFTA00281690 152 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281691 OPTIMIZE ENERGY PERFORMANCE-LIGHTING POWER a Credit EA Credit 1.1 Points 1.5 points Intent To achieve increasing levels of energy conservation beyond the referenced standard to reduce environmental and economic impacts associated with excessive energy use. Requirements Reduce connected lighting power density below that allowed by ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard90.1-2007 (with errata but without addenda') usingeither the space-by-space method or by applying the whole building lighting power allowance to the entire tenant space. The points earned for reducing lighting power density below the standard are as follows: Lighting Power Density Reduction below the Standard Points 15% 1 20% 2 25% 3 30% d 35% 5 Project teams in California may use Title 24 zoos, Part 6 in place of ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2007. Potential Technologies & Strategies Design the connected lighting power to maximize energy performance. If the project warrants, consider a computer simulation model to assess the performance and identify the most costeffective energy efficiency measures. z Projck: wi.liittK :0 um: ASI IRAE upproved addenda the put posts of this p:e:cq eisitc nave do so ti :Lair d:ma,:ion.Addcntla mt,t Ix• znplicd consi.tyntty ai.ros, 411 1.1.: ill... etch EA CREDIT 1.1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 153 EFTA00281692 CI Credit 1.1 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Energy efficiency reduces the environmental burdens associated with producing and using energy. Fossil fuels, such as coal and oil, are the most common source of energy used in buildings. However, these fuels are also finite resources. The process of extracting and consuming energy from fossil fuels causes many environmental impacts, including air and water pollution, land degradation, solid waste generation, and greenhouse gas emissions. Mounting evidence connects fossil fuel-based energy use with climate change as well as serious risks to environmental and human health and safety. Data from the U.S. Energy Information Administration show that buildings are responsible for almost half(48%) ofall energy consumed and greenhouse gases emitted annually.1OEPAestimates that if the energy efficiency of commercial and industrial buildings improved by 2096, the resulting greenhouse gas reductions would be equivalent to taking about 30 million vehicles off the road." In addition to fossil fuels, other sources of energy also carry environmental costs. Hydropower activities, for example, can alter aquatic ecosystems and have significant impacts on endangered species. Nuclear power plants pose an environmental threat when they are decommissioned without appropriate storage sites for spent fuel. Given both the environmental impacts inherent in most energy-production processes and our limited energy supplies, efficiency measures are an important strategy for managing the impacts of energy consumption. Economic Issues Some energy-efficiency measures may not require additional first costs. Many measures that do result in higher capital costs may generate savings from lower energy use, smaller equipment, reduced space needs for mechanical and electrical equipment, and utility rebates. These savings may vastly exceed the incremental capital costs associated with the energy-efficiency measures over the life of the project. Even seemingly small conservation measures can be significant; for instance, replacing t incandescent lamp with a fluorescent lamp will save over $30 in energy costs over the operating lifetime of the lamp." 2. Related Credits Optimal lighting systems will reduce lighting power through use of efficient systems, deliver appropriate target light levels, and incorporate daylighting to take advantage of natural light. Occupants' ability to control lighting systems can save even more energy while increasing occupants' satisfaction. Architectural strategies to increase daylighting can achieve greater energy savings through the use of daylight-responsive controls. Review the requirements in these credits: ■ EA Prerequisite z: Minimum Energy Performance ■ EA Credit 1.2: Optimize Energy Performance—Lighting Controls ■ IEQ Credit 6.2: Controllability of Systems—Lighting ■ IEQ Credit 8.2: Daylight and Views—Daylight Commissioning is required to ensure that lighting controls meet the design intent and are operating properly, as detailed in the following: ■ EA Prerequisite t: Fundamental Commissioning of the Building Energy Systems ■ EA Credit 2: Enhanced Commissioning 154 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281693 3. Summary of Referenced Standards ANSIJASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2,007: Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential American National Standards Institute American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers Illuminating Engineering Society of North America http:fiwwwashrae.org ANSIJASHRAWIESNA 90.1-2007 was formulated by ASHRAE under an ANSI consensus process. I ESNA is a joint sponsor of the standard. ANSIJASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2.007 establishes minimum requirements for the energy-efficient design of buildings with these exceptions: single-family houses; multifamily structures of 3 habitable stories or fewer above grade; manufactured houses (mobile and modular homes); buildings that do not use either electricity or fossil fuel; and equipment and portions of buildings systems that use energy primarily for industrial, manufacturing, or commercial processes. Building envelope requirements are provided for semiheated spaces such as warehouses. 4. Implementation The connected lighting power should be designed to maximize energy performance. Consider using an energy simulation model to assess the performance of the tenant space or building. General Guidance • Although task lighting may be used to supplement general lighting, take care to balance the various illuminance requirements of the space. • Lighting controls are not limited to on-off modes; continuous dimming can be implemented based on actual daylight levels. • Use high-efficacy sources and high internal reflectances to reduce the lighting power density. This credit compares the installed interior lighting power with the interior lighting power allowance. Use either the building area method or the space-by-space method in ASHRAE 90.1-2,007. See the Calculations section for details. 5. Timeline and Team Lighting requirements should be part of the owner's project requirements and may include the lighting technologies (LED, ceramic metal halide, Ts-HO, etc.) to be considered for the intended uses of the space. The lighting designer should include in the basis of design specific footcandle target levels for each major space type. Once the lighting system has been designed, it can be helpful to complete a photometric floor plan to identify areas that will be over- or underlit and refine the lighting design. 6. Calculations Installed Interior Lighting Power The installed interior lighting power, calculated as shown by Equation 1, is the power in watts of all permanently installed general,task,and furniture lighting systems and luminaires. ASHRAE90.1- 2.007,Section 9.253, lists lighting equipment that is exempted from consideration in determining the lighting power density and therefore does not need to be included in the calculation. Note that luminaire wattages must be determined in accordance with ASH RAE 90.1-2007, Section 9.1.4. CI Credit 1.1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 155 EFTA00281694 EA CI Credit 1.1 Equation 1. Installed Interior Lighting Power Installed Interior Lighting Power Luminaire Wattage by Luminaire Type = Quantity by Type of Luminaires X (watts) (watts) Building Area Method Use Equation a to determine the interior lighting power allowance according to the building area method described by ASHRAE 90.1-2007, Section 9.5. Begin by determining the appropriate building area types from the list in ASHRAE 90a-2007, Table 9.5.1. For each building area type, there is a corresponding allowed lighting power density (watts per square foot). Determine the interior lighting power allowance (in watts) by multiplying the allowed lighting power density of each building area type by the gross lighted floor area of that building type. Sum the interior lighting power allowances to determine the total interior lighting power allowance. Equation 2. Interior Lighting Power Allowance Using the Building Area Method Installed Interior Lighting Power Building Area Type Lighting Power = 2 Gross Lighting Floor Area (se X Allowance (watts) Density (watts/50 Space-by-Space Method In this alternative approach, defined by ASHRAE 90.1-2007, Section 9.6,the allowed lighting power density is determined for each space individually. Begin by determining the appropriate space area types from the list in ASHRAE 90.1-2007, Table 9.6.1. For each space type, there is a corresponding allowed lighting power density (watts per square foot). Determine the interior lighting power allowance (in watts) by multiplying the allowed lighting power density of each space area type by the gross lighted floor area of that space type. Space areas must be determined in accordance with ASH RAE 9O.1-2007, Section 9.6.1.b. Finally, sum the individual space allowances per Equation 3 to determine the total interior lighting power allowance. See Table t for an example of a completed space-by-space method calculation. Equation 3. Interior Lighting Power Allowance Using the Space-by-Space Method Interior Lighting Power Allowance Space Area Type Lighting Power = 5 Gross Lighting Floor Area (sO X (watts) Density fwattsfsf) For project teams using the space-by-space method, increases to the interior power allowance are permitted in 2 situations: for decorative appearance and for highlighting merchandise. See Section 9.6.2. Note that any additional allowances are provided onlyto the extent that they are actually used. For example, if an apparel retailer dedicates 1,000 square feet of floor area for the sale of clothing, the maximum additional allowance for the purposes of highlighting merchandise would be 3,600 watts (1,000 watts + 2.6 watts per square foot). However, if only 2400 watts of merchandise display lighting is installed (and controlled separately from the general lighting), only 2,400 watts can be claimed as additional lighting power allowance for the purposes of highlighting merchandise. All additional lighting power allowances should be added to the interior lighting power allowance calculated per Equation 3 for the final determination of lighting power reduction. No increase to the lighting power allowance is permissible with the building area method. Lighting Power Reduction To determine the lighting power reduction, subtract the installed interior lighting power from the interior lighting power allowance, being sure to include any additional lighting power allowances if the space-by-space method was used. See Equation 4. Finally, determine the percentage reduction by dividing the lighting power reduction by the interior lighting power allowance (Equation 5). 156 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281695 Projects in California may use Title 24-2005, Part 6, in lieu of ASHRAE 90.1-2007 for calculating interior lighting power reduction. Equation 4. Lighting Power Reduction Lighting Power Reduction (watts) = Interior Lighting Power Allowance Installed Interior Lighting Power (watts) (watts) Equation 5. Lighting Power Density Percentage Reduction Percentage Reduction (%) — Lighting Power Reduction (watts) Interior Lighting Power Allowance (watts) 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. • For ASHRAE compliance, list any addenda used. • Assemble lighting compliance documents from the ASHRAE 90.1-2007 user's manual. • List the rated power of installed lighting systems. • List building area types or space area types with their corresponding gross floor areas. • Assemble information about additional lighting power allowances and document that the allowances apply only to lighting systems that are separate from general lighting. 8. Examples The project team for a 20,000-square-foot office building uses the space-by-space method, in which the lighting power allowance varies for individual areas. Tablet presents the calculation and indicates an overall lighting power allowance of16,440watts.Table 2. illustrates the same calculation using the building area method, in which the lighting power allowance is based on a single lighting power density applied across the entire lighted square footage. Table 1. Interior Lighting Power Allowance, Space-by-Space Method Space bpe Lighting Power Density (watts/g) Gross Area DO Lighting Power Allowance (watts) Office, enclosed 1.1 X 720 792 Office, open plan 1.1 X 16180 17798 Conference 1.3 X 850 1105 Training 1.4 X 1200 1680 Lobby 1.3 X 330 429 Corridor 0.5 X 720 360 Total floor area (s0 20000 Interior lighting power allowance (walls) 22164 Installed interior lighting power (watts) 16440 Lighting power reduction (watts) 5724 Lighting power reduction achieved (5,724/22,164) 25.8% 25.8%> 25%, 3 points earned EA CI Credit 1.1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 157 EFTA00281696 CI Credit 1.1 Table 2. Interior Lighting Power Allowance. Building Area Method Building Area Type Lighting Power Density (watts/s0 Gross Area 40 Lighting Power Allowance (watts) Office 1.0 x 20000 20000 Total floor area (sf) 20000 Interior lighting power allowance (watts) 20000 Installed interior lighting power (watts) 16440 Lighting power reduction achieved (watts) 3560 Lighting power reduction achieved (8560/20.000) 17.8% 17.8% a 15%. 1 point earned 9. Exemplary Performance Project teams may earn an exemplary performance point by reducing the lighting power density 40% or more below the standard. 10. Regional Variations There are no regional variations associated with this credit. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Building operators should consider a group relamping policy. This can significantly reduce labor costs associated with conventional spot-relamping practices. It can also permit the use of lowerenergy lighting equipment, since the system light output will be maintained at or close to the design condition. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (httpifiwww.usgbc.orgfprojecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites U.S. Department of Energy, Building Energy Codes Program http://www.energycodes.gov The Building Energy Codes program provides comprehensive resources for states and code users, including news, compliance software, code comparisons, and the Status of State Energy Codes database. The database includes state energy contacts, code status, code history, DOE grants awarded, and construction data. The program is also updating the COMcheck-EZ compliance tool to include ASHRAE 90.1-2007. This compliance tool includes the prescriptive path and trade-off compliance methods. The software generates appropriate compliance forms as well. Print Media ANSIIASHRAWIESNAStandanio0.1-2007 User's Manual (ASHRAE, 2007). The ANSIJASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2007 User's Manual was developed as a companion document to the ANSIJASHRAWIESNA 90.1-2007, Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings. The manual explains the new standard and includes sample calculations, useful reference material, and information on the intent and application of the standard. It is abundantly illustrated and contains numerous examples and tables of reference data. It also includes a complete set of compliance forms and worksheets that can be used to document compliance with the standard. The manual is helpful to architects and engineers applying the standard to the designofbuildings, plan examiners and field inspectors who must enforce the standard in areas where it is adopted as code, and contractors who must constructbuildings in compliancewith the standard.Acompactdisk is includedthat contains electronic versions of the compliance fors found in the manual. 158 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281697 IESNA Lighting Handbook, ninth edition (IESNA, 2000). ANSIJIESNA RP.1.04, American National Standard Practice for Office Lighting (IESNA). 13. Definitions Interior lighting power allowance is the maximum lighting power (in watts) allowed for the interior of a building. Lighting power density is the installed lighting power, per unit area. A luminaire is a complete lighting unit consisting of a lamp (or lamps) with the housing designed to distribute the light, position, and protect the lamp and connect it to the power supply. Regularly occupied spaces in commercial buildings are areas where people sit or stand as theywork EA CI Credit 1.1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 199 EFTA00281698 160 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281699 OPTIMIZE ENERGY PERFORMANCE-LIGHTING CONTROLS Credit EA Credit 1.2 Points 1..3 points Intent To achieve increasing levels of energy conservation beyond the prerequisite standard to reduce environmental and economic impacts associated with excessive energy use. Requirements Design the project to include t or more of the following independent strategies: • Daylight controls for daylit areas: (I point) Install daylight responsive controls in all regularly occupied daylit spaces within t5 feet of windows and under skylights. Daylight controls must switch or dim electric lights in response to the presence or absence of daylight illumination in the space.' • Daylight controls for so% of the lighting load: (I point) Install daylight responsive controls for so% or more of the connected lighting load and demonstrate that so% of the connected lighting load is daylight responsive. Daylight controls must switch or dim electric lights in response to the presence or absence of daylight illumination in the space.' • Occupancy sensors: (t point) Install occupancy sensors for 7594, of the connected lighting load. AmcricanSociely of Ileatin, Rcirigauting.and Air-Conditioning Engineer>. ANSIASIIRAIOESNA Standwd twee Manual. (Atlanta. zcoS). P.9-3 EA CREDIT 1.2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 161 EFTA00281700 EA CI Credit 1.2 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Daylighting improves the indoor environment. Using daylight to supplement or even eliminate the need for electric lighting is generally welcomed by occupants and reduces lighting energy consumption. Utilizing controls sensitive to daylight maximizes the efficiency and savings from daylighting. When planned in conjunction with heating and air conditioning requirements, the net cost of utilities can be reduced as well. Refer to the Benefits and Issues section in EA Credit 1.1, Optimize Energy Performance—Lighting Power. 2. Related Credits Refer to the Related Credits section in EA Credit 1.1. 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this credit. 4. Implementation Ideally, the use of daylight-responsive controls should be part of a larger lighting strategy. The overall strategy should optimize natural daylighting, minimize electric lighting, provide appropriate task and ambientworkingconditions,andallowoccupants to controlthe lightingof individual spaces. Consider usingbothdaylight-responsivelightingcontrols andoccupancysensors. Daylightingcontrols typically include a photosensor that initiates a control response to increase or reduce the lighting power to the luminaires. A successful design should anticipate occupants' activities, avoid drastic changes in lighting levels, and minimize glare. Ideally, the system will employ continuous dimming, although on-off, bi-level, or step-dimming devices are acceptable for the purposes of this credit. All major commercial lamp types can now be dimmed, including incandescent, fluorescent, and HID. When designing the lighting controls, consider how individual areas will be used, the relationship between luminaires and individual controls, and how the system works as a whole. Establish control zones for the areas with daylight-responsive lighting. These areas should include all perimeter areas within a radius of at least is feet from windows and areas beneath skylights. Anticipate shading from neighboring buildings and trees, and indicate their effect on the control zones. 5. Timeline and Team Consider developing a comprehensive lighting design intent during schematic design. This design intent should indicate the illuminance targets of each major space type, the overall level of daylight and occupancy responsiveness desired, and information on the type of luminaires being considered for the space. This will require coordination between the architect, electrical engineer, and lighting designer. 6. Calculations See the Calculations section in EA Credit 1.1. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Highlight daylit zones on interior lighting plans; indicate which luminaries correspond to each controller. 162 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281701 • For more complex lighting designs, where the control logic cannot easily be discerned from the interior lighting plans, create a lighting control summary indicating the combined control logic for the project lighting. 8. Examples There are no examples for this credit. 9. Exemplary Performance Project teams may earn an exemplary performance point by implementing daylight-responsive controls for 75% of the connected lighting load or by installing occupancy-responsive controls for 95% of the connected lighting load. 10. Regional Variations Refer to the Regional Variations section in EA Credit 1.1. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Refer to the Operations and Maintenance section in EA Credit t.t. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http://www.usgbc.org/projecttools) for additional resources and technical information. International Energy Agency Solar Heating and Cooling Programme http://www.iea-shc.org Print Media Design Brief—Lighting Controls, Southern California Edison (Energy Design Resources). http://www. Daylight in Buildings: A Source Book on Daylighting Systems and Components, Chapter 5, DaylightResponsive Controls. Advanced Lighting Guidelines, Chapter 8, Lighting Controls (New Buildings Institute, Inc., zoo* http://minv.newbuildings.orgilighting.htm. 13. Definitions Daylighting is the controlled admission of natural light into a space, used to reduce or eliminate electric lighting. Daylight-responsive lighting controls are photosensors used in conjunction with other switching and dimming devices to control the amount of artificial lighting in relationship to the amount and quality of natural daylight EA CI Credit 1.2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 183 EFTA00281702 164 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281703 OPTIMIZE ENERGY PERFORMANCE-HVAC Credit EA Credit 1.3 Points 5-10 points Intent To achieve increasing levels of energy conservation beyond the prerequisite standard to reduce environmental and economic impacts associated with excessive energy use. Requirement OPTION 1 Implement t or both of the following strategies: • Equipment Efficiency—(5 points) Install heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC) systems that comply with the efficiency requirements outlined in the New Building Institute's Advanced Buildings" Core Performance" Guide Sections 1.4:Mechanical System Design, is: Mechanical Equipment Efficiency and 3.10: Variable Speed Control. • Appropriate Zoning and Controls: (5 points) Zone tenant fit out of spaces to meet the following requirements: • Every solar exposure must have a separate control zone. • Interior spaces must be separately zoned. • Private offices and special occupancies (conference rooms, kitchens, etc.) must have active controls capable of sensing space use and modulating the HVAC system in response to space demand. OR OPTION 2 Reduce design energy cost compared with the energy cost budget for regulated energy components described in the requirements of ANSIJASHRAE/IESNA Standard go.1-2007 (with errata but without addenda') AND PATH 1 (5 points) Demonstrate that HVAC system component performance criteria used for tenant space are 15% better than a system in minimum compliance with ANSIJASHRAE/IESNA Standard 9o.1-zoo7 (with errata but without addenda.). OR PATH 2 (10 points) Demonstrate that HVAC system component performance criteria used for tenant space are 3o% better than a system that is in minimum compliance with ANSIJASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2007 (with errata but without addenda'). EA CREDIT 1.3 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 165 EFTA00281704 CI Credit 1.3 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Conventional forms of energy production often have detrimental environmental effects. Producing electricity from fossil fuels pollutes air and water, hydroelectric plants can make waterways uninhabitable for indigenous fish, and nuclear power has safety concerns, as well as problems with disposal of spent fuel. Using less energy reduces greenhousegas emissions, limits the impact of natural resource extraction activities, and prevents water pollution, benefitting environmental and human health. Economic Issues Many energyefficiency measures do not require additional first costs. Those measures that do result in higher initial costs often create savings from lower energy use over the building's lifetime, downsized equipment, reduced mechanical space needs, and utilityrebates. These savings can dwarf the increased first costs. Payback periods for off-the-shelf energy efficiency measures are generally short. Even seemingly small conservation measures can be significant. Replacing t incandescent lampwith an ENERGY STAR-qualified light avoids 490 pounds of greenhouse gas emissions over its lifetime or the combustion of more than 200 pounds of coal.'3This substitution also saves more than $30 in energy costs over the operating lifetime of the lamp". 2. Related Credits EA Credit 1.3, Optimize Energy Performance—HVAC, is related to several ventilation and thermal comfort credits because of the energy required to operate mechanically driven comfort systems. Additionally, system controllability should be incorporated with the HVAC system design to achieve a careful balance between comfort and energy performance. These topics are covered in the following credits: ■ IEQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance ■ IEQ Credit t: Outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring ■ IEQ Credit 2: Increased Ventilation ■ IEQ Credit 6.z Controllability of Systems—Thermal Comfort ■ IEQ Credit 7.1: Thermal Comfort—Design ■ IEQ Credit 7.2: Thermal Comfort—Verification 3. Summary of Referenced Standards New Buildings Institute, Advanced Buildings' Core Performance" Guide The Advanced Buildings program is a prescriptive plan for exceeding the energy performance requirements of ASHRAE 90.1-2004. It offers a predictable alternative to energy performance modeling and a simple set of criteria for significantly increasing building energy performance. The program updates and replaces the Advanced Buildings Benchmarked program. Core Performance is calibrated to exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1-2004 in all climate zones. Information about the Core Performance program requirements and a range of additional reference material are available at http://www.advancedbuildints.net Several aspects ofthe Core Performance program overlapwithotherLEED credits and prerequisites. Following the Core Performance program is not an alternative path to achieving any LEED credits except EA Credit 1.3, Optimize Energy Performance—HVAC, but Core Performance may facilitate earning other LEED credits and prerequisites. 166 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281705 American National Standards Institute/ASHRAEfilluminating Engineering Society of North America Standard 90.1-2007: Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential American National Standards Institute American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers Illuminating Engineering Society of North America http:J/www.ashrae.org ANSIJASHRAWIESNA Standard 90.1-2007 was formulated by ASHRAE under an ANSI consensus process. IESNA is a joint sponsor of the standard. ANSIJASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2007 establishes minimum requirements for the energyefficient design of buildings, with these exceptions: single-family houses; multifamily structures of 3 habitable stories or fewer above grade; manufactured houses (mobile and modular homes); buildings that do not use either electricity or fossil fuel; and equipment and portions of buildings systems that use energy primarily for industrial, manufacturing, or commercial processes. Building envelope requirements are provided for semiheated spaces such as warehouses. The energy cost budget method (Section 11) allows the project team to exceed some of the prescriptive requirements provided energy cost savings are made in other areas. However, in all cases, the mandatory provisions must still be met. 4. Implementation OPTION 1. Equipment Efficiency and Zoning Controls The equipment efficiency approach draws from Sections 1.4, 2.9, and 3.10 of the Advanced Buildings Core Performance Guide. Section 1.4 covers mechanical system design intended to closely match actual building loads and to meet ASH RAE 55; Section z.8 covers lighting power density (LPD) by interior space types with specifications not exceeding the Advanced Buildings minimum LPD table; Section 3.10 covers the installation of ENERGY STAR-labeled cool roofs. Follow the requirements laid out in the Core Performance Guide to reduce operating costs, urban heat island effect, and energy use and to maximize occupants' comfort. Small private spaces intended for single, temporary occupancy (e.g., for making confidential telephone calls) may be included as part of a larger thermal zone, since changes in occupancy will not cause large swings in the heating and cooling loads. OPTION 2. Comparison with ASHRAE 90.1-2007 In this option, compare the design annual energy cost with the annual energy cost based on meeting the minimum ASHRAE 90.1-2007 requirements. Only energy costs for space heating, space cooling,and associated fans and pumps are considered; however, the performance ofthese systems is influenced by the performance of other building systems. To determine the reduction in annual costs for the project area, consider the entire building area that is served by the HVAC plant for the project in the evaluation, since the building design and operations beyond the project space influence the design and operation of the HVAC plant. Energy-Efficient Buildings Landscaping protects a building from wind and provides shade, which helps reduce the heat island effect. Characteristically, buildings oriented along an east-west axis obtain the most effective exterior shading. Confirm that the selected building is weather tight and meets code-minimum insulation levels. Lighting accounts for a major portion of a commercial building's energy budget. Efficient lighting in common areas, inside and out, reduces costs. Confirm that the owner has established lighting density standards for all tenant spaces. EA CI Credit 1.3 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 187 EFTA00281706 EA CI Credit 1.3 Consider the availability of natural light for daylighting and opportunities for natural ventilation. Windows high on walls, clerestories, and light shelves will maximize daylight penetration into a space. Light pipes or fiber optic devices can be used to introduce daylight in less accessible spaces. Inspect the existing HVAC system. Discuss opportunities for specifying high efficiency HVAC equipment with the building owner. When included in the project scope, specify high-performance chillers and boilers with optimal part-load operation (e.g., variable-speed chillers and boilers with modulating burners). Specify high-efficiency motors for all applications and variable-speed drives for fans, chillers, and pumps. Confirm that a building energy management system exists and is functional. If the project space is part of a larger building, determine whether the building controls interface with the functions within the project area. A good energy management system will facilitate smooth building startups and shutdowns and optimize efficiency and occupant comfort. 5. Timeline and Team The owner and project team should thoroughly research the energy efficiency of potential tenant spaces. Review energy and water utility bills and develop, ideally, a 3-year history of use. Seek clarification on how utilitieswill be prorated in a multitenant building. 6. Calculations OPTION 1. Equipment Efficiency and Zoning Controls If the building has no separate method for modulating the HVAC system in response to space demand, such as demand-controlled ventilation or modulation of the HVAC system tied to occupant sensor controls, Meet the following criteria ■ The system must be capable of modulating air-handling units (AHUs) and zone minimum supply volume below 0.30 cubic feet per minute per square foot of supply volume for standard variable air volume (VAV) terminals, or below as% of the peak design flow rate for fan-powered VAV boxes. For spaces where the minimum outdoor air flow exceeds the minimum supply volumes specified here, use occupant sensors or demand-controlled ventilation to achieve these minimum supply volumes. ■ The building control system must include controls for fan static pressure reset. ■ The mandatory requirements ofASHRAE90.1-2007 and ASHRAE 62.1-2007 must be met. OPTION 2. Comparison with ASHRAE 90.1-2007 Option 2 rewards reductions in the annual cost for electricityand fuel to drive the HVAC system. The project team compares the results from 2. simulation models, tbased on the actual design and a second, similar model based on meting all applicable mandatory and prescriptive provisions of ASHRAE90.1-2007. The standardhas zenergycomparison methods,both ofwhich are appropriatefordemonstrating energy cost savings to eam this credit. The energy cost budget method, found in Section ti of the standard, allows projects to trade off energy performance between building systems as long as the calculated annual energy cost is no greater than that for the budget case. The performance rating method, found in Appendix G, was developed to rate the energy efficiency of buildings relative to a baseline that represents "typical" construction practices. The methods differ in the way they identify the budget or baseline HVAC system. Mother important difference is that the energy cost budget does not recognize energy-efficient design of air distribution systems, and the performance rating method does. 168 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281707 Both methods include all end-use load components, including exhaust fans, parking garage ventilation, snow-melt and freeze-protection equipment, façade lighting, swimming pool heaters and pumps, elevators and escalators, refrigeration, and cooking. An end use that does not affect trade-offs between systems can be excluded from the energy cost budget. Fora typical Commercial Interiors project, where the project space is only 1 of several tenants being served by a common HVAC system, the energy cost budget method is adequate and more direct. The performance rating method is considered more rigorous and comprehensive and is more appropriate for projects using unconventional HVAC systems. Option z involves modifying the ASHRAE 90.1-2007 modeling requirements. The relationship of the energy end use to the calculations is shown in Tablet, and the modifications to the modeling requirements are listed in Table a. The referenced sections and terminology in the tables and the following narrative are for the energy cost budget method. Table 1. Energy End Uses for Option 2, Modeling Calculation Using ASHRAE 90.1-2007, Section 11 Energy End Uses Design Case Design Energy Cost DEC Baseline Case Energy Cost Budget ECB Heating Needed to model DEC Used in Option 2 calculation Needed to model ECB Used in Option 2 calculation Fans/Pumps Needed to model DEC Used in Option 2 calculation Needed to model ECB Used in Option 2 calculation Lighting Needed to model DEC But Costs are Not Included Needed to model ECB But Costs are Not Included Plug and Process loads Needed to model DEC But Costs are Not Included Needed to model ECB But Costs are Not Included Service Water Heating May be used to model DEC But Costs are Not Included May be used to model ECB But Costs are Not Included Miscellaneous Loads Not required Not required STEP 1. Select a Modeler The calculation will likely require energy simulation modeling. Sections 11.2 and G2.2 detail the requirements and software. Project teams may find that their logical first step is to identify an individual or firm with experience in energy modeling. STEP 2. Determine the Building Segment The simulation should generally involve more than just the project space and model the building segment that is served by the common HVAC system. For example, if the project area takes up the third floor of a s-story building and the building has a single central plant, the entire building should be modeled. STEP 3. Select a Modeling Method Decidewhich modeling method to use. The energy cost budget (Section ii) is less demanding and may entail less cost. However, some host buildings (particularly those that are LEED certified) may already have been modeled using the performance rating method (Appendix G), and much of the work may be completed. STEP 4. Obtain Building Information Unless an earlier energy simulation modeling run and report are available, the modeler and the project mechanical engineer or architect should review the as-built drawings of the building and scout the premises to determine the existing conditions for at least the segment of the building with which the project area shares a common central HVAC system. The existing building envelope is used for the entire building segment being modeled, EA CI Credit 1.3 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 189 EFTA00281708 EA CI Credit 13 including the project area. Determine the edsting conditions for operational schedules, lighting, HVAC systems and zones, and possibly service hot water systems for the rest of the building segment. Information should include the quantity of fenestration and its exposure, the thermal conductivity of all exterior walls, windows and doors, the type of HVAC system, and the size and efficiency of the HVAC components. For the occupied areas other than the project space,document the type of occupancyand operation schedule. Estimate the existing lighting and plug loads for these areas. Obtain other relevant information as necessary. STEP 5. Model the Design Case For the project area, use the edsting building envelope, but for heating, cooling, fans and pump, lighting and plug loads, and (if needed) service water heating, use the project design. Any modifications to the HVAC central plant being made in conjunction with the project should be included in the design case. These changes do not have to be within the project area or part of the project's contractual scope of work if they are being done for the project occupants' benefit. Including these changes should improve the performance being measured under this credit If the project has attained SS Credit 1, Site Selection, Option 2, Path 10, Water Use Reduction-30%, or WE Credit 1, Water Use Reduction, the design case may reflect the reduced volumes of water for service hot water systems. The HVAC energy costs should not include the energy costs associated with service hot water systems. For the rest of the building segment, use the existing conditions. Together, the results will generate the design energy cost (DEC). Follow Section 11 or Appendix G and the additional information in Table 2. Table 2. Option 2 Procedure ASHRAMENSA 90.1 Section Design Energy Cost Model DEC Energy Cost Budget Model ECB 1. Design Model Follow Table 11.3.1, using the proposed design of the project space, and the existing conditions for the balance of the modeled building segment, as field verified (step 0 in the procedure) for the design case. Baseline Case: Follow Table 11.3.1, using the mandatory and prescriptive requirements for the project space, but use the existing conditions for the balance of the modeled building segment. Alternative Baseline Case: Follow Table 11.3.1, using the mandatory and prescriptive requirements for both the project space and the balance of the modeled building segment. 2. Additions and Alterations Follow Table 11.3.1. See (b) concerning the exclusion of HVAC systems not part of the modeled building segment. Follow Table 11.3.1 3. Space Use Classification Follow Table 11.3.1 Follow Table 11.3.1 4. Schedules Follow Table 11.3.1 when field verification can not be attained. Use the same schedule for DEC. ECB and A-ECB. 5. Building Envelope Follow Table 11.3.1, using the proposed design of the project space, and the existing envelope conditions for the balance of the modeled building segment, as field verified (step 4 in the procedure) for the design case. Baseline Case Follow Table 11.3.1, using the proposed design of the project space, and the existing envelope conditions for the balance of the modeled building segment. Alternative Baseline Case: Follow Table 11.3.1, using the mandatory and prescriptive requirements, as described. for the baseline case. 170 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281709 6. Lighting Follow Table 11.3.1, using the proposed design of the project space, and the field verified lighting for the balance of the modeled building segment. Baseline Case- For the project space, use either 9.5 or 9.6; for the balance of the modeled building segment, use the same values used in the DEC model. Alternative Baseline Case: For both the project space and the balance of the modeled building segment, use either 9.5 or 9.6. 7. 8. 9. Thermal Blocks Follow Table 11.3.1 Same as DEC model. 10. HVAC Systems Follow Table 11.3.1, using the proposed design of the project space, and the field verified HVAC system information of the central plant when existing. Follow Table 11.3.1, which references Figure 11.3.2, Table 11.3.2A 11. Service Hot Water Systems Follow Table 11.3.1. If the project space has attained WE Credit 1. the model may reflect the reduced volumes. If the building has attained SS Credit 1 Option J. the model may reflect the reduced volumes. Follow Table 11.3.1 12 Miscellaneous Loads Follow Table 11.3.1. If the project space anticipates attaining EA Credit 1.4, the DEC may use a latter value reflecting the actual plug load planned for the project area. In the balance of the modeled building segment, use the field verified plug load (step 4 in the procedure). End-uses excluded in Section 13 and 14 of Table 11.3.1 may be excluded: these include exhaust fans, parking garage ventilation fans, exterior building lighting, swimming pool heaters and pumps, elevators and escalators, refrigeration equipment and cooking equipment. Project Space: Follow Table 11.3.1. If the project space anticipates attaining EA Credit 1.4. the ECB shall use a higher plug load value reflecting the occupancy type. If EA Credit 1.4 is not being pursued, use the same plug value in both the DEC and ECB. Balance of the modeled building segment: ECB: Use existing plug load values; A-ECB: Use a higher plug load value reflecting the occupancy type. Both ECB and A-ECB: End-uses excluded in Section 13 and 14 of Table 11.3.1 may be excluded. STEP 6. Model the Baseline Case The baseline case is calculated by replacing the design conditions of the project area with the standard's mandatory and prescriptive requirements. For lighting, use either the building area method (Table 9.5.1) in or the space-by-space method (Section 9.6) in ASH RAE 90.1-2007. For the baseline HVAC model (no modifications to the central plant), change only those items within the project areato the mandatory and prescriptive requirements of the standard. Follow the requirements outlined in Table 11.3.1 of Section nor Table G.3.1 in Appendix G of the standard, and the additional notes in Table 2. Model the rest of the building segment using the same existing building conditions used in the design case. If modifications to the central plant are included in the design case modeling, replace them in thebaseline case with the mandatoryand prescriptive equivalent For example, ifpumpswere replaced with efficiencies higher than required, use the required equivalent in the baseline model. If extensive HVAC revisions have been made, followthe procedure outlined in Section It or Appendix G, using Figure 11.3.2 or Table G3.1.1 to determine the budget building design criteria. If using Section 11, the baseline budget building condenser cooling source may be defined as air, regardless of the proposed design, if the changed cooling equipment has less than 150 tons of cooling capacity. This exception is made to encourage the specification of more efficient water-based cooling systems over air-based cooling systems in smaller equipment sizes. Document the choices made in the narrative included with the submittal. EA CI Credit 1.3 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 171 EFTA00281710 EA CI Credit 13 STEP 6A. Model an Alternative Baseline Case In the above method, the differential between the DEC and energy cost budget increases as the energy efficiency of the building decreases. This could make it easier to reach the credit thresholds in a less efficient building. So as not to penalize project teams that have wisely located in a highly energy-efficient building—perhaps a building already LEED certified—an alternative baseline method is provided. If the existing conditions are more energy efficient than the prescriptive requirements of ASHRAE 90.1-2007, replace the existing conditions in the baseline model with the ASH RAE 90.1-2007 requirements. Basethe credit calculations oneither baseline. Document the choice in the narrative included with the submittal; if results for both baselines were generated, consider submitting both. STEP 7. Calculate the Energy Reduction Because of the 2 possible baseline cases, there are 2 energy reduction calculations. The reduction for the model baseline case uses ASHRAE 90.1-2007 mandatory and prescriptive requirements in the project area and edstingconditions in the balance of the modeled building segment, as shown in Equation 1. It corrects for the area relationship between the project space and the modeled building segment. The reduction for the alternative baseline, potentially more generous if the building is highly efficient, is shown in Equation 2. No adjustment is made for the project-to-building segment area because the calculation evaluates the overall performance of the HVAC system. Equation 1. Percent Annual HVAC Energy Cost Reduction Baseline: Project Area - ANSI/ AHRAE/IESNA 90.t mandatory and prescriptive requirements Balance of modeled Building Segment - Existing Conditions ECBmt — DECK& Reduction = EC8 NyAC X Project Area Total Segment Area Equation 2. Percent Annual HVAC Energy Cost Reduction Alternate Baseline: Both Project Area and Balance of Modeled Building Segment - ANSI/ AHRAE/IESNA 90.1 mandatory and prescriptive requirements Reduction — A-ECB„wc — DEC„µ.,c A-ECB,„„c 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ List locations and functions of HVAC system automatic controls or sensors. ■ Document potential energy savings per control and reasons for zone distribution. ■ For cost-budget compliance, list the proposed design energy by end use, associated peak demand, and cost. Additionally, list baseline costs by energy type. 172 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281711 8. Examples Table 3 illustrates a calculation using Option 2 and the energy cost budget method. The baseline case and alternative baseline are both shown. Using the baseline case, the design case results in a 36.3% reduction. Using the alternative baseline, the design case has a 15.8% reduction. Table 3. HVAC Energy Cost Reduction, Energy Cost Budget HVAC Energy Uses Design Case Energy Type Electric (kWh) Gas run Energy Use (10 Btu) Annual Cost ($) Space Heating Natural Gas 4,500 455,000 $3.223 Space Cooling Electric 240.300 819,904 $16.800 Fans/Pumps Electric 120.150 409,952 Wimp Design Energy Cost HVAC (DEC, ,,,c) $28.421 Baseline Case Project Area - Code Balance - Existing Conditions Space Heating Natural Gas 4,575 457,500 $3.239 Space Cooling Electric 270,000 921,240 $18,876 Fans/Pumps Electric 122,000 416,264 $8,529 Baseline Energy Cost Budget HVAC (ECBFroc) $30,645 Reduction = (ECBwaz - DECwoz)/ ECB.rmc x (Project Are / Total Segmen Area) Reduction = ($30.645 - $28,421)1($30,645 x 120.000 ft / 100.000 ftil Reduction = 36.3% 36.3% > 30% 2 Points Earned Alternate Baseline Project Area - Code Balance - Cade Space Heating Natural Gas 5,200 520,000 $3,682 Space Cooling Electric 295.000 1,006,540 $20,624 Fans/Pumps Electric 460,620 $9,438 Alternate Baseline Energy Cost Budget HVAC (A-ECBMV1c) $33.744 Reduction = (A.ECI3Hue- DECHnt)/ A-Ea:tom) Reduction = ($33.744 - $28,421)/533,744 Reduction = 15.8% 15.8%> 15% 1 Point Earned 9. Exemplary Performance Projects that use Option a and demonstrate that HVAC system component performance for the tenant space is 33% more efficient than a system that is in minimum compliance with ASHRAE 90.1- 2007 are eligible to earn 1 point under Innovation in Design. 10. Regional Variations Regional variance is already incorporated in ASH RAE 90.1-2007, which accounts for 8 climate zones and 3 climate subzones and their minimum envelope and glazing property requirements. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Sic the ( terations and Maintenance section in EA Credit LI. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (www.usgbc.org/projecttools) for additional resources and technical information. EA CI Credit 1.3 2C39 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 173 EFTA00281712 EA CI Credit 13 Websites DOE-a This comprehensive energyanalysis program predicts the hourly performance of a building's energy use and utility costs. ENERGY START httpq .erieaarov ENERGYSTARisagovemment-industrypartnershipmanagedbytheU.S.EnvironmentalProtection Agency and the U.S. Department of Energy. The program's website offers energy management strategies, benchmarking software tools for buildings, product procurement guidelines, and lists of ENERGY STAR-qualified products and buildings. National Renewable Energy Program, Energy-to http:fiwww.nrel.Sbuildinpfenergyto.html ENERGY-to is an award-winning software tool for designing low-energy buildings. ENERGY-to integrates daylighting, passive solarheating, and low-energy cooling strategies with energy-efficient shell design and mechanical equipment. The program is applicable to commercial and residential buildings of 10,000 square feet or less. U.S. Department of Energy Building Energy Codes Program http:/ mcksar The Building Energy Codes program provides comprehensive resources for states and code users, including code comparisons, compliance software, news, and the Status of State Energy Codes database. The database includes state energy contacts, code status, code history, Department of Energygrants awarded, and construction data. U.S. Department of Energy, Office of Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy http://wvLeere.energy.govibuildingsi This extensive website for energy efficiency is linked to a number of DOE-funded sites that address buildings and energy. Of particular interest is the tools directory that includes the Commercial Buildings Energy Consumption Tool for estimating end-use consumption in commercial buildings. The tool allows the user to define a set of buildings by principal activity, size, vintage, region, climate zone, and fuels (main heat, secondary heat, cooling, and water heating), and to view the resulting energy consumption and expenditure estimates in tabular format. Print Media ANSIIASHRAE/IESNAStandani90.1-2007 User's Manual (ASHRAE, zoo7). The ANSIJASHRAWIESNA 90.1-2007 User's Manual was developed as a companion document to ANSI/ASHRAWIESNA90.1-2007 (Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings). The User's Manual explains the new standard and includes sample calculations, useful reference material, and information on the intent and application of the standard. It is abundantly illustrated and contains numerous examples and tables of reference data. It also includes a complete set ofcompliance forms andworksheets that can be used to document compliance with the standard. The manual is helpful to architects and engineers who must apply the standard to the design of the buildings, plan examiners and field inspectors who must enforce the standard in areas where it is adopted as code, and contractors who must construct buildings in compliance with the standard. A compact disk is included that contains the EnvStd .4.0 Computer Program for performing building envelope trade-offs plus electronic versions of the compliance forms found in the manual. IESNA Lighting Handbook, ninth edition (IESNA, 2000). Mechanical and Electrical Systemsfor Buildings,fourthedition,byBenjaminStein andJohn S. Reynolds (John Wiley & Sons0992.). 174 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281713 Sustainable Building Technical Manual (Public Technology, Inc.,996). httpWwww.pti.org. Advanced Buildings: Eneigy Benchmarkfor Hth Performance Buildings(E-Benchmark) (New Buildings C Institute'.. EA 13. Definitions An economizer is a device used to make building systems more energy efficient. Examples include HVAC enthalpy controls, which are based on humidity and temperature. An energy simulation model, or energy model, is a computer-generated representation of the anticipated energy consumption of a building. It permits a comparison of energy performance, given proposed energy efficiency measures, vith the baseline. Credit 1.3 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 175 EFTA00281714 176 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281715 OPTIMIZE ENERGY PERFORMANCE-EQUIPMENT AND APPLIANCES ou Credit Points EA Credit 1.4 1-4 points Intent To achieve increasing levels of energy conservation beyond the prerequisite standard to reduce environmental and economic impacts associated with excessive energy use. Requirements For all ENERGY STAR' qualified equipment and appliances installed as part of the tenant's scope of work, achieve one of the following percentages (by rated power): Percent Installed ENERGY STAR Qualified Equipment of ENERGY STAR Eligible Equipment Points 70% 1 77% 2 84% 3 90% 4 This requirement applies to appliances, office equipment, electronics, and commercial food service equipment. Excluded are HVAC, lighting, and building envelope products. EA CREDIT 1.4 2009 EDITION LEER REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 177 EFTA00281716 CI Credit 1.4 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues According to the 2003 Commercial Building Energy Consumption Survey, conducted by the Energy Information Agency, plug loads, such as energy use for office equipment and computers, account for 9% of total office building energy consumption and is% of total electricity consumption25 Because of the magnitude of plug loads in certain building types, encouraging their reduction is very important. Plug loads, however, are hard to quantify and regulate. The few data that are available generally show that end-use consumption is quite variable—both across building types and within building types. ASH RAE 90.1-2007, addresses plug loads in a limited degree through the performance rating method in Appendix G. Economic Issues Using ENERGY STAR-qualified products will reduce the energy used in the project space. ENERGY STAR reports that qualified products use 30-75% less electricity than other products!' Although the initial purchase cost may be higher, the energy savings realized will translate directly into longterm cost savings. If every computer purchased by businesses this year met the new ENERGY STAR requirements, firms would save more than $z60 million over the lifetime of those models— equivalent to lighting 130 million square feet of U.S. commercial building space each year." 2. Related Credits Because thermal comfort can be affected by energy-using equipment, the equipment specifier and the HVAC designer need to coordinate their plans. Additionally, although not typically required by LEED,equipment and appliances can be included within the scope ofcommissioning. The following prerequisites and credits address these issues: ■ EA Prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems ■ EA Prerequisite a: Minimum Energy Performance ■ EA Credit 1.3: Optimize Energy Performance—HVAC ■ EA Credit 2: Enhanced Commissioning ■ IEQ Credit 7.1: Thermal Comfort—Design 3. Summary of Referenced Standard ENERGY STAR'-Qualified Products httplfwv.energystar.gov Products in more than 50 categories are eligible for ENERGY STAR certification. They use less energy, save money, and help protect the environment. 4. Implementation Differing occupant densities and work schedules cause wide variations in plug loads and make it difficult to establish a constant metric.A few people in a big space with inefficient computers will use fewer watts per square foot than an office full of high-efficiency monitors, networked computers, laptops, and LCD displays. Similarly, fast food restaurants, where there is little or no sit-down dining, rate poorly when area is included in the plug load calculation. Using Btu per meal may be a more reliable metric for a fast food space. In retail stores, sales volume or the number of clients served potentially has abetter correlation to process load. Using ENERGY STAR-qualified products is the most straightforward way to optimize energy performance. Appliances and equipment can have a large impact on the energy usewithin a space. Tableicompares 178 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281717 the regulated loadswithinofficeswith unregulated processloads.Table 2. shows that the rated power of equipment is considerably higher than the actual average demand of the system. Table 1. Regulated vs. Non regulated Energy Consumption, by End Use Load k8tu (sf-yr) watts (s0 Heating 11.40 0.38 Cooling 7.46 0.25 Ventilation 3.63 0.12 Water heating 1.87 0.06 Lighting 22.15 0.74 Regulated Subtotal 46.51 1.56 Cooking 1.01 0.03 Refrigeration 0.37 0.01 Office Equipment 12.65 0.42 Misc. 3.45 0.12 Process Subtotal 17.48 0.59 Source: EIA. C8ECS 1995 Table 2. Energy Consumption and Rated Power, by Equipment Type Energy Star Equipment Rated Power (watts) Total Number in Project Number of Energy Star Total Powre in Project (watts) Power that is Energy Star (watts) Desktop Computer 120 10 8 1200 960 Notebook Computer 45 20 16 900 720 Display (CRT) 15" 100 0 0 Display (CRT) 17" 200 2 1 400 200 Display (CRT) 21" 300 0 0 Display (LCD) 15' 45 2 2 90 90 Display (LCD) 17' 75 6 4 450 300 Display (LCD) 21' 120 0 0 Desktop laser printer 120 1 0 120 0 Office laser printer 250 2 1 500 250 Desktop copier 225 0 0 Office copier 750 1 I 750 750 Fax machine 45 1 I 45 45 Scanner 45 0 0 Refrigerator 750 1 1 750 750 Dishwasher 1200 1 1 1200 1200 Televisions 100 0 0 Commercial refrigeratodfreezer 1000 0 Commercial fryer 10000 0 Commercial hot food holding cabinet 1500 0 Commercial steam cooker 8000 0 Clothes washer 350 0 0 Clothes dryer 2000 0 0 Totals 6405 5265 Percent Energy Star 82.2% Sources: Energy Star Websile (attafriSpO DOE Energy Information Portal (htlp://mweeere.enercy.gov) Lawrence Berkeley nation& Laboratory Websile for equipment based on a variety of real* paw dross of different equipment and Reports (htlpflencluseiblgod ESTAR Moog Note: The values in this table represent average are applicable only for v.ekghting the LEED calculation estimates of actual paw, in use. f government infarnalen 'arm. The values and see not meant to be accurate rated parer sures based on EA CI Credit 1.4 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 179 EFTA00281718 EA CI Credit L4 Select energy-efficient equipment and appliances in the following categories: ■ Appliances, such as dishwashers, refrigerators, and water coolers. ■ Office equipment, such as computers, copiers, fax machines, digital duplicators, notebook computers, tablet PCs, mailing machines, external power adapters, monitors, printers, scanners, and all-in-ones. ■ Electronics, such as battery charging systems, cordless phones, combination units, digitalto-analog converter boxes (DTAs), DVD players, external power adapters, home audio, televisions,and VCRs. ■ Commercial food service equipment, such as dishwashers, fryers, hot food holding cabinets, ice machines, solid door refrigerators and freezers, and steam cookers. HVAC, lighting systems, and building envelope products are outside the scope of EA Credit 1.4. The credit applies to all installed equipment and appliances listed by the ENERGY STAR program. Any categories added to the ENERGY STAR list in the future may be used in the project team's calculation. Periodically review the ENERGY STAR website for updates to product categories and models. Consult the interpretation rulings for this credit to find the rated power that must be used in the calculation. MI appliances and equipment installed at the time of occupancy must be included in this credit. Equipment and appliances must meet the ENERGY STAR criteria current at the time of purchase. Any items covered by the ENERGY STAR program that are purchased after new criteria have been issued must meet the new criteria. Upgraded Replacements When appliances are replaced with ENERGY STAR-qualified equipment from a different category and at a lower rated power, the higher rated power value corresponding to the new product category can be used for this credit. For example, if a desktop computer is replaced with a new, ENERGY STAR-qualified notebook computer, the team may use 120 watts as the rated power for the desktop computer in place of 45 watts for the notebook computer. Similarly, when a CRT display unit is replaced with a new, more efficient ENERGY STAR-qualified LCD display unit, the higher rated power value of the CRT display may be used in the credit calculation. The replacement must occur between the time of project registration and certification application. The rated power of a piece of equipment is the maximum power it can draw under any conditions. The actual power used by office equipment and appliances is often less than half the rated power (Table;). The actual power varies significantly based on factors such as frequency of use, number of simultaneous functions, resolution, and mode. The default power values used in this credit are not intended to be accurate estimates of the actual power draw of the equipment. Rather, the values weight the calculation based on the contribution of each piece of equipment or appliance to the overall plug load of the building. 180 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281719 Table 3. Comparison of Actual Power and Rated Powe , by Equipment Type Equipment lype Actual power draw (as a % of rated power draw) Sauce PCs 25 - 50% Norford et al., 1989 Impact and inkjet Printers 20- 25% Computer network equipment 30% Kunz, 1997 Computers 14 - 33% Monitors -28 - 85% Komor, 1997 Printers -9 - 32% PCs 5 - 35% Hosni, Jones, and X, 1999 Facsimile Machine 20 — 45% Network Server 50% Monitor 15 — 36% 5. Timeline and Team The office manager and project owner should institute a purchasing policy that specifies ENERGY STAR-qualified equipment and appliances. 6. Calculations At least 7o% of the total power demand of all eligible equipment must be attributable to ENERGY STAR-qualified products. The calculation is based on power demand rather than the number of appliances to normalize the anticipated energy savings to the consumption of each item. Use the following calculation to determine percentage achievement: STEP 1 Count the eligible appliances and pieces of equipment in the project and enter the number in column 3 of Table a. Indicate how many of each equipment type are ENERGY STAR-qualified products, and enter that number in column 4. An upgrade should be shown in the same row as the item it replaced so that the team can count the higher wattage of the replaced equipment. STEP 2 Multiply the total numbers and the ENERGY STAR numbers bythe rated power values in column 2 to calculate the total rated power installed and the total rated power that is attributable to ENERGY STAR-qualified equipment. STEP 3 Divide the rated power of ENERGY STAR equipment by the project's total equipment rated power to determine the percentage; refer to the Requirements section to determine the number of points achieved. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measure. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. • List generic and ENERGY STAR-qualified equipment, associated rated power (watts), and energy use per day for the project space. EA CI Credit 1.4 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 181 EFTA00281720 EA CI Credit L4 8. Examples A small office has 20 computers and t refrigerator, all the computers are ENERGY STAR-qualified models but the refrigerator is not. The office is using ENERGY STAR-qualified equipment for more than 9o%of its equipment byquantitybut must calculate the percentage of rated power attributable to ENERGY-STAR products; the rated input wattage is 75%. This example qualifies fort point under this credit. The team would need to achieve a rated power of 77% to reach the threshold fora second point. 9. Exemplary Performance Projects may earn an exemplary performance credit under Innovation and Design by achieving a rated power of 97% attributable to ENERGY STAR-qualified equipment and appliances. 10. Regional Variations There are no regional variations associated with this credit. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations To facilitate continued purchase of qualifying equipment, provide information to the tenant's operations team, including cutsheets and purchase orders, for all ENERGY STAR-qualified equipment installed within the space. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (httflivnvw.usgbc.oreprojectools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites http://ww.energystar.gc_iv ENERGYSTARisagovemment-industrypartnershipmanagedbytheU.S.EnvironmentalProtection Agency and the U.S. Department of Energy. The program's website offers energy management strategies, benchmarking software tools for buildings, product procurement guidelines, and lists of ENERGY STAR-qualified products and buildings. EPA provides an innovative energy performance rating system that organizations have already used to rate more than 70,000 buildings across the country. EPA recognizes top performing buildings with the ENERGY STAR. Department of Energy, Energy Information Agency http://www.eia.doe.gov This website links to ETA's Commercial Building Energy Consumption Survey. Print Media Electricity Used byOffice Equipment and Network Equipment in the U.S.: Detailed Report and Appendices, by Kawamoto, ICaoru, et al. (Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory, February20ot). ta nfienduse. IbLgov/Projects/Inforech.html and http:fieetd.lbl.gov/BENSF/GuideR.pdf. 13. Definitions Rated power is the nameplate power on a piece of equipment. It represents the capacity of the unit and is the maximum that it will draw. Receptacle (or plug) load is the current drawn by all equipment that is plugged into the electrical system. 182 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281721 ENHANCED COMMISSIONING Credit Points EA Credit 2 5 points Intent To verify and ensure that the tenant space is designed, constructed and calibrated to operate as intended. Requirements Implement, or have a contract in place to implement, the following additional commissioning process activities in addition to the requirements of EA Prerequisite 1: Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems: • Prior to the start of the construction documents phase, designate an independent commissioning authority (CxA) to lead, review and oversee the completion of all commissioning process activities. • The CxA must have documented commissioning authority experience in at least 2. building projects. • The individual serving as the CxA: - Must be independent of the work of design and construction; - Must not be an employee of the design firm, though he or she may be contracted through them; - Must not be an employee of, or contracted through, a contractor or construction manager holding construction contracts; - May be a qualified employee or consultant of the owner. • The CxA must report results, findings and recommendations directly to the owner. • The CxA must conduct, at a minimum, r commissioning design review of the owner's project requirements,basisofdesign and design documents prior tothe mid-construction documents phase and must back-check the review comments in the subsequent design submission. • The CxA must review contractor submittals applicable to systems being commissioned for compliance with the owner's project requirements and basis of design. This review must be concurrent with the reviews of the architect or engineer of record and submitted to the design team and the owner. • The CxA or other project team members must develop a systems manual that gives future operating staff the information needed to understand and optimally operate the project's commissioned systems. • The CxA or other project team members must verify that the requirements for training operating personnel and building occupants have been completed. • The CxA must be involved in reviewing the operation of the tenant space with operations and maintenance (=) staff and occupants within 8 to io months after substantial completion. A plan for resolving outstanding commissioning-related issues must be included. EA CREDIT 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 183 EFTA00281722 1 =1:111- CI Credit 2 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Facilities that do not perform as intended will consume significantly more resources over their lifetimes. Enhanced commissioning is a best practice in the building industry; it ensures that building performance requirements have been clearly and completely identified early in the project's construction, and it verifies that designed systems have been installed in compliance with those requirements. Economic Issues An effective commissioning process typically increases soft costs and may require additional scheduling for commissioning activities. This investment is generally recouped in improved design and construction coordination, fewer change orders, and reduced operating costs. Indoorairqualityandbuildingoccupants'cornfortmayhavetremendousimpactontheirproductivity, health, and well-being, as well as the cost of ownership. Commissioning can significantly reduce repairs, construction change orders, energy costs, and operations and maintenance i::=) costs. 2. Related Credits The commissioning effort can affect many performance-based features encouraged in the LEED for Commercial Interiors Rating System. Consider including the following features and systems in the commissioning effort: water efficiency and metering of plumbing fixtures, outdoor air delivery and monitoring, lighting, and thermal comfort systems. See Table t in EA Prerequisite 1 for a list of related credits. 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this credit 4. Implementation Relationship between Fundamental and Enhanced Commissioning LEED for Commercial Interiors addresses building commissioning in a places, EA Prerequisite 1, Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems, and EA Credit a, Enhanced Commissioning. For LEED design and construction projects, the scope of services for the commissioning authority (CxA) and project team should be based on the owner's project requirements. The commissioning process activities must address the commissioned systems noted in the EA Prerequisite t requirements. For commercial interior projects, the scope can vary greatly. Some may include only lighting systems; others may include all HVAC and servicewater systems aswell. EACredita requires that the commissioning authority be involved early in the process to help facilitate a commissioning design review and then a commissioning documentation review. As the project nears completion, enhanced commissioning requires oversight of staff training, a walk-through 8 to to months after completion, and the completion of a systems manual. 5. Timeline and Team See the Timeline and Team section in EA Prerequisite 1. 6. Calculations There are no calculations required for this credit. 184 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281723 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Update the commissioning plan at milestones throughout the project. This should happen, at a minimum, during the design development phase, the construction documents phase, and just prior to the kick-off meeting with the general contractor. ■ Prepare a systems list that indicates which systems have been included within the scope of enhanced commissioning. ■ Confirm that the commissioning authority has documented experience on at least 2 building projects. ■ Create a written schedule of building operator trainings. ■ Retain a copy of the commissioning authority's design review, any designer responses to this review, and confirmation of the back-check. ■ Retain copies of the owner's project requirements, basis of design, commissioning specifications, commissioning report, and systems manual. 8. Examples There are no examples for this credit. 9. Exemplary Performance This credit is not eligible for exemplary performance under the Innovation in Design section. 10. Regional Variations Refer to the Regional Variations section in EA Prerequisite r. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Refer to the Operations and Maintenance section in EA Prerequisite t. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (httpWwww.usgbc.oreprojecttools) for additional resources and technical information. See the Resources section of EA Prerequisite t fora list of specific commissioning resources. 13. Definitions Basis of design includes design information necessary to accomplish the owner's project requirements, including system descriptions, indoor environmental quality criteria, design assumptions, and references to applicable codes, standards, regulations, and guidelines. Commissioning (Cx) is the process of verifying and documenting that the facility and all of its systems and assemblies are planned, designed, installed, tested, operated, and maintained to meet the owner's project requirements. The commissioning plan is a document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of resources, and documentation requirements of the commissioning process. The commissioning process is a systematic quality-focused effort to ensure that building systems are designed, specified, procured, installed, and functioning in accordance with the owner's intent. EA CI Credit 2 2C09 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 185 EFTA00281724 EA CI Credit 2 The process uses planning, documentation, and verification of testing to review and oversee the activities of both designer and constructor. The commissioning report documents the commissioning process, including a commissioning program overview, identification of the commissioning team, and description ofthe commissioning process activities. Commissioning specification is the contract language used in the construction documents to detail the objective, scope, and implementation of the construction and acceptance phases of the commissioning process as developed in the design phase of the commissioning plan. This allows the construction contractor to ensure that these activities are considered in proposals for the construction work. The commissioning team includes those people responsible for working together to carry out the commissioning process. An installation inspection examines components of the building systems to determine whether they are installed properly and ready for systems performance testing. Owner's project requirements is a written document that details the ideas, concepts, and criteria that are determined by the owner to be important to the success of the project. Systems performance testing is the process ofdeterrnining the ability of commissioned systems to perform in accordance with the owner's project requirements, the basis of design, and construction documents. Verification is the range of checks and tests carried out to determine whether components, subsystems, systems, and interfaces between systems operate in accordance with the contract documents. 186 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281725 MEASUREMENT AND VERIFICATION CI Credit Points EA Credit 3 2-5 points Intent To provide for the ongoing accountability and optimization of tenant energy and water consumption performance over time. Requirements CASE 1. Projects Less Than 75% of the Total Building Area Completer or more of the following: • Install submetering equipment to measure and record energy use within the tenant space. (z points) • Negotiate a lease whereby energy costs are paid by the tenant and not included in the base rent. C3 points) Develop and implement a measurement and verification (=) plan that incorporates the monitoring information from the above end uses and is consistent with Option B, C or D of the zoot International Performance Measurement & Verification Protocol (IPMVP) Volume I: Concepts and Options for Determining Energy and Water Savings. Provide a process for corrective action if the results of the plan indicate that energy savings are not being achieved. OR CASE 2. Projects 75% or More of the Total Building Area Install continuous metering equipment for the following end uses: (5 points) • Lighting systems and controls. • Constant and variable motor loads. • Variable frequencydrive operation. • Chiller efficiency at variable loads (kW/ton). • Cooling load. • Air and water economizer and heat recovery cycles. • Air distribution static pressures and ventilation air volumes. • Boiler efficiencies. • Building-related process energy systems and equipment. • Indoor water riser and outdoor irrigation systems. Develop and implement a measurement and verification (=) plan that incorporates the monitoring information from the above end uses and is consistent with Option B, C or D of the zoot International Performance Measurement & Verification Protocol (IPMVP) Volume I: Concepts and Options for Determining Energy and Water Savings. Provide a process for corrective action if the results of the plan indicate that energy savings are not being achieved. EA CREDIT 3 2009 EDITION LEER REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 187 EFTA00281726 CI Credit 3 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Measurement and verification of a building's ongoing energy use optimize performance and minimize the economic and environmental impacts associated with its energy-using systems. Economic Issues The benefits of optimal tenant space operation, especially in terms of energy performance, are substantial. The lifetime of many buildings is longer than so years, and so even minor energy savings are significant when considered in aggregate. Potential long-term benefits often go unrealized because of maintenance personnel changes, aging of building equipment, and changing utility rate structures. Therefore, it is important to institute procedures and continuous monitoring to achieve and maintain optimal performance over the lifetime of tenant spaces. The goal of activities is to provide building owners and tenants with the tools and data necessary to identify systems that are not functioning as expected and thus optimize system performance. Buildings that institute effective practices report energy savings that are, on average, greater than similar buildings that do not The added cost to institute a rigorous program when retrofitting buildings with energy and water equipment is typically a very small percentage of the total retrofit cost. These additional first costs can be recouped within a few months of operation because of energy and water utility savings as well as reduced operations and maintenance costs. 2. Related Credits Implementation of a measurement and verification plan can help ensure accountability and contribute to realizing optimal energy performance. If system performance is the basis for the funding of the project (such as with energy performance contracts), the international protocol (see the Referenced Standards section) will likely be used for verification. can also help establish a baseline for ongoing green power purchases. Refer to the following: ■ EA Prerequisite a: Minimum Energy Performance ■ EA Credit I: Optimize Energy Performance ■ EA Credit 4: Green Power Commissioning often employs measurementdevices andcapabilitiesto track building performance. These same devices can also serve as the basis for a measurement and verification plan, especially if ongoing commissioning programs have been adopted by the tenant. See the following prerequisite and credit: ■ EA Prerequisite 1: Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems ■ EA Credit a: Enhanced Commissioning 3. Summary of Referenced Standards International Performance Measurement and Verification Protocol Volume I, Concepts and Options for Determining Energy and Water Savings, effective 2001 httpWwww.evo-world.org The Efficiency Valuation Organization is a nonprofit organization whose vision is a global marketplace that properly values energy and water efficiency. IPMVPVolume I defines basic terminologyused in the measurementandverification field. It defines general procedures for achieving reliable and cost-effective determination of savings. Verification of actual savings is specific to each project. Volume I is written for general application in measuring and verifying the performance of projects that improve energy or water efficiency in buildings and industrial plants. 188 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281727 4. Implementation First consider how to approach the measurement and verification tasks. Consult IPMVP Volume I, Options B, C, and D, and consider the specific characteristics of the project to determine which approach is most suitable. All = plans compliant with Options B, C, or I) must meet the requirements identified in Table 1. Table 1. Measurement and Verification Plan Requirements Use standard IPMVP language and terminology. State which option and method from the document will be used. Indicate who will conduct the State assumptions about significant variables or unknowns. Create an accurate baseline using techniques appropriate to the project. Describe the method of ensuring accurate energy savings determination. Define a postinstallation inspection plan. Specify criteria for equipment metering. calibration, and measurement period. Define the level of accuracy to be achieved for all major components. Indicate quality assurance measures. Describe the contents of reports to be prepared. along with a schedule. The steps to create an- plan are as follows: STEP 1. List All Measures to be Monitored and Verified Summarize any whole building or system-specific energy or water conservation measures that will be implemented in the project. STEP 2. Define the Baseline First, develop and define a baseline case. This baseline can range from the stipulation of specific baseline equipment to specifying whole-building compliance with energy codes or standards. Then, use analytical tools to estimate the associated performance of the baseline. It is sometimes appropriate to develop a baseline by deleting specific energy conservation measures or features from the energy-efficient building. This approach can be particularly useful for whole-building = with computer simulation methods (Option C). For retrofits, the baseline is the existing systems in place. Incorporating assumptions about energy and water unit costs, weather, utility distribution, system schedule, occupancy, or other factors. STEP 3. Estimate Projected Savings Computer-aided tools are used to estimate performance of the final design, which is subtracted from the baseline performance to find projected savings. Estimate energy consumption and associated cost reductions to be achieved on a monthly, measure-specific basis. The estimation process should also identify and, if possible, quantify factors that could affect the performance of both the baseline case and the design case. STEP 4. Define the General Approach Identify the specific IPMVP option for the project. Option B, directed at end-use measures, prescribes the minimum level of precision. Option C addresses whole-building- methods. The trend toward holistic building design is making Option C more common, but the relative suitability of each approach depends on the following: ■ =objectives and requirements of any related performance contracts. EA CI Credit 3 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 189 EFTA00281728 EA CI Credit 3 ■ Energy conservation measures and the degree of interaction among them and with other systems. ■ Practicality of measuring and verifying the energy conservation measures. STEP 5. Prepare a Project-Specific Plan Developing an effective and efficient plan for new buildings tends to be more involved than for retrofit projects because performance strategies are usually more complex and the technical issues more challenging. Technical analyses performed in support of design decisions during the building design process provide a starting point in defining the objectives and approach. The major elements of energy analyses are also usually the important factors in =. Energy analyses and projections should therefore be well documented and organized. considerations should influence certain design decisions, such as instrumentation and building systems organization. Identify any applicable data sources (utility bills, control system points and trending periods, portable metering), the method of data collection (including equipment calibration requirements, other quality assurance practices) and the identity of monitoring personnel. STEP 6. Verify Installation and Commissioning of Energy Conservation Measures and Strategies Installation and proper operation are verified through site inspections and a review of reports, such as the commissioning report and fluid or air test and balance reports. Anydeviations should be noted and addressed. STEP 7. Determine Savings Under Actual Postinstallation Conditions Virtually all performance projections are predicated on certain assumptions regarding operational conditions, such as occupancy and weather, that affect the baseline and design estimations. Work with the facility manager to make accurate projections. Deviations from the operational assumptions must be tracked by an appropriate mechanism (e.g., site survey or short- and/or long-term metering), and the baseline and design projections must be modified accordingly. The mechanical engineer or responsible party should describe any engineering calculations and/or software tools that will be used to process the data and project savings. This includes any stipulated variables or values to be used in the calculations, as well as baseline adjustment factors and regression analysis tools. STEP 8. Re-evaluate at Appropriate Intervals Ongoing performance of energy conservation measures and strategies and the associated savings mustbe reevaluated andverified at intervals so that significant deviations from projected performance can be corrected. The timeframe should be specified by the plan and related performance contract requirements. It is important to link the contractor's final paymentstodocumented= system performance. Make sure that the contractor provides all documentation in the final report. The contractor must also provide an ongoing system maintenance and operating plan in the building operations and maintenance manuals. STEP 9. Corrective Action Process The plan must specify a process for corrective action if the results of the plan indicate that energy savings are not being achieved. 190 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITH. EFTA00281729 CASE 1. Projects Less Than 75% of Total Building Area The intent is to encourage efficient operation of leased spaces through measurement and financial responsibility for the energy being used. Submetering Submetering measures a mechanical end use within a building. In a commercial office building that has a master electric meter, submeters enable individual tenant systems to know their actual consumption. For electrical service, the equipment and installation of submeters is not a major expense. In tests of commercial and residential situations, paying based on submetered use has resulted in conservation. The electricity used for lighting, plug loads, and HVAC equipment may be measured on a single meter and reported together. Natural gas, which may be used for both space heating and service water heating, can also be submetered. Fuel oil, district or distributed energy sources, steam, chilled water, other fuels, and process water must be submetered. Water used for the convenience of occupants does not need to be submetered. This includes restrooms, changing facilities, water fountains, break rooms, and janitorial uses (see Table a). Table 2. Submetering Requirements for Projects Less Than 75% of Total Building Area Functice Typical Energy Sources Submetering Requirements Lighting Electric Yes Plug loads Electric Yes Heating Fuels Electric Steam Hot Water Submetering is required unless included in prorated building payment for a central plant serving multiple Cooling tenants. Electric Fuels Chilled Water Service water Water No Process uses Water Electric Fuels Yes Payment Projects can qualify for points under this credit by negotiating a lease whereby energy costs are paid by the tenant and not included in the base rent. The lease cannot be a "gross" lease, in which 1 payment covers everything. The most direct way to satisfy both requirements for the credit is separate metering and payments to the utility. The tenant's payment must be based on actual consumption, even if costs have been prorated by the size of the tenant space or occupancy count The typical approach, in which the landlord prorates the utilities based on the tenant's portion of the total leasable area, meets the credit requirement. Flat rates set by the landlord at the time of lease negotiation do not satisfy the requirement. The tenant's payments must be a proration of the true quantities used, and the landlord needs to give the tenant this information and keep a written record. Periodic adjustments to tenant payments and rates are acceptable as long as the adjustments reflect true consumption. CASE 2. Projects 75% or More of Total Building Area This credit requires development and implementation of a measurement and verification EA CI Credit 3 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 191 EFTA00281730 EA CI Credit 3 plan that incorporates the monitoring information from various end uses and is consistent with Option B, C, or D of IPMVP Volume I, Concepts and Options for Determining Energy and Water Saving, zoos. For projects pursuing Case a, the following end uses must be monitored: ■ Lighting systems and controls. ■ Constant and variable motor loads. ■ Variable frequency drive operation. ■ Chiller efficiency at variable loads (kWIton). ■ Cooling load. ■ Air and water economizer and heat recovery cycles. ■ Air distribution static pressures and ventilation air volumes. ■ Boiler efficiencies. ■ Building-related process energy systems and equipment. s Indoor water riser and outdoor irrigation system. The referenced standard describes a methodologyto ensure that the design team consistently addresses the basic aspects of energy and water efficiency performance: ■ Accurate cataloging of baseline conditions. ■ Verification of the complete installation and proper operation of new equipment and systems specified in the contract documents. ■ Confirmation of the quantity of energy and water savings, as well as energy and water cost savings, that occur during the period of analysis. The 3 options that projects can use to satisfy the credit requirements are listed in Table 3, in order of increasing rigor. The appropriate level for a particular project depends on such project specifics as scope, the building owner's interest in M, and contractual relationships of the design team. IPMVP's Option A does not satisfy the credit. Options B, C, and D satisfy the credit requirements when implemented correctly. Compliance with the credit requirements can be demonstrated through engineering calculations, operational estimates, and utility meter billing analysis, or through more rigorous statistical sampling, metering and monitoring, and computer simulations. All the options in the referenced standard require the design team to specify equipment for installation in the building systems to allow for comparison, management, and optimization of actual versus estimated energy and water performance. The mechanical engineer in particular should take advantage of the building automation systems to perform - functions where applicable. Elements of the plan that are required to comply with the requirements of this credit are listed in Tablet. Retrofits Use of Option B in retrofits is appropriate when the end-use capacity, demand, or power level of the baseline can be measured and the energy or water consumption of the equipment or subsystem will be measured over time. This option can involve continuous measurement of energy or water use (both before and after the retrofit for the specific equipment), or it can involve measurements for a limited period of 192 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281731 time necessary to determine the retrofit savings. Portable monitoring equipment maybe installed for a period of time or continuously to measure in situ, baseline, and postinstallation consumption. Periodic inspection of the equipment is recommended. Energy or water consumption is then calculated by developing statistical models of the end-use capacity. Table 3. Options for New and Renovation Construction Projects M & V Option Option Description Savings Calculations Cost S Savings are determined after project completion by short-term or continuous measurements taken throughout term of the contract at the device or system level. Both performance and operations factors are monitored. Engineering calculations using metered data. Typically 3-10% of project construction cost. dependent on number and type of systems measured an the term of analysisfmetering C After project completion, savings are determined at "whole-building" or facility level using current-yew and historical utility meter (gas or electricity) or submeter data. Analysis of utility meter (or submeter) data using techniques from simple comparison with multivariate (hourly or monthly) regression analysis. Typically 1-10% of project construction cost. dependent on number and complexity of parameters in analysis D Savings are determined through simulation of facility components ander the whole facility. Calibrate energy simulation and modeling; calibrated with hourly or monthly utility billing data and/or end-use metering. Typically 3-10% of project construction cost. dependent on number and complexity of systems evaluated. 5. Timeline and Team The owner should decide whether to pursue = as early as possible in the project. Successful implementation of = requires careful coordination between design team members (architect, mechanical engineer,electrical engineer,and lightingdesigner, amongothers) and is greatly assisted by early identification of the systems that will be monitored so that appropriate metering equipment can be included in the initial designs and does not have to be added in later, at greater cost. During the design phase, the project team should incorporate the necessary metering equipment into their designs. Also at this time, the- plan should developed and, at a minimum, identify the parry or patties responsible for implementation. 6. Calculations I PMVP, Volume I, provides fundamental calculation formulas as well as quantitative guidelines for error estimation and tolerance for various- options. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. • Develop an IPMVP-compliant measurement and verification plan, conforming to Option B, C, or D. EA CI Credit 3 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 193 EFTA00281732 EA CI Credit 3 • For projects with an area less than 75% of the total building area, assemble documentation (e.g., lease agreements, utility bills) demonstrating that the tenant energy costs are paid by the tenant. • Summarize the installed monitoring systems in the tenant space, demonstrating that, at a minimum, the required systems are monitored. 8. Examples There are no examples for this credit. 9. Exemplary Performance This credit is not eligible for exemplary performance under the Innovation in Design section. 10. Regional Variations There are no regional variations in the- methods, but the type of energy conservation measures employed does depend on climate. For example, optimization of heating systems optimization will be more critical in northern regions, and optimization of air-conditioning systems will be more important in the South.VariousMtechniques maybecome more popular in agiven region because of the typical projects employing them. However, IPMVP is based on industry best practices, and the fundamentals of apply to all projects. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Consider submetering major energy end uses in tenant spaces to help operators identify any deviations from expected consumption. Ensure that building operators are given the original and recalibrated energy use models so that they can identify unusual or unexpected consumption patterns. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (httpWwww.usgbc.org(p_rojecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites ENERGY STAR* httpq ENERGYSTARisagovemment-industrypartnershipmanagedbytheU.S.EnvironmentalProtection Agency and the U.S. Department of Energy. The program's website offers energy management strategies, benchmarking software tools for buildings, product procurement guidelines, and lists of ENERGY STAR-qualified products and buildings. International Performance Measurement and Verification Protocol httpWwww.evo-world.org The IPMVP presents internationally developed best-practice techniques for verifying results of energy efficiency, water efficiency, and renewable energy projects in commercial and industrial facilities. Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory, Measurement and Verification Documents httpattRuateam.lbl.govfmv This website provides list of resources ranging from implementation guidelines to hands-on checklists. 194 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281733 13. Definitions Energy conservation measures are installations or modifications of equipment or systems intended to reduce energy use and costs. Submetering is used to determine the proportion of energy use within a building attributable to specific end uses or subsystems (e.g., the heating subsystem of an HVAC system). EA CI Credit 3 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 195 EFTA00281734 196 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281735 GREEN POWER Credit EA Credit 4 Points 5 points Intent To encourage the development and use of grid-source, renewable energy technologies on a net zero pollution basis. Requirements OPTION 1 Engage in at least a 2.-year renewable energy contract to provide at least 50%ofthe building's electricityfrom renewable sources,asdefinedbytheCenterforResourceSolutions'Green-e energy product certification requirements. MI purchases of green power must be based on the quantity of energy consumed, not the cost, as determined by the annual electricity consumption results of EA Credit t, Optimize Energy Performance. OR OPTION 2 Engage in at least a 2-year renewable energy contract to purchase at least 8 kilowatt hours per square foot per year from renewable electricity sources as defined by the Center for Resource Solutions (CRS) Green-e Energy's product certification requirements. MI purchases of green power must be based on the quantity of energy consumed, not the cost. EA CREDIT 4 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 197 EFTA00281736 CI Credit 4 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Energy production from traditional sources (such as coal, natural gas, and other fossil fuels) is a significant contributor to air pollution in the United States, releasing such pollutants as sulfur dioxide, nitrogen oxide, and carbon dioxide. These pollutants are primary contributors to acid rain, smog,and climate change.Along with other associated pollutants, theyhave widespread and adverse effects on human health, especially respiratory health. Green electricity products reduce the air pollution impacts of electricity generation by relying on renewable energy sources such as solar, water, wind, biomass, and geothermal sources. In addition, the use of ecologically responsive energy sources avoids reliance on nuclear power and largescale hydropower, which have their own drawbacks—security and environmental issues related to nuclear waste reprocessing, transportation, and storage, and alteration of aquatic habitats in the case of hydroelectric dams. Deregulated energy markets have enabled hydroelectric generators to market their electricity in areas unaffected by the dams' regional impacts. The overall environmental benefit of renewable energy depends on the source of energy and the process by which it is extracted. For example, using biomass can reduce the estimated 136 million tons of woody construction, demolition, and land clearing waste sent annually to landfills,, ` but if these wastes are not processed properly, their combustion could result in harmful air quality. Although green electricity is not entirely benign, it significantly lessens the negative environmental impacts of power generation. Using renewable energy generated either on-site or off-site is an excellent way for owners to reduce the negative environmental impacts on air and water associated with a building's energy requirements. While acknowledging the difficulty of identifying the exact source of green energy in every region, this credit requires that the renewable energy used for the building and its site be certified as green by the Green-e program or its equivalent. The program was established by the Center for Resource Solutions to promote green electricity and provide consumers with a rigorous and nationally recognized method to identifygreen electricity products. Economic Issues Green power products may cost somewhat more than conventional energy products but are derived, in part, from renewable energy sources with stable energy costs. As the green power market matures and environmental costs are factored into the pricing of conventional fuels, renewable energy is expected to become less expensive. Typically, programs are structured such that utility customers can choose the portion of their electricity delivered from renewable sources. In these cases, a premium maybe added to the monthlyutility bill. Although the source of the green power is different from traditional sources, it reaches end users via the established grid distribution system, and thus project teams can implement green power programs, even in the postdesign phase, with very few design changes and, consequently, fewer maintenance costs. Find out whether the local government sponsors any incentive program or tax benefit for using renewable energy, particularly for the type of renewable energy planned for a project. The Database for State Incentives for Renewables and Efficiency (DSIRE: http:fiwww.dsireusa.orga is good source of information on federal and state programs supporting the use of renewable energy. 2. Related Credits Replacing conventional energy sources with renewable energy sources works synergistically with efforts to reduce energy costs. Refer to the following credit: ■ EA Credit I: Optimize Energy Performance 198 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281737 3. Summary of Referenced Standards Center for Resource Solutions, Green-e Renewable Electricity Certification Program http://ww.green-e.org (888) 6M-7336 Green-e Energy is a voluntary certification and verification program for renewable energy products. Green-e certifies products that meet environmental and consumer protection standards developed in conjunction with environmental, energy, and policy organizations. Sellers of Green-e-certified energy must disclose clear and useful information to customers. Three types of renewable energy options are eligible for Green-e certification: renewable energy certificates, utility green-pricing programs, and competitive electricity products. The Green-e standard that went into effect on January 1, 2007, supersedes previous regional and product-specific criteria. Products exhibiting the Green-e logo are greener and cleaner than the average retail electricity product sold in that particular region. To be eligible for the Green-e logo, companies must meet certain criteria. The first criterion is the inclusion of qualified sources of renewable energy content such as solar electric, wind, geothermal, biomass, and small or certified low-impact hydro facilities. Other criteria are the inclusion of new renewable energy content (to support new generation capacity); compliance with emissions regulations for the nonrenewable portion of the energy product; and the absence of nuclear power. Companies must also meet other criteria regarding renewable portfolio standards. Criteria are often specific to a state or region of the United States. Refer to the standard for more details. 4. Implementation Renewable energy calculated for this credit must be Green-e certified or equivalent. This means that eligible renewable energy sources must meet the requirements detailed in the current version of the Green-e standard and come from a supplier that has undergone an independent, third-party verification that the standard has been met. The third-partyverification process must be as rigorous as that used in the Green-e certification process, and it must be performed annually. There are 3 approaches for achieving this credit. 1. In a state with an open electricity market, tenants may be able to select a Green-e-certified power provider. Investigate green power and power markets licensed to provide power in the state and secure a 2-year contract for the credit-required green power purchase from a Greene-certified provider. 2. In a state with a closed electricity market, the governing utility company may have a Green-eaccredited utility program. In this case, enroll the project in the renewable power program for the credit required green power purchase. Typically, programs are structured such that utility customers can choose how much oftheir electricity will be delivered from renewable sources; a premium may be added to the monthly utility bill. Commit to a 2-year enrollment period or use other strategies to accumulate 2 years' worth of renewable energy for the desired portion of total annual energy use. If the utility does not offer 2-year enrollment options, submit a letter of commitment to stay enrolled in the program for the required period. 3. If Green-e-certified power cannot be purchased through a local utility, the tenant and project team can purchase Green-e-accredited renewable energy certificates (RECs). In this case, purchase a quantity of RECs equal to the credit required green power purchase over a 2-year period, either all at once or in contracted installments. These RECs, or "green-tags," compensate Green-e generators for the premium of production over the market rate they sell to the grid. Purchasing Green-e RECs will not affect the cost or procurement of the electricity from the local electrical utility. EA CI Credit 4 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 199 EFTA00281738 EA CI Credit 4 Establishing Green-e Equivalency If renewable energy is not Green-e certified, establish that it is equivalent for the 2 major criteria for Green-e certification: (t) the energy source meets the requirements for renewable resources detailed in the current version of the Green-e standard, and (2) the renewable energy supplier has undergone an independent, third-party verification that the standard has been met. The current version of the standard is available on the Green-e website (http_Wwww.green-e.org). The thirdparty verification process must be as rigorous as that used in the Green-e certification process, and it must be performed annually. Retention of Renewable Energy Environmental Attributes For renewable energy coming from both on-site and off-site sources, the associated environmental attributes must be retained or retired; they cannot be sold. Centralized Approach (When Tenant Purchases Electricity from Building Owner) A campus facility that produces renewable power to Green-e standards may supply other buildings on the same or a different campus through a private agreement. Renewable power maybe purchased or produced on a centralized basis, and credit can be allocated to a specific project. For example, if RECs are purchased at the office park level, the owner of the RECs can apportion any part of that purchase to the project interior. To prevent double-counting, this same renewable energy must be retained on behalf of the project currently pursuing LEED certification. 5. Timeline and Team Green power can be incorporated into the project at any time prior to submission for certification review. Once the annual energy use of the project is known (based on actual consumption), has been estimated (through tenant space energy simulation), or calculated using the default values, purchase green power in the qualifying amounts. 6. Calculations Use t of 3 methods to calculate the amount of electrical energy that must be obtained from qualifying providers to achieve compliance with this credit. 1. Design Energy Cost The first method is based on the design case annual electricity consumption, which the project team may have calculated as part of compliance with EA Credit t.3. See EA Credit 1.3 for information regarding calculation of the design energy cost. Sample Calculation Based on Design Energy Cost The annual electricity consumption of a project has been determined to be 100,000 kWh. The minimum green power purchase (measured in kWh) is calculated in Equation 1. Equation 1. Required Green Power Quantity Project = ' 100.000 kWh Required Required 100,000 Electricity X TThreshold X DuDuration CkWhtyr) X 50% X 2 yrs = Minimum Green Consumption Power Purchase 2. Actual Consumption Project teams with a record of a full year's electricity consumption may use so% of the actual electricity use (in kWh) from the utility bills. If the separation of regulated and nonregulated electricity loads is impractical or impossible, use the default electricity consumption calculation methodology, described below. 200 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281739 3. Default Electricity Consumption If an energy model was not performed in EA Credit 1, use 8 kilowatt-hours per square foot per year times the area of the project. In the example, 16 kilowatt-hours per square foot would have to be purchased over a years. This default is based on Department of Energy's Commercial Buildings Energy Consumption Survey data. Sample Calculation Based on Default Electricity Consumption The annual electricity consumption of a project area is 10,000 square feet. The minimum green power purchase is calculated in Equation 2. Equation 2. Green Power Amount Using Default Electricity Consumption 160,000 kWh Project Required Required 8 (kWh/ X X = 10,000 (st) X X 2 yrs = Minimum Green Area Threshold Duration sf/yr) Power Purchase 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. • Maintain contractual documentation of the purchase of Green-e (or equivalent) certified renewable energy. • If the certified renewable energy is purchased for the project by others, maintain documentation indicating that the renewable energy was retained on behalf of the project. 8. Examples The project area is the third floor of a too,000-square-foot commercial office building and measures 20,000 square feet. The tenant space is served by a single, common HVAC system supplying the entire building, certified LEED for Core & Shell Gold, and the design team modeled energy use with a DOE-2. simulation. The owner also has installed an on-site renewable energy source that will reduce the minimum amount of Green-e power that must be purchased. The values in Table t are from the modeling. Table 1. Regulated Electrical Use in 100,000 sf Modeled Building Segment Regulated Electrical End Uses Design Energy Not Costs (kWh) Lighting 160.200 Space Cooling 240,300 Fans/Pumps 120,150 Other 'regulated' electrical compoeneMs 20,000 (DEC) 540,650 Renewable Energy Equivalent - 65.641 Net Regulated Electrical Useage (DEC') 475,009 EA CI Credit 4 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 201 EFTA00281740 EA CI Credit 4 Equation 1: Determination of Annual Green Power Contract Amount Using Design Energy Cost Annual Green Power Contract = 50% x Tenant Area ) X DEC• Building Area = 50% x 20.000 ft, ) X 475.009 kWh 100000 ft' Annual Green Power Contract = 47.501 kWh Equation 2: Determination of Annual Green Power Contract Amount Using Office Occupancy Default Annual Green Power Contract = Tenant Area X 8 kWh/yr-ft, = 20,000 ft' X 8 kWh/yr-ft, Annual Green Power Contract = 160,000 kWh 9. Exemplary Performance Project teams may earn an Innovation in Design point for exemplary performance by meeting t00% of the calculated annual use (or a default of 16 kWh per square foot per year) through contracted green power. 10. Regional Variations An off-site energy source that is close to the building site is likely to be more cost-effective because its proximity avoids losses in energy over the grid. Information on availability ofgreen power in each state is available at U.S. Department of Energy's Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy website. Although energy efficiency is universally important, it is crucial in regions where coal is used to generate electricity. It is also particularly important to reduce peak energy use because units brought online to meet peak demand tend to be the greatest contributors to greenhouse gas emissions. Replacing fossil fuel with renewable energy for generating electricity during peak periods delivers the greatest benefits in reducing the marginal emissions. Currently, some states do not subsidize renewable energy; others do not offer tax rebates for investing in energy efficiency. However, these policies may change as states adopt programs and new measures are put into place, making research to determine the regional importance of credits in the context of local policy very complex. The fact that green power can be sourced from a region where incentives are provided but used in a region where it is not supported by local policy makes the issue even more complicated. The Database for State Incentives for Renewables and Efficiency (DSIRE: http://www.dsireusa.org0 is a good source of information on federal and state programs supporting the use of renewable energy. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations To facilitate the continued purchase of green power beyond the 2.-year contract period,give building operators the details of the original green power contract. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http://www.usgbc.org(projecttoob) for additional resources and technical information. 202 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281741 Websites Center for Resource Solutions, Green-e Program http://www.green-e.org See the Referenced Standards section for more information. North Carolina Solar Center, Database of State Incentives for Renewable Energy http://wmv.dsireusa.org This database collects information on state financial and regulatory incentives (e.g., tax credits, grants, and special utility rates) to promote the application of renewable energy technologies. The database details the incentives on a state-by-state basis. Union of Concerned Scientists, Clean Energy http:Uwww.ucsusa.orgiclean_energy This independent nonprofit analyzes and advocates energy solutions that are environmentally and economically sustainable . The site provides news and information on research and public policy. U.S. Department of Energy, Green Power Network http://wneere.enerzyguyigreenpower The Green Power Network provides news and information on green power markets and related activities.lt contains up-to-date information on green powerproviders,productofferings,consumer issues, and in-depth analyses of issues and policies affecting green power markets. The website is maintained by the National Renewable Energy Laboratory for the Department of Energy. U.S. Department of Energy, Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy—Green Power http://appq.eere.energy.govigreenpoweribuyingibuying_powershtml This website offers information on the availability of green power in the United States in each state. The results includegreenutilitypricingprograms,retailgreen power productsoffered incompetitive electricity markets, and renewable energy certificate products sold separately from electricity. U.S. EPA, Green Power Partnership http://www.e goapower EPA's Green Power Partnership provides assistance and recognition to organizations that demonstrate environmental leadership by choosing green power. It includes a buyers guide with lists of providers of green power in each state. 13. Definitions Biofuel-based systems are power systems that run on renewable fuels derived from organic materials, such as wood by-products and agricultural waste. Examples of biofuels include untreated wood waste, agricultural crops and residues, animal waste, other organic waste, and landfill gas. Biomass is plant material from trees, grasses, or crops that can be converted to heat energy to produce electricity. Geothermal energy is electricity generated by converting hot water or steam from within the earth into electrical power. Geothermal heating systems use pipes to transfer heat from underground steam or hot water for heating, cooling, and hot water. The system retrieves heat during cool months and returns heat in summer months. Green power is synonymous with renewable energy. Hydropower is electricity produced from the downhill flow of water from rivers or lakes. Photovoltaic (PV) energy is electricity from photovoltaic cells that convert the energy in sunlight into electricity. EA CI Credit 4 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 203 EFTA00281742 EA CI Credit 4 Renewable energy comes from sources that are not depleted by use. Examples include energy from the sun, wind, and small (low-impact) hydropower, plus geothermal energy and wave and tidal systems. Ways to capture energy from the sun include photovoltaic, solar thermal, and bioenergy systems based on wood waste, agricultural crops or residue, animal and other organic waste, or landfill gas. Renewable energy certificates (RECs) are tradable commodities representing proof that a unit of electricity was generated from a renewable energy resource. RECs are sold separately from electricity itself and thus allow the purchase of green power by a user of conventionally generated electricity. Solar thermal systems collect or absorb sunlight via solar collectors to heat water that is then circulated to the building's hot water tank. Solar thermal systems can be used to warm swimming pools or heat water for residential and commercial use. Wave and tidal power systems capture energy from waves and the diurnal flux of tidal power, respectively. The captured energy is commonly used for desalination,water pumping, and electricity generation. Wind energy is electricity generated by wind turbines. Endnotes .rtment of Energy, Office of Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy. "Table 1.1.1 U.S. 1:.c,iklential and Commercial Buildings Total Primary Energy Consumption (Quadrillion Btu and Percent of Total), 2006." 2008 Buildings Energy Data Book. 2008. http://buildingsdatabook.eren. doe.gov(accessed November 20(38). Ibid. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. "Clean Energy: Air Emissions." http://www.epa.gov/ cleanenergyienergy-and-youfaffectiair-emissions.html (accessed November2008). 4 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Air and Radiation. "Six Common Air Pollutants: 502: What is it? Where does it come from?". http://www.epa.goviairfurbanairiso2/whati.html (accessed November 2008). 5 Chen, Allan. "New Commercial Buildings Energy Efficiency Program Launched." Berkeley Lab, (August 24, 2000). http://www.lbl.goviScience-Articles/Archive/combldg-energy.html. 6 BOMA International. "BEEP'S Quick Facts." BOMA Energy Efficiency Program. http://www.boma. orefrainingAndEducation/BEEP/ (accessed November 2008). Architecture 2030. "The Building Sector: A Hidden Culprit." http://wmv.architecture2030.orgi current_situationibuilding sector.html (accessed November 2008). U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, "ENERGY STAR'' Home Improvement Tips." http://www. energystargovfindex.cfin?c=home_improvementhi_tips (accessed November 2008). 9 Puget Sound Energy. Efficiency Programs and Rebates. Retrieved May 2008. solutionsiforbusiness/pageskustomGrants.aspx?tab=18<chapter=2. ,c, Architecture 2030. "The Building Sector: A Hidden Culprit." http://wmv.architecture2030.orgi current situationlbuilding sector.html (accessed November2008). U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. "Facts About Energy Use in Commercial and Industrial Facilities." http://wwsv.energystar.govjindex.cfm?c=leam_more.fast_facts (accessed November 2008). Ibid. '3 ENERGY STAR Factoid Worksheet for 2008. 204 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281743 It 'S U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. "ENERGY STAR Compact Fluorescent Light Bulbs." http://www.energarstar.gov/index.cfm?c=cfls.pr cfis (accessed November 2008). Energy Information Administration. 2003. "2003 CBECS Detailed Tables." http:J/www. eia.doe.gov/emeukbecskbecs2003/detailed_tables 2003/detailed tables 2003. html?featureclicked=i8c#enduseo3 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. "ENERGY STAR Office Equipment." http://www. enerastar.gov/index.cfm?c=ofc equip.pr office equipment 2007 CCAP update for Factoid Workbook and ENERGY STAR Factoid Worksheet for 2008. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Solid Waste. "Wastes—Resource Conservation—Reduce, Reuse, Recycle—Construction and Demolition Materials." http:/Jwww. epa.gov/osw/conserve/nr/imr/cdm/ (accessed November 13, 2008). EA 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 205 EFTA00281744 206 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281745 NEES5 f\RIE RESORCES Overview Buildingoperationsgenerate a large amount ofwasteon adailybasis.Meetingthe LEED Materialsand Resources (MR) credits can reduce the quantity ofwaste while improving the building environment through the use of sustainable materials. The credits in this section focus on 2 main issues: the environmental impact of materials brought into the project building, and the minimization of landfill and incinerator disposal for materials that leave the project building. This credit category addresses the environmental concerns related to materials selection, waste disposal, and waste reduction. The Commercial Interiors Materials and Resources prerequisites and credits promote the following measures: Selecting Sustainable Materials Materials selection plays a significantrolein sustainablebuildingdesignandconstruction. Duringthe life cycle of a material, its extraction, processing, transportation, use, and disposal can have negative environmental consequences, polluting water and air, destroying native habitats, and depleting natural resources. Environmentally responsible materials selection can significantly reduce these impacts. Project teams should consider the relative environmental, social, and health benefits of the available choices when specifying materials and furniture. For example, the purchase of products containing recycled content expands markets for recycled materials, slows the consumption of raw materials, and reduces the amount of waste entering landfills. When selecting materials, evaluate new and different sources. Salvaged materials can be substituted for new materials, saving costs and adding character to the building. Recycled-content materials reuse waste products that would otherwise be deposited in landfills. Using local materials supports the local economy while reducing transportation costs and emissions. The use of rapidly renewable materials minimizes natural resource consumption. Using third-party-certified wood improves the stewardship of forests and related ecosystems. Because materials, particularly furniture and furnishings, are such a major portion of a commercial interior project, there is considerable opportunity to make a positive impact. Practicing Waste Reduction In 2006, U.S. residents, businesses, and institutions produced more than 251 million tons of solid waste, a 65% increase since 1980. That amount is roughly equivalent to 4.6 pounds per person per day, a 2596 increase since 1980.' A long-term lease reduces redundant development and the associated environmental impact of producing and delivering new materials. Construction waste disposal through landfilling or incineration contributes significantly to the negative environmental impacts of a build-out. Construction and demolition wastes constitute about 40% of the total solid waste stream in the United States. In its solid waste management hierarchy, the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ranks source reduction, reuse, and recycling as the 3 preferred strategies for reducing waste.' Source reduction appears at the top of EPA's hierarchy because it reduces environmental impacts throughout the material's life cycle, from the supply chain and use to recycling and waste disposal. Reuse of materials is ranked second because the reused materials are diverted from the waste stream and substitute for other materials with greater environmental impacts. Recycling does not have all the same benefits as source reduction and reuse, but it diverts waste from landfills and incinerators, and reduces the need for virgin materials. MR OVERVIEW 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 207 EFTA00281746 MR OVERVIEW Reducing the amount of waste disposed in landfills or incinerators is an important component of a sustainable construction waste management plan. A plan for managing construction waste requires contractors to establish a system for tracking waste generation and disposal during construction. Reusing components from existing buildings, versus building new interior components, is one of the most effective strategies for minimizing environmental damage. When rehabilitating components from existing buildings is included in the strategy, waste can be reduced and diverted from landfills. An effective way to use salvaged interior components is to specify them in the construction documents. Recycling construction, demolition, and land-clearing debris reduces demand for virgin resources. Recycling this material has the potential to reduce the environmental and health burdens associated with resource extraction, processing, and transportation. Debris recycling also reduces dependence on landfills, which may contaminate groundwater and encroach upon valuable open space. In addition, it lessens disposal in incinerators, which may contaminate groundwater and pollute the air. Effective construction waste management can extend the life of odsting landfills, which in turn reduces the need to expand or develop new landfill sites. Many public and private waste management operations have reduced construction debris volumes through recycling. Recovery typically begins on the job site, with separation of debris into bins or disposal areas. Some regions have access to mixed-waste processing facilities. EPA reports that in 2007 in the United States,there were 34 mixed-waste processing facilities handling about 43 millions tons of waste per days Over the past few decades, recycling has increased in the United States. In 1960, only 64% of U.S. waste was recycled. By 2006, the amount had climbed to 32.5%4Curbside recycling is now standard in many communities, and recycling facilities are available throughout the nation. In addition, many businesses, nonprofit organizations, and manufacturers have successful recycling programs that divert a wide range of materials from the waste stream. Recycling diverts items from the waste stream and provides materials for new products that would othenvise be manufactured from virgin materials. It avoids the extraction of raw materials and preserves landfill space. Recycling certain products, such as batteries and fluorescent lights, prevents toxic materials from polluting the air and groundwater. Recycling and reuse can also save money. Effective waste management benefits organizations by reducing the cost ofwaste disposal and generating revenue from recycling or resale proceeds. Division 12, Furniture Regardless of who specifies or provides them, all furniture and furnishings in the project should be included in calculations for LEED for Commercial Interiors. Unlike in other LEED rating systems, project teams do not have the option to exclude certain materials (exception: MR Credit 3.0. For Materials and Resources credits, filmiture and furnishings are defined as those materials included in CSI MasterFormat" Division 12. SeeTable 1 for the specific creditswhere they are included. Because the value of these materials can be significant,the design and construction team should work closely with the facility manager, interior designer, furniture dealership, and installers from the outset. No Default Value Because of the variability of project scopes, the LEED for Commercial Interiors Rating System does not have an automatic default relationship between materials costs and the total construction cost. 208 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281747 Summary A sustainable commercial interiors project requires strategies for construction, materials selection, MR OVERVIEW and waste management. The Materials and Resources prerequisites and credits set the foundation for effective materials selection strategies. Construction waste management, in conjunction with materials selection that reduces waste and specifies less harmful materials and furniture, can effectively reduce a building's overall impact on the environment. Credit Turning Design team members make most ofthe decisions needed to successfullyearn LEED for Commercial Interiors credits. Contractors and suppliers should participate in determining the actual values and ensuring compliance. Only in t credit, MR Credit t.t, Tenant Space—Long-Term Commitment, has the decision already been made before the start of the design. The configuration of the space selected has a major influenceonearningMRCredits 1.2: Building Reuse—Maintainaor60%of InteriorNonstructural Components. To improve the possibilities for earning credits, select a space that closely matches the design intent with minimal construction. Table 1. Units of Measurement for Materials and Resources Credits Material MRc1.2 Building Reuse MRc2 Construction Waste Management' MRc3.1 Material Reuse MRc3.2 Material Reuse— Furniture MRc4 Recycled Content MRc5 Regional Materials MRc5 Extracted and Manufactured Regionally MRc6 Rapidly Renewable Materials MRc7 Certified Wood Mechanical X Either Pounds or Cubic Feet but Conisistent Throughout Replacement Value ($) X Cost New ($) - Excludes Salvaged and Refurbished Materials counted in MRc3 Cost New IS) x Cost New IS) x Cost New ($) x Cost New ($) - Identify all wool-based materials, then exclude salvaged and refurbished material and postconsumer recycled wood fiber or portion of any products Electrical X X Ceiling SF X Floors SF X Walls SF X Doors SF X Case Goods SF X Windows SF X All Other Construction X X Materials Furniture and Furnishings X Rackeemon (CSI Division nu Yalta Ill I Do not include hazardous waste and excavated soil in PARc2 calculations. 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 209 EFTA00281748 MR OVERVIEW Calculating Materials Costs to Achieve MR Credits Project teams are encouraged to determine the actual total materials cost (excluding labor and equipment) from Construction Specification Institute (CSI) MasterFormar Divisions 3-10, 31 (section 31.60.00 Foundations) and 32 (sections 32.10.00 Paving, 32.30.00 Site Improvements, and 32.90.00 Planting). Tablet contains guidance regarding specification sections included in the cost calculation. CREDIT TITLE MR Prerequisite 1 MR Credit 1.1 MR Credit 1.2 MR Credit 2 MR Credit 3.1 MR Credit 3.2 MR Credit 4 MR Credit 5 MR Credit 6 MR Credit 7 Storage and Collection of Recyclables Tenant Space—Long•Term Commitment Building Reuse—Maintain Interior Nonstructural Components Construction Waste Management Materials Reuse Materials Reuse—Furniture and Furnishings Recycled Content Regional Materials Rapidly Renewable Materials Certified Wood 210 LLEU REF LRENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281749 STORAGE AND COLLECTION OF RECYCLABLES Prerequisite MR Prerequisite 1 Points Required Intent To facilitate the reduction of waste generated by building occupants that is hauled to and disposed of in landfills. Requirements Provide an easily accessible dedicated area or areas for the collection and storage of materials for recycling for the tenant space. Materials must include at a minimum paper, corrugated cardboard, glass, plastics, and metals. MR PREREQUISITE 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 211 EFTA00281750 MR CI Prerequisite 1 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues By creating convenient recycling opportunities for all building occupants, a significant portion of the solid waste stream can be diverted from landfills. Recycling of paper, metals, glass, cardboard, and plastics reduces the need to extract virgin natural resources. For example, recycling 1 ton of paper prevents the processing of 17 trees and saves 3 cubic yards of landfill space.5 Recycled aluminum requires only 5% of the energy required to produce virgin aluminum from bauxite, its raw material form.' Diverting waste from landfills can help minimize land, water, and air pollution. An occupant education program that addresses the environmental and financial benefits of recycling can encourage occupants to participate in preserving the environment. Economic Issues Recycling infrastructure, such as storage areas and bins, may add to project costs and take up floor area needed for other purposes. However, recycling offers significant savings on landfill disposal costs or tipping fees. In larger projects, processing equipment (can crushers, cardboard balers) can minimize the space required for recycling activities. Some recyclables can generate revenue that offsets collection and processing costs. Many communities sponsor and promote recycling programs to reduce the amount of waste sent to landfills. Community recycling efforts return valuable resources to local production processes and may spur increases in employment in the recycling industry. Community-wide participation results in higher recycling rates and, in turn, more stable markets for recycled materials. 2. Related Credits Selecting a location within a LEED-certified building can help projects achieve certification under LEED for Commercial Interiors because a LEED-certified building will have committed to establishing a building recycling program and centralized collection and storage areas. Project teams seeking an Innovation in Design credit for educational outreach can create signage and displays to inform building occupants and visitors about on-site recycling. 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this prerequisite. 4. Implementation When selecting a building, determine what recycling and reuse services are available in the region. Identify local waste handlers to determine the extent of services available; often these handlers will help set up the recycling program. The Resources section includes helpful links to local and regional recycling opportunities. For a project located within a leased facility, determine what services are offered by the building owner. If there is a building-wide recycling program, confirm that the program meets the requirements of this prerequisite. Identify easily accessible collection and storage areas within the building that meet the recycling needs of the occupants. Recycling collection points should be appropriately sized and conveniently located and should include signage todiscouragecontamination. Ifthe building's commoncollection area is not large enough to handle the full building occupancy, tenants will need to have their own dedicated and secure spaces. Projects that occupy less than a full building do not need to provide an outdoor collection area if a common collection area exists or if the materials hauler or landlord makes pickups within the tenant space. 212 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281751 In dense urban areas, finding additional space for collection and storage may be costly or even increase the project footprint. For a commercial interior project in a LEED-certified building, adequate storage and collection of recyclables should already beavailable, and the team may need to provide only additional interior recycling collection points. Encourage activities to reduce and reuse materials to decrease the amount of recyclable volumes handled. For instance, building occupants can reduce the solid waste stream by using reusable bottles,bags, and other containers. Maintenance personnel can reduce waste by purchasing cleaners in bulk or concentrated form. Consider employing cardboard balers, aluminum can crushers, recycling chutes,on-site compost bins, and other waste management technologies to further improve the recycling program. If recycling collection and storage space is not available, another option is to conduct a waste stream audit of odsting materials. The waste stream audit should categorize all waste consistently (by either weight or volume), identify which waste streams are recyclable, and list the 3 waste streams that will be collected and stored for recycling. If no information is available on typical waste streams for the project, make projections based on the types of waste the operations will produce. Provide an easily accessible area that serves the project and is dedicated to the separation, collection, and storage of at least 3 recyclable materials as identified by the waste stream audit. Once the volume of waste is calculated, this information will help identify which occupants are disposing of, instead of recycling, eligible materials, and where improvements can be made. Researching local recycling efforts will help identify the best method of diverting recyclable materials from the waste stream. Potential recyclable waste streams include plastic film, plastics, hanger metals, paper, cardboard, food waste, glass, or special waste as defined by local code. 5. Timeline and Team Early in the design phase, to ensure that adequate space is allocated for a centralized collection point, seek input from the local hauler who will be providing waste management services to the site. Attention should be given to the accessibility and convenience of the waste and recycling collection locations. Prior to occupancy, the owner or owner's representative should ensure that sufficient recycling bins are in place. Postoccupancy, the project team should educate occupants on the benefits of recycling, as well as the location of facilities. During the design phase, the project team and the designer should designate well-marked collection and storage areas for recyclable office paper, cardboard, glass, plastic, and metals. Locate a central collection and storage area in the basement or on the ground level with easy access for collection vehicles. Within the tenant spaces, establish a collection area convenient to a freight elevator for custodial pickup. Collection and storage space should be sized to accommodate the anticipated recyclables. 6. Calculations There are no calculations required for this prerequisite. However, project teams should refer to Table for sizing recycling areas. The values in this table were developed by the City of Seattle in support of an ordinance requiring minimum areas for recycling and storage of recyclables in commercial buildings. The ordinance is based on the total square footage of the building. Minimum areas for residential buildings are also specified. Tablet provides a recycling area guideline, by commercial square foot, to help size space needs. LEED for Commercial Interiors does not require adherence to these guidelines; the intent is for the design team to size the facilities appropriately for the specific building operations. In determining the building's square footage, include corridors, elevators, stairwells, and shaft spaces. MR CI Prerequisite 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 213 EFTA00281752 MR CI Prerequisite 1 Table 1. Recycling Area Guidelines Building Size (s0 Minimum Recycling Area (sf) 0 to 5.030 82 5,001 to 15.000 125 15.001 to 50.000 175 50.001 to 100.000 225 100.001 to 200.000 275 200.001 or greater 500 Another source of sizing guidelines for recycling areas is the California Integrated Waste Management Board's (CIWMB) zoo4StatewideWaste Characterization Study,7whichgivesquantity and composition estimates for commercial, residential, and self-hauled waste streams. The study examines material disposal rates of rigid plastic packaging containers and California redemption value containers in more detail beyond the 1999 report (see the References section). 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Prepare documentation such as floor plans and site plans that highlight all recycling storage areas. ■ Obtain a letter from the landlord outlining the building's recycling program. 8. Examples Figurer shows a typical breakdown of waste stream materials. The 5 materials required for collection— paper,glass, plastics, cardboard, and metals—make up S9% of the waste stream. Figure 1. Municipal Solid Waste Generation Data from V.S. Ermrmmental Protection Agency. 2006. Wood 6% Rubber. Leather, Textile 7% Metals 8% Plastic 12% Other 3% Glass 5% rood Steeps 12% Paper 34% Yard Trimmings 13% 214 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281753 9. Exemplary Performance This prerequisite is not eligible for exemplary performance under the Innovation in Design section. CI MR 10. Regional Variations Dense urban areas typically have recycling infrastructure in place, but some less populated areas may not. Research local recycling programs to find the best method of diverting recyclable materials from the waste stream for the particular location. Space needs can vary depending on collection strategies used by the hauler, and whether recyclables are commingled or separated at the source. For example, if the local hauler accepts commingled recyclables, it may be possible to reduce the area needed for separate collection bins. Commingled collection will be useful to offices in urban areas, where there is little room for outdoor collection locations. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Establish a sustainable waste management plan with building operators or management. Engage with these parties early enough in the design phase so that storage and collection facilities reflect the actual operating needs and waste flows of the new space. Consider developing a commercial waste and recycling policyand education program for occupants. The policy should outline the protocol for collection and processing that the facility staff will follow and detail the signage for collection areas. The education component should explain the environmental and financial benefits of recycling to all building occupants. Postoccupancy, tenant space operations managers should implement a waste tracking system to determine the success of the recycling program; as issues arise, the recycling program should be reviewed and updated accordingly. Have a system in place to adjust the number and size of recycling bins, find additional on-site recycling resources, or provide occupant training if needed. Periodic waste stream audits will help identify the types and amounts of building occupant waste. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (httpiliwww.usgbc.org/projecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites California Integrated Waste Management Board http://www.civanb.ca.govl The California Integrated Waste Management Board (CIWMB) offers information about waste reduction, recycling and solid waste characterization, as well as generation rates for offices, schools, and residences. Earth 911 This group provides information and education programs on recycling as well as links to regional recyclers. U.S. Conference of Mayors, Recycling at Work http://www.usmayors.orgfrecycle/ This program that provides information on workplace recycling efforts. Waste at Work: Prevention Strategies for the Bottom Line httmawmv.informinc.orgiwasteatwork.php This report from Inform, Inc., and the New York City Council on the Environment offers strategies and case studies for reducing workplace waste generation. Prerequisite 1 2039 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 215 EFTA00281754 MR CI Prerequisite 1 Print Media Composting and Recycling Municipal Solid Waste, by Luis Diaz, et al. (CRC Press,1993). McGraw-Hill Recycling Handbook, by Herbert F. Lund (McGraw-Hi11,2.000). 13. Definitions Landfills are waste disposal sites for solid waste from human activities. Occupants in a commercial building areworkers who either have a permanent office or workstation in the building or typically spend a minimum of so hours per week in the building. In a residential building, occupants also include all persons who live in the building. Recycling is the collection, reprocessing, marketing, and use of materials that were diverted or recovered from the solid waste stream. A recycling collection area is located in regularly occupied space in the building for the collection of occupants' recyclables. A building may have numerous collection areas from which recyclable materials are typically removed to a central collection and storage area. Reuse returns materials to active use in the same or a related capacity as their original use, thus extending the lifetime of materials that would otherwise be discarded. Source reduction reduces the amount of unnecessary material brought into a building. Examples include purchasing products with less packaging. Tipping fees are charged by a landfill for disposal of waste, typically quoted per ton. Waste comprises all materials that flow from the building to final disposal. Examples include paper, grass trimmings, food scraps, and plastics. In LEED, waste refers w all materials that are capable of being diverted from the building's waste stream through waste reduction. Waste disposal eliminates waste by means of burial in a landfill, combustion in an incinerator, dumping at sea, or any other way that is not recycling or reuse. Waste diversion is a management activitythat disposes of waste other than through incineration or the use of landfills. Examples include reuse and recycling. Waste reduction includes both source reduction and waste diversion through reuse or recycling. The waste stream is the overall flow of waste from the building to a landfill, incinerator, or other disposal site. 216 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281755 TENANT SPACE-LONG-TERM COMMITMENT Credit Points MR Credit 1.1 1 point Intent To encourage choices that will conserve resources, reduce waste and reduce the environmental impacts of tenancy as they relate to materials, manufacturing and transport. Requirements The occupant or tenant must commit to remain in the same location for a minimum of to years. MR CREDIT 1.1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 217 EFTA00281756 CI Credit 1.1 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Ownership and long-term leases reduce the frequency of relocation and associated construction activities. With longer-term commitments, there is greater return on energy efficiency and improvements that benefit occupants' well-being. Many decisions go into the selection of the project location,including issues of employee convenience and quality oflife, such as where workers reside and shop and the length of their commutes. Community improvements, from mass transit to cultural amenities, take time to develop. Longer and more stable tenancy improves the entire community. Economic Issues Relocation—including employee down time, labor and moving equipment, and assimilation time to a new location—entails significant costs. These costs can be avoided simply by remaining in t location. Long-term leases help ensure that the space will remain available for the tenant. 2. Related Credits Additional credits that will enhance the project's sustainability include locating in a LEED-certified building close to alternative transportation, investing in energy efficiency and renewable energy technologies, and selecting sustainable materials; see the following credits: ■ SS Credit t: Site Selection ■ SS Credit 3.2:Alternative Transportation—Public Transportation Access ■ EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance ■ MR Credit 3: Materials Reuse ■ MR Credit 4: Recycled Content • MR Credit s: Regional Materials • MR Credit 6: Rapidly Renewable Materials ■ MR Credit 7: Certified Wood ■ IEQ Credit 2: Outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring • IEQ Credit 2: Increased Ventilation • IEQ Credit 3: Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan • IEQ Credit 4: Low-Emitting Materials • I EQ Credit 5: Indoor Chemical and Pollutant Source Control • IEQ Credit 6: Controllability of Systems ■ IEQ Credit 7: Thermal Comfort ■ IEQ Credit 8: Daylight and Views 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this credit 4. Implementation The credit requirements are satisfied when the project area is either owned by the occupant or is currently included in a lease with a term of no less than 10 years. Tenant lease agreements with an option to renew the lease after less than so years do not meet the requirements of this credit. 218 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281757 Condominium ownerships satisfy the credit requirement. The requirement does not stipulate a relationship between the start of the lease period and the project CI construction activities. Though it maybe necessary to displace occupants during the construction, there are no stipulations concerning temporary relocations. MR 5. Timeline and Team Discussions regarding the duration of the lease are often most productive at the project concept phase. Depending on the nature of the project, this may entail discussions with building owners and zoning and civic officials and could include community and neighborhood organizations. Projects planning for long-term leases will benefit if this option is considered during the predesign and design development phases. Decisions may be influenced regarding project site location selection, investment in energy efficient technologies, and the design and specification of durable, long-lasting finish materials—all of which may affect project costs and budgets, as well as other credits being pursued for LEED certification. The tenant should select a site that provides the space necessary for growth. Once the site is selected, the tenant must agree to sign a lease of to years or longer. 6. Calculations There are no calculations associated with this credit. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Retain a copy of the signed tenant lease agreement for the space that stipulates no less than a to-year commitment. 8. Examples There are no examples for this credit. 9. Exemplary Performance This credit is not eligible for exemplary performance under the Innovation in Design section. 10. Regional Variations There are no regional variations for this credit. Investment in a long-term lease benefits community development and has an inherent environmental benefit (see the Benefits and Issues section). 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations There are no operations and maintenance considerations applicable to this credit. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (httpWwww.usgbc.orgeprojecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites CoreNet Global Corporate Real Estate Network http://www.corenetglobal.org CoreNet Global is an organization of corporate real estate executives. Credit 1.1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 219 EFTA00281758 MR CI Credit 1.1 Congress for the New Urbanism httpWwww.cnu.org This organization of planners and designers identifies and applies principles that foster community spirit. Print Media Haw Buildings Learn:What Happens after They're Built, by Stewart Brand (Viking Penguin,1995). 13. Definitions Occupants in a commercial building are workers who either have a permanent office or workstation in the building or typically spend a minimum of to hours per week in the building. In a residential building, occupants also include all persons who live in the building. The owner is the person directlyemployed by the organization holdingtitle to the project building and recognized by law as having rights, responsibilities, and ultimate control over the building. A tenant is a person or entity that pays to occupy land or space that is owned by someone else. 220 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281759 BUILDING REUSE-MAINTAIN INTERIOR NONSTRUCTURAL COMPONENTS ua Ciocht 1.2 1-2 points Intent To extend the life cycle of existing building stock, conserve resources, retain cultural resources, reduce waste and reduce environmental impacts of new buildings as they relate to materials manufacturing and transport. Requirements Maintain at least 4.O%or 6O% by area of the existing non-shell, nonstructural components (e.g., walls, flooring and ceiling systems). The minimum percentage interior component reuse for each point threshold is as follows: Interim Reuse Points 40% I 60% 2 MR CREDIT 1.2 2009 EDITION LEER REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 221 EFTA00281760 MR CI Credit 1.2 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Building reuse is a very effective strategy in reducing the overall environmental impact of construction. Reusing existing buildings significantly reduces the energy use associated with the demolition process as well as construction waste and the environmental impacts associated with raw material extraction, manufacturing, and transportation. In addition, the character of the neighborhood environment is often defined by historic buildings. Building reuse maintains the vital link between neighborhoods of the past and present, reduces emissions and waste, and preserves open space. Commercial interior projects that reuse a high percentage of the nonstructural components serve as an example for future tenants in their building and for others in the community. Economic Issues Although retrofitting an existing building to accommodate new programmatic and LEED requirements may add to the complexity of design and construction—reflected in the project's soft costs—reuse of existing components can reduce overall construction costs by reducing costs associated with demolition, hauling fees, purchase of new construction materials, and labor. 2. Related Credits When working on an adaptive reuse project, assess the site early on to determine which areas and materials would be valuable to reincorporate into the new development. Inventory the areas and square footage of the existing site, and incorporate a reuse strategy into the initial design charrettes. Review these a credits: ■ MR Credit a: Construction Waste Management ■ MR Credit 3: Materials Reuse The development of a comprehensive reuse management plan that evaluates the anticipated materials saved will determine whether the project meets the requirements of MR Credit 1, Building Reuse. If reuse is not enough to achieve credit compliance, the materials can still contribute toward MR Credit a, Construction Waste Management, if the material has not been applied to MR Credit 1. 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this credit. 4. Implementation If the project will reuse part of an existing building, inventory the existing conditions. The architect should develop a floor plan showing the location of finished ceilings and flooring, interior wall partitions, doors within the interior walls, exterior and party walls, and exterior windows and doors. If existing built-in case goods will be reused, they should be documented as well. The drawings should be detailed enough to determine the surface area of all elements to be reused. Confirm that the items designated for reuse can be reused and take the necessary steps to retain and maintain them. Fixed items, such as nonstructural walls and doors, are included in this credit and count toward the percentage of reuse when they perform the same function (e.g., doors raised as doors). If materials are used for another purpose (e.g., doors made into tables), they can contribute toward the achievement of MR Credit 3.1, Materials Reuse. Projects that incorporate part of an existing building but do not meet the requirements for MR Credit 1.2 may apply the reused portion toward the achievement of MR Credit a, Construction Waste Management. To do so, determine an approximate weight or volume for existing building elements. Include full-height wall systems in MR Credit 1.2, Building Reuse. Division to items, including 222 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281761 furniture and furnishings, are addressed in MR Credit 3.2, Materials Reuse-30% Furniture and Furnishings. Moving the demolition out of the project scope by making it the building owner's responsibility defeats the objective of this credit. 5. Timeline and Team As a design strategy, building reuse has significant impact on all phases of a project, from schematic design through bidding and construction. During the schematic design phase, the architect and owner should identify nonstructural building elements that can be retained and reused. The specifications for bid, developed by the architect in consultation with the owner, should outline measures to preserve the building during the construction process, and these should be implemented with project team oversight. 6. Calculations Figure 1: Sample Comparison of Floor T1 -Tim Area A D D .1JILLIJ_ II I Area C Area B IMF IMF IMPF Prior Condition Completed Design Quantity of Finished Area This credit is based on surface areas. The components included in the calculation are finished ceilings, walls, doors, flooring, and built-in case goods. Take measurements as if preparing a bid for flooring, ceiling, or painting: • Finished ceilings and flooring areas. Use square footage. MR CI Credit 1.2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 223 EFTA00281762 MR CI Credit 1.2 • Walls. Determine the finished area between floor and ceiling. • Interior wall partitions and doors. Count the area of both sides. • Exterior and party walls. If the drywall has been reused and new interior finishes applied, count only t side. • Exterior windows and exterior doors. Subtract their area from both the prior condition and the completed design tallies. • Built-in case goods. Determine the finished area, as would a painter. Prior Condition Determine the total finished area that existed before the project and any demolition began. If the ceiling is exposed, both prior to construction and in the final design, include this area for both. If there was a lay-in ceiling prior to construction and none after, include the ceiling area in the prior condition and completed design areas but not in the retained components area. Completed Design Determine the total finished area in the completed design, including all new and retained elements. Retained Components Area In determining the retained components area, include only the surface areas of ceilings, walls, interior doors, floors, and built-in case goods that were in the space both prior to construction and in the completed design. Include items that have been saved but may have been relocated, such as full-height demountable walls and doors that were rehung. Items counted in this credit cannot be included in MR Credits 3.1, Materials Reuse—s% and to%. Percentage Maintained Complete a table similar to the example shown in Table t. In determining the interior nonstructural component reuse, divide the total retained components area by the larger of either the total prior condition area or total completed design area (Equation t). Table 1. Sample Finished Surface Area Calculation Finished Surface Areas Element Prior Condition Area 0N) Completed Design Area (fN) Retained Components Area ON/ Finished Ceiling 20,000 20.000 12.610 Finished Flooring 10,200 20,000 1.800 Interior Wall Partitions 8,640 8,380 5,520 Doors within Interior Walls 1,400 800 500 Built-in case goods 500 800 400 Exterior and Party Walls 13,820 13,820 13,820 Less Exterior Windows and doors -2,280 -2.280 -2,280 Totals 52,280 61,520 32,370 Determine the Larger Completed Design Area > Prior Condition Area 61,520> 52,280 Interior Non-Structural Component Reuse (32,370/61,520) 53% 40%< 53%< 60% earns MR 1.2 but not MR 1.3 224 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281763 Equation 1. Determination of Maintained Area MR Total Retained Components Area (s0 CI Credit 1.2 Interior Nonstructural Component Reuse (%) = Larger of Prior Condition X 100 OR Completed Design Area 1st) By usingthe larger ofthe avalues in the denominator,this equation puts projects that ha% e minimized materials use in the completed design on a level playing field with projects that have optimized reuse of components from the prior condition. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measure. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ List shell attributes of existing building elements, the corresponding element IDs, the total area of new and existing elements, and the area of reused interior nonstructural elements. 8. Examples Evaluate the interior nonstructural components to determine what can be salvaged. Figure a illustrates the applicable components. Figure 2. Components Eligible for MR Credit 1.2 existing ceiling do not count replaced items, such as replaced doors — surfaces that can be counted toward area for this credit existing interior walls — existing doors existing floor coverings (tile, carpet, etc.) Prior Condition In Calculations, Figure 1, the tenant has taken the entire 2O,OOo-square-foot floor in an existing commercial office building that has 6-foot-wide floor-to•ceiling windows at to-foot centers on the a sides. Area A was previously built out with a a-by-a-foot lay-in ceiling at 1O feet above the carpeted floor. Drywall partitions enclosed t6 private offices. Area B had never been occupied, but the building owner had completed the ceiling system and the exterior and common area walls. Area C was built as a training facility with floating acoustic panels and a mix of reclaimed wood and recycled rubber flooring. The corridors to the stairs had the same ceiling system as Area A, in addition to carpet tiles. 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 225 EFTA00281764 MR CI Credit 1.2 Completed Design The design team opened up the space by eliminating a hallway and a party wall. They saved several private offices in Area A. In Area B, the new occupants kept the ceiling and added enclosed sections for copying, recycling, storage, and conferencing. The training facility, Area C, needed only a fresh coat of paint. The quantities shown in Tablet are from this example. 9. Exemplary Performance Project teams may earn an Innovation in Design credit for exemplary performance by reusing 80% or more of the existing walls, flooring, and ceiling systems. 10. Regional Variations This credit may have particular importance in areas with historic structures where reuse of components can preserve the history and character of a building and its region. When deciding which interior structures to preserve, the project team should consider not only the nature of the building and whether the materials will enhance the project's character, but also the local historical context. Reuse of interior materials as a strategy to divert material from landfills maybe particularly important in areas with constrained landfill space. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations The project team should communicate to building operators any special maintenance practices required by the reused materials, or any differences in life expectancy or durability compared with new materials. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (timxilwww.usgbc.orgipL_-ojecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Print Media How Buildings Learn: What Happens after They're Built, by Stewart Brand (Viking Penguin,1994). 13. Definitions Adaptive reuse is the renovation of a space fora purpose different from the original. Completed design area is the total area of finished ceilings, floors, full-height walls and demountable partitions, interior doors, and built-in case goods in the completed project. It does not include exterior windows and doors. Interior nonstructural components reuse is determined by dividing the area of retained components by the larger of (t) the area of the prior condition or (a) the area of the completed design. Prior condition is the state of the project space at the time it was selected. Prior condition area is the total area of finished ceilings, floors, and full-height walls that existed when the project area was selected. It does not include exterior windows and doors. Retained components are portions of the finished ceilings, finished floors, full-height walls and demountable partitions, interior doors, and built-in case goods that existed in the prior condition area and remain in the completed design. Soft costs are expense items that are not considered direct construction costs. Examples include architectural, engineering, financing, and legal fees. 226 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281765 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT Credit MR Credit 2 Points 1.2 points Intent To divert construction and demolition debris from disposal in landfills and incineration facilities. Redirect recyclable recovered resources back to the manufacturing process and reusable materials to appropriate sites. Requirements Recycle and/or salvage nonhazardous construction and demolition debris. Develop and implement a construction waste management plan that, at a minimum, identifies the materials to be diverted from disposal and whether the materials will be sorted on-site or comingled. Excavated soil and land-clearing debris do not contribute to this credit. Calculations can be done byweight or volume, but must be consistent throughout. The minimum percentage debris o be recycled or salvaged for each point threshold is as follows: Recycled or Salvaged Points 50% 1 75% 2 MR CREDIT 2 it 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 227 EFTA00281766 MR CI Credit 2 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Construction and demolition generate enormous quantities of solid waste. EPA estimates that 136 million tons of such debris was generated in 1996, $7% of it from nonresidential sources.° Commercial construction generates between 2 and 2.5 pounds of solid waste per square foot; the majority of this waste could be recycled.9 The greatest environmental benefit is achieved through source control—reducing the total waste generated. Use design strategies that minimize waste, such as shop fabrication of component parts, modular construction, and the ordering of materials cut to size. Work with manufacturers to minimize unnecessary packaging and make arrangements for pallets to be reclaimed after use to reduce waste volumes and waste management costs. Extending the lifetime of existing landfills through effective construction waste management can avoid the need for expansion or new landfill sites. Recycling of construction and demolition debris reduces demand for virgin resources and, in turn, reduces the environmental impacts associated with resource extraction, processing, and in many cases, transportation. Economic Issues In the past,when landfill capacity was readily available and disposal fees were low, recycling or reuse of construction waste was not economically feasible. Construction materials were less expensive than labor, and construction site managers focused on worker productivity rather than on materials conservation. In addition, recycling infrastructure and recycled-materials marketplaces that process and resell construction debris did not exist. The economics of recycling has improved in recent years, particularly with the advent of international competition for both raw and recycled materials, and disposal costs have increased. More stringent waste disposal regulations coupled with ever-decreasing landfill capacity have changed the waste management equation. Waste management plans require time andmoneytodraftand implement; in the longterm,however, they provide guidance to achieve substantial savings throughout the construction process. Recyclable materials have differing market values, depending on the presence of local recycling facilities, reprocessing costs, and the availability of virgin materials on the market. In general, it is economically beneficial to recycle metals, concrete, asphalt, and cardboard. Market values for recyclables fluctuate from month to month, so track the values and project different costrecapturing scenarios. When no revenue is received for materials, as is often the case for scrap wood and gypsum wallboard, it is still possible to benefit from recycling by avoiding landfill tipping fees. 2. Related Credits Projects that reuse existing buildings but do not meet the threshold requirements for the following credit may apply the reused building portions toward achievement of MR Credit 2, Construction Waste Management: ■ MR Credit 1.2: Building Reuse—Maintain Interior Nonstructural Components If an existing building is found to contain contaminated substances, such as lead or asbestos, these materials should be remediated as required by EPA; see the following credit: ■ SS Credit t, Path t: Brownfield Redevelopment 228 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281767 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this credit. 4. Implementation This credit addresses how much waste material leaving the site is diverted from landfills. The percentage requirement represents the amount of waste diverted through recycling and salvage divided by the total waste generated by the construction project. Identify construction haulers and recyclers to handle designated materials; they often serve as valuable partners in this effort. Make sure that job-site personnel understand and participate in construction debris recycling, and ask them to provide updates throughout the construction pi uctss. Obtain and retain verification records (e.g., waste haul receipts, waste management reports, and spreadsheets) to confirm that the diverted materials have been recycled or salvaged as intended. Diversion may include salvaged materials such as furniture, computers and other electronic equipment, white boards, lockers, doors, lighting, and plumbing fixtures. Salvaged material can be donated to charitable organizations such as Habitat for Humanity, reuse centers, other nonprofit organizations, or other buildings. Materials sold to the community can also be counted. A project may choose to separate construction waste on-site or have commingled construction waste sorted at an off-site facility. On-site separation provides immediate feedback of the ongoing waste diversion efforts but may require additional labor for implementation. Although commingled recycling can increase recycling costs, it could also simplify the waste management effort on-site and ensure that diversion rates will be high. This option is especially useful for projects with tight space constraints and no room for multiple collection bins. 5. Timeline and Team After researching regional recycling options, the project team must create a construction waste management plan during the design phase. The general contractor should identify on-site recycling locations and review recycling requirements with all subcontractors to ensure that the plan is implemented. During construction, the general contractor should remind subcontractors of the plan requirements and confirm that the plan is implemented. The general contractor will continually track construction waste and report to the project team. At the end of construction the contractor should complete the documentation and submit detailed records to the project team. 6. Calculations Calculations for this credit are based on the amount ofwaste diverted from landfills or incineration compared with the total amount of waste generated on-site. Convert all materials to either weight or volume to calculate the percentage. Projects that crush and reuse existing concrete, masonry, or asphalt on-site should include the weight or volume of these materials in the calculations. Any construction debris processed into a recycled content commodity that has an open-market value (e.g., alternative daily cover material) may be applied to the construction waste calculation. Projects that use commingled recycling rather than on-site separation should obtain summaries of diversion rates from the recycler. Typically, the recycler should provide monthly reports. Hazardous waste should be excluded from calculations and should be disposed of according to relevant regulations. Table t provides an example of a summary calculation for waste diversion. If exact material weights are not available, use the conversion factors from Table 2. or another defensible conversion metric to estimate the weight of construction waste. MR CI Credit 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 229 EFTA00281768 MR CI Credit 2 Table 1. Sample Waste Diversion Calculation Material Diverted Method of Diversion Diverted Material, in: tons or cubic yards Carpet Tiles Donation to Salvation Army 25 Cardboard Packaging Recycler 1O Ceiling Tiles Returned to Manufacturer 32 Steel Studs Recycler 8 Drywall Recycler 12 Total quantity of diverted waste 87 Material sent to landfill 63 Total quantity of waste 15O Percentage of waste diverted (87115O) 58% 1 point (5O%) earned. but the second point (75%) was not earned Table 2. Solid Waste Conversion Factors lalabwIals Density (lbsky) Cardboard 1OO Gypsum Walboard 5OO Mixed Waste 35O Rubble 1.4O0 Steel 1.OO0 Wood 3OO 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. • Track and keep a summary log of all construction waste generated by type, the quantities of each type that were diverted and landfilled, and the total percentage of waste diverted from landfill disposal. • A project's construction waste management plan should,at a minimum, identify the diversion goals, relevant construction debris and materials to be diverted, implementation protocols, and parties responsible for implementing the plan. 8. Examples A contractor is preparing for partial demolition of 5400-square-foot urban structure built in 1918. The new tenant intends to keep the structural components of the building but remove the existing interior walls and floors. The contractor, prior to construction, developed a construction waste management plan to aid in the demolition and construction process. The plan outlines the staging ofwaste materials during demolition to be sorted within the building before being delivered to local recycling facilities. 230 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281769 - Existing wood will be treated with care as it is removed from the building so that it can be reused by another local contractor or donated to a reuse store. - Gypsum board from a previous building remodel will be composted. - Existing doors will be removed. restored, and stored otf-site before being reinstalled during construction. - The construction waste will be commingled and sorted off-site because the site does not have enough room for sorting materials. - Al cardboard, wood. plastic. and metals will be placed in the same bins. - The construction waste management plan outlines the responsitdily of each subcontractor to recycle lunch waste in a separate, smaller container. to prevent contaminating the construction waste. - The construction office is instructed to sort paper. plastic, cans, and bottles within the office. - The contractor takes responsibility for enforcing the plan throughout the construction process. Because most oftheconstructionwaste is sortedoff-site, thecontractor can document a construction waste diversion rate of 96%. 9. Exemplary Performance Project teams may earn an Innovation in Design credit for exemplary performance by diverting 95% or more of total construction waste. 10. Regional Variations Recycling opportunities are expanding rapidly in many communities. Vegetation, metal, concrete, and asphalt recycling has long been available and affordable in most communities. Paper, corrugated cardboard, plastics, and clean wood markets vary with regional and local recycling infrastructure. Some materials, such as gypsum wallboard, can be recycled only in communities that have reprocessing plants or where soil can handle the material as a stabilizing agent. The recyclability• of a demolished material often depends on the extent of contamination. Demolished wood, for instance, is often not reusable or recyclable unless it is taken apart and the nails removed. In urban areas, recycling resources are frequently more developed, and project managers can decide whether to separate waste on-site or hire a commingled waste recycler. In more rural and remote areas, recyclers may be harder to find. The environmental benefits of recycling in these cases need to be balanced against the environmental impacts of transporting waste long distances to recycling centers. Other regional variances that affect the treatment of construction waste include landfill space, waste diversion options, and tipping fees. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations A challenging aspect of managing and diverting construction waste is identifying appropriate entities to receive the diverse waste types generated. Tenants should develop waste management plans for facility alterations and additions, with specific construction waste recycling targets and end sources. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http://www.usgbc.orgfprojecttools) for additional resources and other technical information. Websites California Integrated Waste Management Board, Construction and Demolition Debris Recycling Information http://wviw.ciwmb.ca.goviConDemo MR CI Credit 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 231 EFTA00281770 MR CI Credit 2 The CIWMB offers case studies, fact sheets, and links to additional resources for construction and demolition debris recycling. Construction Materials Recycling Association httix/Pmvw.cdrecycling.org The Construction Materials Recycling Association is a nonprofit organization dedicated to information exchange within the North American construction waste and demolition debris processing and recycling industries. Smart Growth Online, Construction Waste Management Handbook http://ww.smartzrowth.orgilibraryfarticles.as s This report by the National Association of Home Builders Research Center discusses residential construction waste management for a housing development in Homestead, Florida. Business and Industry Resource Venture, Construction Waste Management Guide httpliWww.resourceventure.orgffree-resourcesiget-startedigreen-building-publicationst CWM9420Guide.pdflview?searchterm=construction9(acwastecgzoprevention This is a guidebook on waste prevention during construction. Government Resources Check with the solid waste authority or natural resources departments in your city or county. Many local governments provide information about regional recycling opportunities. King County, Washington, Recycling and Waste Management during Construction http://www.metrokc.gov/procuretreenlwastemgt.htm View specification language from the cities of Seattle and Portland metro projects on construction waste management. A Sourcebook for Green and Sustainable Building, Construction Waste This website offers a guide to construction waste management during construction. U.S. EPA, Environmental Specifications for Research Triangle Park llsvwtyr :iagovktpc,L-44)mi tspecs.htrn Learn about waste management and other specifications from EPA. Triangle J Council of Govemments,Waste Spec: Model Specifications for Construction Waste Reduction, Reuse, and Recycling fry: t o .o ub tco re lan lid Thisorganizationhas developed model specifications for North Carolina. Ten case studies show the results of using the specifications.. 13. Definitions Alternative daily cover is material (other than earthen material) that is placed on the surface of the active face of a municipal solid waste landfill at the end of each operating day to control vectors, fires, odors, blowing litter, and scavenging. Construction and demolition debris includes waste and recyclables generated from construction and from the renovation,demolition,ordeconstruction ofpreexisting structures. It does not include land-clearing debris, such as soil, vegetation, and rocks. Recycling is the collection, reprocessing, marketing, and use of materials that were diverted or recovered from the solid waste stream. Reuse returns materials to active use in the same or a related capacity as their original use, thus extending the lifetime of materials that would otherwise be discarded. 'lipping fees are charged by a landfill for disposal of waste, typically quoted per ton. 232 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281771 MATERIALS REUSE Credit _aN MR Credit 3.1 Points 1-2 points Intent To reuse building materials and products to reduce demand for virgin materials and reduce waste, thereby lessening impacts associated with the extraction and processing of virgin resources. Requirements Use salvaged, refurbished or reused materials, the sum of which constitutes at least 596 or io%, based on cost, of building (construction) materials, excluding furniture and furnishings The minimum percentage materials reused for each point threshold is as follows: Reused Materials Points 5% 1 10% 2 MR CREDIT 3.1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 233 EFTA00281772 MR CI Credit 3.1 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Many existing materials can be salvaged, refurbished, or reused. Reuse strategies divert material from the construction waste stream, reducing the need for landfill space and environmental impacts from associated water and air contamination. Use of salvaged materials also avoids the environmental impacts of producing new construction products and materials. These impacts are significant because buildings account for a large portion of natural resource consumption, including 40% of raw stone, gravel, and sand as well as 25% ofvirgin wooc12° Economic Issues Although some salvaged materials are more costly than new materials because of the high cost of labor involved in recovering and refurbishing processes, local demolition companies or buildings undergoing a remodel may be willing to sell materials recovered from existing buildings to avoid landfill tipping fees and to generate income. In some areas, municipalities and waste management companies have established facilities for selling salvaged building materials at landfill sites. Sometimes, salvaged materials are offered at prices that appear to be cost-effective but may include hidden costs, such as reprocessing fees, excessive transportation costs, or liabilities associated with toxic contamination. Conversely, certain salvaged materials may be impossible to duplicate (e.g., turn-of-the century lumber and casework) and may be worth the higher cost compared with new materials. 2. Related Credits The development of a comprehensive reuse management plan that evaluates the anticipated materials saved will help determine whether the project meets the requirements of the following credits: ■ MR Credit 1: Building Reuse ■ MR Credit a: Construction Waste Management ■ MR Credit 3.2: Materials Reuse—Furniture and Furnishings Remanufactured materials are not considered a reuse of the material and do not contribute toward this credit. However, these materials can contribute toward the following credits: • MR Credit a: Construction Waste Management • MR Credit 4: Recycled Materials 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this credit. 4. Implementation Consider using salvaged and refurbished materials to reduce overall initial costs. Using salvaged materials as architectural details can also add character to the building. Identify and reuse existing materials found both on-site and off. Furniture and furnishings (CSI Division 12 components) are excluded from the calculations for this credit, but are covered by MR Credit 3.2. Refurbished materials, such as a door that has been converted into a table, can count toward this credit or toward MR Credit 3.2, Materials Reuse-30% Furniture and Furnishings, but not both. Table 1 clarifies materials considered within the scope of this credit. 234 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281773 Table 1. Materials Covered by MR Credit 3.1 Used Materials Found on Site Used Materials Found Off Site Fixed items Modified + New Use Purchased from Others Same or New Use Example: Door converted to table Excluded: Items included in MRc1.2 and 3.2 including demountable full-height walls: mechanical, electrical and plumbing fixtures; reused appliances and equipment Example: Demountable full-height walls Excluded: Items covered in MRc3.2: mechanical, electrical and plumbing fixtures; appliances and equipment Finish Items Refurbished + Reused Same or New Use Owned Same or New Use Examples: Doc,' hardware refinished and reused. Excluded: Items covered in MRc1.2 and 3.2, including demountable full-height walls Example: Portable signage Excluded: Items covered in MRc3.2: mechancial, electrical and plumbing fixtures; appliances and equipment. Reused Materials Found On-site Items that were "fixed" components on-site before construction began. To qualify as reused for this credit, these items must no longer be able to serve their original functions and must then be installed for a different use or in a different location. An example would be a door removed and modified to serve as the countertop for the receptionist station. Walls, ceilings, and flooring. If such items continue to serve their original functions in the new building, they are excluded from this credit but are covered by MR Credit 1.2, Building Reuse— Maintain Interior Nonstructural Components. Other reused materials found on-site. Components that are retained and continue to serve their original function, such as door hardware, are eligible for this credit. Reused Materials Found Off-site Reusable materials eligible for this credit are not limited to items found within the project building. Materials obtained off-site qualify as reused if they have been previously used. These materials may be purchased as salvaged, similar to any other project material, or they may be relocated from another facility, including ones previously used by the occupant. The salvaged materials from both on-site and off-site can be applied to MR Credit 5, Regional Materials, if they comply with the requirements of that credit. Materials qualifying as reused for MR Credit 3 cannot be applied to MR Credits 1, 2, 4,6, or7. This credit applies primarily to CSI MasterFormat" 2004 Edition Divisions 31 (Section 31.60.00 Foundations) and 32 (Sections 32.10.00 Paving, 32.30.00 Site Improvements, and 32.90.00 Planting). Do not include mechanical, electrical, and plumbing components or appliances and equipment in the calculations for this credit This exclusion is consistent with MR Credits 4 and 5. Exclude furniture and furnishings (CSI Division 12 components). Generally, opportunities to reuse building materials may be limited. Core materials that may be eligible include salvaged brick, structural timbers, stone, and pavers. While considering the potential to reuse salvaged materials, confirm that theydo not contain toxic substances, such as lead or asbestos. 5. Timeline and Team The incorporation of materials reuse as a design strategy affects cost estimates, the demolition phase (if salvaging from the project site), and the ultimate design development of the project. Coordination among the owner, architect or design team, and contractor should begin early in the predesign phase and continue through design development so that knowledge of the site and building areas to be salvaged and reused can be creatively and efficiently worked into the basis of MR CI Credit 3.1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 235 EFTA00281774 MR CI Credit 3.1 design, and opportunities to bring in salvaged materials from off-site can be incorporated into the project. Documentation should likewise begin early. During predesign, the project team should assess opportunities for materials reuse and the extent of site demolition involved, and set goals accordingly. In the design phase, the architect should incorporate salvaged or reused materials into the design and then, during the construction documents and specifications development phase, identify sources and outline measures for their use. The contractor should locate sources for these materials and document and track their cost and quantity during construction. This recordkeeping will aid the project team in the credit submittal process. 6. Calculations List the reused or salvaged materials used and their cost. 'Fable a provides an example of a salvaged materials tracking log. For items that were formerly fixed items found on-site, indicate both the former and the new uses (e.g., wall paneling made from wood flooring) and how it was modified or refurbished. If the item is from off-site, indicate where it was acquired. The project owner is an acceptable source of off-site reusable materials. The replacement value can be determined by pricing a comparable material in the local market; exclude labor and shipping. If a project team receives a discount from a vendor, the replacement value should reflect the discounted price as opposed to the list value. When the actual cost paid for the reused or salvaged material is below the cost of an equivalent new item, use the higher value in the calculations. When the cost to reclaim an item found on-site is less than the cost of an equivalent new item, use the cost of the new item (or replacement cost). Do not include mechanical, electrical, and plumbing components or appliances and equipment in the calculations for this credit. In determining the net construction material value, subtract the costs of all such materials. The net construction material value is divided into the total salvaged material value to determine the percentage salvaged. Table 2. Sample Spreadsheet for Salvaged Construction Materials Salvaged Material Onor Offsite Modification made to On-site Materials or Source of Off-site Salvaged Materials Replacement Value (s) Wall paneling from wood flooring On Salvaged, re-milled 4.000 Stone flooring Off Alpha Architectural Resuse 3.640 Ceiling Tiles Off Project owner's inventory 2.000 Door Hardware On Finish item refurbished 1.750 Used demountable full-height walls Off Xi Walls, salvaged 2,200 Used demountable full-height walls Off Project owner's inventory 1.100 Total salvaged material value $14.400 Total construction material cost $341,214 Less MEP material value -158,180 Net construction material value $183,034 Percentage salvaged (14,490(183,034) 7.9% 1 point (5%) earned, but the 2nd point (10%) was not earned 236 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITIO^i EFTA00281775 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. • Track costs accordingto CSIMasterFormat'"2004Edition Divisions3-10,31 (Section 31.60.00 Foundations), and 32 (Sections 32.10.00 Paving, 32.30.00 Site Improvements, and 32.90.00 Planting). 8. Examples There are no examples for this credit. 9. Exemplary Performance Project teams may earn an Innovation in Design credit for exemplary performance if the value of salvaged or reused materials used on the project is t5%or more of the total materials cost. 10. Regional Variations This credit may have particular importance in areas with historic structures and neighborhoods, in renovating a historic building, or in offering the benefits of a nonvirgin source of building material. New England, the Pacific Northwest, and California have well-developed markets for salvaged materials. Project teams should research rebuilding centers in their region using the resources listed in this section. Where salvage markets are not as readily available, consider using deconstruction techniques. By increasing the demand for used materials, teams might encourage the development of a regional salvage market that would expand economic opportunities while diverting waste Building reuse can encourage development while preserving the history and character of an area, and materials reuse can work in tandem with this strategy. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations There are no operations and maintenance considerations specific to reused or refurbished materials. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http://www.usgbc.org(projecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Government Resources Check with tlie solid waste authorityand natural resources departments inyour cityor county. Many local governments provide information about regional materials exchanges and other sources. Websites Builders' Guide to Reuse and Recycling httpWww.mwcog.orgibuildersrecyclingguidef The Builders' Guide to Reuse and Recycling is a directory for construction and demolition materials in the Metropolitan Washington,M, region, produced by the Metropolitan Washington Council of Governments. The website includes a searchable database for sources of salvaged materials. California Integrated Waste Management Board, California Materials Exchange http://www.ciwmb.ca.govjCalMAX The California Materials Exchange is a program of the CIWMB. This site enables users to exchange nonhazardous materials online. MR CI Credit 3.1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 237 EFTA00281776 MR CI Credit 3.1 Materials Exchanges on the Web King County, Washington, Industrial Materials Exchange (IMEX) Local Hazardous Waste Management Program http://wv.govlink.org/hazwaste The Local Hazardous Waste Management Program is a regional program of local governments working together to protect public health and environmental quality by reducing the threat posed by the production, use, storage, and disposal of hazardous materials. Reuse Development Organization http://www.redo.org ReDO is a national nonprofit in Baltimore that promotes reuse as an environmentally sound, socially beneficial, and economical means of managing surplus and discarded materials. See the list of ReDO subscribers for contacts around the United States. Green Building Resource Guide, Salvaged Building Materials Exchange The Green Building Resource Guide is a database of more than Leo green building materials and products selected specifically for their usefulness to the design and building professions. Building Materials Reuse Association (formerly Used Building Materials Association) http://www.bmra.org The Building Materials Reuse Association is a nonprofit, membership-based organization that represents companies and organizations involved in the acquisition and/or redistribution of used building materials. Used Building Materials Exchange http://www.build.recycle.net The Used Building Materials Exchange is a free marketplace for buying and selling recyclables and salvaged materials. The Greater Vancouver Regional District, Old to New: Design Guide, Salvaged Building Materials in New Construction http://www.lifecyclebuilding.orgifilesfOld9420toWaoNew%zoDesign%zoGuide.pdf This useful and detailed guidebook reviews the use of salvaged materials in real-life case studies. 13. Definitions Market value, presumed to be less than replacement value, is the amount that either was paid or would have been paid for a used product. Refurbished materials are products that could have been disposed of as solid waste. These products have completed their life cycle as consumer items and are then refurbished for reuse without substantial alteration of their form. Refurbishing includes renovating, repairing, restoring, or generally improving the appearance, performance, quality, functionality, or value of a product. Remanufactured materials are items that are made into other products. One example is concrete that is crushed and used as subbase. Replacementvalue is the estimated cost of replacing a used product. This value maybe equal to the cost of a similar new product or based on a new product with comparable features. Salvaged materials or reused materials are construction materials recovered from existing buildings or construction sites and reused. Common salvaged materials include structural beams and posts, flooring, doors, cabinetry, brick, and decorative items. 238 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281777 MATERIALS REUSE-FURNITURE AND FURNISHINGS a Credit MR Credit 3.2 Points 1 point Intent To reuse building materials and products to reduce demand for virgin materials and reduce waste, thereby reducing impacts associated with the extraction and processing of virgin resources. Requirements Use salvaged, refurbished or used furniture and furnishings for 30% of the total furniture and furnishings budget. MR CREDIT 3.2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 239 EFTA00281778 CI Credit 3.2 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Reusing furniture and furnishings can reduce the environmental impacts associated with the manufacturing and disposal of materials. Further, some reused furnishings may be of historical value. For more environmental Issues, see the Benefits and Issues section in MR Credit 3.1. Economic Issues For commercial interiors projects, furniture often is the largest single purchase. Furniture reuse is thus a strategy for considerable savings. Office systems furniture is a particular cost focus for many commercial projects, and its reuse could help in the achievement of this credit. 2. Related Credits The development of a comprehensive reuse management plan that evaluates the anticipated materials saved will help determine whether the project meets the requirements of the following credits: • MR Credit a: Construction Waste Management • MR Credit 3.1: Materials Reuse-59i and 1096 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this credit. 4. Implementation The objective of this credit is to recognize the environmental benefits of reusing furniture and furnishings, with other reused materials itemized in the Construction Specification Institute MasterFormaf" Division 12. The percentage is based on calculations for only the furniture and furnishing materials in Division 12., using replacement values. See Equation 1. Identify opportunities to reuse furniture from the occupant's existing inventory. Also consider obtaining used furniture from materials suppliers. Research and identify opportunities to reuse furniture and consider salvaging and reusing systems furniture and furnishings, such as case pieces, seating, filing systems, decorative lighting, and accessories. 5. Timeline and Team The reuse of furniture should be part of a larger plan for materials reuse. Although this planning can happen at any stage of the design process, project teams may assume that there will be enough potential savings to free up the construction budget for other priorities. Inventory the furnishings, identify likely items for reuse, tally the potential savings, and identify potential materials suppliers. The ideal time for this is during the design development phase of work, when the projected cost benefits of reuse can have the greatest impact on the project's finances. If the furnishings are on-site at the beginning of the construction process, the contractor should plan to store and conserve them. This is an opportunity in the project timeline for any necessary repair and refurbishment. 240 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281779 6. Calculations Calculate the percentage of reused furniture and furnishings used on a project. Include only furniture and furnishings, components typically found in CSI MasterFormat" Division 12 (Figure 0. Exclude furniture, furnishings components, artwork, interior plants, and musical instruments. Equation 1. Salvage Rate for Furniture and Furnishings Salvage Rate (%) Replacement Value of Reused Furniture and Furnishings (sf) Total Value of New and Reused Furniture and Furnishings (sf) X 100 The items covered by this credit must have been previously used but can come from anywhere on or off the site. There is no requirement that they be modified or refurbished. Figure 1. Sample Division 12 Items Construction Acitivity Fabrics Artwork (exclude from calculation) Key cabinets Hospital casework Display casework Window treatment Panels and dividers Furniture Furniture systems Furniture accessories Floor mats and framees Multiple seating Chairs Interior plants (exclude from cakulation) Planters Calculations are based upon the replacement value of the reused furniture and furnishings. Replacement value is presumed to be greater than the market value (what would be paid for the reused product in the marketplace). With justification, the project team may use replacement values greater than the amount paid for newly acquired refurbished product. When basing the determinations on comparable new products, consider using the discounted contract prices as opposed to the published list price. The replacement values used in MR Credit 3.2 are part of the total Division 12 material value, which is also used in the calculations for MR Credits 4,5, and 6. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measure. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Track actual costs for salvaged, reused, or refurbished furniture and furnishings. MR CI Credit 3.2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 241 EFTA00281780 CI Credit 3.2 8. Examples igure 1. Sample Spreadsheet for Salvaged Furniture and Furnishings Product name Source Replacement Value (S) Reused Workstation Owner's former site 103.300 Reused File Cabinets Zeta Old to New 100.400 Total Salvaged Material Value 5203.700 Total Division 12 Material Value 5598.722 %Salvaged (203.700 f 598.722) 34.0% 34.0% > 30.0% MR 3 earned 9. Exemplary Performance Project teams may earn an Innovation in Design credit for exemplary performance by using at least 60% salvaged, refurbished, or reused furniture and furnishings. 10. Regional Variations In urban areas, project teams can shop reused furniture and thrift stores, which will provide the greatest opportunities for reused furnishing finds. If the project owner is looking fora unique touch for the office space, consider antiques shops, many of which are in rural areas. Research vendors in the region and consult contractors for sources. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Project teams should, if possible, obtain the records detailing the maintenance needs of the reused furnishings. Office managers may have records of the furniture specifications. 12. Resources Refer to the Resources section in MR Credit 3.1. 13. Definitions Market value, presumed to be less than replacement value, is the amount that either was paid or would have been paid for a used product. Refurbished materials are products that could have been disposed of as solid waste. These products have completed their life cycle as consumer items and are then refurbished for reuse without substantial alteration of their form. Refurbishing includes renovating, repairing, restoring, or generally improving the appearance, performance, quality, functionality, or value of a product. Remanufactured materials are items that are made into other products. One example is concrete that is crushed and used as subbase. Replacement value is the estimated cost of replacing a used product. This value maybe equal to the cost of a similar new product or based on a new product with comparable features. Salvaged materials or reused materials are construction materials recovered from existing buildings or construction sites and reused. Common salvaged materials include structural beams and posts, flooring, doors, cabinetry, brick, and decorative items. 242 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281781 RECYCLED CONTENT Credit Points MR Credit 4 1-2 points Intent To increase demand for building products that incorporate recycled content materials, thereby reducing impacts resulting from extraction and processing of virgin materials. Requirements Use materials, including furniture and furnishings, with recycled content' such that the sum of postconsumer recycled content plus of the preconsumer3 content constitutes at least 1O% or .to% based on cost of the total value of the materials in the project. The minimum percentage materials recycled for each point threshold is as follows: Recycled Content Points 10% 1 20% 2 The recycled content value of a material or furnishing is determined by weight. The recycled fraction of the assembly is then multiplied by the cost of assembly to determine the recycled content value. Mechanical, electrical and plumbing components cannot be included in this calculation. Recycled content ls defined in accordancewith the International Organization ofStandards document, ISO ieosi —Envlionmental labels and declarations— Self-dee/axed endinnmental claims Clype II etnitonmenial labeling). S Postronsumer material b as este material generated by households or hycommercid, industesil and institutional facilities in their role as end-users dew pcoduct, whichcon no looser lie used foe its intended purpose. 3 Preconsumermatetial ls defined as rasonlal dhrerted from diewaste sire= during the esindsctufing poxes& Reutilization °treated:di (Seamark, ittrindorsav generated In aprotess andeapablearbeing techImedwithin the same proem, that generated 101s excluded. MR CREDIT 4 2009 EDITION LEER REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 243 EFTA00281782 CI Credit 4 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Products with recycled content reduce virgin materials use and solid waste volumes. As the number of building products containing recycled content grows, the marketplace for recycled materials develops. Postconsumer recycled content is derived from materials that can no longer be used for their original purpose, and preconsumer recycled content consists of raw material diverted from the waste stream during the manufacturing process. Although the use of both types of recycled content is encouraged, postconsumer recycled content is accorded greater value because of its increased environmental benefit over the life cycle of the product. Economic Issues Many commonly used products are now availablewith recycled content, including metals, concrete, masonry, gypsum wallboard, acoustic tile, carpet, ceramic tile, rubber flooring and wall base, and insulation. Research all recycled-content materials for environmental pros and cons; if the product with recycled content is not as durable as its conventional counterpart, the environmental benefits may be compromised by the need for more frequent replacement Most recycled-content products, however, exhibit performance similar to products containing only virgin materials and can be incorporated into building projects with ease and little to no cost premium. 2. Related Credits Coordinate recycled material procurement with a construction waste management plan to make use of on-site salvaged deconstruction and demolition waste. There are opportunities for synergies with the following credits: ■ MR Credit a: Construction Waste Management ■ MR Credit 3: Materials Reuse When purchasing new materials, look for recycled-content materials that use local waste products and are remanufactured locally to take advantage of synergies with MR Credit 5, Regional Materials. Check recycled-content materials for problematic air emissions, especially with synthetic products such as plastic, rubber, or polyester. Make sure that any recycled-content materials are considered in the planning and execution of I EQ Credit 4, Low-Emitting Materials. The project materials costs used here need to be consistent with those used in the following credits: ■ MR Credit 3.1: Materials Reuse • MR Credit 5: Regional Materials • MR Credit 6: Rapidly Renewable Materials 3. Summary of Referenced Standard International Standard ISO 14021-1999, Environmental Labels and Declarations, Self-Declared Environmental Claims (Type 11 Environmental Labeling) International Organization for Standardization (ISO) http://ww.iso.org This International Standard specifies requirements for self-declared environmental claims, regarding products, including statements, symbols and graphics for products. It further describes selected terms commonly used in environmental claims and gives qualifications for their use. It also 244 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281783 describes a general evaluation and verification methodology for self-declared environmental claims and specific evaluation and verification methods for the selected claims. 4. Implementation Establish goals for recycled content during the design phase and include them in the project specifications. Doing so is nota LEED requirement,but itcan helpinachieving the credit To establish recycled-content goals, first add a LEED general requirements section to Division of to allow for writing LEED performance requirements for elements overlapping work sections (such as building envelope and structure).Then, specify products and materials according to CSI MasterFormat zoo4 classifications for Division or recycled-content requirements. Careful research may be required to determine the percentages of recycled content that can realistically be expected in specific products and materials. Many standard materials contain recycled content because of how they are manufactured; examples are steel, gypsum board and acoustical ceiling tile. Design and construction teams may need to research which materials contain high levels of recycled content or verify which models of a certain product line feature the desired recycled content; examples are carpet and ceramic tile. Work with subcontractors and suppliers to make sure that materials containing recycled content are available. The contractor should run preliminary calculations based on the construction budget or schedule of values during the preconstruction phase. This will allow the construction team to focus on those materials with the greatest contribution to the project's recycled content value during the buy-out phase. Reusing materials reclaimed from the same process in which they are generated—though good practice—does not contribute toward the recycled content of the material. In other words, putting waste back into the same manufacturing process from which it came is not considered recycling because it was not diverted from the waste stream. Reuse of materials includes rework, regrind, or scrap product (Source ISO t4.02.1); examples are glass culls, which are often reused in the making of new glass, as well as planer shavings, plytrim, sawdust, chips, bagasse, sunflower seed hulls, walnut shells, culls, trimmed materials, print overruns, over-issue publications, and obsolete inventories. Distinguish between postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content when tracking materials for the purpose of credit calculations (see the Definitions section). 5. Timeline and Team Run preliminary calculations during the design phase, as soon as a project budget is available, to set appropriate recycled-content targets. Identification of materials that contain recycled content should begin during the preconstruction phase. All project team members, including the general contractor and subcontractors, should consult with suppliers prior to the buy-out phase to determine the availability of materials and the specific amount of postconsumer and preconsumer content within each type of material. Careful planning before construction can minimize capital expenses and allow the project team to verify whether the procured buildingmaterials contain the desired amount of recycled content. The architect should identify and then specify products with recycled content. The contractor is responsible for ensuring the appropriate installation of these materials, documenting and tracking the cost and quantity of recycled materials, and providing this documentation to the project team. 6. Calculations Materials costs include all expenses to deliver the material to the project site. Materials cost should account for all taxes and transportation costs incurred by the contractor but exclude any cost for labor and equipment once the material has been delivered to the site. MR CI Credit 4 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 245 EFTA00281784 MR CI Credit 4 List all recycled-content materials and products and their costs. For each product, identify the percentage of postconsumer and/or preconsumer recycled content by weight, and list the recycled content information source. LEED requires that the information come from a reliable, verifiable source. Postconsumer Recycled Content Postconsumer recycled content is consumer waste, much of which comes from residential curbside recycling programs for aluminum, glass, plastic, and paper. To be a feedstock, the raw materials must have served a useful purpose in the consumer market before being used again. Other postconsumer feedstock is generated when construction and demolition debris is recycled. Preconsumer Recycled Content Preconsumer (or postindustrial) recycled content comes from process waste that an industry has sold or traded with another through the marketplace. For instance, a composite board manufacturer may obtain sawdust from a lumber mill or waste straw from a wheat farm. This definition does not include in-house industrial scrap or trimmings, which are normally fed back into the same manufacturing process. Calculate the recycled-content value of each material according to Equation s. Equation 1 Recycled % Postconsumer _ Materials % Preconsumer _ Materials Content = X + 0.5 X Recycled Content Cost Recycled Content X Cast Value ($) Calculate the project's percentage recycled content according to Equation 2. Equation 2 Percentage Recycled Content Total Recycled Content Value ($) X 100 Total Materials Cost Default Recycled Content For steel products where no recycled content information is available, assume the recycled content to be 2596 postconsumer. No other material has been recognized as having a similarly consistent minimum recycled content. Many steel products contain go% or higher recycled content if manufactured by the electric arc furnace process, so it may be beneficial to obtain actual information from the manufacturer rather than relying on the default value. Calculating Assembly Recycled Content An assembly can be either a product formulated from multiple materials (e.g., concrete) ora product made up of subcomponents (e.g., a workstation). For assembly recycled contents, determine the percentage byweight of the postconsumer recycled content and the preconsumer recycled content. For subcomponents, determine the percentage by using the weights of the component elements. No consideration is given to relative costs of the materials or the subcomponents. For example, a pound of steel in a storage unit is of equal significance as a pound of fabric on a panel. To incorporate assembly recycled content into Equation 2, use Equation 3 and add the resulting value to Equations 2'5 total recycled content value: 246 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281785 Equation 3 Assembly Recycled Content Value (5) % Postconsumer Recycled Content Total Assembly Weight X Assembly Cost % Preconsumer Recycled Content Total Assembly Weight X 0.5 X Assembly Cost Table t shows a sample calculation of the assembly recycled contents for a hypothetical concrete mix. The cement type includes a small amount of preconsumer content. The fly ash is a by-product of coal-fired electrical generation, and slag is a by-product of steel production. The aggregate comes from concrete demolition that has been recycled, ground, and washed. Unfortunately, even though the batch plant recaptures the water it uses in cleaning the trucks and bins, this environmentally responsible practice cannot be counted as being preconsumer. Table 1. Sample Assembly Recycled Content Calculation for Concrete • Postconsumer Preconsumer Components Weight (Ibs) % Weight (Ibs) % Weight (Ibs) Cement 282 10% 28 Fly Ash 282 100% 282 Water 275 Slag 750 100% 750 Recycled Concrete Aggregate 1000 100% 1000 Sand 1200 Sample Totals 3.789 1000 1060 Postconsumer Content (1000/3789) 26.4% Preconsumer Content (1060(3789) 28.0% Table 2. Sample Assembly Recycled Content for BIFMA Typical Workstation Configuration Manufacturer Lambda Furniture Product Line High End Workstations BIFMA Typical Configuration Workstation Con iguration 0010 Postconsumer Preconsumer Component Weight fibs) % Weight fibs) % Weight (Ibs) Aluminum 25.0 53% 13.3 47% 11.8 Wood 35.0 3% 1.1 87% 30.5 Steel 650.0 22% 143.0 5% 32.5 Textile 20.0 100% 20.0 0% 0.0 Other 23.0 0% 0.0 0% 0.0 Sample Totals 753.0 177.4 74.7 Postconsumer Content (177.4/753.0) 23.4% Preconsumer Content 174.7/753.0) 9.9% Systems Furniture Materials listed in CSI MasterFormar Division 12 (Furniture) should be included in the calculation of MR Credit 4, Recycled Content. This category includes systems furniture. Teams may use the percentages of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content determined by the product manufacturerforthetypicalworkstationconfigurationthatbestrepresentstheirprojectinstallation. MR CI Credit 4 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 247 EFTA00281786 MR CI Credit 4 This approach also may be used in calculating MR Credit 6, Rapidly Renewable Materials, and MR Credit 7, Certified Wood. The Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturers Association (BIFMA) International has defined typical workstation configurations for both open plans and private offices, available at http://www.bifma.org. Using these typical configurations, manufacturers have determined the recycled content percentages for their individual product lines. Table a illustrates a manufacturer's calculation. Project teams should obtain this documentation from the manufacturer. Project teams most likely in conjunction with their furniture supplier, must separate their total new furniture costs according to the industry-typical configurations for each manufacturer and product line. Multiply hese segmented values bythe manufacturer's recycled-content percentages (Table 3). Table 3. Sample Spreadsheet for Recycled Content Product Company Product Cost (5) % Postconsumer Postccesumer Value (5) % Preconsumer Preconsumer Value (5) Recycled Content Information Source Steel lintel Alpha Steel 400 25.0% 100 0% 0 25% LEED default Wheatboard shelving Beta Mills 1,950 0% 0 100.0% 1.950 Cut sheet Fireproofing Gamma 3,300 insulation 25.0% 825 0% 0 Product brochure Metal doors and frames Delta doors 920 59.0% 543 31.9% 293 Product brochure Rolling service door Epsilon Specials 2,100 55.0% 1.155 27.9% 586 Product brochure Glass side lights Zeta Glaze 4,500 10.0% 450 5.8% 261 Cut sheet Gypsum wall board Eta Wall 9,900 20.0% 1.980 0% 0 Letter from factory Acoustic ceilings Theta Tiles 3,680 42.4% 1.560 20.6% 758 Product brochure Acoustic insulation Iota Insulates 2'340 0% 0 75.0% 1,755 Letter from factory Carpet tile Ranlla Karpet 63,293 45.0% 24,051 6.8% 4.304 Product brochure Systems furniture. new Lambda Furniture 288,366 23.6% 68,054 9.9% 28.548 Manufacturer's typical Seating Lambda Furniture 59,253 26.0% 15,406 11.7% 6,933 Manufacturer's detail Conference tables Mu Mills 19,751 2.8% 553 81.0% 15.998 Product brochure File cabinets Mu Mills 27,652 22.0% 6.083 5.0% 1,383 Product brochure Subtotals $120,760 562.769 Total Construction Material Value 5341.214 Less MR 3.1 Value -12.640 Net Construction Material Value 5170.394 Division 12 Material Value 598.722 Less MR 3.2 Value -203.700 Net Project Material Value 5565.466 % Postconsumer + 1(2 Preconsumer ff120.760 + 0.5 x 62.769) (565,466) 26.9% MRc4, 2 points eamed 26.9% > 20% 248 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281787 This approach was developed so that project teams would not have to build the credit values starting from individual workstation component counts, costs, and recycled-content percentages. However, if a project team has purchased components that have rapidly renewable contents outside a s% range of those used in the manufacturer's published percentages for the typical configurations, projectspecific detail will be required. In this case, request that the manufacturer prepare an assembly recycled-content calculation, similar to Table a, for the actual products purchased. Other products, such as seating, storage units, and conference tables, are not included in typical configurations. For some of these items, there are consistent attributes across a product line; the percentage of recycled content of a steel 3-drawer filewill be the same as that in as-drawer file. When this is the case, identify the dollar amount for all products used on the project within the product line and multiply by the recycled-content percentages. Productswithout consistent attributes must be addressed separately. Table 3 shows examples of both situations. Exclusions Excluded from the credit calculation is the salvaged and refurbished material value of reused materials as defined in MR Credit 3.1, Materials Reuse. Default Materials Value The LEED for Commercial Interiors Rating System has no default relationship between the value (in dollars) of materials and total construction costs. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Record product names, manufacturers' names, costs, percentage postconsumer content, and percentage preconsumer content. • Retain cutsheets to document the listed products' recycled content 8. Examples The total materials cost (excluding labor and equipment) for Sparting & Company's tenant improvement project is $270,000. Table 4 lists recycled-content products purchased for the project, the product cost, and the percentage postconsumer or preconsumer content for each. For this example, the total combined value of postconsumer content plus half the preconsumer content of the total cost of all materials is 11.31%. The project earns 1 point under MR Credit 4. MR CI Credit 4 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 249 EFTA00281788 MR CI Credit 4 Table 4. Sample Calculations for Recycled Content Total Construction Cost 4600,000 Default Total Materials Cost (45% of Total Construction Cost) 4270,000 Product Name Vendor Product Cost (5) % Postconumer %Preconsumer Recycled Content Value (Equation 1) (S) Recycled Content Information Source Structural steel Multi Steel 40.000 10.00% 85.00% 21.000 Structural manufacturer Underlay aggregate ABC Foundation 21.000 20.00% 4.200 Concrete manufacturer Particleboard Sol's Big Boards 4.000 100.00% 2.000 Manufacturer Gypsum board Gypsum R Us 8.550 78.00% 3.335 Manufacturer Combined Value of Postconsumer + 1/2 Preconsumer Content (Total Re ycled Content Value) 430,535 Combined Value of Postconsumer + 1/2 Preconsumer Content. as a Percentage of Default Total Materials 11.31% Cost (Total Percent Recycled Content (Equation 2) Total Points Documented 1 Figure 1. Preconsumer versus Postconsumer Recycled Content -61 SCRAP STEEL 6 PRIXESSte f0a 0001 IMNUIACTURIN6 •PROXCIS MAO( MOM MATPAL Kean WO Tilt SOME IMAPJFACTUING MISS D3 OCT OAP AS Pit (MUM IMMO (MINT • INSIA,A)A1 MI•COMULIM IPSOCUNG SCRIP MIL 6 SCID 70 A KA* TOOL IWORMIUPER MOM IrWMFACIURER "._,ENIPAIISSTEU SCRAP} TM STEILISVIELTIO PI WIPACEAND ialUDIMOSME EIS TO al SOW FOR NEW ,ROMC3 POST.COMUMUI ."-NatoliNG 714 STIR S ' A UMW P 9. Exemplary Performance Project teams may earn an Innovation in Design credit for exemplary performance by achieving a total recycled-content value of 30% or more. 250 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281789 10. Regional Variations The location of the project site affects the availability of locally sourced materials. Availability of building materials containing recycled content may vary by region based on the proximity of suppliers. Some materials, such as structural steel, will be readily available for any project site; others may be manufactured or distributed in specific regions only. A project team may need to decide whether it is more sustainable to use a local material containing virgin content or to import a material containing recycled content from a long distance. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Recycled-content materials may require different maintenance practices than conventional products. When sourcing recycled products, request maintenance recommendations from the manufacturer and give this information to the operations team. The duplication, replacement, and repair of recycled-content materials will be easier if information abouttheinstalled productshasbeen maintained. Encourage thecreation ofa sustainable purchasing plan and provide building operators with lists of the installed products and their manufacturers, such as the documentation used in the LEED application. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http:/ (projecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Government Resources Check with the solid waste authority or natural resources departments in your city or county. Many local governments provide information on recyclers and recycled content product manufacturers within their region. Websites U.S. Federal Trade City Guides forthe Use of Environmental Marketing Claims, 16 CPR 260.7 (e) http://vnvw.ftc.govfbcp/gmruleiguides980427.htm The guides provided on this site represent administrative interpretation of Section s of the FTC Act to environmental advertising and marketing practices. BuildingGreen, Inc., GreenSpec GreenSpec contains detailed listings for more than 2,000 green building products, and each entry includes environmental data, manufacturer information, and links to additional resources. California Integrated Waste Management Board, Recycled Content Product Directory http://ww.civnnb.ca.govIrcp Developed by the CIWMB, the Recycled Content Product Directory is a searchable database for recycled content products. Center for Resourceful Building Technology, Guide to Resource-Efficient Building Elements http://crbt.ncat.orgi The directory of environmentally responsible building products is a resource that provides introductory discussions for each topic and contact information for specific products, including salvaged materials. (The CRBT project is no longer active, and the CRBT website is no longer updated. The National Center for Appropriate Technology is providing this website for archival purposes only.) MR CI Credit 4 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 251 EFTA00281790 MR CI Credit 4 Oikos Oikos is a searchable directory of efficient building products and sustainable design resources. Recycled Content: What Is It and What Is It Worth? Environmental Building News, February zoos. U.S. EPA Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines Program http://www.epaavicpziproducts.htm The Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines Program contains EPA information on recycledcontent materials with guidelines for recycled percentages. It also includes a searchable database of suppliers. Construction Specifications Institute, Green Format This database from the features standardized reporting format for manufacturers to report recycled content as well as certifications of recycled content, and other environmental and sustainable attributes. Thewebsite is based on principles ofISO 4021- Environmental labels and declarations — Self-declared environmental claims (Type II Environmental Labelling) and ASTM E 2129 Standard Practice for Data Collection for SustainabilityAssessment of Building Products. 13. Definitions Assembly recycled content is the percentage of material in a product that is either postconsumer or preconsumer recycled content. It is determined by dividing the weight of the recycled content by the overall weight of the assembly. Fly ash is the solid residue derived from incineration processes. Fly ash can be used as a substitute for Portland cement in concrete. Net project material value includes the construction material value and the CSI Division 12 (Furniture and Furnishings) material value, the lesser of material values for mechanical and electric components, and the salvage value identified in the MR credits. Postconsumer recycled content is the percentage of material in a product that was consumer waste. The recycled material was generated by household, commercial, industrial, or institutional end-users and can no longer be used for its intended purpose. It includes returns of materials from the distribution chain (ISO 14021). Examples include construction and demolition debris, materials collected through recycling programs, discarded products (e.g., furniture, cabinetry, decking), and landscaping waste (e.g., leaves, grass clippings, tree trimmings). Preconsumer recycled content, formerly known as postindustrial content, is the percentage of material in a product that is recycled from manufacturing waste. Examples include planer shavings, sawdust, bagasse, walnut shells, culls, trimmed materials, overissue publications, and obsolete inventories. Excluded are rework, regrind, or scrap materials capable of being reclaimed within the same process that generated them (ISO 4021). Recycled content is the proportion, by mass, of preconsumer or postconsumer recycled material in a product (ISO 14021). 252 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281791 REGIONAL MATERIALS Credit MR Credit 5 Points 1.2 points Intent To increase demand for building materials and products that are extracted and manufactured within the region, thereby supporting the regional economy and reducing the environmental impacts resulting from transportation. Requirements OPTION 1 (1 point) Use a minimum of 2O% of the combined value of construction and Division t2. (Furniture) materials and products that are manufactured' regionally within a radius of soo miles. OR OPTION 2 (2 points) Meet the requirements for Option t. Use a minimum of to% of the combined value of construction and Division 12. (furniture) materials and products extracted, harvested or recovered, as well as manufactured, within soo miles of the project. ]lanulutetigg refers final fristftitith.otcomptifient. into the building ptitt.tatt i 041 is tut nislwdartd iratallcd by the tradtiiiiten. For cx.ititple. if the ftuidtture conic. hum O.11.s.Rxas. Ott lunibvt rum %Iinctitricri Britiiih Cafiunilitui ft :id the jot.: i. aN, c,nblvd iu Kent. "C”hinlifitiiiiit hot the lc.,:iunul the linft I ,iientIth is Kr rit i Vt'sitini!ttni MR CREDIT 5 it 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 253 EFTA00281792 MR CI Credit 5 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues The use of regional building materials reduces transportation activities and associated pollution. Trucks, trains, ships, and other vehicles deplete finite reserves of fossil fuels and generate air pollution. It also is important to address the source of raw materials used to manufacture building products; some are harvested or extracted far from the point of manufacture, also contributing to air and water pollution associated with transportation. Economic Issues The availability of regionally manufactured building materials depends on the project location. In some areas, the majority of products needed for the project can be obtained within a 500-mile radius. In other areas, only a small portion or no building materials can be sourced locally. However, the purchase of regional building materials is generally more cost-effective because of reduced transportation costs. Also, the support of regional manufacturers and labor forces retains capital in the community, contributing to a more stable tax base and a healthier local economy, as well as showcases the resources and skills of the region. 2. Related Credits Specifying regional materials to achieve this credit may affect the levels of achievement for the following credits: ■ MR Credit 3: Materials Reuse • MR Credit 4: Recycled Content • MR Credit 6: Rapidly Renewable Materials Set goals early for materials use; assess the availability of regional materials and determine the best available products to minimize the project's environmental impact. The use of life-cycle assessment tools may be employed in the decision-making process. The project materials costs used in this credit need to be consistent with those used in the following credits: ■ MR Credit 3.1: Materials Reuse • MR Credit 4: Recycled Content • MR Credit 6: Rapidly Renewable Materials 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this credit. 4. Implementation The point of manufacture is considered the place of final assembly of components into the building product that is furnished and installed by the tradesworkers. For example, if the hardware comes from Dallas, the lumber comes from Vancouver, and the joist is assembled in Kent, Washington, then the location of the final assembly is Kent, Washington. It may require careful research to determine what local products are available, so evaluate this credit early in the design process. This credit is achieved by summing the cost of all materials that are sourced, extracted, and manufactured within 500 miles of the construction site. If the material contains components that were sourced from a place within 500 miles but the final assembly was farther away, the product cannot be counted toward the credit. In cases where products and construction components are assembled on-site, the individual components that are extracted within 500 miles of the site will be counted toward this credit. 254 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281793 The general contractor should work with subcontractors and suppliers to verify availability of materials that are extracted, harvested, or recovered and manufactured locally. The contractor should run preliminary calculations based on the construction budget or schedule of values during the preconstruction phase. This will allow the construction team to focus on those materials with the greatest contribution to this credit as early as possible. 5. Timeline and Team Run preliminary calculations; as soon as a project budget is available, to set appropriate regional materials targets. Architects should specify in the construction documents products that are extracted, harvested, recovered, and manufactured within 500 miles and work with the general contractor on approved alternatives that meet the requirements ofthis credit Duringconstruction, the general contractor is typically responsible for documenting the amounts and values of regionally harvested and manufactured materials used on the project The general contractor must track the materials cost of each locally harvested and manufactured product that will be applied to this credit. 6. Calculations List products that were extracted, harvested, or recovered and manufactured within 500 miles of the project site. Indicate the manufacturer, the product cost, the distance between the project site and the manufacturer, and the distance between the project site and the extraction site for each raw material contained within each product. Materials costs include all expenses to deliver the materials to the project site. Materials costs should account for all taxes and transportation costs incurred by the contractor but exclude any cost for labor and equipment once the material has been delivered to the site. Calculate the percentage of local materials using Equation'. Equation 1 Percentage Local Materials Total Cost of Local Materials (s) X 100 Total Materials Cost 15) No Default Materials Value The LEED for Commercial Interiors Rating System has no default relationship between the value (in dollars) of materials and total construction costs. Reused and Salvaged Materials Reused and salvaged materials that satisfy the requirements of MR Credit 3 may also contribute to MR Credit S. Use the location from which they were salvaged as the point of extraction, and use the location of the salvaged goods vendor as the point of manufacture. For materials with more than r point of manufacture or extraction, all within the 500-mile radius, list the component with the greatest distance. If a portion of the material was either manufactured or extracted beyond the 500-mile radius, list only that portion and associated cost satisfying the credit requirement. Forassemblies or products manufacturedwithinthe500-mile radius that contain some components extracted farther away, use multiple lines when listing purchases. Base the proportionality of such products' costs on the weight of their various components (see the example for concrete in Tables and 2.) MR CI Credit 5 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 255 EFTA00281794 MR CI Credit 5 Table 1. Sample Assembly Percentage Regionally Extracted Calculation for Concrete Components Weight (lbs) Distance between Project & Extraction Site (miles) Weight Contributing to Regional Extraction (lbs) Cement 282 1.250 0 Fly Ash 282 125 282 Water 275 1 275 Slag 750 370 750 Recycled Concrete & Aggregate 1,000 8 1,000 Sand 1,200 18 1,200 Component Totals 3,789 NA 3,507 Percent Regionally Extracted Materials (3.50773,789) 92.6% Table 2. Sample Spreadsheet for Regional Materials Product Manufacturer Distance_ Between Project & Manufacturer (miles) Distance Between Project & Extraction site (miles) m Product Cost (51 Product Cost IS) Regional Content Information Source Concrete (manufactured and extracted) Omega Mix 5 926 370 926 Letter from supplier Concrete (just manufactured) Omega Mix 5 74 Wood Paneling Zeta Panels 25 6.000 Contractor submittal Casework Chi Casework 20 30.000 Letter from fabricator Gypsum wall Nu Gyps 320 9.900 312 9,900 Letter from fabricator Wood flooring. salvaged Xi Floors 20 2.640 Cut sheet Ceiling light fixtures Omicron Luminaire 275 21.000 Product brohure Furniture, reused Pi Works 45 203,700 Letter from prior owner Component Totals $274,240 $10,826 Total Construction Material Value $341,214 Division 12 Material Value $598,722 Total Project Material Value $939,986 Percent Manufactured Regionally (274,240/939,986) 29.2% 29.2% > 20% MR 5, 1 point earned Percent Both Manufactured Regionally & Extracted Regionally (10,8261939,986) 1.2% 1.1% < 10.0% MR 5, 2nd point not earned Exclusions Do not include mechanical, electrical, and plumbing system components in the calculations for this credit. Compared with structural and finish materials, mechanical and electrical equipment tends to have a high dollar value relative to the amount of material it contain and that high dollar value would skew the results of the calculation. 256 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281795 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. • Compile a list of product purchases manufactured, extracted, or harvested regionally. • Recordmanufacturers' names, productcosts,distancesbenveentheproject and manufacturer, and distances between the project and the extraction site. • Retain cutsheets that document product manufacture locality within a 500-mile radius of the project site. • In addition, for Option 2, prepare cutsheets to document extraction within a zoo-mile radius of the project site. 8. Examples EXAMPLE 1 Figure 2 illustrates an example for a hypothetical slag concrete material that is extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles of a project site. Figure 2. Extraction and Manufacturing Location of Fly Ash Concrete r Portland Gravel Silica Cement Extraction Extraction Manufacturing Concrete 4Pri4W-- a 'zing Plant Lime Extraction eee Slastfurnace Slag Extraction al• ••• ••••• ••• I I I / / * noon SbeLocation • Ixecake of 'Wresting littracticn • Ailinuisces.) SOO Mile Radii, from Onosett Se, MR CI Credit 5 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 257 EFTA00281796 MR CI Credit 5 EXAMPLE 2 Tenant Xis evaluating material purchases to meet the requirements of MR Credit s. Table 3 lists materials and components that comply with this credit. Table 3. Sample Material for MR Credit 5, Options 1 and 2 Distance of project from point of harvest or extraction Distance of project from point of manufacture or assembly Product Included for Option 1? Product Included for Option 2? Flooring: Lumber harvested 450 miles Flooring mill 400 miles Yes Yes I Beams: Steel extraction 1000 miles Steel mill 300 miles Yes No Concrete: Cement 65D miles Aggregate: 150 miles Cement plant 600 miles Aggregate mand sand 100 iles No for cement Yes for aggregate and sand No for cement Yes for aggregate Drywall: Gypsum factory 200 miles Drywall supplier 600 miles No No 9. Exemplary Performance Project teams may earn an Innovation in Design credit for exemplary performance by achieving a total value of regionally harvested, extracted, and manufactured materials of 20% or more. 10. Regional Variations Local availability of materials will vary by region. Regional building materials are often consistent with regional design aesthetics and may be more stable in the local climate than materials from other regions. Consider the local vernacular architecture and adopt a design that incorporates locally produced materials wherever possible. Those project sites near sources for material origin and manufacture will have an advantage in the achievement of this credit. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations The duplication, replacement, and repair of regional materials will be easier if information about the installed products has been maintained. Encourage the creation of a sustainable purchasing plan and provide building operators with lists of the installed products and their manufacturers, such as the documentation used in the LEED application. 12. Resources Please see I.SGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http:(/www.usgbc.org/p -ojecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Government Resources Check with the local chamber of commerce and regional and state economic development agencies for building materials manufacturers in the region. 13. Definitions An assembly can be eithera product formulated from multiple materials (e.g.,concrete) or a product made up of subcomponents (e.g., a worlcstation). Regionally extracted materials are raw materials taken from within a soo-mile radius of the project site. Regionally manufactured materials are assembled as finished products within a zoo-mile radius of the project site. Assembly does not include on-site assembly, erection, or installation of finished components. 258 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281797 RAPIDLY RENEWABLE MATERIALS a Credit Points MR Credit 6 1 point Intent To reduce the use and depletion of finite raw materials and long-cycle renewable materials by replacing them with rapidly renewable materials. Requirements Use rapidly renewable construction and Division 12 (Furniture and Furnishings) materials and products for 5% of the total value of all materials and products used in the project, based on cost. Rapidly renewable building materials and products are made from plants that are typically harvested within a lo-year or shorter cycle. MR CREDIT 6 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 259 EFTA00281798 MR CI Credit 6 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Many conventional building materials require large inputs of land, natural resources, capital, and time to produce. Conversely, rapidly renewable materials generally require fewer of these inputs and are likely to have fewer environmental impacts. Rapidly renewable resources are replenished faster than traditional materials—they are planted and harvested in a cycle of to years or less. Sourcing rapidly renewable materials reduces the use of raw materials whose extraction and processing have greater environmental impacts. A common example is the use of agricultural fiber such as wheat in composite panels as a substitute for wood products, reducing the overall consumption of wood. Irresponsible forestry practices cause ecosystem and habitat destruction, soil erosion, and stream sedimentation; replacing wood products with rapidly renewable resources reduces a product's overall environmental impact. Because of their intensive production and shorter growing cycles, rapidly renewable crops also require significantly less land to produce the same amount of end product; some are byproducts that are otherwise considered waste. Bio-based plastics (e.g., from corn starch) and other rapidly renewable resources are beginning to provide alternatives to some petroleum-based plastics. Many products made from rapidly renewable materials have interesting visual or tactile qualities. Using these materials in a visually prominent way provides opportunities for learning about manufacturing processes, economics, environmental impacts, and embodied energy. Economic Issues Land saved by the use of rapidly renewable materials will be available for a variety of other uses, including open space and food crops. Because rapidly renewable resources can be harvested more quickly, they tend to give faster payback on investment for producers. Although rapidly renewable materials can carry a price premium over their conventional counterparts, as demand increases, they are expected to become cost-competitive with conventional materials. 2. Related Credits Rapidly renewable materials like cork or bamboo plywood may come from distant sources and may affect achievement of the following credit: ■ MR Credit 5: Regional Materials To reduce the detrimental effects some materials have on indoor air quality, project teams should follow the guidelines of the prerequisites and credits below and specify materials and furnishings that do not release harmful or irritating chemicals, such as volatile organic compounds (VOCs), from paints and solvents. ■ MR Credit 3.1: Materials Reuse • I EQ Credit 4.1: Low-Emitting Materials—Adhesives and Sealants • I EQ Credit 4.2: Low-Emitting Materials—Paints and Coatings • IEQ Credit 4.3: Low-Emitting Materials—Flooring Systems ■ IEQ Credit 44: Low-Emitting Materials—Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products ■ IEQ Credit 4.5: Low-Emitting Materials—Systems Furniture and Seating The project materials costs used in this credit need to be consistent with those used in the following credits: ■ MR Credit 4: Recycled Content • MR Credits: Regional Materials 260 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281799 Reused furniture that qualifies for MR Credit 3.2, Materials Reuse—Furniture and Furnishings, should be excluded from the credit calculation (numerator and denominator) for this credit. 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this credit. 4. Implementation Establish a goal for the use of rapidly renewable materials early in the design phase, identify possible building materials that may be substituted with rapidly renewable products, and find vendors that can achieve this goal. Tablet provides examples of common rapidly renewable materials, and Figure 1 illustrates the typical harvest rate of sample materials. Identify products and vendors in the project specifications and plans, and work with the general contractor to source acceptable alternatives. During construction, make sure that the specified rapidly renewable materials are installed. Examples of rapidly renewable materials include bamboo flooring and plywood, cotton batt insulation, linoleum flooring, sunflower seed board panels, wheatboard cabinetry, wool carpeting, cork flooring, bio-based paints, geotextile fabrics such as coir and jute, soy-based insulation and form-release agent, and straw bales. Figure 1. Harvest Rates of Sample Materials 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 Traditional Cronin Cycle Rap, Renewable Renato llama Code • im. ICED definition a raulllenenwable • Spruce/ Pinot ir Forests Cork Bamboo Natural Rubber Wheat Cotton Straw (Linoleum Linseed ) 5. Timeline and Team Run preliminary calculations during the early design phase, as soon as a project budget is available, to determine the feasibility of achieving this credit and identify the quantity of material (by cost) that must be purchased to meet the 596threshold (refer to the Examples and Calculations sections). Research the availability and cost of rapidly renewable materials. The architect should specify these materials. During construction, the general contractor should ensure that the specified rapidly MR CI Credit 6 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 261 EFTA00281800 MR CI Credit 6 renewable materials are properly installed and collect product documentation from manufacturers to give to the project team. 6. Calculations Identify those products and materials that are considered rapidly renewable and sum the cost. Materials costs include all expenses to deliver the material to the project site. Materials costs should account for all taxes and transportation costs incurred by the contractor but exclude any cost for labor and equipmentoncethe material has been delivered to the site. Do not include reused furniture that qualifies for MR Credit 3.2, Materials Reuse—Furniture and Furnishings. Divide that sum by the total project material value (in dollars), as shown in Equation]. Equation 1 Percent of Rapidly Renewable Materials Total Cost of Rapidly Renewable Material (5) Total Materials Cost ($) X Rio Assembly Rapidly Renewable Content Assemblies are products made of multiple materials,either in their formulation (e.g., particleboard) or in their manufacture (e.g.,workstation components). The determination of the rapidly renewable content of an assembly should not be confused with the calculation shown in Equation I, where the final value is expressed in dollars. For assembly rapidly renewable content, determine the fraction of the assembly that is considered rapidly renewable, by weight. Table s illustrates a manufacturer's workstation product lines for a Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association (BIFMA) International typical workstation configuration. Table 1. Sample Assembly Rapidly Renewable Content for BIFMA Typical Configuration Manufacturer Lambda Furniture Product Line High End Workstations BIFMA Typical Configuration Workstation Configuration 0010 Component Weight (lbs) Percent Rapidly Renewable Weight Contributing to Rapidly Renewable Content (lbs) Wheat Board 28.0 100% 28.0 Top Veneer, Bamboo 4.0 75% 3.0 Other 721.0 0% 0.0 Totals 753.0 31.0 Percent Rapidly Renewable (31.0/753.0) 4.1% For subcomponents, determine the percentage by using the weights of the component elements. No consideration is given to relative costs of the subcomponents. In the example in Table 2, the top veneer is 75% bamboo by weight, and thus 75% of 3 pounds counts toward the rapidly renewable content. Systems Furniture In LEED for Commercial Interiors, those materials listed in Construction Specification Institute (CSI) MasterFormatTM 2004 Division 12 (Furnishings) must be included in the calculation of MR Credit 6. This CSI category includes systems furniture. A team may use the percentages of rapidly renewable content determined by the product manufacturer for the typical workstation configuration that best represents the project installation. This approach also may be used in calculating MR Credits 4 and 7. 262 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281801 BIFMA International has defined typical workstation configurations forboth open plans and private offices, available at http://www.bifina.org. Using these typical configurations, manufacturers have determined the rapidly renewable content percentages for their individual product lines. Table t shows an example of a manufacturer's calculation. Project teams should have this documentation from the manufacturer available for reference during the certification review process. Project teams, most likelyinconjunctionwith theirfurniture supplier,will needto separate theirtotal new furniture costs to correspond to the industry-typical configurations for each manufacturer and product line. These segmented values are then multiplied by the manufacturer's rapidly renewable content percentages for the credit calculation. See Table a. Table 2. Sample Spreadsheet for Rapidly Renewable Materials Product Name Compan y Product IS/ % Renewable Renewable Value ($) Rapidly renewable content information source Countertops . wheatboard Rho Tops 6.700 30.0% 2.010 Letter Casework Sigma Mills 30.000 50.0% 15.000 Letter Linoleum flooring Tau Flogs 882 60.0% 529 Cut sheet Bamboo window blinds Upsilon Shades 14,079 75.0% 10,559 Product Literature Systems Furniture, new Lambda Cubicles 228,366 4.1% 9,363 Manufacturer's typical Tables, new Mu Mills 19,751 88.4% 17,460 Manufacturer's detail Rapidly Renewable Materials Subtotal $54,921 Total Construction Material Value $341,214 Division 12 Material Value $598,772 Total Project Material Value $939,986 Percent Rapidly Renewable Value (54,921/939,986) 5.8% 5.8% > 5.0% MR 6 earned This approach was developed so that project teams would not have to build the credit values starting from individual workstation component counts, costs, and rapidly renewable content percentages. However, if a project team has purchased components that have rapidly renewable contents outside a 5% range ofthose used in the manufacturer's published percentages for the typical configurations, project-specific detail will be required. This may occur when certain green materials have been specified. In this case, request that the manufacturer prepare an assembly rapidly renewable content calculation for the actual products purchased. Other products, such as seating, storage units, and conference tables, are not included in typical configurations. For some of these items, there are consistent attributes across a product line; the percentage of rapidly renewable content of a 36-inch-diameter table will be the same as that in a 72-inch-diameter table. When this is the case, identify the dollar amount for all products used on the project within the product line and multiply by the rapidly renewable percentages. Products without consistent attributes must be addressed separately. Table 2 shows examples of both situations. Exclusions Do not include mechanical, electrical, and plumbing components in the calculations for this credit. Also exclude reused furniture that qualifies for MR Credit 32, Materials Reuse—Furniture and Furnishings. No Default Materials Value The LEED for Commercial Interiors Rating System has no default relationship between the value of materials and total construction cost. MR CI Credit 6 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 283 EFTA00281802 MR CI Credit 6 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. • Compile a list of rapidly renewable product purchases. • Record manufacturers' names, materials costs, the percentage of each product that is rapidly renewable criteria (by weight), and each compliant value. • Retain cutsheets that document rapidly renewable criteria. 8. Examples The total materials costs for the tenant improvement for Fry Industries is $270,000. Table 3 lists rapidly renewable products purchased for this project, the assembly cost, and the percentage of rapidly renewable content as part of assembly components. The total cost of rapidly renewable content equals 12.15% of Fry's total cost of all materials, and the project earns t point. Table 3. Sample Calculations for Rapidly Renewable Material Provide total materials cost (exclude labor, equipment) $270.000 Product name Countertop wheatboard Bamboo window blinds Cork panels Linoleum flooring Totals Vendor name Rho Company Upsilion shades Gerdes cork Tau floors Assembly product cost $6.700 $14.079 $22,000 $882 $43,661 Percentage rapidly renewable content (if part of assembly)* 30.00% 75.00% 90.00% 50.00% Value of rapidly renewable content $2,010.00 $10,559.25 $19,800.00 3441.00 $32,810 Rapidly renewable content information source Vendor Website Vendor Manufacturer letter Value of rapidly renewable content $32.810 Percentage cost of rapidly renewable content total cost of all materi Is 12.15% Points documented 1 points MR Credit 6 f 1 point): Combined value of rapidly renewable contenta5% 9. Exemplary Performance Project teams may earn an Innovation in Design credit for exemplary performance by achieving a rapidly renewable materials content of 1096 or more. 10. Regional Variations Assess the availability of rapidly renewable materials that also contribute to MR Credit 5, Regional Materials, and select products manufactured from rapidly renewable resources within soo miles of the project site. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Some rapidly renewable materials may require different maintenance practices. For example, bamboo and cork generally should not be exposed to excessive moisture from damp mopping and other common janitorial or maintenance activities. When sourcing rapidly renewable products, request maintenance recommendations from the manufacturer and give this information to the operations team. 264 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281803 The duplication, replacement, and repair of rapidly renewable materials will be easier if information abouttheinstalled productshasbeen maintained. Encouragethecreation ofa sustainable purchasing plan and provide building operators with lists of the installed products and their manufacturers, such as the documentation used in the LEED application. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http://www.usgbc.org(projecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites BuildingGreen, Inc., Environmental Building News Read an article in Environmental Building News on bamboo flooring that includes a listing of bamboo flooring suppliers. Environmental Design + Construction, Highlights of Environmental Flooring Read an Environmental Design Construction article with information on bamboo flooring, linoleum, and wool carpeting. BuildingGreen, Inc., GreenSpec GreenSpec contains detailed listings for more than 2,000 green building products that include environmental data, manufacturer information, and links to additional resources. Oikos Oikos is a searchable directory of efficient building products and sustainable design resources. 13. Definitions An assembly can be eithera product formulated from multiple materials (e.g.,concrete) or aproduct made up of subcomponents (e.g., a worlcstation). Embodied energy is the energy used during the entire life cycle of a product, including its manufacture, transportation, and disposal, as well as the inherent energy captured within the product itself. Life cycle assessment is an analysis of the environmental aspects and potential impacts associated with a product, process, or service. Rapidly renewable materials are agricultural products, both fiber and animal, that take to years or less to grow or raise and can be harvested in a sustainable fashion. MR CI Credit 6 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 285 EFTA00281804 266 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281805 CERTIFIED WOOD Credit MR Credit 7 Points 1 point Intent To encourage environmentally responsible forest management. Requirements When using new wood-based products and materials, use a minimum of so% that are certified in accordance with the Forest Stewardship Council's principles and criteria. Division 12 (Furniture) material value is included in the determination of the certified wood content. MR CREDIT 7 it 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 287 EFTA00281806 MR CI Credit 7 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues The negative environmental impacts of irresponsible forest practices can include forest destruction, wildlife habitat loss, soil erosion and stream sedimentation, water and air pollution, and waste generation. The Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) standard incorporates many criteria that contribute to the long-term health and integrity of forest ecosystems. From an environmental perspective,theelementsofresponsibleFSC-certifiedforestryincludeharvestingtimbersustainably (i.e., not removing more timber volume than replaces itself over the cutting interval, or rotation), preserving wildlife habitat and biodiversity, maintaining soil and water quality, minimizing the use of harmful chemicals, and conserving forests of high conservation value (e.g., endangered and oldgrowth forests). Economic Issues As more developing countries enter world forest product markets and their growing economies drive domestic consumption, the protection of forests will become a critical issue. As of 2007, FSCcertified forests represent the equivalent of 7% of the world's productive forests." Currently, the costs of FSC-certified wood products are equal to or higher than conventional wood products, and availability varies by region. The price of FSC-certified wood products is expected to become more competitive with conventional wood products as the world's forest resources are depleted and the forest industry adopts more sustainable business principles. Because irresponsible logging practices can have harmful social as well as environmental impacts, the socioeconomic and political components of FSC certification include respecting indigenous people's rights and adhering to all applicable laws and treaties. Certification also involves forest workers and forest-dependent communities as stakeholders and beneficiaries of responsible forest management. Responsible forest practices help stabilize economies and preserve forestland for future generations. 2. Related Credits Project teams pursuing this credit may find opportunities to achieve other MR credits. An FSC strategy should be developed early to determine whether certified wood can be sourced and manufactured within 500 miles of the site. Additionally, when specifying mixed FSC materials and pursuing IEQ Credit 4.4, determine whether the finished product will be free of urea-formaldehyde. Refer to the following credits: ■ MR Credit 5: Regional Materials ■ IEQ Credit 4.4: Low-Emitting Materials—Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products 3. Summary of Referenced Standard Forest Stewardship Council's Principles and Criteria http://www.fscus.org Certification bythe Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) is a seal ofapprovalawarded toforest managers who adopt environmentally and socially responsible forest management practices; and to companies that manufacture and sell products madefrom certifiedwood. This seal enables consumers, including architects and specifiers, to identify and procure wood products from well-managed sources and thereby use their purchasing power to influence and reward improved forest management activities around the world. LEED acceptscertificationaccordingtothe comprehensivesystemestablishedbythe internationally recognized Forest Stewardship Council. FSC was created in 1993 to establish international forest 268 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281807 management standards, known as the FSC principles and criteria, to ensure that forestry practices are environmentally responsible, socially beneficial, and economically viable. These principles and criteria are also intended to ensure the long-term health and productivity of forests for timber production, wildlife habitat, clean air and water supplies, climate stabilization, spiritual renewal, and social benefit, such as lasting community employment derived from stable forestry operations. These global principles and criteria are translated into meaningful standards at a local level through region-specific standard-setting processes. FSC also accredits and monitors certification organizations. The certifiers are independent, thirdparty auditors that are qualified to annually evaluate compliance with FSC standards on the ground and to award certifications. There are 2 types of certification: ■ Forest management certification is awarded to responsible forest managers after their operations successfully complete audits of forestry practices and plans. ■ Chain-of-custody (COC) certification is awarded to companies that process, manufacture, and/or sell products made of certified wood and who successfully complete audits to ensure proper use of the FSC name and logo, segregation of certified and noncertified materials in manufacturing and distribution systems, and observation of other relevant FSC rules (e.g., meeting minimum requirements for FSC fiber content in assembled and composite wood products). The majority of FSC certification audits performed in North America are conducted by SmartWood and Scientific Certification Systems (SCS), which are based in the United States. A limited number are performed by SGS, which is based in Europe. 4. Implementation Establish a project goal for FSC-certified wood products and identify suppliers that can achieve this goal. Research the availability of the wood species and products that they want to use, and make sure that they are available from FSC-certified sources. Mother method for lowering the impact of wood resources is to research and specify quality grades that are most readily available from wellmanaged forests. Using lower grades of wood (e.g., Architectural Woodwork Institute Grades z or 3 for lumber or veneer rather than Grade s) can dramatically reduce pressure on forests, which produce only limited quantities of top-grade timber. Contact local vendors, suppliers, and manufacturers that provide FSC-certified products as early as possible in the design phase. Design teams should provide project bidders with a list of certified vendors and encourage them to make contact early in the project to establish product availability and pricing. Consult the Resources section for information about product databases and boilerplate forms. Since the availability of certain certified wood products may vary over the life of a project, teams should consider having the owner prepurchase, store, and supply particular items to the contractor ( "furnished by the owner, installed by the contractor," or FOIC). Finding a storage location that matches the final ambient moisture of the space will ensure proper installation. Because ambient moisture is usually higher during construction, a job site is not the best location to store wood. The design team should specify in contract documents that wood products must come from forests that are certified as well-managed according to the rules of the FSC, and the team should require chain-of-custody documentation. Wherever possible, use a line-item strategy based on the current availability of specific products rather than a blanket approach. Figurer is based on information from FSC's website at http://www.fsc.orgi and outlines the FSC process when chain-of-custody documentation is required, and what types of information a project should collect. MR CI Credit 7 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 289 EFTA00281808 CI Credit 7 Figure 1. FSC Certification Process and FSC Certification Categories CerofiTotRe Required Forest management remeration is awarded to responsible forest manager after them operations successfully complete audits of forestry practices and plans. TRANSPORT Cot Required \ i • SUPPLIER / MANUFACTURER CoC Required Transport may fa under CoC requirements if the transport to the next stage involves a change of ownership of the material or product. Shippers or transport companies handling goods owned by FSC CoC certified companies are exempt from this rule. } Each wood products supplier and/or manufacturer that invoices {SC-certified wood products to a vendor must be / certified try an FSC. accredited certifier. VENDOR ( END USER Cot Required No Cot Required Each wood products vendor that Invoices FSC.certified wood products to project contractors & subcontractors must be certified by an ESCaccredited certifier. All new wood on the project should Identify which components are ESC certified. Vendor Invoice: _.) Project contractors & subcontractors are not required to have CoC certification. - All new wood products must be identified on a line item basis. Show cost of each item Identify FSC-certified products (FSC Pure, FSC Mixed Credit, FSC Mixed INN) %) - Each Invoice with FSC product must show vendor CoC number AND, for FSC.Cerdfied Wood Products: - Supply • letter from the vendor stating that the products provided are ESC-certified (FSC FSC Mixed Credit, FSC Mixed (NN) Ity Chain-of-Custody Requirements Collect all vendorinvoicesforpermanently installed wood products, FSC certified or not,purchased by the project contractor and subcontractors. Vendors are defined as those companies that sell products to the project contractor or subcontractors. Each vendor invoice must conform to the following requirements (except as noted below): a. Each wood product must be identified on a line-item basis. b. FSC products must be identified as such on a line-item basis. c. The dollar value of each line item must be shown. d. The vendor's COC certificate number must be shown on any invoice that includes FSC products. Each wood products vendor that invoices FSC-certified products must be COC certified by an FSCaccredited certifier. 270 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281809 Exceptions: In some rare instances, it may not be practical for a vendor to invoice wood products on a line-item basis because the invoice would be dozens of pages long. In such cases, the invoice should indicate the aggregate value of wood products sold by the vendor. If the wood products are FSC certified, comply with the following requirements: a. The vendor's COC number must be shown on the invoice. b. The invoice must be supplemented by a letter from the vendor stating that the products invoiced are FSC certified. c. The invoice or the letter must state whether the products are FSC Pure, FSC Mixed Credit, or FSC Mixed (NN)%. 5. Timeline and Team Consider the FSC-certified wood content of construction materials, furniture, and furnishings in the selection and purchasing process. During the design phase, the architect should incorporate certified wood products into the project plans and specifications. During construction, the contractor should review the project cost to verify that so% of wood costs are FSC-certified. As materials are purchased during construction, the general contractor must obtain and retain COC certificates. At the end of construction, the general contractor should provide the documentation needed for the LEED certification application. 6. Calculations List all new wood products (not reclaimed, salvaged, or recycled) on the project and identify which components are FSC certified. The cost of all new wood products, both NC certified and not, must be tallied. Develop a spreadsheet to calculate the amount of new wood and the amount of FSCcertified wood permanently installed on the project. Wood products that are not FSC certified and those that are identified on invoices as FSC Pure and FSC Mixed Credit should be valued at t00% of the product cost. Wood products identified as FSC Mixed (NN)% should be valued at the indicated percentage of their cost. For example, a product identified as FSC Mixed 75% should be valued at 75% of the cost. Wood products identified as NC Recycled or FSC Recycled Credit do not count toward MR Credit 7, Certified Wood. They qualify instead as recycled-content products that may contribute to MR Credit 4, Recycled Content. Using Equation], determine the percentage of FSC-certified wood. Equation 1 Certified Wood Material Percentage — FSC-certified Wood Material Value ($) Total New Wood Material Value (5) X 100 MR CI Credit 7 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 271 EFTA00281810 CI Credit 7 Table 1. Sample Assembly Percentage Wood-Based Content for BIFMA Typical Configuration. Manufacturer Lambda Furniture Product Line High End Workstations BIFMA Typical Configuration Workstation Configuration 0010 Component Weight 0bs) Less Postconsumer Weigh (Ws) Wood-based Component Weight (Ibs) FSC Certified Wood Weight (Ibs) Wheat Board 28.0 28.0 28.0 Top Veneer 4.0 4.0 0.0 Other Wood 3.0 •1.1 1.9 1.5 Non-wood content 718.0 0.0 0.0 Totals 753.0 33.9 29.5 Percent Wood (33.9/753.0) 4.5% Percent FSC Certified Wood (29.5/753.0) 3.9% Assemblies In the case of manufactured products, such as windows and some furniture systems that combine wood and nonwood materials, only the new wood portion can be applied toward the credit. To determine the value of the wood components, calculate the amount of new wood as a percentage of the total weight, volume, or cost, and the amount of FSC-certified wood as a percentage of the total weight, volume, or cost. Multiply these figures by the total value ofthe product as invoiced to project contractors, subcontractors, or buying agents. Develop a separate spreadsheet for each assemblyto calculate the amount of new wood and amount of FSC-certified wood for assemblies andenterthe summarydata as a line item on the comprehensive spreadsheet used to calculate the percentage of certified wood used in the project. To incorporate assembly FSC-certified and new wood content into Equation 1, use Equations 2 and 3 and add the resulting value to the appropriate category: Equation 2 Assembly FSC Certified Wood Material Value Weight of FSC-certified Wood in Assembly Weight of Assembly X Assembly Value (S) Equation 3 Assembty New Wood Material Value Weight of New Wood in Assembly Weight of Assembly X Assembly Value (S) Furniture and Furnishings Include the wood content of newly purchased furniture and furnishings in this calculation. Furniture and furnishings are not limited to what is supplied by the contractor; owner purchases can also be included. Systems Furniture Use the percentages of wood content and NC-certified wood content determined by the product manufacturer for the typical workstation configuration that best represents the project installation. For use in this credit, BIFMA International has defined typical workstation configurations for 272 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2O09 EDITION EFTA00281811 both open plan and private offices; they are available at limp:fiwww.bifma.org. Using these typical configurations, manufacturers have determined the wood content and the FSC-certified wood content percentages for their individual product lines. Tablet is an example of a manufacturer's calculation. Project teams, most likely in conjunction with their fumiture supplier, will need to segregate their total new fumiture costs to correspond to the industry-typical configurations for each manufacturer and product line. These segmented values are then multiplied by the manufacturer's wood content and FSC-certified wood content percentages for the credit calculation. See Table a. Table 2. MR Credit 7 Percentage Certified Wood Example Wood Product Vendor latatend Value (S) Percent Wood (by weight) Value of Wood (S) Percent Certified Wood (by weight/ Value of Certified Wood (5) Forest Stewardship Council chain.of. custody certificate number Carpentry Phi Woods 19.800 92.1% 18.240 92.1% 18,240 SWCOC-013 Door bucks Chi Bucks 720 100% 720 46.0% 331 SCS-00C-00067 Moldings Psi Trim 1,710 100% 1,710 100.0% 1,710 SCS-00C-00094 Selving Psi Trim 2,407 77% 1,753 0.0% 0 Ma Countertops Beta Mills 6,347 95% 6,030 0.0% 0 rda Casework Beta Mills 34,875 80% 27.900 58.50% 20,402 SW-00C-675 Wood doors and frames Beta Mills 383 100% 383 100.0% 383 SCS-00C-00122 Furniture systems, new Lambda Cubicles 288,366 4.5% 12,976 3.9% 11,297 Manufacturer's detail Tables, new Mu Mills 19,751 93.0% 18,974 11.0% 2,173 Manufacturer's detail Subtotal $88.786 $54,536 %Certified Wood (54.536/88.786) 61.4% 61.4% a 50.0% MR 7 earned This approach was developed so that project teams would not have to build the credit values starting from individual workstation component counts, costs, and wood content percentages. However, when a project team has purchased components that have certified-wood content outside a 596 range of that used in the manufacturer's published percentages for the typical configurations, projectspecific detail will be required. This may occur when FSC-certified materials have been specified. In this case, request that the manufacturer prepare an assembly content calculation, similar to Table 1, for the actual products purchased. Other products, such as seating, storage units, and conference tables, are not included in the typical configurations. For some of these items, there are consistent attributes across a product line: the percentage of wood content and FSC-certified wood content of a 36-inch-diameter table will be the same as that in a 72-inch-diameter table. When this is the case, identify the dollar amount for all those products used on the project within the product line and multiply by the wood content and FSC-certified wood content percentages. When this is not the case, individual products must be addressed separately. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. • Prepare the CSI MasterForrnar 2004 Divisions 3-to cost to determine the net construction materials cost. MR CI Credit 7 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 273 EFTA00281812 MR CI Credit 7 • Prepare the CSI MasterFormat" 2004 Division 12 (Furniture and Furnishings) cost to determine the net construction materials cost. • Track certified wood purchases and retain associated COC documentation. • Collect copies of vendor invoices for each certified wood product. • Maintain a l ist that identifies the percentage ofcertified wood in each purchase. 8. Examples See Tablet for a sample calculation of wood-based content fora BIFMA typical configuration. 9. Exemplary Performance Project teams may earn an Innovation in Design credit for exemplary performance by achieving an FSC-certified wood content of 95% or more of the project's total new wood. 10. Regional Variations This credit may have particular importance in areas with poor forestry practices or high forest conversion rates. Encouraging the development of local FSC markets and assigning economic value to responsible forestry practices will promote the retention of local, indigenous animal and plant species, the preservation of open space, the improvement of local air quality, and the reduction of heat-island effects for areas of developed infrastructure. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations The duplication, replacement, and repair of certified wood products will be easier if information aboutthe installed productshasbeen maintained. Encourage thecreation ofa sustainable purchasing plan and provide building operators with lists of the installed products, their manufacturers, and COC certificates, such as the documentation used in the LEED application. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (httpdhvww.usgbc.orgiprojecttools) for additional resources and other technical information. Websites Forest Stewardship Council, United States http:/fwww,fscus.org/green_building For information and practical tools such as databases of certified product suppliers, referral service, specification language, and the Designing &Building with FSC guide and forms. Print Media Sustainable Forestry: Philosophy, Science, and Economics, by Chris Maser (DelRay Beach, St. Lucie Press,1994). The Business of Sustainable Forestry: Strategies for art Industry in Transition, by Michael B. Jenkins and Emily T. Smith (Island Press,1999). Governing through Markets: Forest Certification and the Emergence of Non-State Authority, by Deanna Newsom, Benjamin Cashore, and Graeme Auld (Yale University Press, 2004). Tapping the Green Market: Certification and Management of Non-Timber Forest Products, edited by Patricia Shanley, Alan R. Pierce, Sarah A. Laird, and Abraham Galen (Earthscan Publications, 2002). 274 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281813 13. Definitions Chain-of-custody(COC) is atrackingprocedureforaproductfromthepointofharvestorextraction to its end use, including all successive stages of processing, transformation, manufacturing, and distribution. Chain-of-custody certification is awarded to companies that produce, sell, promote, or trade forest products after audits verify proper accounting of material flows and proper use of the Forest Stewardship Council name andlogo.TheCOC certificate number is listed on invoices for nonlabeled products to document that an entity has followed FSC guidelines for product accounting. Sustainable forestry is the practice of managing forest resources to meet the long-term forest product needs of humans while maintaining the biodiversity of forested landscapes. The primary goal is to restore, enhance, and sustain a full range of forest values, including economic, social, and ecological considerations. A vendor of certified wood is the company that supplies wood products to contractors or subcontractors for on-site installation. A vendor needs a chain-of-custody number if it is selling FSC-certified products that are not individually labeled; this includes most lumber. Endnotes U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Solid Waste. Municipal Solid Waste Generation, Recycling, and Disposal in the United States: Facts and Figures for zoos. zoo6. http://www.epa.govi oswirceiresources/msw-zoospdf (accessed May zoo8). • U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Solid Waste. Municipal Solid Waste Generation, Recycling, and Disposal in the United States: Facts and Figures for zoos. 2006. http://www.epa.govi oswirceiresourcesimsw-zoospdf (accessed November zoo8). U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Solid Waste. Municipal Solid Waste: 2007 Facts and Figures. zoo8. httpl/www.epa.govioswinonhazimunicipalfpubsimswatrpt.pdf (accessed November 2°08). 4 Ibid. Oberlin College Recycling Program. "Recycling Facts." httpWwww.oberlin.eduirecycleffacts.html (accessed November 2.008). • The Aluminum Association. "Aluminum Industry Vision." http:fiwwwheere.energy.goWindustry/ aluminum/pdfsfalum_vision.pdf (accessed November 2°08). ' Contractor's Report to the Board:Statewide Waste Characterization Study, December 2004. http:// www.civemb.ca.gov/PublicationsfLocalAsst/340040os.pdf (accessed December 2008) • U.S Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Solid Waste. Characterization of Building-Related Construction and Demolition Debris in the United States. http://www.epa.goviepawastefhazard/ generatiorysqgarpt.pdf (accessed January 2009). 9 Department of Natural Resources, Northeast Region. "Building Green at DNR — Northeast Region Headquarters Construction Waste & Recycling." http://dnr.wi.gov/org/land/facilitiesigreenbldg/ gbhqwaste.html (accessed November 2008). ,0 County of San Mateo, Califomia. San Mateo Countywide Guide Sustainable Buildings. 2004. http:// www.recycleworks.org/pdf/GB-guide-z-23.pdf(accessed November 2°08). Forest Stewardship Council. "FSC: Facts 8c Figures." http://wwwfsc.orgifacts-figures.html (accessed November 2008). MR CI Credit 7 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 275 EFTA00281814 276 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281815 DEVOE) ERIMOHNERETS ELMILNY Overview Americans spend an average of 90%of their time indoors, and the quality of the indoor environment therefore has a significant influence on their well-being, productivity, and quality of life. The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (the EPA) reports that pollutant levels of indoor environments may run 2 to 5 times—and occasionally more than 100 times—higher than outdoor levels.' Correspondingly, the World Health Organization (WHO) reported in its "Air Quality Guidelines for Europe, and edition," that most of an individual's exposure to air pollutants comes through inhalation of indoorair. Following the release in 1987a and in 19903ofthe EPA reports that designated indoor air pollution as a top environmental risk to public health, assessing and managing indoor pollutants have become the focus of integrated governmental and private efforts. Recent increases in building-related illnesses and "sick building syndrome," as well as increasing numbers of related legal cases, have further heightened awareness of indoor air quality (LkQ) among building owners and occupants! Strategies to improve indoor environmental quality have the potential to reduce liability for building owners, increase the resale value of the building, and improve the health of building occupants. In addition to health and liability concerns, productivity gains also drive indoor environmental quality improvements. With employees' salaries a significant cost in any commercial building, it makes good business sense to keep staff healthy and productive by improving and maintaining the quality of the indoor environment. The potential annual savings and productivity gains from improved indoor environmental quality in the United Statesare estimated at $6billionto $14billion from reduced respiratory disease, $1 billion to $4 billion from reduced allergies and asthma, $10 billionto $30billion from reduced sick building syndrome symptoms,and $aobillionto $16obillion from direct improvements in worker performance that are unrelated to health.' Overthepastaoyears,research andexperiencehave improvedourunderstandingofwhat isinvolved in attaining high indoor environmental quality and revealed manufacturing and construction practices that can prevent many indoor environmental quality problems. The use of better products and practices has reduced potential liabil ity forde sign to am members and buildingowners, inc reased market value for buildings with exemplary indoor environmental quality, and resulted in greater productivity for building occupants. In a case study included in the 1994 publication, "Greening the Building and the Bottom Line," the Rocky Mountain Institute highlighted how improved indoor environmental quality increased worker productivity by 16%, netting a rapid payback on the capital investment.' This credit category addresses environmental concerns relating to indoor environmental quality; occupants' health, safety, and comfort; energy consumption; air change effectiveness; and air contaminant management. The following are important strategies for addressing these concerns and improving indoor environmental quality: Improving Ventilation Actions that affect employee attendance and productivity will affect an organization's operating bottom line. One study estimates a 283% return on investment acsnriatedwith increased ventilation in less than 6 months? Specify building systems that will provide a high level of indoor air quality. Increased ventilation in buildings may require additional energy use, but the need for additional energy can be mitigated IEQ OVERVIEW 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 277 EFTA00281816 IEQ OVERVIEW by using heat-recovery ventilation and/or economizing strategies. Indoor air quality design can help take advantage of regional climate characteristics and reduce energy costs. In regions with significant heating and/or cooling loads, for example, using exhaust air to heat or cool the incoming air can significantly reduce energy use and operating costs. Managing Air Contaminants Protecting indoor environments from contaminants is essential for maintaining a healthy space for building occupants. Several indoor air contaminants should be reduced to optimize tenants' comfort and health. There are 3 basic contaminants: Environmental tobacco smoke (ETS),or secondhand smoke,is both the smokegivenoffby ignited tobacco products and the smoke exhaled by smokers. Environmental tobacco smoke contains thousands of chemicals, more than so of which are carcinogenic!' Exposure to environmental tobacco smoke is linked to an increased risk of lung cancer and heart disease in nonsmoking adults' and associated with increased risk of sudden infant death syndrome and asthma, bronchitis, and pneumonia in children.")Smoking should be eliminated in all indoor spaces and limited todesignated outdoor areas. Carbon dioxide (COz) concentrations can be measured to determine and maintain adequate outdoor air ventilation rates in buildings. COz concentrations are an indicator of air change effectiveness, where elevated levels indicate inadequate ventilation and possible buildup of indoor air pollutants. COz levels should be measured to validate indications that ventilation rates need to be adjusted. Although relatively high concentrations of COz alone are not known to cause serious health problems, they can lead to drowsiness and lethargy in building occupants." Particulate matter in the air degrades the indoor environment. Airborne particles in indoor environments include lint, dirt, carpet fibers, dust, dust mites, mold, bacteria, pollen, and animal dander. These particles can exacerbate respiratory problems such as allergies, asthma, emphysema, and chronic lung disease." Air filtration reduces the exposure of building occupants to these airborne contaminants, and high-efficiency filters greatly improve indoor air quality. Protecting air handling systems during construction and flushing the building before occupancy further reduce the potential for problems to arise once the building is occupied. Specifying Less Harmful Materials Preventing indoor environmental quality problems is generally more effective and less expensive thanidentifyingandsolvingthemaftertheyoccur.Onepracticalwaytopreventindoorenvironmental quality problems is to specify materials that release fewer and less harmful chemical compounds. Adhesives, paints, carpets, composite wood products, and furniture with low levels of potentially irritating off-gassing can reduce occupant exposure and harm. Appropriate scheduling of deliveries and sequencing of construction activities can reduce material exposure to moisture and absorption of off-gassed contaminants. Allowing Occupants to Control Desired Settings Working with building occupants to assess their needs will help improve building efficiencies. Providing individual lighting controls and area thermostats can improve occupants' comfort and productivity and save energy. Individual controls enable occupants to set light levels appropriate to tasks, time of day, personal preferences, and individual variations in visual acuity. Individual thermostats enable them to more accurately meet their heating and cooling needs during different seasons. 278 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281817 Providing Daylighting and Views Daylighting reduces the need for electric lighting, which lowers energy use and thereby decreases the environmental effects of energy production and consumption. Natural daylight also improves occupants' productivity and reduces absenteeism and illness. Courtyards, atria, clerestory windows, skylights, interior light shelves, exterior fins, louvers, and adjustable blinds, used alone or in combination, are effective strategies to achieve deep daylight penetration. The desired amount of daylight depends on the tasks in a given space. Daylit buildings often have several daylight zones with differing target light levels. In addition to light levels, daylighting strategies address interior color schemes, direct beam penetration, and integration with the electric lighting system. Building occupants with access to outside views have an increased sense of well-being, leading to higher productivity and increased job satisfaction. Important considerations for providing views include building orientation, window size and spacing, glass selection, and locations of interior walls. Summary Ensuring excellent indoor environmental quality requires the joint efforts of the building owner, design team, contractors, subcontractors, and suppliers. To provide optimal indoor environmental quality, automatic sensors and individual controls can be integrated with the building systems to adjusttemperature,humidity,and ventilation.Sensors can measure building CO2. levels and indicate the need for increased outdoor airflow to eliminate high levels of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) and other air contaminants. Other indoor environmental quality issues addressed by the LEED for Commercial Interiors Rating System include daylighting and lighting quality, thermal comfort, acoustics, and access to views. All of these issues have the potential to enhance the indoor environment and optimize interior spaces for building occupants. CREDIT TITLE 1E0 Prerequisite 1 IEQ Prerequisite 2 IEQ Credit 1 IEQ Credit 2 IEQ Credit 3.1 IEQ Credit 3.2 IEQ Credit 4.1 IEQ Credit 4.2 IEQ Credit 4.3 IEQ Credit 4.4 IEQ Credit 4.5 IEQ Credit 5 IEQ Credit 6.1 IEQ Credit 6.2 IEQ Credit 7.1 IEQ Credit 7.2 IEQ Credit 8.1 IEQ Credit 8.2 Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance Environmental Tobacco Smoke (ETS) Control Outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring Increased Ventilation Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan—During Construction Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan—Before Occupancy Low•Emitting Materials—Adhesives and Sealants Low•Emitting Materials—Paints and Coatings Low•Emitting Materials—Flooring Systems Low•Emitting Materials—Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products Low•Emitting Materials—Systems Furniture and Seating Indoor Chemical and Pollutant Source Control Controllability of Systems—Lighting Controllability of Systems—Thermal Comfort Thermal Comfort—Design Thermal Comfort—Verification Daylight and Views—Daylight Daylight and Views—Views for Seated Spaces IEQ OVERVIEW LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 279 EFTA00281818 280 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281819 MINIMUM INDOOR AIR QUALITY PERFORMANCE Prerequisite IEQ Prerequisite 1 Points Required Intent To establish minimum indoor air quality (IAQ) performance to enhance indoor air quality in buildings, thus contributing to the comfort and well-being of the occupants. Requirements CASE 1. Mechanically Ventilated Spaces Meet the minimum requirements of Section 4 through 7 of ASHRAE Standard 62.1- 2007, Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality (with errata but without addenda'). Mechanical ventilation systems must perform according to the ventilation rate procedure. Modify or maintain odsting building outside-air ventilation distribution system to supply at least the outdoor air ventilation rate required by ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2007 (with errata but without addenda'). lithe project team cannot meet the outside air requirements ofASHRAEStandard 62.1-2007 (with errata but without addenda') document the space and system constraints that make it not possible, complete an engineering assessment of the system's maximum cubic feet per minute (cfm) capability toward meeting the requirements of ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2007 (with errata but without addenda'), and achieve those levels, with a minimum of so cfm per person. MI other requirements must be met. CASE 2. Naturally Ventilated Projects Naturally ventilated buildings must comply with ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2007 Section 5.t (with errata but without addenda'). Modify or maintain existing building outside-air ventilation distribution system to supply at least the outdoor air ventilation rate required by ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2007 (with errata but without addenda'). If the project team cannot meet the outside air requirements ofASHRAE Standard 62.1-2007 (with errata but without addenda),document the space and system constraints that make it not possible, complete an engineering assessment of the system's maximum cubic feet per minute (cfm) capability toward meeting the requirements ofASHRAE Standard 62.t-2007(with errata but without addendal),and achieve those levels, with a minimum of 10 cfm per person. All other requirements must be met. z [4.'idizt etaeamswishiwti_use ASI I RAE upproved adUend.t Ow put pus mutt !mapped const,:unety ...tutu i.EF.Dattotut n d ttivIl IEQ PREREQUISITE 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 281 EFTA00281820 IEQ CI Prerequisite 1 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Minimum indoor air quality (IAQ) performance in buildings improves occupant comfort, wellbeing, and productivity compared with buildings with poor IAQ performance. Key strategies for maintaining minimum IAQ include limiting potential indoor contaminant sources, limiting the introduction of contaminants from potential outdoor sources, and—most importantly— determining and maintaining at least the minimum zone outdoor airflow and the minimum outdoor air intake flow required by the ventilation rate procedure of Standard 62.1-2007. Environmental Issues Providing minimum IAQ performance improves IAQ generally. Doing so can require higher energy use to operate compliant HVAC systems compared with systems that do not meet the ventilation guidelines of ASHRAE 62.1-2007. Compared with personnel costs, any premium associated with ensuring IAQ is insignificant. Poor IAQ can cause illness, and the additional energy cost of ensuring LkQ maybe offset by improved occupant productivity and lower absentee rates. The USG BC website (http://www.usgbc.org) provides links to recent studies on this issue. Economic Issues Because ASHRAE 62.1-2007 is the required standard for ventilation design for many areas, no additional design effort or cost will be incurred to met this prerequisite in general. If there are added energy costs related to increasingventilation because ofa remodel, strategies to mitigate these costs include energy recovery ventilation, economizers and controls, CO2 monitors, and demandcontrolled ventilation. The successful implementation of ASHRAE 62.1-2007 reduces potential liability regarding IAQ issues for architects, builders, owners, building operators, and occupants.'3 2. Related Credits Providing minimum IAQ performance can solve some IAQ problems by diluting contaminant concentration, but this strategy may affect indoor thermal comfort and increase energy use. The building commissioning and measurement and verification processes are tools that can improve LkQ while minimizing energy efficiency losses, as described in the following: ■ EA Prerequisite 1: Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems ■ EA Credit 2: Enhanced Commissioning ■ EA Credit 3: Measurement and Verification Dense neighborhoods and heavy traffic as well as existing site contamination can adversely affect the quality of outside air available for ventilation purposes. Refer to these z credits ■ SS Credit 4: Alternative Transportation ■ SS Credit 1: Option 1, Brownfield Redevelopment To reduce the detrimental effects some materials have on IAQ, follow the guidelines of the prerequisities and credits below and specify materials and furnishings that do not release harmful or irritating chemicals, such as volatile organic compounds (VOCs) from paints and solvents. Occupants' activities such as chemical handling and smoking can also affect air quality. ■ IEQ Credits 4.1-4.5: Low-Emitting Materials ■ IEQ Credit s: Indoor Chemical and Pollutant Source Control ■ IEQ Prerequisite 2: Environmental Tobacco Smoke 282 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281821 3. Summary of Referenced Standard American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/ASH RAE Standard 62.1-2007, Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers http:(/www.ashrae.org This standard specifies minimum ventilation rates and IAQ levels so as to reduce the potential for adverse health effects. The standard specifies that ventilation systems be designed to prevent uptake of contaminants, minimize growth and dissemination of microorganisms, and if necessary, filter particulates. The standard outlines a ventilation rate procedure and an IAQ procedure for compliance. The ventilation rate procedure prescribes outdoor air quality levels acceptable for ventilation; treatment measures for contaminated outdoor air; and ventilation rates for residential, commercial, institutional, vehicular, and industrial spaces. The IAQ procedure is a performance-based design approach in which the building and its ventilation system maintain concentrations of specific contaminants at or below certain determined limits to achieve an indoor air quality acceptable to building occupants and/or visitors. For the purposes of this procedure, acceptable perceived indoor air quality means there is no dissatisfaction related to thermal comfort, noise and vibration, lighting, and psychological stressors. The IAQ procedure also includes criteria for the following situations: reducing outdoor air quantities when recirculated air is treated by contaminant-removal equipment, and ventilating when a space's air volume is used as a reservoir to dilute contaminants. The IAQ procedure incorporates quantitative and subjective evaluation and restricts contaminant concentrations to acceptable levels. ASH RAE updated the standard in 2007 to include requirements for buildings that allow smoking in designated areas to separate areas with environmental tobacco smoke (ETS) from those without ETS. The standard now also clarifies how designers must analyze mechanical cooling systems to limit indoor relative humidity that would cause dampness-related problems such as mold and microbial growth. 4. Implementation Local code can be used in lieu of ASHRAE when the local code is more stringent. For the purposes of this credit, the code that requires providing more outside air is considered more stringent. Mechanical and natural ventilation systems should ensure that building occupants receive adequate fresh air. Underventilated buildings may be stuffy, odorous, uncomfortable, and/or unhealthful for occupants. ASH RAE 62.1-20o7 establishes minimum requirements for ventilation air rates in various occupied zones and building ventilation systems. The standard takes into account an area's square footage, number of occupants and their activities, and the ventilation system. This prerequisite requires project teams to verify that the building HVAC system can supply enough ventilation to provide acceptable IAQ. Manyother credits in LEED for Commercial Interiors require the project space to meet the minimum outdoor air flow rates that are determined in the referenced standard. For this reason, this prerequisite is not limited to the project scope of work. Many of the provisions of ASHRAE 62.1-2007, such as the location of air intakes, apply to functional aspects of the HVAC system that are most commonly located in parts of the building outside the project space. When a project space is to be served by a central HVAC system (or existing system), the project team should confirm as early as possible that the system will adequately function in the project space and meet the standard's provisions. Prior to leasing or acquisition, evaluate the planned location of the project; this can be combined with the evaluation confirming compliance with EA Prerequisite 2, Environmental Tobacco Smoke (ETS) Control. 'Ea CI Prerequisite 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 283 EFTA00281822 I EQ CI Prerequisite 1 When determining outside air quality, heavy traffic, nearby industrial sites, or neighboring waste management sites may pose problems. In the evaluation, consider possible future uses of nearby sites that may affect outdoor air quality. Obtain ambient air quality data and local wind patterns from the EPA or local entities to determine whether sources of pollution will affect the site. After the building has been chosen, identify site activities that may have a negative impact on air quality, such as construction activities, materials installed in the building, and chemical handling activities during occupancy. If possible, design the outdoor air intakes away from possible sources ofcontamination or confirm that the existing outdoor air intakes are at least 25 feet from sources of contamination. Possible sources of contamination include loading areas,building exhaust fans,cooling towers, street traffic, idlingvehicles, standing water, parking garages, sanitary vents,waste bins, and outside smoking areas. The outside air capacity for the ventilation system should meet the requirements of the referenced standard in all modes of operation. Consider the potential occupancy load when calculating outside air needs in all spaces. Assess changes in occupant loads for renovation or retrofit projects and, where possible, allow flexibility to accommodate future changes in occupant loads. It is important to avoid over- or underdesign of the ventilation systems and to plan for future retrofits when possible. Operational testing should be included in the building commissioning report. Implement an operations and maintenance plan based on the ASHRAE 62.1-2007, Section 8, to maintain an uncontaminated HVAC system. Strategies There are 3 basic methods for ventilating buildings: ■ mechanical ventilation (i.e., active ventilation); ■ natural ventilation (i.e., passive ventilation); and ■ mixed-mode ventilation (i.e., both mechanical and natural ventilation). Mechanically Ventilated Spaces: Ventilation Rate Procedure For mechanical ventilation systems, ASHRAE 62.1-2007, Section 6, explains how to determine the minimum required ventilation rates for various applications, using either the ventilation rate procedure or the indoor air quality procedure. The ventilation rate rocedure is easier to apply and used more frequently and is the prescribed approach for this prerequisite. The ventilation rate procedure methodology is found in Section 6.z of ASHRAE 62.1-2007. The standard's Table 6-t, Minimum Ventilation Rates in Breathing Zone, provides information by occupancy category to determine the amount of outdoor air needed to ventilate both peoplerelated source contaminants and area-related source contaminants. The outdoor air rate for people-related source contaminants takes into account the number of occupants and their activities. The outdoor air rate for area-related sources contaminants accounts for background off-gassing from building materials, furniture, and materials typically found in that particular occupancy. Finally, the required zone outdoor airflow is the breathing zone outdoor airflow adjusted to reflect the "zone air distribution effectiveness" using adjustment factors in Table 6-2 of the standard. For multiple-zone systems, outdoor air intake flow is adjusted to reflect the "system ventilation efficiency" of the air distribution configuration, using adjustment factors in Table 6-3 of the standard. If an occupancy category is not included in ASHRAE 62.1-2007, it is up to the the designer to choose 1 that best corresponds to the usage of the space. Explain the rationale for the selection in the submission. Spaces that do not qualify as occupiable spaces are not necessarily excluded from 284 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281823 ventilation rate procedure calculations. Additional ventilation and odor or pollutant control might be necessary to fulfill this prerequisite. Naturally Ventilated Spaces ASHRAE 62.1-2007, Section 5.1, provides requirements on the location and size of ventilation openings fornaturallyventilatedbuildings.All naturallyventilated spaces must within 25 feetof (and permanently open to) an operable wall or roof opening to the outdoors; the operable area also must be at least 4% of the space's net occupiable floor area. Interior spaces without direct openings to the outdoors canbeventilated throughadjoiningrooms ifthe openings between rooms are unobstructed and at least 8% or 25 square feet of the area is free. As appropriate, all other nonventilation-related requirements (e.g., exhaust for combustion appliances, outdoor air assessment, and outdoor air intakes) in the standard must be met An engineered natural ventilation system can show compliance with acceptable engineering calculations or multinodal bulk airflow simulation. Mixed-Mode Ventilated Spaces For mixed-mode ventilated spaces and hybrid ventilation systems, meet the minimum ventilation rates required by Chapter 6 of ASHRAE 62.1-2007, regardless of ventilation mode (natural ventilation, mechanical ventilation, or both mechanical and natural ventilation). Project teams can use any acceptable engineering calculation methodology to demonstrate compliance. 5. Timeline and Team Early in the design process, the architect and mechanical engineer teams determine and design the most appropriate ventilation system for the project building. The design team may include the building owner, tenants, facility manager, and maintenance personnel as applicable; these team members should be present in the design meetings to share ideas on the building owner's needs, special requirement areas, zone categories, occupant density, and occupant needs. Air quality standards should also be established early in the design process and be clearly stated in plans and specifications as design criteria. 6. Calculations For mechanically ventilated spaces, calculations pertaining to the ventilation rate procedure methodology are found in Section 6.2 of ASHRAE 62.1-2007. The breathing zone outdoor airflow is equal to the sum of the outdoor airflow rate required per person times the zone population, plus the outdoor airflow rate required per unit area times the zone floor area. Breathing zone outdoor airflow is the design outdoor airflow required in the breathing zone of the occupiable space or spaces in a zone and is calculated as follows: Vbz = Rp X Pz + Ra X Az Where: Rp = outdoor airflow rate required per person as determined from Table 6-1 in ASH RAE 62.1-2007; Pz = zone population, the largest number of people expected to occupy the zone during typical use; Ra = outdoor airflow rate required per unit area as determined from Table 6-1 in ASHRAE 62.1-2007; and Az = zone floor area, the net occupiable floor area of the zone. IEQ CI Prerequisite 1 2CO9 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 285 EFTA00281824 IEQ CI Prerequisite 1 Zone outdoor airflow is the outdoor airflow that must be provided to the zone by the supply air distribution system and is calculated as follows: Voz — Vbz Ez Where: Ez = Zone air distribution effectiveness as determined from Table 6-2 in ASH RAE 62.1-2007. For single-zone systems, in which t air handler supplies a mixture of outdoor air and recirculated air to only 1 zone, the outdoor air intake flow is (Vot) = Voz. For 100% outdoor air systems, in which 1 air handler supplies only outdoor air to 1 or more zones, Vot = 2all zones x Voz. For multiple-zone recirculating systems, inwhichlair handler supplies a mixture of outdoor air and recirculated return air to more than I zone, calculate the outdoor air intake flow (Vot) as follows: • Determine the zone primary outdoor air fraction, (Zp) = Voz/Vpz, where Vpz is the zone primary airflow (i.e., the primary airflow to the zone from the air handler including outdoor air and recirculated air). For VAV systems, Vpz is the minimum expected primary airflow for design purposes. • Determine the system ventilation efficiency (Ev) from Table 6-3 in in ASHRAE 62.1-2007. • Determine the uncorrected outdoor air intake (Vou) = D Zall zones (Rp)(Pz) + 2all zones RaAz, where the occupant diversity (D) may be used to account for variations in occupancy within zones served by the same system: D = Ps lall zones Pz, and where Ps is the system population, the total population in the area served by the system. The outdoor air intake flow fora multiple-zone recirculating system may then be determined by this calculation: Vot — Vou Ev 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. • Develop ventilation calculations demonstrating compliance with the applicable sections of Section 4 through 7 of ASHRAE 62.1-2007, Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality. 8. Examples The following are examples of the ASHRAE 62. t -2007 ventilation rate procedure calculations. Refer to the ASHRAE standard for project specific applications. Table 1. Sample Summary Calculations for Dete mining Outdoor Air Ventilation Rates Zone Occupancy Category Outdoor Airflow Rate Required per Person (Rol Zone Population (P2) Outdoor Airflow Rate Required per Unit Area (Ra) Zone Floor Area (Az) &me Air Distribution Effectiveness (Ez) Breathing Zone Outdoor Airflow (Voz) VAV-1 Office space 5 8 0.06 310 10 59 VAV-2 Conference MOM 5 10 0.06 270 I.0 66 286 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION EFTA00281825 Table 2. Ventilation Rate Procedure for Multiple-Zone, Variable-Volume System IEQ Inputs for Potentially Onkel Zones CI Prerequisite 1 Zone Name Caner Open North Zone title turns pink italic for critical saves(s) Office Ccmfaenc Room Zone Tag VAVil VAVi2 Conference Spite type Select from pulltkenn list Office Space metal Flo.' Area of zone Ax SI 310 2 Design population of zone Pz P Idelault value fated: may be corarkIden) 8 Design discharge airflow to zone (total primary plus local Wad dm rearCuSate0) 590 Select from 'madam bst or leave blank Induction Runnel Unit. Dual Fan Dual Duct a Fan? it NIA local retire. air fraction repeesentafree of are SOHO, return air Er ITU 0.50 0. Inputs for Operating Condition Analyzed Regent cr total design airflow rate at onolitioned analyzed Ds % 100% 100% Air distribution type at conditioned emlayzed Select from pultcloan list CS Zone air distribution effectnieness at conditioned analyzed Ez 1.00 Primary air ',mien 01 supply air at COMitiale0 analt200 ED .95 Relestelly CillIcelbrise ( North Onferente Ram North Private Office Caner Open Office Scull, Private Office Reception West Open Office East Private Office Interior Office Interior Private Office Interior Conference Room SerVer Room VAV-2 VAVi3 VAW4 VASS VMS VAV-7 VAV4 YAWS, VAVil0 VAV-I1 VAV12 onference meetm:70 Office Space Office Spec Offend Space165 Reception areas Office Space347 Office Space140 Office Space Office Srace„ Conference Meeling220 Computer , nin 107 310 Pri.nting) 140 255 65 10 i 8 1 .3.5 5 1 1 1 8 0 ( Private 303 120 465 215 250 450 155 50 50 203 50 ITU ITU ITU ITU ITU ITU ITU ITU ITU ITU RU .50 .50 .50 100% 103% 10D% 100% 100% 100% 103% 100% 100% 100% 100% CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.80 0.70 0.70 0.75 0.80 Table 3. Results from Ventilation Rate Procedure 14 5/ System Ventilation Efficiency Ev 0.78 Outdoor air intake airflow rate required at condition analyzed Vot 331 of m Outdoor air intake rate per unit floor area Vot/As 0.14 cfmitf Outdoor air intake rate per person served by system (including diversity) Vot/Ps 14.4 cfmilo Outdoor air intake rate as a % of design primary supply air VotAlpsd 13% Uncorrected outdoor air intake airflow rate You 259 cfm Table 4. Sample Summary Calculations for Naturally Ventilated Spaces Zone Floor Area (s0 Nattier Ventilation Opening Area (s0 Opening Areas as Percentageeaof Floor Ar Is Distance to Opening 25 Feet or Less? General office 8.000 336 4.20 Yes Training roam 750 32 4.30 Yes Break room 216 12 5.60 Yes LEW REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 287 EFTA00281826 IEQ CI Prerequisite 1 9. Exemplary Performance This prerequisite is not eligible for exemplary performance under the Innovation in Design section. 10. Regional Variations There are no regional variations associated with this prerequisite. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations For mechanically ventilated systems, provide the building operator with copies of the ventilation rate procedure calculations for each zone used to show compliance with ASH RAE 62.1-2007. Over the building's life, these can be updated with actual occupancyvalues to adjust delivered ventilation rates as appropriate. Provide maintenance personnel with the information needed to understand, maintain, and adjust the ventilation system, and retain mechanical design documents showing zone configurations. Include appropriate setpoints and control sequences in the facility's building operating plan, a sequence of operations document, and recommendations for typical corrective actions. Establish procedures and schedules for testing and maintaining exhaust systems and include them in the building's preventive maintenance plan. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http://www.usgbc.org(projecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) http://www.ashrae.org (404) 636-8400 ASHRAE advances the science of heating, ventilation, air conditioning, and refrigeration for the public's benefit through research, standards writing, continuing education, and publications. U.S. EPA's Indoor Air Qualitywebsite http://wmv.epa.gotq (800) 438-4318 The EPA's IAQwebsite includes a variety oftools, publications, and links to address IAQ concerns in schools and large buildings. A software program available for download, IAQ Building Education and Assessment Model (I-BEAM) provides comprehensive IAQ management guidance and calculates the cost, revenue, and productivity impacts of planned IAQ activities. Publications include these titles: Energy Cost and IAQ Performance of Ventilation Systems and Controls Modeling Study; Building Assessment, Survey, and Evaluation Study; and BuildingAir Quality Action Plan. 13. Definitions Active ventilation is synonymous with mechanical ventilation. Air-conditioning is the process of treating air to meet the requirements of a conditioned space by controlling its temperature, humidity, cleanliness, and distribution. (ASHRAE 62.1-2007) The breathing zone is the region within an occupied space between 3 and 6 feet above the floor and more than 2 feet from the walls or fixed air-conditioning equipment (AHSRAE 62.1-2007). Contaminants are unwanted airborne constituents that may reduce air quality (ASHRAE 62.1-2007). Indoor air quality (IAQ) is the nature of air inside the space that affects the health and well-being of building occupants. It is considered acceptable when there are no known contaminants at harmful 288 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281827 concentrations as determined by cognizant authorities and with which a substantial majority (80% or more) of the people exposed do not express dissatisfaction. (ASHRAE 62.1-2007) Mechanical ventilation, or active ventilation, is provided by mechanical powered equipment, such as motor-driven fans and blowers, but not by devices such as wind-driven turbine ventilators and mechanically operated windows. (ASHRAE 62.1-2007) Mixed-mode ventilation combines mechanical and natural ventilation methods. Natural ventilation,orpassiveventilation,is provided bythermal,wind or diffusion effects through doors, windows or other intentional openings in the building. (ASHRAE 62.1-2007) Passive, or natural, ventilation uses the building layout, fabric, and form to provide ventilation to a conditioned space using nonmechanical forms of heat transfer and air movement, such as stack effect and cross ventilation. Off-gassing is the emission of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) from synthetic and natural products. Outdoor air is the ambient air that enters a building through a ventilation system, either through intentional openings for natural ventilation or by infiltration. (ASHRAE 62.1-2007) Thermal comfort exists when building occupants express satisfaction with the thermal environment. Ventilation is the process of supplying air to or removing air from a space for the purpose of controlling air contaminant levels, humidity, or temperature within the space. (ASHRAE 62.1- 2007). IEQ CI Prerequisite 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 289 EFTA00281828 290 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281829 ENVIRONMENTAL TOBACCO SMOKE (ETS) CONTROL Prerequisite IEQ Prerequisite 2 Points Required Intent To prevent or minimize exposure of building occupants, indoor surfaces and ventilation air distribution systems to environmental tobacco smoke (ETS). Requirements CASE 1. Non-Residential Projects OPTION 1 Locate tenant space in a building that prohibits smoking by all occupants and users. within 25 feet of entries, outdoor air intakes and operable windows. OR OPTION 2 Confirm that smoking is prohibited in the portions of the tenant space not designated as a smoking space, all other building areas served by the same HVAC system, and the common areas used by occupants. Ensure that ETS cannot migrate by either mechanical or natural ventilation from other areas of the building. If the occupants are permitted to smoke, provide one or more designated smoking rooms designed to contain, capture and remove ETS from the building. At a minimum, each smoking room must be directly exhausted to the outdoors, with no recirculation of ETS-containing air to nonsmoking areas, enclosed with impermeable deck-to-deck partitions, and operated at a negative pressure compared with surrounding spaces of at least an average of 5 Pa (O.O2 inches of water gauge) and with a minimum oft Pa (0.004 inches of water gauge) when the doors to the smoking rooms are closed. Verify performance of the smoking rooms differential air pressure by conducting 15 minutes of measurement, with a minimum oft measurement every to seconds, of the differential pressure in the smoking room with respect to each adjacent area and in each adjacent vertical chase with the doors to the smoking rooms closed. Conduct the testing with each space configured for worst case conditions of transport of air from the smoking rooms (with doors closed) to adjacent spaces. CASE 2. Multi-Unit Residential Buildings Minimize uncontrolled pathways for ETS transfer between individual residential units by sealing penetrations in walls, ceilings, and floors in the residential units and by sealing vertical chases adjacent to the units. Weather-strip all doors in the residential units leading to common hallways to minimize air leakage into the hallway. Demonstrate acceptable sealing of residential units by conducting a blower door test in accordance with ANSI/ASTM-779-99, Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage Rate by Fan Pressurization, IEQ PREREQUISITE 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 291 EFTA00281830 IEQ PREREQUISITE 2 Use the progressive sampling methodology defined in Chapter 7 (Home Energy Rating Systems (HERS) Required Verification and Diagnostic Testing) of the California Low RiseResidentialAltemativeCalculationMethodApprovalManual,foundat(httt 3i/(www. energy.ca.govititlez4_1998_standardsfresidential_acm/CHAPTER07.pdf). Residential units must demonstrate less than 1.25 square inches of leakage area per too square feet of enclosure area (i.e., sum of all wall, ceiling and floor areas). 292 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281831 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider The purpose of this prerequisite is to limit the exposure of building occupants to Environmental Tobacco Smoke (ETS), or secondhand smoke. ETS is produced by burning cigarettes, pipes, or cigars. It contains thousands of different compounds, many of which are known carcinogens. " The relationship between smoking and various health risks, including lung disease, cancer, and heart disease, is well documented. A strong link between ETS and similar health risks has also been demonstrated. The most effectivewayto avoid health problems associated with ETS is to prohibit smoking indoors. If this cannot be accomplished, indoor smoking areas must be isolated from nonsmoking areas and have separate ventilation systems to prevent the introduction of tobacco smoke contaminants to nonsmoking areas. Environmental Issues Separate indoor smoking areas occupy additional space and may result in a larger building, greater material use, and increased energy for ventilation. However, these environmental impacts can be offset by the gains in health and well-being of building occupants who are more comfortable, have higher productivity rates. lower absenteeism, and less illness. Economic Issues Fora LEED for Commercial Interiors project, the economic impacts of a nonsmoking policy may be positive or negative and also affect the long-term value of the building. Providing separate smoking areas adds to the design and construction costs of most projects, and maintaining designated smoking areas also adds to lease and operating costs. Prohibiting indoor smoking can increase the useful life of interior fuctures and furnishings. Smoking within a building contaminates indoor air and can cause occupant reactions, including irritation, illness, and decreased productivity. These problems increase expenses and liability for building owners, tenants, operators, and insurance companies. Strict no-smoking policies will result in lower health care and insurance costs. 2. Related Credits The use of separate ventilation systems to isolate smoking areas from the rest of the building requires additional energy and commissioning, as well as measurement and verification efforts. This prerequisite is related to the following prerequisites and credits: ■ EA Prerequisite is Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems ■ EA Credit I: Optimize Energy Performance ■ EA Credit 2: Enhanced Commissioning ■ EA Credit 3: Measurement and Verification Because smoking, both indoors and outdoors, affects the IAQ performance of the building, this prerequisite is also related to the following prerequisites and credits: ■ IEQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance ■ IEQ Credit 1: Outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring ■ IEQ Credit 2: Increased Ventilation Project teams may wish to address smoking-related contaminants in the building in conjunction with other sources of air pollutants, as outlined in the following credits: ■ IEQ Credit 4: Low-Emitting Materials IEQ CI Prerequisite 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 293 EFTA00281832 'Ea CI Prerequisite 2 • I EQ Credit 5: Indoor Chemical and Pollutant Source Control 3. Summary of Referenced Standards AmericanNational Standards InstituteANSI-En9-03,StandardTestMethodforDetermining Air Leakage Rate by Fan Pressurization To purchase this standard, go to h_s_tp:ffiwww.astm.org. This test method covers a standardized technique for measuring air leakage rates through a building envelope under controlled pressurization and depressurization; it should produce a measurement of the air tightness of a building envelope California Low Rise Residential Alternative Calculation Method Approval Manual, Home Energy Rating Systems (HERS) Required Verification and Diagnostic Testing, California Energy Commission http://www.energy.ca.gov/HERS/96zo 4. Implementation Choose abuilding inwhich smoking is prohibited. Provide appropriatelylocated designated smoking areas outside the building—away from building entrances, operable windows, and ventilation system fresh air intakes—and post information on the nonsmoking policy for occupants to read. If interior smoking areas are incorporated within the building, install separate ventilation systems and test their effectiveness to ensure that they are isolated from the nonsmoking portions of the building. 5. Timeline and Team The tenant space, building, and site smoking policies should be drafted by the facility manager and signed by the occupant, facility manager, and property manager or owner. These policies should be in place over the tenant's occupancy. Enforcing the tenant space policy is the responsibility of the tenant. Enforcing the building and site policy is the responsibility of the facility manager or owner, and groundskeeper. Any building modifications made to accommodate new smoking rooms should be coordinated by the facility manager in consultationwith the building owner. 6. Calculations There are no calculations required for this prerequisite. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Develop an environmental tobacco smoke policy that details areas where smoking is prohibited. ■ Maintain documentation (e.g., site plans and renderings) that visually indicates how the smoking policy has been implemented on-site. ■ Track and record testing data for any interior smoking rooms to verify that there is no cross contamination to adjacent spaces. 294 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281833 8. Examples Figure 1. Compliant Smoking Room CONTROL DMIPER SUPPLY AIR ISOLATION ROOM Figure t illustrates the degree of isolation required to comply with this prerequisite. The anteroom helps prevent pollutants from entering the rest of the building. Air enters and exits the designated smoking room through control dampers, maintaining a constant flow. Upon exiting, the air mayor may not be filtered before exiting the building. Air recirculated into the room is filtered. 9. Exemplary Performance This credit is not eligible for exemplary performance under the Innovation in Design section. 10. Regional Variations Figure 2. Smoking Bans, by State's Staist.t is ■ land In wenn% and IS /MOW 4. MI Braid al tint ta OM/ • ow We* Mal nallarlibry WPM. Figure 2 shows how the U.S. states regulate smoking. Idaho has a statewide ban on smoking in restaurants, as does Georgia. South Dakota has a statewide ban on smoking in nonhospitality workplaces. New Hampshire bans smoking in restaurants and bars. Individual cities, counties, IEQ CI Prerequisite 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 295 EFTA00281834 IEQ CI Prerequisite 2 or towns may have their own laws on smoking. Consult local ordinances before establishing a smoking policy for the project building. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Communicate the building's smoking policy to all occupants, establish a plan for enforcement, and designate the person responsible for implementing the policy. This person should verify the effectiveness of ETS control measures in the designated areas, track the dates of each performance test, make sure that the air sealing of designated smoking areas (including any residential units) is not damaged, and investigate smoke odor complaints. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (httpd/www.usgbc.org(projecttoob) for additional resources and technical information. Websites Isolation Rooms and Pressurization Control http:/tmengr.psu.edu/APieclabeicontrolfisolation.asp This document describes the engineering involved in negative pressure rooms. Secondhand Smoke: What You Can Do about Secondhand Smoke as Parents, Decision Makers, and Building Occupants The EPA SmokingEPAF This EPA document (reprinted by Environment, Health, and Safety Online) describes the effects of ETS and measures for reducing human exposure to it. Setting the Record Straight Secondhand Smoke Is a Preventable Health Risk The EPA http:fiwne govismokefreeipubststrsfs.html This EPA document reviews laboratory research on ETS and federal legislation aimed at curbing ETS-related problems. Smoke-Free Lists, Maps, and Data http://ww.no-smoke.orgigoingsmokefree.php?id=99 These publications from the American Nonsmokers' Rights Foundation describe all of the tobacco control ordinances, by-laws, and board of health regulations. Print Media The Chemistry of Environmental Tobacco Smoke: Composition and Measurement, 2nd edition, by RA. Jenkins, B.A. Tomkins, et al. (CRC Press & Lewis Publishers, 2OOO). The Smoke-Free Guide: How to Eliminate Tobacco Smoke from Your Environment, by Arlene Galloway (Gordon Soules Book Publishers,1988). 13. Definitions Environmental tobacco smoke (ETS), or secondhand smoke, consists of airborne particles emitted from the burning end of cigarettes, pipes, and cigars, and exhaled by smokers. These particles contain about 4,000 compounds, up to so ofwhich are known to cause cancer. Ventilation is the provision and removal of air to control air contaminant levels, humidity, or temperature within an indoor space. Ventilation is measured in air changes per hour—the quantity of infiltration air in cubic feet per minute (cfm) divided by the volume of the room. 296 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281835 OUTDOOR AIR DELIVERY MONITORING a Credit I EQ Credit 1 Points 1 point Intent To provide capacity for ventilation system monitoring to promote occupant comfort and wellbeing. Requirements Install permanent monitoring systems to ensure that ventilation systems maintain design minimum requirements. Configure all monitoring equipment to generate an alarm when the airflow values or carbon diodde(CO2) levels vary by to% or more from the design values, via either a building automation system alarm to the building operator or a visual or audible alert to the building occupants AND CASE 1. Mechanically Ventilated Spaces Monitor CO2 concentrations within all densely occupied spaces (those with a design occupant density of 25 people or more per moo square feet). COz monitors must be between 3 and 6 feet above the floor. Provide a direct outdoor airflow measurement device capable of measuring the minimum outdoor air intake flow with an accuracy of plus or minus 15% of the design minimum outdoor air rate, as defined by ASHRAE 62.1-2007 (with errata but without addenda') for mechanical ventilation systems where 20% or more of the design supply airflow serves nondensely occupied spaces, CASE 2. Naturally Ventilated Spaces Monitor CO2 concentrations within all naturally ventilated spaces. CO2 monitors must be between 3 feet and 6 feet above the floor. One CO2 sensor maybe used to monitor multiple nondensely occupied spaces if the natural ventilation design uses passive stack(s) or other means to induce airflow through those spaces equally and simultaneously without intervention by building occupants'. Project WAIIIS WiNbirt:1011WASI IRAE wproved 4ddendit for the pusixiscso! this credit mar be vphedconsiityntlyit. to, Al I.EMD. 'edit s. OIL:monitor ing is required in all densely occupied , ixtccs.reprdloso!dysigt, aPPryik h t their disoctioo. Addotaz mus: IEQ CREDIT 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 297 EFTA00281836 I ED CI Credit 1 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Measuring CO2 concentrations to determine and maintain adequate outdoor air ventilation rates in buildings is t recommended method for achieving better indoor air quality (IAQ). Increasing ventilation rates may require additional energy inputs, which generate additional air and water pollution. CO2 concentrations are an indicator of ventilation effectiveness, with elevated levels suggesting inadequate ventilation and possible buildup of indoor air pollutants. Although CO2 alone is not harmful, high concentrations of CO2 in indoor environments displace oxygen and therefore can lead to headaches, dizziness, and increased heart rate." Economic Issues Installing CO2 and ventilation rate monitoring systems requires an investment in equipment, installation, annual calibration, and maintenance. However, these systems enable building owners, maintenance personnel, and occupants to detect air quality problems quickly so that corrective action can be taken. Reduced absenteeism and increased occupant productivity, though difficult to quantify, are important factors in the valuation on investment for these systems. Effective air quality monitoring can also extend the life of a building's HVAC system and reduce building energy use by ensuring that the amount of makeup air provided accurately reflects building occupancy loads. CO2 and ventilation rate monitoring systems increase initial construction costs. Capital costs and annual costs for air-flow monitoring equipment maintenance and calibration procedures may be offset by reduced absenteeism, increased occupant productivity, and reduced HVAC energy use. 2. Related Credits The indoor air quality (IAQ) of the project building is important to occupants' productivity, health, and satisfaction. In addition, it is related to daily building activities. The monitors can help inform the commissioning agents and the measurement and verification process and thereby improve IAQ while minimizing energy losses. The following prerequisites and credits are related to this credit: ■ IEQ Credit 2: Increased Ventilation ■ EA Prerequisite 1: Fundamental Building Commissioning ■ EA Credit 2: Enhanced Commissioning ■ EA Credit 3: Measurement and Verification Dense neighborhoods, heavy traffic, and existing site contamination can adversely affect CO2 levels and the quality of outside air available for ventilation purposes. Consider also these credits: ■ SS Credit s Alternative Transportation ■ SS Credit 1: Option I, Brownfield Redevelopment 3. Summary of Referenced Standards American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2007, Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) httpOinvw.ashrae.org This standard specifies minimum ventilation rates and IAQ levels so as to reduce the potential for adverse health effects. The standard specifies that ventilation systems be designed to prevent uptake of contaminants, minimize growth and dissemination of microorganisms, and, if necessary, filter particulates. 298 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281837 The standard outlines a ventilation rate procedure and an IAQ procedure for compliance. The ventilation rate procedure prescribes outdoor air quality levels acceptable for ventilation; treatment measures for contaminated outdoor air; and ventilation rates for residential, commercial,institutional,vehicular,and industrial spaces. The IAQ Procedure is a performancebased design approach in which the building and its ventilation system maintain concentrations of specific contaminants at or below certain previously determined limits in order to achieve an indoor air quality acceptable to building occupants and/or visitors. For the purposes of this procedure, acceptable perceived indoor air quality excludes dissatisfaction related to thermal comfort, noise and vibration, lighting, and psychological stressors. The IAQ procedure also includes criteria for the following situations: reducing outdoor air quantities when recirculated air is treated by contaminant-removal equipment and ventilating when a space's air volume is used as a reservoir to dilute contaminants. The IAQ procedure incorporates quantitative and subjective evaluation and restricts contaminant concentrations to acceptable levels. ASH RAE updated the standard in =07 to include requirements for buildings that allow smoking in designated areas to separate areas with environmental tobacco smoke (ETS) from those without ETS . The standard now also clarifies how designers must analyze mechanical cooling systems to limit indoor relative humidity that would cause dampness-related problems such as mold and microbial growth. Project teams wishing to use ASHRAE-approved addenda for the purposes of this credit may do so at their own discretion. Apply addenda consistently across all LEED credits. 4. Implementation Building HVAC systems are designed to flush out indoor airborne contaminants by exhausting old air and replacing it with outdoor air. The rate of ventilation air exchange is generally determined in the design phase based on space density and type of occupancy. Many conventional ventilation systems do not directly measure the how much outdoor air is delivered. Implementation of the following strategies is recommended to achieve this credit. Outdoor Air Flow Monitoring Monitoring the outdoor air flow rate confirms that the HVAC equipment is providing the required ventilation rate. Air balance control methodologies such as fan-tracking and measuring buildingpressurization do not directly prove that appropriate ventilation air is being provided and do not satisfy the credit requirement. The ventilation rate can be measured at the outdoor air intake of an air distribution system using a variety of airflow devices, including Pitot tubes, Venturi meters, rotating vane anemometers, and mass air flow sensors. These sensors must be installed according to the manufacturer's best practices guidelines. The ventilation rate for a particular HVAC system also can be determined from a mass balance calculation if both supply air flow and return airflow are directly measured with air flow monitoring devices. To satisfy the requirements of this credit, the measurement devices must detect when the system is is %below the design's minimum outdoor air rate. When the ventilation system fails to provide the required levels of outside air, the monitoring system should be configured to deliver a visible or audible alert to the system operator to indicate that operational adjustments might be necessary. The minimum outdoor air rate might change based on the design and modes of the HVAC system. Constant volume systems with steady-state design occupancy conditions usually have different outdoor air rates for weekdays and nighttime or off-peak conditions. In variable air volume (VAV) systems, the rate of outdoor air needs to stay above the design minimum, even when the supply air flow is decreased because of reduced thermal load conditions. IEQ CI Credit 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 299 EFTA00281838 I EQ CI Credit 1 CO2 Monitoring Carbon dioxide (CO2) monitors can also measure the effectiveness of the ventilation system in delivering outdoor air.. Properly placed CO2 monitors can confirm that a ventilation system is functioningproperly. There are atypical system configurations that generallymeet the requirements of this credit. The first approach involves CO2 sensors that use measured concentration to provide an alert. An indoor concentration of moo ppm was commonly used in the past as the set point for the alarm, but a higher alarm concentration may be appropriate when the design complies with Standard 62.1-2007 because the effective ventilation rate per person has been reduced significantly for some zones. ASHRAE 62.1-2007 Users Manual Appendix A provides a further discussion on CO2 sensors, including demand control ventilation (DCV). LocateCO2monitors so thattheyprovide accurate representative readings oftheCO2concentrations in occupied spaces. Multiple CO2 monitoring stations throughout occupied spaces provide better information and control than a single CO2 monitor for the entire system. A single CO2 monitor, typically installed in the return air duct, is less expensive and easier to use than providing multiple sensors, but it may be able to identify underventilated areas in the building. The second approach for buildings with HVAC systems that have limited airflow monitoring capabilities (small capacity air handling units or split systems) is to use differential CO2 monitoring to satisfy the requirements of the credit. This approach requires CO2 monitors in all occupied spaces, an outdoor CO2 monitor, and a means by which the air handling units can provide a greater amount of outside air if the CO2 delta between the spaces reaches or exceeds S3o ppm, CO2 Monitoring in Densely Occupied Spaces The CO2 level for each densely occupied space in a mechanically ventilated building needs to be monitored to satisfy the credit requirements. The density factor is 25 people per 1,000 square feet; for example, a 2.40-square-foot conference room that accommodates six or more people would need a CO2 monitor. CO2 monitors in densely occupied spaces should be mounted within the space's vertical breathing zone (between 3 and 6 feet above the floor). CO2 Monitoring in Naturally Ventilated Spaces Monitoring CO2 levels in the occupied spaces in naturally ventilated buildings provides feedback to building occupants and operators so that they can adjust the ventilation by, for example, opening windows. CO2 monitoring requires additional commissioning, maintenance attention, and the installation of additional equipment. Monitoring Existing HVAC Systems For new outdoor air monitoring systems added to an existing building HVAC system, make sure that the design strategy is compatible with the existing HVAC and automation systems. This is especially important for commercial interior projects where a tenant space will likely share a central HVAC system with the rest of the building. If the building owner does not allow modulation of the outside air based on feedback from CO2 monitors located in r tenant space, consider including monitoring in the building selection criteria. Prior to Occupancy Before air balancing and commissioning, the project team should make sure that the monitoring system is calibrated and that the set points and control sequences meet project specifications. The team should provide the building owner, maintenance personnel, and occupants with the information and training 300 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281839 needed to understand, maintain, and respond to the monitoring system. Sensors should be recalibrated based on the manufacturer's requirements. CO2sensors that require recalibration intervals of at least years are recommended. If a CO2 monitor is allowed to fall out of calibration, it may indicate that indoor CO2 concentrations are lower or higher than they actually are, leading to under- or over-ventilation of the space. A permanent ventilation monitoring system assists in detecting IAQ problems quickly so that any problems can be corrected. Under-ventilation of a space can lead to unsatisfactory indoor environmentalconditions and occupant discomfort. Overventilation of a space may needlessly increase utility costs and pose a challenge to maintaining indoorcomfort. 5. Timeline and Team The placement of outdoor air sensors and intakes should be coordinated with the design team before construction documents are prepared. Engage a mechanical engineer on the issues of outdoor air delivery monitoring no later than the design development phase. 6. Calculations There are no calculations required for this credit 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. • Incorporate air flow monitors and CO2 sensors into floor plans, schematics, elevations (where applicable), and mechanical schedules • Commission ventilation systems to monitor for excess energy use • Check alarm systems to make sure settings are in accordance with ASHRAE 62.1-2007 for mechanical ventilation systems • Calibrate all building automation systems according to the manufacturer's recommendations and routinely check the function of the alarm systems 8. Examples There are no examples for this credit. 9. Exemplary Performance This credit is not eligible for exemplary performance under the Innovation in Design section. 10. Regional Variations Ambient outdoor CO2 concentrations may fluctuate between approximately 300 and son ppm based on local and regional factors. Time-of-day fluctuations near major congested highways and annual fluctuations, if any, should also be considered. High ambient CO2 concentrations typically indicate combustion or other contaminant sources. Lower ventilation rates may yield a sense of stuffiness or general dissatisfaction with IAQ. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Provide the building owner, maintenance personnel, and occupants with the information and training needed to understand, maintain, and use the monitoring system. Maintenance personnel should make inspection of CO2 monitors part of routine operations and maintenance and preventive maintenance activities. In the facility's operating plan and sequence of operations document, include appropriate setpoints and control sequences as well as recommendations for typical corrective actions. IEQ CI Credit 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 301 EFTA00281840 I EQ CI Credit 1 Establish procedures and schedules for inspecting CO2 monitors and airflow monitoring stations, recalibrating sensors based on the manufacturer's requirements, and testing and maintain the exhaust systems, and include them in the building's preventive maintenance plan. Use CO2 sensors that require recalibration no less than every s years. A CO2 monitor that has fallen outof calibration may indicate that indoorCO2 concentrations are lower or higher than they actually are, leading to underventilation or overventilation of the space. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http://www.uszbc.orgiproiecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) http:fiwww.ashrae.org ASHRAE advances the science of heating, ventilation, air conditioning, and refrigeration for the public's benefit through research, standards writing, continuing education, and publications. Building Air Quality: A Guide for Building Owners and Facility Managers http://www.e govfiaglargekklp This EPA publication details IAQ sources in buildings and methods to prevent and resolve IAQ problems. Print Media Air HandlingSystems Design, by Tseng-Yao Sun. (McGraw Hill, 1992). Efficient Building Design Series, Volume 2: Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning, by J. Trost and Frederick Trost (Prentice Hall,1998). ASHRAEss-2004:Theimal Environmental Conditions for Human Occupancy (ASHRAE, 2004). ASHRAE 62.1-2007: Ventilation for Acceptable IndoorAir Quality (ASH RAE, 2007). ASTM D 6245-1998: Standard Guiclefir Using Indoor Carbon Dioxide Concentrations to Evaluate Indoor Air Quality and Ventilation (ASTM,1998). 13. Definitions The breathing zone is the region within an occupied space between 3 and 6 feet above the floor and more than 2 feet from the walls or fixed air-conditioning equipment. (AHSRAE 62.1-2007) CO2 is carbon diadde. Densely occupied space is an area with a design occupant density of 25 people or more per 1,000 square feet (40 square feet or less per person). HVAC systems are equipment, distribution systems, and terminals that provide the processes of heating, ventilating, or air-conditioning. (ASHRAE 90.1-2007) Indoor air quality (IAQ) is the nature of air inside a building that affects the health and well-being ofbuildingoccupants. It is considered acceptablewhen there are no known contaminants atharrnful concentrations as determined by cognizant authorities and with which a substantial majority (80% or more) of the people exposed do not express dissatisfaction. (ASHRAE 62.1-2007) Mechanical ventilation is provided by mechanically powered equipment, such as motor-driven fans and blowers, but not by devices such as wind-driven turbine ventilators and mechanically operated windows. (ASHRAE 62.1-2007) 302 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281841 Natural ventilation is provided by thermal, wind or diffusion effects through doors, windows, or other intentional openings in the building. (ASHRAE 62.1-2007) Occupants in a commercial buildingareworkers who either have a permanent office or workstation or typically spend a minimum of to hours per week in the project building; in a residential building, regular occupants also include all persons who live in the building. Outdoor air is the ambient air that enters a building through a ventilation system, either through intentional openings for natural ventilation or by infiltration. (ASHRAE 62.1-2007) ppm is parts per million. Return air is removed from a space and then recirculated or exhausted. (ASHRAE 62.1-2007) Ventilation is the process of supplying air to or removing air from a space for the purpose of controlling air contaminant levels, humidity or temperature within the space. (ASHRAE 62.1- 2007) Volatile organic compounds (VOCs) are carbon compounds (excluding carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, carbonic acid, metallic carbides and carbonates, and ammonium carbonate) that participate in atmospheric photochemical reactions. The compounds vaporize (become a gas) at normal room temperatures. IEQ CI Credit 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 303 EFTA00281842 304 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281843 INCREASED VENTILATION Credit IEQ Credit 2 Points 1 point Intent To provide additional air ventilation to improve indoor air quality for improved occupant comfort, well-being and productivity. Requirements CASE 1. Mechanically Ventilated Spaces Increase breathing zone outdoor air ventilation rates to all occupied spaces by at least 30% above the minimum rates required byASHRAE62.1-2007 (with erratabut without addenda') as determined by I EQ Prerequisite 1: Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance. CASE 2. Naturally Ventilated Spaces Design natural ventilation systems for occupied spaces to meet the recommendations set forth in the Carbon Trust's Good Practice Guide 2.37 (1998). Determine that natural ventilation is an effective strategy for the project by following the flow diagram process shown in Figure LIS of the Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) Applications Manual 10: zoos, Natural Ventilation in Non-domestic Buildings AND OPTION 1 Use diagrams and calculations to show that the design of the natural ventilation systems meets the recommendations set forth in the CIBSE Applications Manual 10: 200s, Natural Ventilation in Non-domestic Buildings. OR OPTION 2 Use a macroscopic, multizone, analytic model to predict that room-by-room airflows will effectively naturally ventilate, defined as providing minimum ventilation rates required by ASHRAE 62.1-2007 Chapter 6 (with errata but without addenda'), for at least go% of occupied spaces. Projtk; :cam -:o um: ASI IliAl-:approvcd aaacnala pi, !It thl do.,,a; thc:2 Addl.-raiz ha appli :arm, al: IEQ CREDIT 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 305 EFTA00281844 I Ell CI Credit 2 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Americans spendabout90%oftheirtime indoors,where concentrationsofpollutants areoften much higher than those outside. Of the thousands of chemicals and biological pollutants found indoors, many are known to have significant health impacts. Risks include asthma, cancer, and reproductive and developmental problems." Increasing ventilation above minimum standards improves the indoor air quality (IAQ) of a building's occupied spaces and directly benefits occupants' health and well-being. Economic Issues Depending on the climate, increasing ventilation rates by 3o% beyond ASHRAE 62.1-2007 can yield higher HVAC energy costs and potentially greater HVAC capacity needs than associated with the minimum ventilation rates established in the standard. This increase in HVAC capacity and energy use will be more pronounced in extreme climates than in mild, temperate climates. Some organizations increase the outdoor air intake rate because they have found the resulting IAQ is associated with improved employee health, welfare, well-being and productivity. The use of heat transfer equipment, like heat recovery wheels, can precondition intake air and minimize the extent to which increased ventilation requires additional energy to heat and cool intake air. Although a naturally ventilated building may have less invested in equipment, it may have higher quality windows and increased thermal mass. Power, fuel, and maintenance costs of naturally ventilated buildings tend to be lower. 2. Related Credits Ventilation strategies influence the overall energy performance of the building and require commissioning as well as measurement and verification. Increased ventilation, particularly when delivered by mechanical systems,can increa se energy consumption. Installing a permanent ventilation performance monitoring system can facilitate the achievement and maintenance of increased ventilation. For these reasons, increased ventilation is related to the following other credits: ■ EA Prerequisite 1: Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems ■ EA Prerequisite a: Minimum Energy Performance ■ EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance • EA Credit 2: Enhanced Commissioning • EA Credit 3: Measurement and Verification • IEQ Credit 1: Outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring 3. Summary of Referenced Standards American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2007, Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality (Ventilation Rate Procedure), American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) http://www.ashrae.org This standard specifies minimum ventilation rates and IAQ levels so as to reduce the potential for adverse health effects. The standard specifies that ventilation systems be designed to prevent uptake of contaminants, minimize growth and dissemination of microorganisms, and, if necessary, filter particulates. The standard outlines a ventilation rate procedure and an IAQ procedure for compliance. The ventilation rate procedure prescribes outdoor air quality levels acceptable for ventilation; treatment measures for contaminated outdoor air, and ventilation rates for residential, commercial, 306 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281845 institutional, vehicular, and industrial spaces. The IAQ Procedure is a performance-based design approach in which the building and its ventilation system maintain concentrations of specific contaminants at or below certain previously determined limits in order to achieve an indoor air quality acceptable to building occupants and/or visitors. For the purposes of this procedure, acceptable perceived indoor air quality excludes dissatisfaction related to thermal comfort, noise and vibration, lighting, and psychological stressors. The IAQ procedure also includes criteria for the following situations: reducing outdoor air quantities when recirculated air is treated by contaminant-removal equipment and ventilating when a space's air volume is used as a reservoir to dilute contaminants. The IAQ procedure incorporates quantitative and subjective evaluation and restricts contaminant concentrations to acceptable levels. ASHRAE updated the standard in 2.007 to include requirements for buildings that allow smoking in designated areas to separate areas with environmental tobacco smoke (ETS) from those without ETS . The standard now also clarifies how designers must analyze mechanical cooling systems to limit indoor relative humidity that would cause dampness-related problems such as mold and microbial growth. Project teams wishing to use ASHRAE-approved addenda for the purposes ofthis credit may do so at their own discretion. Apply addenda consistently across all LEED credits. Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) Applications Manual to, Natural Ventilation in Non-Domestic Buildings, zoos Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) http:(/www.cibse.org/ CIBSE Applications Manual to provides guidance for implementing natural ventilation in nonresidential buildings. It provides detailed information on how to adopt natural ventilation as the sole servicing strategy for a building or as an element in a mixed mode design. According to the publisher, this manual "is a major revision of the Applications Manual (AM) first published in 1997. At the time, there was a significant expansion of interest in the application of engineered natural ventilation to the design of non-domestic buildings. The original Alto sought to capture the state of knowledge as it existed in the mid-9os and present it in a form suited to the needs of every member of the design team. Some 10 years on from the time when the initial manual was conceived, the state of knowledge has increased, and experience in the design and operation of naturally ventilated buildings has grown. This revision ofAM so is therefore a timely opportunity to update and enhance the guidance offered to designers and users of naturally ventilated buildings." The Carbon Trust Good Practice Guide zr, Natural Ventilation in Non-Domestic Buildings, A Guide for Designers, Developers, and Owners,1998 http://www.thecarbontrustco.ulc According to the Carbon Trust,"Carefully designed, naturallyventilated buildings can be cheaper to construct, maintain and operate than more heavily serviced equivalents. Occupants generally prefer windows that can be opened, and natural light, both ofwhich are features of well designed, naturally ventilated buildings. The Guide summarizes the benefits of natural ventilation and considers the commercial implications, illustrating the issues by means of case studies." To obtainacopy, search for"GPG zr"on the Carbon Trust Energywebsite or go tom.carbontrust. co.uk/Publications/publicationdetail.htrn?productid=GPGzu&metalloCache=1. 4. Implementation Agreen building should provide its occupants with superior indoor air quality (IAQ) to support their productivity andwell-being. Providing adequateventilation rates is keyto maintaining superior IAQ. Underventilated buildings may be stuffy, odorous, uncomfortable and/or unhealthy for occupants. IEQ CI Credit 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 307 EFTA00281846 IEQ CI Credit 2 Building ventilation systems, including both active HVAC systems and natural ventilation systems, are designed and installed to introduce outside air into the building while exhausting an equal amount of building air. HVAC systems typically serve other functions as well, including providing thermal comfort for occupants. Building conditioning systems that provide enhanced ventilation air as efficiently and effectively as possible will help maintain a high standard of IAQ in the building. There are 3 basic methods for ventilating buildings: • mechanical ventilation (i.e., active ventilation) • natural ventilation (i.e., passive ventilation) • mixed-mode ventilation (i.e., both mechanical and natural ventilation) ASH RAE 62.1-2007 provides ventilation rate standards for different types of buildings and building uses. Projects that exceed the standards for mechanically ventilated buildings by 30% will meet the requirements for the LEED for Commercial Interiors credit. The Applications Manual 1O-2005, "Natural Ventilation in Non-Domestic Buildings," provides guidance on appropriate natural ventilation design for adequateoutdoor airexchange in abuilding. Naturallyventilated spaces should follow these guidelines to meet the credit requirements. Projects using mixed-mode ventilation need to comply with ASH RAE 62.1-2007 for the mechanically ventilated portion and CI ESE AM10 for the naturally ventilated portion. In addition to designing the HVAC systems properly and selecting appropriate building materials, increasing ventilation rates beyond standard practice is t way to provide superior IAQ. Managing IAQ concerns during construction and operations is also appropriate for many green building projects. For mechanicallyventilated and air-conditioned buildings, increasing ventilation rates will likely mean greater HVAC system capacity and energy use. Natural ventilation systems can provide increased ventilation rates, good IAQ, and occupant control over thermal comfort and ventilation via operable windows. Mechanically Ventilated Spaces: Ventilation Rate Procedure Section 6 of ASHRAE 62.1-2007 outlines guidelines for determining ventilation rates for various applications, using either the ventilation rate procedure or the IAQ procedure. The ventilation rate procedure easier to apply and used more frequently than the LkQ procedure,. It is the recommended approach used in IEQ Prerequisite t, Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance. When following the ventilation rate procedure, use the methodology found in Section 6.2 of ASHRAE 62.1-2007. The breathing zone outdoor airflow is equal to the sum of the outdoor airflow rate required per person times the zone population, plus the outdoor airflow rate required per unit area times the zone floor area: Breathing zone _ Outdoor airflow zone ) Outdoor air lbw rate zone floor outdoor airflow — rate per person X population + required per unit X area The standard's 'Fable 6-1, Minimum Ventilation Rates in Breathing Zone, provides information by occupancy category to determine both the amount of outdoor air needed to ventilate people-related source contaminants and area-related source contaminants. The people-related sources figure of the outdoor air rate addresses actual occupancydensityand activity.The area-related sources figure accounts for background off-gassing from building materials, furniture and materials typically found in that particular occupancy. Finally, the required zone outdoor airflow is the breathing zone outdoor airflow adjusted to reflect the efficiency of the actual air distribution configuration. This LEED for Green Interior Design and Construction credit requires that applicants demonstrate that the delivered zone outdoor airflow is at least 30% more than what is required by ASHRAE 308 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281847 62.1-2007 for each zone. Table t shows how the sample space used in IEQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance, has reached the 30% increase. Table 1. ASHRAE 62.1-2007 Ventilation Rate Procedure IEQ CI Credit 2 Zane I Standard Case: ASNRAE 62.1-2007 Verification Rate Procedure Design Case Table 61 Table 6.2 Table 6.3 Zone Occupancy Category Area hit People O utdRa wr Air te (elm, person) Area Outdoor Air Rate ferrn/s1) Occupant Density III 1000 sO Breathing Zone Outd oce ntake Air Flow VW (dm) Zone Air Distribution Effectiveness Ez Zone Outdoor Air Flow Voz (cfm) System Ventilation Efficiency Ey Minimum Outdoor Air I Flow Vol (elm) Design Outdoor Air Intake Flow Wm) Zone Primary Air Flour Faction Vpz (cfm) Primary Outdoor Air Fraction Zp • VozNpz % Increase Orer Standard General Office 8000 5 0.06 5 680 1.0 680 1.0 680 900 8000 0.09 32% Office Space Training Lecture 750 7.5 0.06 65 411 1.2 342 0.9 380 500 1400 0.24 32% Room Classroom Break Conference 250 5 0.06 50 63 1.0 63 1.0 63 85 500 0.13 36% Room Meeting Total 9000 1154 1085 1123 1485 9900 32% Notes: For the general office pace. air distribution is warhead he ce Et 1. Outdoor air fracti n, Zp. c 0.15. hence system ventilation fficiency is 1.0. For the training room. air distribution is underfloor, llama E 1.2. Outdoor air fraction. Zp c 0.25, hence system ventilation effici ncy is 0.9. For the break room, ai distribution iswarhead, hence Et 1. Outdoor air fraction, Zp, 0.15, hence system ventilation efficiency is 1.0. Naturally Ventilated Spaces There are 2 ways to demonstration compliance when using natural ventilation: 1 is the compliance path found in Chapter 2 of the CIBSE Applications Manual 10 (AM10); the other is to provide documentation using a macroscopic, multizone, analytic model that predicts room-by-room air flow rates. When using AM10 (see Figure 1), should begin by establishing the required flow rates hrough each space. There is an acceptable average rate needed for IAQ and thermal comfort; exceeding this rate results in wasted energy during the heating seasons. Additional ventilation is needed for the summer cooling requirements. There are several ways to determine the acceptable average rate needed for IAQ and thermal comfort such as using a separate manual or simulation software listed in AM10. Project teams should explain their choice. Submittals must include a narrative with information on the building, its orientation, and the glazing ratios. Include a summary of the internal heat gains and weather conditions; explain the ventilation strategy, including the airflow paths, rates planned for different operational periods during the day and night, peak internal temperatures, and means of shading for summer solar gains; provide sample calculations on how the opening size for operable windows, trickle vents and louvers was determined; and include the calculations for the driving pressure, showing the effects of both wind and stack-induced pressure differentials. When using a macroscopic, multizone, analytic model that predicts room-by-room air flow rates, prepare a narrativewith the same information listed above anddemonstratethat90%ofthe occupied areas meet the room-by-room airflow rates. Indicate the source of the standard being used, such as Volume A of the CIBSE Guide,ASHRAE 6z.t-z007, Section 6.2. 5. Timeline and Team Most project teams decide early on whether to have a mechanical ventilation system, a passive ventilation system, or a combination. This decision might be influenced by the building size and type, aswell as climatic, economic, and organizational considerations. Figure t, from CIBSE AM to, provides a decision diagram to help teams make an informed evaluation. In addition, project teams considering natural ventilation should evaluate site conditions and building design. Potential IAQ problems might /039 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 309 EFTA00281848 'ER CI Credit 2 arise from traffic exhaust, nearby polluting industries, and neighboring waste management sites. This credit requires that applicants demonstrate the required increased ventilation rate for the project during the performance period. Critical team members during this phase include the design team, mechanical engineers, the facility manager, and building owner. Figure 1. Selecting Natural Ventilation for Nondomestic Buildings From CI ESE Applications Manual AM10-2005. 6. Calculations Mechanically Ventilated Spaces To show compliance in mechanically ventilated spaces, use the calculations in the ASHRAE User Manual and the calculators for IEQ Prerequisite t, Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance, available for free download on the LEED Registered Project Tools page of the USGBC website. The same calculations are used to document IEQ Prerequisite 1. 310 LEW REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281849 Naturally Ventilated Spaces Determine the opening sizes for operable windows, trickle vents, and louvers in accordance with CIBSE Applications Manual to. Alternatively, for project teams using a macroscopic, multizone, analytic model that predicts room-by-room airflow rates, provide the room-by-room outdoor airflow rates predicted by the analysis and a comparison with minimum ventilation rates required by ASHRAE 62..t -z007, Section 6. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. • Perform calculations and size mechanical equipment to accommodate increased ventilation rates. • For naturally ventilated projects, maintain appropriate visual documentation (e.g., plans) of open areas within the project. 8. Examples Ventilation rates as specified by ASHRAE must be determined for each space. The example in Table calculates the percentage increase in ventilation for 3 sample spaces, each of which provides increased ventilation sufficient to meet the credit requirements. Table 2. Sample Summary Calculations for Increased Mechanical Ventilation Zone Occupancy Area (se Standard Zone Outdoor Airflow Vor fermis° Design Zone Outdoor Airflow (cfrnfst) Percentage Increase General office Office space 8.000 0.088 0.115 30.7 Training room Lecture hall 750 0.460 0.600 32.6 Break room Conference, meeting 216 0.338 0.440 30.2 9. Exemplary Performance This credit is not eligible for exemplary performance under the Innovation in Design section. 10. Regional Variations Additional ventilation is more practical for mild climates, where increasing ventilation rates beyond standard practice will not have as great an impact on HVAC systems' capacity and energy consumption as in extremely hot, humid, or cold climates. Natural ventilation and passive conditioning approaches are also more typical in mild and temperate climates, although there are precedents for passively conditioned buildings in all climates. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations See the Operations and Maintenance Considerations section in IEQ Prerequisite t. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http://www.usgbc.org(mjecttools) for additional resources and technical information. IEQ CI Credit 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 311 EFTA00281850 I EQ CI Credit 2 Websites American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) http://www.ashrae.org ASHRAE advances the science of heating, ventilation, air conditioning, and refrigeration for the public's benefit through research, standards writing, continuing education, and publications. To purchase ASHRAE standards and guidelines, visit the bookstore on the ASHRAE website. Energy Cost and Indoor Air Quality Performance of Ventilation Systems and Controls Modeling Study The EPA Building Assessment, Survey, and Evaluation Study The EPA http://www.epa.goviiaq/baselindexhtml Building Air QualityAction Plan The EPA http://www.epa.govfiaqflargebldgs/pdf_files/baqactionplan.pdf The Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers (CI BSE) http://www.cibse.orgi Located in London, this organization, publishes a series of guides on ventilation, including natural ventilation, on its own and in collaboration with other entities. 13. Definitions Air-conditioning is the process of treating air t0 meet the requirements of a conditioned space by controlling its temperature, humidity, cleanliness and distribution. (ASHRAE 62.1-2007) The breathing zone is the region within an occupied space between Sand 6 feet above the floor and more than 2 feet from the walls or fixed air-conditioning equipment. Conditioned space is the part of a building that is heated or cooled, or both, for the comfort of occupants. (ASHRAE 62.1-2007) Contaminants are unwanted airborne constituents that may reduce air quality. (ASHRAE 62.1- 2007) Exfiltration is air leakage through cracks and interstices and through the ceilings, floors, and walls. Exhaust air is removed from a space and discharged t0 outside the building by means of mechanical or natural ventilation systems. HVAC system is equipment, distribution systems, and terminals that provide the processes of heating, ventilating, or air-conditioning. (ASHRAE 90.1-2007) Indoor air quality (IAQ) is the nature of air inside a building that affects the health and well-being ofbuildingoccupants. It is considered acceptablewhen there are n0 known contaminants atharmful concentrations as determined by cognizant authorities and with which a substantial majority (80% or more) of the people exposed d0 not express dissatisfaction. (ASHRAE 62.1-2007) Infiltration is airleakage intoconditioned spaces throughcracks and interstices and through ceilings, floors, and walls. Mechanical ventilation is ventilation provided by mechanically powered equipment, such as motor-driven fans and blowers, but not by devices such as wind-driven turbine ventilators and mechanically operated windows. 312 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281851 Mixed-mode ventilation combines natural ventilation with mechanical systems; the latter are only when necessary. Mixed-mode ventilation strategies include 3 distinct approaches; contingency, complementary, and zoned. (CI ESE Guide 17-200S) Natural ventilation is ventilation provided by thermal, wind or diffusion effects through doors, windows or other intentional openings in the building. Outdoor air is the ambient air that enters a building through a ventilation system, either through intentional openings for natural ventilation or by infiltration. (ASHRAE 62.1-2007) Recirculated air is removed from a space and reused as supply air. (ASHRAE 62.1-2007) Supply air is deliveredby mechanical or natural ventilation to a space,composed ofanycombination of outdoor air, recirculated air or transfer air. (ASHRAE 62.1-2007) Ventilation is the process of supplying air to and removing air from a space for the purpose of controlling air contaminant levels, humidity or temperature within the space. (ASHRAE 62.1- 2007) IEQ CI Credit 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 313 EFTA00281852 314 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281853 CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLANDURING CONSTRUCTION Credit IEQ Credit 3.1 Points 1 point Intent To reduce indoor air quality (IAQ) problems resulting from construction or renovation and promote the comfort and well-being of construction workers and building occupants. Requirements Develop and implement an IAQ management plan for the construction and preoccupancy phases of the tenant space as follows: ■ During construction, meet or exceed the recommended design approaches of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National ContractorsAssociation (SMACNA) IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction, and Edition 2007, ANSI/SMACNA 0o8- 2008 (Chapter 3). • Protect stored on-site and installed absorptive materials from moisture damage. • If permanently installed air handlers are used during construction, filtration media with a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) of 8 must be used at each return air grille, as determined by ASHRAE 52.2-1999. (with errata but without addenda'). Replace all filtration media immediately prior to occupancy. Ptoject teams wishing to use ASH RAE annoyed addenda for the purposes Stag credit may do SO at their discretion Addenda must be applied eatutstently anon an LEO meats. IEQ CREDIT 3.1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 315 EFTA00281854 IEQ CI Credit 3.1 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider This credit seeks to recognize construction practices that help ensure high indoor air quality (IAQ) during construction and into occupancy. Environmental Issues Reducing indoor air contaminants improves comfort levels, lowers absenteeism, and increases productivity. Demolition and construction practices lead to increased exposure to indoor air pollutants through the introduction of synthetic building materials, power equipment and vehicles, new furnishings, and finish materials. The negative effects of the construction process on indoor air quality can be heightened by reduced ventilation rates (typical during the construction phase) and a lack of attention to pollutant source control. If unaddressed, the contamination can result in poor IAQ extending over the lifetime of the building. Fortunately there are IAQ management strategies that, if instituted during construction and before occupancy, will minimize potential problems (see Implementation). Economic Issues Consider thetime and labor required to maintain a clean construction site. Protecting theventilation system and isolating work that involves power equipment are critical methods to preventing the introduction of indoor air contaminants. Clean ventilation systems and building spaces can also extend the lifetime of the ventilation system and improve its efficiency, resulting in reduced energy use. Construction schedule disruption can be avoided through the proper sequencing of material installation, so as to reduce contamination and maintain the project schedule. Early coordination between the contractor and subcontractors can minimize or eliminate scheduling delays. 2. Related Credits Construction activities can affect the IAQ of the building long after occupancy. Implementing a construction IAQ management plan, selecting low-emitting finish materials and furnishings, and isolating indoor pollutant sources will reduce levels of indoor contaminants. The following credits relate to IAQ management before occupancy: ■ IEQ Credit 3.2: Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan Before Occupancy • IEQ Credit 4: Low-Emitting Materials • I EQ Credit 5: Indoor Chemical and Pollutant Source Control 3. Summary of Referenced Standards American N ationalStandards Institute (ANSI)/SheetMetalandAirConditioningContractors' National Association (SMACNA) 008-2008, IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under Construction, and edition, 2007 http://www.smacna.org The Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) is an international organization that developedguidelines for maintaininghealthful indoor airquality during demolitions, renovations, and construction. The full document covers air pollutant sources, control measures, IAQ process management, quality control and documentation, interpersonal communication , sample projects, tables, references, resources, and checklists. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/ASHRAE5z.2-1999,MethodofTestingGeneral Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size http://www.ashrae.org This standard presents methods for testing air cleaners for 2. performance characteristics: the device's capacity for removing particles from the air stream and the device's resistance to airflow. 316 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281855 The minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) is based on 3 composite average particle size removal efficiency points. Consult the standard fora complete explanation of MERV calculations. 4. Implementation Complete the construction IAQ management plan before construction begins. The plan should include agenda items to be discussed regularly at preconstruction and construction meetings. Continually educating and providing the proper resources (e.g.., collection bins, cleaning tools, and materials) to subcontractors and field personnel reinforces the importance of following the IAQ plan's procedures and encourages their participation. Choose a member of the contractor's team to serve as the IAQ manager, they will be responsible for identifying the cause of the problem and implementing an appropriate solution. The referenced SMACNA standard recommends control measures in 5 areas: HVAC protection, source control, pathway interruption, housekeeping, and scheduling. For each project, the team should review the applicability of each control measure and include those that apply in the final Construction IAQ Management Plan. The control measures are as follows: HVAC Protection Ideally,permanentlyinstalled HVAC systems shouldnotbeusedduringdemolitionandconstruction, because the systems can be contaminated or damaged. In most cases, using the HVAC system during construction activates the clock on the manufacturer's warranty, exposing the contractor to potential out-of-pocket costs if problems occur when the manufacturer's warranty has expired but the warranty for the building has not. Using temporary ventilation units is feasible, practical, and generally inexpensive. Using temporary ventilation units is r strategy to meet the SMACNA control measure for HVAC protection. However, it does not satisfy all of the requirements of this credit on its own. Other strategies to mitigate contamination of both HVAC equipment and occupied spaces during construction are detailed below. The contractor should protect all HVAC equipment from dust and odors and seal all duct and equipment openings with plastic. If the system must be operated to maintain service to other occupied portions of the building or to protect finished work, the contractor should protect the return/ negative pressure side of the system. If the returns cannot be closed, the contractor should install and maintain temporary filters over grilles and openings. To comply with the credit requirements, the filtration medium must have a rating of MERV 8 or better. If an plenum without ducts must be used over the construction zone, the construction team should isolate it by having all ceiling tiles in place. The contractor should check for leaks in the return ducts and air handlers and make needed repairs promptly. It is important to avoid using the mechanical rooms for construction storage. The contractor should replace all filtration media just before occupancy, installing only a single set of final filtration media. Project teams should note that the requirement for MERV 13 rated filters has been moved to IEQ Credit 5: Indoor Chemical and Pollutant Source Control. This credit does not regulate the efficiency of the filters used for the long-term operation of the building. Source Control The architect or designer should specify finish materials such as paints, carpet, composite wood, adhesives and sealants that have low-toxicity levels or none at all. (Note that the selection of lowemitting materials is covered under IEQ Credit 4: Low-Emitting Materials). The Construction IAQ Management Plan should specify the control measures for materials containing VOCs. The construction team should recover, isolate, and ventilate containers housing toxic materials. Finally, exhaust fumes from idling vehicles and gasoline-fueled tools to the exterior of the building through the use of funnels or temporary piping. 'ED CI Credit 3.1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 317 EFTA00281856 IEQ CI Credit 3.1 Pathway Interruption During construction, isolate occupied work spaces to prevent contamination. Depending on weather conditions, ventilate using t00% outside air to exhaust contaminated air directly from the building during the installation of VOC-emitting materials. Depressurize the work area so that the air pressure differential keeps dust and odors contained in construction areas. Provide temporary barriers to contain the construction area. Housekeeping Institute cleaning procedures to control contaminants in building spaces during construction and prior to occupancy. Porous building materials should be protected from exposure to moisture and stored in a clean area before installation. Use vacuum cleaners with high-efficiency particulate filters, clean more frequently, and use wetting agents to control dust. Scheduling Coordinate construction activities to minimize oreliminate disruptionoroperations inthe occupied portions of the building. The contractor should sequence construction activities over the duration of the project carefullyto minimizethe impact on IAQ. It may be necessaryto conduct activitieswith high pollution potential during off-hours, such as on the weekends or in the evenings, to allow time for new materials to air out. The contractor should plan adequate time to conduct flush-out and IAQ test procedures before occupancy. Upon completion of construction, the contractor should replace all filtration media just before occupancy and coordinate this with the activities and requirements addressed in IEQ Credit 3.2, Construction IAQ Management before Occupancy, and IEQ Credit s, Indoor Chemical and Pollution Source Control. While core and shell construction is not addressed by LEED for Commercial Interiors, consider minimizing cross contamination of the commercial interior during base construction. The Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association's (SMACNA's) IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction details many measures to help improve the IAQ of occupied buildings under construction. One measure is to seal offthe return air system from the constructionsite. Another measure is to exhaust contaminants directly from the project construction-site to the building's exterior. A comprehensive building construction IAQ management plan can help minimize health risks to the edsting tenants during construction. Project teams should also note the following: ■ Small, packaged HVAC systems are not excluded from complying with the credit requirements. ■ Currently, there is no ASHRAE-approved testing methodology for dynamic air cleaners, and dynamic air cleaners are not an acceptable means of compliance. ■ Though the title of the SMACNA guidelines refers to occupied buildings, they constitute the same IAQ management methods to be used on interior construction. ■ Using temporary ventilation units is 1 strategy to meet the SMACNA control measure for HVAC protection but does not on its own satisfy all the requirements of this credit. 5. Timeline and Team Scheduling aspects of this credit are related to the sequencing of demolition and construction procedures as well as the installation of finish materials. It is best to select low-emitting materials and install any products that emit VOCs before installing absorbent materials, such as ceiling tiles, gypsum wallboard, fabric furnishings, carpet, and insulation. If possible, store these materials in an isolated area to minimize contamination. 318 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281857 Give subcontractors and field personnel copies of the construction IAQ management plan prior to the initiation ofwork,and contractually require them to implement the applicable plan components. Post a copy of the plan in an obvious location on the job site and conduct periodic visual inspections to help enforce compliance. Maintaining a regular photo log of the prescribe strategies is advised. 6. Calculations There are no calculations required for this credit. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. • Create a written construction IAQ management plan to use during demolition and construction • Maintain visual documentation (e.g., photos) of the construction IAQ management plan practices followed during construction and indicate which approach is being implemented. 8. Examples Indoor Air Quality Management Plan (Facility Alterations) I. Goals and Scope To limit indoor air quality problems resulting from construction or renovation projects. (Building) must implement this Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) management plan to sustain the comfort and wellbeing of occupants and construction welters. 2. SMACNA Guidelines: The following is a list of example procedures. The project team should create a Conslnxtion IA0 Management Plan appropriate to the scope of work being completed. The following Construction IAQ Management Plan measures must be implemented throughout the construction and occupancy phase of any HYAC Protection: Provide prosed-specific measures to be employed. • When possible. IIVAC system should be shut down during construction. B. Source Control: Provide project-specific measures to be employed. • Product substitution: low emitting paints. adhesives. sealants.and carpets must be used when feasible. C. Pathway InImuplion: Provide progcl specific measures to be errployed. D. Housekeeping Provide projecl.specific measures to be employed. • Senices must utilize best practices for minimizing IAQ problems. such as dust suppression. cleaning frequency. cleaning efficiency. water and spill cleanup. protection of on-site or installed absorptive and porous material. E. Scheduling: Provide project specific measures to be employed. • Building flush out: After construction ends and all interior finishes have been installed. new filtration media must be instance and a flush oul of the construction area must be performed. The flush out must comp,/ with the procedure listed within the LEED Rating System 3. Responsible Party Teams and individuals involved in activities pertaining to the policy Facility Manager General Contractor Building Owner d. Guidance to Resources and Implementation A. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Contractors Association (SMACNA) IA0 Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under Construction. second edition. Nommber 2007. Chapter 3 5. Quality Assurance and Quality Control Processes During any construction or renovation preyed the following strategies must be utilized to ensure the implementation of this plan: A. A list of filtration media utilized. includng the manufacturer. model number. MEW rating. date of installation. and date of replacement. B. Photographs documenting the IA0 control measures implemented at 3 time periods during the project (e.g.. begonias, meddle, and end). The photos will be labeled to highlight the approach taken. C. Narrative documenting the Rush-out procedure utilized. including airflow and duration. 9. Exemplary Performance This credit is not eligible for exemplary performance under the Innovation in Design section. 10. Regional Variations There are no regional variances applicable to this credit. 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 319 EFTA00281858 IEQ CI Credit 3.1 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Provide the facility manager with a copy of the IAQ management plan used during construction to facilitate adoption of similar practices during future alterations or additions. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http:ffivww.usgbc.orgeprojecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites Controlling Pollutants and Sources The EPA http://www.epa.govfiaq/schooldesignicontrolling.html The EPA website provides information regarding typical sources of indoor andoutdoor pollutants and methods for resolving indoor air quality concerns. Find detailed information on exhaust or spot ventilation practices during construction. IndoorAir Pollution Report,July 2005 California Air Resources Board http:(fwww.arb.ca.gov(researchlindoorfabtt _3/finalreport.htm "Misreport, released inJuly 2005,covers the significant health effects caused by indoor airpollution, including respiratory illness and disease, asthma attacks, cancer, and premature death. The report describes the health effects, sources, and concentrations of indoor air pollutants; existing regulations, guidelines, and practices for indoor air pollution; and ways to prevent and reduce indoor air pollution. The State of Washington Program and IAQ Standards http://ww.aerias.orgiDesktopModules/ArticleDetaiLaspx?articleld=85 This standard was the first state-initiated program to ensure the design ofbuildings with acceptable lAQ. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) httpWwww.smacna.org SMACNAis aninternational organization that developed guidelinesformaintaininghealthful indoor air quality during demolitions, renovations, and construction. The professional trade association publishes the referenced standard as well as Indoor Air Quality: A Systems Approach, a comprehensive document that covers air pollutant sources, control measures, IAQ process management, quality control and documentation, interpersonal communication , sample projects, tables, references, resources, and checklists. Print Media Indoor Mr Quality: a Facility Manager's Guide, published by the Construction Technology Centre Atlantic, is written as a comprehensive review of indoor air quality issues and solutions. Purchase the report online at http:fictca.unb.ca/CTCA/communicationflAQ/Order_IAQ.htm. 13. Definitions A construction IAQ management plan outlines measures to minimize contamination in a specific building project duringconstruction and describes procedures to flush the buildingofcontaminants prior to occupancy. HVAC systems are equipment, distribution systems, and terminals that provide the processes of heating, ventilating, or air-conditioning. (ASHRAE 90.1-2007) 320 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281859 Indoor air quality (IAQ) is the nature of air inside a building that affects the health and well-being ofbuildingoccupants. It is considered acceptablewhen there are no known contaminants atharmful concentrations as determined by cognizant authorities and with which a substantial majority (8o% or more) of the people exposed do not express dissatisfaction. (ASHRAE 62.1-2007) Minimum efficiency reportingvalue (MERV) is a filter rating established by theAmerican Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE 52.2-1999, Method of Testing General Ventilation Air Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size). MERV efficiency categories range from t (very low efficiency) to t6 (very high). IEO CI Credit 3.1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 321 EFTA00281860 322 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281861 CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLANBEFORE OCCUPANCY Credit IEQ Credit 3.2 Points 1 point Intent To reduce indoor air quality (IAQ) problems resulting from construction or renovation and promote the comfort and well-being of workers and occupants. Requirement Develop an IAQ management plan and implement it after all finishes have been installed and the building has been completely cleaned before occupancy. OPTION 1. Flush-Out' PATH 1 After construction ends, prior to occupancy and with all interior finishes installed, install new filtration media and flush-out the building by supplying a total air volume of 14,000 cubic feet of outdoor air per square foot of floor area while maintaining an internal temperature of at least 600F and, where mechanical cooling is operated, relative humidity no higher than 6o%. OR PATH 2 If occupancy is desired prior to completion of the flush-out, the space may be occupied following delivery• of a minimum of 3,500 cubic feet of outdoor air per square foot of floor area. Once the space is occupied, it must be ventilated at a minimum rate of 0.30 cubic feet per minute (cfm) per square foot of outside air or the design minimum outside air rate determined in EQ Prerequisite I: Minimum lAQ Performance, whichever is greater. During each day of the flush-out period, ventilation must begin a minimum of 3 hours prior to occupancy and continue during occupancy. These conditions must be maintained until a total of 14,000 cubic feet per square foot of outside air has been delivered to the space. OR OPTION 2. Air Testing Conduct baseline IAQ testing after construction ends and prior to occupancy, using testing protocols consistent with the EPA Compendium of Methods for the Determination of Air Pollutants in Indoor Air and as additionally detailed in the LEED Reference Guide for Green Interior Design and Construction, 2.0°9 Edition. IEQ CREDIT 3.2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 323 EFTA00281862 IEQ CREDIT 3.2 Demonstrate that the contaminant maximum concentration levels listed below are not exceeded: Cadaminant Maximum Cancentre0nn Formaldehyde 27 parts per billion Particulates (PM10) 50 micrograms per cubic meter Total volatile organic compounds (TVOCs) 500 micrograms per cubic meter 4-Phenylcyclohexene (4-PCH)* 6.5 micrograms per cubic meter Carbon monoxide (CO) 9 pal per million and no greater than 2 parts per million above outdoor levels 'This tesl is required only if carpets and fabrics with styrene baled:en* lubber 'SIMI latex backing are installed as pad of the base building systems. For each sampling point where the maximum concentration limits are exceeded, conduct an additional flush-out with outside air and retest the noncompliant concentrations Repeat until all requirements have been met. When retesting noncompliant building areas take samples from the same locations as in the first test. Conduct the air sample testing as follows: • All measurements must be conducted prior to occupancy,but during normal occupied hours, with the building ventilation system started at the normal daily start time and operated at the minimum outside air flow rate for the occupied mode throughout the test. • All interior finishes must be installed, including but not limited to millwork, doors, paint, carpet and acoustic tiles. Movable furnishings such as workstations and partitions must be in place. • The number of sampling locations will depend on the size of the building and number of ventilation systems. For each portion of the building served by a separate ventilation system, the number of sampling points must not be less than t per 25,000 square feet or for each contiguous floor area, whichever is larger. Include areas with the least ventilation and greatest presumed source strength. • Air samples must be collected between 3 and 6 feet from the floor to represent the breathing zone of occupants, and over a minimum 4-hour period. 324 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281863 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Reducing contaminants inside buildings results in greater occupant comfort, lower absenteeism, and improved productivity. Construction inevitably introduces contaminants to building interiors. If unaddressed, contamination can result in poor IAQ extending over the lifetime of a building. Fortunately, there are IAQ management strategies that, if instituted during construction and before occupancy, will minimize potential problems (see Implementation). Economic Issues Additional time and labor may be required during construction to protect and clean ventilation systems and building spaces. These actions can extend the lifetime of ventilation systems and improve their efficiency, resulting in reduced energy use. The sequencing of material installation so as to reduce contamination may require additional time and could potentially delay occupancy. However, early coordination between the design team, contractor, and subcontractors can minimize or eliminate scheduling delays. 2. Related Credits Comprehensive construction IAQ management consists of best practices both during construction and after construction, prior to occupancy. These activities are typically governed by the same management plan. The following credit also requires development and implementation of a construction IAQ management plan: ■ IEQ Credit 3.1: Construction IAQ Management Plan During Construction The materials that are specified and installed within the external moisture barrier of the building, as well as filtration, can directly affect air quality and influence the results for air quality testing. Refer also to the following credits: ■ IEQ Credit 4: Low-Emitting Materials ■ IEQ Credit 5: Indoor Chemical and Pollutant Source Control Dilution of indoor air contaminants can typically be achieved by introducing outdoor air. The following credit and prerequisite deal with ventilation rates: ■ IEQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance ■ IEQ Credit 2: Increased Ventilation 3. Summary of Referenced Standard U.S. EPA Compendium of Methods for the Determination of Air Pollutants in Indoor Air This standard is available from NTIS (Soo) 553-68c with the ordering number P890200288. According to the Compendium, the EPA created this document to "provide regional, state and local environmental regulatory agencies with step-by-step sampling and analysis procedures for the determination of selected pollutants in indoor air. Determination of pollutants in indoor air is a complex task, primarily because of the wide variety of compounds of interest and the lack of standardized sampling and analysis procedures. The Compendium has been prepared to provide a standardized format for such analytical procedures. A core set of 1O chapters with each chapter containing 1 or more methods are presented in the current document. Compendium covers a variety of active and passive sampling procedures, as well as several analytical techniques both on and off site." IEQ CI Credit 3.2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 325 EFTA00281864 IEQ CI Credit 3.2 4. Implementation Flush-Out Procedure This compliance path uses the building HVAC system to evacuate airborne contaminants. Complete all construction work, including punch-list items, before beginning the flush-out. Finalize all cleaning prior to the flush-out. Complete the final test and balancing of HVAC systems, and make sure the HVAC control is functional, especially if the occupants will be moving in during the second phase of the flush-out Commissioning can occur during the flush-out if it does not introduce any additional contaminants into the building. The flush-out procedure discussed below assumes the use of the building's HVAC system, but alternatives are acceptable if they meet the air quantity, temperature, and humidity requirements. One approach uses temporary supply and exhaust systems placed into windows or window openings. EPA's Indoor Air Quality Tools for Schools website provides information on exhaust and spot ventilation during construction that can be helpful for design teams considering using this approach. Make sure the air flow is not short circuited, which could leave remote corners of the project spaces with inadequate circulation or cause unanticipated increases in other parts of the building, such as a stack effect in elevator shafts. If the space's central HVAC system is used, the team should remove any temporary filters and duct coverings installed as part of the construction IAQ management plan. The team should replace the HVAC filtration media with new media; if the system is configured to filter only outside air, the filters do not need to be replaced. New filters that meet the design specification and were installed prior to the start of flush-out will also satisfy the requirements of IEQ Credit 3.t, Construction IAQ Management Plan During Construction. Note that these filters must be MERV 13 or better when a project plans to earn IEQ Credit 5, Indoor Chemical and Pollution Source Control. Depending on their condition followingflush-out, some or all of the filters might be ready for replacement, but this is not a condition for satisfying the credit requirements. Outside air is used to dilute and remove off-gassed contaminants. The quantity of outside air that must be introduced to the project space for the flush-out is 14,000 cubic feet of air per square foot of floor area. Occupants may move in only after the initial flush out phase, when 3,500 cubic feet of air per square foot has been replaced (Figure 1). The initial flush-out phase does not signal the completion of the flush-out, however: Atotal of14,000 cubic feet of outside air must be supplied per square foot of floor area before the HVAC system is switched to its normal operational mode. Figure 1. Sample Air Quantity for Flush-Out 16000 14000 12000 4) 10000 3._ 8000 4.) -0 60000 .7) 0 4003 14,000 CF Total Outside Air Occupancy on Day 5 Accumulative CF Outside Air 3.500 CF Minimum Prior To Occupancy 2000 CF Outside Air 0 IM0 01 in N. ON ti en in N. 01 V) in N. <V <V N Csl Duration in Days U326 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281865 Not all outside air is equal. Depending upon geography and season, outside air can be very cold or damp. Because of this, prudent limits have been set to ensure no harm comes to the building and occupants. The rate of outside air should not cause the interior temperature to drop below 6o°F, and relative humidity should not exceed 60%. During an occupied flush-out phase, a minimum ventilation rate must begin at least 3 hours before daily occupancy and continue while the space is occupied. The rate of outside air must be at least 0.30 cubic feet per minute (cfm) per square foot or the design minimum outside air rate, whichever is greater. The design minimum outside air rate should be determined using ASHRAE 62.1-2007, the same criteria for IEQ Prerequisite 1, Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance, or the applicable local code if it is more stringent. The 0.30 cfrn per square foot rate maybe several times the ASHRAE 62.1-2007 requirement fora project's planned occupancy. As a result, consider the minimum flushout rate during early HVAC design. There are other thermal comfort, expense, and operational considerations to evaluate when preparing tooccupy a space before the end of flush-out. Check to make sure the HVAC system can maintain temperatures within a range that is comfortable for the occupants; opinions formed during this period may last long after the system is operating normally. There are numerous expense and operational issues to consider, such as the rent or lease details and the existing HVAC system capacity to accommodate the flush-out criteria. Input from the entire project team will help determine the best approach. When completed, make the evaluation and the resulting flush-out strategy part of the project construction IAQ management plan. When there are multiple HVAC systems that can operate independently, it is acceptable to flush out portions of the building as they are completed, but no additional construction work can occur once the flush out of an area begins. Isolate completed areas from those under construction per SMACNA IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under Construction. Air Quality Testing The baseline IAQ testing approach is meant to confirm that major contaminants are below recognized acceptable levels before occupancy. While the list included in the credit is not intended to be all-inclusive, it approximates the major forms of postconstruction airborne constituents. Testing results that meet the credit requirements indicate that the project has implemented a successful construction IAQ management plan, low-emitting materials have been specified, cleanup has been thorough, and the HVAC system is providing adequate ventilation. They can also mean that occupancy can occur sooner than what might have been possible if the flush-out compliance path had been followed. Ideally, the groundwork should be laid for baseline testing during the design process by making sure the testing requirements are included in Division r of the project construction specifications. This credit does not establish qualifications for the laboratory or those conducting the sampling; however, the project team should evaluate the capabilities of the IAQ specialist, industrial hygienist, and testing facility being considered for field sampling of IAQ in buildings. During construction, be vigilant about avoiding substitutions for the specified low-emitting materials. Use low-VOC cleaning supplies to prevent short-term high-VOC levels that may affect test results. Use vacuum cleaners with HEPA filtration to capture particulates. Projects also following the requirements of IEQ Credit 3.1, Construction IAQ Management Plan During Construction, should replace all filtration media after the final cleaning and complete the air test and balancing of the HVAC system before beginning the baseline IAQ testing. The IAQ maximum contaminant levels are dependent on the HVAC system operating under normal conditions with outdoor airflow rates at the minimum; this stipulation is made so that the air tested is as similar IEQ CI Credit 3.2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 327 EFTA00281866 I EQ CI Credit 3.2 as possible to what the occupants will be breathing. The protocols described in the referenced publication, EPA's Compendium of Methods for the Determination ofAir Pollutants in Indoor Air, are recommended, but others may be used if the project team can provide valid justification. The project team should select the sampling locations carefully to find the concentrations in areas with the least ventilation and, potentially,the greatest presumed contaminant source strength. The team shouM take at least t sample per 25,000 square feet in each portion of the building served by a separate ventilation system. For example, in a 20,000-square-foot tenant space served by 3 rooftop units—s each for the north and south elevations (general office area) and the third for a training room and conference rooms—the project team should take samples in at least 3 places, even though 2 units serve s general office area. The team should take the samples in the breathing zone, between 3 feet and 6 feet above the floor, during normal occupied hours, with the HVAC system operating at normal daily start times, and with the minimum outside airflow rate. Follow-up samples might be needed, so the project team should record the exact sample locations. If a test sample exceeds the maximum concentration level, the team should flush out the space by increasing the rate ofoutside air. While the credit requirements do not prescribe the duration ofthe flush-out, those responsible for testing should make an evaluation based on the contaminant, its concentration, and the potential source. Off-gassing characteristics of sources differ; some deplete rapidly, while others emit at a steady rate over an extended period of time. The project team should resample and confirm compliance before allowingoccupancy. The retest may be limited to the chemical contaminants that produced excessive chemical concentration levels in the initial test 5. Timeline and Team During the design phase, include language requiring the general contractor to develop and implement a construction IAQ management plan that includes a compliant flush-out procedure and/or air quality testing that meets the requirements of this credit. After construction and installation of all finishes (including furniture and furnishings), conduct IAQ testing and/or a flush-out following the construction IAQ management plan and in accordance with the requirements of this credit. Some additional time and labor may be required during and after construction to protect and clean ventilation systems. With early coordination for the sequencing of material installation and coordination between the contractor and subcontractors, the team can minimize or eliminate scheduling delays. 6. Calculations If a building flush-out is performed before occupancy, the total quantity of outdoor air that must be delivered to the space is calculated as follows: Phased flush-out: Phase 1 Building Area (st) X 3,500 ft of Outdoor Air = Cubic Feet of Air Needed Prior to Occupancy Phase 2 Building Area (st) X 10,500 ft of Outdoor Air = Cubic Feet of Air Needed to Complete Flush-Out Nonphased flush-out: Building Area (st) X 14,000 ft of Outdoor Air = Cubic Feet of Air Needed Prior to Occupancy Note: feet of outdoor air = cubic feet per square foot 328 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281867 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. • Maintain a written construction IAQ management plan. • Record dates, occupancy, outdoor air delivery rates, internal temperature, humidity, and any special considerations for projects completing a flush-out procedure. • Maintain a copy of the testing report and verify that all required contaminants are accounted for and are reported in the correct unit of measure for projects completing IAQ testing. 8. Examples Table 1. Time for Flush-Out Options Volume of Time to Square Outdoor Air Air Required lime Before Minimum Outdoor Complete Required for Air Delivery Rate Flush-Out Foot of Office Flush-Out Before Occupancy Occupancy (days) Post-Occupancy at Minimum (cfmfsf) (cu. ft.) (cfm) Delivery Rate (days) 15.000 24.3 Pre-Occupancy Option 50,000 14,000 700,000.000 32.4 0 0 Post-Occupancy Option 50.000 14.000 175.000.000 8.1 Note. Aswening the bui Wing tun a 15.000 cfrn air handler. capable al operating at 107% OA while maintaining 60' F and 607E RH 24 hr/day 9. Exemplary Performance This credit is not eligible for exemplary performance under the Innovation in Design section. 10. Regional Variations For projects that pursue this credit through the flush-out options in regions where there may be humid and/or cold outdoor air, the project team should be sure to maintain the indoor air temperature at or above 60°F and maintain the relative humidity at or below 60%. When weather conditions may impact the ability to sufficiently heat, cool, or dehumidify the supply air, careful coordination between the project schedule and seasonal variations is crucial. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Minimize potential sources of indoor air contamination. If such sources must be introduced, consider flushing out the affected areas of the building before those areas are occupied. Use periodic IAQ testing to verify safe, healthful conditions. If applicable, provide building operators with information about the flush-out procedures used during construction to facilitate adoption of similar practices following future alterations or additions. Encourage them to draft an IAQ management plan, following the LEED for Existing Buildings: = guidance, for any future alterations and additions. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http://Www.usgbc.orgiprojecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites Indoor Air Pollution Report, July, 2005 California Air Resources Board http://wmv.arb.ca.gov/research/indoorfabi inffinakear n IEQ CI Credit 3.2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 329 EFTA00281868 IE0 CI Credit 3.2 Controlling Pollutants and Sources, IAQ Design for Schools U.S. EPA httN/www.epa.goivfiagschooldesiaticontrolling.html This EPA website offers detailed information on exhaust or spot ventilation practices during construction activity. State of Washington Program and IAQ Standards httpWww.aerias.orgfDeslctopModules/ArticleDetail.aspx?articleld=8% This standard was the first state-initiated program to ensure the design ofbuildings with acceptable IAQ. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association httplIww.smacna.org SMACNA is an international organization that developed guidelines for maintaining healthful indoor air quality during demolitions, renovations, and construction. They publish Indoor Air Quality: A Systems Approach, which covers air pollutant sources, control measures, IAQ process management, quality control and documentation, interpersonal communication , sample projects, tables, references, resources, and checklists. Print Media Indoor AirQuality: a Facility Manager's Guide, Construction TechnologyCentreAtlantic, is written as a comprehensive review of IAQ issues and solutions. Purchase the report online at http://ctca.unb. ca/CTCA/communicati0n/IAQ/Order_LAQ.htm. Compendium of Methods for the Determination of Inorganic Compounds in Ambient Air U.S. EPA This standard is available for purchase from NTIS. 13. Definitions A construction IAQ management plan outlines measures to minimize contamination in a specific building during construction and to flush the building of contaminants before occupancy. Contaminants are unwanted airborne constituents that may reduce air quality (ASHRAE 6z.i - 2007). HVAC systems are the equipment, distribution systems, and terminals that provide the processes of heating, ventilating, or air-conditioning (ASHRAE 90. t -2007) Indoor air quality (IAQ) is the nature of air inside a building that affects the health and well-being ofbuildingoccupants. It is considered acceptablewhen there are no known contaminants atharmful concentrations as determined by cognizant authorities and with which a substantial majority (80% or more) of the people exposed do not express dissatisfaction. (ASHRAE 62. t -2.007) Off-gassing is the emission of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) from synthetic and natural products. Thermal comfort exists when building occupants express satisfaction with the thermal environment. Outdoor air is the ambient air that enters a building through a ventilation system, either through intentional openings for natural ventilation or by infiltration. (ASHRAE 62.t -2007) Ventilation the provision and removal of air to control air contaminant levels, humidity, or temperature within an indoor space. Ventilation is measured in air changes per hour—the quantity of infiltration air in cubic feet per minute (cfm) divided by the volume of the room. (ASH RAE 623-2007) 330 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281869 LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS-ADHESIVES AND SEALANTS Credit IEQ Credit 4.1 Points 1 point Intent To reduce the quantity of indoor air contaminants that are odorous, potentially irritating and/ or harmful to the comfort and well-being of installers and occupants. Requirements All adhesives and sealants used on the interior of the building (i.e. inside of the weatherproofing system and applied on-site) must comply with the requirements as applicable to the project scope:' • Adhesives, sealants and sealant primers must comply with South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1168. Volatile organic compound (VOC) limits listed in the table below were effective July 1, zoos with a rule amendment date oflanuary 7, zoos. Architectural Applications VOC Limit (g/L less water) Specialty Applications (g/ L VOC limit less water) Indoor carpet adhesives 50 PVC welding 510 Carpet pad adhesives 50 CPVC welding 490 Wood flooring adhesives 100 ABS welding 325 Rubber floor adhesives 60 Plastic cement welding 250 Subfloor adhesives 50 Adhesive primer for plastic 550 Ceramic tile adhesives 65 Contact adhesive 80 VCT and asphalt adhesives 50 Special purpose contact adhesive 250 Drywall and panel adhesives 50 Structural wood member adhesive 140 Cove base adhesives 50 Sheet applied rubber lining operations 850 Multipurpose construction adhesives 70 Top and trim adhesive 250 Structural glazing adhesives 100 Substrate Specific Applications VOC Limit (g/L less water) Sealants VOC Limit (g/I. Wu water) Metal to metal 30 Architectural 250 Plastic foams 50 Nonmembrane roof 300 Porous material (except wood) 50 Roadway 250 Wood 30 Singe-ply roof membrane 450 Fiberglass 80 Other 420 Sealant Primers VOC Limit (g/L less water) Architectural. nonporous 250 Architectural. porous 775 Other 750 • Aerosol Adhesives must comply with Green Seal Standard for Commercial Adhesives GS-36 requirements in effect on October 19, z000. Aerosol Adhesives VOC weight (g/L minus water) General purpose mist spray 65% VOCs by weight General purpose web spray 55% VOCs by weight Special purpose aerosol adhesives (all types) 70% VOCs by weight t The use of a VOC budget is pcimissible for compliance with this credit. IEQ CREDIT 4.1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 331 EFTA00281870 IEQ CI Credit 4.1 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Many building products contain compounds that have a negative impact on indoor air quality (LAQ) and Earth's atmosphere. The most prominent of these compounds—volatile organic compounds (VOCs)—contribute to smog generation and air pollution as well as adversely affect the well-being of building occupants. Environmental Issues VOCs react with sunlight and nitrogen oxides (NOx) in the atmosphere to form ground-level ozone, a chemical that has detrimental effects on human health,agricultural crops, forests,and ecosystems. This ground-level ozone damages lung tissue, reduces lung function, and sensitizes the lungs to other irritants. Additionally, ground-level ozone is also a major component of smog. Economic Issues Healthy occupants are more productive and have less illness-related absenteeism. Materials with high VOC content can threaten occupant's health and may decrease their productivity, increasing expenses and liability for building owners, operators, and insurance companies. Because of these issues, the construction market is driving product manufacturers to offer low-VOC alternatives to conventional building products. Costs for these products are generally competitive with conventional materials; however, some low-VOC materials are more expensive than conventional materials, particularly when the products are new to the marketplace. Low-VOC alternatives may also be difficult to obtain for some product types. These issues likely will fade as the use of low-VOC products becomes more commonplace. 2. Related Credits Because the intent of this credit is to reduce odorous, irritating, or harmful indoor air contaminants, the following other credits may be applicable: • IEQ Credit 4.2: Low-Emitting Materials—Paints and Coatings • IEQ Credit 4.3: Low-Emitting Materials—Flooring Systems • IEQ Credit 44: Low-Emitting Materials—Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products • IEQ Credit 4.5: Low-Emitting Materials—Systems Furniture and Seating Scheduling strategies relating to the use and tracking of low-emitting materials may be addressed early in construction and prior to occupancy. The following credits also are affected by scheduling considerations: • I EQ Credit 3.1: Construction LAQ Management Plan During Construction • IEQ Credit 3.2: Construction IAQ Management Plan Before Occupancy Project teams may wish to address smoking-related contaminants in the building in conjunction with other sources of air pollutants, as outlined in the following: • IEQ Prerequisite a: Environmental Tobacco Smoke (ETS) Control • IEQ Credit 5: Indoor Chemical and Pollutant Source Control 3. Summary of Referenced Standards South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Amendment to South Coast Rule ii6B,VOC Limits, effective January 7, zoos South Coast Air Quality Management District http://ww.aqmd.govirulesegireguirti68.0f 332 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281871 The South Coast Air Quality Management District is a governmental organization in southern California with the mission to maintain healthful air quality for its residents. The organization established source-specific standards to reduce air quality impacts. Table 1. VOC Limits for Adhesives and Sealants Architectural Applications VOC limit (gIL less water) Specialty Applications VOC Limit (O. less water) Indoor carpet acnew.es 50 PVC v.tkling 5:0 Carpet pad adhesives 50 CAT welding 490 Wood flowing adhesives 100 ABS welding 325 Rubber Boor adhesives 60 Plastic cement welding 250 Subrbot adhesives 50 Adhesive primer or piratic 550 Ceramic tile adhesives 65 Contact adhesive 80 VCT and asphalt adhesives 50 Special purpose contact adhesive 250 Orynall and panel adhesives 50 Structural wood member adhesive 140 Cove brae adhesives 50 Sheet applied rubber lining operations 850 Multipurpose construction acne sees 70 Top and trim adhesive 250 Structural glazing achesnres 100 Substrate Specific Applications VOC limit (g/L less water) Sealants VOC limit (g/L less water) Metal to metal 30 Architectural 250 Plastic foams 50 Nonmembrane roof 3C0 Paces material (except wood) 50 Roadway 250 Wood 30 Single-pty roof membrane 450 Fiberglass 80 Other 420 Sealant Primers VOC Limit (g/L Its water) Architectural, nonporous 250 Architectural, porous 775 Other 750 Green Seal Standard 36 (GS-36), effective October 19,2000 http://ww.greenseal.orgicertificationistandards/commerciaLadhesives GS 36.cfrn Green Seal is an independent, nonprofit organization that strives to achieve a healthier and cleaner environment by identifying and promoting products and services that cause less toxic pollution and waste, conserve resources and habitats, and minimize global warming and ozone depletion. GS-36 sets VOC limits for commercial adhesives. Green Seal Standard for Commercial Adhesives GS-36 requirements went in effect on October 19, 2000. Table 2. VOC Limits for Aerosol Adhesives Aerosol Adhesives VOC Limit General purpose mist spray 65% VOCs by weight General purpose web spray 55% VOCs by weight Special purpose aerosol adhesives (all types) 70% VOCs by weight IEQ CI Credit 4.1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 333 EFTA00281872 IEQ CI Credit 4.1 4. Implementation The sections under IEQ Credit 4, Low-Emitting Materials, apply to products and installation processes that have the potential to adversely affect the IAQ of a project space and, subsequently, those occupants exposed to the off-gassing of contaminants from these materials. LEED for Commercial Interiors IEQ Credit 4.1 employs 3 approaches to limit off-gassing: composition limits, emission factors, and performance-based standards. For IEQ Credit O, Low-Emitting Materials—Adhesives and Sealants, project teams may use either the composition limit approach or VOC budgets to determine compliance. For the budget approach, see the Calculations section, below. Composition Limits MI materials that emit contaminants with the potential to enter the indoor air will be considered indoor contaminant sources. They include all surfaces in contact with indoor air such as: flooring; walls; ceilings; interior furnishings; suspended ceiling systems and the materials above those suspended ceilings;ventilation system components that contact the ventilation supply or return air; and all materials inside wall cavities, ceiling cavities, floor cavities, or horizontal or vertical chases. These materials include caulking materials for windows, as well as insulation in ceilings or walls. An example of a material that has little or no potential to contact indoor air is siding on the exterior of waterproofing membrane. In this approach, the formulation of a product is controlled. Limits are set on the amount of VOCs permitted in a given volume of the product. The threshold limits and the content within a particular product are generally expressed in grams per liter (g(L). 3 IEQ credits use this approach: 4.1, Low-Emitting Materials—Adhesives and Sealants; 4.z, Low-Emitting Materials—Paints and Coatings; and 4.3, Low-Emitting Materials—Mooring Systems. IEQ Credit 4.4, Low-Emitting Materials—Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products, also controls formulation by not allowing any added urea-formaldehyde resins. 5. Timeline and Team The requirements for products and activities covered in IEQ Credit 4, Low-Emitting Materials— Adhesives and Sealants, should be noted in the project specifications and, ideally, within the specific section applicable to a particular trade or supplier. Design Phase Credit requirements should be clearly stated in project specifications. Refer to the credit requirements in both Division r and in the technical divisions. Indicate what must be provided in the way of cut sheets, MSD sheets, certificates, and test reports. Consider making submittal of this compliance documentation a condition of product approval. Construction Phase Meeting the requirements set in IEQ Credit 4, Low-Emitting Materials—Adhesives and Sealants, is not everyday practice for all construction teams and suppliers. Consider asldng the project owner to stress the importance of meeting the LEED requirements during prebid meetings and again at the time ofcontract award. During these sessions, have LEED Accredited Professionals available and ask for questions. Include requirements in subcontracts and purchase orders. Determine whether the VOC budget compliance path will be necessary and track materials according to the budget planned by the project team. If a product with high VOC levels is used unintentionally, the VOC budget approach maybe used to determine whether credit compliance can be attained Follow-Up during Construction Consider providing LEED project signage alongside the project safety signage. In progress meetings, address topics relevant to lo w-emitting materials and the LEED requirements. Finally, assign someone on the construction team to provide leadership and ensure compliance in meeting lowemitting materials goals. 334 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281873 6. Calculations VOC Budget Methodology Determining a VOC budget is one way to achieve compliance under IEQ Credit 4.1, Low-Emitting Materials—Adhesives and Sealants. To demonstrate that the overall low-VOC performance has been attained for paints and adhesives separately, not in combination, compare the baseline case and the design case. When the design (or actual) is less than the baseline, the credit requirement is satisfied. The values used in the comparison calculation are the total VOCs contained in the products (e.g., sealants) used on the project. To determine total VOCs, multiply the volume of the product used by the threshold VOC level for the baseline case and actual product VOC level for the design case. The baseline application rate should not be greater than that used in the design case. As the term budget implies, this compliance path involves an up-front decision. If a product with high VOC levels is used unintentionally,follow the VOC budget approach to determine whether credit compliance can nevertheless be attained. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Maintain alist ofall indoor aerosol adhesive products,adheshres,sealants,and sealant primers used on the project; include each produces manufacturer's name,product name, specific VOC data (gile, less water), and the corresponding allowable VOC from the referenced standard ■ Track the amount of each product used in the project if the VOC budget approach is taken. 8. Examples There are no examples for this credit. 9. Exemplary Performance This credit is not eligible for Exemplary Performance under the Innovation in Design section. 10. Regional Variations There are no regional variations for this credit. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Implement a sustainable purchasing policyfor the continueduseoflow-emitting materials duringthe building's operation. Help building operators find low-emitting products for repairs or alterations by providing them with the list of compliant products used during the construction process. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http://www.usgbc.org/projecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Webites South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) South Coast Rule n68, VOC Limits http://www.aqmd.govirulesfregiregnirn68.pdf The South Coast Air Quality Management District is a governmental organization in southern California with the mission to maintain healthful air quality for its residents. The organization established source-specific standards to reduce air quality impacts. IEQ CI Credit 4.1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 335 EFTA00281874 I EQ CI Credit 4.1 Green Seal Standard 36 (GS-36) http://ww.greenseal.orgkertification/standards/commerciaLadhesives G$ 36.cfm Green Seal is an independent, nonprofit organization that strives to achieve a healthier and cleaner environment by identifying and promoting products and services that cause less toxic pollution and waste, conserve resources and habitats, and minimize global warming and ozone depletion. GS-36 sets VOC limits for commercial adhesives. 13. Definitions Adhesive is any substance that is used to bond 1 surface to another surface by attachment. Adhesives include adhesive bonding primers, adhesive primers, adhesive primers for plastics, and any other primer. (SCAQMD Rule tt68) Aerosol adhesive is an aerosol product in which the spray mechanism is permanently housed in a nonrefillable can designed for hand-held application without the need for ancillary hoses or spray equipment Aerosol adhesives include special-purpose spray adhesives, mist spray adhesives, and web spray adhesives. (SCAQMD Rule tt68) Architectural nonporous sealant primer is a substance used as a sealant primer on nonporous materials. Architectural porous sealant primer is a substance used as a sealant on porous materials. Indoor adhesive, sealant, and/or sealant primer product is as an adhesive or sealant product applied on-site, inside the building's weatherproofing system. Indoor air quality (IAQ) is the nature of air inside a building that affects the health and well-being ofbuildingoccupants. It is considered acceptablewhen there are no known contaminants atharmful concentrations as determined by cognizant authorities and with which a substantial majority (80% or more) of the people exposed do not express dissatisfaction. (ASHRAE 62.1-2007) Nonporous sealant is a substance used as a sealant on nonporous materials. Nonporous materials, such as plastic and metal, do not have openings in which fluids maybe absorbed or discharged. Occupants in a commercial building are workers who either have a permanent office or workstation or typically spend a minimum of to hours per week in the project building; in a residential building, regular occupants also include all persons who live in the building. Off-gassing is the emission of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) from synthetic and natural products. Ozone (O3) is a gas composed of 3 oxygen atoms. It is not usually emitted directly into the air but at ground-level is created by a chemical reaction between oxides of nitrogen (nox) and volatile organic compounds (VOCs) in the presence of sunlight. Ozone has the same chemical structure whether it occurs miles above the earth or at ground level and can be beneficial or harmful, depending on its location in the atmosphere. (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency) Porous materials have tiny openings, often microscopic, that can absorb or discharge fluids. Examples include wood, fabric, paper, corrugated paperboard, and plastic foam. (SCAQMD Rule 1168) A sealant has adhesive properties and is formulated primarily to fill, seal, or waterproof gaps or joints between a surfaces. Sealants include sealant primers and caulks. (SCAQMD Rule 1168) A sealant primer is applied to a substrate, prior to the application of a sealant, to enhance the bonding surface. (SCAQMD Rule 1168) Volatile organic compounds (VOCs) are carbon compounds (excluding carbon monoxide, carbon dicodde, carbonic acid, metallic carbides and carbonates, and ammonium carbonate) that participate in atmospheric photochemical reactions. The compounds vaporize (become a gas) at normal room temperatures. 336 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281875 LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS-PAINTS AND COATINGS L Credit Points IEC! Credit 4.2 1 point Intent To reduce the quantityof indoor air contaminants that are odorous, irritating andfor harmful to the comfort and well-being of installers and occupants. Requirements Paints and coatings used on the interior of the building (i.e. inside the weatherproofing system and applied on-site) must comply with the following criteria as applicable to the project scope': ■ Architectural paints and coatings applied to interior walls and ceilings— must not exceed the volatile organic compound (VOC) content limits established in Green Seal Standard GS-1t, Paints, 1st Edition, May 20,1993. ■ Anti-corrosive and anti-nist paints applied to interior ferrous metal substrates must not exceed the VOC content limit of 250 WI. established in Green Seal Standard GS-03, AntiCorrosive Paints, and Edition, January 7, 1997. • Clear wood finishes, floor coatings, stains, primers, and shellacs applied to interior elements: must not exceed the VOC content limits established in South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113, Architectural Coatings, effective January 1, 2004 I lha• uuul a V( Amid for aompliv:ca• with ti areCit IEQ CREDIT 4.2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 337 EFTA00281876 IEQ CI Credit 4.2 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Refer to the Benefits and Issues section of IEQ Credit 4.t, Low-Emitting Materials—Adhesives and Sealants. 2. Related Credits Because the intent of this credit is to reduce odorous, irritating, or harmful indoor air contaminants, the following other credits may be applicable: • I EQ Credit 4..1: Low Emitting Materials—Adhesives and Sealants • I EQ Credit 4.3: Low Emitting Materials—Flooring Systems ■ IEQ Credit 44: Low Emitting Materials—Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products ■ IEQ Credit 4.5: Low Emitting Materials—Systems Furniture and Seating Scheduling strategies relating to the use and tracking of low-emitting materials may be addressed early in construction and prior to occupancy. The following are credits also affected by scheduling considerations: ■ IEQ Credit 3.1: Construction IAQ Management Plan, During Construction ■ IEQ Credit 3.z: Construction IAQ Management Plan, Before Occupancy Project teams may wish to address smoking-related contaminants in the building in conjunction with other sources of air pollutants as outlined in the following credits: • IEQ Prerequisite 2: Environmental Tobacco Smoke (ETS) Control • I EQ Credit 5: Indoor Chemical and Pollutant Source Control 3. Summary of Referenced Standards Green Seal Standard GS-it Green Seal is an independent nonprofit organization that strives to achieve a healthier and cleaner environment by identifying and promoting products and services that cause less toxic pollution and waste, conserve resources and habitats, and minimize global warming and ozone depletion. GS-It sets VOC limits for commercial flat paints and nonflat paints . Tables t and 2 summarize Green Seal Standard GS-11. Green Seal Standard GC-03 http://wv.greenseaLorgicertificationistandardsfanti-corrosivepaints.pdf GC-03 sets VOC limits for anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints. Chemical Component Limitations— VOC: the manufacturer shall demonstrate that the paint is not formulated to exceed the VOC concentrations listed below: Coating Type (g/L) minus water Gloss 250 Semi-Gloss 250 Flat 250 South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113, Architectural Coatings http://yoww.aqmd.govirules The South Coast Mr Quality Management District is a governmental organization in southern California with the mission to maintain healthful air quality for its residents. The organization established source-specific standards to reduce air quality impacts. 338 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281877 Table 1. Standard VOC Limits VOCs (EX minus water, minus exempt compounds) Coating Ceiling Limit• Current Limit Effective Date 1/1/03 111/04 111/05 7/1)06 7/1)07 7/1108 Bond breakers 350 Clear Weed finishes 350 275 - Varnish 350 275 - Sanding 350 275 Sealers 680 550 275 - Lacquer Clear brushing lacquer 680 275 Conaetecuring compounds 350 100 Concretecuring compounds for roadways and bridges" 350 Ortlott coatings 400 150 Fee-proaing Metier coatings 450 350 Feerelardant coatings"' - Clem 650 - Pigmented 350 Flab 250 100 50 Floor coatings 420 100 50 Graphic arts (sign) coatings 500 Industrial maintenance (ire) coatings 420 250 100 High ternperalsre in coatings 420 Zinc•rich ire primers 420 340 100 Japonstlaus finishing coatings 700 350 Magnesite cement coatings 600 450 Mastic coatings 300 Metallic Pkgmented coatings 500 Multicolor coatings 420 250 Nontlat coatings 250 150 50 Monthst high gloss 250 150 50 Pigmented lacquer 680 550 275 Pretreatment wash primers 780 420 Primers. sealers. undercoaters 350 200 100 Primers. sealers. undercoaters 350 200 100 Ouickdry enamels 400 250 150 50 Gruickdry primers, sealers. undercoaters 350 200 100 Recycled coatings 250 Roof coatings 300 250 50 Aluminum rod coatings 500 100 Root primers, bituminous 350 350 Rust: preventive coatings 420 400 100 Shellac Clem 730 - Pigmented 550 Specialty primers 350 250 100 Stains 350 250 100 - Interior 250 Swimming pool coatings - Repair 650 - Other 340 340 Traffic coatings 250 150 100 Waterproofing sealers 400 250 100 Waterproofing concrete. masonry status 400 100 Wood preservatives - Belem-ground 350 Other 350 ' The specified limits remain in effect until revised. " Does not include compounds used for curbs and gutters. sidewalks, islands. driy ways. and other miscellaneous concrete areas. "' The 6re-retardant coating category was eliminated on January 1.2007. and substmed by the coating category for *Mich it was formulated. IEQ CI Credit 4.2 2C39 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 339 EFTA00281878 CI Credi: 4.2 Table 2. Standard V0C Limits I_ Coating Limit VOCs (ill,) LON.S01 ds coat. ng 27 parts per billion 4. Implementation Refer to the implementation section of IEQ Credit 41, Low-Emitting Materials—Adhesives and Sealants. 5. Timeline and Team Refer to the Timeline and Team section of IEQ Credit 4.1, Low-Emitting Materials—Adhesives and Sealants. 6. Calculations Use the VOC budget methodology described in the Calculations section of IEQ Credit 4.1„ LowEmitting Materials—Adhesives and Sealants. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Maintain a listing of each indoor paint and coating product used on the project; include each product's manufacturer's name, product name, specific VOC data (in gIL, less water), and the corresponding allowable VOC from the referenced standard. ■ Track the amount of each product used if the VOC budget approach is taken. 8. Examples There are no examples for this credit. 9. Exemplary Performance This credit is not eligible for exemplary performance under the Innovation in Design section. 10. Regional Variations There are no regional variations for this credit. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Implement a sustainable purchasing policy for the continued use of low-emitting materials during the building's operation. Help building operators find low-emitting products for repairs or alterations by providing them with the list of compliant products. Provide maintenance personnel with information about original products to aid in color matching. Using fewer types of paint and coating products in the overall design makes maintenance easier. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (httpdhvww.usgbc.org(projecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites Green Seal http://wivw.greenseakorg 340 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281879 South Coast Air Quality Management District http://www.aqmd.gov 13. Definitions Anticorrosive paints are coatings formulated and recommended for use in preventing the corrosion of ferrous metal substrates. A coating is applied to beautify, protect, or provide a barrier to a surface. (SCAQMD Rule 1113) Flat coatings register a gloss of less than 15 on an 85-degree meter or less than 5 on a 60-degree meter. Nonflat coatings register a gloss of5 or greater on a 60-degree meter and a gloss of ts or greater on an 85-degree meter. Contaminants are unwanted airborne constituents that may reduce air quality. (ASHRAE 62.1- 2007) Indoor air quality (IAQ) is the nature of air inside a building that affects the health and well-being ofbuildingoccupants. It is considered acceptablewhen there are no known contaminants atharmful concentrations as determined by cognizant authorities and with which a substantial majority (80% or more) of the people exposed do not express dissatisfaction. (ASHRAE 62.1-2007) Indoor paints or coating products are applied on-site inside a building's weatherproofing system. Occupants in a commercial building are workers who eitherhave a permanent office or workstation or typically spend a minimum of to hours per week in the project building; in a residential building, regular occupants also include all persons who live in the building. Paint is a liquid,liquefiable,ormasticcomposition that is converted to a solid protective,decorative, or functional adherent film after application as a thin layer. These coatings are intended for on-site application to interior or exterior surfaces of residential, commercial, institutional or industrial buildings. A primer is a material applied to a substrate to improve adhesion of subsequently applied coats. Volatile organic compounds (VOCs) are carbon compounds (excluding carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, carbonic add, metallic carbides and carbonates, and ammonium carbonate) that participate in atmospheric photochemical reactions. The compounds vaporize (become a gas) at normal room temperatures. IEQ CI Credit 4.2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 341 EFTA00281880 342 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281881 LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS-FLOORING SYSTEMS Credit IEQ Credit 4.3 Points 1 point Intent To reduce the quantity of indoor air contaminants that are odorous, irritating and/or harmful to the comfort and well-being of installers and occupants. Requirements OPTION 1 All flooring must comply with the following as applicable to the project scope: • All carpet installed in the building interior must meet the testing and product requirements of the Carpet and Rug Institute Green Label Plus' program. • All carpet cushion installed in the building interior must meet the requirements of the Carpet and Rug Institute Green Label program. • All carpet adhesive must have less than so VOC. • All hard surface flooring must be certified as compliant with the FloorScorel standard (current as of the date of this rating system, or more stringent version) by an independent third- party. Flooring products covered by FloorScore include vinyl, linoleum, laminate flooring, wood flooring, ceramic flooring, rubber flooring and wall base. • An alternative compliance path using FloorScore is acceptable for credit achievement: t00% of the noncarpet finished flooring must be FloorScore-certified, and must constitute at least zs% of the finished floor area. Examples of unfinished flooring include floors in mechanical rooms, electrical rooms and elevator service rooms. • Concrete, wood, bamboo, and cork floor finishes such as sealer, stain and finish must meet the requirements of South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113, Architectural Coatings, effective January 1,2004. • Tile setting adhesives and grout must meet South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1168. VOC limits correspond to an effective date of July t, zoos and rule amendment date oflanuary 7, zoos. OR OPTION 2 All flooring products must meet the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers, including 2004 Addenda. T:tcthavnl..ilvt Itn Anti It N,NOCISICti VOI.: t. 1, " :th .nlinnt ' inen ' In ntC, I ,, “ Anti vles CLI,I1O:1{1O.1.-IIINdb .• ti r Ca:txt ,:te Etc; It. Ca:donna\ StIstatnabk- Itc:Idir4J.ch lIttnx rte thy CaIdut ttla Dt-ttartntent uI EttIthe I AA't phtItI Emissions Car itch 1)I IS Standard Pracititt: CA DI IN El MDR tt'4.dattxl th.t OA ItIttortkatty is a t.oluntatNtindtivnittint tittcatXm ittogtattt thanca.atult.vttilin haid ctrIttitclhicting and j•S1.61:Cil raxlutt lot compliancy Wallah:1n ij.dOtt!ttd11C211!O:1113!Cn indoin air onttsiora VtrIztity (Come (Iontpctuntit. VOCN) tt Alt pa:tot:hal scattNitcnber tot ittottaul and intAntixtrattsl'OCatmissions ctitytchtItActotxxlItt, the CaIductia Departnwnt olltuhlht I Icalth. IEQ CREDIT 4.3 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 343 EFTA00281882 IEQ CI Credit 4.3 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Refer to the Benefits and Issues section of IEQ Credit 4.t, Low-Emitting Materials—Adhesives and Sealants. 2. Related Credits Because the intent of this credit is to reduce odorous, irritating, or harmful indoor air contaminants, the following other credits may be applicable: • I EQ Credit 4.1: Low Emitting Materials—Adhesives and Sealants • I EQ Credit 4.2 Low Emitting Materials—Paints and Coatings ■ IEQ Credit 44: Low Emitting Materials—Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products ■ IEQ Credit 4.5: Low Emitting Materials—Systems Furniture and Seating Scheduling strategies relating to the use and tracking of Low-Emitting Materials may be addressed early in construction and prior to occupancy. The following are credits also affected by scheduling considerations: ■ IEQ Credit 3.1: Construction IAQ Management Plan During Construction ■ IEQ Credit 3.z: Construction IAQ Management Plan Before Occupancy Project teams may wish to address smoking-related contaminants in the building in conjunction with other sources of air pollutants as outlined in the following credits: • IEQ Prerequisite 2: Environmental Tobacco Smoke (ETS) Control • I EQ Credit 5: Indoor Chemical and Pollutant Source Control 3. Summary of Referenced Standards Carpet and Rug Institute (CR1) Green Label Plus Testing Program Carpet and Rug Institute The Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI) is a trade organization representing the carpet and rug industry. Green Label Plus is an independent testing program that identifies carpets with very low VOC emissions. The CRI website describes the program and the associated VOC emission criteria in micrograms per square meter per hour. These criteria were developed by the Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI) in coordination with California's Sustainable Building Task Force and the California Department of Health Services (DHS). In the CRI Green Label Plus Program,emission rates mustbe verified by annual tests. Approved certification numbers can be reviewed on the CRI website under Indoor Air Quality/Green Label Plus/Approved companies. Approved products are listed under the company heading. South Coast Mr Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1168, VOC Limits http://vnvw.aomd.govirulesfregfregulm68.pdf The South Coast Air Quality Management District is a governmental organization in southern California with the mission to maintain healthful air quality for its residents. The organization established source specific standards to reduce air quality impacts. South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113, Architectural Coatings http://www.aqmd.gov/rules/reg/regnitaltpdf The South Coast Mr Quality Management District is a governmental organization in southern California with the mission to maintain healthful air quality for its residents. The organization established source specific standards to reduce air quality impacts. The South Coast Rule t168 VOC limits for adhesives are summarized in Table 1. 344 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281883 FloorScore Program Resilient Floor Covering Institute According to its website, "The FloorScore program, developed by the Resilient Floor Covering Institute (RFCI) in conjunction with Scientific Certification Systems (SCS), tests and certifies flooring products for compliance with indoor air quality emission requirements adopted in California. Flooring products include vinyl, linoleum, laminate flooring, wood flooring, ceramic flooring, rubber flooring, wall base, and associated sundries." Carpet Testing Criteria Carpet must not exceed the maximum target emission factors used in the CRI Green Label program and follow the test protocol used by Green Label Plus. Test results submitted must be no more than 2. years old at the time of submission. Standard Practice for the Testing ofVolatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers (State of California Specification Section otmo). State of California Specification Section 023,50 www.ciwmb.ca.gov reenBuildin Sectional #Indoor This standard practice document specifies carpet emissions testing criteria that will satisfy the credit requirements. Environmental Technology Verification (ETV) Large Chamber Test Protocol for Measuring Emissions of VOCs and Aldehydes, effective September 1999 Research Triangle Institute and U.S. EPA http://www.emga___Lvp/m_v ov en dfs fumiture.pdf Under the leadership of the EPA, a testing protocol committee developed the referenced standards. The protocol requires the placement of the seating product or furniture assembly to be tested in a climatically controlled chamberA controlled quantity of conditioned air is drawn through the chamber, and emission concentrations are measured at set intervals over a 4-day period. 4. Implementation Refer to the Implementation section of IEQ Credit 41, Low-Emitting Materials—Adhesives and Sealants. Emissions Factors The California Department of Health Services Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers, including zoos Addenda, sets limits the rate of off-gassing. The rate is stated as the mass of contaminant that may be off-gassed by a given unit quantity of the product in a set period of time. This approach is used for carpet in IEQ Credit 4.3, Low-Emitting Materials—Flooring Systems, where the rate is expressed as micrograms of contaminant per square meter of carpet per hour. These tests, which are now being conducted on an array a variety of product types, place samples of precise size in test chambers. Air samples are drawn off at set times (generally over several days) and analyzed. There are extensive protocols established to make sure that the testing is representative of actual conditions on a project site and consistent between similar products from multiple manufactures. The Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI) Green Label Plus program uses emissions factor test results for its certifications. 5. Timeline and Team Refer to the Timeline and Team section of IEQ Credit 4.1, Low-Emitting Materials—Adhesives and Sealants. 'Ea CI Credit 4.3 2CO9 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 345 EFTA00281884 I EQ CI Credit 4.3 6. Calculations There are no calculations required for this credit. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Maintain a listing of each carpet, carpet cushion, and carpet adhesive installed on the project in the building interior andrecord the VOC content for each adhesive. ■ Maintain a listing of each hard surface flooring product, tile setting adhesive, and grout installed on the project in the building interior andrecord the VOC content for each tile setting adhesive and grout. 8. Examples Figure 1. Sample Product Information for CR1 Green Label Plus Carpeting Style Number 1111 Specifications Construction Textured loop pattern Yarn content Nylon with 25% recycled content Dye method Solution Machine gauge 1/10 in (39.4 col/10 cm) Stitch count 11 =. (43.3/10 cm) Finished pile thickness 0.124 in (3.15 mm) Average density 8.710 Yarn weight tufted 30 ozAid2 (1085 g/m2) Primary backing Polypropylene Secondary backing Woven polypropylene with postconsumer recycled content Width 12 ft (3.66 m) Pattern repeat 0.40 in w x .047 in I (1.01 cm x 1.19 cm) Total recycled content 2.43% Performance Flameresistance Passes (DOC FF-1-70) Flooring radiant panel Class 1 (ASTM E-662) Smoke density Less than 450 (ASTM E-662) CRI Green Label Plus Certification ff GLP 0000 Winarilles Example nylon warranty Lifetime carpet static warranty Example nylon warranty Lifetime carpet wear, limited warranty Example nylon certification Class Ill, extra heavy traffic Example nylon content Minimum 25% recycled content Example nylon recycling Available Additional Information Custom colors Contact sales representative Coordinating styles Multiple 346 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281885 9. Exemplary Performance This credit is not eligible for exemplary performance under the Innovation in Design section. 10. Regional Variations There are no regional variances for this credit. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Implement a sustainable purchasing policy for the continued use of low-emitting materials during the building's operation. Help building operators find low-emitting products for repairs or alterations by providing them with the list of compliant products. Use of carpet tiles saves material over the life of the building because individual tiles can be replaced as needed. Using fewer types of flooring and flooring products makes maintenance easier. If specialized flooring materials are specified, request maintenance information from product manufacturers and installers and give this information to the facilities staff 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (httpowww.usgbc.orgiprojecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites Carpet and Rug Institute tp:It qw Floorscore GreenGuard litsp_Wwww.greenguard.orgi Scientific Certification System, Inc. South Coast Air Quality Management District httpWwww.aqmd.govIrules 13. Definitions Contaminants are unwanted airborne constituents that may reduce air quality. (ASHRAE 2007) Hard surface flooring includes vinyl, linoleum, laminate flooring, wood flooring, rubber flooring, wall base, and associated sundries. Indoor carpet systems are carpet, carpet adhesive, or carpet cushion products installed on-site inside the building's weatherproofing system. Indoor air quality (IAQ) is the nature of air inside a building that affects the health and well-being ofbuildingoccupants. It is considered acceptable when there are no known contaminants at harmful concentrations as determined by cognizant authorities and with which a substantial majority (80% or more) of the people exposed do not express dissatisfaction. (ASHRAE 62.1-2007) Volatile organic compounds (VOCs) are carbon compounds (excluding carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, carbonic acid, metallic carbides and carbonates, and ammonium carbonate) that participate in atmospheric photochemical reactions. The compounds vaporize (become a gas) at normal room temperatures. 'Ea CI Credit 4.3 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 347 EFTA00281886 348 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281887 LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS-COMPOSITE WOOD AND AGRIFIBER PRODUCTS I Credit Points IEQ Credit 4.4 1 point Intent To reduce the quantity of indoor air contaminants that are odorous, irritating and/or harmful to the comfort and well-being of installers and occupants. Requirements Composite wood and agrifiber products used on the interior of the building (i.e. inside the weatherproofingsystem) mustcontain no added urea-formaldehyde resins. Laminate adhesives used to fabricate on-site and shop-applied composite wood and agrifiber assemblies must not contain added urea-formaldehyde resins. Composite wood and agrifiber products are defined as: particleboard, medium density fiberboard (MDF), plywood, wheatboard, strawboard, panel substrates and door cores. Materials considered fixtures, furniture, and equipment (FF8cE) are not considered base building elements and are not included. Products covered by IEQ Credit 46, Low-Emitting Materials, System Furniture and Seating are excluded from these requirements. IEQ CREDIT 4.4 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 349 EFTA00281888 IEQ CI Credit 4.4 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Refer to the Benefits and Issues section of IEQ Credit 4.2, Low-Emitting Materials—Adhesives and Sealants. 2. Related Credits Because the intent of this credit is to reduce odorous, irritating, or harmful indoor air contaminants, the following other credits may be applicable: • I EQ Credit 4.2: Low Emitting Materials—Adhesives and Sealants • IEQ Credit 4.2: Low Emitting Materials—Paints and Coatings ■ IEQ Credit 4.3: Low Emitting Materials—Flooring Systems ■ IEQ Credit 4.5: Low Emitting Materials—Systems Furniture and Seating Scheduling strategies relating to the use and tracking of low-emitting materials may be addressed early in construction and prior to occupancy. The following are credits also affected by scheduling considerations: ■ IEQ Credit 3.2: Construction IAQ Management Plan—During Construction ■ IEQ Credit 3.2: Construction IAQ Management Plan—Before Occupancy Project teams may wish to address smoking-related contaminants in the building in conjunction with other sources of air pollutants as outlined in the following credits: • IEQ Prerequisite a: Environmental Tobacco Smoke (ETS) Control • I EQ Credit 5: Indoor Chemical and Pollutant Source Control 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this credit. 4. Implementation Refer to the Implementation section of IEQ Credit 4.1, Low-Emitting Materials—Adhesives and Sealants. 5. Timeline and Team Refer to the Timeline and Team section of IEQ Credit 4.1, Low-Emitting Materials—Adhesives and Sealants. 6. Implementation: Calculations There are no calculations required for this credit. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Maintain a listing of each composite wood and agrifiber product installed in the building interior and confirm that each product does not contain any added urea-formaldehyde 8. Examples There are no examples for this credit. 350 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281889 9. Exemplary Performance This credit is not eligible for exemplary performance under the Innovation in Design section. 10. Regional Variations No regional variations have been identified for this credit. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Implement a sustainable purchasing policy for the continued use of low-emitting materials during the building's operation. Help building operators find low-emitting products for repairs or alterations by providing them with the list of compliant products. If specialized compositewood or agrifiber materials are specified, request maintenance information from product manufacturers and installers and give this information to the facilities management team. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (httpi/www.usgbc.orgeprojecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites An Update on Formaldehyde Consumer Product Safety Commission http://www.cpsc.govJCPSOPUB/PUBS/ns.html This informational document is from the Consumer Product Safety Commission. 13. Definitions Agrifiber board is a composite panel product derived from recovered agricultural waste fiber from such sources as cereal straw, sugarcane bagasse, sunflower husk, walnut shells, coconut husks, and agricultural prunings. The raw fibers are processed and mixed with resins to produce panel products with characteristics similar to those derived from wood fiber. The following conditions describe which products must complywith the credit requirements: 1. The product is inside the building's waterproofing system. a. Composite components used in assemblies are to be included (e.g., door cores, panel substrates). 3. The product is part of the base building systems. Composite wood consists ofwood or plant particles or fibers bonded together by a synthetic resin orbinder. Examples include plywood, particle board,oriented-strandboard (OSB),medium-density fiberboard (MDF), and composite door cores. The following conditions describe which products must comply with the credit requirements: 1. The product is inside the building's waterproofing system. a. Composite wood components used in assemblies are included (e.g., door cores, panel substrates, plywood sections of I-beams). 3. The product is part of the base building systems. Contaminants are unwanted airborne constituents that may reduce air quality. (ASHRAE 62.1- 2007) !ER CI Credit 4.4 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 351 EFTA00281890 I EQ CI Credit 4.4 Formaldehyde is a naturally occurring VOC found in small amounts in animals and plants but carcinogenic and irritating to most people when present in high concentrations, causingheadaches, dizziness, mental impairment, and other symptoms. When present in the air at levels above O.t ppm parts of air, it can cause watery eyes, burning sensations in the eyes, nose and throat; nausea; coughing; chest tightness; wheezing; skin rashes; and asthmatic and allergic reactions. Indoor composite wood or agrifiber is a composite product installed on-site inside the building's weatherproofing system. Indoor air quality (IAQ) is the nature of air inside a building that affects the health and well-being ofbuildingoccupants. It is considered acceptablewhen there are no known contaminants atharmful concentrations as determined by cognizant authorities and with which a substantial majority (80% or more) of the people exposed do not express dissatisfaction. (ASHRAE 62. t -zoo7) Laminate adhesive is used in wood or agrifiber products (veneered panels, composite wood products contained in engineered lumber, door assemblies, etc.). Off-gassing is the emission of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) from synthetic and natural products. Urea-formaldehyde is a combination of urea and formaldehyde that is used in some glues and may emit formaldehyde at room temperature. Phenol-formaldehyde, which off-gasses only at high temperature, is used for exterior products, although many of those products are suitable for interior applications. 352 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281891 LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS-SYSTEMS FURNITURE AND SEATING Credit Points I ED Credit 4.5 1 point Intent To reduce the quantityof indoor air contaminants that are odorous, irritating and/or harmful to the comfort and well-being of installers and occupants. Requirements All systems furniture' and seating4 that was manufactured, refurbished or refinished within I year prior' to occupancy must meet I of the options below. OPTION 1 Furniture and seating are Greenguard Indoor Air Quality Certified. OR OPTION 2 Calculated indoor air concentrations that are less than or equal to those listed in Table I for furniture systems and seating determined by a procedure based on the EPA Environmental Technology Verification (ETV) Large Chamber Test Protocol for Measuring Emissions of VOCs and Aldehydes (September 1999) testing protocol conducted in an independent air quality testing laboratory. OR OPTION 3 Calculated indoor air concentrations that are less than or equal to those listed in Table I for furniture systems and seating determined by a procedure based on ANS1/B1FMA M7.1- 2.007and ANSI/BIFMA X7.1-2007 testing protocol conducted in an independent third-party air quality testing laboratory. TherequirementinSectionsofANSI/BIFMAX71-2.007iswaivedfor LEEDpurposes.Section 5 requires that laboratories used to perform the emissions testing and/or provide analytical results must be independently accredited to ISO/I EC 17025, "General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories." Table 1. Maximum Indoor Air Concentrations Chemical Contaminant Emission Limits Systems Fumiture Emission Limits Seating TVOC 0.5 mg/m3 0.25 mg/m, Formaldehyde 50 parts per billion 25 pads per billion Total Aldehydes 100 parts per billion 50 pads per billion 4 - Phenylcyclohexene (4-PCH) 0.0065 men' 0.00325 milim, Sy •tems furniture is defined as either a pant .based workstation comprised ofmodular in teramnecting panels, hang.on components and drawer/Filing components. or a freestanding grouping of furniture items and their components that have been de igned to xxxk in concert. Furniture utile than >y>tems furniture and task and pest chain usedwith systems furniture is defined as occasional furniture and is exduded from the aedit requirements. Se ting latrine(' as task and guest chairs used with systems furniture ; Salvaged and used furniture that is more than i-yearold at time of occupancy is excluded from the credit requirements. IEQ CREDIT 4.5 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 353 EFTA00281892 IEQ CI Credit 4.5 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Refer to the Benefits and Issues section of IEQ Credit 4.1, Low-Emitting Materials—Adhesives and Sealants. 2. Related Credits Because the intent of this credit is to reduce odorous, irritating, or harmful indoor air contaminants, the following other credits may be applicable: • IEQ Credit 4.1: Low Emitting Materials—Adhesives and Sealants • IEQ Credit 4.2: Low Emitting Materials—Paints and Coatings ■ IEQ Credit 4.3: Low Emitting Materials—Flooring Systems ■ IEQ Credit 44: Low Emitting Materials—Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products Scheduling strategies relating to the use and tracking of low-emitting materials may be addressed early in construction and prior to occupancy. The following are credits also affected by scheduling considerations: ■ IEQ Credit 3.1: Construction IAQ Management Plan During Construction ■ IEQ Credit 3.2: Construction IAQ Management Plan Before Occupancy Project teams may wish to address smoking-related contaminants in the building in conjunction with other sources of air pollutants as outlined in the following credits: • IEQ Prerequisite a: Environmental Tobacco Smoke (ETS) Control • I EQ Credit 5: Indoor Chemical and Pollutant Source Control 3. Summary of Referenced Standards Greenguard' 'M Certification Program Greenguard Environmental Institute (GEI) http:(/www.greenguard.org GEI has "established performance-based standards to define goods with low chemical and particle emissions for use indoors," primarily for building materials; interior furnishings; furniture; electronics; and cleaning, maintenance, and personal care products. The standard establishes certification procedures that include "test methods, allowable emissions levels, product sample collection and handling, testing type and frequency, and program application processes and acceptance." U.S. EPA's Environmental Technology Verification (ETV) Large Chamber Test Protocol for Measuring Emissions of VOCs and Aldehydes, effective September 1999 Research Triangle Institute and U.S. EPA http://www.epa.gov/nrmrlistdietvipubs/07 vp_fumiture.Of Under the leadership of the EPA,a testing protocol committee developed the referenced standards. The protocol requires the placement of the seating product or furniture assembly to be tested in a climatically controlled chamber. A controlled quantity of conditioned air is drawn through the chamber, and emission concentrations are measured at set intervals over a 4-day period. 4. Implementation The sections under IEQ Credit 4, Low-Emitting Materials, apply to products and installation processes that have the potential to adversely affect the IAQ of a project space and, consequently, those occupants exposed to the off-gassing of contaminants. LEED for Commercial Interiors IEQ Credit 4 employs 3 approachesto limit off-gassing: composition 354 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281893 limits, emission factors, and performance-based standards. For IEQ Credit 4.5, Low-Emitting Materials—Systems Furniture and Seating, the performance-based standards approach applies. Performance-Based Standards This approach calculates the amount of contaminants each product will add to the air. The protocols are very similar to those for emission factor testing, but are crafted to allow for testing of more complex assemblies such as systems furniture. Again, groups of products are placed in a test chamber. Air is circulated in the chamber, simulating the conditions where the product would normally be used. At set intervals,samples ofthe air are taken and analyzed. The results are reported in the same units of measure established for air quality and used in the LIQ testing procedure of IEQ Credit 3.2, Construction IAQ Management Plan Before Occupancy—parts per million, parts per billion, or micrograms per cubic meter of air. The performance-based standards approach is used in IEQ Credit 4.5, Low-Emitting Materials—Systems Furniture and Seating. The Greenguard Institute testing program for systems furniture and office seating uses performance-based standards. Using products listed as Greenguard certified is 1 means of compliance for IEQ Credit 4.5, Low-Emitting Materials—Systems Furniture and Seating. They are certified as having test results below the threshold contaminant amounts. In the selection of systems furniture and multiple office seating, the specifier should confirm that the desired product will meet the testing requirements at the time it is manufactured. The Greenguard Environmental Institute provides alisting ofthe products ithascertified.Additional manufacturers may also have met the testing requirements set out in this credit. Performance-Based Emissions Limits By satisfying the test results referenced in LEED for Commercial Interiors IEQ Credit 45, Low-Emitting Materials—Systems Furniture and Seating, the product should not increase the concentration of contaminants in the air around it by more than the threshold limits; the values are expressed as either mg1m3 or parts per billion. The testing protocol that covers systems furniture uses a large chamber where a full workstation is assembled. The workstation size, mix of components, and types of materials(including fabrics and finishes) are intended to be representative of what is most commonly used in actual installations. Product specifiers may want to confer with the manufacturer when considering substitutions or if the density of the components will be higher than in a normal application. For the performance-based standard used in this credit to be applicable at the project site, other considerations need to be satisfied. The air velocity and outdoor air rate introduced into the work place should meet ASHRAE 62.1-2007, the same standard referenced in IEQ Prerequisite 1, Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance. Adequate ventilation during installation helps dissipate early off-gassing. The flush-out period called for in IEQ Credit 3.2, Construction IAQ Management Plan Before Occupancy, is not to begin until furniture installation is complete. Remember that systems furniture may be either a panel-based workstation comprising modular interconnecting panels, hang-on components, and drawer/filing components, or a free-standing grouping of furniture items and their components that have been designed to work in concert. Seating covered by this credit is defined as task and guest chairs used with systems furniture. Work tools often attached to systems furniture are not included in the credit requirement. Other furniture is considered occasional furniture and does not need to be included in the credit documentation.Also,salvaged and used fumiturethat is morethan yearold at thetime ofoccupancy is excluded from the credit Refurbishment of systems furniture or multiple office seating occurring within then-month period prior to occupancy must meet the credit requirements. IEQ CI Credit 4.5 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 355 EFTA00281894 IEQ CI Credit 4.5 5. Timeline and Team Refer to the Timeline and Team section of IEQ Credit 41, Low-Emitting Materials—Adhesives and Sealants. 6. Calculations There are no calculations required for this credit. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Confirm that systems furniture and seating products specified for the project are Greenguard Indoor Air Quality certified ■ Complywith U.S. EnvironmentalProtectionAgency's EnvironmentalTeclmologyVerification Large Chamber Test Protocol for Measuring Emissions of VOCs and Aldehydes (September 1999) testing protocol, or comply with ANSI/BIFMA M7.1-2.007and ANSIMIFMA X7.1-zoo7 testing protocol. 8. Examples There are no examples for this credit. 9. Exemplary Performance This credit is not eligible for exemplary performance under the Innovation in Design section. 10. Regional Variations There are no regional variations for this credit. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Implement a sustainable purchasing policy for low-emitting materials during the building's operation. Help building operators find low-emitting furniture systems for future installations by providing them with the list of compliant products. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http:fiuww.usgbc.orgeprojecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites GreenguarC Certification Program Greenguard Environmental Institute http://wwt.v.greenguard.orgi U.S. EPA's Environmental Technology Verification (ETV) Large Chamber Test Protocol for Measuring Emissions of VOCs and Aldehydes, effective September,1999 Research Triangle Institute and U.S. EPA http://wwwepa.gmr/nrmlifstdietv/pubsfir_vp_fumiture.pdf Under the leadership of EPA, a testing protocol committee developed the referenced standards. The protocol requires the placement of the seating product or furniture assembly to be tested in a climatically controlled chamber. A controlled quantity of conditioned air is drawn through the chamber, and emission concentrations are measured at set intervals over a 4-day period. 356 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281895 13. Definitions Contaminants are unwanted airborne constituents that may reduce air quality (ASHRAE 2007). Indoor air quality (IAQ) is the nature of air inside a building that affects the health and well-being ofbuildingoccupants. It is considered acceptablewhen there are no known contaminants at harmful concentrations as determined by cognizant authorities and with which a substantial majority (80% or more) of the people exposed do not express dissatisfaction. (ASHRAE 62.1-2007) Occasional furniture is located in lobbies and in conference rooms. Off-gassing is the emission of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) from synthetic and natural products. Systems furniture includes panel-based workstations comprising modular interconnectingpanels, hang-on components, and drawer and filing components or a free-standing grouping of furniture items designed to work in concert. Seating consists of task and guest chairs used with systems furniture. Volatile organic compounds (VOCs) are carbon compounds that participate in atmospheric photochemical reactions (excluding carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, carbonic acid, metallic carbides and carbonates, and ammonium carbonate). The compounds vaporize (become a gas) at normal room temperatures. IE0 CI Credit 4.5 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 357 EFTA00281896 358 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281897 INDOOR CHEMICAL AND POLLUTANT SOURCE CONTROL r Credit IEQ Credit 5 Points 1 point Intent To minimize building occupant exposure to potentially hazardous particulates biological contaminants and chemical pollutants. that degrade air and water quality. Requirements Design to minimize and control the entry of pollutants into the tenant space and later crosscontamination of regularly occupied areas through the following strategies: • Employ permanent entryway systems at least to feet long in the primary direction of travel to capture dirt and particulates entering the building at all high-volume exterior entryways ■ Sufficiently exhaust each space where hazardous gases or chemicals may be present or used (e.g. garages, housekeeping and laundry areas copying and printing rooms) to create negative pressure with respect to adjacent spaces when the doors to the room are closed. For each of these spaces, provide self-closing doors and deck-to-deck partitions or a hardlid ceiling. The exhaust rate must be at least 0.50 cubic feet per minute (cfm) per square foot, with no air recirculation. The pressure differential with the surrounding spaces must be at least s Pascals (Pa) (0.02 inches of water gauge) on average and t Pa (0.004 inches of water) at a minimum when the doors to the rooms are closed. ■ In mechanicallyventilated buildings, install new air filtration media in regularly occupied areas prior to occupancy; these filters must provide a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) of13 or better. Filtration should be applied to process both return and outside air that is delivered as supply air. • Provide containment drains plumbed for appropriate disposal ofhazardous liquid wastes in spaces where water and chemical concentrate mixing occurs for maintenance or laboratory purposes. IEQ CREDIT 5 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 359 EFTA00281898 I Ell CI Credit 5 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues This credit recognizes projects that reduce or mitigate human contact with airborne chemicals and particles. Although additional materials and energy may be required to provide entryway systems and isolate chemical-use areas, proper management of hazardous chemicals used for building operations and maintenance is important. With proper maintenance, harmful chemical spills and accidents that would otherwise harm people and ecosystems can be avoided. Economic Issues Additional sinks, drains, room separations, and separate exhaust systems for copying and housekeeping areas can increase the project's overall initial cost. Dedicated ventilation and exhaust systems may require additional ductwork and associated installation costs. Effective housekeeping processes, however, coupled with good human health initiatives, should prove economically sound overthe lifetimeofthe project. Clean aircan promote occupants'productivity,increasingprofitability for the company. Reducing the potential for spills can avoid costly environmental cleanups. An environmentally sound building also supports the well-being of occupants, which may contribute to lowering health insurance rates and health care costs. 2. Related Credits Coordinate minimum efficiency reporting values (MERVs) in final filtration media with these other credits: ■ IEQ Credit 3.I: Construction IAQ Management Plan During Construction ■ IEQ Credit 3.2: Construction IAQ Management Plan Before Occupancy Additional ventilation systems designed to mitigate contaminating space activities may affect building energy performance and commissioning these issues are covered under the following credits: ■ EA Credit 1.3: Optimized Energy Perforrnance—HVAC ■ EA Prerequisite a: Minimum Energy Performance ■ EA Prerequisite 1: Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems ■ EA Credit a: Enhanced Commissioning Ventilation system design will also be affected; installed systems must be capable of accommodating filtration media required for credit compliance. Refer to these credits: ■ IEQ Prerequisite I: Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance ■ IEQ Credit t: Outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring 3. Summary of Referenced Standard AmericanNationalStandards Institute (ANSI) ASHRAEsz.2-1999,MethodofTestingGeneral Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASH RAE) http:fiww.ashrae.org This standard presents methods for testing air cleaners for a performance characteristics: the device's capacityforremoving particles from the airstream and the device's resistance to airflow. The minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) is based on 3 composite average particle size removal efficiency points. Consult the standard for a complete explanation of MERV value calculations. Tablet summarizes the requirements for MERV t3. 360 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281899 Table 1. Requirements for MERV 13 Composite Average Particle Size Efficiency (%) I Minimum Final Resistance 0.30 - 0.10 pm 1.0 - 3.0 pm 3.0 - 10.0 pm (Pa) (in. of water) <75% a90% a90% 350 1.0 4. Implementation The indoor air quality of buildings can be adversely affected by daily occupancy and operations. Occupants and building visitors contribute to indoor IAQ issues by introducing contaminants via shoes and clothing. Daily copier, fax, and printer operations add contaminants to the building's interior environment; in addition, the storage, mixing, and disposal of housekeeping liquids may adversely affect human health. This credit seeks to mitigate the amount of particulate, chemical, and biological contaminants that occupants are exposed to inside buildings and improve the indoor air quality. Entryway Systems Not all LEED for Commercial Interiors projects will need to satisfy all the requirements of this credit. When the project space does not have direct access to the exterior, the requirement for a permanent entryway system may be waived. When local code does not require separate plumbing for the sink located within the segregated area for hazardous gasses or chemicals, the separate plumbing may be waived. However,to eam this credit,the project team mustdemonstratethatifthere is a need for a segregated area for hazardous gasses or chemicals, the requirements for its construction and ventilation are met. Finally, the project team must demonstrate that new air filtration media with a MERV 13 or better rating has been installed prior to occupancy. The project team should incorporate permanent entryway systems, at all high-traffic exterior access points to reduce the amount of contaminants tracked into the occupied space. The entryway systems should be designed to capture and remove particles from shoes without allowing buildup of contaminants. High-traffic exterior access points will always include, but may not be limited to, the main building entry. Buildings that have entries from structured parking will have high use in these locations. In some instances,these entry points are inside a garage structure. While a covered garage does provide protection from the elements, it is a source of possible contaminants, and it functions as a direct connection to the outdoors. Buildings that have distinct employee and visitor entry points should include permanent entryway systems in these locations as well. The project team should evaluate all building entry points to determine whether permanent entryway systems should be incorporated. Equip all exterior to interior entrances with entryway systems (e.g., grilles, grates, or mats) to catch and hold dirt particles and prevent contamination of the building interior. Entryway systems must extend to feet from the building entrance into the building interior. Open grates and grilles or other entryway systems that have a recessed collection area are generally thought to be most effective. Mat systems should be appropriate for the climate. For example, durable coarse mats with large open loops are appropriate for capturing sand, mud or snow and should have a Class I fire-retardant rating. High-void volume within fibers provides space for trapping dirt below the mat surface and enables water to spread to a larger area for improved drying. This inhibits dirt retracing and mold and mildew growth. High-void volume mats are also easier to vacuum or shake out. Fiber height provides maximum scraping surface at the shoe and mat interface and improves vacuum efficiency. IEQ CI Credit 5 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 361 EFTA00281900 I Ell CI Credit 5 Entryway mats with solid backings capture dirt and moisture and help prevent soiling under the center of a mat and dirtying the floor after cleaning. A nonporous backing inhibits mold and mildew growth. The use of mold- and mildew-resistant materials in the mat construction can also prevent mold and mildew growth. Other recommended performance features for an entryway system include the following: • Fire-retardant ratings that exceed DOC-FF-1-70, such as National Fire Protection Association (N FPA) -253 Class I and II, which can reduce insurance costs • Electrostatic propensity levels of less than 2.5 kV, which means that the mat should not produce electrical discharges when a user touches other people or objects Entryway systems constructed with recycled-content and rubber backings are preferable. Hazardous Chemical Areas The design team should locate high-volume copy, print, and fax equipment in enclosed rooms away from regularly occupied spaces. In order to effectively remove airborne contaminants generated by this type of equipment, the rooms must be physically separated from adjacent spaces. This maybe accomplished through installation of deck-to-deck partitions or sealed gypsum board enclosures. Rooms with large openings but no doors will not meet the credit requirement. Installation of a selfclosing door is an option for such spaces. To remove airborne contaminants and prevent crosscontamination into occupied spaces, copy, print, and fax rooms must be equipped with a dedicated exhaust system that creates negative pressure within the room, meeting the requirements of this credit. Convenience copier and printer use should be minimized if possible. Although encouraged, designing exhaust systems that account for convenience copier and printer use is not required for credit. Chemical storage and mixing areas, such as janitor's closets and photo labs, should also be located away from occupantwork areas.Additionally,these rooms mustbe physicallyseparated from adjacent spaces via installation of deck-to-deck partitions or sealed gypsum board enclosures. Rooms must be equippedwith a dedicated exhaust system that creates the required negative pressurization to ensure that cross-contamination into adjacent occupied spaces will not occur. Drywall ceilings may be used in place of full-height partitions, but acoustical lay-in ceilings are not adequate. The definition of convenience printers and copiers, which are not required to be segregated in a chemical use area, is left to the discretion of the design team; convenience machines are generally smaller units shared by many office personnel for short print and copy jobs. Battery banks used to provide temporary back-up power must be segregated to satisfy credit requirements. Housekeeping facilities that are part of a common laundry room in residential or hospitality buildings must meet the chemical storage requirements. Rooms where chemicals are mixed and disposed should be isolated and include sinks and/or drains in appropriate locations to ensure these chemicals are properly disposed of and not dumped into inadequate spaces (e.g., restrooms); local codes requiring separate drain lines are to be followed. Special consideration should be given to the design and installation of containment drains to ensure that hazardous waste is properly disposed and to prevent environmental damage or contamination of water systems. MI building HVAC systems must be able to accommodate filtration systems with a minimum MERV 13 rating. This maybe difficult to achieve for spaces with low-capacity, packaged air-handling systems because of the size of these filters and their associated pressure drop. 362 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281901 5. Timeline and Team Duringthe early planning stageofa project, ask questions about the client's equipment requirements and usage patterns. This information will be critical in determining whether dedicated, isolated rooms will be required to house copy, fax, and print equipment. During the schematic design phase, the architect or designer should identify locations for entryway systems and incorporate project-specific details to ensure their proper performance. Confirm the locations of areas where chemicals and high-volume copy, fax, and print equipment will be used. It may be possible to locate such rooms above or adjacent to 1 another to make individual exhaust systems unnecessary and thereby minimize exhaust ductwork and drainage piping. Also confirm that chemical and equipment rooms are properly isolated from adjacent spaces. The layout may prohibit deck-to-deck separation and separate ventilation systems for chemical use areas. Storage areas for recyclable materials might also be considered sources of contaminants, depending on the items recycled. During the design development phase, the mechanical engineer should incorporate MERV 13 filters, dedicated exhaust systems, and separate drainage piping into the drawings and specifications; these elements will affect the fan sizing, shaft layout, and underground coordination. Indoor chemical and pollutant source control is primarily a planning, design, and operations issue. In the construction phase, the space exhaust systems are installed and commissioned to ensure they met the owner's requirements and the design intent. 6. Calculations There are no calculations required for this credit 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Retain drawings showing the location and size of all permanent entryway systems and/or walk-off mats. ■ Detail deck-to-deck partitions or hard-lid conditions at rooms known to have contaminates. ■ Review negative pressure calculations at hazardous chemical areas to assure proper depressurization as the project evolves. ■ Maintain product literature for MERV 13 or higher filters. IEQ CI Credit 5 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 383 EFTA00281902 IEQ CI Credit 5 8. Examples Figure 1. Requirements for Isolation Areas for Hazardous Gases or Chemicals SPACE TO BE ExHAUSIED TO OUTSIDE WITH NO AIR RECIRCULATION MAKE-UP AIR TO BE PROVIDED TO MARIAN NEGATIVE PRESSURIZATION DECK-10 DECK PARTITIONS SEPARATING COPY ROW SELF-CLOSING DOOR 9. Exemplary Performance This credit is not eligible for exemplary performance under the Innovation in Design section. 10. Regional Variations Local weather conditions should be factored into determining the location and type of entryway systems. For example, in areas that receive heavy rain or snow, it maybe prudent to locate entryway systems in an enclosed vestibule or inside the building. A floor drain beneath the grille may also be necessary. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Establish procedures and schedules for replacing filtration media and testing and maintaining exhaust systems and include them in the building's preventive maintenance plan. Systems that require regular maintenance should be designed to be easily accessible to operations staff. Ensure that protocols for selecting, storing, and handling hazardous waste are clearly communicated to building operators; some janitorial supplies can degrade indoor air quality. Develop, document, and record entryway maintenance practices in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. These practices should specify cleaning strategies for the exterior and interior of entryways,general maintenance of entryway systems,and cleaning during inclement weather. Operations staff can reduce maintenance and replacement needs for entryway systems by keeping exterior walkways clean and usinghigh-quality mats. Cleaning mats frequently can prolong the life of carpets and other flooring materials. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (lim_Wwww.us c.o pEojecttools) for additional resources and technical information. 364 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281903 Websites Green Seal http://ww.greenseal.orgffindaproduct/index.cfm Green Seal is an independent, nonprofit organization that promotes the manufacture and sale of environmentally responsible consumer products. This webite contains product recommendations for general purpose cleaning solutions. Janitorial Products Pollution Prevention Project http://wvmwestpznetorejanitorialfjp4cfm The Janitorial Products Pollution Prevention Project is a governmental and nonprofit project that provides fact sheets, tools, and links. EPA Environmentally Preferable Purchasing Information httvfivnna .r.e .gogopptintrfepp/toolsjindex.htm This list of tools includes a database of environmental information on more than 600 products, including janitorial and pest control products. Print Media Clean and Green: The Complete Guide to Non-1bric and Environmentally Safe Housekeeping, by Annie Berthold-Bond(Ceres Press,1994). 13. Definitions Air-handling units are mechanical indirect heating, ventilating, or air-conditioning systems in which the air is treated or handled by equipment located outside the rooms served, usually at a central location, and conveyed to and from the rooms by a fan and a system of distributing ducts. (NEEB 1997 edition) Indoor air quality (IAQ) is the nature of air inside a building that affects the health and well-being ofbuildingoccupants. It is considered acceptablewhen there are no known contaminants atharmful concentrations as determined by cognizant authorities and with which a substantial majority (80% or more) of the people exposed do not express dissatisfaction. (ASHRAE 62. t -2007) Minimum efficiency reportingvalue (MERV) is a filter ratingestablished bythe American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE 52.2-1999, Method of Testing General Ventilation Air Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiencyby Particle Size). MERV categories range from t (very low efficiency) to 16 (very high). Permanent entryway systems can be open floor grates or grilles with a recessed area designed to capture dirt and other debris from shoes and clothing. Regularlyoccupied spaces in commercial buildings are areaswhere people sitor stand as theywork. In residential applications these spaces include all living and family rooms and exclude bathrooms, closets, or other storage or utility areas. Walk-off mats are placed inside building entrances to capture dirt, water, and other materials tracked inside by people and equipment. IEQ CI Credit 5 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 365 EFTA00281904 366 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281905 CONTROLLABILITY OF SYSTEMS-LIGHTING Credit Points IEQ Credit 6.1 1 point Intent To provide a high level of lighting system control for individual occupants or groups in multioccupant spaces (e.g., classrooms and conference areas) and promote their productivity, comfort and well-being. Requirements Provide individual lighting controls for: 9o% (minimum) of the tenant space occupants to enable adjustments to suit individual task needs and preferences. Provide lighting system controls for all shared multi-occupant spaces to enable adjustments that meet group needs and preferences. IEQ CREDIT 6.1 2009 EDITION EEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 387 EFTA00281906 IEQ CI Credit 6.1 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Providing individual controls for lighting increases occupant comfort by enabling them to adjust the workspace to their individual lighting needs. Individual controls also allow for multiple lighting possibilities—lighting for specific tasks, general overhead lighting, lighting with consideration for A/V needs,and lecture-style lightingwith emphasis on the leamingwalls or presentation screens, for example. By balancing ambient light levels and providing user-controlled, flexible, task-appropriate lighting, project teams can reduce the overall lighting energy consumption and the heat loads associated with unnecessarily high or uneven levels of indoor lighting. Effective lighting is important to human comfort, productivity, and communication. In classroom and presentation settings, building occupants must be able to see material on which they are working, as well as material that is presented on white boards and projected onto screens. Economic Issues Additional task lights and lighting controls might increase initial costs for the project. These costs aregenerallyoffset bya reduced heat load and mayenable designers to minimize ambient light levels, as well as the number of installed fixtures and lamps.Abuse of personal controls, such as leaving task lights on when not in the room, has the potential to increase energy costs. Integrating individual controls with occupancy sensors provides project teams with an opportunity to reduce the overall energy cost. Integrating light-reflecting (or light-absorbing) surface materials with lighting design may create opportunities to reduce the number of installed luminaries, resulting in potential energy savings. 2. Related Credits Task lighting can be affected by numerous factors; the following credit requirements should be considered when designing the lighting systems: ■ IEQ Credit 8: Daylight and Views ■ IEQ Credit 6.2: Controllability of Systems—Thermal Comfort Additionally, energy performance is significantly affected by lighting systems. Consider the following related credits: ■ EA Prerequisite 2: Minimum Energy Performance ■ EA Credit 1.1: Optimize Energy Performance—Lighting Power ■ EA Credit 1.2: Optimize Energy Performance—Lighting Controls • EA Prerequisite 1: Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems • EA Credit z: Enhanced Commissioning 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this credit 4. Implementation Many conventional buildings have only fixed-intensity general lighting systems that illuminate indoor spaces without consideration forspecific tasks and individual occupant comfort or needs. A better approach provides uniform,general ambient lighting,augmentedwith individually controlled task fixtures. When developing a task-ambient approach, the lighting designer should investigate methods for 368 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281907 providing uniform ambient light. Increased uniformity will reduce the perception of decreased light levels in open spaces by minimizing high contrast areas. Designers should investigate the benefits of direct and indirect or pendant-mounted systems coupled with high reflectance ceiling surfaces and finishes. Integrating surface material and lighting design might reduce the number of necessary lighting fixtures, resulting in potential energy savings. To comply with ASHRAE 90U-2007, task lighting mustbe included in the lighting allowance forEA Prerequisite nand EACredit 1.2. Daylighting can be integrated with this credit by using daylighting technologies and strategies where possible to balance artificial light levels in the space as detailed in IEQ Credits 8a and 8.2. The office equipment and layout should be carefully analyzed to ensure that 9o% of the occupants have lighting controls. Task lights come in several varieties, from desktop lamps to fixtures that are permanently attached to workstations. Ideally these task lights will have multiple lighting levels and automatic shutoff switching. Task lighting does not need to be hardwiredto meet the requirements of this credit: Outletpowered task lighting provides a simple and effective way to add additional control. The anticipated space uses, as well as any special needs or lighting preferences of the Lasted building users should be documented and given to the lightingdesigner. Thiswill enable the designer to provide sufficient controllability and create light levels that match the needs and desires and for all users. 5. Timeline and Team During design, the layout of lighting and controls is the responsibility of the architect or lighting designer in consultation with the owner. Consider occupants' lighting needs and desires. Document the tasks specific to each space and the tools and equipment that occupants will use on a daily basis. A large open space, such as a 24-hour data center, might have special design needs because of roundthe-clock use. Ensuring consistent, ergonomic, and operable lighting is a fundamental partofdesign decision making and project infrastructure. In design development, project teams should involve electrical engineers and coordinate power and circuitry requirements. Design should include lighting professionals and electrical engineers to ensure that white boards and screens are free from glare. Improperly lit surfaces can prevent participants from seeing important information. Lighting for audiovisual presentations should be dark enough that images are clearly visible on the screen but not so dark that the audience cannot take notes. Early in the construction phase, coordinate the final calibration of the lighting controls with the installer and commissioning agent to ensure that the system operates as intended. Once the fixtures are installed, lighting systems and controls should be commissioned for specific calibration. During building operation, the owner should provide training for building maintenance staff in the calibration of systems and relamping. Property management and building engineers should periodically review lighting systems, as well as conduct surveys to ensure that occupants' needs are met and that lighting is working according to design. 6. Calculations Adjustable Task Lighting Identify workstation locations intended for individual use. Include every individual workspace (e.g., private offices, open-plan workstations, reception stations, ticket booths). Confirm that 90% or more of occupants of these spaces have task lighting that enables adjustment to suit individual needs. Adjustability, at a minimum, the occupants must be able to turn the fixture on and off. Ideally, the occupant can easily reposition the fixture and have multiple light levels. The fixture should be appropriate for the task. IEQ CI Credit 6.1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 369 EFTA00281908 I EQ CI Credit 6.1 Shared Multioccupant Spaces In conference rooms, classrooms, and other indoor spaces used for functions such as presentations and training, the group should have access to adequate controls to suit its activities. Specific types or numbers of controls are not listed in the credit requirements to allow for flexibility in designing to the unique uses of each project. Meeting spaces must be designed so that occupants have control of their individual area; subdivide these spaces with movable walls or partitions. When daylighting is used as a component of an ambient lighting scheme in either type of space, provide glare control, lighting level controls, and room-darkening shades if appropriate. Offices and Other Regularly Occupied Spaces Count the workstation locations intended for individual use. The office and equipment layout should be carefully analyzed to ensure that 90%or more of occupants of these spaces have individual lighting controls that enable adjustment to suit individual needs. Adjustability, at a minimum, must enable the occupant to turn the fixture on and off. Individual Workstation Lighting Controls Workstations with Controls (%) = Individual Listing Controls Provided Total Individual Workstations (include private offices and cubicles) 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Maintain a floor plan that indicates the location, zoning, and type of lighting controls. The floor plan should also include furniture layout and indicateindividual and shared work areas. • Retain design information on task lighting, sensors, and lighting controls. 8. Examples Figure 1. Workstations with Individually Adjustable Task Lighting VI • ADJUSTABLE TASK LIGHTING FOR INDEPENDENT OCCUPANT CONTROL AMBIENT LIGHTING DESIGNED FOR MINIMUM AVERAGE IESNA RECOMMENDED LIGHT LEVELS 370 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281909 Figure 2. Multioccupant Space with Access to Lighting Controls IEQ CI SHARED MULTI OCCUPANT SPACE ADJUSTABLE LIGHTING CONTROL OPTIONS: DIMMER SWITCHES STEP DIMMING BI-LEVEL SWITCHING MULTI-ZONES Daylight harvesting and lighting control have been linked to higher productivity and lower energy bills. A lighting control system that either is remotely programmed or uses occupancy sensors (with a delay) to turn lamps on and off can save energy when areas are not in use. 9. Exemplary Performance This credit is not eligible for exemplary performance under the Innovation in Design section. 10. Regional Variations Buildings in regions with strong sunlight may need to use less electric lighting by day but require greater controllability in their lighting systems. Because daylight levels may range from the low to the intense during the come of a day, building occupants may experience discomfort if light levels fluctuate widely. Project teams in these regions should consider incorporating passive design strategies, such as good building orientation and the use of light-shielding devices like canopies, to control daylight. Daylight sensors that automatically adjust artificial lighting to compensate are also effective. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Building owners and architects should work with the lighting engineers and building operators in specifying the number and type of lighting controls to be installed. For automatic controls, provide appropriate setpoints and schedules in the facility's building operation plan. Establish procedures and schedules for recalibrating sensors based on the manufacturer's requirements, and include them in the building's preventive maintenance plan. When specifying automatic controls, consider the intended space use and choose an option suited to expected conditions. A utility room, for example, may have moving parts that can falsely trigger motion-based sensors. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http:fiwww.usgbc.org(pLojecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Credit 6.1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 371 EFTA00281910 I EQ CI Credit 6.1 Websites A Field Study of Personal Environmental Module Performance in Bank of America's San Francisco Office Buildings http://wmv.cbe.berkeley.edui rchpdf _filestbaumanigg8 bofa.pdf This University of California, Berkeley research center provides information about underfloor air distribution technologies and other topics. Association of Lighting and Mercury Recyclers http:(Jwww.almr.org Energy-to" National Renewable Energy Laboratory http://ww.nrel.govibuildingsienergym.html Print Media Controls and Automation for Facilities Managers: Applications Engineering, by Viktor Boed (CRC Press, 1998). Advanced Lighting Guidelines, 2003 edition, by New Buildings Institute (NBI, 2003):http://www. newbuildings.orgilighting.htm. Controls and Automation for Facilities Managers: Applications Engineering, by Viktor Boed (CRC Press, 1998). IESNA Lighting Handbook, 9th edition, by Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA, 2000): Document ID HB-9-00, at httplfwv.iesna.org. 13. Definitions Audiovisual (AN) media are slides, film, video, sound recordings, and other such devices used to present information. Commissioning is the process of verifying and documenting that the facility and all of its systems and assemblies are planned, designed, installed, tested, operated, and maintained to met the owner's project requirements. Controls are operating mechanisms that enable a person to turn on or off devices (e.g., lights, heaters) or adjust systems within a range (e.g., lighting, temperature). Daylighting is the controlled admission of natural light into a space through glazing to reduce or eliminate electric lighting. Glare is any excessively bright source of light within the visual field that creates discomfort or loss invisibility. In individual occupant spaces, workers use standard workstations to conduct individual tasks. Examples are private offices and open office areas with multiple workers. Nonoccupied spaces include all rooms used by maintenance personnel that are not open for use by occupants. Examples are closets and janitorial, storage, and equipment rooms. Outdoor air is the ambient air that enters a building through a ventilation system, either through intentional openings for natural ventilation or by infiltration. (ASH RAE 62.1-2007) Shared (group) multioccupant spaces include conference rooms, classrooms, and other indoor spaces used as places of congregation. Sensors are devices that undergo a measurable change in response to a change in the environment and communicate this to the appropriate equipment or control system. 372 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281911 CONTROLLABILITY OF SYSTEMS-THERMAL COMFORT CI Credit Points IEQ Credit 6.2 1 point Intent To provide a high level of thermal comfort system control' for individual occupants or groups in multi-occupant spaces (e.g., classrooms and conference areas) and promote their productivity, comfort and well-being. Requirements Provide individual controls for so% (minimum) of the tenant occupants to enable adjustment to suit individual needs and preferences, Operable windows may be used in lieu of individual controls for occupants located zo feet inside and to feet to either side of the operable part of the window. The areas of operable window must meet the requirements of ASHRAE Standard 62..1- 2007 paragraph 5.1 Natural Ventilation (with errata but without addenda:). Provide comfort system controls for all shared multi-occupant spaces to enable adjustments that meet group needs and preferences. Conditions for thermal comfort are described in ASHRAE Standard 55-2004. (with errata but without addenda) and include air temperature, radiant temperature, air speed and humidity. 1 Per the purpreet adds entellttomfort system coattails defined as camelover at knit °idlest primary haat In the occupant's localenvittement alr temperature, radiant tempenture,alr speed andhuraldity. a Project teams Maltby touteASFIRAE approved adcknas foe the purposes SUS credit maydo so at theirdiseretion. Addenda must be applied consbiently aatss all LEED °edits. IEQ CREDIT 6.2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 373 EFTA00281912 IEQ CI Credit 6.2 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Providing acceptable levels of temperature control and ventilation air to building occupants will promote ahealthywork environmentand improve the qualityoflifefor tenants.Atypical commercial interior project may not be able to adjust major base building components of the HVAC system, but the designers can maximize the thermostatic control and the amount of outside air provided by following ASHRAE 62.1-2007 and by incorporating an adequate number of thermostats for the space. Allowing occupants the ability to control the temperature in their space will likely result in reduced energy consumption and associated negative environmental impacts. Economic Issues Occupantcomplaints frequently include thermal discomfort. Greater thermal comfort may increase occupant performance and attendance and, at least, will reduce complaints. According to the Rocky Mountain Institute's Green Developments in Real Estate, office worker salaries are estimated to be 72 times higher than energy costs," and they account for 92% of the life-cycle costs of a building. With this in mind, thermal comfort can have a tremendous effect on overall costs.'9 Case studies have shown productivity increases from I% to 16%, saving companies millions of dollars per year." Additional controllability may add to a project's initial costs, however, these costs are generally offset by energy savings from lower-conditioned temperatures, automatic occupancy detectors, natural ventilation, and shading devices. Conversely, abuse of personal controls, such as setting thermostats too high or leaving windows open during nonworking hours, increases energy costs. Therefore, it is important to educate occupants on the design and function of system controls. 2. Related Credits The intent of this credit is to enable individuals and, in multioccupant spaces,groups to control their thermal comfort. The following prerequisites and credits also address building occupants' ability to control systems, maintenance, and other factors: • EA Prerequisite 1: Fundamental Commissioning of Building Systems • EA Prerequisite 2: Minimum Energy Performance • EA Credit 1.3: Optimize Energy Performance—HVAC • EA Credit 2: Enhanced Commissioning • EA Credit 3: Measurement and Verification • IEQ Credit 6.1: Controllability of Systems—Lighting • IEQ Credit 8: Daylight and Views 3. Summary of Referenced Standards American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2007, Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality ASH RAE httN/www.ashrae.org Section 5.1 of the standard provides minimum requirements for operable openings. The portion of the window that can be opened must be 4% of the net occupiable floor area. Building occupants must have ready access to the means of opening the windows. 374 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281913 American National Standards institute (ANSI)/ASHRAE Standard 55 2004: Thermal Environmental Conditions for Human Occupancy ASH RAE http:(/www.ashrae.org ASHRAE 55-2004 identifies the factors of thermal comfort and the process for developing comfort criteria for a building space and its occupants. ASHRAE states, "This standard specifies the combinations of indoor space environment and personal factors that will produce thermal environmental conditions acceptable to 8c% or more of the occupants within a space. The environmental factors addressed are temperature, thermal radiation, humidity, and air speed; the personal factors are those of activity and clothing." 4. Implementation Many conventional buildings are built as sealed spaces in which the occupants have no control over thermal conditions. A better approach would give individuals the freedom to adjust the thermal conditions fora more comfortable environment. An individual's thermal comfort can depend on air velocity, the direction and temperature of indoor air, and moisture content. Mechanical systems that allow for individual control of comfort can be integrated into the overall systems design byenablingindividual adjustment of selected comfort parameters,such as individual thermostats, individual diffusers (located on the floor, desk or overhead), and individual radiant panels. Occupancy sensors can also be integrated into the design to automatically turn down the thermostat and reduce airflow when occupants are away, which helps reduce energy use. Operable windows are often 1 of the occupants' most desired building features. In commercial interior projects where the space is being selected, the project team will have some say. Other means of providing thermal comfort involve planning and design consideration. When the control method is chosen and the space occupied, project teams take time to educate occupants on the individual controls of their office space, as well as facility managers on maintaining the HVAC equipment and recalibrating controls as recommended by the manufacturers. 5. Timeline and Team By surveying the building tenants, the design team can determine the level of individual control desired. Confirm that the central HVAC systems will be able to provide the desired level of thermal comfort. During design development, locate the thermal comfort controls with electrical and mechanical engineers as well as the construction or development manager. Consider thermal comfort needs as they pertain to ASHRAE 55-2004 requirements. Evaluate the controls for each space, considering the specific tools and equipment that occupants will use on a daily basis. When evaluating shared occupant spaces, consider the occupancy schedule. If possible, include comfort controls that meet both individual needs and those of groups in shared spaces. ASHRAE 55-zoo4 identifies the factors of thermal comfort and the process for developing comfort criteria for a building space and its occupants. Strategies to consider include designs with mechanical systems only, operable windows, and hybrid designs incorporating operable windows and mechanical systems. Postinstallation commissioningofall thermal comfort systemswill ensure proper operation. During building operation, the owner should provide training for building maintenance staff in using the controls. Property management and building engineers should periodically review comfort control systems to ensure that occupants' needs are met and that controls are working according to design. IEQ CI Credit 6.2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 375 EFTA00281914 IEQ CI Credit 6.2 6. Calculations Individual Thermal Comfort Identify workstations intended for individual use, such as private offices, open-plan workstations, reception stations, and ticket booths. Confirm that sc.% or more of individuals occupying these locations have at least t means of individual control over thermal comfort. Operable windows maybe used in lieu of individual controls for occupants located within 20 feet of the exterior wall and within to feet of either side of the operable part of the window. The operable portion of the window must comply with the free-opening size criterion of ASHRAE 62.1-zo07, Section s.t; the minimum area of the window that may be opened is 4% of the net occupiable floor area. For the limits used in this credit (i.e., an area 20 feet by so feet per window), the opening size would need to be 16 square feet. Shared Multioccupant Spaces For conference rooms and lecture halls, confirm that there is at least t accessible means of control over thermal comfort. For meeting spaces that can be subdivided, such as a convention hall with a movable wall, occupants in each area have control of their individual area. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Maintain a list of the total number of individual workstations and thermal controls in individual workstations. ■ Maintain a list of the project's group multioccupant spaces and a description of the installed thermal controls in shared, multioccupant spaces. 8. Examples Figure 1. Underfloor Air Distribution System with Individual Controls for Air Velocity and Temperature VARIABLE VOLUME —v.- AIR DISTRIBUTION 376 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR ULSIUN ANU LUN I NUL I IUN 2OUy LUI I ION EFTA00281915 Some examples to help achieve thermal comfort for building occupants include thermostat controls; local diffusers at the floor, desk, or overhead levels; or control of individual radiant panels. Radiant heating may be a good option to pursue. More specifically, room thermostats, natural ventilation actuators, and ceiling fans can have the capability for local occupant override or bypass. 9. Exemplary Performance This credit is not eligible for exemplary performance under the Innovation in Design section. 10. Regional Variations Local weather and ambient air conditions may determine the feasibility of operable windowswithin existing projects. For example, in areas that are prone to extreme temperatures for a majority of the year, or urban areas where traffic and air pollution are problematic, operable windows may not be an appropriate addition to a building. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Inform building operators about the number and type of thermal comfort controls installed. Include the default setpoints and schedules in the facility's building operation plan. Establish procedures and schedulesforrecalibratingcontrols,basedonthe manufacturer's recommendations, and include them in the building's preventive maintenance plan. Train building operators in using and maintaining specialty equipment. If windows are operable, the facility managers should educate tenants on the security and HVAC consequences of leaving windows open when the building is not occupied. Explain how this affects the HVAC systems and ultimately comfort. Maintenance staff should also plan to clean or replace HVAC filters more frequently if building occupants use operable windows. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (lim3Wwww.us c.o /mjecttools) for additional resources and technical information. Websites A Field Study of Personal Environmental Module Performance in Bank of America's San Francisco Office Buildings httpd/vnvw.cbe.berkeley.eduiresearchipdf_filestbaumanicgotbofa.pdf This University of California, Berkeley research center provides information about underfloor air distribution technologies and other topics. Do Green Buildings Enhance the Well-Being of Workers? Yes Environmental Design + Construction httpsoww.edcmag.com/Articles/CoverStorebonb.2338_070t0VgnVCM100000fqva8co. This article byJudith Heerwagen in the July/August woo edition of Environmental Design + Construction quantifies the effects of green building environments on productivity. Print Media Controls and Automation for Facilities Managers: Applications Engineering, by Viktor Boed (CRC Press, 1998). 13. Definitions The building envelope, or shell, is the exterior surface of a building's construction—the walls, windows, roof, and floor. IEQ CI Credit 6.2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 377 EFTA00281916 I Ell CI Credit 6.2 Comfort criteria are the specific original design conditions that at minimum include temperature (air, radiant, and surface), humidity, and air speed as well as outdoor temperature design conditions, outdoor humidity design conditions, clothing, and expected activity. (ASHRAE 55-2004) Commissioning is the process of verifying and documenting that the facility and all of its systems and assemblies are planned, designed, installed, tested, operated, and maintained to met the owner's project requirements. Controls are considered to be operating devices that enable the occupant to turn on or off other devices (e.g., lighting) or adjust other devices or systems within in a range (e.g., temperature). Daylighting is the controlled admission of natural light into a space through glazing to reduce or eliminate electric lighting. HVAC systems are equipment, distribution systems, and terminals that provide the processes of heating, ventilating, or air-conditioning. (ASHRAE 90.1-2007) In individual occupant spaces, workers use standard workstations to conduct individual tasks. Examples are private offices and open office areas with multiple workers. Natural ventilation relies on a range of techniques that maximize the potential of the stack effect, using air passages through doors, windows, or other intentional openings at differing heights and wind effects. Nonoccupied spaces include all rooms used by maintenance personnel that are not open for use by occupants. Examples are janitorial, storage and equipment rooms, and closets. Outdoor air is the ambient air that enters a building through a ventilation system, either through intentional openings for natural ventilation or by infiltration. (ASHRAE 62.1-2007) Regularlyoccupied spaces in commercial buildings are areaswhere people sitor stand as theywork. In residential applications these spaces include all living and family rooms and exclude bathrooms, closets, or other storage or utility areas. Shared (group) multioccupant spaces include conference rooms, classrooms and other indoor spaces used as places of congregation. Sensors are devices that undergo a measurable change in response to a change in the environment and communicates this to the appropriate equipment or control system. Thermal comfort exists when occupants express satisfaction with the thermal environment. 378 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281917 THERMAL COMFORT-DESIGN Credit IEQ Credit 7.1 Points 1 point Intent To provide a comfortable thermal environment that promotes occupant productivity and wellbeing. Requirements Design heating, ventilating and air-conditioning (HVAC) systems to meet the requirements of ASHRAE Standard 55-20.34, Thermal Comfort Conditions for Human Occupancy (with errata but without addenda'). Demonstrate design compliance in accordance with the Section 6.1.1 documentation. Project teams wishing to use ASIIRAK approved addenda thepurposesa this atilt may do so at theirdiseretion. Addenda must be applied conalstently acme all LEED °edits. IEQ CREDIT 7.1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 379 EFTA00281918 IEQ CI Credit 7.1 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Maintaining an acceptable level of thermal comfort for building occupants should be considered a necessity for any building or space with regular occupancy. Studies have shown that people who are comfortable are more productive and generally happier. In a work environment, increases in productivity can reduce the amount of time and energy required for an individual task. Over the course of a year, that can translate to fewer hours running equipment such as computers or task lighting, resulting in energy savings that reduce the strain on the environment. Economic Issues Generally, HVAC and building envelope systems that do not adequately address the thermal comfort of occupants are less energy efficient than their more robust counterparts—with the exception of passive or naturally ventilated spaces. Mechanical systems relying on natural ventilation typically have lower capital and construction costs and use less energy than mechanicallyventilated systems. In climates with extreme seasonal temperature swings, occupants' comfort can suffer in a naturally ventilated building, but a well-designed building envelope and HVAC system can help compensate. Buildingswith poor envelopes might struggle to maintain a comfortable environment for occupants near the building perimeter. The building HVAC system will expend more energy trying to maintain a comfortable environment for those occupants on the perimeter, increasing the annual energy cost of the building. HVAC systems with poorly located or inadequate numbers of thermostats or control zones can significantly impact occupant comfort. Occupants using areas that could otherwise have been provided individual temperature controls may have to share a thermostat or may use space heaters, which can increase energy use. When spaces have not been properly thermally zoned, occupants may try to heat and cool the same area at the same time, potentially resulting in greater energy use and additional costs to operate the building. 2. Related Credits The thermal comfort of building occupants is affected by environmental conditions (air temperature, radiant temperature, relative humidity, and air speed), personal factors (metabolic rate and clothing), and personal preferences. Thermal comfort can be controlled through both active (mechanical) systems and passive (natural ventilation) systems, with the best results often achieved through a combination of the 2 systems: Using both can help reduce the building's energy consumption, as well as achieve optimum comfort levels. For all these reasons, this credit is related to the following other prerequisites and credits: ■ EA Prerequisite a: Minimum Energy Performance ■ EA Credit 1.3: Optimize Energy Performance—HVAC • EA Credit 3: Measurement and Verification To address the issue of commissioning thermal comfort features, refer to the following: • EA Prerequisite 1: Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems • EA Credit a: Enhanced Commissioning The following prerequisite and credits also pertain to occupants' comfort: ■ IEQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance ■ IEQ Credit 2: Increased Ventilation 380 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281919 ■ IEQ Credit 6.2: Controllability of Thermal Systems—Thermal Comfort ■ IEQ Credit 7.2: Thermal Comfort—Verification 3. Summary of Referenced Standard American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/ASH RAE Standard 55 20°4, Thermal Comfort Conditions for Human Occupancy ASH RAE http:(/www.ashrae.org According to ASHRAE, this standard "specifies the combinations of indoor space environment and personal factors that will produce thermal environmental conditions acceptable to So% or more of the occupants within a space. The environmental factors addressed are temperature, thermal radiation, humidity, and airspeed; the personal factors are those of activity and clothing." 4. Implementation Although often associated only with air temperature, thermal comfort is a complex issue, affected by environmental conditions (e.g., air temperature, radiant temperature, humidity, and air speed) and personal factors (e.g., metabolic rate, clothing, and preferences). There are 3 basic approaches to providing thermal comfort in project space: ■ Mechanical Ventilation (i.e., active ventilation). ■ Natural Ventilation (i.e., passive ventilation). ■ Mixed-Mode Ventilation (i.e., both mechanical and natural ventilation). The owner should decide which conditioning approach to use and find an appropriate space for that conditioning system. ASHRAE 55-2004 provides thermal comfort standards with an optional alternate approach specifically for naturally ventilated spaces. The selected space should be evaluated to determine whether it can be made to meet the desired comfort criteria identified by the future occupant. ASH RAE 55-2004 uses the predicted mean vote model, which incorporates heat balance principles to relate the personal and environmental thermal comfort factors based on the thermal sensation scale that shows 7 levels ranging from +3 (hot) to -3 (cold). The predicted mean vote model is applicable to air speeds not greater than 0.20 meters per second (40 feet per minute). For naturally ventilated spaces, the standard indicates that field experiments have shown that the occupants' thermal responses depend in part on the outdoor climate and may differ from thermal responses in buildings with centralized HVAC systems. This is primarily because of the occupant's different thermal experiences,clothing, availabilityof control,and shifts expectations. The standard provides an optional method of compliance, intended for naturally ventilated spaces. This optional method provides indoor temperature ranges as a function ofmean monthlyoutdoortemperatures,assuming light, sedentary activity but independent of humidity, air speed, and clothing considerations. The optional method in Section 5.3 of the standard uses a chart with a broad temperature range and is based on the adaptive model of thermal comfort (which also accounts for occupants' clothing adaptation). The chart is derived from a global database with measures being taken in office buildings. There are many well established HVAC load calculation methodologies to assist designers in sizing and selecting HVAC equipment in order to provide thermal comfort conditions. Natural ventilation may be more difficult to evaluate and require more intensive analysis and/or reliance on experience and precedents. For naturally ventilated buildings, CIBSE Alto presents strategies that can be implemented to the selected space; however, attention should be given to the lease requirements IEQ CI Credit 7.1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 381 EFTA00281920 I EQ CI Credit 7.1 of the building to ensure the modifications desired by the owner and the design team may be implemented. For mechanical conditioning, the operating set points and parameters of the HVAC system will be a primary influence on thermal comfort conditions in the project space. Many facility operators in mechanically air conditioned spaces spend significant time and effort adjusting thermostat set points and other operational parameters in order to limit complaints associated with poor thermal comfort. Systems where individual occupants are provided some amount of direct control over temperature and/or air movement generally yield fewer thermal comfort complaints. The maxim "passive buildings, active occupants" fits the natural ventilation model well. Occupants generally take a primary role in managing thermal comfort conditions in naturally ventilated buildings by opening and closing windows as necessary. Thermal comfort in naturally conditioned buildings is also somewhat morevariable than in mechanicallyconditioned buildings,where systems are often designed to maintain consistent conditions through all periods of occupancy. 5. Timeline and Team The project owner and design team need to work together to achieve this credit, but responsibility for meeting the requirements and ensuring the thermal comfort of occupants resides with the HVAC design engineer. Start early in the design development stage. Discuss the local climate, energy efficiency, and occupant comfort ranges. The design team should decide whether thermal comfort conditions can be met with a passive approach or an active HVAC system or mixed-mode approach. This decision may be influenced by the type of space and cost considerations. Using ASHRAE 55-2,004, the design team and the owner should together identify the environmental parameters required to maintain the desired thermal comfort in the project space and then identify the conditioning systems (whether active or passive) available at the leased space to provide these conditions. 6. Calculations There are no calculations required for this credit. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Design mechanical systems within the comfort criteria of ASH RAE 55-zoort. • Describe how thermal comfortconditions were established for the project and how the design of conditioning systems addresses the thermal comfort design criteria. 8. Examples Figure t presents the ASHRAE 55-zoo4 comfort zone charts for summer and winter. They take into consideration factors like temperature and humidity and are most applicable to occupants who are appropriately dressed and involved in light work (e.g., office workers). The variations in the charts reflect the assumption that occupants are dressed according to the seasons. 382 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281921 Figure 1. (ASHRAE 55) Summer Comfort Zone 43° 80% a. 60% m = w > .r. . to OC" .r. ee 40% Tv A 40% 7. , ce ce 30% t 30% ,3 es 20% aj c es 20% IAL Winter Comfort Zone 80% °F 65 70 /5 80 Space Dry Bulb Temperature a. E 60% °F 65 70 75 80 Space Dry Bulb Temperature These charts can help the building owner and facility manager identify optimum interior comfort levels as well as identify deviations in thermal comfort that are specific to the building, the occupants and their type of work. 9. Exemplary Performance This credit is not eligible for exemplary performance under the Innovation in Design section. 10. Regional Variations When considering occupant comfort, anticipate how climatic and seasonal variations will affect the thermal comfort of occupants. Climate variations play an important role in passively ventilated buildings because of the introduction of unconditioned outside air. In mechanically ventilated buildings, regional variations have an impact on the temperature range that an occupant considers comfortable. Wanner climates typically have higher design temperatures than colder climates to match the conditions that would normally he considered comfortable for the occupants. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Provide the building owner, facility manager, and occupants with the information needed to understand, maintain, and adjust the HVAC system for thermal comfort. Establish appropriate setpoints and control sequences, as well as recommendations for typical corrective actions, and include them in the facility's building operating plan and sequence of operations document. Establish procedures and schedules for inspecting and recalibrating sensors and controls, based on the manufacturer's recommendations, and include them in the building's preventive maintenance plan. 12. Resources Please see the USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http://www.usgbc.orgfproiecttools) for additional resources and technical information. IEQ CI Credit 7.1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 383 EFTA00281922 I EQ CI Credit 7.1 Websites Advanced Desiccant Cooling and Dehumidification Program http://www.nrel.goWdocsify9Oostil •300.pdf This U.S. Department of Energy research and development program works with companies to realize the potential of desiccant systems for reducing energy consumption and improving indoor air quality and comfort. NIST Multizone Modeling Software http://ww.bfrl.nist.gov/IAQanalysiesoftware The National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) provides software such as CONTAM, a multizone indoor air quality andventilation analysis computer program designed to predict airflows and contaminant concentrations. Enhance Indoor Environmental Quality, The Whole Building Design Guide http://wmv.wbdg.oredesiptieq.php The Indoor Environmental Quality section provides a wealth of resources including definitions, fundamentals, materials, and tools. Print Media ASHRAE ss-2004: Thermal Environmental Conditions for Human Occupancy (ASHRAE, 2004). ASHRAE 111-1988: Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating; Ventilation, Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Systems (ASHRAE,1988). Dehumidification Enhancements for 100-%-Outside-Air AHUs: Parts 1,11 and III, by Donald Gatley, Healing Piping and Air Conditioning Magazine (September, October, and November 2000): http:// www.HPAC.com. Humidity Control Design Guide, by L. Harriman, G.W. Brundett, and R. Kittler (ASHRAE, 2000). The Impact of Part-Load Air-Conditioner Operation on Dehumidification Performance: Validating a Latent Capacity Degradation Model, by Hugh Henderson, IAQ and Energy (1998). Using ASHRAE 62 and 90.1 Conference Papers (ASH RAE,1998). The New Comfort Equation For Indoor Air Quality, by P.O. Fanger, ASHRAE Journal (October 1989): 3318- Selecting HVAC Systems for Schools, by Arthur Wheeler and Walter Kunz, Jr. (Maryland State Department of Education,1994). Thermal Comfort, by P.O. Fanger (Mc-Graw Hi11,197-3). Thermal Delight in Architecture, by Lisa Heschong (MIT Press,1979). Unplanned Airflows and Moisture Problems, by T. Brennan, J. Cummings, and J. Lstiburek, ASHRAE Journal (Novembers000). 13. Definitions Comfort Criteria are the specific original design conditions that at a minimum include temperature (air, radiant and surface), humidity and air speed as well as outdoor temperature design conditions, outdoor humidity design conditions, clothing, and expected activity. (ASH RAE 55-2004) Commissioning is the process of verifying and documenting that the facility and all of its systems and assemblies are planned, designed, installed, tested, operated, and maintained to meet the owner's project requirements. 384 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281923 Mixed-mode ventilation combines natural ventilation with mechanical systems; the latter are used onlywhen necessary. Mixed-modeventilation strategies include 3 distinct approaches; contingency, complementary, and zoned. (CI ESE Guide F-2008) Mechanical ventilation is provided by mechanically powered equipment, such as motor-driven fans and blowers, but not by devices such as wind-driven turbine ventilators and mechanically operated windows. (ASHRAE 62.1-2004) Natural ventilation is provided by thermal, wind, or diffusion effects through doors, windows, or other intentional openings in the building. (ASHRAE 62.1-2007) Occupants in a commercial building are workers who eitherhave a permanent office or workstation or typically spend a minimum of to hours per week in the project building; in a residential building, regular occupants also include all persons who live in the building. Predicted mean vote is an empirical equation for predicting the mean vote on a rating scale of thermal comfort of a large population of people exposed to a certain environment. Relative humidity is the ratio of partial density of water vapor in the air to the saturation density of water vapor at the same temperature and the same total pressure. (ASHRAE 55- 4). Thermal comfort exists when building occupants express satisfaction with the thermal environment. IE0 CI Credit 7.1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 385 EFTA00281924 386 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281925 THERMAL COMFORT-VERIFICATION a Credit Points IEQ Credit 7.2 1 point' •1 point in addition to IEQ Credit 7.1 Intent To provide for the assessment of occupant thermal comfort over time. Requirements Achieve IEQ Credit 7.1: Thermal Comfort - Design Provide a permanent monitoring system and process for corrective action to ensure that building performance meets the desired comfort criteria as determined by IEQ Credit 7.1: Thermal Comfort—Design. Agree to conduct a thermal comfort survey of tenant space occupants within 6 to IS months after occupancy. This survey should collect anonymous responses about thermal comfort in the tenant space including an assessment of overall satisfaction with thermal performance and identification of thermal comfort problems. Agree to develop a plan for corrective action if the survey results indicate that more than 20% of occupants are dissatisfied with thermal comfort in the tenant space This plan should include measurement of relevant environmental variables in problem areas in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 55-2004 (with errata but without addenda`). Proyvt teams wz.iling to ox ASIIRAE 4pprened 4cldencht for t tc put ix so' thiscredit Ma) do,oat04111 ir th,cret ton. Addend: :rust be applxd.onsistently a.ru.a all LEED•redits IEQ CREDIT 7.2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 387 EFTA00281926 IEQ CI Credit 7.2 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues For many facilities, the HVAC systems that maintain indoor thermal comfort are the largest energy users. A successful green building should minimize the energy use associated with building conditioning—along with the associated energy cost, fuel consumption, and air emissions—while maintaining thermal comfort conditions that enhance occupant well-being. Economic Issues Depending on the specific approach and project space limitations, providing the thermal comfort conditions as defined by ASHRAE 55-2004 may increase or decrease the cost of designing, constructing, and operating the facility. The choices that are made while finding the project space will shape the cost implications of this credit. If the owner selects a space that has mechanical systems, the project team must evaluate the existing system to determine if maintaining the comfortcriteria is feasible from a system operations and monitoring point of view as well as whether there is a need for modifications or changes to the overall system. This might affect lease agreements, which could reduce or increase the overall cost of the project. Thermal comfort monitoring (via occupant surveying or monitoring environmental variables) may add capital, operations, and maintenance costs to a facility. The building systems, use, and occupants change with time, requiring ongoing maintenance and perhaps improvements to thermal comfort performance. Reducing thermal comfort problems and complaints contributesto occupant performance and may allow facility operations and maintenance staff to focus on other critical areas. If the owner selects a space that has a natural ventilation system, the above mentioned feasibility procedure should be carried out to evaluate cost implications. The selected space might have operable windows but may or may not provide the comfort criteria established by the owner and the design team. Natural ventilation systems consume less energy, and may have reduced maintenance costs compared with the HVAC systems. 2. Related Credits The thermal comfort of building occupants is affected by environmental conditions (air temperature, radiant temperature, relative humidity, and air speed), personal factors (metabolic rate and clothing), and personal preference. Thermal comfort can be controlled through the use of active (mechanical) systems and passive (natural ventilation) systems, with the best results often achieved through a combination of the 2 systems. Using both active and passive features can help reduce the energy consumption of the building as well as achieve optimum comfort levels in a building. Refer to the requirements in the following: ■ EA Prerequisite a: Minimum Energy Performance ■ EA Credit 1.3: Optimize Energy Performance—HVAC ■ EA Credit 3: Measurement and Verification Another prerequisite and credit address the issue of commissioning thermal comfort: ■ EA Prerequisite 1: Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems ■ EA Credit 2: Enhanced Commissioning This credit also works in synergy with the following prerequisite and credits that pertain directly to occupant comfort: ■ IEQ Prerequisite I: Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance 388 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281927 ▪ I EQ Credit 2: Increased Ventilation ▪ I EQ Credit 6.2: Controllability of Thermal Systems—Thermal Comfort ▪ I EQ Credit 7.1: Thermal Comfort—Design 3. Summary of Referenced Standard American National Standards Institute (ANSOIASHRAE Standard 55-2004, Thermal Comfort Conditions for Human Occupancy American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers http://www.ashrae.org "This standard specifies the combinations of indoor space environment and personal factors that will produce thermal environmental conditions acceptable to 80% or more of the occupants within a space. The environmental factors addressed are temperature, thermal radiation, humidity and air speed; the personal factors are those of activity and clothing." (ASHRAE) 4. Implementation Since thermal comfort is inherently subjective and is psychological as much as physiological, regularly surveying occupants may be the best way to determine whether a facility is comfortable. Sporadic complaints about thermal comfort may not be an appropriate indicator of overall thermal comfort, but rather an indicator of local or personal dissatisfaction. Providing a systematic process and mechanism for all occupants to provide feedback about their thermal comfort will help building operators adjust and maintain thermal comfort in the building. Analyzingenvironment variables (typicallyby monitoringspace temperature and relative humidity) is an alternate approach to determining if a facility is providing thermal comfort for its occupants. Temperature, humidity, and other environmental monitoring systems provide facility operators with objective data to determine if the building space conditions meet the design intent and/or if they are being maintained consistently through the occupied periods. The building systems, building use, and occupants change with time, which means that requiring ongoing maintenance and improvements may be necessary to maintain thermal comfort. Reducing thermal comfort problems and complaints contributes to occupant performance and may allow facility operations and maintenance staff to focus on other critical areas. Employing a monitoring system will control nondirectional airspeed, air temperature, and humidity under all expected operating conditions. Maintenance and operations personnel need to verify that the system is functioning properly and that the comfort criteria determined earlier is being maintained by taking readings and assessing the thermal comfort parameters that are identified by the owner and the design team. Periodic verifications and adjustments to the system help maintain the set comfort criteria, contributes to occupant performance, and keeps the systems up to date. Even though this credit does not require a monitoring system in addition to occupant surveying to verify the thermal comfort conditions, it might be beneficial for the owner and design teams to employ both options in their operations and maintenance plan, especially for determining options for corrective action. 5. Timeline and Team The design and engineering team are primarily responsible for achieving this credit, which is based on the requirements of ASHRAE 55-2004. Additionally, a member of the building operations team, an owner agent, or a commissioning authority should carry out the followup survey to meet the requirements of this credit. During the design phase, identify the environmental parameters in IEQ Credit 7.1, Thermal Comfort—Design, that will affect comfort in the project building. Any space temperature sensors, IEQ CI Credit 7.2 2009 EDITICI. LELD REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 389 EFTA00281928 I EQ CI Credit 7.2 humidity sensors, or other sensors needed to monitor thermal comfort conditions should be integrated into the HVAC design. For the survey, consult the guidelines and a sample thermal environment survey in ASHRAE 55-2004. During the operations phase, facility managers should develop procedures to survey building occupants about thermal comfort conditions for every operating mode. These regular surveys may be administered in person, over the phone, over networked computers, or on paper but should be consistently applied and available for participation by all regular occupants. The survey may encompass other indoor environmental quality considerations (such as lighting or acoustics) as well, although this is not required for this credit. 6. Calculations There are no calculations associated with this credit. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Create a written plan for corrective action if zo % or more of a building's occupants are dissatisfied with thermal comfort in the building ■ Create a thermal comfort survey for the building's occupants 8. Examples There are no examples for this credit. 9. Exemplary Performance This credit is not eligible for exemplary performance under the Innovation in Design section. 10. Regional Variations ASHRAE S5-aoo4 provides alternate thermal comfort criteria based on presumed seasonal changes in occupants' dress. This assumption may or may not be valid for facilities and for different regions of the country. Designers should consider and anticipate occupants' clothing and likely metabolic rate in determining the indoor thermal comfort criteria. A natural ventilation approach is more typical in mild and temperate climates, although there are precedents for naturally conditioned buildings in all climates. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Provide the building owner, maintenance personnel, and occupants with the information needed to understand, maintain, and adjust the HVAC system for thermal comfort. Establish appropriate setpoints and control sequences, as well as recommendations for typical corrective actions, and include them in the building operating plan and sequence of operations document. Establish procedures and schedules for inspecting and recalibrating sensors and controls, based on the manufacturer's recommendations, and include them in the building's preventive maintenance plan. 12. Resources Please see the USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http://www.usgbc.oreprojecttools) for additional resources and technical information. 390 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281929 Websites Advanced Desiccant Cooling and Dehumidification Program http://www.nrel.goWdocsify9Oostil .3oo.pdf This U.S. Department of Energy research and development program works with companies to realize the potential of desiccant systems for reducing energy consumption and improving indoor air quality and comfort. NIST Multizone Modeling Software http://wwwbfrl.nist.g9SIAOanalysisfsoftware The National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) provides software such as CONTAM, a multizone indoor air quality andventilation analysis computer program designed to predict airflows and contaminant concentrations. Enhance Indoor Environmental Quality, The Whole Building Design Guide http://www.wbdg.orgidesignfiN,pl_Ri The Indoor Environmental Quality section provides a wealth of resources including definitions, fundamentals, materials, and tools. Print Media ASHRAE55-2004: Thermal Environmental Considerations for Human Occupancy (ASHRAE, 2004). ASHRAE -1988: Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating Ventilation, Mr-Conditioning and Refrigeration Systems (ASHRAE,1988). Dehumidification Enhancements for 100-%-Outside-Air AHUs: Parts 1,11 and III, by Donald Gatley, Heating Piping and Air Conditioning Magazine (September, October, and November 2000): httpdt Humidity Control Design Guide, by L. Harriman, G.W. Brundett, and R. Kittler (ASHRAE, zo00). The Impact of Part-Load Air-Conditioner Operation on Dehumidification Performance: Validating a Latent Capacity Degradation Model, by Hugh Henderson, IAQ and Energy (1998). Using ASHRAE and 90.1 Conference Papers (ASH RAE, t998). The New Comfort Equation For Indoor Air Quality, by M. Fanger, ASHRAE Journal, October (1989): PP- 3318. Selecting HVAC Systems for Schools, by Arthur Wheeler and Walter Kunz, Jr. (Maryland State Department of Education,1994). Thermal Comfort, Fanger (McGraw Hill,1973). Thermal Delight in Architecture, by Lisa Heschong (MIT Press,1979). Unplanned Airflows and Moisture Problem; by T. Brennan, J. Cummings, and J. Lstiburek, ASHRAE Journal (November z000). 13. Definitions Comfort criteria are the specific original design conditions that at a minimum include temperature (air, radiant and surface), humidity and air speed as well as outdoor temperature design conditions, outdoor humidity design conditions, clothing, and expected activity. (ASHRAE55-20N) Commissioning is the process of verifying and documenting that the facility and all of its systems and assemblies are planned, designed, installed, tested, operated, and maintained to meet the owner's project requirements. IED CI Credit 7.2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 391 EFTA00281930 I EQ CI Credit 7.2 Mechanical ventilation is provided by mechanically powered equipment, such as motor-driven fans and blowers, but not by devices such as wind-driven turbine ventilators and mechanically operated windows. (ASHRAE 62.r -2004) Mixed-mode ventilation combines mechanical and natural ventilation methods. Natural Ventilation is a ventilation design relying on a range of techniques which maximize the potential of the stack effect, using air passages through doors, windows, or other intentional openings at differing heights and wind effects. Occupants in a commercial building are workerswho eitherhave a permanent office or workstation or typically spend a minimum of r0 hours per week in the project building; in a residential building, regular occupants also include all persons who live in the building. Predicted mean vote is an empirical equation for predicting the mean vote on a rating scale of thermal comfort of a large population of people exposed to a certain environment. Relative humidity is the ratio of partial density of water vapor in the air to the saturation density of water vapor at the same temperature and the same total pressure. (ASHRAE 55-2004). Thermal comfort exists when occupants express satisfaction with the thermal environment. 392 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281931 DAYLIGHT AND VIEWS-DAYLIGHT _Oa Credit Points IEQ Credit 8.1 1.2 points Intent To provide occupants with a connection between indoor spaces and the outdoors through the introduction of daylight and views into the regularly occupied areas of the tenant space. Requirements the percentage of daylighting to be achieved for each point threshold is as follows: Gassman Spaces Points 75% 1 90% 2 OPTION 1. Simulation Demonstrate through computer simulations that 75% (1 point) or 9o% (a points) or more of all regularly occupied spaces areas achieve daylight illuminance levels of a minimum of 25 footcandle (fc) and a maximum of soo fc in a clear sky condition on September zi at 9 •. and 3.. Areas with illuminance levels below or above the range do not comply. However, designs that incorporate view-preserving automated shades for glare control may demonstrate compliance for only the minimum 25 fc illuminance level. OR OPTION 2. Prescriptive Use a combination of side-lighting and/or top-lighting to achieve a total daylighting zone that is at least 75% (1 point) or go% (a points) of all the regularly occupied spaces. For the Sidelighting Daylight Zone (see diagram below): • Achieve a value, calculated as the product of the visible light transmittance (VLT) and window-to-floor area ratio (W FR) of daylight zone, between o.i5o and o.i80. The window area included in the calculation must be at least 3o inches above the floor. 0.150 C VLT X WA? C 0.180 • The ceiling must not obstruct a line in section that: • Joins the window-head to a line on the floor that is parallel to the plane of the window; • Is twice the height of the window-head above the floor in distance from the plane of the glass as measured perpendicular to the plane of the glass, • Provide sunlight redirection and/or glare control devices to ensure daylight effectiveness. IEQ CREDIT 8.1 2009 EDITION LEER REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 393 EFTA00281932 IEQ CREDIT 8.1 211 A V For Top-lighting Daylight Zone (see diagram below): • The daylight zone under a skylight is the outline of the opening beneath the skylight, plus in each direction the lesser of: • 70%of the ceiling height OR • tiz the distance to the edge of the nearest skylight OR • The distance to any permanent opaque partition (if transparent show VLT) farther than 70% of the distance between the top of the partition and the ceiling. ■ Achieve a skylight roof coverage between 3% and 6% of the roof area with a minimum o.5VLT. ■ The distance between the skylights must not be more than 1.4 times the ceiling height • A slcylight diffuser, if used, must have a measured haze value ofgreater than 90% when tested according to ASTM D1003. Avoid direct line of sight to the skylight diffuser. Exceptions for areas where tasks would be hindered by the use of daylight will be considered on their merits. 394 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281933 IEQ CREDIT 8.1 \met • ri=fix0 7 1 Dayht Area 35° Permanent Pand1011 OR OPTION 3. Measurement Demonstrate, through records of indoor light measurements that a minimum daylight illumination level of 25 fc has been achieved in at least 75% (1 point) or 90% (2 points) of all regularly occupied areas. Measurements must be taken on a so-foot grid for all occupied spaces and recorded on building floor plans. Only the square footage associated with the portions of rooms or spaces meeting the minimum illumination requirements maybe counted in the calculations. For all projects pursuing this option, provide daylight redirection and/or glare control devices to avoid high contrast situations that could impede visual tasks. Exceptions for areas where tasks would be hindered by daylight will be considered on their merits. OR OPTION 4. Combination Any of the above calculation methods maybe combined to document the minimum daylight illumination in at least 75% (t point) or 90% (2 points) of all regularly occupied spaces. The different methods used in each space must be clearly recorded on all building plans. In all cases, only the square footage associated with the portions of rooms or spaces meeting the requirements maybe applied toward the 75% (I point) or 90% (2 points) of total area calculation required to qualify for this credit. In all cases, provide glare control devices to avoid high-contrast situations that could impede visual tasks. Exceptions for areas where tasks would be hindered by the use of daylight will be considered on their merits. 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 395 EFTA00281934 IEQ CI Credit 8.1 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Buildings emphasizing daylighting may often depend on the introduction of larger daylighting apertures. Daylighting reduces the need for electric lightingofbuilding interiors,which, if integrated into the overall approach to lighting, can result in decreased energy use. A well-designed daylit building is estimated to reduce lighting energy use by50%to 80%." This conserves natural resources and reduces air pollution impacts due to energy production and consumption. Daylighting design involves a careful balance of heat gain and loss, glare control, visual quality, and variations in daylight availability. Shading devices, light shelves, courtyards, atriums, and window glazing are all strategies employed in daylighting design. Important considerations include selected buildings' orientation, window size and spacing, glass selection, reflectance of interior finishes, and locations of interior walls. Large expanses of unfragmented or untreated glazing can give the illusion of transparency or reflect sky and habitat, causing birds in flight to collide into the windows. See the Implementation sections for measures to reduce bird collisions. Economic Issues Specialized glazing can increase initial costs for a project and can lead to excessive heat gain if not designed properly. Glazing provides less insulating effects compared with standard walls, resulting in higher energy use and requiring additional maintenance. However, offices with sufficient natural daylight have proven to increase occupant productivity and comfort, leading to increased worker production and better employee retention. In most cases, employee compensation significantly outweighs the initial costs of incorporating daylighting measures into a building design. 2. Related Credits Increasing the area of vision glazing is likely to provide greater access to views from the building interior, which is covered under the following credit: ■ IEQ Credit 8.2: Daylight and Views—Views for Seated Spaces Incorporate HVAC perimeter zones to address temperature differences adjacent to glazing, and to effectively accommodate their associated heating and cooling affects. This credit also has a direct correlation to related lighting design energy conservation strategies. The interior lighting systems design can be used to maximize the energy savings by providing daylighting controls. ■ EA Credit 1.1: Optimize Energy Performance—Lighting Power ■ EA Credit 1.2: Optimize Energy Performance—Lighting Controls ■ EA Credit 1.3: Optimize Energy Performance—HVAC ■ IEQ Credit 6: Controllability of Systems 3. Summary of Referenced Standard ASTM D1003-07E1,Standard Test Method for Haze and Luminous Transmittance of Transparent Plastics http://www.astm.org Thistestmethod covers the evaluation of specificlight-transmittingand wide-angle-light-scattering properties of planar sections of materials such as essentially transparent plastic. 396 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281935 4. Implementation For commercial interiors projects where the project team may not have had the opportunity to design the fenestration, it is critical to select a building that supports daylighting.. The project team should determine if daylighting and direct line of sight to the outdoors is available. Some buildings' potential for natural daylighting is limited by site constraints or structures that prohibit daylight penetration. The project team should consider how the building's orientation could effect daylighting options and opt for designs with shallow floor plates, courtyards, atriums, clerestory windows, and skylights. The team should evaluate the potential to add interior light shelves, exterior fins, louvers, and adjustable blinds. See Figure I, which illustrates several daylighting strategies. Attention to daylight should also be addressed during the interior design phase of the building. Furniture systems and arrangement, wall partitions, surface color, and texture all have the potential to either hinder or enhance the occupants' thermal and visual comfort. Figure 1. Daylighting Strategies north facing skylight —\ exterior shading device interior light shelf light fixture with sensors dimming controls The desired amount of daylight will differ depending on the tasks occurring in a daylit space. Daylit spaces often have several daylight zones with differing target light levels. In addition to light levels, daylighting strategies should address interior color schemes, direct beam penetration, and integration with the electric lighting system. Glare control is perhaps the most common failure in daylighting strategies. Large window areas provide generous amounts of daylight to the task area. If not controlled properly, this daylight can produce unwanted glare and affect interior lighting quality. Measures to control glare include light shelves, louvers, blinds, fins, and shades. Typically low luminance ratios and lighting of primary surfaces will enhance visual quality. Glare control is required for each window. Computer modeling software can be used to simulate daylighting conditions. Daylighting software simulates the daylighting conditions of interior spaces at various times during the day and shows thecombined effects of multiple windows within a daylit space. Photo-responsive controls for electric lighting can be incorporated into daylighting strategies to maintain consistent light levels and to minimize occupant perception of the transition from 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 397 EFTA00281936 I EQ CI Credit 8.1 natural light to artificial light. These controls result in energy savings by reducing electric lighting in high daylight conditions while preserving foot-candle levels on the task surface. These types of automatic controls require commissioning and also measurement and verification attention. The selected building mayhave limited daylighting potential because of its orientation, number and size of building openings, and floor plate dimensions. Vertical site elements such as neighboring buildings and trees may reduce the potential for daylighting. Despite the known benefits of views in buildings, a clear downside is the increased likelihood that birds will fly into the windows. Perhaps as many as r billion birds die in this way each year. Larger areas of unfragmented or untreated glazing increase the risk. To reduce these collisions, consider treating the window glazing. Use exterior shading devices, introduce etched or fritt patterns, and/or create appropriate visual markers, such as differentiated planes, materials, textures, colors, opacity, or other features that help fragment glass reflections and reduce apparent overall transparency and reflectivity. 5. Timeline and Team During the predesign stage, the owner, architect, and engineers should discuss general lighting design and the goals for occupants' work environment. Daylighting performance of a potential tenant space should be considered during leasing. During schematic design and programming efforts, identify regularly occupied spaces and rooms as primary candidates for access to daylighting. The design team should work with the existingbuilding envelope to determine how to allocate the spaces and maximize their access to daylight. Also at this time, identify initial glare control device strategies and run daylighting simulations to assist in the design decisions. During the preparation of construction documents, the LEED calculations and/or computer simulation model should be developed in greater detail to inform the design decisions and verify compliance of the design. Refer again to the owner's project requirements. Use preliminary calculations to guide specifications for glare control devices. Once the design is complete, finalize the LEED calculations and supporting documentation. During construction, the design and construction team should confirm that the submitted products and systems meet the owner's project requirements, the design performance specifications, and the original design intent. During building operations, the owner should verify that occupants are not subject to glare and ensure that the installed glare control devices are performing as intended. 6. Calculations To calculate the daylighting zone prercentage, divide the aggregate of all daylit regularly occupied spaces by the aggregate area of all regularly occupied spaces in the project, both daylit and noncompliant areas. Calculating Regularly Occupied Areas Identify all regularly occupied spaces within the project and calculate their associated floor areas. For veterinary, boarding, or animal shelter facilities, include the area regularly occupied by the animals. Any spaces dedicated to tasks that would be compromised or hindered by the inclusion of daylighting should be identified and the reason for their exclusion should be explained, for documentation purposes, in a supporting narrative. Any exclusion must be based solely on the basis of the task performed in the space, not the length of time an occupant will spend there. In addition, exceptions to the requirement are solely based on visual considerations, not based on sound. 398 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281937 For consistency across LEED projects, the regularly occupied spaces and total area calculated for this credit should be consistent with the regularly occupied areas identified in other credits, such as IEQ Credit 8.3. However,exceptions for specialized areas dedicated to tasks that would be hindered by the use of daylight will be considered on their merits. Calculating Daylighting Performance The requirement can be met even if t00% of each room does not meet the minimum 25 footcandle requirement when using the daylight simulation and/or measurement methodologies. The portion of the room with a 25 footcandle minimum illumination counts toward the percentage of compliant area, and the portion ofthe space not meetingthe illumination criterion is included in the calculation of total area. For the calculation spreadsheet, enter the space portion that meets the illumination criterion and the space portion that does not. The square footage of all compliant spaces is tallied and then divided by the total square footage of all regularly occupied spaces. If the percentage is 75% or more, then the project qualifies fort point under this credit. If the percentage is 90%or more, the project qualifies for 2 points. See Table t. Table 1. Sample Daylighting Calculations Regularty Occupied Space ID Regularly Occupied Space Marne Regularly Occupied Space Area f sf) sideughtint visionGlass Sidelighting. DMIIMGM4 Glazing Toplightinfr Sawtooth Monitor TopIMMint Vertical Monitor Toplighting• Horizontal Sky ight Daylight Factor km (01 Ms Area GO Ms Area DO Tws Area (20 Tws Area HO Tvn 101 Office 520 120 0.9 40 0.7 0 NM 0 N/A 0 N/A 3.3 102 Office 330 30 0.9 5 0.7 0 NIA 0 N/A 0 N/A 1.8 103 Open once (Daylit Ma) 2250 330 0.9 110 0.7 0 WA 0 NIA 0 N/A 3.3 103 Open orrice INOnMaylit Areal 685 0 0.9 0 0.7 0 N/A 0 WA 0 N/A 0 104 Office 250 25 0.9 5 0.7 0 N/A 0 WA 0 WA 2.1 105 Office 250 25 0.9 5 0.7 0 N/A 0 N/A 0 WA 2.1 Total Regularly Occupied Space Area MO Total Regularly Occupied Space Area with a Minimum 2% Glazing Factor Perce tape of Re Wady Occ pied Space with a 2% Glazing 4585 3570 78% OPTION 1. Simulation • Create a daylight simulation model for the building or for each regularly occupied space with glazing. Include approximate glazing properties as well as representative surface reflectance settings for interior finishes. • For each applicable area, include a horizontal calculation grid at 30 inches above the floor, or measured at the appropriate desk or work height level for the intended use of the space. This represents the typical work plane height. The calculation grid should be set at a maximum of 5-foot intervals to provide a detailed illumination diagram for each area. • Calculate the daylight illumination for each applicable space using the following daylight criterion: clear-sky conditions at both 9:00 a.m. and 3:00 p.m. on the equinox (March 21 or September 21) for the project's geographic location. • Identify all regularly occupied rooms or areas. Determine the floor area of each space using 'EC( CI IEQ Credit 8.1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 399 EFTA00281938 IEQ CI Credit 8.1 construction documents and enter the information on a spreadsheet. Provide the minimum illumination level (in footcandles), determined through the simulation model, for each space. ■ If the illumination for a room or area is a minimum of 25 footcandles and a maximum of soo footcandles, the square footage of the space counts toward the credit. If the project uses automated shades, the maximum footcandle requirement does not apply. ■ Dedicated theater spaces (not multipurpose rooms) must meet an illuminance of to footcandles, as recommended in the IESNA Lighting Handbook Reference and Application. ■ Multipurpose rooms must be included in the credit calculations. Because some activities in these spaces may be hindered by daylight, effective shades and lighting controls should be included in the design. ■ Sum the square footage of all daylit rooms or areas and divide by the total square footage of all regularly occupied spaces. If this percentage is 75%or more, then the project qualifies fort or more points under this credit. Note that glare control is also required for each window. Create another spreadsheet entry that identifies the type of glare control applied to each window type. The type of glare control selected for each window does not affect the daylight calculations. To control glare, use any of the following common strategies: • Fixed exterior shading devices • Exterior light shelves • Interior light shelves ■ Interior blinds and louvers • Operable draperies and blinds ■ Fritted glazing ■ Electronic blackout glazing OPTION 2. Prescriptive Side Lighting This option provides a relatively simple method of determining whether the daylighting requirements are met. It is applicable to many standard building designs, primarily rectangular floor plates with a central core. The project team needs the following basic information to determine compliance: ■ Window head height ■ Window sill height ■ Window width (per bay) ■ Baywidth ■ Bay depth to core ■ VLT (Tvis) ■ Floor area (per bay) Perform the following calculation for each bay condition in the building (north-south, eastwest and corner): 400 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281939 • Determine the window area (WA) for the bay. This is the window head height less the window sill height that is 30 inches or more above the floor, multiplied by the window width(s) per bay. • Determine whether the window head height can contribute to this credit, or if an adjusted head height must be used. Draw a 63-degree angle from the vertical, in section, from the window head to the floor. lithe ceiling obstructs this line, a modified head height must be used. Draw a 63-degree angle from the vertical, in section, using the ceiling corner that obstructed the previous line as a starting point. The point at which this line intersects the window is the modified head height. See Figure a below. Determine the floor area (FA) for the typical bay. This is the bay width multiplied by the bay depth to core. • Determine the ratio of the window area to the floor area (WFR)—that is, WAWA. • Determine the ratio ofvisible light transmittance to window to floor area—that is, (VLT) (WFR). • If the result is between 0.150 and 0.18o, the bay counts toward meeting the requirement. Each bay condition in the building must meet this requirement. Figure 2. Sample Modified Window Head Height and Daylight Zone :4P4 .• • 4 • 4 • •• • • it ect..92, 47 ItelitaiXanctix ♦ 00 0 •04 Dropped Ceiling 3° •-•-• • • • • • I • -•-•_••. Attl..4,41.16 -.44.04•4•4•4•4•;•;•;•;•;•;tri.tiVi a. a A.A..... 4.4•.•,•_•_•„• 11 • 4 0 41, Modified Daylight Zone 2H Daylight Zone Head Height (H) IEQ CI Credit 8.1 LW I IL;‘,. LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN IN I LwUk ULSIUN AND LUNSTRLICTION 401 EFTA00281940 IEQ CI Credit 8.1 Table 2. Sample Prescriptive Calculation NR bay EM bay Comer Bay Window head height 10 10 10 Window sill height 2.5 2.5 2.5 Window Width (per bay) 19 19 78 Bay width 20 20 40 Bay width to core 40 40 40 VLT (t,„) 0.86 0.86 0.45 WA Window daylight height 7.5 7.5 7.5 Window area (WA) 142.5 142.5 585 FA Floor area (FA) 800 800 1600 WFR.(WANA) 0.178125 0.178125 (VLT) (WFR) 0.1531875 0.1531875 Area effected by glare North facade NoviDec mornings East facade all morning Refer to WSIEMI notes South facade almost entire day West facade all afternoon Glare control measure (refer to wall section details) north facade - interior adjustable blinds specified for all windows facing north south facade - exterior light shelves and interior adjustable blinds at full length of facade east facade - interior adjustable blinds specified for all windows facing east west facade - exterior light shelves and interior adjustable blinds at full length of facade Top-Lighting Daylight Zone This method is applicable for many standard building designs and may be particularly useful for single-floor retail developments. The project team needs the following basic information to determine compliance: ■ Area of skylights (SA) VLT (Tvis) of skylights • Roof area (RA) • Distance between skylights • Measured haze value of skylight diffuser Perform the following calculation fora typical building condition: • Determine the skylight roof coverage, which is the ratio of area of skylights to area of roof—that is, (SA/RA) (1OO). . Confirm that the skylight diffuser is greater than 90%. • Determine the daylight zone(s) in square feet below the skylight, based on the prescriptive criteria. ■ Evaluate the total area (in square feet) of the daylight zone(s). ■ If this total area is 75% or more of the area of the regularly occupied spaces in the building, the requirement has been met. 402 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281941 Figure 3. Top-Lighting Daylight Zone CI '35< Permanent ParHien Daylit Area Combined Side-Lighting and Top-Lighting Daylight Zone For buildings that have both side-lighting and top-lighting conditions, a combination of the above a methodologies can be utilized to demonstrate compliance. OPTION 3 Only the square footage associated with the portions of rooms or spaces meeting the minimum illumination requirements may be counted in the calculations. Projects pursuing this option must provide daylight redirection and/or glare control devices to avoid high-contrast situations that could impede visual tasks. Exceptions for areas where tasks would be hindered by daylight will be considered on their merits. • Create a spreadsheet that identifies all regularly occupied rooms or areas. Determine the floor area of each space using construction documents. • Take field measurements of footcandle levels at 30 inches above the floor within all regularly occupied areas, or measured at the appropriate desk or work height level for the intended use of the space. • Record indoor light measurements of all regularly occupied spaces on a to-foot grid on project floor plans. Include room identification labels and/or notes regarding intended uses on the plans to match the spaces listed on the spreadsheet. • Enter the illumination level (in footcandles), determined through the field measurements for each space.Areas with a minimum z5-footcandle illumination contribute toward credit compliance. See Table 3. • Sum the square footage of all daylit spaces and divide by the total square footage of all regularly occupied spaces. If this percentage is 75% or more, the project qualifies for 1 point under this credit. Glare control is also required for each window. Create another spreadsheet entry that identifies the type of glare control applied to each window type. The strategies in Option I provide bestpractice glare control measures for different window types. OPTION 4 The above calculation methods may be combined to document the minimum daylight illumination in at least 75% of all regularly occupied spaces. For all projects using this option, only the square footage of the compliant portions of rooms or spaces applies toward the 75% Credit 8.1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 403 EFTA00281942 I EQ CI Credit 8.1 minimum. The methods used in each space must be clearly recorded on a minimum to-foot grid on all building plans. All projects using this option must provide glare control devices to avoid high-contrast situations that could impede visual tasks. Exceptions for areas where tasks would be hindered by the use of daylight will be considered on their merits. Dedicated theater spaces (not multipurpose rooms) must meet an illuminance of tofootcandles, as recommended in the IESNA Lighting Handbook Reference and Application. Multipurpose rooms must be included in the credit calculations. Because some activities in these spaces may be hindered by daylight, effective shades and lighting controls should be included in the design. Table 3. Sample Day ighting Measurement SF within Grid Foot candle Compliant an Room 101 point 1 100 60 100 point 2 100 60 100 point 3 75 34 75 point 4 37 24 0 Room 102 point 1 100 55 100 point 2 57 21 0 point 3 100 25 100 Total 569 475 83% 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Develop documentation—such as floor plans, sections, and elevations—showing the glare control methods used on the project. ■ Maintain documentation—such as floor plans, sections, and elevations—showing the location of regularly occupied spaces with a qualifying amount of daylight. ■ Develop a spreadsheet documenting the daylight factors outlined in the Calculations section to account for changes in design. ■ If using daylight simulation, update the computer model as the design progresses. 404 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281943 8. Examples Figure 4. Sample Daylight Simulation Model Output 9. Exemplary Performance The availabilityofz pointsin IEQCredit8.1, Daylight andViews—Daylight,precludes theopportunity to earn a third point using the same criteria. 10. Regional Variations The building site orientation and its specific regional location will directly influence the available daylight throughout the day and during the year. For instance, in northern latitudes, winter days are short, and building occupants might spend the entire period of daylight inside. Seasonal variances in the sun's daily path should be evaluated during the project design development to minimize the potential for glare inside the building while maximizing the use of functional daylighting. The consistent availability of adequate daylight at a particular project site will also affect the potential for reduction in lighting power demand through the use of daylighting strategies, such as incorporation ofphotoresponsive controls forperimeterlightingzones.VVhenbuildingglazing systems,balance the visible light transmittance with overall building energy performance goals to minimize undesirable heat loss and/or gain through the glazing. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Glazing and shading systems should be regularly cleaned and maintained. Likewise, windows and skylights require periodic sealant and flashing inspections to ensure water tightness. 12. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (ltags,oadmojesttools) : .usb for additional resources and technical information. Websites The Art of Daylighting This Environmental Design + Construction article provides a solid introduction to daylighting. New Buildings Institute's Productivity and Building Science Program http://wwwnewbuildings.orgidovmloadslphotometrics8Ds.3. photometry.pdf This report provides case studies and information on the benefits of daylighting. IE0 CI Credit 8.1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 405 EFTA00281944 I EQ CI Credit 8.1 Radiance Software http://radsite.lbl.goviradiance/ This site offers free daylighting simulation software from the Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory. Tips for Daylighting with Windows http:fibtech.lbl.go_yipubidesignguidei This site offers a comprehensive daylightingguide from Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory. Whole Building Design Guide, Daylighting Whole Building Design Guide, Electric Lighting Controls http://www.wbc1g.orgfresourcesjelectriclighting.php?r=schooLlibrary The Daylighting and Electric Lighting Controls sections provide a wealth of resources including definitions, fundamentals, materials, and tools. Print Media Architectural Lighting, 2nd edition, by M. David Egan and Victor Olgyay, (McGraw-Hill, 2002). DaylightingDesign,by Benjamin Evans, Time-SaverStandards for Architectural Design Data (McGrawHill, Inc.,1997). Daylighting for Sustainable Design, by Mary Guzowski (McGraw-Hill, Inc.,1999). Daylighting Pezfonnance and Design, by Gregg D. Ander (John Wiley & Sons0.997). Sustainable Building Technical Manual (Public Technology Institute,1996): http://www.pti.org. Biophzlic Design: The Theory, Science and Practice of Bringing Buildings to Life, by Kellert, Heenvagen, and Mador (John Wiley & Sons, 2008). 13. Definitions Daylighting is the controlled admission of natural light into a space through glazing to reduce or eliminate electric lighting. Daylighting creates a stimulating and productive environment for building occupants. Daylighting zone is the total floor area that meets the performance requirements for daylighting. Glare is any excessively bright source of light within the visual field that creates discomfort or loss invisibility. Regularlyoccupied spaces in commercial buildings are areaswhere people sitor stand as theywork. In residential applications these spaces include all living and family rooms and exclude bathrooms, closets, or other storage or utility areas. Window-to-floor ratio (WFR) is the total area of the window (measured vertically from 30 inches above the finished floor to the top of the glass, multiplied by the width of the glass) divided by the floor area. 406 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281945 DAYLIGHT AND VIEWS-VIEWS FOR SEATED SPACES a Credit IEQ Credit 8.2 Points 1 point Intent To provide the building occupants a connection to the outdoors through the introduction of daylight and views into the regularly occupied areas of the tenant space. Requirements Achieve a direct line of sight to the outdoor environment via vision glazing between 3o inches and 90 inches above the finish floor for building occupants in 90% of all regularly occupied areas. Determine the area with a direct line of sight by totaling the regularly occupied square footage that meets the following criteria • In plan view, the area is within sight lines drawn from perimeter vision glazing. • In section view, a direct sight line can be drawn from a point 4z inches above the floor (typical seated eye height) to perimeter vision glazing. The line of sight may be drawn through interior glazing. For private offices, the entire square footage of the office may be counted if 75% or more of the area has a direct line of sight to perimeter vision glazing. If less than 7595 of the area has a direct line of sight, only the area with the direct line of sight count toward meetingthe credit requirement. For multi-occupant spaces, the actual square footage with a direct line of sight to perimeter vision glazing is counted. IEQ CREDIT 8.2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 407 EFTA00281946 I ER CI Credit 8.2 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Environmental Issues Providing access to views of the outdoors through the incorporation of vision glazing enables building occupants to maintain a visual connection to the surrounding environment. The additional glazed area may reduce the need for interior electric lighting, resulting in decreased energy use. This conserves natural resources and reduces air pollution impacts due to energy production and consumption. When designing for maximum views and daylighting, designers must evaluate and balance a number of environmental factors, including heat gain and loss, glare control, visual quality, and variations in daylight availability. Appropriate shading devices to control glare must be utilized to provide a high level ofvisual comfort. Economic Issues Refer to the Economic Issues section in IEQ Credits 8.2. 2. Related Credits Increasing the area of vision glazing is likely to provide greater daylight access to the building interior. The following credit has related requirements: ■ IEQ Credit 8.1: Daylight and Views—Daylight 75% of Spaces Vision glazing has a direct correlation to lighting design energy conservation strategies. The interior lighting systems design can be used to maximize the energy savings by providing daylighting controls, and HVAC perimeter zones may be required to address temperature differences adjacent to glazing. Refer to these a credits: • EA Credit 1.2: Optimize Energy Performance—Lighting Controls • EA Credit 2.3: Optimize Energy Performance—HVAC 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There are no standards referenced for this credit. 4. Implementation successful strategy is to locate open plan areas along the exterior walls while placing private offices and areas not regularly occupied in the core of the building. This configuration maintains the optimum number of available views. The line of sight used for the determination of horizontal views is assumed to be 42 inches (the average height of one's eyes when sitting). Maintaining the views for spaces near the core is an important design objective. See Figure t. Figure 1. Horizontal View at 42 Inches 408 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281947 Regularly occupied spaces include office spaces, conference rooms, and cafeterias. Areas that need not be considered include support areas for copying, storage, mechanical equipment, laundry, and restrooms. 5. Timeline and Team During space planning, regularly occupied spaces and rooms should be identified as high-priority candidates foraccess toviews. Duringthedesign phase,the entiredesignteam—the owner,architect, and interior designer—should take an integrated approach to allocating regularly occupied spaces along the interior building perimeter. During the preparation of construction documents, the LEED calculations should be developed in greater detail to inform the design decisions and verify the compliance of the building design. Once the design is complete, finalize the LEED calculations and supporting documentation. 6. Calculations Two calculations are required to determine compliance. One, using the direct line of sight to perimeter glazing, determines whether 90% of the regularly occupied area has the potential for views. It is based on vision glazingbetween 30 inches and 90 inches above the floor and the location of full-height interior partitions. Movable furniture and partitions are included in the scope of this credit calculation. See Figure 2. The other uses the horizontal view at a typical seated eye height to determine access to views. Figure 2. Direct Line of Sight o Perimeter Vision Glazing PERIMETER MN OFFICE INTERIOR OFFICE 1 Determining Direct Line of Sight to Perimeter Vision Glazing • Create a spreadsheet and identify all regularly occupied areas. Determine the floor area (square footage) of each applicable space using construction documents. • Using a floor plan, determine the fraction of the regularly occupied area that has direct line of sight to the outdoors for each window. The line of sight can pass through 2 interior glazing surfaces but not through doorways with solid doors. See Figure 2. IE Q CI Credit 8.2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 409 EFTA00281948 I EQ CI Credit 8.2 • For private offices, if the percentage of floor area with direct line of sight is 75% or more (i.e., only the corners are noncompliant), enter the entire square footage of that room in the spreadsheet (Table 1) as meeting the credit requirement. If less than 75% of the room has a direct line of sight, estimate the compliant floor area and enter that value. • For multioccupant spaces, such as conference rooms and classrooms, estimate the actual square footage with a direct line of sight to perimeter vision glazing. Determining Horizontal View at Seated Eye Height • Using representative building sections, draw a line at 42 inches (typical seated eye height) across the section to establish eye height and any obstruction to the perimeter glazing. Draw t or more representative sight lines from a point at eye height in the regularly occupied space to the perimeter vision glazing (Figure 0. • For each space with a horizontal view at seated eyeheight, enter yes in the spreadsheet (Table O. If a room has direct line of sight on the floor plan but does not have an unobstructed view at eye height, the floor area does not count toward the requirement; enter no. • Total the areas that meet all the abovecriteria anddividethe sum bythe total regularlyoccupied area to determine whether the building meets the 90% access to views requirement. Table 1. Views Compliance Room Regularly Occupied Floc( Area (so Plan Area of Direct Line of Sight to Perimeter Vision Glazing (s0 Calculated Area of Direct Line of Sight to Perimeter Vision Glaring (s0 Holizoinatal View at 42 Inches (Yes/No) Compliant Area (s0 101 Office 820 790 820 Yes 820 102 Office 330 280 330 Yes 330 103 Open office 4.935 4,641 4,641 Yes 4,641 104 Office 250 201 250 No 0 105 Office 25D 175 175 Yes 175 Total 6,585 5,966 Percent access to views (5,96616 585) 90 5% credit earned 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. • Maintain documentation—such as floor plans, sections, and elevations—showing the location of regularly occupied spaces with views. • Maintain a spreadsheet documenting the view area as outlined in the Calculations section to account for any changes in design. 8. Examples The following example demonstrates the percentage of spaces with access to views that could be realized for an 80,000 square foot office building. The floor plan was designed to locate private offices toward the inside the building. 96% of views are achieved, which meets the threshold for this credit. 410 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281949 Figure 3. Sample Floor Plan Excerpt Figure 4. Direc Line of Sight to Exterior through Interior Window over Low Partition C! Credit S.2 LUI I ION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CUNSINULIIUN 411 EFTA00281950 IEQ CI Credit 8.2 Table 2. Sample Calculations Excerpt Room Descripton Floor area (sf) Horizontal view at 42" Views (sf) 216 Open office 4.405 Y 4.405 220 Office 136 r 136 222 Office 115 r 115 223 Conference 198 Y 197 224 Office 115 Y 115 225 Open office 224 Y 0 226 Office 120 Y 120 227 Conference 169 Y 161 232 Office 132 Y 132 Totals 5.634 5.381 Percentages of Area with Views: (5.38115,634) 96% 9. Exemplary Performance Exemplary performance may be demonstrated for this credit by meeting 2 of the 4 following measures: I. 90% or more of regularly occupied spaces have multiple lines of sight to vision glazing in different directions at least go degrees apart. 2.90% or more of regularly occupied spaces have views that include views of at least 2 of the following:!) vegetation, a) human activity or 3) objects at least 70 feet from the exterior of the glazing. 3.90% or more of regularly occupied spaces have access to unobstructed views located within the distance of 3 times the head height of the vision glazing. 4.90% or more of regularly occupied spaces have access to views with a view factor of 3 or greater, per the Heschong Mahone Group study, Windows and Offices; A Study of Office Worker Polonnance and the Indoor Environment,page 47,for their primaryview (seated at workstation, facing computer screen). See: httpth-m-g.comfdownloads/Daylightingiday_registration_ form.htm to download the report at no charge. 10. Regional Variations Available duration and potency of solar radiation can directly impact the heat gain through glazing systems. Consideration should be given when selecting glazing systems to minimize undesirable heat loss and gain through the glazing. The visual appeal of the exterior environment greatly impacts the subjective quality of the views. 11. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Glazing and shading systems should be regularly cleaned and maintained. Windows and skylights require periodic sealant and flashing inspections to ensure water tightness. Additionally, any landscaping that may provide for high-quality views should be well maintained. 12. Resources See USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http://www.usgbc.org/projecttools) for additional resources and technical information. 412 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281951 Websites Whole Building Design Guide, Daylighting http://www.wbdg.orgfresourcesj_d__aylighting.php Whole Building Design Guide, Electric Lighting Controls http://ww.wbdg.orgiresourcesielectriclighting.php?r=schooLlibrary The Daylighting and Electric Lighting Controls sections provide a wealth of resources including definitions, fundamentals, materials, and tools. Print Media Sustainable Building Technical Manual (Public Technology Institute, 1996): http://www.pti.org. Biophilic Design: The Theory, Science and Practice of Bringing Buildings to Life, by Kellert, Heerwagen, and Mador (John Wiley& Sons, 2008). 13. Definitions Daylighting is the controlled admission of natural light into a space through glazing to reduce or eliminate electric lighting. Direct Line of Sight to Perimeter Vision Glazing is the approach used to determine the calculated area of regularly occupied areas with direct line of sight to perimeter vision glazing. The area determination includes full height partitions and other fixed construction prior to installation of furniture. Glare is any excessivelybright source of light within the visual field that creates discomfort or loss in visibility. Regularly occupied spaces in commercial buildings are areas where people sit or stand as they work; in residential applications these spaces are living and family rooms. Visible light transmittance (Tvis) is the ratio of total transmitted light to total incident light (i.e., the amount of visible spectrum, 380-78o nanomater light passing through a glazing surface divided by the amount of light striking the glazing surface). The higher the Tvis value, the more incident light is passing through the glazing. Vision glazing is that portion ofexterior windows above 30 inches and below 9c inches that permits a view to the outside. Endnotes U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Health Buildings, Healthy People: A Vision for the 21st Century.. 2001. http://www.epa.govfiaqfhbhp/hbhptoc.html (accessed Nlay 2008). U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Unfinished Business: A Comparative Assessment of Environmental Problems. Washington, DC: U.S. EPA,1987. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Reducing Risk: Setting Priorities and Strategies for Environmental Protection. Washington, DC: U.S. EPA, 1990. ' U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Indoor Air in Large Buildings. 2002. http://www.epa.govf iacUlargebldgsfrbeamitext/budgets accounts.html (accessed May2008). 5 Fisk, WI "Health and Productivity Gains from Better Indoor Environments and Their Relationship with Building Energy Efficiency." Annual Rev. Energy Environ. 25 (2000):537-66. Rocky Mountain Institute. "Greening the Building and the Bottom Line." http://www.rmlorg/ images/PDFs/BuildingsLand/D94-27_GBBL.pdf (accessed November 2008). This assumes that $100,000 in IAQ improvements are invested. Damiano, Leonard, and David Dougan. The Big Carrots: Productivity and Health. Ebtron, Inc., 2003. http://vnvw. automatedbuildings.cominews/aproa/articlesiebtronfebtron.hun. (accessed May2008). IEQ CI Credit 8.2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 413 EFTA00281952 IEQ 9 '0 U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, National Institutes of Health, National Cancer Institute. "Smoking and Tobacco Control Monographic)." Health Effects of Exposure to Environmental Tobacco Smoke. N1H, 1999. http://cancercontrol.cancer.gov/tcrb/monographs/10/ m io_complete.pdf (accessed May 2008). Ibid. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Public Health Service, Office of the Surgeon General. Women and Smoking: A Report of the Surgeon General. 2001. http:J/www.cdc.gov/ tobacco/sgrisgr_fonvomen/index.htm. (accessed May 2008). Prill, Rich. Why Measure Carbon Dioxide in Buildings?. Washington State University Extension Energy Program. 2000. http://WWW.ellergy.WSU.CdUMOCUMCMOUlidillgilaq/CO2111blacillIgS.pdi (accessed November 2008). Goren, A., S. Hellman, A. Gabbay, and S. Brenner. "Respiratory problems associated with exposure to airborne particles in the community." Archives of Environmental Health 54 (1999). Chen, Allen, and Edward L. Vine. A Scoping Study on the Costs of Indoor Air Quality Illnesses: An Insurance Loss Reduction Perspective. 1998. http://eetd.lbl.gov/insurance-research/PUBS/LBNL419J9,pdf. (accessed May 2008). Department of Health and Human Services, National Institutes of Health, National Cancer Institute. Health Effects of Exposure to Environmental Tobacco Smoke—Smoking and Tobacco Control Monograph 10. 1999. http://cancercontrol.cancengovitcrbimonographshoimio_complete.pdf (accessed May 2008). Americans for Non-Smokers' Rights. "Americans for Non-Smokers' Rights: Smoke-free Lists, Maps, and Data." http://www.no-smoke.org.goingsmokefreg.php?id=519. (accessed September 2008). Canadian Centre for Occupational Health and Safety. "Health Effects of Carbon Dioxide Gas." 1997 http://v,,ww.ccohs.caloshanswersichemicals/chem_profiles/carbon dioxide/health cd.html (accessed May 2008). U.S. Environmental Protection Agency "Why Study Human Health Indoors?" Healthy Buildings, Healthy People: A Vision for the 21st Century. 2001. http://www.epa.gogiaq/hbhp/section 1.pdf (accessed May 2008). Rocky Mountain Institute. "Greening the Building and the Bottom Line." http://www.rmi.org/ images/PDFs/BuildingsLand/D94-27_GBBL.pdf (accessed November 2008). Rocky Mountain Institute. Green Development: Integrating Ecology and Real Estate. Wiley, 1998.. Rocky Mountain Institute. "Greening the Building and the Bottom Line." http://wwvcrmi.org/ images/PDFs/BuildingsLand/D94-27_GBBL.pdf (accessed November 2008). Abraham, Loren E. Sustainable Building Technical Manual: Green Building Design, Construction, and Operations. Public Technology Inc. and U.S. Green Building Counci1,1996. 414 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281953 DKRUEZDU 11H OMEN Overview Sustainabledesign strategies andmeasures are constantlyevolving and improving. New technologies are continuallyintroduced to the marketplace, and up-to-date scientific research influences building design strategies. The purpose of this LEED category is to recognize projects for innovative features and sustainable building strategies and practices. Occasionally, a strategy results in performance that greatly exceeds what is required in an existing LEED credit. Other strategies may not be addressed by any LEED prerequisite or credit but warrant consideration for their sustainability benefits. In addition, LEED is most effectively implemented as part of an integrated design process, and this category addresses the role of a LEED Accredited Professional in facilitating that process. Implementing New Technologies and Methods As the building design and construction industry introduces new strategies for sustainable development, opportunities leading to additional environmental benefits will continue to emerge. Opportunities that are not currently addressed by LEED for Commercial Interiors may include environmental solutions specific to a particular location, condition, or region. With all sustainable strategies and measures, it is important to consider related environmental impacts. Project teams must be prepared to demonstrate the environmental benefit of innovative strategies and are encouraged to pursue opportunities that provide benefits of particular significance. Project teams can earn exemplary performance points by implementing strategiesthat result in performance that greatly exceeds the level or scope required by an existing LEED prerequisite or credit. Exemplary performance opportunities are noted throughout this reference guide. CREDIT TITLE ID Credit 1 ID Credit 2 Innovation in Design LEED* Accredited Professional ID OVERVIEW 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 415 EFTA00281954 416 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281955 INNOVATION IN DESIGN Credit ID Credit 1 Points 1-5 points Intent To provide design teams and projects the opportunity to achieve exceptional performance above the requirements set by the LEED Green Building Rating System and/or innovative performance in Green Building categories not specifically addressed by the LEED Green Building Rating System. Requirements Credit can be achieved through any combination of the Innovation in Design and Exemplary Performance paths as described below: PATH 1. Innovation in Design (1-5 points) Achieve significant, measurable environmental performance using a strategy not addressed in the LEED 2009 for Commercial Interiors Rating System. One point is awarded for each innovation achieved. No more than s points under IDci may be earned through PATH s—Innovation in Design. Identify the following in writing: • The intent of the proposed innovation credit ■ The proposed requirements for compliance • The proposed submittals to demonstrate compliance • The design approach (strategies) used to meet the requirements. PATH 2. Exemplary Performance (1-3 points) Achieve exemplary performance in an existing LEED 2,009 for Commercial Interiors prerequisite orcredit that allows exemplary performance as specified in the LEED Reference Guide for Green Building Interior Design, 2,009 Edition. An exemplary performance point may be earned for achieving double the credit requirements and/or achieving the next incremental percentage threshold of an existing credit in LEED. One point is awarded for each exemplary performance achieved. No more than 3 points under IDci maybe earned through PATH 2— Exemplary Performance. ID CREDIT 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 417 EFTA00281956 ID CI Credit 1 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Sustainable design comes from innovative strategies and thinking. Institutional measures to reward such thinking—like the achievement of this credit—benefit our environment. Recognition of the exceptional will spur further innovation. 2. Related Credits Every LEED for Commercial Interiors (CI) credit holds ideas for Innovation in Design points and strategies. Refer to the Exemplary Performance section of each credit in this reference guide. 3. Summary of Referenced Standards There is no standard referenced for this credit. Please refer to the Summaryof Referenced Standards section in each credit for relevant standards. 4. Implementation Credits in this section may be earned by documenting increased benefits to the environment in 1 of a ways: Exemplary Performance Strategy Exemplary performance strategies result in performance that greatly exceeds the level or scope required by existing LEED for Commercial Interiors prerequisites or credits. As a rule of thumb, ID credits for exemplary performance are awarded for doubling the credit requirements and/or achieving the next incremental percentage threshold. For instance, to achieve an ID credit for exemplary performance in MR Credit 4, Recycled Content, the total recycled value must be 3()%or greater. Exemplary performance is not available for all credits in LEED CI. Credits that allow exemplary performance through a predetermined approach are noted throughout this reference guide and the LEED-Online credit templates. A maximum of 3 ID points can be earned for exemplary performance. Innovative Strategies Innovative strategies are those that are not addressed by any existing LEED credits. Only those strategies that demonstrate a comprehensive approach and have significant, measurable environmental benefits are applicable. There are 3 basic criteria for achieving an innovation credit fora category not specifically addressed by LEED: 1. The project must demonstrate quantitative performance improvements for environmental benefit (establishing a baseline of standard performance for comparison with the final design). a. The process or specification must be comprehensive. For example, a team that is considering applying for an innovation creditfor agreenhousekeepingprogramwould needto demonstrate that the program applies to the entire project being certified under LEED. Measures that address a limited portion of a project or are not comprehensive in other ways are not eligible. 3. The concept the project team develops for the innovation credit must be applicable to other projects and must be significantly better than standard sustainable design practices. ID credits awarded for 1 project at a specific point in time do not constitute automatic approval for similar strategies in a future project. ID credits are not awarded for the use of a particular product or design strategy if the technology aids in the achievement of an existing LEED credit. 418 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281957 Approved II) credits may be pursued byany LEED project, but the project team must sufficiently document the achievement using the LEED credit equivalence process. 5. Timeline and Team Innovation in Design ideally begins at a project's conception, but it can become part of the project at any step of the process and come from any member of the project team. Open-mindedness, creativity, and rigor in follow-through are the critical ingredients. Options for innovation may come from the spheres of the technological—for example, an inventive wall section for climate control— or the general, such as educational outreach measures. Thus, team members with a variety of skills and interests will be able to contribute to the achievement of this credit. 6. Calculations For exemplary performance, please refer to the Calculations section in each credit. 7. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Document the process by which the project team has worked to develop andlor implement environmental benefits beyond the requirements set by the LEED Green Building Rating System and/or innovative performance in other areas. ■ Track development and implementation of the specific exceptional and innovative strategies used. 8. Examples The level of effort involved in achieving an ID credit should be extraordinary. For example, installing a single green product or addressing a single aspect of a sustainability issue is not a sufficient level of effort. An environmental educational program consisting of simple signage in a building would not by itself be considered a significant benefit. Conversely, a visitor's center interactive display, coupled with an educational website and video highlighting the project's environmental strategies, would be eligible for an ID credit Suggested Topics for Innovation Credits The following list illustrates sample actions and concepts that may be viable candidates for an ID credit, given appropriate implementation and documentation. It is the responsibility of the project team to determine the feasibility of possible ID-related programs or initiatives, develop and execute the program in a manner that yields a meaningful environmental benefit, and provide documentation and calculations that substantiate the validity of the project team's approach and implementation. Project teams are encouraged to explore the full range of innovative opportunities within their buildings. This list provides examples only and does not constitute formal preapproval of any ID strategy. Project teams desiring formal preapproval of an ID strategy must submit a Credit Interpretation Request and explain the proposal in detail. ■ Provide an educational program on the environmental and human health benefits of green building practices and how building occupants or the public can help improve green performance. Evaluate results and refine the program to increase its impact and audience as appropriate. The program must be actively instructional and include at least a instructional initiatives that have ongoing components. Types of initiatives might include the following: ID CI Credit 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 419 EFTA00281958 ID CI Credit 1 t. A comprehensive signage program or displays inside the building to educate occupants and visitors on the benefits of green buildings. Examples include windows to view energy-saving mechanical equipment, signs that call attention to water-conserving landscape features, and digital screens showing real-time energy consumption or building performance data. 2. A case study highlighting the successes of the LEED project that could be used to inform the operations of other buildings. 3. Guided tours focusing on sustainability, using the project as an example. 4. An educational outreach program that engages occupants or the public through periodic events covering green building topics. S. A website or electronic newsletter that informs building occupants and visitors about the building's features and green strategies they can practice at home. ■ Evaluate a substantial quantity of products or materials being used (or being considered for use in the building) on the basis of an ISO 14040 life-cycle assessment. ■ Divert significant volumes of waste generated from sources other than the project building site and associated grounds via expanded waste management and diversion programs. For example, provide a collection and recycling program that allows building occupants or members of the community to bring in end-of-life home electronic equipment for recycling. 9. Regional Variations ID credits may have regional content. For example, in temperate climates, projects with operable windows may elect to install ceiling fans and eliminate central air-conditioning altogether. The exclusive use of natural ventilation in this instance might be worthy of an ID point. Extraordinary designs that use the vernacular architectural strategies of the region may be among the most environmentally sound. Project teams should look to the characteristic buildings of their region as a source for innovation. 420 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281959 LEED® ACCREDITED PROFESSIONAL Credit ID Credit 2 Points 1 point Intent To supportand encourage the design integration required byLEEDto streamline the application and certification process. Requirements At least t principal participant of the project team shall be a LEED Accredited Professional (AP). ID CREDIT 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 421 EFTA00281960 ID CI Credit 2 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider LEED APs have the expertise required to design a building to LEED standards and to coordinate the documentation process that is necessary for LE ED certification. The LEED AP understands the importance ofintegrateddesign and the need to consider interactions between theprerequisites and credits and their respective criteria.Architects,engineers,consultants,ovmers,andotherswho have a strong interest in sustainable building design are all appropriate candidates for accreditation. The LEED AP should champion the project's LEED application and be an integral member of the project team. The LEED AP can also educate other team members about LEED and green buildings. 2. Summary of Referenced Standards LEED Accredited Professional Green Building Certification Institute www.gbci.org Individuals who successfully complete the LEED professional accreditation exam are LEED APs. Accreditation certifies that the individual has the knowledge and skills necessary to participate in the LEED application and certification process, holds a firm understanding of green building practices and principles, and is familiar with LEED requirements, resources, and processes. The Green Building Certification Institute (GBCI), established with the support of the U.S. Green Building Council (USGBC), handles exam development and delivery to ensure objective and balanced management of the credentialing program. 3. Implementation A LEED AP is a valuable resource in the LEED for Commercial Interiors process. Although not required, the presence of a LEED AP aids the project team in understanding the elements of the rating system, the importance of considering interactions among the prerequisites and credits, and the LEED application process. Including a LEED AP on the project team meets the credit requirements and can be accomplished in either of 2. ways: ■ Engaging an individual within the organization who is already a LEED AP to participate in the certification application process. ■ Hiring a LEED AP to support the project. Consider selecting a LEED AP experienced with LEED CI and industry best green practices in interior design and construction. 4. Documentation Guidance As a first step in preparing to complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements, work through the following measures. Refer to LEED-Online for the complete descriptions of all required documentation. ■ Obtain confirmation from team members who are LEED APs or are planning to become LEED APs. 5. Resources Please see USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http:fiwww.usgbc.orgibrojecttools) for additional resources and other technical information. Websites Green Building Certification Institute www.gbci.org GBCI administers the LEED Professional Accreditation program to ensure objective management 422 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDIT EFTA00281961 of the credential. GBCI manages exam development, registration, and delivery. It was established as a separately incorporated entity with the support of the USGBC. See the GBCI website for more information on workshops, testing locations, fees, and topics covered on the accreditation exam. 6. Definitions LEED Accredited Professionals (Alos) are individuals who have successfully completed the LEED professional accreditation exam. ID CI Credit 2 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 423 EFTA00281962 424 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281963 HELM REMY Overview Because some environmental issues are unique to a locale, USGBC regional councils have identified distinct environmental zones within their areas and allocated six credits to encourage design teams to focus on regional priorities. A project that earns a Regional Priority credit automatically earns one point in addition to any points awarded for that credit. Up to four extra points can be earned in this way. Go to wt.vw.usgbc.orgto learn more about the Regional Priority credits in your area. CREDIT TITLE RP Credit 1 Regional Priority RP OVERVIEW 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 425 EFTA00281964 426 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281965 REGIONAL PRIORITY CI Credit Points RP Credit 1 1.4 points Intent To provide an incentive for the achievement of credits that address geographically specific environmental priorities. Requirements Earn 1-4 of the 6 Regional Priority credits identified by the USGBC regional councils and chapters as having environmental importance for a project's region. A database of Regional Priority Credits and their geographic applicability is available on the USGBC website, http:// www.usgbc.org/. One point is awarded for each Regional PriorityCredit achieved; no more than 4credits identified as Regional Priority credits may be earned. Projects outside of the U.S. are not eligible. RP CREDIT 1 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 427 EFTA00281966 RP CI Credit I 1. Benefits and Issues to Consider Refer to the Benefits and Issues section under a particular Regional Priority credit. 2. Related Credits For a list of applicable credits, visit the Regional Priority database at www.usgbc.org. 3. Summary of Referenced Standards Refer to the standards for a particular Regional Priority credit. 4. Implementation Refer to the Implementation section under a particular Regional Priority credit. 5. Timeline and Team Identify Regional Priority credits early in the project timeline. 6. Calculations Refer to the Calculations section under a particular Regional Priority credit. 7. Documentation Guidance The Documentation Guidance section helps project teams prepare for formal certification application and complete the LEED-Online documentation requirements. Refer to the Documentation Guidance section under each Regional Priority credit and refer to LEED-Online for complete descriptions of all required documentation. 8. Examples Refer to the Examples section under a particular Regional Priority credit 9. Regional Variations Refer to the Regional Variations section under a particular Regional Priority credit. 10. Operations and Maintenance Considerations Refer to the Operations and Maintenance section under a particular Regional Priority credit 11. Resources See USGBC's LEED Registered Project Tools (http://vmsgbc.org(psojecttools) for additional resources and technical information. 12. Definitions Refer to the Definitions section under a particular Regional Priority credit. 428 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281967 GLOSSARY Adapted (or introduced) plants reliably grow well in a given habitat with minimal winter protection, pest control, fertilization, or irrigation once their root systems are established. Adapted plants are considered low maintenance and not invasive. Adaptive reuse is the renovation of a space fora purpose different from the original. An adhesive is any substance used to bond 1 surface to another by attachment. Adhesives include bonding primers, adhesive primers, and adhesive primers for plastics. (SCAQMD Rule t t68) Aerosol adhesive is an aerosol product in which the spray mechanism is permanently housed in a nonrefillable can. Designed for hand-held application, these products do not need ancillaryhoses or spray equipment. Aerosol adhesives include special-purpose spray adhesives, mist spray adhesives, and web spray adhesives. (SCAQMD Rule 1168) Agrifiber products are made from agricultural fiber. Examples include particleboard, mediumdensity fiberboard (MD?), plywood, oriented-strand board (OSB),wheatboard, and strawboard. Air-conditioning is the process of treating air to meet the requirements of a conditioned space by controlling its temperature, humidity, cleanliness, and distribution. (ASH RAE 62.1-2007) Air-handlingunits (AHUs) aremechanicalindirectheating,ventilating,orair-conditioningsystems in which the air is treated or handled by equipment located outside the rooms served, usually at a central location, and conveyed to and from the rooms by a fan and a system of distributing ducts. (NEEB,1997 edition) Albedo is synonymous with solar reflectance. Alternative daily cover is material (other than earthen material) that is placed on the surface of the active face of a municipal solid waste landfill at the end of each operating day to control vectors, fires, odors, blowing litter, and scavenging. Alternative-fuel vehicles use low-polluting, nongasoline fuels such as electricity, hydrogen, propane, compressed natural gas, liquid natural gas, methanol, and ethanol. In LEED, efficient gaselectric hybrid vehicles are included in this group. Anticorrosive paints are coatings formulated and recommended foruse in preventing thecorrosion of ferrous metal substrates. Aquatic systems are ecologically designed treatment systems in which a diverse community of biological organisms (e.g., bacteria, plants, fish) treat wastewater. An aquifer is an underground water-bearing rock formation or group of formations that supply groundwater, wells, or springs. An area-weighted SRI is a weighted average calculation that may be performed for buildings with multiple roof surfaces to demonstrate that the total roof area has an average solar reflectance index equal to or greater than that of a theoretical roof 75% of whose surfaces have an SRI of 78 and 25% have an SRI of 30. Architectural porous sealant primer is a substance used as a sealant on porous materials. An assemblycan be eithera product formulated from multiple materials (e.g.,concrete) or a product made up of subcomponents (e.g., a workstation). 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 429 EFTA00281968 GLOSSARY Assembly recycled content is the percentage of material in a product that is either postconsumer or preconsumer recycled content. It is determined by dividing the weight of the recycled content by the overall weight of the assembly. The attendance boundary is used by school districts to determine which students attend what school based on where they live. Automatic fixture sensors are motion detectors that automatically turn on and turn off lavatories, sinks, water closets, and urinals. Sensors can be hard wired or battery operated. Baseline building performance is the annual energy cost fora building design intended for use as a baseline for rating above standard design, as defined in ANSIJASHRAWIESNA Standard 90.1-2007, Informative Appendix G. Baseline irrigation water use is the amount of water used by conventional irrigation in the region. Basis of design includes design information necessary to accomplish the owner's project requirements, including system descriptions, indoor environmental quality criteria, design assumptions, and references to applicable codes, standards, regulations, and guidelines. Bicycle racks, in LEED, include outdoor bicycle racks, bicycle lockers, and indoor bicycle storage rooms. Biochemical oxygen demand is a measure of how fast biological organisms use up oxygen in a body of water. It is used in water quality management and assessment, ecology, and environmental science. Biodiversity is the variety of life in all forms, levels, and combinations, including ecosystem diversity, species diversity, and genetic diversity. Biofuel-based energy systems are electrical power systems that run on renewable fuels derived from organic materials, such as wood by-products and agricultural waste. In LEED, biofuels include untreated wood waste (e.g., mill residues), agricultural crops or waste, animal waste and other organic waste, and landfill gas. Biofuel-based systems are power systems that run on renewable fuels derived from organic materials, such as wood by-products and agricultural waste. Examples of biofuels include untreated wood waste, agricultural crops and residues, animal waste, other organic waste, and landfill gas. Biological control is the use of chemical or physical water treatments to inhibit bacterial growth in cooling towers. Biomass is plant material from trees, grasses, or crops that can be converted to heat energy to produce electricity. Blackwaterdefinitionsvary,butwastewaterfromtoilets and urinals is alwaysconsideredblackwater. Wastewater from kitchen sinks (perhaps differentiated by the use of a garbage disposal), showers, or bathtubs is considered blackwater under some state or local codes. Bleed-off, or blowdown, is the release of a portion of the recirculating water from a cooling tower; this water carries dissolved solids that can cause mineral buildup. The breathing zone is the region within an occupied space between 3 and 6 feet above the floor and more than 2 feet from walls or fixed air-conditioning equipment. (AHSRAE 62.1-zo0a7) A brownfield is real propertywhose use maybe complicated by the presence or possible presence of a hazardous substance, pollutant, or contaminant. 430 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281969 A building automation system (BAS) uses computer-based monitoring to coordinate, organize, and optimize building control subsystems, including lighting, equipment scheduling, and alarm reporting. Building density is the floor area of the building divided by the total area of the site (square feet per acre). Building footprint is the area on a project site used by the building structure, defined by the perimeter of the building plan. Parking lots, landscapes, and other nonbuilding facilities are not included in the building footprint. A campus or private bus is a bus or shuttle service that is privately operated and not available to the general public. In LEED, a campus or private bus line that falls within 14 mile of the project site and provides transportation service to the public can contribute to earning credits. Carbon dioxide (COs) levels are an indicator of ventilation effectiveness inside buildings. COz concentrations greater than 530 ppm above outdoor COz conditions generally indicate inadequate ventilation. Absolute concentrations of CO2. greater than 800 to 1,000 ppm generally indicate poor air quality for breathing. A carpool is an arrangement by which z or more people share a vehicle for transportation. Chain-of-custody(COC) is atrackingprocedurefor aproductfromthepointofharvestorextraction to its end use, including all successive stages of processing, transformation, manufacturing, and distribution. Chain-of-custody certification is awarded to companies that produce, sell, promote, or trade forest products after audits verify proper accounting of material flows and proper use of the Forest Stewardship Council name and logo. The COC certificate number is listed on invoices for nonlabeled products to document that an entity has followed FSC guidelines for product accounting. Chemical treatment includes the use of biocidal, conditioning, dispersant, and scale-inhibiting chemicals to control biological growth, scale, and corrosion in cooling towers. Alternatives to conventional chemical treatment include ozonation, ionization, and exposure to ultraviolet light. Chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) are hydrocarbons that are used as refrigerants and cause depletion of the stratospheric ozone layer. Chum is the movement of workstations and people within a space. Climate change refers to any significant change in measures of climate (such as temperature, precipitation, or wind) lasting for an extended period (decades or longer). (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2008) A coating is applied to beautify, protect, or provide a barrier to a surface. Flat coatings register a gloss of less than 15 on an 85-degree meter or less than 5 on a 60-degree meter. Nonflat coatings register agloss of 5 or greater on a 60-degree meter and agloss of 15 or greater on an 85-degree meter. (SCAQMD Rule 1113) Combined heat and power (CHP), or cogeneration, generates both electrical power and thermal energy from a single fuel source. Comfort criteria are specific design conditions that take into account temperature, humidity, air speed, outdoor temperature, outdoor humidity, seasonal clothing, and expected activity. (ASH RAE 55-2004) GLOSSARY 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 431 EFTA00281970 GLOSSARY Commissioning (Cx) is the process of verifying and documenting that a building and all of its systems and assemblies are planned, designed, installed, tested, operated, and maintained to meet the owner's project requirements. The commissioning authority (CxA) is the individual designated to organize, lead, and review the completion of commissioning process activities. The CxA facilitates communication among the owner, designer, and contractor to ensure that complex systems are installed and function in accordance with the owner's project requirements. The commissioning cycle is the schedule of activities related to existing building commissioning, including the investigation and analysis, implementation, and ongoing commissioning. The commissioning plan is a document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of resources, and documentation requirements of the commissioning process. The commissioning process is a systematic quality-focused effort to ensure that building systems are designed, specified, procured, installed, and functioning in accordance with the owner's intent. The process uses planning, documentation, and verification of testing to review and oversee the activities of both designer and constructor. The commissioning report documents the commissioning process, including a commissioning program overview, identification of the commissioning team,and description ofthe commissioning process activities. Commissioning specification is the contract language used in the construction documents to detail the objective, scope, and implementation of the construction and acceptance phases of the commissioning process as developed in the design phase of the commissioning plan. This allows the construction contractor to ensure that these activities are considered in proposals for the construction work. The commissioning team includes those people responsible for working together to carry out the commissioning process. Completed design area is the total area of finished ceilings, floors, full-height walls and demountable partitions, interior doors, and built-in case goods in the completed project It does not include exterior windows and doors. Composite wood consists ofwood or plant particles or fibers bonded by a synthetic resin or binder. Examples include particleboard, medium-density fiberboard (MDF), plywood, oriented-strand board (OSB),wheatboard, and strawboard. Composting toilet system. See nonwater toilet system. The Comprehensive Environmental Response,Compensation,and LiabilityAct,orCERCLA, is more commonly known as Superfund. Enacted in 1.980, CERCLA addresses abandoned or historical waste sites and contamination by taxing the chemical and petroleum industries and providing federal authority to respond to releases of hazardous substances. A compressed worlcweek rearranges the standard workweek (5 consecutive 8-hour days in a week), increasing the dailyhours and decreasing the number of days in the work cycle. For example, instead of working 8-hour days Monday through Friday, employees work to-hour days for 4 days per week, or 9-hour days for 9 of to consecutive days. Concentration ratio is the ratio of the level ofdissolved solids in the recirculating water to the level found in the entering makeup water. A higher concentration ratio results from a lower bleed-off rate; increasing the ratio above a certain point, however, leads to scaling, and water savings diminish after a certain level. This ratio is also called the cycles of concentration. Cycles refers to the number of times dissolved minerals in the water are concentrated compared with makeup water, not to water flow over the tower or to on-off cycles. 432 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281971 Conditioned space is the part of a building that is heated or cooled, or both, for the comfort of occupants. (ASH RAE 62.1-2007) A constructed wetland is an engineered system designed to simulate natural wetland functions for water purification. In LEED, constructed wetlands are essentially treatment systems that remove contaminants from wastewater. Construction and demolition debris includes waste and recyclables generated from construction and from the renovation,demolition,or deconstruction ofpreezistingstructures. It does not include land-clearing debris, such as soil, vegetation, and rocks. Construction, demolition, and land-clearing debris includes all ofthe above plus soiLvegetation, and rock from land clearing. A construction IAQ management plan outlines measures to minimize contamination in a specific project buEding during construction and describes procedures to flush the buildingofcontaminants prior to occupancy. Contaminants are unwanted airborne elements that may reduce indoor air quality. (ASHRAE 62.1- 2007) Controls are mechanisms that allow occupants to direct power to devices (e.g., lights, heaters) or adjust devices or systems within in a range (e.g., brightness, temperature). Conventional irrigation refers to the most common irrigation system used in the region where the building is located. A conventional irrigation system commonly uses pressure to deliver water and distributes it through sprinkler heads above the ground. A cooling tower uses water to absorb heat from air-conditioning systems and regulate air temperature in a facility. Curfew hours are locally determined times when lighting restrictions are imposed. When no local or regional restrictions are in place,10:00.. is regarded as a default curfew time. Daylighting is the controlled admission of natural light into a space, used to reduce or eliminate electric lighting. Daylight-responsive lighting controls are photosensors used in conjunction with other switching and dimming devices to control the amount of artificial lighting in relationship to the amount and quality of natural daylight. Densely occupied space is an area with a design occupant density of 25 people or more per 1,000 square feet (40 square feet or less per person). Density factor (lcd) is a coefficient used in calculating the landscape coefficient. It modifies the evapotranspiration rate to reflect the water use of a plant or group of plants, particularly with reference to the density of the plant material. Design light output is the light output of lamps at 40% of their useful life. The development footprint is the area affected by development or by project site activity. Hardscape, access roads, parking lots, nonbuilding facilities, and the building itself are all included in the development footprint. A district energy system is a central energy conversion plant and transmission and distribution system that provides thermal energy to a group of buildings (e.g., a central cooling plant on a university campus). Central energy systems that provide only electricity are not included. Downstream equipment consists of all heating or cooling systems, equipment, and controls located within the project building and site associated with transporting thermal energy into heated GLOSSARY 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 433 EFTA00281972 GLOSSARY or cooled spaces. This includes the thermal connection or interface with the district energy system, secondary distribution systems in the building, and terminal units. Drip irrigation delivers water at low pressure through buried mains and submains. From the submains, water is distributed to the soil through a network of perforated tubes or emitters. Drip irrigation is a high-efficiency type of microirrigation. Durable goods have a useful life of 2 years or more and are replaced infrequently or may require capital program outlays. Examples include furniture, office equipment, appliances, external power adapters, televisions, and audiovisual equipment. The durable goods waste stream consists of durable goods leaving the project site that are fully depreciated and have reached the end of their useful lives for normal business operations. Ecological restoration is the process of assisting in the recovery and management of ecological integrity and includes biodiversity, ecological processes and structures, regional and historical context, and sustainable cultural practices. Ecologically appropriate site features are natural site elements that maintain or restore the ecological integrityof the site. Examples include native or adapted vegetation,water bodies, exposed rock, unvegetated ground, and other features that provide habitat value and are part of the historic natural landscape. An economizer is a device used to make building systems more energy efficient. Examples include HVAC enthalpy controls, which are based on humidity and temperature. An ecosystem is a basic unit of nature that includes a community of organisms and their nonliving environment linked by biological, chemical, and physical processes. An electrical conductivity (EC) meter measures the amount of nutrients and salt in water. Elemental mercury is pure mercury (rather than a mercury-containing compound), the vapor of which is commonly used in fluorescent and other lamp types. Embodied energy is the energy used during the entire life cycle of a product, including its manufacture, transportation, and disposal, as well as the inherent energy captured within the product itself. Emissions reduction reporting is the calculating, tracking, and documenting ofthe greenhouse gas emissions that result directly from energy use and other operations of a building. Emissivity is the ratio of the radiation emitted by a surface to the radiation emitted by a black body at the same temperature. An endangered species is threatened with extinction because of harmful human activities or environmental factors. An energy audit identifies how much energy a building uses and the purposes for which it is used, and identifies efficiency and cost-reduction opportunities. The American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers uses 3 levels of energy audits: walk-through analysis, energy survey and analysis, and detailed analysis of capital-intensive modifications. Energy conservation measures are installations or modifications of equipment or systems intended to reduce energy use and costs. An energy simulation model, or energy model, is a computer-generated representation of the anticipated energy consumption of a building. It permits a comparison of energy performance, given proposed energy efficiency measures, with the baseline. 434 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281973 An ENERGY STAR rating is a measure of a building's energy performance compared with that of similar buildings, as determined by the ENERGY STAR Portfolio Manager. A score of so represents average building performance. Enhanced commissioning is a set of best practices that go beyond fundamental commissioning to ensure that building systems perform as intended by the owner. These practices include designating a commissioning authority prior to the construction documents phase, conducting commissioning design reviews, reviewing contractor submittals, developing a systems manual, verifying operator training, and performing a postoccupancy operations review. Entryway systems are designed to capture dirt and other debris from occupants entering the building; they can be open floor grates or grilles set over a recessed area. Environmental tobacco smoke (ETS), or secondhand smoke, consists of airborne particles emitted from the burning end of cigarettes, pipes, and cigars, and is exhaled by smokers. These particles contain about 4,000 compounds, up to 50 ofwhich are known to cause cancer. Erosion is a combination of processes or events by which materials of the earth's surface are loosened, dissolved, or worn away and transported by natural agents (e.g., water, wind, or gravity). Eutrophication is the increase in chemical nutrients, such as the nitrogen and phosphorus often found in fertilizers, in an ecosystem. The added nutrients stimulate excessive plant growth, promoting algal blooms or weeds. The enhanced plant growth reduces oxygen in the land and water, reducing water quality and fish and other animal populations. Evapotranspiration is the loss of water by evaporation from the soil and by transpiration from plants. It is expressed in millimeters per unit of time. Evapotranspiration (El) rate is the amount ofwater lost from a vegetated surface in units ofwater depth. It is expressed in millimeters per unit of time. Exfiltration is air leakage through cracks and interstices and through the ceilings, floors, and walls. Exhaust air is removed from a space and discharged outside the building by mechanical or natural ventilation systems. Existing area is the total area of the building structure, core, and envelope that existed when the project area was selected. Exterior windows and doors are not included. Existing building commissioning, or retrocommissioning, involves developing a building operation plan that identifies current operating requirements and needs, conducting tests to determine whether building systems are performing optimally in accordance with the plan, and making any necessary repairs or changes. Facility alterations and additions are discussed inthe Introduction ofthe LEEDfor Green Building Operations & Maintenance. Fairtrade is a product certification system overseen by FLO Intemational,which identifies products that meet certain environmental, labor, and development standards. Fly ash is the solid residue derived from incineration processes. Fly ash can be used as a substitute for Portland cement in concrete. The Food Alliance certifies foods from sustainable farms and ranches that produce natural products, ensure quality control and food safety, responsibly manage water and energy resources, emphasize recycling and responsible waste management, provide a safe work environment, and commit to continuous improvement of sustainable practices. GLOSSARY 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 435 EFTA00281974 GLOSSARY A footcandle (fc) is a measure of light falling on a given surface. One footcandle is defined as the quantity of light falling on a i-square-foot area from a 1 candela light source at a distance of foot (which equals 1 lumen per square foot). Footcandles can be measured both horizontally and vertically by a footcandle meter or light meter. Formaldehyde is a naturally occurring VOC found in small amounts in animals and plants but is carcinogenic and an irritant to mostpeoplewhen present in high concentrations,causing headaches, dizziness, mental impairment, and other symptoms. When present in the air at levels above 0.1 ppm, it can cause watery eyes; burning sensations in the eyes, nose, and throat; nausea; coughing; chest tightness; wheezing; skin rashes; and asthmatic and allergic reactions. Fuel-efficient vehicles have achieved a minimum green score of 40 according to the annual vehiclerating guide of the American Council for an Energy Efficient Economy. A full cutoff luminaire has zero candela intensity at an angle of 90 degrees above the vertical axis (nadir or straight down) and at all angles greater than 90 degrees from straight down. Additionally, the candela per 1,000 lamp lumens does not numerically exceed100 (10%) at an angle of 80 degrees above nadir. This applies to all lateral angles around the luminaire. Full-time equivalent (FTE) represents a regular building occupant who spends 40 hours per week in the project building. Part-time or overtime occupants have FTE values based on their hours per week divided by 40. Multiple shifts are included or excluded depending on the intent and requirements of the credit. Full-time-equivalent building occupants is a measure equal to the total number of hours all building occupants spend in the building during the peak 8-hour occupancy period divided by 8 hours. In a fully shielded exterior light fixture, the lower edge of the shield is at or below the lowest edge of the lamp, such that all light shines down. Fundamental commissioning is a set of essential best practices used to ensure that building performance requirements have been identified early in the project's development and to verify that the designed systems have been installed in compliance with those requirements. These practices include designating a commissioning authority, documenting the owner's project requirements and basis of design, incorporating commissioning requirements into the construction documents, establishing a commissioning plan, verifying installation and performance of specified building systems, and completing a summary commissioning report. Furniture, fixtures, and equipment are all items that are not base-building elements. Examples include lamps, electronics, desks, chairs, and tables. Geothermal energy is electricity generated by harnessing hot water or steam from within the earth. Geothermal heating systems use pipes to transfer heat from underground steam or hot water for heating, cooling, and hot water. The system retrieves heat during cool months and returns heat in summer months. Glare is any excessively bright source of light within the visual field that creates discomfort or loss in visibility. Graywater is defined by the Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) in its Appendix G, Gray Water Systems for Single-Family Dwellings, as "untreated household wastewater which has not come into contact with toilet waste. Greywater includes used water from bathtubs, showers, bathroom wash basins, and water from clothes-washer and laundrytubs. It must not include waste water from kitchen sinks or dishwashers." The International Plumbing Code (I PC) defines graywater in its Appendix C, Gray 436 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281975 Water Recycling Systems, as "waste water discharged from lavatories, bathtubs, showers, clothes washers and laundry sinks." Some states and local authorities allow kitchen sink wastewater to be included in graywater. Other differences with the UPC and IPC definitions can likely be found in state and local codes. Project teams should comply with graywater definitions as established by the authority having jurisdiction in the project area. Green cleaning is the use ofcleaning products and practices that have lower environmental impacts than conventional products and practices. Green power is synonymous with renewable energy. Green-e is a program established by the Center for Resource Solutions to both promote green electricity products and provide consumers with a rigorous and nationally recognized method to identify those products. Greenfields are sites not previously developed or graded that could support open space, habitat, or agriculture. Greenhouse gases (GHGs) absorb and emit radiation at specific wavelengths within the spectrum of thermal infrared radiation emitted by Earth's surface, clouds,and the atmosphere itself. Increased concentrations of greenhouse gases are a root cause of global climate change. Group (shared) multioccupant spaces include conference rooms, classrooms, and other indoor spaces used as a place of congregation. Halons are substances, used in fire-suppression systems and fire extinguishers, that deplete the stratospheric ozone layer. Hardscape consists of the inanimate elements of the building landscaping. Examples include pavement, roadways, stonewalls, concrete paths and sidewalks, and concrete, brick, and tile patios. Hard surface flooring includes vinyl, linoleum, laminate flooring, wood flooring, rubber flooring, wall base, and associated sundries. Heat island effect refers to the absorption of heat by hardscapes, such as dark, nonreflective pavement and buildings, and its radiation to surrounding areas. Particularly in urban areas, other sources may include vehicle exhaust, air-conditioners, and street equipment; reduced airflow from tall buildings and narrow streets exacerbates the effect. Horizontal footcandles occur on a horizontal surface. They can be added together arithmetically when more than 1 source provides light to the same surface. HVAC systems are equipment, distribution systems, and terminals that provide the processes of heating, ventilating, or air-conditioning. (ASHRAE 90.1-2007) Hybrid vehicles use a gasoline engine to drive an electric generator and use the electric generator and/or storage batteries to power electric motors that drive the vehicle's wheels. Hydro energy is electricity produced from the downhill flow of water from rivers or lakes. Hydrochlorofluorocarbons (HCFCs) are refrigerants that cause significantly less depletion of the stratospheric ozone layer than chlorofluorocarbons. Hydrofluorocarbons (HFCs) are refrigerants that do not deplete the stratospheric ozone layer but may have high global warming potential. HFCs are not considered environmentally benign. Hydrology is the study of water occurrence, distribution, movement, and balances in an ecosystem. Hydropower is electricity produced from the downhill flow of water from rivers or lakes. GLOSSARY 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 437 EFTA00281976 GLOSSARY Impervious surfaces have a perviousness of less than 50% and promote runoff of water instead of infiltration into the subsurface. Examples include parking lots, roads, sidewalks, and plazas. An incinerator is a furnace or container for burning waste materials. Individual occupant spaces are standard workstations where workers conduct individual tasks. Indoor adhesive, sealant, or sealant primer product is an adhesive or sealant product applied onsite, inside the building's weatherproofing system. Indoor air quality (IAQ) is the nature of air inside the space that affects the health and wellbeing of building occupants. It is considered acceptable when there are no known contaminants at harmful concentrations and a substantial majority (80% or more) of the occupants do not express dissatisfaction. (ASHRAE 62.1-2007) Indoor carpet systems are carpet, carpet adhesive, or carpet cushion products installed on-site inside the building's weatherproofing system. Indoor composite wood or agrifiber is a product installed inside the building's weatherproofing system. Indoor paints or coating products are applied inside a building's weatherproofing system. Infiltration is uncontrolled air leakage into conditioned spaces through unintentional openings in ceilings, floors, and walls from unconditioned spaces or the outdoors. (ASH RAE 62.1-2007) Infiltration basins and trenches are devices used to encourage subsurface infiltration of runoff volumes through temporary surface storage. Basins are ponds that can store large volumes of stormwater. They need to drain within 72 hours to maintain aerobic conditions and be available for future storm events. Trenches are similar to infiltration basins but are shallower and function as a subsurface reservoir for stormwater volumes. Pretreatment to remove sediment and oil may be necessary to avoid clogging infiltration devices. Infiltration trenches are more common in areas where infiltration basins are not possible. Infrared (or thermal) emittance is a parameter between O and 1 (or O% and 1OO%) that indicates the ability of a material to shed infrared radiation (heat). The wavelength range for this radiant energy is roughly 5 to 40 micrometers. Most building materials (including glass) are opaque in this part of the spectrum and have an emittance of roughly 0.9. Materials such as clean, bare metals are the most important exceptions to the 0.9 rule. Thus clean, untarnished galvanized steel has low emittance, and aluminum roof coatings have intermediate emittance levels. In situ remediation involves treatment of contaminants using technologies such as injection wells or reactive trenches. These methods employ the natural hydraulic gradient of groundwater and usually require only minimal disturbance of the site. An installation inspection examines components of the building systems to determine whether they are installed properly and ready for systems performance testing. Integrated pest management (IPM) is the coordinated use of knowledge about pests, the environment, and pest prevention and control methods to minimize pest infestation and damage by the most economical means while minimizing hazards to people, property, and the environment. Interior lighting power allowance is the maximum lighting power (in watts) allowed for the interior of a building. Interior nonstructural components reuse is determined by dividing the area of retained components by the larger of (0 the area of the prior condition or (z) the area of the completed design. 438 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281977 Invasive plants are nonnative to the ecosystem and likely to cause harm once introduced. These species are characteristicallyadaptable and aggressive, have ahigh reproductive capacity,and tend to overrun the ecosystems they enter. Collectively, they are among the greatest threats to biodiversity and ecosystem stability. Laminate adhesive is used in wood or agrifiber products, such as veneered panels, composite wood products contained in engineered lumber, and door assemblies. Lamps use electricity to produce light in any of several ways: by heating a wire for incandescence; by exciting a gas that produces ultraviolet light from a luminescent material; by generating an arc that emits visible light and some ultraviolet light; or by inducing excitation of mercury through radio frequencies. Light-emitting diodes packaged as traditional lamps also meet this definition. Lamp life is the useful operating life of the sources of artificial light, such as bulbs. Landfills are waste disposal sites for solid waste from human activities. The landscape area is the total site area less the building footprint, paved surfaces, water bodies, and patios. The landscape coefficient (KO is a constant used to calculate the evapotranspiration rate. It takes into account the species factor, density factor, and microclimate factor of the area. The leakage rate is the speed at which an appliance loses refrigerant, measured between refrigerant charges or over 12 months, whichever is shorter. The leakage rate is expressed in terms of the percentage of the appliance's full charge that would be lost over a iz-month period if the rate stabilized. (EPA Clean Air Act, Title VI, Rule 608) A least toxic chemical pesticide is any pesticide product for which all active ingredients and known inert ingredients meet the least toxic Tier 3 hazard criteria under the City and County of San Francisco's hazard screening protocol. Least toxic also applies to any pesticide product, other than rodent bait, that is applied in a self-contained, enclosed bait station placed in an inaccessible location or applied in a gel that is neither visible nor accessible. The LEED project boundary is the portion of the project site submitted for LEED certification. For single building developments, this is the entire project scope and is generally limited to the site boundary. For multiple building developments, the LEED project boundary may be a portion of the development as determined by the project team. Legionella pneumophila is a waterborne bacterium that causes Legionnaire's disease. It grows in slow-moving or still warm water and can be found in plumbing, showerheads, and water storage tanks. Outbreaks of Legionella pneumonia have been attributed to evaporative condensers and cooling towers. Life-cycle assessment is an analysis of the environmental aspects and potential impacts associated with a product, process, or service. Life-cycle costing is an accounting methodology used to evaluate the economic performance of a product or system over its useful life. It considers operating costs, maintenance expenses, and other economic factors. Light pollution is waste light from building sites that produces glare, is directed upward to the sky, or is directed off the site. Waste light does not increase nighttime safety, utility, or security and needlessly consumes energy. Light trespass is obtrusive light that is unwanted because of quantitative, directional, or spectral attributes. Light trespass can cause annoyance, discomfort, distraction, or loss of visibility. GLOSSARY 2009 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 439 EFTA00281978 GLOSSARY Lighting power density is the installed lighting power, per unit area Local zoning requirements are local government regulations imposed to promote orderly development of private lands and prevent land-use conflicts. Low-emitting vehicles are classified as zero-emission vehicles (ZEVs) by the California Air Resources Board. A lumen is a unit of luminous flux equal to the light emitted in a unit solid angle by a uniform point source oft candle intensity. A luminaire is a complete lighting unit consisting of a lamp (or lamps) with the housing designed to distribute the light, position, and protect the lamp and connect it to the power supply. Luminous opening refers to the part of the outer surface of a luminaire (lighting fixture) through which light is emitted (i.e., the opening where the lamps are). Makeup water is fed into a cooling tower system to replace water lost through evaporation, drift, bleed-off, or other causes. Management staff includes employees or contractors involved in operating and maintaining a project building and site. Marine Stewardship Council Blue Eco-Label applies to products that meet certain principles and criteria for sustainable fishing, including sustainable harvest of the target stock, acceptable impact of the fishery on the ecosystem, effectiveness of the fishery management system (including all relevant biological, technological, economic, social, environmental, and commercial aspects), and compliance with relevant laws and standards. Market value, presumed to be less than replacement value, is the amount that either was paid or would have been paid for a used product. Mass transit is designed to transport large groups of persons in a single vehicle, such as a bus or train. Material safety data sheets (MSDS) are detailed, written instructions documenting a method to achieve uniformity of performance. Mechanical ventilation, or active ventilation, is provided by mechanically powered equipment, such as motor-driven fans and blowers, but not by devices such as wind-driven turbine ventilators and mechanically operated windows. (ASHRAE 62.1-2004) Metering controls limit the flow time of water. They are generally manual-on and automatic-off devices, most commonly installed on lavatory faucets and showers. Microclimate factor (kat) is a constant used in calculating the landscape coefficient. It adjusts the evapotranspiration rate to reflect the climate of the immediate area. Microirrigation involves irrigation systems with small sprinklers and microjets or drippers designed to apply small volumes of water. The sprinklers and microjets are installed within a few centimeters of the ground; drippers are laid on or below grade. Minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) is a filter ratingestablished bythe American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE 52.2-1999, Method of Testing General Ventilation Air Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size). MERV categories range from t (very low efficiency) to 16 (very high). Mixed-mode ventilation combines mechanical and natural ventilation methods. A mixed-use project involves a combination of residential and commercial or retail components. 440 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281979 The National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) is a permit program that controls water pollution by regulating point sources that discharge pollutants into waters of the United States. Industrial, municipal, and other facilities must obtain permits if their discharges go directly to surface waters. Native (or indigenous) plants are adapted to a given area during a defined time period and are not invasive. In North America, the term often refers to plants growing in a region prior to the time of settlement by people of European descent. Natural areas feature native or adapted vegetation or other ecologically appropriate features. Natural ventilation, or passive ventilation, is provided by thermal, wind, or diffusion effects through doors, windows, or other intentional openings in the building; it uses the building layout, fabric, and form to achieve heat transfer and air movement. Neighborhood is synonymous with residential area. Net metering is a metering and billing arrangement that allows on-site generators to send excess electricity flows to the regional power grid. These electricity flows offset a portion of those drawn from the grid. Net project material value includes the construction material value and the CSI Division 12 (Furniture and Furnishings) material value, the lesser of material values for mechanical and electric components, and the salvage value identified in the MR credits. Nonoccupied spaces include all rooms used by maintenance personnel that are not open for use by occupants. Examples are closets and janitorial, storage, and equipment rooms. Nonporous sealant is a substance used as a sealant on nonporous materials. Nonporous materials, such as plastic and metal, do not have openings in which fluids maybe absorbed or discharged. Nonpotable water. See potable water. Nonwater (or composting) toilet systems are dry plumbing fixtures and fittings that contain and treat human waste via microbiological processes. A nonwater (or dry) urinal replaces a water flush with a trap containing a layer of buoyant liquid that floats above the urine, blocking sewer gas and odors. Occasional furniture is located in lobbies and in conference rooms. Occupants in a commercial buildingareworkers who either have a permanent office or workstation in the building or typically spend a minimum of to hours per week in the building. In a residential building, occupants also include all persons who live in the building. Off-gassing is the emission of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) from synthetic and natural products. Off-site renewable energy is derived from renewable energy sources and generated outside the project site perimeter; it is delivered through a private agreement with the energy-generating entity. Off-site salvaged materials are recovered from a source different from the project site. On-demand (or tankless) heaters heat water only when it is needed and then apply only the amount of heat required to satisfy the immediate need. Ongoing commissioning is a continuous process that methodically identifies and corrects system problems to maintain optimal building performance; it includes regular measurement and comparative analysis of building energy data over time. GLOSSARY 2CO9 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 441 EFTA00281980 GLOSSARY Ongoing consumables have a low cost per unit and are regularly used and replaced in the course of business. Examples include paper, toner cartridges, binders, batteries, and desk accessories. On-site renewable energy is energy derived from renewable sources located within the project site perimeter. On-site salvaged materials are recovered from and reused at the same building site. On-site wastewater treatment is the transport, storage, treatment, and disposal of wastewater generated on the project site. Open space area is usually defined by local zoning requirements. If local zoning requirements do not clearly define open space, iris defined for the purposes of LEED calculations as the property area minus the development footprint; it must be vegetated and pervious, with exceptions only as noted in the credit requirements section. Only ground areas are calculated as open space. For projects located in urban areas that earn a Development Density and Community Connectivity credit, open space also includes nonvehicular, pedestrian-oriented hardscape spaces. Open-grid pavement is less than so% impervious and accommodates vegetation in the open cells. Outdoor air is the ambient air that enters a building through a ventilation system, either through natural ventilation or by infiltration. (ASHRAE 62.1-2007) The owner is the person directly employed by the organization holding title to the project building and recognized by law as having rights, responsibilities, and ultimate control over the building. Owner's project requirements is a written document that details the ideas, concepts, and criteria that are determined by the owner to be important to the success of the project. Ozone (Os) is a gas composed of 3 oxygen atoms. It is not usually emitted directly into the air, but at ground-level it is created by a chemical reaction between oxides of nitrogen (NOx) and volatile organic compounds (VOCs) in the presence of sunlight. Ozone has the same chemical structure whether it occurs in the atmosphere or at ground level and can have positive or negative effects, depending on its location. (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency) Paint is a liquid, liquefiable, or mastic composition that is converted to a solid protective, decorative, or functional adherent film after application as a thin layer. These coatings are intended for application to interior or exterior surfaces of residential, commercial, institutional, or industrial buildings. Parking footprint refers to the area of the project site occupied by the parking areas and structures. Parking subsidies are the costs of providing occupant parking that are not recovered in parking fees. In a partially shielded exterior light fixture, the lower edge ofthe shield is at or below the centerline of the lamp, to minimize light emitted above the horizontal plane. Pedestrian access allows people to walk to services without being blocked by walls, freeways, or other barriers. Percentage improvement measures the energycost savings for the proposed building performance compared with the baseline building performance. Permeable. See porous pavement. Perviousness is the percentage of the surface area of a paving system that is open and allows moisture to soak into the ground below. Phenol formaldehyde, which off-gasses only at high temperature, is used for exterior products, although many of these products are suitable for interior applications. 442 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281981 Photovoltaic (PV) energy is electricity from photovoltaic cells that convert the energy in sunlight into electricity. A picogram is t trillionth of a gram. Picograms per lumen-hour is a measure of the amount of mercury in a lamp per unit of light delivered over its useful life. Plug load is synonymous with receptacle load. Pollutants include emissions of carbon dioxide (CO2), sulfur dioxide (S02), nitrogen oxides (NOx), mercury (Hg), small particulates (PM2.5), and large particulates (PM10). Porous materials have tiny openings, often microscopic, that can absorb or discharge fluids. Examples include wood, fabric, paper, corrugated paperboard, and plastic foam. (SCAQMD Rule 1168) Porous pavement and permeable surfaces allow runoff to infiltrate into the ground. Postconsumer fiber consists of paper, paperboard, and fibrous wastes that are collected from municipal solid waste streams. Postconsumer material is recycled from consumer waste. Postconsumer recycled content is the percentage of material in a product that was consumer waste. The recycled material was generated by household, commercial, industrial, or institutional end-users and can no longer be used for its intended purpose. It includes returns of materials from the distribution chain. Examples include construction and demolition debris, materials collected through recycling programs, discarded products (e.g., furniture, cabinetry, decking), and landscaping waste (e.g., leaves, grass clippings, tree trimmings). (ISO 4021) Potable water meets or exceeds EPA's drinking water quality standards and is approved for human consumption by the state or local authorities having jurisdiction; it may be supplied from wells or municipal water systems. ppm stands for parts per million. Preconsumer recycled content, formerly known as postindustrial content, is the percentage of material in a product that is recycled from manufacturing waste. Examples include planer shavings, sawdust, bagasse, walnut shells, culls, trimmed materials, overissue publications, and obsolete inventories. Excluded are rework, regrind, or scrap materials capable of being reclaimed within the same process that generated them. (ISO 4021) Predicted mean vote is an empirical equation for predicting the mean vote on a rating scale of thermal comfort of a large population of people exposed to a certain environment. Preferred parking, available to particular users, includes designated spaces close to the building (aside from designated handicapped spots), designated covered spaces, discounted parking passes, and guaranteed passes in a lottery system. Preventive maintenance is routinely scheduled equipment inspection, cleaning, and repair conducted to detect and prevent equipment failure and keep materials and systems in working order. Previously developed sites once had buildings, roadways, parking lots, or were graded or otherwise altered by direct human activities. A primer is a material applied to a substrate to improve the adhesion of subsequently applied coats. GLOSSARY 2CO9 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 443 EFTA00281982 GLOSSARY Prior condition area is the total area of finished ceilings, floors, and full-height walls that existed when the project area was selected. It does not include exterior windows and doors. Prior condition is the state of the project space at the time it was selected. Process water is used for industrial processes and building systems such as cooling towers, boilers, and chillers. It can also refer to water used in operational processes, such as dishwashing, clothes washing, and ice making. Propertyarea is the total areawithin the legal property boundaries of a site; it encompasses all areas of the site, including constructed and nonconstructed areas. Proposed building performance is the annual energy cost calculated for a proposed design, as defined in ANSI/ASH RAE/I ESNA Standard 90.1-2007, Appendix G. Protected Harvest certification standards reflect the growing requirements and environmental considerations of different crops and bioregions. Each crop- and region-specific standard addresses production, toxicity, and chain-of-custody. Public transportation consists of bus, rail, or other transit services for the general public that operate on a regular, continual basis. Rainforest Alliance certification is awarded to farms that protectwildlife byplanting trees,control erosion, limit agrochemicals, protect native vegetation, hire local workers, and pay fair wages. Rapidly renewable materials are agricultural products,both fiber and animal, that take to years or less to grow or raise and can be harvested in a sustainable fashion. Rated power is the nameplate power on a piece of equipment. It represents the capacity of the unit and is the maximum that it will draw. Receptacle (or plug) load is the current drawn by all equipment that is plugged into the electrical system. Recirculated air is removed from a space and reused as supply air, delivered by mechanical or natural ventilation. Reclaimed water is wastewater that has been treated and purified for reuse. Recommissioning applies to buildings that were previously commissioned as part of new construction or buildings covered by existing building commissioning. Recovered fiber includes both postconsumer fiber and waste fiber from the manufacturing process. Recycled content is the proportion, by mass, of preconsumer or postconsumer recycled material in a product. (ISO mon) Recycling is the collection, reprocessing, marketing, and use of materials that were diverted or recovered from the solid waste stream. A recycling collection area is located in regularly occupied space in the building for the collection of occupants' recyclables. A building may have numerous collection areas from which recyclable materials are typically removed to a central collection and storage area Refrigerants are the working fluids of refrigeration cycles that absorb heat from a reservoir at low temperatures and reject heat at higher temperatures. Refurbished materials are products that could have been disposed of as solid waste. These products have completed their life cycle as consumer items and are then refurbished for reuse without substantial alteration of their form. Refurbishing includes renovating, repairing, restoring, 444 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281983 or generally improving the appearance, performance, quality, functionality, or value of a product. Regionallyextracted materials are raw materials taken from within a500-mile radius ofthe project site. Regionally manufactured materials are assembled as finished products within a 500-mile radius of the project site. Assembly does not include on-site assembly, erection, or installation of finished components. Regularly occupied spaces are areas where workers are seated or standing as they work inside a building. In residential applications, these areas are all spaces except bathrooms, utility areas, and closets or other storage rooms. In schools, theyare areas where students, teachers, or administrators are seated or standing as they work or study inside a building. Relative humidity is the ratio of partial density of airborne water vapor to the saturation density of water vapor at the same temperature and total pressure. Remanufactured materials are items that are made into other products. One example is concrete that is crushed and used as subbase. Remediation is the process of cleaning up a contaminated site by physical, chemical, or biological means. Remediation processes are typically applied to contaminated soil and groundwater. Renewable energy comes from sources that are not depleted by use. Examples include energy from the sun, wind, and small (low-impact) hydropower, plus geothermal energy and wave and tidal systems. Ways to capture energy from the sun include photovoltaic, solar thermal, and bioenergy systems based on wood waste, agricultural crops or residue, animal and other organic waste, or landfill gas. Renewable energy certificates (RECs) are tradable commodities representing proof that a unit of electricity was generated from a renewable energy resource. RECs are sold separately from electricity itself and thus allow the purchase of green power by a user of conventionally generated electricity. Replacement value is the estimated cost of replacing a used product. This value may be equal to the cost of a similar new product or based on a new product with comparable features. A residential area is land zoned primarily for housing at a density of 10 units per acre or greater. These areas may have single-family and multifamily housing and include building types such as townhomes, apartments, duplexes, condominiums, or mobile homes. The Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) addresses active and future facilities and was enacted in 1976 to give EPA authority to control hazardous wastes from cradle to grave, including generation, transportation, treatment, storage, and disposal. Some nonhazardous wastes are also covered under RCRA. Retained components are portions of the finished ceilings, finished floors, full-height walls and demountable partitions, interior doors, and built-in case goods that existed in the prior condition area and remain in the completed design. Retention ponds capture stormwater runoff and clear it of pollutants before its release. Some retention pond designs use gravity only; others use mechanical equipment, such as pipes and pumps, to facilitate transport. Some ponds are dry except during storm events; others permanently store water. A retrofit is any change to an existing facility, such as the addition or removal of equipment or an adjustment, connection, or disconnection of equipment. Return air is removed from a space and then recirculated or exhausted. (ASHRAE 62.1-2007) GLOSSARY 2C09 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 445 EFTA00281984 GLOSSARY Reuse returns materials to active use in the same or a related capacity as their original use, thus extending the lifetime of materials that would otherwise be discarded. Examples of construction materials that can be reused include extra insulation, drywall, and paints. Reused area is the total area of the building structure, core, and envelope that existed in the prior condition and remains in the completed design. Ridesharing is synonymous with carpooling. Safety and comfort light levels meet local code requirements and must be adequate to provide a safe path for egress without overlighting the area. Salvaged materials or reused materials are construction materials recovered from existing buildings or construction sites and reused. Common salvaged materials include structural beams and posts, flooring, doors, cabinetry, brick, and decorative items. A sealant has adhesive properties and is formulated primarily to fill, seal, or waterproof gaps or joints between z surfaces. Sealants include sealant primers and caulks. (SCAQMD Rule t t68) A sealant primer is applied to a substrate, prior to the application of a sealant, to enhance the bonding surface. (SCAQMD Rule "68) Seating consists of task and guest chairs used with systems furniture. Secure bicycle storage is an internal or external space that keeps bicycles safe from theft. It may include lockers and storage rooms. Sedimentation is the addition of soil particles to water bodies by natural and human-related activities. Sedimentation often decreases water quality and can accelerate the aging process of lakes, rivers, and streams. Sensors are devices that undergo a measurable change in response to environmental changes and communicate this change to a control system. Setpoints are normal operating ranges for building systems and indoor environmental quality. When the building systems are outside of their normal operating range, action is taken by the building operator or automation system. Shielding is a nontechnical term that describes devices or techniques that are used as part of a luminaire or lamp to limit glare, light trespass, or sky glow. Site area is synonymous with property area. A site assessment is an evaluation of a site's aboveground and subsurface characteristics, including its structures, geology, and hydrology. Site assessments are typically used to determine whether contamination has occurred, as well as the extent and concentration of any release of pollutants. Information generated during a site assessment is used to make remedial action decisions. Site energy is the amount of heat and electricity consumed by a building, as reflected in utility bills. Sky glow is caused by stray light from unshielded light sources and light reflecting off surfaces that then enter the atmosphere and illuminate and reflect off dust, debris, and water vapor. Sky glow can substantially limit observation of the night sky, compromise astronomical research, and adversely affect nocturnal environments. Soft costs are expense items that are not considered direct construction costs. Examples include architectural, engineering, financing, and legal fees. Solar reflectance, or albedo, is a measure of the ability of a surface material to reflect sunlight— visible, infrared, and ultraviolet wavelengths—on a scale of ci to 1. Solar reflectance is also called albedo. Black paint has a solar reflectance of o; white paint (titanium dioxide) has a solar reflectance oft. 446 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281985 Solar thermal systems collect or absorb sunlight via solar collectors to heat water that is then circulated to the building's hot water tank. Solar thermal systems can be used to warm swimming pools or heat water for residential and commercial use. The solar reflectance index (SRI) is a measure of a material's ability to reject solar heat, as shown by a small temperature rise. Standard black (reflectance 0.05, emittance 0.90) is 0 and standard white (reflectance 0.80, emittance 0.90) is too. For example, a standard black surface has a temperature rise of go-F (se C) in MI sun, and a standard white surface has a temperature rise of 14.6*F (8.1-C). Once the maximum temperature rise of a given material has been computed, the SRI can be calculated by interpolating between the values for white and black. Materials with the highest SRI values are the coolest choices for paving. Because of the way SRI is defined, particularly hot materials can even take slightly negative values, and particularly cool materials can even exceed 100. (Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory Cool Roofing Materials Database) Source energy is the total amount of raw fuel required to operate a building; it incorporates all transmission, delivery, and production losses for a complete assessment of a building's energy use. Source reduction reduces the amount of unnecessary material brought into a building. Examples include purchasing products with less packaging. Species factor (IQ is a constant used to adjust the evapotranspiration rate to reflect the biological features of a specific plant species. The square footage of a building is the total area in square feet (sf) of all rooms, including corridors, elevators, stairwells, and shaft spaces. Standard operating procedures are detailed, written instructions documenting a method to achieve uniformity of performance. Stormwater runoff consists ofwater from precipitation that flows over surfaces into sewer systems or receiving water bodies. MI precipitation that leaves project site boundaries on the surface is considered stormwater runoff. A stormwater pollution prevention plan describes all measures to prevent stormwater contamination, control sedimentation and erosion during construction, and comply with the requirements of the Clean Water Act. Stratified random sampling categorizes members of a population into discrete subgroups, based on characteristics that may affect their responses to a survey. For example, a survey of building occupants' commuting behavior might separate people by income level and commuting distance. To yield representative results, the survey should sample subgroups according to their proportions in the total population. Submetering is used to determine the proportion of energy use within a building attributable to specific end uses or subsystems (e.g., the heating subsystem of an HVAC system). Supply air is deliveredby mechanical ornatural ventilation to a space, composed ofanycombination of outdoor air, recirculated air, or transfer air. (ASH RAE 62.1-2007) Sustainable forestry is the practice of managing forest resources to meet the long-term forest product needs of humans while maintaining the biodiversity of forested landscapes. The primary goal is to restore, enhance, and sustain a full range of forest values, including economic, social, and ecological considerations. A sustainable purchasing policy gives preference to products that have little to no negative impact on the environment and society throughout their life cycle, and to the companies that supply them. A sustainable purchasing program is the development, adoption, and implementation of a procurement strategy that supports an organization's sustainable purchasing policy. GLOSSARY 2CO9 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 447 EFTA00281986 GLOSSARY Systematic sampling surveys every xth person in a population, using a constant skip interval. It relies on random samplingorderor an order with no direct relationship to thevariable underanalysis (e.g., alphabetical order when sampling for commuting behavior). Systems furniture includes panel-based workstations comprising modularinterconnectingpanels, hang-on components, and drawer and filing components or a free-standing grouping of furniture items designed to work in concert. Systems performance testing is the process ofdeterrnining the ability of commissioned systems to perform in accordance with the owner's project requirements, the basis of design, and construction documents. Telecommuting is worldngby using telecommunications and computertechnology from a location other than the usual or traditional place of business—for example, from home, a satellite office, or a telework center. A tenant is a person or entity that pays to occupy land or space that is owned by someone else. Tertiary treatment is the highest form of wastewater treatment and includes removal of organics, solids, and nutrients as well as biological or chemical polishing, generally to effluent limits of 10 mg/L biological oxygen demand (BOD) s and 10 mg/L total suspended solids (TSS). Thermal comfort exists when occupants express satisfaction with the thermal environment. Tipping fees are charged by a landfill for disposal of waste, typically quoted per ton. Total phosphorus (Ti') consists of organically bound phosphates, polyphosphates, and orthophosphates in stormwater, the majority of which originates from fertilizer application. Chemical precipitation is the typical removal mechanism for phosphorus. Total suspended solids (TSS) are particlesthat aretoo small orlight to be removed from stormwater via gravity settling. Suspended solid concentrations are typically removed via filtration. Transient users are occupants who do not use a facility on a consistent, regular, daily basis. Examples include students in higher education settings, customers in retail settings, and visitors in institutional settings. A a-year, z4-hour design storm is a nationally accepted rate that represents the largest amount of rainfall expected over a 24-hour period during a a-year interval. The rate is the basis for planning and designing stormwater management facilities and features. Undercover parking is underground or under a deck, roof, or building; its hardscape surfaces are shaded. Universal notification means notifying building occupants not less than72 hours before a pesticide is applied in a building oron surroundinggrounds u ndernormal conditions,and within mhours after application of a pesticide in emergency conditions. Use of a least toxic pesticide or self-contained nonrodent bait does not require universal notification; all other pesticide applications do. Upstream equipment consists of all heating or cooling systems, equipment, and controls that are associated with a district energy system but are not part of the project building's thermal connection or do not interface with the district energy system. It includes the central energy plant and all transmission and distribution equipment associated with transporting the thermal energy to the project building and site. Urea formaldehyde is a combination of urea and formaldehyde that is used in some glues and may emit formaldehyde at room temperature. USDA Organic is the U.S. Department of Agriculture's certification for products that contain at least 95% organically produced ingredients (excluding water and salt). Any remaining ingredients 448 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281987 must consist of approved nonagricultural substances (as listed by USDA) or be nonorganically produced agricultural products that are not commercially available in organic form. Vegetation-containing artifices are planters, gardens, or other constructs intended to host flora. A vendor of certified wood is the company that supplies wood products to contractors or subcontractors for on-site installation. A vendor needs a chain-of-custody number if it is selling FSC-certified products that are not individually labeled; this includes most lumber. Ventilation is the process of supplying air to or removing air from a space for the purpose of controlling air contaminant levels, humidity, or temperature within the space. (ASHRAE 6z.i2007). Verification is the range of checks and tests carried out to determine whether components, subsystems, systems, and interfaces between systems operate in accordance with the contract documents. Vertical footcandles occur on a vertical surface. They can be added together arithmetically when more than t source provides light to the same surface. Visible light transmittance (VLT) (Zig) is the ratio of total transmitted light to total incident light (i.e., the amount of visible spectrum, 380-780 nanometers of light passing through a glazing surface divided by the amount of light striking the glazing surface). The higher the T value, the more incident light passes through the glazing. Vision glazing is the portion of an exterior window between 3o and 90 inches above the floor that permits a view to the outside. Volatile organic compounds (VOCs) are carbon compounds that participate in atmospheric photochemical reactions (excluding carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, carbonic acid, metallic carbides and carbonates, and ammonium carbonate). The compounds vaporize (become a gas) at normal room temperatures. Walking distance is the length of the walkable pathway between the building and public transportation. Walk-off mats are placed inside building entrances to capture dirt, water, and other materials tracked inside by people and equipment. Waste comprises all materials that flow from the building to final disposal. Examples include paper, grass trimmings, food scraps, and plastics. In LEED, waste refers to all materials that are capable of being diverted from the building's waste stream through waste reduction. Waste disposal eliminates waste by means of burial in a landfill, combustion in an incinerator, dumping at sea, or any other way that is not recycling or reuse. Waste diversion is a management activitythat disposes of waste other than through incineration or the use of landfills. Examples include reuse and recycling. Waste reduction includes both source reduction and waste diversion through reuse or recycling. A waste reduction program encompasses source reduction, reuse, and recycling. Such a program assigns responsibility within the organization for implementation, lists the general actions that will be taken to reduce waste, and describes tracking and review procedures to monitor waste reduction and improve performance. The waste stream is the overall flow of waste from the building to a landfill, incinerator, or other disposal site. Wastewater is the spent or used water from a home, community, farm, or industry that contains dissolved or suspended matter. (Federal Itemediation Technologies Roundtable) GLOSSARY 2C39 EDITION LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 449 EFTA00281988 GLOSSARY Waterless urinals are dry plumbing fixtures that use advanced hydraulic design and a buoyant fluid to maintain sanitary conditions. A water meter measures the volume of water usage. Most commercial building water meters are designed to measure cold potable water. Wave and tidal power systems capture energy from waves and the diurnal flux of tidal power, respectively. The captured energy is commonlyused fordesalination,water pumping,and electricity generation. Wind energy is electricity generated by wind turbines. Window-to-floor ratio (VVFR) is the total area of the window (measured vertically from 30 inches above the finished floor to the top of the glass, multiplied by the width of the glass) divided by the floor area. Xeriscaping is a landscaping method that makes routine irrigation unnecessary. It uses droughtadaptable and low-water plants as well as soil amendments such as compost and mulches to reduce evaporation. 450 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR GREEN INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2009 EDITION EFTA00281989 For personal use only and subject to the sales order agreement terms by (BP 10321654). May NOT be copied or distributed. EFTA00281990 For personal use only and subject to the sales order agreement terms by (BP 10321654). May NOT be copied or distributed. EFTA00281991 For personal use only and subject to the sales order agreement terms by (BP 10321654). May NOT be copied or distributed. EFTA00281992 This reference guide was printed on 100% postconsumer waste paper, processed chlorine free, and printed with non-toxic, soybased inks using100% wind power. By using these materials and production processes, the U.S. Green Building Council saved the following resources: Trees* Solid Waste Liquid Waste Electricity Greenhouse Gases Sulfur & Nitrogen Oxides 83,464 lbs. of virgin wood, equal to 145 trees 13,086 lbs. 122,734 gallons 18,780 kWh 23,789 lbs. 45 lbs. one harvested tree = aprox. 575 lbs 00444 CARBON 0NEUTRAL e en e 'Print EFTA00281993